S7-200 SMART System Manual V2.1

S7-200 SMART ___________________
Preface
___________________
Product overview 1
___________________
Getting started 2
SIMATIC ___________________
Installation 3
___________________
PLC concepts 4
S7
S7-200 SMART ___________________
Programming concepts 5
___________________
PLC device configuration 6
System Manual
___________________
Program instructions 7
___________________
Communication 8
___________________
Libraries 9
___________________
Debugging and
troubleshooting 10
___________________
PID loops and tuning 11
___________________
Open loop motion control 12
___________________
Technical specifications A
___________________
Calculating a power budget B
___________________
Error codes C
___________________
Special memory (SM) and
system symbol names D
___________________
References E
___________________
Ordering information F
09/2015
A5E03822230-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03822230-AC Copyright Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory 07/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of the manual

The S7-200 SMART series is a line of micro-programmable logic controllers (Micro PLCs)
that can control a variety of automation applications. Compact design, low cost, and a
powerful instruction set make the S7-200 SMART a perfect solution for controlling small
applications. The wide variety of S7-200 SMART models and the Windows-based
programming tool give you the flexibility you need to solve your automation problems.
This manual provides information about installing and programming the S7-200 SMART
CPUs and is designed for engineers, programmers, installers, and electricians who have a
general knowledge of programmable logic controllers.
Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of automation and
programmable logic controllers.
Scope of the manual

This manual describes the following products:
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART V2.01
S7-200 SMART CPU firmware release V2.1
For a complete list of the S7-200 SMART products and article numbers described in this
manual, see Technical Specifications (Page 565).
Certification, CE label and other standards

Refer to the technical specifications for more information.
Service and support

In addition to our documentation, we offer our technical expertise on the Internet on the
customer support web site (http://www.siemens.com/automation/).
Contact your Siemens distributor or sales office for assistance in answering any technical
questions, for training, or for ordering S7 products. Because your sales representatives are
technically trained and have the most specific knowledge about your operations, process
and industry, as well as about the individual Siemens products that you are using, they can
provide the fastest and most efficient answers to any problems you might encounter.
S7-200 SMART
System Manual, 09/2015, A5E03822230-AC 3
Preface
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
S7-200 SMART
4 System Manual, 09/2015, A5E03822230-AC
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1 S7-200 SMART CPU ..............................................................................................................18
1.2 S7-200 SMART expansion modules.......................................................................................20
1.3 HMI devices for S7-200 SMART.............................................................................................21
1.4 Communications options ........................................................................................................22
1.5 Programming software ............................................................................................................23
1.6 New features ...........................................................................................................................24
2 Getting started ......................................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 Connecting to the CPU ...........................................................................................................25
2.1.1 Configuring the CPU for communication ................................................................................26
2.1.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................26
2.1.1.2 Establishing the hardware communication connection...........................................................27
2.1.1.3 Setting up communication with the CPU ................................................................................27
2.2 Creating the sample program .................................................................................................29
2.2.1 Network 1: Starting the timer ..................................................................................................30
2.2.2 Network 2: Turning the output on ...........................................................................................31
2.2.3 Network 3: Resetting the timer ...............................................................................................32
2.2.4 Setting the CPU type and version for your project .................................................................33
2.2.5 Saving the sample project ......................................................................................................34
2.3 Downloading the sample program ..........................................................................................35
2.4 Changing the operating mode of the CPU ..............................................................................36
3 Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Guidelines for installing S7-200 SMART devices ...................................................................37
3.2 Power budget ..........................................................................................................................39
3.3 Installation and removal procedures .......................................................................................41
3.3.1 Mounting dimensions for the S7-200 SMART devices ...........................................................41
3.3.2 Installing and removing the CPU ............................................................................................42
3.3.3 Installing and removing an expansion module .......................................................................45
3.3.4 Installing and removing a signal board or battery board.........................................................46
3.3.5 Removing and reinstalling the terminal block connector ........................................................48
3.4 Wiring guidelines.....................................................................................................................49
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
4 PLC concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 55

4.1 Execution of the control logic ................................................................................................. 55
4.1.1 Reading the inputs and writing to the outputs........................................................................ 57
4.1.2 Immediately reading or writing the I/O ................................................................................... 57
4.1.3 Executing the user program ................................................................................................... 58
4.2 Accessing data ....................................................................................................................... 60
4.2.1 Accessing memory areas....................................................................................................... 61
4.2.2 Format for Real numbers ....................................................................................................... 68
4.2.3 Format for strings ................................................................................................................... 68
4.2.4 Assigning a constant value for instructions ............................................................................ 69
4.2.5 Addressing the local and expansion I/O ................................................................................ 69
4.2.6 Using pointers for indirect addressing ................................................................................... 70
4.2.7 Pointer examples ................................................................................................................... 73
4.3 Saving and restoring data ...................................................................................................... 75
4.3.1 Downloading project components .......................................................................................... 75
4.3.2 Uploading project components .............................................................................................. 77
4.3.3 Types of storage .................................................................................................................... 78
4.3.4 Using a memory card ............................................................................................................. 79
4.3.5 Inserting a memory card in the CPU ...................................................................................... 81
4.3.6 Transferring your program with a memory card..................................................................... 81
4.3.7 Restoring data after power on................................................................................................ 84
4.4 Changing the operating mode of the CPU ............................................................................. 84
5 Programming concepts ............................................................................................................................ 85
5.1 Guidelines for designing a PLC system ................................................................................. 85
5.2 Elements of the user program................................................................................................ 87
5.3 Creating your user program ................................................................................................... 90
5.3.1 Earlier versions of STEP 7-Micro/WIN projects ..................................................................... 90
5.3.2 Using STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART user interface .................................................................. 92
5.3.3 Using STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to create your programs ................................................. 93
5.3.4 Using wizards to help you create your control program......................................................... 94
5.3.5 Features of the LAD editor ..................................................................................................... 95
5.3.6 Features of the FBD editor..................................................................................................... 96
5.3.7 Features of the STL editor ..................................................................................................... 96
5.4 Data block (DB) editor ............................................................................................................ 97
5.5 Symbol table ........................................................................................................................ 100
5.6 Variable table ....................................................................................................................... 104
5.7 PLC error reaction ................................................................................................................ 109
5.7.1 Non-fatal errors and I/O errors ............................................................................................. 110
5.7.2 Fatal errors ........................................................................................................................... 111
5.8 Program edit in RUN mode .................................................................................................. 112
5.9 Features for debugging your program ................................................................................. 114
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
6 PLC device configuration ....................................................................................................................... 115

6.1 Configuring the operation of the PLC system .......................................................................115
6.1.1 System block.........................................................................................................................115
6.1.2 Configuring communication ..................................................................................................117
6.1.3 Configuring the digital inputs ................................................................................................119
6.1.4 Configuring the digital outputs ..............................................................................................121
6.1.5 Configuring the retentive ranges...........................................................................................122
6.1.6 Configuring system security ..................................................................................................124
6.1.7 Configuring the startup options .............................................................................................128
6.1.8 Configuring the analog inputs ...............................................................................................129
6.1.9 Reference to the analog inputs technical specifications .......................................................131
6.1.10 Configuring the analog outputs .............................................................................................132
6.1.11 Reference to the analog outputs technical specifications.....................................................133
6.1.12 Configuring the RTD analog inputs.......................................................................................134
6.1.13 Configuring the TC analog inputs .........................................................................................139
6.1.14 Configuring the RS485/RS232 CM01 communications signal board ...................................143
6.1.15 Configuring the BA01 battery signal board ...........................................................................144
6.1.16 Clearing PLC memory...........................................................................................................145
6.1.17 Creating a reset-to-factory-defaults memory card ................................................................147
6.2 High-speed I/O ......................................................................................................................148
7 Program instructions .............................................................................................................................. 149
7.1 Bit logic .................................................................................................................................149
7.1.1 Standard inputs .....................................................................................................................149
7.1.2 Immediate inputs...................................................................................................................151
7.1.3 Logic stack overview .............................................................................................................152
7.1.4 STL logic stack instructions ..................................................................................................154
7.1.5 NOT ......................................................................................................................................156
7.1.6 Positive and negative transition detectors ............................................................................157
7.1.7 Coils: output and output immediate instructions ...................................................................158
7.1.8 Set, reset, set immediate, and reset immediate functions ....................................................159
7.1.9 Set and reset dominant bistable ...........................................................................................160
7.1.10 NOP (No operation) instruction.............................................................................................161
7.1.11 Bit logic input examples ........................................................................................................162
7.1.12 Bit logic output examples ......................................................................................................163
7.2 Clock .....................................................................................................................................165
7.2.1 Read and set real-time clock ................................................................................................165
7.2.2 Read and set real-time clock extended ................................................................................167
7.3 Communication .....................................................................................................................170
7.3.1 GET and PUT (Ethernet) ......................................................................................................170
7.3.2 Transmit and receive (Freeport on RS485/RS232) ..............................................................178
7.3.3 Get port address and set port address (PPI protocol on RS485/RS232) .............................190
7.3.4 Get IP address and set IP address (Ethernet) ......................................................................191
7.4 Compare ...............................................................................................................................192
7.4.1 Compare number values ......................................................................................................192
7.4.2 Compare character strings ...................................................................................................196
7.5 Convert .................................................................................................................................198
7.5.1 Standard conversion instructions..........................................................................................198
7.5.2 ASCII character array conversion .........................................................................................202
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
7.5.3 Number value to ASCII string conversion ............................................................................ 208

7.5.4 ASCII sub-string to number value conversion ..................................................................... 212
7.5.5 Encode and decode ............................................................................................................. 215
7.6 Counters............................................................................................................................... 216
7.6.1 Counter instructions ............................................................................................................. 216
7.6.2 High-speed counter instructions .......................................................................................... 220
7.6.3 Noise reduction for high-speed inputs ................................................................................. 224
7.6.4 High-speed counter programming ....................................................................................... 226
7.6.5 Example initialization sequences for high-speed counters .................................................. 238
7.7 Pulse output ......................................................................................................................... 247
7.7.1 Pulse output instruction (PLS) ............................................................................................. 247
7.7.2 Pulse train output (PTO) ...................................................................................................... 249
7.7.3 Pulse width modulation (PWM) ............................................................................................ 251
7.7.4 Using SM locations to configure and control the PTO/PWM operation ............................... 252
7.7.5 Calculating the profile table values ...................................................................................... 255
7.8 Math ..................................................................................................................................... 259
7.8.1 Add, subtract, multiply, and divide ....................................................................................... 259
7.8.2 Multiply integer to double integer and divide integer with remainder................................... 262
7.8.3 Trigonometry, natural logarithm/exponential, and square root ............................................ 264
7.8.4 Increment and decrement .................................................................................................... 266
7.9 PID ....................................................................................................................................... 268
7.9.1 Using the PID wizard ........................................................................................................... 269
7.9.2 PID algorithm ....................................................................................................................... 274
7.9.3 Converting and normalizing the loop inputs......................................................................... 278
7.9.4 Converting the loop output to a scaled integer value........................................................... 279
7.9.5 Forward- or reverse-acting loops ......................................................................................... 279
7.10 Interrupt ................................................................................................................................ 282
7.10.1 Interrupt instructions ............................................................................................................ 282
7.10.2 Interrupt routine overview and CPU model event support ................................................... 284
7.10.3 Interrupt programming guidelines ........................................................................................ 285
7.10.4 Types of interrupt events that the S7-200 SMART CPU supports ...................................... 287
7.10.5 Interrupt priority, queuing, and example program ................................................................ 288
7.11 Logical operations ................................................................................................................ 293
7.11.1 Invert .................................................................................................................................... 293
7.11.2 AND, OR, and exclusive OR ................................................................................................ 294
7.12 Move .................................................................................................................................... 296
7.12.1 Move byte, word, double word, or real ................................................................................. 296
7.12.2 Block move........................................................................................................................... 297
7.12.3 Swap bytes........................................................................................................................... 298
7.12.4 Move byte immediate (read and write) ................................................................................ 299
7.13 Program control.................................................................................................................... 300
7.13.1 FOR-NEXT loop ................................................................................................................... 300
7.13.2 JMP (jump to label) .............................................................................................................. 301
7.13.3 SCR (sequence control relay) .............................................................................................. 303
7.13.4 END, STOP, and WDR (watchdog timer reset) ................................................................... 312
7.13.5 GET_ERROR (Get non-fatal error code) ............................................................................. 313
7.14 Shift and rotate ..................................................................................................................... 315
7.14.1 Shift and rotate ..................................................................................................................... 315
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
7.14.2 Shift register bit .....................................................................................................................317

7.15 String .....................................................................................................................................320
7.15.1 String (Get length, copy, and concatenate) ..........................................................................320
7.15.2 Copy substring from string ....................................................................................................322
7.15.3 Find string and first character within string ...........................................................................323
7.16 Table .....................................................................................................................................326
7.16.1 Add to table ...........................................................................................................................326
7.16.2 First-in-first-out and last-in-first-out .......................................................................................328
7.16.3 Memory fill .............................................................................................................................330
7.16.4 Table find ..............................................................................................................................331
7.17 Timer .....................................................................................................................................335
7.17.1 Timer instructions..................................................................................................................335
7.17.2 Timer programming tips and examples ................................................................................337
7.17.3 Interval timers .......................................................................................................................344
7.18 Subroutine.............................................................................................................................346
7.18.1 CALL (subroutine) and RET (conditional return) ..................................................................346
8 Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 353
8.1 CPU communication connections .........................................................................................354
8.2 CPU communication ports ....................................................................................................355
8.3 HMIs and communication drivers .........................................................................................355
8.4 Ethernet ................................................................................................................................357
8.4.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................357
8.4.2 TCP/IP protocol.....................................................................................................................357
8.4.3 Local/partner connection ......................................................................................................358
8.4.4 Sample Ethernet network configurations ..............................................................................358
8.4.5 Assigning Internet Protocol (IP) addresses ..........................................................................359
8.4.5.1 Assigning IP addresses to programming and network devices ............................................359
8.4.5.2 Configuring or changing an IP address for a CPU or device in your project ........................362
8.4.5.3 Searching for CPUs and devices on your Ethernet network ................................................369
8.4.6 Locating the Ethernet (MAC) address on the CPU...............................................................370
8.4.7 HMI-to-CPU communication .................................................................................................371
8.5 PROFIBUS............................................................................................................................372
8.5.1 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module ........................................................................................373
8.5.1.1 Distributed Peripheral (DP) standard communications.........................................................373
8.5.1.2 Using the EM DP01 to connect an S7-200 SMART as a DP device ....................................374
8.5.1.3 Configuring the EM DP01 .....................................................................................................375
8.5.1.4 Data consistency...................................................................................................................376
8.5.1.5 Supported configurations ......................................................................................................377
8.5.1.6 Installing the EM DP01 GSD file ...........................................................................................378
8.5.1.7 Configuring the EM DP01 I/O ...............................................................................................379
8.5.1.8 Example of V memory and I/O address area .......................................................................382
8.5.1.9 User program considerations ................................................................................................384
8.5.1.10 LED status indicators for the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP.......................................................386
8.5.1.11 Using HMIs and S7-CPUs with the EM DP01 ......................................................................387
8.5.1.12 Device database file: GSD ....................................................................................................388
8.5.1.13 PROFIBUS DP communications to a CPU example program .............................................392
8.5.1.14 Reference to the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module technical specifications ......................394
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
8.6 RS485 .................................................................................................................................. 395

8.6.1 PPI protocol.......................................................................................................................... 395
8.6.2 Baud rate and network address ........................................................................................... 396
8.6.2.1 Definition of baud rate and network address ....................................................................... 396
8.6.2.2 Setting the baud rate and network address for the S7-200 SMART CPU ........................... 397
8.6.3 Sample RS485 network configurations ................................................................................ 399
8.6.3.1 Single-master PPI networks................................................................................................. 399
8.6.3.2 Multi-master and multi-slave PPI networks .......................................................................... 399
8.6.4 Building your network ........................................................................................................... 400
8.6.4.1 General guidelines ............................................................................................................... 400
8.6.4.2 Determining the distances, transmission rates, and cable lengths for your network........... 401
8.6.4.3 Repeaters on the network .................................................................................................... 401
8.6.4.4 Selection of the network cable ............................................................................................. 402
8.6.4.5 Connector pin assignments ................................................................................................. 402
8.6.4.6 Biasing and terminating the network cable .......................................................................... 403
8.6.4.7 Biasing and terminating the CM01 signal board .................................................................. 405
8.6.4.8 Using HMI devices on your RS485 network ........................................................................ 405
8.6.5 Freeport mode...................................................................................................................... 406
8.6.5.1 Creating user-defined protocols with Freeport mode........................................................... 406
8.6.5.2 Using the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable and Freeport mode with RS232 devices ............ 409
8.7 RS232 .................................................................................................................................. 410
9 Libraries ................................................................................................................................................. 411
9.1 Creating a user-defined library of instructions ..................................................................... 411
9.2 USS library instructions ........................................................................................................ 413
9.2.1 USS communication overview ............................................................................................. 413
9.2.1.1 USS protocol overview ......................................................................................................... 413
9.2.1.2 Requirements for using the USS protocol ........................................................................... 414
9.2.1.3 Calculating the time required for communicating with the drive .......................................... 415
9.2.2 USS program instructions .................................................................................................... 416
9.2.2.1 Using the USS protocol instructions .................................................................................... 416
9.2.2.2 USS_INIT instruction ............................................................................................................ 417
9.2.2.3 USS_CTRL instruction ......................................................................................................... 419
9.2.2.4 USS_RPM_x instruction ....................................................................................................... 422
9.2.2.5 USS_WPM_x instruction ...................................................................................................... 425
9.2.2.6 USS protocol execution error codes .................................................................................... 428
9.2.2.7 USS protocol example program ........................................................................................... 429
9.3 Modbus library instructions .................................................................................................. 431
9.3.1 Modbus communication overview ........................................................................................ 431
9.3.1.1 Modbus library features ....................................................................................................... 431
9.3.1.2 Initialization and execution time for Modbus protocol .......................................................... 433
9.3.1.3 Modbus addressing .............................................................................................................. 434
9.3.2 Modbus RTU master ............................................................................................................ 436
9.3.2.1 Using the Modbus master instructions ................................................................................. 436
9.3.2.2 MBUS_CTRL instruction (initialize master) .......................................................................... 437
9.3.2.3 MBUS_MSG instruction ....................................................................................................... 438
9.3.2.4 Modbus master execution error codes ................................................................................ 442
9.3.3 Modbus RTU slave .............................................................................................................. 443
9.3.3.1 Using the Modbus slave instructions ................................................................................... 443
9.3.3.2 MBUS_INIT instruction (initialize slave) ............................................................................... 445
9.3.3.3 MBUS_SLAVE instruction .................................................................................................... 446
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
9.3.3.4 Modbus slave execution error codes ....................................................................................448

9.3.4 Modbus master example program ........................................................................................448
9.3.5 Modbus advanced user information......................................................................................450
10 Debugging and troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 453
10.1 Debugging your program ......................................................................................................453
10.1.1 Bookmark functions ..............................................................................................................453
10.1.2 Cross reference table ...........................................................................................................454
10.2 Displaying program status ....................................................................................................456
10.2.1 Displaying status in the program editor ................................................................................456
10.2.2 Configuring the STL status options.......................................................................................459
10.3 Using a status chart to monitor your program ......................................................................460
10.4 Forcing specific values .........................................................................................................462
10.5 Writing and forcing outputs in STOP mode ..........................................................................463
10.6 How to execute a limited number of scans ...........................................................................464
10.7 Hardware troubleshooting guide ...........................................................................................465
11 PID loops and tuning ............................................................................................................................. 467
11.1 PID loop definition table ........................................................................................................468
11.2 Prerequisites .........................................................................................................................472
11.3 Auto-hysteresis and auto-deviation ......................................................................................472
11.4 Auto-tune sequence ..............................................................................................................473
11.5 Exception conditions .............................................................................................................475
11.6 Notes concerning PV out-of-range (result code 3) ...............................................................476
11.7 PID Tune control panel .........................................................................................................476
12 Open loop motion control ....................................................................................................................... 481
12.1 Using the PWM output ..........................................................................................................482
12.1.1 Configuring the PWM output.................................................................................................482
12.1.2 PWMx_RUN subroutine ........................................................................................................483
12.2 Using motion control .............................................................................................................485
12.2.1 Maximum and start/stop speeds ...........................................................................................485
12.2.2 Entering the acceleration and deceleration times.................................................................486
12.2.3 Configuring the motion profiles .............................................................................................487
12.3 Features of motion control ....................................................................................................490
12.4 Programming an Axis of Motion............................................................................................492
12.5 Configuring an Axis of Motion ...............................................................................................493
12.6 Subroutines created by the Motion wizard for the Axis of Motion ........................................506
12.6.1 Guidelines for using the Motion subroutines ........................................................................507
12.6.2 AXISx_CTRL subroutine .......................................................................................................507
12.6.3 AXISx_MAN subroutine ........................................................................................................509
12.6.4 AXISx_GOTO subroutine ......................................................................................................510
12.6.5 AXISx_RUN subroutine ........................................................................................................512
12.6.6 AXISx_RSEEK subroutine ....................................................................................................513
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
12.6.7 AXISx_LDOFF subroutine.................................................................................................... 514

12.6.8 AXISx_LDPOS subroutine ................................................................................................... 515
12.6.9 AXISx_SRATE subroutine ................................................................................................... 516
12.6.10 AXISx_DIS subroutine ......................................................................................................... 517
12.6.11 AXISx_CFG subroutine ........................................................................................................ 518
12.6.12 AXISx_CACHE subroutine ................................................................................................... 519
12.6.13 AXISx_RDPOS subroutine................................................................................................... 520
12.6.14 AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine................................................................................................. 521
12.7 Using the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine to read the absolute position from a SINAMICS
servo drive............................................................................................................................ 523
12.7.1 AXISx_ABSPOS and AXISx_LDPOS subroutines usage examples ................................... 523
12.7.2 Interconnections ................................................................................................................... 524
12.7.3 Commissioning..................................................................................................................... 525
12.7.3.1 Control mode........................................................................................................................ 525
12.7.3.2 Setpoint pulse input channel ................................................................................................ 525
12.7.3.3 Setpoint pulse train input format .......................................................................................... 525
12.7.3.4 Common engineering units basis......................................................................................... 525
12.7.4 Important facts to know ........................................................................................................ 528
12.8 Axis of Motion example programs........................................................................................ 529
12.8.1 Axis of Motion simple relative move (cut-to-length application) example ............................ 529
12.8.2 Axis of Motion AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_RUN, AXISx_SEEK, and AXISx_MAN example ....... 531
12.9 Monitoring the Axis of Motion............................................................................................... 535
12.9.1 Displaying and controlling the operation of the Axis of Motion ............................................ 537
12.9.2 Displaying and modifying the configuration of the Axis of Motion ....................................... 542
12.9.3 Displaying the profile configuration for the Axis of Motion ................................................... 542
12.9.4 Error codes for the Axis of Motion (WORD at SMW620, SMW670, or SMW720) ............... 544
12.9.5 Error codes for the Motion instruction (seven LS bits of SMB634, SMB684, or
SMB734) .............................................................................................................................. 545
12.10 Advanced topics ................................................................................................................... 547
12.10.1 Understanding the configuration/profile table for the Axis of Motion ................................... 547
12.10.2 Special memory (SM) locations for the Axis of Motion ........................................................ 556
12.11 Understanding the RP Seek modes of the Axis of Motion ................................................... 559
12.11.1 Selecting the work zone location to eliminate backlash ...................................................... 564
A Technical specifications ......................................................................................................................... 565
A.1 General specifications .......................................................................................................... 565
A.1.1 General technical specifications .......................................................................................... 565
A.2 S7-200 SMART CPUs ......................................................................................................... 570
A.2.1 CPU ST20 and CPU SR20 .................................................................................................. 570
A.2.1.1 General specifications and features..................................................................................... 570
A.2.1.2 Digital inputs and outputs..................................................................................................... 573
A.2.1.3 CPU ST20 and CPU SR20 wiring diagrams ........................................................................ 575
A.2.2 CPU ST30 and CPU SR30 .................................................................................................. 577
A.2.2.3 CPU ST30 and CPU SR30 wiring diagrams ........................................................................ 582
A.2.3 CPU ST40, CPU SR40, and CPU CR40 ............................................................................. 584
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
A.2.3.3 CPU ST40, SR40 and CR40 wiring diagrams ......................................................................590

A.2.4 CPU ST60, CPU SR60, and CPU CR60 ..............................................................................593
A.2.4.1 General specifications and features .....................................................................................593
A.2.4.2 Digital inputs and outputs .....................................................................................................596
A.2.4.3 CPU ST60, SR60 and CR60 wiring diagrams ......................................................................599
A.2.5 Wiring diagrams for sink and source input, and relay output ...............................................602
A.3 Digital inputs and outputs expansion modules (EMs)...........................................................603
A.3.1 EM DE08 digital input specifications.....................................................................................603
A.3.2 EM DT08 and EM DR08 digital output specifications ...........................................................604
A.3.3 EM DT16, EM DR16, EM DT32, and EM DR32 digital input/output specifications ..............607
A.4 Analog inputs and outputs expansion modules (EMs) .........................................................613
A.4.1 EM AE04 and EM AE08 analog input specifications ............................................................613
A.4.2 EM AQ02 and EM AQ04 analog output module specifications ............................................616
A.4.3 EM AM03 and EM AM06 analog input/output module specifications ...................................618
A.4.4 Step response of the analog inputs ......................................................................................623
A.4.5 Sample time and update times for the analog inputs ...........................................................623
A.4.6 Measurement ranges of the analog inputs for voltage and current (SB and EM) ................624
A.4.7 Measurement ranges of the analog outputs for voltage and current (SB and EM) ..............625
A.5 Thermocouple and RTD expansion modules (EMs).............................................................626
A.5.1 Thermocouple expansion modules (EMs) ............................................................................626
A.5.1.1 EM AT04 thermocouple specifications .................................................................................626
A.5.2 RTD expansion modules (EMs) ............................................................................................632
A.6 Digital signal boards..............................................................................................................637
A.6.1 SB DT04 digital input/output specifications ..........................................................................637
A.7 Analog signal boards ............................................................................................................640
A.7.1 SB AE01 analog input specifications ....................................................................................640
A.7.2 SB AQ01 analog output specifications .................................................................................642
A.8 RS485/RS232 signal boards ................................................................................................644
A.8.1 SB RS485/RS232 specifications ..........................................................................................644
A.9 Battery board signal boards (SBs) ........................................................................................646
A.9.1 SB BA01 Battery board .........................................................................................................646
A.10 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module ........................................................................................648
A.10.1 S7-200 SMART CPUs that support the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module .........................649
A.10.2 Connector pin assignments for EM DP01 ............................................................................650
A.10.3 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module wiring diagram................................................................651
B Calculating a power budget ................................................................................................................... 653
B.1 Power budget ........................................................................................................................653
B.2 Calculating a sample power requirement .............................................................................655
B.3 Calculating your power requirement .....................................................................................656
C Error codes ............................................................................................................................................ 657
C.1 PLC non-fatal error codes .....................................................................................................657
C.2 PLC non-fatal error SM flags ................................................................................................660
C.3 PLC fatal error codes ............................................................................................................661
C.4 Timestamp mismatch ............................................................................................................663
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
D Special memory (SM) and system symbol names ................................................................................. 665

D.1 SM (Special Memory) overview ........................................................................................... 665
D.2 SMB0: System status ........................................................................................................... 667
D.3 SMB1: Instruction execution status...................................................................................... 668
D.4 SMB2: Freeport receive character ....................................................................................... 669
D.5 SMB3: Freeport character error ........................................................................................... 669
D.6 SMB4: Interrupt queue overflow, run-time program error, interrupts enabled, freeport
transmitter idle, and value forced ......................................................................................... 670
D.7 SMB5: I/O error status ......................................................................................................... 670
D.8 SMB6-SMB7: CPU ID, error status, and digital I/O points ................................................... 671
D.9 SMB8-SMB19: I/O module ID and errors ............................................................................ 672
D.10 SMW22-SMW26: Scan times .............................................................................................. 673
D.11 SMB28-SMB29: Signal board ID and errors ........................................................................ 673
D.12 SMB30: (port 0) and SMB130: (port 1) ................................................................................ 674
D.13 SMB34-SMB35: Time intervals for timed interrupts............................................................. 674
D.14 SMB36-45 (HSC0), SMB46-55 (HSC1), SMB56-65 (HSC2), SMB136-145 (HSC3):
high-speed counters ............................................................................................................ 675
D.15 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179, and SMB566-SMB579: PTO0,
PWM0, PTO1, PWM1, PTO2, and PWM2 high-speed outputs ........................................... 678
D.16 SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194: Receive message control..................................... 681
D.17 SMW98: I/O expansion bus communication errors ............................................................. 683
D.18 SMW100-SMW114 System alarms ..................................................................................... 684
D.19 SMB130: Freeport control for port 1 (See SMB30).............................................................. 685
D.20 SMB136-SMB145: HSC3 high-speed counter..................................................................... 685
D.21 SMB186-SMB194: Receive message control (See SMB86-SMB94) .................................. 685
D.22 SMB480-SMB515: Data log status ...................................................................................... 685
D.23 SMB600-SMB749: Axis (0, 1, and 2) open loop motion control .......................................... 686
D.24 SMB650-SMB699: Axis 1 open loop motion control (See SMB600-SMB740) .................... 687
D.25 SMB700-SMB749: Axis 2 open loop motion control (See SMB600-SMB740) .................... 687
D.26 SMB1000-SMB1049: CPU hardware/firmware ID ............................................................... 688
D.27 SMB1050-SMB1099: SB (signal board) hardware/firmware ID ........................................... 688
D.28 SMB1100-SMB1399: EM (expansion module) hardware/firmware ID ................................ 689
D.29 SMB1400-SMB1699: EM (expansion module) module-specific data .................................. 691
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
E References ............................................................................................................................................ 693

E.1 Often-used special memory bits ...........................................................................................693
E.2 Interrupt events in priority order ............................................................................................694
E.3 High-speed counter summary...............................................................................................695
E.4 Instructions............................................................................................................................696
E.5 Memory ranges and features ................................................................................................703
F Ordering information .............................................................................................................................. 705
F.1 CPU modules ........................................................................................................................705
F.2 Expansion modules (EMs) and signal boards (SBs) ............................................................705
F.3 Programming software ..........................................................................................................706
F.4 Communication .....................................................................................................................706
F.5 Spare parts and other hardware ...........................................................................................706
F.6 Human Machine Interface devices .......................................................................................708
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 709
S7-200 SMART
Table of contents
S7-200 SMART
Product overview 1
The S7-200 SMART series of micro-programmable logic controllers (Micro PLCs) can control
a wide variety of devices to support your automation needs.
The CPU monitors inputs and changes outputs as controlled by the user program, which can
include Boolean logic, counting, timing, complex math operations, and communications with
other intelligent devices. The compact design, flexible configuration, and powerful instruction
set combine to make the S7-200 SMART a perfect solution for controlling a wide variety of
applications.
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.1 S7-200 SMART CPU

The CPU combines a microprocessor, an integrated power supply, input circuits, and output
circuits in a compact housing to create a powerful Micro PLC. After you have downloaded
your program, the CPU contains the logic required to monitor and control the input and
output devices in your application.
LEDs for the I/O

Terminal connectors
Ethernet communication
port
Clip for installation on a
standard (DIN) rail
Ethernet status LEDs
(under door): LINK, Rx/Tx
Status LEDs: RUN, STOP
and ERROR
RS485 Communication
port
Optional signal board
(Standard models only)
Memory card connection
(under door)
The CPU provides different models with a diversity of features and capabilities that help you
create effective solutions for your varied applications. The different models of CPUs are
shown below. For detailed information about a specific CPU, see the technical specifications
(Page 570).
Table 1- 1 S7-200 SMART CPUs
CR40 CR60 SR20 ST20 SR30 ST30 SR40 ST40 SR60 ST60
Compact, non-expandable X X
Standard, expandable X X X X X X X X
Relay output X X X X X X
Transistor output (DC) X X X X
I/O points (built-in) 40 60 20 20 30 30 40 40 60 60
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
Table 1- 2 Compact non-expandable CPUs
Features CPU CR40 CPU CR60

Dimensions: W x H x D (mm) 125 x 100 x 81 175 x 100 x 81
User memory Program 12 Kbytes 12 Kbytes
User data 8 Kbytes 8 Kbytes
Retentive 10 Kbytes max.1 10 Kbytes max.1
On-board digital I/O Inputs 24 DI 36 DI
Outputs 16 DQ Relay 24 DQ Relay
Expansion modules None None

Signal board None None
High-speed counters 4 at 100 K Hz single phase 4 at 100 K Hz single phase
or or
2 at 50 K Hz A/B phase 2 at 50 K Hz A/B phase
PID loops 8 8
Real-time clock with 7-day back-up No No
1 You can configure areas of V memory, M memory, C memory (current values), and portions of T memory (current val-
ues on retentive timers) to be retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.
Table 1- 3 Standard expandable CPUs
Features CPU SR20, CPU CPU SR30, CPU CPU SR40, CPU CPU SR60, CPU
ST20 ST30 ST40 ST60
Dimensions: W x H x D (mm) 90 x 100 x 81 110 x 100 x 81 125 x 100 x 81 175 x 100 x 81
User memory Program 12 Kbytes 18 Kbytes 24 Kbytes 30 Kbytes
User data 8 Kbytes 12 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 20 Kbytes
Retentive 10 Kbytes max.1 10 Kbytes max.1 10 Kbytes max.1 10 Kbytes max.1
On-board digital I/O Inputs 12 DI 18 DI 24 DI 36 DI
Outputs 8 DQ 12 DQ 16 DQ 24 DQ
Expansion modules 6 max. 6 max. 6 max. 6 max.
Signal board 1 1 1 1
High-speed counters 4 at 200 K Hz 4 at 200 K Hz sin- 4 at 200 K Hz sin- 4 at 200 K Hz sin-
single phase gle phase gle phase gle phase
or or or or
2 at 100 K Hz A/B 2 at 100 K Hz A/B 2 at 100 K Hz A/B 2 at 100 K Hz A/B
phase phase phase phase
Pulse outputs 2 2 at 100 KHz 3 at 100 K Hz 3 at 100 KHz 3 at 100 KHz
PID loops 8 8 8 8
Real-time clock with 7-day back-up Yes Yes Yes Yes
ues on retentive timers) to be retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.
2 The specified maximum pulse frequency is possible only for CPU models with transistor outputs. Pulse output operation
is not recommended for CPU models with relay outputs.
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.2 S7-200 SMART expansion modules
Refer to the technical specifications (Page 565) for the power requirements of the CPU and
the expansion modules. Use the worksheets in Appendix B, Calculating a power budget
(Page 656) to calculate your power budget.
1.2 S7-200 SMART expansion modules

To better solve your application requirements, the S7-200 SMART family includes a wide
variety of expansion modules, signal boards, and a communications module. You can use
these expansion modules with the standard CPU models (SR20, ST20, SR30, ST30, SR40,
ST40, SR60 or ST60) to add additional functionality to the CPU. The following table provides
a list of the expansion modules that are currently available. For detailed information about a
specific module, see the technical specifications (Page 565).
Table 1- 4 Expansion modules and signal boards
Type Input only Output only Combination In/Out Other

Digital expan- 8 x DC In 8 x DC Out 8 x DC In / 8 x DC Out
sion module
8 x Relay Out 8 x DC In / 8 x Relay Out
16 x DC In / 16 x DC Out
16 x DC In / 16 x Relay Out
Analog expan- 4 x Analog In 2 x Analog Out 4 x Analog In / 2 x Analog Out
sion modules
8 x Analog In 4 x Analog Out 2 x Analog In / 1 x Analog Out
2 x RTD In
4 x RTD In
4 x TC In
Signal boards 1 x Analog In 1 x Analog Out 2 x DC In x 2 x DC Out RS485/RS232
Battery Board
Table 1- 5 Communication expansion modules
Module Type Description

Communication expansion module PROFIBUS DP SMART module EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP
(EM)
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.3 HMI devices for S7-200 SMART
1.3 HMI devices for S7-200 SMART

The S7-200 SMART supports Comfort HMIs, SMART HMIs, Basic HMIs and Micro HMIs.
The TD400C and the SMART LINE Touch Panel are shown below. Refer to Appendix C,
Human Machine Interface (Page 705) for a complete list of supported devices and article
numbers.
Table 1- 6 HMI devices
Text Display unit: The TD400C is a display device that can be connected to
the CPU. Using the Text Display wizard, you can easily program your CPU
to display text messages and other data pertaining to your application.
The TD400C device provides a low cost interface to your application by
allowing you to view, monitor, and change the process variables pertaining
to your application.
SMART HMIs: The SMART LINE Touch Panel provides operating and
monitoring functions for small-scale machines and plants. Short configura-
tion and commissioning times, their configuration in WinCC flexible (ASIA
version), and a double-port Ethernet/RS485 interface form the highlights of
these HMIs.
The Text Display wizard in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART helps you configure Text Display
messages quickly and easily for the TD400C. To start the Text Display wizard, select the
"Text Display" command from the "Tools" menu.
The SIMATIC Text Display (TD) User Manual can be downloaded from the Siemens
customer support web site.
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.4 Communications options
1.4 Communications options

The S7-200 SMART offers several types of communication between CPUs, programming
devices, and HMIs:
Ethernet:
Exchange of data from the programming device to the CPU
Exchange of data between HMIs and the CPU
S7 peer-to-peer communication with other S7-200 SMART CPUs
PROFIBUS:
High speed communications for distributed I/O (up to 12 Mbps)
One bus master connects to many I/O devices (supports 126 addressable devices).
Exchange of data between the master and I/O devices
EM DP01 module is a PROFIBUS I/O device.
RS485:
Supports a total of 126 addressable devices (32 devices per network segment)
Supports PPI (point-to-point interface) protocol
Exchange of data between devices and the CPU using Freeport (XMT/RCV
instructions)
RS232:
Supports a point-to-point connection to one device
Supports PPI protocol
instructions)
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.5 Programming software
1.5 Programming software
STEP7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a

user-friendly environment to develop,
edit, and monitor the logic needed to
control your application.
At the top is a quick access toolbar for
frequent tasks, followed by menus for
all common functions. At the left is the
project tree and navigation bar for
easy access to components and in-
structions. The program editor and
other components that you open oc-
cupy the remainder of the user inter-
face.
STEP7-Micro/WIN SMART provides
three program editors (LAD, FBD, and
STL) for convenience and efficiency in
developing the control program for
your application.
To help you find the information you need, STEP7-Micro/WIN SMART provides an extensive
online help system.
Computer requirements
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART runs on a personal computer. Your computer should meet the
following minimum requirements:
Operating system: Windows XP SP3 (32 bit only), Windows 7 (both 32 bit and 64 bits
supported)
At least 350M bytes of free hard disk space
Mouse (recommended)
Installing STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART

Insert the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer or
contact your Siemens distributor or sales office to download STEP7-Micro/WIN SMART from
the customer support web site (Page 3). Installation starts automatically and prompts you
through the installation process. Refer to the Readme file for more information about
installing STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART.
Note
To install STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART on a Windows XP or Windows 7 operating system, you
must log in with Administrator privileges.
S7-200 SMART
Product overview
1.6 New features
1.6 New features

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART V2.1 and the S7-200 SMART V2.1 CPUs introduce the following
new features:
New modules:
EM DP01: intelligent expansion module that supports MPI protocol and PROFIBUS
DP V0, V1 as a slave
EM AM03: analog expansion module with two analog inputs and one analog output
EM AR04: analog expansion module with four RTD input channels
EM AE08: analog expansion module with eight analog input channels
EM AQ04: analog expansion module with four analog output channels
SB AE01: signal board with one analog input channel
Enhancement of the PLS instruction to work with PTO (Pulse Train Output) functions as
well as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) functions
Performance enhancements
S7-200 SMART
Getting started 2
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART makes it easy for you to program your CPU. In just a few short
steps using a simple example, you can learn how to create a user program that you can
download and run on your CPU.
All you need for this example is an Ethernet cable, a CPU, and a programming device
running the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART programming software.
2.1 Connecting to the CPU

Connecting your CPU is easy. For this example, you only need to connect power to your
CPU and then connect the Ethernet communication cable between your programming device
and the CPU.
Connecting power to the CPU
WARNING
Ensure power is off prior to installing, wiring or removing devices
Before you install or remove any electrical device, ensure that the power to that equipment
has been turned off.
Attempts to install or connect the wiring for the CPU or related equipment with power
applied could cause electric shock or faulty operation of equipment. Failure to disable all
power to the CPU and related equipment during installation or removal procedures could
result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the CPU is disabled
before attempting to install or remove the CPU or related equipment.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
Connect the CPU to a power source. The following figure shows the wiring connections for
either a DC or an AC model of the CPU.
DC installation AC installation
2.1.1 Configuring the CPU for communication
2.1.1.1 Overview
A CPU can communicate with a

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART programming de-
vice on an Ethernet network.
Consider the following when setting up communications between a CPU and a programming
device:
Configuration/Setup: No hardware configuration is required for a single CPU. If you want
multiple CPU's on the same network, then you must change the default IP addresses to
new, unique IP addresses.
No Ethernet switch is required for one-to-one communications; an Ethernet switch is
required for more than two devices in a network.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.1.1.2 Establishing the hardware communication connection

The Ethernet interfaces establish the physical connections between a programming device
and a CPU. Since Auto-Cross-Over functionality is built into the CPU, either a standard or
crossover Ethernet cable can be used for the interface. An Ethernet switch is not required to
connect a programming device directly to a CPU.
Follow the steps below to create the hardware connection between a programming device
and a CPU:
1. Install the CPU.
2. Remove the RJ45 connection cover from the Ethernet port. Retain the cover for reuse.
3. Plug the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on top of the CPU as shown below.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the programming device.
Ethernet port
2.1.1.3 Setting up communication with the CPU

From STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, use one of the following methods to display the
"Communications" dialog for configuring communication to the CPU.
From the project tree, double-click the "Communications" node.
Click the "Communications" button from the navigation bar.
Select "Communications" from the Component drop-down list in the Windows area of the
View menu ribbon strip.
The "Communication" dialog provides two methods of selecting the CPU to be accessed:
Click the "Find CPUs" button to have STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART search your local
network for CPUs. The IP address of each CPU found on the network is listed under
"Found CPUs".
Click the "Add CPU ..." button to manually enter the access information (IP address and
so forth) for a CPU that you wish to access. The IP address for each CPU, manually
added with this method, is listed under "Added CPUs" and is retained.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
For "Found CPUs" (CPUs located on your local

network), use the "Communications dialog" to
connect with your CPU:
Select TCP/IP for your network interface card.
Click the "Find CPUs" button to display all
operational CPUs ("Found CPUs") on the local
Ethernet network. All CPUs have a default IP
address. See the Note below.
Highlight a CPU, and then click "OK".
For "Added CPUs" (CPUs on the local or remote

networks), use the "Communications dialog" to
connect with your CPU:
Select TCP/IP for your network interface card.
Click the "Add CPU" button to do one of the
following:
Enter the IP address of a CPU that is ac-
cessible from the programming device, but
is not on the local network.
Enter the IP address of a CPU directly that
is on the local network.
All CPUs have a default IP address. See the
Note below.
After you have established communication with

the CPU, you are ready to create and download
the example program.
To download all project components, click the
Download button from the Transfer area of the File
or PLC menu ribbon strip, or alternatively press
the shortcut key combination CTRL+D.
If STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART does not find your

CPU, check the settings for the communications
parameters and repeat these steps.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.2 Creating the sample program
Note
The CPU list will show all of the CPUs regardless of Ethernet network class and subnet.
To make a connection to your CPU, your network interface card (NIC) and the CPU must be
on the same class of network and on the same subnet. You can either set up your network
interface card to match the default IP address of the CPU, or you can change the IP address
of the CPU to match the network class and subnet of your network interface card.
See the "Configuring or changing an IP address for a CPU or device in your project" for
information about how to accomplish this.

Entering this example of a control program will help you understand how easy it is to use
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART. This program uses six instructions in three networks to create a
very simple, self-starting timer that resets itself.
For this example, you use the Ladder (LAD) editor to enter the instructions for the program.
The following example shows the complete program in both LAD and Statement List (STL).
The description column explains the logic for each network. The timing diagram shows the
operation of the program. There are no network comments in the STL program.
Table 2- 1 Sample program for getting started with STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
LAD/FBD STL Description

Network 1 10 ms timer T33 times out after (100 x 10 ms = 1 s)
LDN M0.0 M0.0 pulse is too fast to monitor with Status view.
TON T33, +100
Network 2 Comparison becomes true at a rate that is visible

LDW>= T33, +40 with Status view. Turn on M10.0 after (40 x 10 ms =
= M10.0 0.4 s) for a 40% OFF / 60% ON waveform.
Network 3 T33 (bit) pulse is too fast to monitor with Status view.
LD T33 Reset the timer through M0.0 after the (100 x 10 ms
= M0.0 = 1 s) period.
Timing diagram:
T33 (current)
Current = 100
Current = 40
T33 (bit) and M0.0
M10.0
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
Notice the project tree and the pro-

gram editor. You use the project tree
to insert instructions into the networks
of the program editor by dragging and
dropping the instructions from the
"Instructions" portion of the Project
tree to the networks.
The Program Block folder in the pro-
ject tree contains all of the blocks of
your program.
The program editor toolbar icons pro-
vide shortcuts to PLC commands and
programming operation.
After you enter and save the program, you can download the program to the CPU.
2.2.1 Network 1: Starting the timer
Network 1: Starting the timer
When M0.0 is off (0), this contact turns

on and provides power flow to start
the timer.
To enter the contact for M0.0:

1. Either double-click the "Bit Logic" icon or click the plus sign (+) to display the bit logic
instructions.
2. Select the "Normally Closed" contact.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the contact onto the first network.
4. Enter the following address for the contact: M0.0
5. Press the Return key to enter the address for the contact.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
To enter the timer instruction for T33:

1. Double-click the "Timers" icon to display the timer instructions.
2. Select the "TON" (on-delay timer) instruction.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the timer onto the first network.
4. Enter the following timer number for the timer: T33
5. Press the Return key to enter the timer number and to move the focus to the preset time
(PT) parameter.
6. Enter the following value for the preset time: +100.
7. Press the Return key to enter the value.
2.2.2 Network 2: Turning the output on
Network 2: Turning the output on
When the timer value for T33 is great-

er than or equal to 40 (40 times
10 milliseconds, or 0.4 seconds), the
contact provides power flow to turn on
output M10.0 of the CPU.
To enter the Compare instruction:

1. Double-click the Compare icon to display the compare instructions. Select the ">=I"
instruction (greater-than-or-equal-to-integer).
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the compare instruction onto the second
network.
3. Click "???" above the contact and enter the address for the timer value: T33
4. Press the Return key to enter the timer number and to move the focus to the other value
to be compared with the timer value.
5. Enter the following value to be compared with the timer value: +40
6. Press the Return key to enter the value.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
To enter the instruction for turning on output M10.0:

1. Double-click the Bit Logic icon to display the bit logic instructions and select the output
coil.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the coil onto the second network.
3. Click "???" above the coil and enter the following address: M10.0
4. Press the Return key to enter the address for the coil.
2.2.3 Network 3: Resetting the timer
Network 3: Resetting the timer
When the timer reaches the preset

value (100) and turns the timer bit on,
the contact for T33 turns on. Power
flow from this contact turns on the
M0.0 memory location. Because the
timer is enabled by a Normally Closed
contact for M0.0, changing the state of
M0.0 from off (0) to on (1) resets the
timer.
To enter the contact for the timer bit of T33:

1. Select the "Normally Open" contact from the bit logic instructions.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the contact onto the third network.
3. Click "???" above the contact and enter the address of the timer bit: T33
4. Press the Return key to enter the address for the contact.
To enter the coil for turning on M0.0:
1. Select the output coil from the bit logic instructions.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the output coil onto the third network.
3. Click "???" above the coil and enter the following address: M0.0
4. Press the Return key to enter the address for the coil.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.2.4 Setting the CPU type and version for your project
Configure your project for the CPU and version matching your physical CPU. If the project is
not configured for the correct CPU and CPU version, then the download could fail or the
program may not run.
To select your CPU, click the "CPU" field under the "Module" column to display the
dropdown list button, and select your CPU from the dropdown list. Using the same
procedure, select your CPU version in the "Version" column.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.2.5 Saving the sample project
Saving the sample project

After entering the three networks of instructions, you have finished entering the program.
When you save the program, you create a project that includes the CPU type and other
parameters. To save the project in a file name and location that you specify:
1. Click the down arrow under the Save button from the Operations area of the File menu
ribbon strip to display the Save As button.
2. Click the Save As button and provide a filename for saving your project.
3. Enter a name for the project in the "Save As" dialog.

4. Browse to a location where you want to save your project.
5. Click "Save" to save the project.
After saving the project, you can download the program to the CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.3 Downloading the sample program
2.3 Downloading the sample program
To download all project compo-

nents, click the "Download" button
from the "Transfer" area of the
File or PLC menu ribbon strip, or
alternatively press the shortcut
key combination "CTRL+D".
Click the Download dialog "Down-
load" button.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART cop-
ies the complete program or pro-
gram components that you
selected to the CPU.
If your CPU is in RUN mode, a dialog prompts you to place the CPU in STOP mode. Clicking
"Yes" sets the CPU to STOP mode.
Note
Each project is associated with a CPU type. If the project type does not match the CPU to
which you are connected, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART indicates a mismatch and prompts
you to take an action.
S7-200 SMART
Getting started
2.4 Changing the operating mode of the CPU

The CPU has two modes of operation: STOP mode and RUN mode. The status LEDs on the
front of the CPU indicates the current mode of operation. In STOP mode, the CPU is not
executing the program, and you can download program blocks. In RUN mode, the CPU is
executing the program; however, you can download program blocks.
Placing the CPU in RUN mode

1. Click the "RUN" button on either the PLC menu ribbon strip or on the program editor
toolbar:
2. When prompted, click "OK" to change the operating mode of the CPU.
You can monitor the program in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART by clicking the "Program Status"
button from the "Debug" menu ribbon strip, or from the program editor toolbar.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART displays the values for the instructions.
Placing the CPU in STOP mode

To stop the program, click the "STOP" button and acknowledge the prompt to place the
CPU in STOP mode. You can also place a STOP instruction in your program logic to put the
CPU in STOP mode.
S7-200 SMART
Installation 3
3.1 Guidelines for installing S7-200 SMART devices
The S7-200 SMART equipment is designed to be easy to install. You can install the
S7-200 SMART either on a panel or on a standard DIN rail, and you can orient the
S7-200 SMART either horizontally or vertically. The small size of the S7-200 SMART allows
you to make efficient use of space.
WARNING
Safety requirements for installing S7-200 SMART PLCs
S7-200 SMART PLCs are Open Type Controllers. You must install the PLC in a housing,
cabinet, or electric control room. Limit entry to the housing, cabinet, or electric control room
to authorized personnel.
Failure to follow these installation requirements could result in death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow these requirements when installing the PLC.
Separate the devices from heat, high voltage, and electrical noise
As a general rule for laying out the devices of your system, always separate the devices that
generate high voltage and high electrical noise from the low-voltage, logic-type devices such
as the PLC.
When configuring the layout of the PLC inside your panel, consider the heat-generating
devices and locate the electronic-type devices in the cooler areas of your cabinet. Reducing
the exposure to a high-temperature environment will extend the operating life of any
electronic device.
Consider also the routing of the wiring for the devices in the panel. Avoid placing low-voltage
signal wires and communications cables in the same tray with AC power wiring and high-
energy, rapidly-switched DC wiring.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.1 Guidelines for installing S7-200 SMART devices
Provide adequate clearance for cooling and wiring

S7-200 SMART devices are designed for natural convection cooling. For proper cooling, you
must provide a clearance of at least 25 mm above and below the devices. Also, allow at
least 25 mm of depth between the front of the modules and the inside of the enclosure.
CAUTION
Temperature considerations
Vertical mounting reduces the maximum allowable ambient temperature by 10 degrees C.
Operating outside the maximum temperature range could result in erratic process operation
and could result in minor personal injury.
Mount the CPU below any expansion modules, as shown in the following figure. Follow the
prescribed guidelines for mounting modules to ensure proper cooling.
Side view Vertical installation

Horizontal installation Clearance area
When planning your layout for the PLC, allow enough clearance for the wiring and
communications cable connections.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.2 Power budget
3.2 Power budget

Your CPU has an internal power supply that provides power for the CPU, the expansion
modules, signal boards, and other 24 V DC user power requirements. Use the following
information as a guide for determining how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for
your configuration.
Refer to the technical specifications for your particular CPU to determine the 24 V DC sensor
supply power budget, the 5 V DC logic budget supplied by your CPU and the 5 V DC power
requirements of the expansion modules and signal boards. Refer to the Calculating a power
budget (Page 653) to determine how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for your
configuration.
The CPU provides the 5 V DC logic power needed for any expansion in your system. Pay
careful attention to your system configuration to ensure that the CPU can supply the 5 V DC
power required by your selected expansion modules. If your configuration requires more
power than the CPU can supply, you must remove a module.
Note
If the CPU power budget is exceeded, you may not be able to connect the maximum number
of modules allowed for your CPU.
The CPU also provides a 24 V DC sensor supply that can supply 24 V DC for input points,
for relay coil power on the expansion modules, or for other requirements. If your power
requirements exceed the budget of the sensor supply, then you must add an external 24 V
DC power supply to your system. You must manually connect the 24 V DC supply to the
input points or relay coils.
If you require an external 24 V DC power supply, ensure that the power supply is not
connected in parallel with the sensor supply of the CPU. For improved electrical noise
protection, it is recommended that the commons (M) of the different power supplies be
connected.
WARNING
Connecting power supplies safely
Connecting an external 24 V DC power supply in parallel with the 24 V DC sensor supply of
the CPU can result in a conflict between the two supplies as each seeks to establish its
own preferred output voltage level.
The result of this conflict can be shortened lifetime or immediate failure of one or both
power supplies, with consequent unpredictable operation of the PLC system. Unpredictable
operation could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
The DC sensor supply of the CPU and any external power supply should provide power to
different points. A single connection of the commons is allowed.
Some of the 24 V DC power input ports in the S7-200 SMART system are interconnected,
with a common logic circuit connecting multiple M terminals. For example, the following
circuits are interconnected when designated as "not isolated" in the data sheets: the 24 V
DC power supply of the CPU, the power input for the relay coil of an EM, or the power supply
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.2 Power budget
for a non-isolated analog input. All non-isolated M terminals must connect to the same
external reference potential.
WARNING
Avoiding unwanted current flow
Connecting non-isolated M terminals to different reference potentials will cause unintended
current flows that may cause damage or unpredictable operation in the PLC and any
connected equipment.
Failure to comply with these guidelines could cause damage or unpredictable operation
which could result in death or severe personal injury and/or property damage.
Always ensure that all non-isolated M terminals in an S7-200 SMART system are
connected to the same reference potential.
requirements of the expansion modules and signal boards.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.3 Installation and removal procedures
3.3.1 Mounting dimensions for the S7-200 SMART devices

The CPU and expansion modules include mounting holes to facilitate installation on panels.
S7-200 SMART module Width A (mm) Width B (mm)

CPU SR20 and CPU ST20 90 45
CPU SR30 and CPU ST30 110 55
CPU CR40, CPU SR40, and CPU ST40 125 62.5
CPU CR60, CPU SR60 and CPU ST60 175 87.5
Expansion modules: EM 4AI, EM 8AI, EM 2AQ, EM 4AQ, EM 8DI, EM 8DQ, and 45 22.5
EM 8DQRLY
EM 8DI/8DQ and EM 8DI/8DQRLY 45 22.5
EM 16DI/16DQ and EM 16DI/16DQRLY 70 35
EM 2AI/1AQ and EM 4AI/2AQ 45 22.5
EM 2RTD, EM 4RTD 45 22.5
EM 4TC 45 22.5
EM DP01 70 35
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.3.2 Installing and removing the CPU

The CPU can be easily installed on a standard DIN rail or on a panel. DIN rail clips are
provided to secure the device on the DIN rail. The clips also snap into an extended position
to provide a screw mounting position for panel-mounting the unit.
DIN rail installation Panel installation

DIN rail clip in latched position Clip in extended position
Figure 3-1 Installation on a DIN rail or on a panel
Before you install or remove any electrical device, ensure that the power to that equipment
has been turned off. Also, ensure that the power to any related equipment has been turned
off.
WARNING
Remove power to PLC before installing or removing equipment
Attempts to install or remove the PLC or related equipment with the power applied could
cause electric shock or faulty operation of equipment.
Failure to disable all power to the PLC and related equipment during installation or removal
procedures could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to
equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the PLC is disabled
before attempting to install or remove the CPU or related equipment.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Always ensure that whenever you replace or install a device, you use the correct module or
equivalent device.
WARNING
Module replacement
If you install an incorrect module, the program in the CPU could function unpredictably.
Failure to replace a device with the same model, orientation, or order could result in death
or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Replace the device with the same model, and be sure to orient and position it correctly.
Note
Install expansion modules separately after the CPU has been installed.
Consider the following when installing the units on the DIN rail or on a panel:
For DIN rail mounting, make sure the upper DIN rail clip is in the latched (inner) position
and that the lower DIN rail clip is in the extended position for the CPU.
After installing the devices on the DIN rail, move the lower DIN rail clips to the latched
position to lock the devices on the DIN rail.
For panel mounting, make sure the DIN rail clips are pushed to the extended position.
To install the CPU on a panel, follow these steps:
1. Locate, drill, and tap the mounting holes (M4 or American Standard number 8), using the
dimensions in the table, Mounting dimensions (mm) (Page 41).
2. Ensure that the CPU and S7-200 SMART equipment are disconnected from electrical
power.
3. Secure the module(s) to the panel, using a Pan Head M4 screw with spring and flat
washer. Do not use a flat head screw.
4. If you are using an expansion module, put it next to the CPU and slide together until the
connectors join securely.
Note
The type of screw will be determined by the material upon which it is mounted. You
should apply appropriate torque until the spring washer becomes flat. Avoid applying
excessive torque to the mounting screws. Do not use a flat head screw.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Table 3- 1 Installing a CPU on a DIN rail
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to install a CPU on a DIN rail.
1. Secure the rail to the mounting panel every 75 mm.
2. Snap open the DIN clip (located on the bottom of the module) and hook the back of
the module onto the DIN rail.
3. Rotate the module down to the DIN rail and snap the clip closed. Carefully check
that the clip has fastened the module securely onto the rail. To avoid damage to the
module, press on the tab of the mounting hole instead of pressing directly on the
front of the module.
Note
Using DIN rail stops could be helpful if your CPU is in an environment with high vibration
potential or if the CPU has been installed vertically. Use an end bracket (8WA1 808 or 8WA1
805) on the DIN rail to ensure that the modules remain connected.
If your system is in a high-vibration environment, then panel-mounting the CPU will provide a
greater level of vibration protection.
Table 3- 2 Removing a CPU from a DIN rail
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to remove a CPU from a DIN rail.
1. Remove power from the CPU and any attached I/O modules.
2. Disconnect all the wiring and cabling that is attached to the CPU. The CPU and
most expansion modules have removable connectors to make this job easier.
3. Unscrew the mounting screws or snap open the DIN clip.
4. If you have expansion modules connected, slide the CPU to the left to disengage it
from the expansion module connector. Note: unscrewing or unsnapping the DIN
clips of the expansion modules can make it easier to disengage the CPU.
5. Remove the CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.3.3 Installing and removing an expansion module
Table 3- 3 Installing an expansion module
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to install an expansion module:
1. Ensure that the CPU and all S7-200 SMART equipment are disconnected from
electrical power.
2. Remove the cover for the I/O bus connector from the right side of the CPU.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the slot above the cover.
4. Gently pry the cover out at its top and remove the cover. Retain the cover for
reuse.
Connect the expansion module to the CPU.

1. Pull out the bottom DIN rail clip to allow the expansion module to fit over the
rail.
2. Position the expansion module to the right of the CPU.
3. Hook the expansion module over the top of the DIN rail.
4. Slide the expansion module to the left until the I/O connector fully engages the
connector on the right of the CPU and push the bottom clip in to latch the ex-
pansion module onto the rail.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Table 3- 4 Removing an expansion module
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to remove an expansion module:
electrical power.
2. Remove the I/O connectors and wiring from the expansion module.
3. Loosen the DIN rail clips of all the S7-200 SMART devices.
4. Physically slide the expansion module to the right.
3.3.4 Installing and removing a signal board or battery board
Table 3- 5 Installing a signal board
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to install a signal board or battery board
1. Ensure that that the CPU and all S7-200 SMART equipment are disconnected from
electrical power.
2. Remove the top and bottom terminal block covers from the CPU.
3. Place a screwdriver into the slot on top of the CPU at the rear of the cover.
4. Gently pry the cover up and remove it from the CPU.
5. Place the signal board or battery board straight down into its mounting position in the
top of the CPU.
6. Firmly press the module into position until it snaps into place.
7. Replace the terminal block covers.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Table 3- 6 Removing a signal board or battery board
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to remove a signal board or battery board
1. Ensure that the CPU and all S7-200 SMART equipment are disconnected from electri-
cal power.
2. Remove the top and bottom terminal block covers from the CPU.
3. Place a screwdriver into the slot on top of the module.
4. Gently pry the module up to disengage it from the CPU.
5. Remove the module straight up from its mounting position in the top of the CPU.
6. Replace the cover onto the CPU.
7. Replace the terminal block covers.
Installing or replacing the battery in the SB BA01 battery board

The SB BA01 battery board requires battery type CR1025. The battery is not included with
the SB BA01 and must be purchased.
To install the battery, follow these steps:
1. In the SB BA01, install the new battery with the positive side of the battery on top, and the
negative side next to the printed wiring board.
2. The SB BA01 is now ready to be installed in the CPU. Follow the installation directions
above.
To replace the battery, follow these steps:
1. Remove the SB BA01 from the CPU following the removal directions above.
2. Carefully remove the old battery using a small screwdriver. Push the battery out from
under the clip.
3. Install a new CR1025 replacement battery with the positive side of the battery on top and
the negative side next to the printed wiring board.
4. Re-install the SB BA01 battery board following the installation directions above.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.3.5 Removing and reinstalling the terminal block connector

The S7-200 SMART modules have removable connectors to make connecting the wiring
easy.
Table 3- 7 Removing the connector
Task Procedure
Prepare the system for terminal block removal by removing the power from the CPU
and opening the cover above the connector.
electrical power.
2. Inspect the top of the connector and locate the slot for the tip of the screwdriver.
3. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot.
4. Gently pry the top of the connector away from the CPU. The connector will release
with a snap.
5. Grasp the connector and remove it from the CPU.
Table 3- 8 Installing the connector
Task Procedure
Prepare the components for terminal block installation by removing power from the
CPU and opening the cover above the connector.
electrical power.
2. Align the connector with the pins on the unit.
3. Align the wiring edge of the connector inside the rim of the connector base.
4. Press firmly down and rotate the connector until it snaps into place.
Check carefully to ensure that the connector is properly aligned and fully engaged.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
3.4 Wiring guidelines

Proper grounding and wiring of all electrical equipment is important to help ensure the
optimum operation of your system and to provide additional electrical noise protection for
your application and the PLC. Refer to the technical specifications (Page 565) for the wiring
diagrams.
Prerequisites
Before you ground or install wiring to any electrical device, ensure that the power to that
equipment has been turned off. Also, ensure that the power to any related equipment has
been turned off.
Ensure that you follow all applicable electrical codes when wiring the PLC and related
equipment. Install and operate all equipment according to all applicable national and local
standards. Contact your local authorities to determine which codes and standards apply to
your specific case.
WARNING
Attempts to install or wire the PLC or related equipment with power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of equipment. Failure to disable all power to the PLC and
related equipment during installation or removal procedures could result in death or serious
injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to the PLC is disabled
before attempting to install or remove the PLC or related equipment.
Always take safety into consideration as you design the grounding and wiring of your PLC
system. Electronic control devices, such as the PLC, can fail and can cause unexpected
operation of the equipment that is being controlled or monitored. For this reason, you should
implement safeguards that are independent of the PLC to protect against possible personal
injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
Control devices can fail in an unsafe condition, resulting in unexpected operation of

controlled equipment. Such unexpected operations could result in death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Use an emergency stop function, electromechanical overrides, or other redundant
safeguards that are independent of the PLC.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Isolation guidelines
The AC power supply boundaries and I/O boundaries to AC circuits have been designed and
approved to provide safe separation between AC line voltages and low voltage circuits.
These boundaries include double or reinforced insulation, or basic plus supplementary
insulation, according to various standards. Components which cross these boundaries such
as optical couplers, capacitors, transformers, and relays have been approved as providing
safe separation. Isolation boundaries which meet these requirements have been identified in
the product data sheets as having 1500 V AC or greater isolation. This designation is based
on a routine factory test of (2Ue + 1000 V AC) or equivalent according to approved methods.
Safe separation boundaries have been type tested to 4242 V DC.
The sensor supply output, communications circuits, and internal logic circuits of the CPU
with included AC power supply are sourced as SELV (safety extra-low voltage) according to
EN 61131-2. These circuits become PELV (protective extra-low voltage) if the sensor supply
M, or any other non-isolated M connection to the CPU is connected to ground. Other M
connections which may ground reference the low voltage are designated as not isolated to
logic on specific product data sheets. Examples are RS485 communications port M, analog
I/O M, and relay coil power M.
To maintain the SELV / PELV character of the low voltage circuits, external connections to
communications ports, analog circuits, and all 24 V nominal power supply and I/O circuits
must be powered from approved sources that meet the requirements of SELV, PELV,
Class 2, Limited Voltage, or Limited Power according to various standards.
WARNING
Safe use of power converters
Use of non-isolated or single insulation supplies to supply low voltage circuits from an AC
line can result in hazardous voltages appearing on circuits that are expected to be touch
safe, such as communications circuits and low voltage sensor wiring.
Such unexpected high voltages could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or
damage to equipment.
Use only high-voltage-to-low-voltage power converters that are approved as sources of
touch-safe, limited-voltage circuits.
Grounding guidelines
The best way to ground your application is to ensure that all the common and ground
connections of your PLC and related equipment are grounded to a single point. This single
point should be connected directly to the earth ground for your system.
All ground wires should be as short as possible and should use a large wire size, such as
2 mm2 (14 AWG).
When locating grounds, remember to consider safety grounding requirements and the proper
operation of protective interrupting devices.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Wiring guidelines
When designing the wiring for your PLC, adhere to the following guidelines:
Provide a single disconnect switch that simultaneously removes power from the CPU
power supply, from all input circuits, and from all output circuits.
Provide overcurrent protection, such as a fuse or circuit breaker, to limit fault currents on
supply wiring. Consider providing additional protection by placing a fuse or other current
limit in each output circuit.
Install appropriate surge suppression devices for any wiring that could be subject to
lightning surges.
Avoid placing low-voltage signal wires and communications cables in the same wire tray
with AC wires and high-energy, rapidly switched DC wires.
Always route wires in pairs, with the neutral or common wire paired with the hot or signal-
carrying wire.
Use the shortest wire possible and ensure that the wire is sized properly to carry the
required current. The connector accepts wire sizes from 2 mm2 to 0.3 mm2 (14 AWG to
22 AWG). Use shielded wires for optimum protection against electrical noise. Typically,
grounding the shield at the CPU gives the best results.
When wiring input circuits that are powered by an external power supply, include an
overcurrent protection device in that circuit. External protection is not necessary for
circuits that are powered by the 24 V DC sensor supply from the CPU because the
sensor supply is already current-limited.
All S7-200 SMART modules have removable connectors for user wiring. To prevent loose
connections, ensure that the connector is seated securely and that the wire is installed
securely into the connector. Siemens recommends that the wire insulation is removed
from the wire approximately 6 mm to ensure a proper connection. To avoid damaging the
connector, be careful that you do not over-tighten the screws. The maximum torque for
the CPU and EM connector screw is 0.56 N-m (5 inch-pounds). The maximum torque for
the SB connector screw is 0.33 N-m (3 inch-pounds)
Isolation boundaries
To help prevent unwanted current flows in your installation, the CPU provides isolation
boundaries at certain points. When you plan the wiring for your system, you should consider
these isolation boundaries. Refer to the technical specifications (Page 565) for the amount of
isolation provided and the location of the isolation boundaries. Isolation boundaries rated
less than 1500 V AC must not be depended on as safety boundaries.
Guidelines for lamp loads

Lamp loads are damaging to relay contacts because of the high turn-on surge current. This
surge current will nominally be 10 to 15 times the steady state current for a tungsten lamp. A
replaceable interposing relay or surge limiter is recommended for lamp loads that will be
switched a large number of times during the lifetime of the application.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
Guidelines for inductive loads

You should equip inductive loads with suppression circuits to limit voltage rise when the
control output turns off. Suppression circuits protect your outputs from premature failure due
to the high voltages associated with turning off inductive loads. In addition, suppression
circuits limit the electrical noise generated when switching inductive loads. Placing an
external suppression circuit so that it is electrically across the load, and physically located
near the load is most effective in reducing electrical noise.
The DC (transistor) outputs include internal suppression circuits that are adequate for the
inductive loads in most applications. Since the relay output contacts can be used to switch
either a DC or an AC load, internal protection is not provided.
Note
The effectiveness of a given suppression circuit depends on the application, and you must
verify it for your particular use. Always ensure that all components used in your suppression
circuit are rated for use in the application.
Table 3- 9 Typical suppressor circuit for DC or relay outputs that switch DC inductive loads
DC inductive load Diagram

In most applications, the addition of a 1N4001 diode or equivalent
diode across a DC inductive load is
suitable, but if your application requires
8.2 V Zener (DC outputs),
36 V Zener (Relay outputs)
faster turn-off times, then the addition of a
Zener diode is recommended. Be sure Output point
to size your Zener diode properly for the

amount of current in your output circuit.
Table 3- 10 Typical suppressor circuit for relay outputs that switch AC inductive loads
AC inductive load Diagram

When you use a relay output to switch 0.1 F
115 V/230 V AC loads, place the appro-
priately rated resistor-capacitor-metal 100 to 120
oxide varistor (MOV) circuit across the AC
load. Ensure that the working voltage of
Output point
the MOV is at least 20% greater than the

nominal line voltage.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
WARNING
Correct placement of external resistor/capacitor noise suppression circuit
When relay expansion modules are used to switch AC inductive loads, you must place the
external resistor/capacitor noise suppression circuit across the AC load to prevent
unexpected machine or process operation. Unexpected machine or process operation
could result in death or severe personal injury.
Always be sure to follow these guidelines in placing the external resistor/capacitor noise
suppression circuit.
S7-200 SMART
Installation
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts 4
The basic function of the CPU is to monitor field inputs and, based on your control logic, turn
on or off field output devices. This chapter explains the concepts used to execute your
program, the various types of memory used, and how that memory is retained.
4.1 Execution of the control logic

The CPU continuously cycles through the control logic in your program, reading and writing
data. The basic operation is very simple:
The CPU reads the status of the inputs.
The program that is stored in the CPU uses these inputs to evaluate the control logic.
As the program runs, the CPU updates the data.
The CPU writes the data to the outputs.
The figure shows a simple diagram of

how an electrical relay diagram relates
to the CPU. In this example, the state
of the switch for starting the motor is
combined with the states of other in-
puts. The calculations of these states
then determine the state for the output
that goes to the actuator which starts
the motor.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
Tasks in a scan cycle

The CPU executes a series of tasks repetitively. This cyclical execution of tasks is called the
scan cycle. The execution of the user program is dependent upon whether the CPU is in
STOP mode or in RUN mode. In RUN mode, your program is executed; in STOP mode, your
program is not executed.
Table 4- 1 Tasks performed by the CPU in a scan cycle
Scan cycle Description

Reading the inputs: The CPU copies the state of the physi-
cal inputs to the process image input register.
Executing the control logic in the program: The CPU exe-
cutes the instructions of the program and stores the values
in the various memory areas.
Processing any communications requests: The CPU per-
forms any tasks required for communications.
Executing the CPU self-test diagnostics: The CPU ensures
that the firmware, the program memory, and any expansion
modules are working properly.
Writing to the outputs: The values stored in the process
image output register are written to the physical outputs.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.1.1 Reading the inputs and writing to the outputs
Reading the inputs

Digital inputs: Each scan cycle begins by reading the current value of the digital inputs and
then writing these values to the process image input register.
Analog inputs: The CPU does not read the analog input values as part of the normal scan
cycle. Instead, an analog value is read immediately from the device when your program
accesses the analog input.
Writing to the outputs

Digital outputs: At the end of every scan cycle, the CPU writes the values stored in the
process-image output register to the digital outputs.
Analog outputs: The CPU does not write analog output values as part of the normal scan
cycle. Instead, the analog outputs are written immediately when your program accesses the
analog output.
4.1.2 Immediately reading or writing the I/O

The CPU instruction set provides instructions that immediately read from or write to the
physical I/O. These immediate I/O instructions allow direct access to the actual input or
output point, even though the image registers are normally used as either the source or the
destination for I/O accesses. The corresponding process image input register location is not
modified when you use an immediate instruction to access an input point. The corresponding
process image output register location is updated simultaneously when you use an
immediate instruction to access an output point.
Note
When you read an analog input, the value is read immediately. When you write a value to an
analog output, the output is updated immediately.
It is usually advantageous to use the process image register rather than to directly access
inputs or outputs during the execution of your program. There are three reasons for using the
image registers:
The sampling of all inputs at the start of the scan synchronizes and freezes the values of
the inputs for the program execution phase of the scan cycle. The outputs are updated
from the image register after the execution of the program is complete. This provides a
stabilizing effect on the system.
Your program can access the image register much more quickly than it can access I/O
points, allowing faster execution of the program.
I/O points are bit entities and must be accessed as bits or bytes, but you can access the
image register as bits, bytes, words, or double words. Thus, the image registers provide
additional flexibility.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.1.3 Executing the user program

During the execution phase of the scan cycle, the CPU executes your main program, starting
with the first instruction and proceeding to the last instruction. The immediate I/O instructions
give you immediate access to inputs and outputs during the execution of either the main
program or an interrupt routine.
If you use subroutines in your program, the subroutines are stored as part of the program.
The subroutines are executed when they are called by the main program, by another
subroutine, or by an interrupt routine. Subroutine nesting depth is 8 levels deep from the
main and 4 levels deep from an interrupt routine.
If you use interrupts in your program, the interrupt routines that are associated with the
interrupt events are stored as part of the program. The interrupt routines are not executed as
part of the normal scan cycle, but are executed when the interrupt event occurs (which could
be at any point in the scan cycle).
Local memory is reserved for each of 14 entities: the main program, eight subroutine nesting
levels when initiated from the main program, one interrupt routine, and four subroutine
nesting levels when initiated from an interrupt routine. Local memory has a local scope in
that it is available only within its associated program entity, and cannot be accessed by the
other program entities. For more information about Local memory, refer to Local Memory
Area: L in this chapter.
The following figure depicts the flow of a typical scan including the Local memory usage and
two interrupt events, one during the program-execution phase and another during the
communications phase of the scan cycle. Subroutines are called by the next higher level,
and are executed when called. Interrupt routines are not called; they are a result of an
occurrence of the associated interrupt event.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
Figure 4-1 Typical scan flow
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
4.2 Accessing data

The CPU stores information in different memory locations that have unique addresses. You
can explicitly identify the memory address that you want to access. This allows your program
to have direct access to the information. To access a bit in a memory area, you specify the
address, which includes the memory area identifier, the byte address, and the bit number
(which is also called "byte.bit" addressing).
Table 4- 2 Bit addressing
Elements of a bit address Description

A Memory area identifier
B Byte address: byte 3
C Separator ("byte.bit")
D Bit location of the byte (bit 4 of 8, bits numbered 7 to 0)
E Bytes of the memory area
F Bits of the selected byte
In this example, the memory area and byte address ("M3") designates byte 3 of M memory,
with a period (".") to separate the bit address (bit 4).
You can access data in most memory areas (V, I, Q, M, S, L, and SM) as bytes, words, or
double words by using the byte-address format. To access a byte, word, or double word of
data in the memory, you must specify the address in a way similar to specifying the address
for a bit. This includes an area identifier, data size designation, and the starting byte address
of the byte, word, or double-word value, as shown in the following figure.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
The following table shows the range of integer values that can be represented by the
different sizes of data.
Table 4- 3 Decimal and hexadecimal ranges for the different sizes of data
Representation Byte (B) Word (W) Double Word (D)

Unsigned Inte- 0 to 255 0 to 65,535 0 to 4,294,967,295
ger 16#00 to 16#FF 16#0000 to 16#FFFF 16#00000000 to 16#FFFFFFFF
Signed Integer -128 to +127 -32,768 to +32,767 -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16#80 to 16#7F 16#8000 to 16#7FFF 16#8000 0000 to 16#7FFF FFFF
Real (IEEE 32- Not applicable Not applicable +1.175495E-38 to +3.402823E+38 (positive)
bit Floating -1.175495E-38 to -3.402823E+38 (negative)
Point)
Data in other memory areas (such as T, C, HC, and the accumulators) are accessed by
using an address format that includes an area identifier and a device number.
4.2.1 Accessing memory areas
I (process-image input)
The CPU samples the physical input points at the beginning of each scan cycle and writes
these values to the process image input register. You can access the process image input
register in bits, bytes, words, or double words:
Table 4- 4 Absolute addressing for I memory
Bit: I[byte address].[bit address] I0.1

Byte, Word, or Double Word: I[size][starting byte address] IB4,
IW7,
ID20
Q (process-image output)
At the end of the scan cycle, the CPU copies the values stored in the process image output
register to the physical output points. You can access the process image output register in
bits, bytes, words, or double words:
Table 4- 5 Absolute addressing for Q memory
Bit: Q[byte address].[bit address] Q1.1

Byte, Word, or Double Word: Q[size][starting byte address] QB5, QW14,
QD28
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
V (variable memory)
You can use V memory to store intermediate results of operations being performed by the
control logic in your program. You can also use V memory to store other data pertaining to
your process or task. You can access the V memory area in bits, bytes, words, or double
words:
Table 4- 6 Absolute addressing for V memory
Bit: V[byte address].[bit address] V10.2

Byte, Word, or Double Word: V[size][starting byte address] VB16,
VW100,
VD2136
M (flag memory)
You can use the flag memory area (M memory) as internal control relays to store the
intermediate status of an operation or other control information. You can access the flag
memory area in bits, bytes, words, or double words:
Table 4- 7 Absolute addressing for M memory
Bit: M[byte address].[bit address] M26.7

Byte, Word, or Double Word: M[size][starting byte address] MB0, MW11,
MD20
T (timer memory)
The CPU provides timers that count increments of time in resolutions (time-base increments)
of 1 ms, 10 ms, or 100 ms. Two variables are associated with a timer:
Current value: this 16-bit signed integer stores the amount of time counted by the timer.
Timer bit: this bit is set or cleared as a result of comparing the current and the preset
value. The preset value is entered as part of the timer instruction.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
You access both of these variables by using the timer address (T + timer number). Access to
either the timer bit or the current value is dependent on the instruction used: instructions with
bit operands access the timer bit, while instructions with word operands access the current
value. As shown in the following figure, the Normally Open Contact instruction accesses the
timer bit, while the Move Word instruction accesses the current value of the timer.
Table 4- 8 Absolute addressing for T memory
Timer: T[timer number] T24
Figure 4-2 Accessing the timer bit or the current value of a timer
C (counter memory)
The CPU provides three types of counters that count each low-to-high transition event on the
counter input(s): one type counts up only, one type counts down only, and one type counts
both up and down. Two variables are associated with a counter:
Current value: this 16-bit signed integer stores the accumulated count.
Counter bit: this bit is set or cleared as a result of comparing the current and the preset
value. The preset value is entered as part of the counter instruction.
You access both of these variables by using the counter address (C + counter number).
Access to either the counter bit or the current value is dependent on the instruction used:
instructions with bit operands access the counter bit, while instructions with word operands
access the current value. As shown in the following figure, the Normally Open Contact
instruction accesses the counter bit, while the Move Word instruction accesses the current
value of the counter.
Table 4- 9 Absolute addressing of C memory
Counter C[counter number] C24
Figure 4-3 Accessing the counter bit or the current value of a counter
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
HC (high-speed counter)
The high-speed counters count high-speed events independent of the CPU scan. High-
speed counters have a signed, 32-bit integer counting value (or current value). To access
the count value for the high-speed counter, you specify the address of the high-speed
counter, using the memory type (HC) and the counter number. The current value of the high-
speed counter is a read-only value and can be addressed only as a double word (32 bits).
Table 4- 10 Absolute addressing of HC memory
High-speed counter HC[high-speed counter number] HC1
AC (accumulators)
The accumulators are read/write devices that can be used like memory. For example, you
can use accumulators to pass parameters to and from subroutines and to store intermediate
values used in a calculation. The CPU provides four 32-bit accumulators (AC0, AC1, AC2,
and AC3). You can access the data in the accumulators as bytes, words, or double words.
The size of the data being accessed is determined by the instruction that is used to access
the accumulator. As shown in the following figure, you use the least significant 8 or 16 bits of
the value that is stored in the accumulator to access the accumulator as bytes or words. To
access the accumulator as a double word, you use all 32 bits.
For information about how to use the accumulators within interrupt subroutines, refer to the
Interrupt instructions (Page 282).
Table 4- 11 Absolute addressing of AC memory
Accumulator AC[accumulator number] AC0
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
Figure 4-4 Accessing the accumulators
SM (special memory)
The SM bits provide a means for communicating information between the CPU and your
user program. You can use these bits to select and control some of the special functions of
the CPU, such as: a bit that turns on for the first scan cycle, a bit that toggles at a fixed rate,
or a bit that shows the status of math or operational instructions. You can access the SM bits
as bits, bytes, words, or double words:
Table 4- 12 Absolute addressing of SM memory
Bit: SM[byte address].[bit address] SM0.1

Byte, Word, or Double Word: SM[size][starting byte address] SMB86,
SMW300,
SMD1000
For more information, see the descriptions of the SM bits (Page 665).
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
L (local memory area)

The CPU provides 64 L memory bytes for each POU (program organizational unit) in a local
memory stack. A POU's associated L memory addresses are accessible only by the
currently executing POU (main, subroutine, or interrupt routine). When you use interrupt
routines and subroutines, the L memory stack is used to preserve L memory values of a
POU that temporarily suspends execution, so another POU can execute. The suspended
POU can then resume execution with the L memory values that existed prior to giving
execution control to another POU.
L memory stack maximum nesting limits:
Eight subroutine nesting levels when initiated from the main program
Four subroutine nesting levels when initiated from an interrupt routine
The nesting limits allow a 14 level execution stack in your program. For example, the main
program ( level 1) has eight nested subroutines (levels 2 to 9). During execution of the 9th
level subroutine, an interrupt occurs (level 10). The interrupt routine contains four nested
subroutines (levels 11 to 14).
L memory rules:
You can use L memory for local scratchpad "TEMP" variables in all POU types (main,
subroutine, and interrupt routines)
Only subroutines can use L memory for "IN" IN_OUT", and "OUT" variable types that are
passed to or from subroutines.
If you are programming a subroutine in either LAD or FBD, only 60 bytes are allowed for
TEMP, IN, IN_OUT, and OUT variables. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART uses the last four
bytes of local memory
Local memory symbols, variable types, and data types are assigned in the Variable table
that is available when the associated POU is opened in the program editor. Absolute L
memory addresses are automatically assigned when a POU is successfully compiled.
In most cases, use L memory symbol name references in your program logic, because you
cannot know all the absolute L memory addresses until after the complete POU is
successfully compiled. However, you can use absolute L memory addresses as shown in the
following table.
Table 4- 13 Absolute addressing of L memory
Bit: L[byte address].[bit address] L0.0

Byte, Word, or Double Word: L[size] [starting byte address] LB33, LW5,
LD20
Local memory and to global V memory use a similar address syntax, but V memory has a
global scope while L memory has a local scope. Global scope means that the same memory
address can be accessed from any POU. Local scope means that the L memory allocation is
associated with a particular POU and cannot be accessed by another program unit.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
The local scope of L memory also affects symbol usage, when a global symbol and a local
symbol use the same name. If your program logic references that symbol name, the CPU
ignores the global symbol and processes the address assigned to the local memory symbol.
Note
Local memory value assignments are not always preserved for successive executions of a
POU
L memory addresses are reused for the next execution sequence, after the current nested
sequence is completed. Depending on a POU's level in the execution stack and L memory
assignments made since a POU's last execution, a POU's L memory assignments made in a
previous execution may be overwritten with unexpected values.
Remember to reassign the correct values to L memory variables, in your program logic.
Reinitialize all TEMP values before processing them and ensure that any output values
(OUT and IN_OUT) are correct.
AI (analog input)
The CPU converts an analog value (such as temperature or voltage) into a word-length (16-
bit) digital value. You access these values by the area identifier (AI), size of the data (W),
and the starting byte address. Since analog inputs are words and always start on even-
number bytes (such as 0, 2, or 4), you access them with even-number byte addresses (such
as AIW0, AIW2, or AIW4). Analog input values are read-only values.
Table 4- 14 Absolute addressing of AI memory
Analog input AIW[starting byte address] AIW4
AQ (analog output)
The CPU converts a word-length (16-bit) digital value into a current or voltage, proportional
to the digital value (such as for a current or voltage). You write these values by the area
identifier (AQ), size of the data (W), and the starting byte address. Since analog outputs are
words and always start on even-number bytes (such as 0, 2, or 4), you write them with even-
number byte addresses (such as AQW0, AQW2, or AQW4). Analog output values are write-
only values.
Table 4- 15 Absolute addressing of AQ memory
Analog output AQW[starting byte address] AQW4
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
S (sequence control relay)

S bits are associated with SCRs, which you can use to organize machine or steps into
equivalent program segments. SCRs allow logical segmentation of the control program. You
can access the S memory as bits, bytes, words, or double words.
Table 4- 16 Absolute addressing of S memory
Bit: S[byte address].[bit address] S3.1

Byte, Word, or Double Word: S[size][starting byte address] SB4,
SW7,
SD14
4.2.2 Format for Real numbers

Real (or floating-point) numbers are represented as 32-bit, single-precision numbers, whose
format is described in the ANSI/IEEE 754-1985 standard. Real numbers are accessed in
double-word lengths.
Figure 4-5 Format of a Real number
Note
Floating-point numbers are accurate up to 6 decimal places. Therefore, you can specify a
maximum of 6 decimal places when entering a floating-point constant.
Calculations that involve a long series of values including very large and very small numbers
can produce inaccurate results. This can occur if the numbers differ by 10 to the power of x,
where x > 6. For example: 100 000 000 + 1 = 100 000 000
4.2.3 Format for strings

A string is a sequence of characters, with each character being stored as a byte. The first
byte of the string defines the length of the string, which is the number of characters. The
following figure shows the format for a string. A string can have a length of 0 to 254
characters, plus the length byte, so the maximum length for a string is 255 bytes. A string
constant is limited to 126 bytes.
Figure 4-6 Format for strings
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
4.2.4 Assigning a constant value for instructions

You can use a constant value in many of the programming instructions. Constants can be
bytes, words, or double words. The CPU stores all constants as binary numbers, which can
then be represented in decimal, hexadecimal, ASCII, or real number (floating point) formats.
Table 4- 17 Representation of constant values
Representation Format Sample

Decimal [decimal value] 20047
Hexadecimal 16#[hexadecimal value] 16#4E4F
Binary 2#[binary number] 2#1010_0101_1010_0101
ASCII '[ASCII text]' 'ABCD'
Real ANSI/IEEE 754-1985 +1.175495E-38 (positive)
-1.175495E-38 (negative)
String "[stringtext]" "ABCDE"
Note
The CPU does not support "data typing" or data checking (such as specifying that the
constant is stored as an integer, a signed integer, or a double integer). For example, an Add
instruction can use the value in VW100 as a signed integer value, while an Exclusive Or
instruction can use the same value in VW100 as an unsigned binary value.
4.2.5 Addressing the local and expansion I/O

The local I/O provided by the CPU provides a fixed set of I/O addresses. You can add I/O
points by connecting expansion I/O modules to the right side of the CPU or by installing a
signal board. The addresses of the points of the module are determined by the type of I/O
and the position of the module in the chain. For example, an output module does not affect
the addresses of the points on an input module, and vice versa. Likewise, analog modules
do not affect the addressing of digital modules, and vice versa.
Note
Process image register space for digital I/O is always reserved in increments of eight bits
(one byte). If a module does not provide a physical point for each bit of each reserved byte,
these unused bits cannot be assigned to subsequent modules in the I/O chain. For input
modules, the unused bits are set to zero with each input update cycle.
Analog I/O points are always allocated in increments of two points. If a module does not
provide physical I/O for each of these points, these I/O points are lost and are not available
for assignment to subsequent modules in the I/O chain.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
The following table provides an example of the fixed mapping convention (established by
STEP 7 Micro/WIN SMART and downloaded as part of the I/O configuration, in the system
block).
Table 4- 18 CPU mapping convention
CPU Signal Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion

board module 0 module 1 module 2 module 3 module 4 module 5
Starting I0.0 I7.0 I8.0 I12.0 I16.0 I20.0 I24.0 I28.0
address Q0.0 Q7.0 Q8.0 Q12.0 Q16.0 Q20.0 Q24.0 Q28.0
AI12 AI16 AI32 AI48 AI64 AI80 AI96
AQ12 AQ16 AQ32 AQ48 AQ64 AQ80 AQ96
4.2.6 Using pointers for indirect addressing

Indirect addressing uses a pointer to access data in memory. Pointers are double word
memory locations that contain the address of another memory location. You can only use
V memory locations, L memory locations, or accumulator registers (AC1, AC2, AC3) as
pointers. To create a pointer, you must use the Move Double Word instruction to move the
address of the indirectly addressed memory location to the pointer location. Pointers can
also be passed to a subroutine as a parameter.
An S7-200 SMART CPU allows pointers to access the following memory areas: I, Q, V, M, S,
AI, AQ, SM, T (current value only), and C (current value only). You cannot use indirect
addressing to access an individual bit or to access HC, L or accumulator memory areas.
To indirectly access the data in a memory address, you create a pointer to that location by
entering an ampersand character (&) and the first byte of the memory location to be
addressed. The input operand of the instruction must be preceded with an ampersand (&) to
signify that the address of a memory location, instead of its contents, is to be moved into the
location identified in the output operand of the instruction (the pointer).
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
Entering an asterisk (*) in front of an operand for an instruction specifies that the operand is
a pointer. As shown in the following figure, entering *AC1 means that AC1 stores a pointer to
the word-length value being referenced by the Move Word (MOVW) instruction. In this
example, the values stored in both VB200 and VB201 are moved to accumulator AC0.
MOVD &VB200, AC1

Creates the pointer by moving the address of VB200 (initial byte of VW200) to AC1
MOVW *AC1, AC0
Moves the word value referenced by the pointer in AC1
Figure 4-7 Creating and using a pointer
As shown in the following figure, you can change the value of a pointer. Since pointers are
32-bit values, use double-word instructions to modify pointer values. Simple mathematical
operations, such as adding or incrementing, can be used to modify pointer values.
MOVD &VB200, AC1

Creates the pointer by moving the address of VB200 (initial byte of VW200) to AC1
MOVW *AC1, AC0
+D +2, AC1
Adds 2 to the accumulator to point to the next word location
MOVW *AC1, AC0
Figure 4-8 Modifying a pointer
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
Note
When modifying the value of a pointer, remember to adjust for the size of the data that you
are accessing: to access a byte, increment the pointer value by 1; to access a word or a
current value for a timer or counter, add or increment the pointer value by 2; and to access a
double word, add or increment the pointer value by 4.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
4.2.7 Pointer examples
Using a pointer to access data in a table

This example uses LD14 as a pointer to a recipe stored in a table of recipes that begins at
VB100. In this example, VW1008 stores the index to a specific recipe in the table. If each
recipe in the table is 50 bytes long, you multiply the index by 50 to obtain the offset for the
starting address of a specific recipe. By adding the offset to the pointer, you can access the
individual recipe from the table. In this example, the recipe is copied to the 50 bytes that start
at VB1500.
Table 4- 19 Example: Using a pointer to access data in a table
LAD STL
To transfer a recipe from a table of
recipes:
Each recipe is 50 bytes long.
The index parameter (VW1008)
identifies the recipe to be loaded.
Network 1
LD SM0.0
Create a pointer to the starting address MOVD &VB100, LD14
of the recipe table.
Convert the index of the recipe to a

double-word value. ITD VW1008, LD18
Multiply the offset to accommodate the

size of each recipe.
*D +50, LD18
Add the adjusted offset to the pointer.
+D LD18, LD14
Transfer the selected recipe to VB1500

through VB1549
BMB *LD14, VB1500, 50
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.2 Accessing data
Using an offset to access data

This example uses LD10 as a pointer to the address VB0. You then increment the pointer by
an offset stored in VD1004. LD10 then points to another address in V memory (VB0 +
offset). The value stored in the V memory address pointed to by LD10 is then copied to
VB1900. By changing the value in VD1004, you can access any V memory location.
Table 4- 20 Example: Using an offset to read the value of any V memory location
LAD STL
Load the starting address of the V Network 1
memory to a pointer. LD SM0.0
MOVD &VB0, LD10
Add the offset value to the pointer. +D VD1004, LD10
Copy the value from the V memory

MOVB *LD10, VB1900
location (offset) to VB1900
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.3 Saving and restoring data
4.3.1 Downloading project components
Note
Downloading a program block, data block, or system block to the CPU completely overwrites
any pre-existing contents of that block in the CPU. Be sure that you want to overwrite the
block before performing a download.
To download project components from STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to the CPU, follow these
steps:
1. Ensure that your network hardware and PLC connector cable are working (Page 27), and
that PLC communication is operating properly (Page 465).
2. Place the CPU in STOP mode (Page 36).
3. To download all project components, click the Download button from the Transfer area of
the File or PLC menu ribbon strip, or alternatively press the shortcut key combination
CTRL+D.
4. To download selected project components, click the down arrow under the Download
button, and then select the specific project component you want to download (Program
Block, Data Block, or System Block) from the drop-down list.
5. After clicking the Download button, if you see a Communications dialog, select the
Network Interface Card and the IP address for the PLC to which you want to download.
6. From the Download dialog, set the download options for the blocks, and whether you
want to be prompted on CPU transitions from RUN to STOP mode (Page 36) and STOP
to RUN mode (Page 36).
7. Optionally click the "Close dialog on success" check box if you want the dialog to
automatically close after a successful download.
8. Click the Download button.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART copies the complete program or program components that you
selected to the CPU. The status icon indicates informational messages, or whether potential
problems or errors occurred with the download. The status message provides specific results
of the operation.
Note
Project components originally created for use in an S7-200 SMART CPU with firmware
version V1.x can be downloaded to a CPU with firmware version V2.0 or later. However,
project components originally created for use in a CPU firmware version V2.0 or later may
not successfully download into a CPU with firmware version V1.x, especially if the project
components use functionality not supported in firmware version V1.x.
What happens when you download

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART and the CPU perform the following tasks in sequence on your
project components when you download:
Step Action Related topics, additional description

1. Project components in the program File open
editors serve as input for the download Range checking
operation, based on the download
Project file I/O errors
objects you selected. The program
editors can include new program data Program editor errors
that you've entered, a saved and
opened .smart project, or an uploaded
ASCII import file.
2. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART compile All STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART compiler errors
A compile or download command are listed in the Output Window. Double-click
starts the compiler. If the compile the error and the editor scrolls to the error loca-
passes, control passes to the next tion. A successful compile shows the resulting
step; if not, the compile or download block size of the program and data block.
operation exits.
3. Send blocks to CPU across communi- Communication Errors
cation network for PLC compile. To download (Editor to PLC) or upload (PLC to
Editor), PLC communication must be operating
properly. Make sure your network hardware and
PLC connector cable are working.
4. PLC compile The PLC Compiler verifies that the PLC hard-
If PLC compile succeeds, control ware supports all program instructions, ranges,
passes to the next step; if not, down- and structure.
load exits with error(s). Click the PLC button from the Information area
of the PLC menu to view the first compile error
found.
5. Program is in CPU permanent memory Fatal Errors (Page 661) and non-fatal run-time
and ready to be executed in RUN errors (Page 657) are accessible from the In-
mode. formation area of the PLC menu.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
If the download attempt produces compiler errors or download errors, correct the errors and
reattempt the download.
See also
Program edit in RUN mode
Uploading project components (Page 77)
4.3.2 Uploading project components

To upload project components from the PLC to a STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART program
editor, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that your network hardware and PLC connector cable are working (Page 27), and
that PLC communication is operating properly (Page 465).
2. To upload all project components, click the Upload button from the Transfer section of the
File or PLC menu ribbon strip, or press the shortcut key combination CTRL+U.
3. To upload selected project components, click the down arrow under the Upload button,
and then select the specific project component you want to upload (Program Block, Data
Block, or System Block).
4. If you see a Communications dialog, select the Network Interface Card and the IP
address of the PLC from which you want to upload.
5. From the Upload dialog, you can change your selection for which blocks to upload if you
choose.
6. Optionally click the "Close dialog on success" check box if you want the dialog to
automatically close after a successful upload
7. Click the "Upload" button to start the upload.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART copies the complete program or program components that you
selected for uploading from the PLC to the currently open project. The status icon indicates
informational messages, or whether potential problems or errors occurred with the upload.
The status message provides specific results of the operation.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
If the upload is successful, you can save the uploaded program, or make further changes.
The PLC does not contain symbol or status chart information; hence, you cannot upload a
symbol table or status chart.
Note
Uploading into a new project is a risk-free way to capture the program block, system block,
and/or data block information. Since the project is empty, you cannot inadvertently destroy
data. If you want to make use of material from a status chart or symbol table that are in
another project, you can always open a second instance of STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART and
copy that information in from the other project file (Page 93).
Uploading into an existing project is useful if you want to overwrite all modifications that have
been made to the program since it was downloaded (Page 75) to the PLC. Uploading into an
existing project does, however, overwrite any additions or modifications you have made to
the project. Use this option, only if you want to completely overwrite your
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project with the project stored in the PLC.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART does not upload comments, but if you currently have a program
with comments open in the program editor, the comments are retained. Take care if
uploading over an existing project and use this method only if the projects are similar.
4.3.3 Types of storage

The CPU provides a variety of features to ensure that your user program and data are
properly retained.
Retentive memory: selectable areas of memory that remain unchanged over a power
cycle. Retentive memory can be configured in the system data block. V, M, and current
values to timers and counters are the only memory areas that can be configured to be
retentive.
Permanent memory: memory used to store the program block, data block, system block,
forced values, as well as values configured to be retentive.
Memory card: removable microSDHC card used to store the projects blocks as a program
transfer card (Page 81), to completely erase the PLC as a restore-to-factory-defaults card
(Page 147), or to update the PLC and expansion module firmware as a firmware update
card (Page 79).
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.3.4 Using a memory card
Using a memory card

The S7-200 SMART CPUs support the use of a microSDHC card for:
User program transfer (Page 81)
Reset CPU to factory default condition (Page 147)
Firmware update of the CPU and attached expansion modules as supported
You can use any standard, commercial microSDHC card with a capacity in the range 4GB to
16GB.
The following CPU behaviors are common, regardless of the memory card usage:
1. Inserting a memory card into a CPU in RUN mode causes the CPU to automatically
transition to STOP mode.
2. A CPU cannot advance to RUN mode if a memory card is inserted.
3. Memory card evaluation is performed only after a CPU power-up or warm restart.
Therefore, program transfer and firmware update can only occur after a CPU power-up or
warm restart.
4. The memory card can be used to store files and folders not related to program transfer
and firmware update usage as long as their names do not conflict with the file and folder
names used for program transfer and firmware update usage.
WARNING
Verify that the CPU is not actively running a process before installing the memory card.
Installing the memory card will cause the CPU to go to STOP mode, which could affect
the operation of an online process or machine. Unexpected operation of a process or
machine could result in death or injury to personnel and/or property damage.
Before inserting the memory card, always ensure that the CPU is offline and in a safe
state.
Program transfer card

A memory card can be used to transfer user program content into the CPU permanent
memory, completely or partially replacing content already in the load memory.
To be used for program transfer purposes, the memory card is organized as follows:
Table 4- 21 Memory card used for program transfer card
At the root level of the card

File: S7_JOB.S7S A text file containing the word TO_ILM
Folder: SIMATIC.S7S A folder containing user program files to be transferred to the CPU
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
Reset to factory defaults card

A memory card can be used to erase all retained data, putting the CPU back into a factory
default condition.
To be used for reset to factory default purposes, the memory card is organized as follows:
At the root of the card

File: S7_JOB.S7S A text file containing the word RESET_TO_FACTORY
Firmware update card

A memory card can be used to update the firmware in a CPU and any connected expansion
modules.
To be used for firmware update purposes, the memory card is organized as follows:
Table 4- 22 Memory card used for firmware update purposes
At the root level of the card

File: S7_JOB.S7S A text file containing the word FWUPDATE
Folder: FWUPDATE.S7S A folder containing update files (.upd) for each device to be updated
After power-up, if the CPU detects the presence of a memory card, then it locates and opens
the S7_JOB.SYS file on the card. If the FWUPDATE string is discovered in that file, then the
CPU enters a firmware update sequence.
The CPU examines each update file (.upd) in the FWUPDATE.S7S folder and if the order ID
contained in the update file name matches the order ID (MLFB) of a connected device (CPU,
expansion module or signal board), then the firmware of that device is replaced with the
firmware content contained within the update file.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.3.5 Inserting a memory card in the CPU
Table 4- 23 Inserting and removing a memory card in the CPU
Task Procedure
Follow the steps below to insert the microSDHC
memory card into the CPU.
1. Open the bottom terminal block connector
cover.
2. Insert the microSDHC memory card in the
memory card slot (marked X50) located
above the terminal block connectors.
3. Replace the terminal block connector cover
after inserting the card to ensure that the card
is secure.
Follow the steps below to remove the mi-
croSDHC memory card from the CPU.
1. Open the bottom terminal block connector
cover.
2. Grasp the microSDHC memory card from the
CPU and pull it out of the card slot (marked
Micro-SD X50).
3. Replace the bottom terminal block cover.
4.3.6 Transferring your program with a memory card

S7-200 SMART CPUs support standard, commercial microSDHC cards with a capacity
ranging from 4 GB to 16 GB using the FAT32 file system format. You can use a microSDHC
card as a program transfer card for portable storage for your program and project data.
WARNING
Verify that the CPU is not running a process before inserting the memory card.
Inserting a memory card into a CPU in RUN mode causes the CPU to automatically
transition to STOP mode.
Inserting a memory card into a running CPU can cause disruption to process operation,
possibly resulting in death or severe personal injury.
Always ensure that the CPU is in STOP mode (Page 36) prior to inserting a memory card.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
Creating a program transfer memory card

To program the memory card as a program transfer card, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that your network hardware and PLC connector cable are working, the CPU is
powered on and in STOP mode, and that PLC communication is operating properly
(Page 27).
2. If not already inserted, insert a microSDHC memory card in the CPU. You can insert or
remove the memory card while the CPU is powered on.
3. Download (Page 35) the program to the PLC, if not already downloaded.
4. Click the Program button from the Memory Card area of the PLC menu ribbon strip.
5. Select which of the following blocks (or all) to store on the memory card:
Program block
Data block
System Block (PLC configuration)
6. Click the Program button.
7. Enter the password (Page 124) if one is required for programming the memory card.
Note
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART first erases any SIMATIC content on the card prior to
transferring the program to the card. Any other data on the card that you've stored using
a card reader and Windows Explorer is left undisturbed.
Note also that you cannot change the CPU to RUN mode if a memory card is inserted.
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
Restoring the program from a program transfer memory card

To copy the contents of the program transfer card to the PLC, you must cycle the power to
the CPU with the program transfer card inserted. The CPU then performs the following tasks:
1. Clears RAM
2. Copies the user program, the system block (PLC configuration), and the data block from
the memory card to CPU permanent memory.
While the copy operation is in progress, the STOP and RUN LEDs on the S7-200 SMART
CPU alternately flash. When the S7-200 SMART CPU completes the copy operation, the
LEDs stop flashing.
Note
Program transfer card compatibility
Restoring a program transfer card that you created on a different CPU model might fail due
to the differences in model types. During the restore process, the CPU validates the
following characteristics of the program content stored on the memory card:
Size of program block
Size of V memory specified in the data block
Quantity of onboard digital I/O configured in the system block (Page 115)
Each retentive range that is configured in the system block
Expansion module and signal board configurations in the system block
Axis of Motion configurations in the system block
Forced memory locations
Note
In addition to using a memory card as a program transfer card, you can also create a reset-
to-factory-defaults memory card.
See also
Creating a reset-to-factory-defaults memory card (Page 147)
S7-200 SMART
PLC concepts
4.3.7 Restoring data after power on

When CPU power is applied:
The CPU restores the program block and the system block from permanent memory.
Up to 10 Kbytes of retentive memory assignments are restored.
The non-retentive portions of V memory are restored from the contents of the data block
in permanent memory.
The non-retentive portions of other memory areas are cleared.

The CPU has two modes of operation: STOP mode and RUN mode. The status LEDs on the
front of the CPU indicates the current mode of operation. In STOP mode, the CPU is not
executing the program, and you can download program blocks. In RUN mode, the CPU is
executing the program; however, you can download program blocks.
Placing the CPU in RUN mode

1. Click the "RUN" button on either the PLC menu ribbon strip or on the program editor
toolbar:
2. When prompted, click "OK" to change the operating mode of the CPU.
You can monitor the program in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART by clicking the "Program Status"
button from the "Debug" menu ribbon strip, or from the program editor toolbar.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART displays the values for the instructions.
Placing the CPU in STOP mode

To stop the program, click the "STOP" button and acknowledge the prompt to place the
CPU in STOP mode. You can also place a STOP instruction (Page 312) in your program
logic to put the CPU in STOP mode.
S7-200 SMART
Programming concepts 5
5.1 Guidelines for designing a PLC system
There are many methods for designing a PLC system. The following general guidelines can
apply to many design projects. Of course, you must follow the directives of your own
company's procedures and the accepted practices of your own training and location.
Partition your process or machine

Divide your process or machine into sections that have a level of independence from each
other. These partitions determine the boundaries between controllers and influence the
functional description specifications and the assignment of resources.
Create the functional specifications

Write the descriptions of operation for each section of the process or machine. Include the
following topics: I/O points, functional description of the operation, states that must be
achieved before allowing action for each actuator (such as solenoids, motors, and drives),
description of the operator interface, and any interfaces with other sections of the process or
machine.
Design the safety circuits

Identify equipment requiring hard-wired logic for safety. Control devices can fail in an unsafe
manner, producing unexpected startup or change in the operation of machinery. Where
unexpected or incorrect operation of the machinery could result in physical injury to people
or significant property damage, consideration should be given to the use of electro-
mechanical overrides which operate independently of the CPU to prevent unsafe operations.
The following tasks should be included in the design of safety circuits:
Identify improper or unexpected operation of actuators that could be hazardous.
Identify the conditions that would assure the operation is not hazardous, and determine
how to detect these conditions independently of the CPU.
Identify how the CPU and I/O affect the process when power is applied and removed, and
when errors are detected. This information should only be used for designing for the
normal and expected abnormal operation, and should not be relied on for safety
purposes.
Design manual or electro-mechanical safety overrides that block the hazardous operation
independent of the CPU.
Provide appropriate status information from the independent circuits to the CPU so that
the program and any operator interfaces have necessary information.
Identify any other safety-related requirements for safe operation of the process.
S7-200 SMART
Programming concepts
5.1 Guidelines for designing a PLC system
Specify the operator stations

Based on the requirements of the functional specifications, create drawings of the operator
stations. Include the following items:
Overview showing the location of each operator station in relation to the process or
machine
Mechanical layout of the devices, such as display, switches, and lights, for the operator
station
Electrical drawings with the associated I/O of the CPU or expansion module
Create the configuration drawings

Based on the requirements of the functional specification, create configuration drawings of
the control equipment. Include the following items:
Overview showing the location of each CPU in relation to the process or machine
Mechanical layout of the CPU and expansion I/O modules (including cabinets and other
equipment)
Electrical drawings for each CPU and expansion I/O module (including the device model
numbers, communications addresses, and I/O addresses)
Create a list of symbolic names (optional)

If you choose to use symbolic names for addressing, create a list of symbolic names for the
absolute addresses. Include not only the physical I/O signals, but also the other elements to
be used in your program.
S7-200 SMART
5.2 Elements of the user program

A program organizational unit (POU) is composed of executable code and comments. The
executable code consists of a main program and any subroutines or interrupt routines. The
code is compiled and downloaded to the CPU. You can use the program organizational units
(main program, subroutines, and interrupt routines) to structure your user program.
The main body of the user program contains the instructions that control your application.
The CPU executes these instructions sequentially, once per scan cycle.
Subroutines are optional elements of your program which are executed only when called:
by the main program, by an interrupt routine, or by another subroutine. Subroutines are
useful in cases where you want to execute a function repeatedly. Rather than rewriting
the logic for each place in the main program where you want the function to occur, you
can write the logic once in a subroutine and call the subroutine as many times as needed
during the main program. Subroutines provide several benefits:
Using subroutines reduces the overall size of your program.
Using subroutines decreases your scan time because you have moved the code out of
the main program. The CPU evaluates the code in the main program every scan
cycle, whether the code is executed or not, but the CPU evaluates the code in the
subroutine only when you call the subroutine, and does not evaluate the code during
the scans in which the subroutine is not called.
Using subroutines creates code that is portable. You can isolate the code for a
function in a subroutine, and then copy that subroutine into other programs with little
or no rework.
Note
Using V memory addresses can limit the portability of your subroutine, because it is
possible for V memory address assignment from one program to conflict with an
assignment in another program. Subroutines that use the local variable table
(L memory) for all address assignments, by contrast, are highly portable because
there is no concern about address conflicts between the subroutine and another part
of the program when using local variables.
S7-200 SMART
Interrupt routines are optional elements of your program that react to specific interrupt
events. You design an interrupt routine to handle a pre-defined interrupt event. Whenever
the specified event occurs, the CPU executes the interrupt routine.
The interrupt routines are not called by your main program. You associate an interrupt
routine with an interrupt event, and the CPU executes the instructions in the interrupt
routine only on each occurrence of the interrupt event.
Note
Because it is not possible to predict when the CPU might generate an interrupt, it is
desirable to limit the number of variables that are used both by the interrupt routine and
elsewhere in the program.
Use the local variable table of the interrupt routine to ensure that your interrupt routine
uses only the temporary memory and does not overwrite data used somewhere else in
your program.
There are a number of programming techniques you can use to ensure that data is
correctly shared between your main program and the interrupt routines. Refer to the
descriptions of the Interrupt instructions (Page 282).
Other blocks contain information for the CPU. You can choose to download these blocks
when you download your program:
System Block: The system block allows you to configure different hardware options for
the CPU.
Data Block: The DB stores the initial values for different variables (V memory) used by
your program.
S7-200 SMART
The following example shows a program that includes a subroutine and an interrupt routine.
This sample program uses a timed interrupt for reading the value of an analog input every
100 ms.
Table 5- 1 Sample program with a subroutine and an interrupt routine
Main Network 1 On first scan, call subrou-

LD SM0.1 tine 0.
CALL SBR_0
SBR 0 Network 1 Set the interval to 100 ms

LD SM0.0 for the timed interrupt.
MOVB 100, SMB34 Enable interrupt 0.
ATCH INT_0, 10
ENI
INT 0 Network 1 Sample the value of analog

LD SM0.0 input AI4.
MOVW AIW4,VW100
S7-200 SMART
5.3 Creating your user program

The STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART user interface provides a convenient working space for
creating your user project program. (STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART projects are files with a
.smart file name extension.) To open the user interface, double-click the
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART icon, or select "STEP 7-MicroWIN SMART" from the "SIMATIC"
element on the "Start" menu.
5.3.1 Earlier versions of STEP 7-Micro/WIN projects

To work with a project that was created in STEP 7-Micro/WIN Version 4.0 or greater, follow
these steps:
Click the Open button from the Operations area of the File menu ribbon strip and select
the desired project.
Correct program as needed.
S7-200 SMART
You cannot open projects created with a version earlier than STEP 7-Micro/WIN Version 4.0.
If you attempt to open such a project, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART informs you that you
cannot open it.
Note
Opening projects created with an older version
Projects created by earlier versions of STEP 7-Micro/WIN (.mwp files) might contain one
or more logical constructs that STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART (.smart files) does not support.
If older projects contain instructions that are not supported by
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, these instructions are omitted from the project when you
open them in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART. You must take care to examine your project
and redesign sections where logic was omitted.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART ignores the system block of the old project and uses a default
system block for the opened project.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART omits all wizard-generated program blocks of the old project.
If an earlier version of STEP 7-Micro/WIN (.mwp file) uses symbolic SM addressing in the
OB, and the System Symbols table is generated, the symbols will map properly to the
new addresses. However, if the .mwp file uses absolute SM addressing in the OB, those
absolute SM addresses will not map to the new SM addresses. Refer to Symbol table
(Page 100) or Special memory (Page 665) for further information.
You cannot use Open to open a project that resides on a PLC; the project file must reside
on your personal computer/ programming device.
You can only open one project for each instance of STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART. You
must run two instances of STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to have two projects open at the
same time. When two instances are open, you can copy and paste LAD/ FBD program
elements and STL text from one project to the other.
You can define a default path to a specific file directory where you want new
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART projects to be opened and saved. Click the Options button
from the Settings area of the Tools menu ribbon strip; click the General options, and from
the Defaults tab enter the default file location.
WARNING
Risks with STEP 7-Micro/WIN Version 4.0 or greater (.mwp files) with absolute special
memory (SM) addressing
OB, and the System Symbols table is generated, the symbols will map properly to the new
addresses. However, if the .mwp file uses absolute SM addressing in the OB, those
absolute SM addresses will not map to the new SM addresses.
This incorrect mapping of SM addresses can result in unexpected machine or process
operation, which may cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to
equipment.
Delete the "S7-200 Symbols" table and generate a SMART "System Symbols" table. The
symbols in the OB will map to the new SM address scheme in the SMART System Symbols
table.
S7-200 SMART
5.3.2 Using STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART user interface

The STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART user interface appears below. Note that each editing
window can be docked or floated and arranged on the screen as you choose. You can
display each window separately, as shown below, or you can combine windows such that
each one is accessible from a separate tab:
Quick access toolbar (Page 93)

Project tree (Page 93)
Navigation bar (Page 93)
Menus (Page 93)
Program editor (Page 93)
Symbol information table (Page 100)
Symbol table (Page 100)
Status bar (Page 93)
Output window (Page 93)
Status chart (Page 460)
Variable table (Page 104)
Data block (Page 97)
Cross reference (Page 454)
S7-200 SMART
5.3.3 Using STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to create your programs
Quick access toolbar

The quick access toolbar appears just above the menu tabs. The quick access file button
provides quick and easy access to most of the functions of the File menu, and to recent
documents. The other buttons on the quick access toolbar are for the file functions New,
Open, Save, and Print.
Project tree
The project tree displays all of the project objects and the instructions for creating your
control program. You can drag and drop individual instructions from the tree into your
program, or you can double-click an instruction to insert it at the current location of the cursor
in the program editor.
The Project tree organizes your project:
Right-click the Program Block folder to insert new subroutines and interrupt routines.
Open the Program Block folder and right-click a POU to open the POU, edit its properties,
password-protect it, or rename it.
Right-click a Status Chart or Symbol Table folder to insert new charts or tables.
Open the Status Chart or Symbol Table folder and right-click the icon in the instruction
tree or double-click the appropriate POU tab to open it, rename it, or delete it.
Navigation bar
The Navigation bar appears at the top of the project tree and provides quick access to
objects on the project tree. Clicking a navigation bar button is equivalent to expanding the
project tree and clicking the same selection. The navigation bar presents groups of icons for
accessing different programming features of STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART.
Menu ribbon strips

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART displays a menu ribbon strip for each menu. You can minimize
the menu ribbon strip to save space by right-clicking in the menu ribbon strip area and
selecting "Minimize the Ribbon".
S7-200 SMART
Program editor
The program editor contains the program logic and a variable table where you can assign
symbolic names for temporary program variables. Subroutines and interrupt routines appear
as tabs at the top of the program editor window. Click the tabs to move between the
subroutines, interrupts, and the main program.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides three editors for creating your program:
Ladder logic (LAD)
Statement list (STL)
Function block diagram (FBD)
With some restrictions, programs written in any of these program editors can be viewed and
edited with the other program editors.
You can change the editor to LAD, FBD, or STL from the Editor section of the View menu
ribbon strip. You can configure the default editor at startup from the Options button of the
Settings area of the Tools menu ribbon strip.
Status bar
The status bar, which is located at the bottom of the main window, provides information on
the editing mode or online status operations that you perform in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART.
Output window
The Output Window keeps a list of the most recently compiled POUs (Page 843) and any
errors that occurred during the compilation. If you have the Program Editor window open as
well as the Output Window, you can double-click an error message in the Output Window to
scroll your program automatically to the network where the error is located.
5.3.4 Using wizards to help you create your control program

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides the following wizards to make aspects of your
programming easier and more automatic:
High speed counter
Motion
PID
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
Text Display
Get/Put
Data Log
To start a wizard, select that wizard from the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART Tools menu ribbon
strip or from the Wizards node in the project tree. You can press F1 when a wizard is
displayed and get wizard details from the online Help system.
S7-200 SMART
5.3.5 Features of the LAD editor
The LAD editor displays the program

as a graphical representation similar
to electrical wiring diagrams.
The LAD program emulates the flow of
electric current from a power source
through a series of logical input condi-
tions that in turn enable logical output
conditions.
A LAD program includes a left power rail that is energized. Contacts that are closed allow
energy to flow through them to the next element, and contacts that are open block that
energy flow. The logic is separated into networks. The program is executed one network at a
time, from left to right and then top to bottom as dictated by the program.
The various instructions are represented by graphic symbols and include three basic forms:
Contacts represent logic input conditions such as switches, buttons, or internal
conditions.
Coils usually represent logic output results such as lamps, motor starters, interposing
relays, or internal output conditions.
Boxes represent additional instructions, such as timers, counters, or math instructions.
Consider these main points when you select the LAD editor:
Ladder logic is easy for beginning programmers to use.
Graphical representation is easy to understand and is popular around the world.
You can always use the STL editor to display a program created with the SIMATIC LAD
editor.
S7-200 SMART
5.3.6 Features of the FBD editor
The FBD editor displays the program as a graphical rep-

resentation that resembles common logic gate diagrams.
There are no contacts and coils as found in the LAD edi-
tor, but there are equivalent instructions that appear as
box instructions.
FBD does not use the concept of left and right power rails; therefore, the term "logic flow" is
used to express the analogous concept of control flow through the FBD logic blocks.
The logic "1" path through FBD elements is called logic flow. The origin of a logic flow input
and the destination of a logic flow output can be assigned directly to an operand.
The program logic is derived from the connections between these box instructions. That is,
the output from one instruction (such as an AND box) can be used to enable another
instruction (such as a timer) to create the necessary control logic. This connection concept
allows you to solve a wide variety of logic problems.
Consider these main points when you select the FBD editor:
The graphical logic gate style of representation is good for following program flow.
You can always use the STL editor to display a program created with the SIMATIC FBD
editor.
5.3.7 Features of the STL editor

The STL editor displays the program as a text-based language. The STL editor allows you to
create control programs by entering the instruction mnemonics. The STL editor also allows
you to create programs that you could not otherwise create with the LAD or FBD editors.
This is because you are programming in the native language of the CPU, rather than in a
graphical editor where some restrictions must be applied in order to draw the diagrams
correctly. As shown in the following example, this text-based concept is very similar to
assembly language programming.
Table 5- 2 Sample STL user program
LD I0.0 // Read one input (I0.0).

A I0.1 // AND with another input (Q1.0).
= Q1.0 // Write the value to an output 1.
The CPU executes each instruction in the order dictated by the program, from top to bottom,
and then restarts at the top.
STL uses a logic stack to resolve the control logic. You insert the STL instructions for
handling the stack operations.
S7-200 SMART
5.4 Data block (DB) editor
Consider these main points when you select the STL editor:
STL is most appropriate for experienced programmers.
STL sometimes allows you to solve problems that you cannot solve very easily with the
LAD or FBD editor.
While you can always use the STL editor to view or edit a program that was created with
the LAD or FBD editors, the reverse is not always true. You cannot always use the LAD
or FBD editors to display a program that was written with the STL editor.

The data block allows you to assign constants (Page 69) (either numeric values or character
strings) to specific locations of V memory. You can make value assignments to byte (V or
VB), word (VW), or double word (VD) addresses. You can also enter optional comments,
preceded by // double forward slashes.
The first line of the data block must have an explicit address assignment. You can use a
memory address (absolute address) or a symbol name from the symbol table (Page 100)
that you have previously assigned to an address (symbolic address).
Subsequent lines can have explicit or implicit address assignments. An implicit address
assignment is made by the editor when you type multiple data values after a single
address assignment, or type a line that contains only data values. The editor assigns an
appropriate amount of V memory based on your previous address allocations and the
size (byte, word, or double word) of the data value(s).
The data block editor is a free-form text editor; however, it expects an address or symbol
name in the first position. If you are continuing an implicit data value entry, enter at least
one space in the address position before entering the implicit data value assignment.
After you finish typing a line and press the ENTER key, the data block editor formats the
line (aligns columns of addresses, data, and comments; capitalizes V memory addresses)
and redisplays it. The data block editor accepts uppercase or lowercase letters and
allows commas, tabs, or spaces to serve as separators between addresses and data
values.
Pressing CTRLENTER after completing an assignment line auto-increments the address
to the next available address.
S7-200 SMART
Example: Data block page
Note: Enter a space before the data values on the lines where you enter no explicit address.
Example: Direct address and number values
S7-200 SMART
Example: Symbolic address and symbolic number assignment
Example: Alternate binary entry methods and resultant binary assignment

You can enter values of 1 or 0 for binary assignments, or "true", "false", "on" or "off" (in either
lower, upper, or mixed case). The data block editor interprets your entry and shows the
resultant binary assignment.
S7-200 SMART
5.5 Symbol table
5.5 Symbol table

A symbol is a symbolic name you assign to a memory address or a constant. You can create
symbol names for the following memory types: I, Q, M, SM, AI, AQ, V, S, C, T, HC. Symbols
defined in the symbol table are global in scope. You can use your defined symbols in all of
the Program Organizational Units (Page 87) (POUs) of your program. If you make a variable
name assignment in a variable table (Page 104), the variable is local in scope. It only applies
to the POU where you defined it. This type of symbol is referred to as a "local variable" to
differentiate it from symbols that are global in scope. You can define symbols either before or
after you create your program logic.
WARNING
equipment.
table.
Opening a symbol table

To open a symbol table, use one of the following methods:
Click the Symbol Table button on the navigation bar (Page 23).
Select "Symbol Table" from the component drop down list in the Windows area of the
View menu.
Open the Symbol Table Folder in the project tree (Page 29), select a table name, then
press Enter or double-click the table name.
You can also use symbols from the System symbol table in your project. The pre-defined
table of system symbols provides access to commonly used PLC system functions. PLC
system symbols associate a function name with the PLC special memory locations used to
invoke that function.
S7-200 SMART
5.5 Symbol table
Assigning symbols in the symbol table

To assign a symbol to an address or constant value, follow the procedure below:
1. Open the symbol table.
2. Type the symbol name (for example, Input1) in the Symbol column. The maximum
number of characters in a symbol name is 23 single-byte characters.
Note
Until you assign an address or constant value to the symbol, it appears as an undefined
symbol (green wavy underline). After you complete the Address column assignment,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART removes the green wavy underline.
If you have selected to view both symbolic and absolute view of operands for your
project, lengthy symbol names are truncated with a tilde (~) in the program editor. You
can place your mouse pointer over the truncated name to see the entire name displayed
in a tooltip.
3. Type the address or constant value (for example, VB0 or 123) in the Address column.
Note that to assign a string constant to a symbol, you enclose the string constant in
double quotation marks.
4. Optionally, type in a comment up to a maximum of 79 characters.
You can resize the width of the columns in the symbol table editor as needed.
Note
You can create multiple symbol tables; however, you cannot use the same symbol name
more than once as a global symbol assignment.
By contrast, you can reuse symbol names in variable tables.
Syntax rules and indication of errors

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART indicates erroneous or incomplete symbol assignments with
color and wavy underlining:
Red text indicates invalid syntax.

A symbol cannot begin with a numeral.
VBB0 is an invalid address.
Begin is a reserved word and invalid as a symbol name.
A red wavy underline indicates invalid use.

Pump1 and SymConstant are duplicate symbol names.
I0.0 is a duplicate address.
A green wavy underline indicates an undefined symbol.

Pump1 has no address.
S7-200 SMART
5.5 Symbol table
Observe the following syntax rules when defining symbols:

Symbolic names can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and extended
characters from ASCII 128 to ASCII 255. The first character cannot be a numeral.
Use double quotation marks to enclose an ASCII constant string that you assign to a
symbol name.
Use single quotation marks to enclose an ASCII character constant in byte, word, or
double word memory.
Do not use keywords as symbol names.
The maximum length for a symbol name is 23 characters.
Note
When you correct an erroneous symbol name or address, press the TAB key, ENTER
key, or an ARROW key to complete the edited correction.
Indirect addressing
When referencing a symbol in the program editor, you can use indirect notation (& and *)
with symbol names as with direct addresses. For more information about indirect addressing,
see the topic on direct and indirect addressing.
Viewing overlapped and unused symbols

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART indicates overlapped symbols with the icon and unused
symbols with the icon. In the symbol table below, symbols S1 and S2 overlap the VB0
memory address. Also, symbol S1 is not used in the project.
Inserting additional rows

Use one of the following methods to insert additional rows in the symbol table:
Right-click a cell of the symbol table and select Insert>Row from the context menu.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART inserts a new row above the current location.
From the Insert area of the Edit menu ribbon strip, select "Row".
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART inserts a new row above the current location of the cursor in
the symbol table.
To insert a new row at the bottom of the Symbol Table, place the cursor in any cell of the
last row and press the DOWN ARROW key.
S7-200 SMART
5.5 Symbol table
Sorting a symbol table

You can sort a symbol table by the Symbol or by the Address column in either ascending or
descending alphabetical order. In the Address column, numeric constants sort above string
constants, which sort above addresses.
To sort a column, click either the Symbol or Address column header to sort by that value. To
reverse the order of the sort, click the column again. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART displays an
up or down arrow next to the column that is sorted to indicate the sort selection.
Note
You can print symbol tables from the Print area of the File menu ribbon strip.
You can view symbols on a network-by-network basis by displaying the symbol information
table.
S7-200 SMART
5.6 Variable table
5.6 Variable table

A variable table allows you to define variables that are local to a specific POU. The following
situations define when to use a local variable:
You want to create portable subroutines that do not make references to absolute
addresses or global symbols.
You want to use interim variables (local variables declared as TEMP) to perform
calculations in order to free up PLC memory.
You want to define inputs and outputs for your subroutines.
If these descriptions do not fit your situation, you do not need to use local variables; you can
make all of your symbolic values global by defining them in the symbol table (Page 100).
Understanding local variables

You can use the variable table of the program editor to assign variables that are unique to an
individual subroutine or interrupt routine.
Local variables can be used as parameters that are passed in to a subroutine and can be
used to increase the portability or reuse of a subroutine.
Each POU (Page 87) in your program has its own variable table, with 64 bytes of L memory
(60 bytes if you are programming in LAD or FBD). These local variable tables allow you to
define variables that are restricted in scope: a local variable is only valid inside the POU
where it was created. By contrast, global symbols, which are valid in every POU, can only be
defined in the symbol table. In cases where you use the same symbolic name (e.g., INPUT1)
for a global symbol and a local variable, the local definition takes precedence inside the POU
where the local variable has been defined and the global definition is used in the other
POUs.
You assign a declaration type (TEMP, IN, IN_OUT, or OUT) and a data type, but not a
memory address, when you make assignments in a Local Variable Table; the Program
Editor automatically assigns memory locations in L memory for all local variables.
A variable table symbolic address assignment associates a symbol name with an L memory
address, where the data value of concern is stored. The Local Variable Table does not
support symbolic constants that assign a value directly to a symbol name (this is allowed in
the Symbol\Global Variable tables).
Note
Local data values are not initialized to zero by the PLC. You must initialize the local variables
that you use, in your program logic.
S7-200 SMART
5.6 Variable table
Declaration types for local variables

The type of local variable assignment you can make depends on the POU where you are
making the assignment. The main program (OB1), interrupt routines, and subroutines can
use temporary (TEMP) variables. Temporary variables are only available while the block is
being executed and are then free to be overwritten when the block is completed.
Data values can be passed as parameters in and out of a subroutine as follows:
If you want to pass a data value into a subroutine, then create a variable in the
subroutine's variable table and specify its declaration type as IN.
If you want to pass a data value established in the subroutine back to the calling routine,
then create a variable in the subroutine's variable table and specify its declaration type as
OUT.
If you want to pass an initial data value into a subroutine, perform an operation that may
modify the data value, and pass the modified result back to the calling routine, then
create a variable in the subroutine's variable table and specify its declaration type as
IN_OUT.
Declaration type Description

IN Input parameter provided by the calling POU.
OUT Output parameter returned to the calling POU.
IN_OUT Parameter whose value is supplied by the calling POU, modified by the subrou-
tine, and then returned to the calling POU.
TEMP Temporary variable that is saved temporarily in the local data stack. Once the
POU has been executed completely, the value of the temporary variable is no
longer available. Temporary variables do not keep their value between POU exe-
cutions.
Data type checking for local variables

When you pass local variables as parameters for a subroutine, the data type that you have
assigned in the Local Variable Table of that subroutine must match the data type of the value
in the calling POU.
Example
You call SBR0 from OB1, using a global symbol called INPUT1 as an input parameter of the
subroutine.
Inside the Local Variable Table of SBR0, you have defined a local variable called FIRST as
an input parameter.
When OB1 calls SBR0, the value of INPUT1 is passed to FIRST.
The data types of INPUT1 and FIRST must match.
If INPUT1 is a REAL and FIRST is a REAL, the data types match. If INPUT1 is a REAL but
FIRST is an INT, the data types do not match and the program cannot be compiled until this
error is corrected.
S7-200 SMART
5.6 Variable table
Viewing the variable table

To view the variable table for the POU selected in the program editor, select "Variable table"
from the Component drop-down list in the Windows area of the View menu.
Note
You can put the variable table on the quick access toolbar (Page 87) for easy access.
Making assignments in the variable table
Note
Make the assignments in the variable table before using local variables in your program.
When you use symbolic names in your program, the program editor checks first the Local
Variable Table of the appropriate POU, and then the symbol table. If the symbolic name is
undefined in both places, the program editor treats it as an undefined global symbol which is
indicated by a green wavy underline. The program editor does not automatically re-read the
variable table and make corrections to your program logic. If you later make a data type
assignment that defines that symbolic name (in the local variable table), you must manually
insert a pound symbol (#) in front of the name, like this: #UndefinedLocalVar (in the program
logic). For this reason, declaring the variables prior to usage minimizes the programming
effort.
The maximum limit of input/ output parameters for each subroutine call is 16. If you attempt
to download a program that exceeds this limit, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART returns an error.
S7-200 SMART
5.6 Variable table
To make an assignment in a variable table, follow the procedure below.

1. Ensure that the correct POU is displayed in the Program Editor window by clicking, if
necessary, on the tab of the desired POU. (Since every POU has its own variable table,
you need to make sure that you are making assignments to the correct POU.)
2. Display the variable table if it is not already visible by selecting "Variable Table" from the
Component drop-down list in the Windows area of the view menu.
3. Choose a row that has the right variable type for the kind of variable that you want to
define, and type a name for the variable in the Symbol field. If you are making an
assignment in OB1 or an interrupt routine, the variable table contains only TEMP
variables. If you are making an assignment in a subroutine, the variable table contains IN,
IN_OUT, OUT, and TEMP variables. Do not preface the name with a pound symbol in the
variable table. Pound symbols are only used to precede local variables in the program
code.
Note
Local variable names are permitted to contain a maximum of 23 alphanumeric characters
and underscores. They are also permitted to contain extended characters (ASCII 128 to
ASCII 255). The first character is restricted to alpha and extended characters only. It is
illegal to use keywords as symbolic names, or to use names that begin with a number or
contain characters that are not alphanumeric or in the extended character set.
Local variable names are downloaded and stored in CPU memory. The use of longer
variable names may reduce the memory available to store your program.
4. Click the mouse pointer in the Data Type field and use the list box to select an
appropriate data type for the local variable.
Note
When you assign local variables as parameters for subroutines, you must ensure that the
data type that you assign to the local variable does not conflict with the operand being
used in the subroutine call.
5. Optionally provide a comment describing your local variable.

After you supply a value for the Symbol and Data Type fields, the Program Editor
automatically assigns an L memory address to the local variable.
Entering additional variables

The variable table displays a fixed number of rows for local variables. To add more rows to
the table, select a row in the table of the variable type that you want to add and click the
Insert button in the variable table window. A new row is automatically generated above
the row you selected, and is for the same variable type that you selected.
You can also add rows by right-clicking an existing row and selecting Insert > Row or Insert
> Row Below from the context menu.
S7-200 SMART
5.6 Variable table
Deleting variables
To delete a local variable, select it in the variable table and click the Delete button .
Alternatively you can delete a row by right-clicking it and selecting Delete > Row from the
context menu.
Variable table example

The following example shows a typical variable table for SBR_0, and then a call to SBR_0
from another program block.
See also
Programming software (Page 23)
S7-200 SMART
5.7 PLC error reaction
Click the PLC but-

ton from the Infor-
mation section of
the PLC menu
ribbon strip, to see
the current error
status.
To identify specific
errors, refer to the
error code lists
(Page 657).
When the "Devices" entry of the tree is selected, then summary error status for the CPU and
any expansion modules is displayed. To show detailed error information for each device,
select the device name in the tree.
Error and status information:
The "Last Fatal" field shows the previous fatal error code generated by the CPU. This
value is retained over power cycles. This location is cleared whenever all memory of the
CPU is cleared.
Selecting the Event log entry in the tree displays the CPU's stored event history, including
events such as power up, power down, errors, and mode transitions. The time of events
is also listed.
The PLC also provides SM bits for programmed reactions to errors. Refer to the listing of
the SM bits (Page 665).
The GET_ERROR (Get non-fatal error code) program instruction returns the PLC's
current non-fatal error code and clears the non-fatal error information latched in the PLC.
Refer to the GET_ERROR instruction (Page 313) for details.
S7-200 SMART
5.7.1 Non-fatal errors and I/O errors

The CPU does not change to STOP mode when it detects a non-fatal error. It only logs the
event in SM memory and continues with the execution of your program. However, you can
design your program to force the CPU to STOP mode when a non-fatal error is detected.
The following sample program shows a network of a program that is monitoring two of the
global non-fatal error bits and changes the CPU to STOP whenever either of these bits = 1.
Table 5- 3 Example logic for detecting a non-fatal error condition
LAD STL
When an I/O error or a run-time error Network 1
occurs, go to STOP mode LD SM5.0
O SM4.3
STOP
Non-fatal errors are those indicating problems with the construction of the user program or
with certain instruction execution problems in the user program. I/O errors are those
indicating problems with the I/O of the CPU, signal board, and expansion modules. You can
use STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to view the error codes that were generated by the non-fatal
and I/O errors.
Click the PLC button from the Information section of the PLC menu ribbon strip, to see the
current error status of a PLC connected to STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART.
Table 5- 4 Non-fatal error types
Description
Program-compile The CPU compiles the program as it downloads. If the CPU detects that the program violates a
errors in the CPU compilation rule, the download is aborted and an error code is generated. (A program that was
already downloaded to the CPU would still exist in the permanent memory and would not be lost.)
After you correct your program, you can download it again.
I/O device errors After power-up and after a system block download, the CPU verifies that the I/O configuration
stored in the system block matches the CPU, signal board, and expansion modules that are actual-
ly present. Any mismatch results in the generation of a configuration error for the device. During
runtime, other I/O problems (such as missing user power or input value exceeding limits) that are
detected by a device can generate an I/O error.
The module status information is stored in special memory (SM) bits. Your program can monitor
and evaluate these bits. SM5.0 is the global I/O error bit and remains set while any I/O error condi-
tion exists.
Program execution Your program can create error conditions while being executed. These errors can result from im-
errors proper use of an instruction or from the processing of invalid data by an instruction. For example,
an indirect-address pointer that was valid when the program compiled could be modified during the
execution of the program to point to an out-of-range address. This is an example of a run-time
programming problem. SM4.3 is set upon the occurrence of a run-time programming problem and
remains set while the CPU is in RUN mode.
You can get any non-fatal error code and reset SM4.3 to OFF by executing the GET_ERROR in-
struction.
S7-200 SMART
Refer to the non-fatal error code list (Page 657) for a description of compile rule violations
and run-time programming problems.
Refer to the description of the SM bits (Page 665) for more information about the SM bits
used for reporting I/O and program execution errors.
5.7.2 Fatal errors

Fatal errors cause the PLC to stop the execution of your program. Depending upon the
severity of the fatal error, it can render the PLC incapable of performing any or all functions.
The objective for handling fatal errors is to bring the PLC to a safe state from which the PLC
can respond to interrogations about the existing error conditions.
When a fatal error is detected, the PLC changes to STOP mode, turns on the STOP and the
ERROR LED, overrides the output table, and turns off the outputs. The PLC remains in this
condition until the fatal error condition is corrected.
Once you have made the changes to correct the fatal error condition, use one of the
following methods to restart the PLC:
Turn the PLC power off and then on.
Using STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, click the "Warm Start" button in the modify area of the
PLC ribbon strip. This forces the PLC to restart and clear any fatal errors.
Restarting the PLC clears the fatal error condition and performs power-up diagnostic testing
to verify that the fatal error has been corrected. If another fatal error condition is found, the
PLC again sets the ERROR LED, indicating that an error still exists. Otherwise, the PLC
begins normal operation.
Some error conditions can render the PLC incapable of communication. In these cases, you
cannot view the error code from the PLC. These types of errors indicate hardware failures
that require the PLC to be repaired; they cannot be fixed by changes to the program or
clearing the memory of the PLC.
Refer to the fatal error code list (Page 661) for details.
S7-200 SMART
5.8 Program edit in RUN mode
WARNING
Risks when downloading a program in RUN mode
When you download program changes to a PLC in RUN mode, your changes immediately
affect process operation. You have no margin for error; mistakes in your programming edits
can cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment. Only qualified
personnel should perform a program edit in RUN mode.
Overview
The "program edit in RUN mode" feature allows you to make changes to a program and
download them to your PLC without switching to STOP mode.
You can make minor changes to your current process without having to shut down.
Example: Change a parameter value.
You can debug a program more quickly with this feature.
Example: Invert the logic for a normally open or normally closed switch.
If you download changes to a real process (as opposed to a simulated process, which you
might do in the course of debugging a program), be sure to think through the possible safety
consequences to machines and machine operators before you download.
You can download only the program block (OB1, subroutines, and interrupts) during a
program edit in RUN mode. You cannot download the system block or the data block during
a program edit in RUN mode.
Prerequisites for editing in RUN mode

You cannot download your program edits to a PLC that is in RUN mode unless you have met
these prerequisites:
Your program must compile successfully.
You must have successfully established communications between the computer where
you are running STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART and the PLC.
The firmware of the target PLC must support the program edit in RUN mode feature. Only
S7-200 SMART CPUs with version V2.0 or later firmware support the program edit in
RUN mode feature.
You must provide a password for a protected POU to open the block (for normal editing,
edit in RUN mode, and program status operations).
If you change the PLC to STOP mode while a program edit in RUN mode is in progress, the
PLC aborts the editing session.
S7-200 SMART
Possible complications
To help you decide whether to download your program modifications to the PLC in RUN
mode or STOP mode, consider the following effects from various types of program
modifications made during a RUN mode edit:
If you delete the control logic for an output, the output maintains its last state until the next
power cycle or transition to STOP mode.
If you delete HSC, Motion, or PLS functions that were running at the time of the edit in
RUN mode, then these functions continue to run until the next power cycle or transition to
STOP mode.
If you delete ATCH or DTCH instructions in a RUN mode edit but do not delete the
associated interrupt routine, then the interrupt routine continues to execute whenever the
controlling event occurs until the next power cycle or transition to STOP mode.
If you add ATCH instructions that are conditional on the first scan flag, the CPU does not
enable these events until the next power cycle or STOP-to-RUN mode transition.
If you delete an ENI or DISI instruction, activated interrupt routines events still continue to
operate until the next power cycle or transition from RUN to STOP mode.
If you modify the table address of a RCV instruction and the RCV instruction is active at
the time of the edit in RUN mode, then the PLC writes the received data to the old table
address. The PLC does not use the new address until the current receive request (to the
old address) completes. Because you have edited your program, if the program looks for
the data in the new address, the data will not be there. GET and PUT instructions
function similarly.
The PLC does not execute logic that is conditional on the first scan flag until after a power
cycle or a transition from STOP to RUN mode. The startup of the modified program after
a RUN mode edit does not set the first scan flag.
Handling positive or negative transitions

To minimize the process impact of changes that involve the relocation of positive transition
(EU) and negative transition (ED) instructions in your program during a RUN mode edit,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART temporarily allocates a number to each transition instruction
included in your program. For each transition instruction that you add in your program during
a RUN mode edit, you must assign it a unique identification number. To assist you in
selecting an unused number, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides an edge usage tab on the
cross reference window, available when you activate the Program Edit in RUN Mode feature.
This table lists all EU/ ED instructions that are currently in use in your program, so you can
use this list to guide you in making changes to your program.
S7-200 SMART
5.9 Features for debugging your program
Performing a program edit and download in RUN mode

To initiate a program edit in RUN mode, follow these steps:
1. From the Settings area of the Debug menu ribbon strip, click the Edit In Run button.
Note
If you have not saved your current program in the program editor,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART prompts you to save your project. You can use the same
name or you can change the name.
2. From the warning dialog, click the "Continue" button to confirm that you want to proceed
with editing your program in RUN mode. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART uploads the
program that is currently stored in the CPU and displays it in the program editor, where
you can make the changes you need.
After you make the desired editing changes, you must download them before they can take
effect in the CPU. Once you initiate a download, you cannot perform other tasks in STEP 7-
Micro/WIN SMART until the download completes.
Examine the output window to see whether any compile errors exist (for instance, duplicate
EU or ED numbers). You can double-click the error message to edit the offending network in
the program editor.
Specifying CPU allocation (background time)

During a program edit in RUN mode, the CPU requires time to compile the modified program
in the background while it continues to execute the currently loaded program. In the system
block (Page 117), you can configure the amount of background time that is available for the
compilation. Note that you can only download the system block when the CPU is in STOP
mode.
5.9 Features for debugging your program

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides the following features to help you debug your program:
Adding bookmarks in your program to make it easy to move back and forth between lines
of a long program
Tracking references in your program with the cross reference table (Page 454)
Using a status chart (Page 460) to display PLC data values and status
Displaying status in the program editor (Page 456)
For more information about debugging your program, refer to the chapter on diagnostics and
troubleshooting (Page 453).
S7-200 SMART
PLC device configuration 6
6.1 Configuring the operation of the PLC system
6.1.1 System block

The system block provides configuration of the S7-200 SMART CPU, signal boards, and
expansion modules.
Use one of the following methods to view and edit the system block to set up CPU options:
Click the "System Block" button on the navigation bar (Page 23).
Select "System Block" from the Component drop-down list (Page 23) in the Windows
area of the View menu ribbon strip.
Select the "System Block" node, then press Enter; or double-click the "System Block"
node in the project tree (Page 23).
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART opens the system block, and displays the configuration options
that are applicable for your CPU type.
S7-200 SMART
PLC device configuration
Hardware configuration
The top part of the System Block dialog displays the modules that you have configured and
allows you to add or delete modules. Use the drop-down lists to change, add, or delete the
CPU model, signal board, and expansion modules. As you add modules, the input and
output columns display the assigned input and output addresses.
Note
Optimally, select the CPU model and firmware version (V1 or V2) in the system block to be
the model and firmware version of the actual CPU you plan to use. When downloading your
project, if the CPU model and firmware version in the project does not match the model and
firmware version of the connected CPU, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART issues a warning
message. You can continue with the download, but if the connected CPU does not support
the resources and capabilities that the project requires, a download error occurs.
Module options
The bottom part of the system block dialog displays options for the module that you select in
the top part. Click any node in the configuration options tree to modify the project
configuration for the selected module.
The system block includes the following configuration options for CPU modules:
Communication (Page 117)
Digital inputs and pulse catch bits (Page 119)
Digital outputs (Page 121)
Retentive Ranges (Page 122)
Security (Page 124)
Startup (Page 128)
Configuration options specific to other devices such as analog inputs (Page 129), analog
outputs (Page 132), RTD analog inputs (Page 134), Thermocouple (TC) analog inputs
(Page 139), RS485/RS232 CM01 communications signal board (Page 143), Battery BA01
signal board (Page 144), and additional digital inputs and outputs are accessible from the
system block when you add those modules.
You must establish communications between STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART and your CPU
before you can download or upload a system bock.
You can then download a modified system block in order to provide the CPU with a new
system configuration. New properties that you enter take effect when you download
(Page 35) the modifications to the CPU.
Alternatively, you can upload an existing system block from the CPU in order to make your
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project configuration match that of the CPU.
S7-200 SMART
6.1.2 Configuring communication

Click the Communication node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure the
Ethernet port, background time, and RS485 port.
Ethernet port
If you want your CPU to obtain its Ethernet network port information from the project, click
the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot be changed by other means"
checkbox. You can then enter the following Ethernet network information:
IP address: Each device must have an Internet Protocol (IP) address. The device uses
this address to deliver data on a more complex, routed network.
Subnet mask: A subnet is a logical grouping of connected network devices. Nodes on a
subnet are usually located in close physical proximity to each other on a Local Area
Network (LAN). The subnet mask defines the boundaries of an IP subnet. A subnet mask
of 255.255.255.0 is generally suitable for a local network.
S7-200 SMART
Default gateway: Gateways (or IP routers) are the link between LANs. Using a gateway, a
computer in a LAN can send messages to other networks, which might have other LANs
behind them. If the destination of the data is not within the LAN, the gateway forwards the
data to another network or group of networks where it can be delivered to its destination.
Gateways rely on IP addresses to deliver and receive data packets.
Station name: The station name is the name by which this CPU is identified on the
network. Use a name that helps you identify the CPU on the Communications dialog.
Note
The station name follows the standard DNS (Domain Name System) naming conventions.
The S7-200 SMART CPUs limit the station name to a maximum of 63 characters, which
can consist of the lower case letters a through z, the digits 0 through 9, the hyphen
character (minus sign) and the period character.
The CPU prohibits certain names:
The station name must not have the format n.n.n.n where n is a value of 0 through
999.
You cannot begin the station name with the string port-nnn or the string port-nnn-
nnnnn where n is a digit 0 through 9. For example, port-123 and port-123-45678 are
illegal station names. A station name cannot start or end with a hyphen or period.
Background time
You can configure the percentage of the scan cycle time that is dedicated to processing the
communication requests. As you increase the percentage of time that is dedicated to
processing communication requests, you are increasing scan time, which makes your control
process run more slowly. The scan time only increases if there are communication requests
to process.
The default percentage of the scan time dedicated to processing communication requests is
set to 10%. This setting provides a reasonable compromise for processing compilation/
status operations, while minimizing the impact to your control process. You can adjust this
value by 5% increments up to a maximum of 50%.
As you add more communication partners to the S7-200 SMART CPU, additional
background time is required to handle the requests from those partners. GET and PUT
instructions need additional resources to create and maintain connections to other devices.
The EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module requires additional communication background time if
you have HMIs or other CPUs communicating with the S7-200 SMART CPU through the
EM DP01.
RS485 port
Use these settings to adjust the communication parameters for system protocols for the
onboard RS485 port. The system protocols are used when connecting to HMI devices:
RS485 port address: Click the scroll buttons to enter the desired CPU address (1-126).
The default port address is 2.
Baud Rate: Choose the desired data baud rate from the dropdown list (9.6 kbps, 19.2
kbps, or 187.5 kbps).
S7-200 SMART
6.1.3 Configuring the digital inputs

Click the Digital Inputs node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure digital input
filters and pulse catch bits.
Digital input filters

You can filter digital input signals by setting an input delay time. This delay helps to filter
noise on the input wiring that could cause inadvertent changes to the states of the inputs.
When an input state change occurs, the input must remain at the new state for the duration
of the delay time in order to be accepted as valid. The filter rejects noise impulses and forces
input lines to stabilize before the data is accepted.
The S7-200 SMART CPU allows you to select an input delay time for all of its digital input
points. The quantity of input points available is dependent upon your CPU model (Page 18).
The first fourteen input points (I0.0 through I0.7 and I1.0 through I1.5) support an expanded
set of delay time choices (selectable to one of seven settings in the range of 0.2 ms to 12.8
ms or one of seven settings in the range of 0.2 s to 12.8 s). The remaining input points
(I1.6 and greater) support only a limited set of input delay choices (6.4 ms, 12.8 ms, or no
filtering).
For example, all twelve input points of a CPU SR20 support the expanded list of input delay
settings. In a CPU ST40, the expanded list of input delay choices is available for the first
fourteen input points, while only the limited list of input delay choices is available for the
remaining ten input points.
The default filter time for all input points is 6.4 ms.
S7-200 SMART
To set an input delay, follow these steps:

1. Select the time of the delay from the drop-down list beside one or more inputs.
2. Click the OK button to enter the selections.
WARNING
Risks with changes to filter time for digital input channel
If the filter time for a digital input channel is changed from a previous setting, a new "0"
level input value may need to be presented for up to 12.8 ms accumulated duration
before the filter becomes fully responsive to new inputs. During this time, short "0" pulse
events of duration less than 12.8 ms may not be detected or counted.
This changing of filter times can result in unexpected machine or process operation,
which may cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
To ensure that a new filter time goes immediately into effect, a power cycle of the CPU
must be applied.
Pulse catch bits

The S7-200 SMART CPU provides a pulse catch feature for digital input points. The pulse
catch feature allows you to capture high-going pulses or low-going pulses that are of such a
short duration that they would not always be seen when the CPU reads the digital inputs at
the beginning of the scan cycle.
When pulse catch is enabled for an input, a change in state of the input is latched and held
until the next input cycle update. This ensures that a pulse which lasts for a short period of
time will be caught and held until the S7-200 SMART CPU reads the inputs.
You can enable individual pulse catch operation for the first fourteen digital input points (I0.0
through I0.7 and I1.0 through I1.5), dependent upon the CPU model (Page 18).
If your configuration includes an SB DT04, you can enable the two additional digital input
points available on this signal board for pulse catch operation.
The figure below shows the basic operation of the S7-200 SMART CPU with and without
pulse catch enabled:
S7-200 SMART
Because the pulse catch function operates on the input after it passes through the input filter,
you must adjust the input filter time so that the pulse is not removed by the filter. The figure
below shows a block diagram of the digital input circuit:
The figure below shows the response of an enabled pulse catch function to various input
conditions. If you have more than one pulse in a given scan, only the first pulse is read. If
you have multiple pulses in a given scan, you should use the rising/falling edge interrupt
events:
6.1.4 Configuring the digital outputs

Click the Digital Outputs node of the system block (Page 115) to configure options for the
digital outputs of the selected module.
S7-200 SMART
You can set digital output points to a specific value when the CPU is in STOP mode, or
preserve the output states that existed before the transition to STOP mode.
You have two ways to set the digital output behavior in STOP mode:
Freeze Outputs in last state: Click this checkbox to have all digital outputs frozen in their
last states at the time of a RUN-to-STOP transition.
Substitute value: If the Freeze Outputs in last state checkbox is not checked, this table
allows you to select the desired state of each output whenever the CPU is in STOP
mode. Click the checkbox for each output you want set to ON (1). The default substitute
value for digital outputs is OFF (0).
6.1.5 Configuring the retentive ranges

Click the Retentive Ranges node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure ranges
of memory that will be retained following a power cycle.
Configure the areas of memory you want to retain through power cycles. Enter new values
for V, M, T, or C memory.
You can define ranges of addresses in the following memory areas to be retentive: V, M, T,
and C. For timers, only the retentive timers (TONR) can be retained, and, for both timers and
counters, only the current value can be retained (timer and counter bits are cleared on each
power-up).
By default, no retentive areas are defined in the CPU, but you can configure the retentive
ranges so that up to 10 Kbytes of memory are retentive.
S7-200 SMART
Data retention after CPU power interruption

The CPU performs the following actions regarding retentive memory at power down and
power up:
At power down:
The CPU saves the memory ranges designated as retentive to permanent memory.
At power up:
The CPU first clears V, M, C, and T memory, copies any initial values from the data block
to V memory, and then copies the saved retentive values from permanent memory to
RAM.
S7-200 SMART CPU memory addresses for retentive ranges
Data type Desc. CPU CR40 CPU CR60 CPU SR20 CPU SR30 CPU SR40 CPU SR60
CPU ST20 CPU ST30 CPU ST40 CPU ST60
V Data Memory VB0- VB0- VB0-VB8191 VB0-VB12281 VB0-VB16383 VB0-VB20479
VB8191 VB8191
T Timers T0-T31, T0-T31, T0-T31, T0-T31, T0-T31, T0-T31,
T64-T95 T64-T95 T64-T95 T64-T95 T64-T95 T64-T95
C Counters C0-C255 C0-C255 C0-C255 C0-C255 C0-C255 C0-C255
M Flag bits MB0-MB31 MB0-MB31 MB0-MB31 MB0-MB31 MB0-MB31 MB0-MB31
S7-200 SMART
6.1.6 Configuring system security

Click the Security node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure a password and
security settings for the CPU.
The password can be any combination of letters, numbers, and symbols and is case-
sensitive.
Password-protected privilege levels

The CPU offers four levels of password protection, with "Full Privileges" (Level 1) providing
unrestricted access and "Disallow Upload" (Level 4) providing the most restricted access.
The default condition for the S7-200 SMART CPU is "Full Privileges" (Level 1).
A CPU password authorizes access to CPU functions and memory. With no CPU password
downloaded ("Full privileges" (Level 1)), the S7-200 SMART CPU allows unrestricted
access. If you have configured higher than "Full Privileges" (Level 1) access and
downloaded a CPU password, the S7-200 SMART CPU requires password entry for access
to CPU operations as defined in the table below.
The "Disallow Upload" (Level 4) password restriction protects the user program (your
intellectual property) even if the password becomes known. You can never upload in Level 4
and can only change the privilege level if there is no user program present in the CPU. As a
result, you can always protect your user program, even if someone discovers your password.
S7-200 SMART
Table 6- 1 S7-200 SMART CPU password-protected privilege levels
Description of operation Full privileg- Read privi- Minimum Disallow

es (Level 1) leges (Level privileges upload
2) (Level 3) (Level 4)
Read and write user data Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Start, stop, and power-up reset of the Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
CPU
Read the time-of-day clock Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Write the time-of-day clock Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
Upload the user program, data, and the Permitted Permitted Restricted Never Per-
CPU configuration mitted
Download of program block, data block, Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
or system block Note: Never
permitted for
the system
block if the
user pro-
gram block
is present.
Reset to factory defaults Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
Delete of program block, data block, or Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
system block Note: Never
permitted for
the system
block if the
user pro-
gram block
is present.
Copy of program block, data block, or Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
system data block to a memory card
Forcing of data in status chart Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
Execute single or multiple scan opera- Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
tions.
Writing of output in STOP mode. Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
Reset of scan rates in PLC information Permitted Restricted Restricted Restricted
Program status Permitted Permitted Restricted Never Per-
mitted
Project compare Permitted Permitted Restricted Never Per-
mitted
S7-200 SMART
Communication write restrictions

You can restrict communication writes to a specific range of V memory and disallow
communication writes to other memory areas (I, Q, AQ, and M). To restrict communication
writes to a specific range of V memory, select the "Restrict" checkbox, and configure the
range in bytes of V memory.
This area can be as small as no bytes to as large as all V memory.
With this functionality, the user program can validate the data written into this subset of
memory before using it in your application for even better security. Note that these
restrictions pertain only to communication writes (for example, writes from HMIs,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, or PC Access), not writes from the user program.
Note
If you restrict write access to a specific range of V memory, be sure that Text Display
modules or HMIs only write within the writable range of V memory. Also, if you use the PID
wizard, PID control panel, motion wizard, or motion control panel be sure that the V memory
that the wizards or panels use are within the writable range of V memory.
With this restriction disabled, you can write to the full ranges of memory areas, including I, Q,
M, V, and AQ.
Serial ports mode changes and Time-of-Day (TOD) writes

You can allow, without a password, CPU mode changes (go-to-RUN, go-to-STOP) and TOD
writes through the serial ports (both the RS485 built in and RS485/RS232 signal board). To
do so, select the "Allow" checkbox in the "Serial Ports" section.
This checkbox provides backward compatibility with older HMIs that do not prompt for a
password for these functions. The following selections are available:
If this box is checked and the CPU is password protected, then you can change operating
modes and make TOD writes with these older HMIs.
If this box is unchecked and the CPU is password protected, you cannot change
operating modes or make TOD writes with these older HMIs.
If the CPU is not password protected, you can change operating modes and make TOD
writes with these older HMIs, regardless of the setting of the checkbox.
S7-200 SMART
Accessing a password-protected CPU
Note
When you enter the password for a password-protected CPU, the authorization level for that
password remains effective for up to one minute after the programming device has been
disconnected from the S7-200 SMART CPU. Always exit STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART before
disconnecting the cable to prevent another user from unauthorized access.
Entering the password over a network does not compromise the password protection for the
S7-200 SMART CPU. If one authorized user is accessing restricted functions across a
network, that does not authorize other users to access those functions. Only one user is
allowed unrestricted access to the S7-200 SMART CPU at a time.
Disabling a password
You can disable the password by changing the privilege level 4, 3, or 2 to "Full privileges"
(Level 1), since Level 1 allows all unrestricted CPU access.
Note
If the privilege level is at "Disallow Upload" (Level 4), you cannot download a new system
block with a new password level if a valid user program exists. You must delete the user
program first, and then you can download an updated system block.
What to do if you forget the password

If you forget your password, you have one option: Use the "Reset-to-factory-defaults memory
card". (Refer to clear PLC memory (Page 145) for more information.)
S7-200 SMART
6.1.7 Configuring the startup options

Click the Startup node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure startup options for
the PLC.
CPU mode
From this dialog you can select the mode for the CPU after a startup. You have one of the
following three choices:
STOP
The CPU shall always enter STOP mode after a power up or restart (default selection).
RUN
The CPU shall always enter RUN mode after a power up or restart. For most applications,
especially those where the CPU operates independently without a connection to
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, the RUN startup mode selection is the correct choice.
LAST
The CPU shall enter the operating mode that existed prior to the last power up or restart.
This selection can be useful during program development or commissioning. Be aware
that a running CPU can enter STOP mode for a variety of reasons, such as the failure of
an expansion module, occurrence of a scan watchdog timeout, the insertion of a memory
card, or an erratic power up event. Once the CPU enters STOP mode, it will continue to
enter STOP mode each time the CPU powers up. You must restore the CPU back to
RUN mode (Page 36) from STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART.
S7-200 SMART
Hardware options
You can also configure the CPU to allow RUN mode operation under the following hardware
conditions:
One or more devices specified in the hardware configuration stored in the CPU are
missing.
A difference exists between the hardware configuration stored in the CPU and the
devices actually present, resulting in configuration errors (for example, discrete input
module in place of a configured discrete output module).
If you deselect one or both of the selections, the CPU is prohibited from entering RUN mode
if any of the disallowed conditions are true.
6.1.8 Configuring the analog inputs

Click the Analog Inputs node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure options for
an analog input module that you have selected in the top section.
Analog type configuration

For each analog input channel, you configure the type to be either voltage or current. The
type selected for the even-numbered channels also applies to the odd-numbered channels:
the type selection for Channel 0 also applies to Channel 1, and the type selection for
Channel 2 also applies to Channel 3.
S7-200 SMART
Range
You then configure either the voltage range or the current range for the channel. You can
choose one of the following value ranges:
+/- 2.5v
+/- 5v
+/- 10v
0 - 20ma
Rejection
Fluctuations in analog input values can also be caused by the response time of the sensor,
or the length and condition of the wires carrying the analog signal to the module. In such
cases, the fluctuating values could be changing too rapidly for the program logic to respond
effectively. You can configure the module to reject signals to eliminate or minimize noise at
the following frequencies:
10 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
400 Hz
Smoothing
You can also configure the module to smooth the analog input signal over a configured
number of cycles, thus presenting an averaged value to the program logic. You have four
choices for the smoothing algorithm:
None (no smoothing)
Weak
Medium
Strong
S7-200 SMART
Alarm configuration
You select whether to enable or disable the following alarms for the selected channel of the
selected module:
Upper limit exceeded (value > 32511)
Lower limit exceeded (value < -32512)
User power (Configured in the system block "Module Parameters" node; see the figure
below.)
6.1.9 Reference to the analog inputs technical specifications

For further information on analog Input configuration options, refer to the following technical
specifications:
Range: "Measurement ranges of the analog inputs for voltage and current (SB and SM)"
(Page 624)
Rejection: "Sample time and update times for the analog inputs" (Page 623)
Smoothing: "Step response of the analog inputs" (Page 623)
S7-200 SMART
6.1.10 Configuring the analog outputs

Click the Analog Outputs node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure options for
an analog output module that you have selected in the top section.
Analog type configuration

For each analog output channel you configure the type to be either voltage or current.
Range
You then configure either the voltage range or the current range for the channel. You can
choose one of the following value ranges:
+/- 10 V
0 - 20 mA
Output behavior in STOP mode

You can set analog output points to a specific value when the CPU is in STOP mode or
preserve the output states that existed before the transition to STOP mode.
You have two ways to set the analog output behavior in STOP mode:
Freeze outputs in last state: Click this checkbox to have all analog outputs frozen to their
last values on a RUN-to-STOP transition.
Substitute value: If the "Freeze outputs in last state" checkbox is not checked, you can
enter a value (-32512 to 32511) that is applied to the output whenever the CPU is in
STOP mode. The default substitute value is 0.
S7-200 SMART
Alarm configuration
selected module:
Upper limit exceeded (value > 32511)
Lower limit exceeded (value < -32512)
Wire break (for current channels only)
Short circuit (for voltage channels only)
below.)
6.1.11 Reference to the analog outputs technical specifications

For further information on analog output range configuration, refer to the "Measurement
ranges of the analog outputs for voltage and current (SB and SM)" (Page 625) technical
specification.
S7-200 SMART
6.1.12 Configuring the RTD analog inputs

Click the RTD analog Input node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure options
for an RTD analog input module that you have selected in the top section.
The RTD analog input module provides a current at terminals I+ and I- for resistance
measurements. The current is fed to the resistance for measuring its voltage potential. The
current cables must be wired directly to the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Measurements programmed for 4-or 3-wire connections compensate for line resistance and
return considerably higher accuracy compared to 2-wire connections.
RTD type configuration

For each RTD input channel, you configure the type, choosing one of the following options:
Resistance 4-wire
Resistance 3-wire
Resistance 2-wire
Thermal Resistance 4-wire
S7-200 SMART
Resistor
Depending upon the RTD type that you select, you can configure the following RTD resistors
for the channel:
Table 6- 2 RTD types and available resistors
RTD types RTD resistors

Resistance 4-wire 48 ohms
Note: For these RTD types and resistors, you can- 600 ohms
not configure temperature coefficients or tempera-
3000 ohms
ture scales.
Thermal Resistance 4-wire Pt 10 Ni 100
Pt 200 Ni 500
Pt 500 Ni 1000
Pt 1000 Cu 10
LG-Ni 1000 Cu 50
Cu 100
S7-200 SMART
Coefficient
Depending upon the RTD resistor that you select, you can configure the following RTD
temperature coefficients for the channel:
RTD resistors RTD temperature coefficients

48 ohms Note: For these RTD resistors, you cannot con-
figure temperature coefficients or temperature
150 ohms
scales.
300 ohms
600 ohms
3000 ohms
Pt 10 Pt 0.00385055
Pt 50 Pt 0.003910
Pt 100 Pt 0.00385055
Pt 500 Pt 0.003916
Pt 0.003902
Pt 0.003920
Pt 0.003910
Pt 200 Pt 0.00385055
Pt 1000 Pt 0.003916
Pt 0.003902
Pt 0.003920
Ni 100 Ni 0.006170
Ni 0.006180
Ni 0.006720
Ni 120 Ni 0.006180
Ni 200 Ni 0.006720
Ni 500
Ni 1000
Cu 10 Cu 0.00426
Cu 0.00428
Cu 0.00427
Cu 50 Cu 0.00426
Cu 100 Cu 0.00428
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005000
S7-200 SMART
Scale
You configure a temperature scale for the channel, choosing one of the following options:
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Note
For the "Resistance 4-wire", "Resistance 3-wire", and "Resistance 2-wire" RTD types and
associated resistors, you cannot configure temperature coefficients or temperature
scales.
Rejection
Fluctuations in RTD analog input values can also be caused by the response time of the
sensor, or the length and condition of the wires carrying the RTD analog signal to the
module. In such cases, the fluctuating values could be changing too rapidly for the program
logic to respond effectively. You can configure the module to reject signals to eliminate or
minimize noise at the following frequencies:
10 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
400 Hz
Smoothing
You can also configure the module to smooth the RTD analog input signal over a configured
number of cycles, thus presenting an averaged value to the program logic. You have four
choices for the smoothing algorithm:
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
S7-200 SMART
Alarm configuration
selected RTD module:
Wire break
Upper limit exceeded
Lower limit exceeded
below.)
S7-200 SMART
6.1.13 Configuring the TC analog inputs

Click the TC (Thermocouple) analog input node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to
configure options for a TC analog input module that you have selected in the top section.
The TC analog expansion module measures the value of voltage connected to the module
inputs.
Thermocouple type configuration

For each TC analog input module channel, you configure the type, choosing one of the
following options:
Thermocouple
Voltage
S7-200 SMART
Thermocouple
Depending upon the thermocouple type that you select, you can configure the following
thermocouples for the channel:
Type B (PtRh-PtRh)
Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)
Type E (NiCr-CuNi)
Type R (PtRh-Pt)
Type S (PtRh-Pt)
Type J (Fe-CuNi)
Type T (Cu-CuNi)
Type K (NiCr-Ni)
Type C (W5Re-W26Re)
TXK/XK (TXK/XK(L))
Scale
You configure a temperature scale for the channel, choosing one of the following options:
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Rejection
Fluctuations in thermocouple analog input values can also be caused by the response time
of the sensor, or the length and condition of the wires carrying the thermocouple analog
signal to the module. In such cases, the fluctuating values could be changing too rapidly for
the program logic to respond effectively. You can configure the TC analog input module to
reject signals to eliminate or minimize noise at the following frequencies:
10 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
400 Hz
S7-200 SMART
Smoothing
You can also configure the module to smooth the thermocouple analog input signal over a
configured number of cycles, thus presenting an averaged value to the program logic. You
have four choices for the smoothing algorithm:
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
Source reference temperature

You configure a source reference temperature for each TC analog input module channel,
choosing one of the following options:
Set by parameter
Internal reference
Alarm configuration
selected TC analog input module:
Wire break
Upper limit exceeded
Lower limit exceeded
below.)
S7-200 SMART
Basic operation of a thermocouple

Thermocouples are formed whenever two dissimilar metals are electrically bonded to each
other. A voltage is generated that is proportional to the junction temperature. This voltage is
small; one microvolt could represent many degrees. Measuring the voltage from a
thermocouple, compensating for extra junctions, and then linearizing the result forms the
basis of temperature measurement using thermocouples.
When you connect a thermocouple to the TC analog input module, the two dissimilar metal
wires are attached to the module at the module signal connector. The place where the two
dissimilar wires are attached to each other forms the sensor thermocouple.
Two more thermocouples are formed where the two dissimilar wires are attached to the
signal connector. The connector temperature causes a voltage that adds to the voltage from
the sensor thermocouple. If this voltage is not corrected, then the temperature reported will
deviate from the sensor temperature.
Cold junction compensation is used to compensate for the connector thermocouple.
Thermocouple tables are based on a reference junction temperature, usually zero degrees
Celsius. The cold junction compensation compensates the connector to zero degrees
Celsius. The cold junction compensation restores the voltage added by the connector
thermocouples. The temperature of the module is measured internally, and then converted to
a value to be added to the sensor conversion. The corrected sensor conversion is then
linearized using the thermocouple tables.
For optimum operation of the cold junction compensation, the thermocouple module must be
located in a thermally stable environment. Slow variation (less than 0.1 C/minute) in
ambient module temperature is correctly compensated within the module specifications. Air
movement across the module will also cause cold junction compensation errors.
If better cold junction error compensation is needed, an external iso-thermal terminal block
may be used. The thermocouple module provides for use of a 0 C referenced or 50 C
referenced terminal block.
S7-200 SMART
6.1.14 Configuring the RS485/RS232 CM01 communications signal board

Click the CM01 communications signal board node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to
configure options for an RS485/RS232 CM01 communications signal board that you have
selected in the top section.
CM01 signal board type configuration

You configure the CM01 signal board type from the dropdown list, choosing one of the
following options:
RS485
RS232
Address
Click the scroll buttons to enter the desired port address (1-126).for the RS485 or RS232
port: The default port address is 2.
Baud rate
Choose the desired data baud rate from the dropdown list:
9.6 kbps
19.2 kbps
187.5 kbps
S7-200 SMART
6.1.15 Configuring the BA01 battery signal board

Click the BA01 battery signal board node of the system block (Page 115) dialog to configure
options for a BA01 battery signal board that you have selected in the top section.
Enable bad diagnostic alarm

Click the Enable bad diagnostic alarm checkbox to trigger an alarm when the battery fails.
Enable status in digital input

Click the "Enable status in digital input" to enable a digital input to monitor the status of the
signal board.
Operation of the Battery (BA01) Signal Board

The battery signal board contains a red LED that provides the customer a visual indication of
the battery health. An Illuminated LED indicates a battery low condition.
The CPU automatically performs the RTC swap-over, battery test, and battery health LED
operation, whether or not the System block contains a configuration for the signal board.
The battery signal board System block configuration contains selections that allow the
customer to report the battery low state as a diagnostic alarm and/or to report the battery
state (1=battery low, 0 = battery OK) in the LSB of the configured image register input byte
for the device (for example, I7.0). The customer must select the battery signal board in the
System block configuration in order to gain access to the additional battery health reporting
options.
S7-200 SMART
6.1.16 Clearing PLC memory

To clear designated areas of PLC memory, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the PLC is in STOP mode.
2. Click the Clear button from the Modify area of the PLC menu ribbon strip.
WARNING
Effect of clearing PLC memory on outputs
Clearing the PLC memory affects the state of digital and analog outputs. The default is
for digital and analog outputs to use a substitute value of 0. If you have defined
substitute values other than 0 or chosen "Freeze" for your digital or analog outputs, you
need to be aware that when you delete the system block, you are deleting the substitute
and freeze information and, as a result, your outputs shall return to the default value of
0. Furthermore, if you perform a selective clear such that you keep your system block
but delete your program block, then your analog outputs are frozen at their current
value. Until you download a new program block, the only way to make changes to the
state of the analog outputs is by means of the status chart.
If the S7-200 SMART PLC is connected to equipment when you clear the PLC memory,
changes to the state of the digital outputs can be transmitted to the equipment. If you
clear PLC memory without planning for the consequences to your digital and analog
outputs, your equipment could operate in an unpredictable fashion, which could result in
death or serious injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that your process is in a safe
state before clearing the PLC memory.
3. Select what to clear - Program Block, Data Block, System Block, or all blocks, or select
"Reset to factory defaults".
4. Click the Clear button.
Clearing the PLC memory requires the PLC to be in STOP mode and then deletes the
selected blocks or resets the PLC to the factory-set defaults, depending on your selection. A
clear operation does not clear the IP address, station name, or reset the time-of-day clock.
S7-200 SMART
When executed, the "Reset to factory defaults" setting deletes all blocks, resets all user
memory to the initial powerup state, and resets all Special Memory to initial values.
What to do if you forget the PLC password

If you forget the PLC password (Page 124), you must clear the PLC memory from a reset-to-
factory-defaults memory card (Page 147) that you have made for this purpose.
WARNING
Inserting a memory card into a CPU
Inserting a memory card into a CPU in RUN mode causes the CPU to automatically
transition to STOP mode. You cannot change the CPU to RUN mode if a memory card is
inserted.
Inserting a memory card into a running CPU can cause disruption to process operation,
Always ensure that the CPU is in STOP mode prior to inserting a memory card.
To clear the PLC using this card follow this steps:

1. Insert the reset-to-factory-defaults memory card. The CPU goes to STOP mode and
flashes the STOP LED.
2. Power cycle the CPU. The CPU flashes the RUN/STOP LEDs until the reset is complete
(about one second), and then flashes the STOP LED indicating that the reset is finished.
3. Remove the memory card.
4. Power cycle the CPU. The CPU is reset to the factory defaults. The former IP address
and baud rate settings are cleared, but the time-of-day clock is unaffected.
After the CPU is reset, you can assign a new password and begin programming, or load a
program from another program transfer memory card (Page 81) or from your hard disk.
Note
If you load a password-protected program from a memory card or file on your hard disk, you
must enter the password to access the protected areas. You cannot access a password-
protected program component without a password, nor can you clear an assigned password
without entry of the password.
S7-200 SMART
6.1.17 Creating a reset-to-factory-defaults memory card

You can create a memory card that will return the CPU to a factory default state. You can
use this reset-to-factory-defaults memory card if you ever want to clear the contents of your
CPU. To create a reset-to-factory-defaults memory card, follow these steps:
1. Using a card reader and Windows explorer, delete all contents from a microSDHC card.
2. Create a simple text file with an editor such as Notepad that contains one line with the
string "RESET_TO_FACTORY". (Do not enter the quotation marks.)
3. Save this file to the microSDHC card root level under the file name "S7_JOB.S7S".
4. Label the card and store it in a safe place for future use.
S7-200 SMART
6.2 High-speed I/O
6.2 High-speed I/O
High-speed counters
The CPU provides integrated high-speed counter functions that count high speed external
events without degrading the performance of the CPU. Refer to the "Product overview"
(Page 17) chapter for the rates supported by your CPU. Dedicated inputs exist for clocks,
direction control, and reset, where these functions are supported. You can select single
phase, dual phase, or AB quadrature phase for varying the counting rate. For more
information, refer to the description of the high-speed counter instructions (Page 220).
High-speed pulse output

The standard CPU models support high-speed pulse outputs that generate either a high-
speed pulse train output (PTO) or pulse width modulation (PWM) on certain outputs. Refer to
the "Product overview" (Page 17) chapter for the quantity and rates supported by your CPU.
The PTO function provides a square wave (50% duty cycle) output for a specified number of
pulses (from 1 to 2,147,483,647 pulses) and a specified frequency (in Hz). You can program
the PTO function to produce either one train of pulses or a pulse profile consisting of multiple
trains of pulses. For example, you can use a pulse profile to control a stepper motor through
a simple ramp up, run, and ramp down sequence or more complicated sequences.
The PWM function provides a fixed cycle time with a variable duty cycle output, with the
cycle time and the pulse width specified in either microsecond or millisecond increments.
When the pulse width is equal to the cycle time, the duty cycle is 100 percent, and the output
is turned on continuously. When the pulse width is zero, the duty cycle is 0 percent, and the
output is turned off.
Refer to the pulse output instruction (Page 247) for more information. The chapter on open-
loop motion control provides additional information using PWM (Page 481).
Open-loop motion control

The standard CPU models support an open-loop motion control capability. Motion profiles
can be constructed and executed, interactive movement can be performed under user
program control, and a number of built-in reference point seek sequences are available.
Depending upon configuration, open-loop motion support in the CPU requires the use of
certain CPU resources, such as high-speed outputs, high-speed counters, and edge
interrupts.
Refer to the "Product overview" (Page 17) chapter for the quantity of motion axes and pulse
rates supported by your CPU.
Refer to the chapter on open-loop motion control (Page 481) for a full description of the
motion capabilities in your CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Program instructions 7
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.1 Standard inputs
LAD FBD STL Description

LD bit Test a bit value in memory (M, SM, T, C, V, S, L) or process image
A bit register (I or Q).
O bit LAD: Normally open and normally closed switches are represented
by a contact symbol. If power flow is present on the left-side and the
contact is closed, then power flows through the contact to the right-
side connector and to the next connected element.
LDN bit The Normally Open (N.O.) LAD contact is closed (ON) when the
AN bit bit is equal to 1.
ON bit
The Normally Closed (N.C.) LAD contact is closed (ON) when the
bit is equal to 0.
FBD: Normally open instructions are represented by AND/OR boxes.

Box instructions can be used to evaluate Boolean signals in the same
manner as ladder contact networks. Normally closed instructions are
also represented by boxes. A normally closed instruction is created
by placing the negation circle , on a binary input sig-
nal connector. The number of inputs for the AND/OR boxes can be
expanded to a maximum of 31 inputs.
STL: The normally open contact is represented by the LD (load), A

(AND), and O (OR) instructions. These instructions load, AND, or OR
the value of the addressed bit with the top bit of the logic stack. The
normally closed contact is represented by the LDN (Load NOT), AN
(AND NOT), and ON (OR NOT) instructions. These instructions load,
AND, or OR the logical NOT of the addressed bit value with the top
bit of the logic stack.
Input / output Data type Operand

bit (LAD, STL) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L,
Input (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
Output (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
S7-200 SMART
Program instructions
7.1 Bit logic
FBD AND/OR input assignment

The editor feature described in the following table is active only if an input stub is selected
and colored red, inside the FBD box cursor.
Input option Place cursor Tool button Shortcut key

Add input On box +
Remove input On box and bottom input -
See also
Bit logic input examples (Page 162)
Logic stack overview (Page 152)
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.2 Immediate inputs

LDI bit The immediate instruction obtains the physical input value when the
AI bit instruction is executed, but the process image register is not updated. An
OI bit immediate contact does not wait on the PLC scan cycle to update; it
updates immediately.
The Normally Open Immediate contact is closed (ON) when the physical
input point (bit) state is 1.
LDNI bi
t The Normally Closed Immediate contact is closed (ON) when the physi-
ANI bit cal input point (bit) state is 0.
ONI bit LAD: Normally open and normally closed immediate instructions are
represented by contacts.
FBD: Normally open immediate instructions are represented by the verti-

cal immediate indicator in front of an input connection.
The Normally closed immediate instruction is represented by the imme-
diate indicator and negation circle in front of an input
connection.
The immediate indicator cannot be used when a logic flow connection is
used instead of a physical input ( I ) bit address.
FBD box instructions can be used to evaluate physical signals in the
same manner as ladder contacts. The number of inputs for the AND/OR
boxes can be expanded to a maximum of 31 inputs.
STL: The Normally Open Immediate contact is represented by the LDI

(Load Immediate), AI (AND Immediate), and OI (OR Immediate) instruc-
tions. These instructions load, AND, or OR the physical input value with
the top of the logic stack.
A normally Closed Immediate contact is represented by the LDNI (Load
NOT Immediate), ANI (AND NOT Immediate), and ONI (OR NOT Imme-
diate) instructions. These instructions immediately load, AND, or OR the
logical NOT of the value of the physical input value with the top of the
logic stack.

bit (LAD, STL) BOOL I
Input (FBD) BOOL I
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
FBD editor input assignment

The editor feature described in the following table is active only if an input stub is selected
and colored red, inside the FBD box cursor.
Input option Place cursor Tool button Shortcut key

Add input On box +
Remove input On box and bottom input -
Toggle negate input On box and input F11
Toggle immediate input On box and input CTRL F11
See also
Logic stack overview (Page 152)
7.1.3 Logic stack overview

The STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART program compiler uses the logic stack to transform the
graphical I/O networks of LAD and FBD programs into STL (statement list) programs. The
resultant STL program is logically the same as the original LAD or FBD graphical network
and can be executed as a program list. All successfully compiled LAD and FBD programs
have generated the underlying STL program and can be viewed as LAD, FBD, or STL.
For LAD and FBD editing, the STL logic stack instructions are automatically generated and
the programmer does not need to use the logic stack instructions.
You can also create STL programs directly with the STL editor. An STL programmer uses
the logic stack instructions directly. Combination logic can be created in the STL editor that is
too complex to be viewed in the LAD or FBD editor, but may be necessary for special
applications.
All successfully compiled LAD and FBD programs can be viewed in STL, but not all
successfully compiled STL programs can be viewed in LAD or FBD.
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
Input networks and the logic stack

As shown in the following figure, the CPU uses a logic stack to combine the logic states of
STL inputs. In these examples, "iv0" to "iv31" identify the initial values of the logic stack
levels, "nv" identifies a new value provided by the instruction, and "S0" identifies the
calculated value that is stored in the logic stack.
1 S0 identifies the calculated value that is stored in the logic stack.

2 After the execution of a Load, the value iv31 is lost.
Output networks and the logic stack

ENO is a binary output for boxes in LAD and FBD. If a LAD box has power flow at the EN
input and is executed without error, the ENO output passes power flow to the next LAD
element. You can use the ENO as an enable bit that indicates the successful completion of
an instruction. The ENO bit is used with the top of stack to affect power flow for execution of
subsequent instructions. STL instructions do not have an EN input. The top of the stack must
have a value of logic 1 for conditional instructions to be executed. In STL there is no ENO
output. However, the STL instructions that correspond to LAD and FBD instructions with
ENO outputs set a special ENO bit. This bit is accessible with the AND ENO (AENO)
instruction.
STL Description
AENO AENO is used in the STL representation of LAD/FBD box ENO bit. AENO performs a logical AND of
the ENO bit with the top of stack for the same effect as the ENO bit of a LAD/FBD box. The result of the
AND operation is the new top of stack value.
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.4 STL logic stack instructions
STL1 Description
ALD The AND Load instruction (ALD) combines the values in the first and second levels of the stack using a logical
AND operation. The result is loaded in the top of stack. After the ALD is executed, the stack depth is decreased
by one.
OLD The OR Load instruction (OLD) combines the values in the first and second levels of the stack, using a logical
OR operation. The result is loaded in the top of the stack. After the OLD is executed, the stack depth is de-
creased by one.
LPS The Logic Push instruction (LPS) duplicates the top value on the stack and pushes this value onto the stack.
The bottom of the stack is pushed off and lost.
LRD The Logic Read instruction (LRD) copies the second stack value to the top of stack. The stack is not pushed or
popped, but the old top-of-stack value is destroyed by the copy.
LPP The Logic Pop instruction (LPP) pops one value off of the stack. The second stack value becomes the new top
of stack value.
LDS N The Load Stack instruction (LDS) duplicates the stack bit (N) on the stack and places this value on top of the
stack. The bottom of the stack is pushed off and lost.
AENO AENO is used in the STL representation of the LAD/FBD box ENO bit. AENO performs a logical AND of the
ENO bit with the top of stack for the same effect as the ENO bit of a LAD/FBD box. The result of the AND op-
eration is the new top of stack.
1 Not applicable for LAD or FBD
LDS (Load Stack) Input Data type Operands

N BYTE Constant (0 to 31)
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
As shown in the following figure, the CPU uses a logic stack to resolve the control logic. In
these examples, "iv0" to "iv31" identify the initial values of the logic stack, "nv" identifies a
new value provided by the instruction, and "S0" identifies the calculated value that is stored
in the logic stack.
1 The value is unknown (it could be either a 0 or a 1).

2 After the execution of a Logic push or a Load stack instruction, value iv31 is lost.
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
Logic Stack example: LAD networks transformed into STL code
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I0.0
LD I0.1
LD I2.0
A I2.1
OLD
ALD
= Q5.0
Network 2
LD I0.0
LPS
LD I0.5
O I0.6
ALD
= Q7.0
LRD
LD I2.1
O I1.3
ALD
= Q6.0
LPP
A I1.0
= Q3.0
7.1.5 NOT

NOT The Not instruction (NOT) inverts the state of the power flow input.
LAD: The NOT contact changes the state of power flow input. When
power flow reaches the NOT contact, it stops. When power flow does
not reach the NOT contact, it supplies power flow.
FBD: The NOT instruction is represented as a graphical negation (bub-
ble) symbol on Boolean box input connectors and functions as a logic
state inverter.
STL: The NOT instruction changes the value on the top of the stack
from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0.
See also
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.6 Positive and negative transition detectors

EU The positive transition contact instruction (Edge Up) allows power to
ED flow for one scan for each OFF-to-ON transition.
The negative transition contact instruction (Edge Down) allows power
to flow for one scan for each ON-to-OFF transition.
S7-200 SMART CPUs support a combined total (positive and nega-
tive) of 1024 edge detector instructions in your program.
LAD: Positive and negative transition instructions are represented by
contacts.
FBD: The transition instructions are represented by the P and N box-
es.
STL: The positive transition is detected by the EU (Edge Up) instruc-
tion. Upon detection of a 0-to-1 transition in the value on the top of the
stack, the top of the stack value is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to 0.
The negative transition is detected by the ED (Edge Down) instruc-
tion. Upon detection of a 1-to-0 transition in the value on the top of the
stack, the top of the stack value is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to 0.

IN (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
OUT (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
Note
Because the Positive Transition and Negative Transition instructions require an on-to-off or
an off-to-on transition, you cannot detect an edge-up or edge-down transition on the first
scan. During the first scan, the CPU saves the initial input state in a memory bit. On
subsequent scans, these instructions compare the current state and the state of the memory
bit, to detect a transition.
See also
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.7 Coils: output and output immediate instructions

= bit The Output instruction writes the new value for the output bit to the
process image register.
LAD and FBD: When the output instruction is executed, the S7-200
turns the output bit in the process image register ON or OFF. The as-
signed bit is set equal to power flow state.
STL: The value on the top of the stack is copied to the assigned bit.
=I bit The Output Immediate instruction writes the new value to both the
physical output and the corresponding process image register location
when the instruction is executed.
LAD and FBD: When the output immediate instruction is executed, the
physical output point (bit) is immediately set equal to power flow. The
"I" indicates an immediate reference; the new value is written to both
the physical output point and the corresponding process image register
address. This differs from the non-immediate references, which only
write the new value to the process image register.
STL: The instruction immediately copies the value on the top of the
stack to the assigned physical output bit and process image address.

Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Bit (immediate) BOOL Q
Input (LAD) BOOL Power flow
See also
Bit logic output examples (Page 163)
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.8 Set, reset, set immediate, and reset immediate functions

S bit, N The Set (S) and Reset (R) instructions set (ON) or reset (OFF) the
number of bits (N), starting at the address (bit). You can set or
reset from 1 to 255 bits.
If the Reset instruction specifies either a timer bit (T address) or
counter bit (C address), the instruction resets the timer or counter
R bit, N bit and clears the current value of the timer or counter.
SI bit, N The Set Immediate and Reset Immediate instructions immediately

set (ON) or immediately reset (OFF) the number of points (N),
starting at address (bit). You can set or reset from 1 to 255 points
immediately.
The "I" indicates an immediate reference; when the instruction is
RI bit, N executed, the new value is written to both the physical output point
and the corresponding process image register location. This differs
from the non-immediate references, which write the new value to
the process image register only.
Non-fatal errors with ENO = 0 SM bits affected

N = 0 (zero) None
0006H Indirect address
0091H Operand out of range

Bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Bit (immediate) BOOL Q
N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Input (LAD) BOOL Power flow
See also
Bit logic output examples (Page 163)
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.9 Set and reset dominant bistable
LAD/FBD 1 Description
The bit parameter assigns the Boolean address that is set or reset. The optional OUT connection
reflects the signal state of the Bit parameter.
SR (Set dominant bistable) is a latch where the set dominates. If the set (S1) and reset (R) signals
are both true, the output (OUT) is true.
RS (Reset dominant bistable) is a latch where the reset dominates. If the set (S) and reset (R1) sig-
nals are both true, the output (OUT) is false.
1 Not applicable for STL
Input / outputs Data type Operand

bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, S
S1, R (LAD SR) BOOL Power flow
S, R1 (LAD RS) BOOL Power flow
OUT (LAD) BOOL Power flow
S1, R (FBD SR) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
S, R1 (FBD RS) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
OUT (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
SR truth table
S1 R Out (bit)
0 0 Previous state
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
RS truth table
S R1 Out (bit)
0 0 Previous state
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
Example SR and RS
LAD STL
NETWORK 1
LD I0.0
LD I0.1
NOT
A Q0.0
OLD
= Q0.0
NETWORK 2
LD I0.0
LD I0.1
NOT
LPS
A Q0.1
= Q0.1
LPP
ALD
O Q0.1
= Q0.1
7.1.10 NOP (No operation) instruction
LAD STL Description

NOP N The No Operation (NOP) instruction has no effect on the user program execution.
This instruction is not available in FBD mode. The operand N is a number from 0
to 255.
Inputs / Output Data type Operand

N (LAD, STL) BYTE N: Constant (0 to 255)
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.11 Bit logic input examples
LAD STL
Normally-open contacts I0.0 AND I0.1 must be ON Network 1
(closed) to activate Q0.0. The NOT instruction acts LD I0.0
as an inverter. In RUN mode, Q0.0 and Q0.1 have A I0.1
opposite logic states. = Q0.0
NOT
= Q0.1
(Normally-open contact I0.2 must be ON) or (Normal- Network 2

ly-closed contact I0.3 must be OFF), to activate LD I0.2
Q0.2. One or more parallel LAD branches (OR logic) ON I0.3
must be true to make the output active. = Q0.2
A positive Edge Up input on a P contact or a nega- Network 3

tive Edge Down input on an N contact outputs a LD I0.4
pulse with a 1 scan cycle duration. In RUN mode, the LPS
pulsed state changes of Q0.4 and Q0.5 are too fast EU
to be visible in program status view. The Set and S Q0.3, 1
Reset outputs latch the pulse state into Q0.3 and = Q0.4
make the state change visible in program status
LPP
view.
ED
R Q0.3, 1
= Q0.5
Run-mode timing for input example
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
7.1.12 Bit logic output examples
LAD STL
Output instructions assign bit values to external I/O Network 1
(I, Q) and internal memory (M, SM, T, C, V, S, L). LD I0.0
= Q0.0
= Q0.1
= V0.0
Set a sequential group of 6 bits to a value of 1. Spec- Network 2

ify a starting bit address and how many bits to set. LD I0.1
The program status indicator for Set is ON when the S Q0.2, 6
value of the first bit (Q0.2) is 1.
Reset a sequential group of 6 bits to a value of 0. Network 3

Specify a starting bit address and how many bits to LD I0.2
reset. The program status indicator for Reset is ON R Q0.2, 6
when the value of the first bit (Q0.2) is 0.
Sets and resets 8 output bits (Q1.0 to Q1.7) as a Network 4

group. LD I0.3
LPS
A I0.4
S Q1.0, 8
LPP
A I0.5
R Q1.0, 8
The Set and Reset instructions perform the function Network 5
of a latched relay. To isolate the Set/Reset bits, LD I0.6
make sure they are not overwritten by another as- = Q1.0
signment instruction. In this example, Network 4 sets
and resets eight output bits (Q1.0 to Q1.7) as a
group. In RUN mode, Network 5 can overwrite the
Q1.0 bit value and control the Set/Reset program
status indicators in Network 4.
S7-200 SMART
7.1 Bit logic
Run-mode timing for output examples
S7-200 SMART
7.2 Clock
7.2 Clock
7.2.1 Read and set real-time clock
LAD / FBD STL Description

TODR T The Read real-time clock instruction reads the current time and date from the CPU
and loads it in an 8 byte Time buffer starting at byte address T.
TODW T The Set real-time clock instruction writes a new time and date to the CPU using the
8 byte Time buffer data that is assigned by T.

0006H Indirect address None
0007H T data error
Input Data type Operand

T BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
Note
READ_RTC, SET_RTC programming tips
Invalid dates are not accepted. If you enter February 30, for example, a time-of-day non-fatal
error will occur (0007H).
Do not use the READ_RTC / SET_RTC instructions in both the main program and in an
interrupt routine. A READ_RTC / SET_RTC instruction in an interrupt routine cannot execute,
while another READ_RTC / SET_RTC instruction is executing. In this case, system flag bit
SM4.3 is set, indicating that two simultaneous accesses to the clock were attempted
resulting in a T data error (non-fatal error 0007H).
The time-of-day clock in the CPU uses only the least significant two digits for the year, so for
the year 2000, the year is represented as 00. However, user programs that use the year's
value must take into account the two-digit representation.
Leap year is correctly handled through year 2099.
S7-200 SMART
7.2 Clock
Format of 8 byte time buffer, beginning at byte address T

You must assign all date and time values in BCD format (for example, 16#12 for the year
2012). The BCD value range of 00 to 99 can assign years, in 2000 to 2099 range.
T byte Description Data value

0 Year 00 to 99 (BCD value) Year 20xx: where xx is the two digit BCD value in
T-byte 0
1 Month 01 to 12 (BCD value)
2 Day 01 to 31 (BCD value)
3 Hour 00 to 23 (BCD value)
4 Minute 00 to 59 (BCD value)
5 Second 00 to 59 (BCD value)
6 reserved Always set to 00
7 Day of week Value ignored when written with the SET_RTC / TODW instruction.
Value reports correct day of week when read with the READ_RTC /
TODR instruction based upon current Year/Month/Day values.
1 to 7, 1 = Sunday, 7 = Saturday (BCD value)
Extended power outage effect on the CPU clock

See the S7-200 SMART system manual appendix A CPU specifications, for how long the
real-time clock can maintain the correct time during power outages.
A CPU initializes with the time values shown in the following table, after an extended power
outage.
Date Time Day of week

01-Jan-2000 00:00:00 Saturday
Note
Compact S7-200 SMART CPU models CR40 and CR60 do not have a RTC (Real Time
Clock) or super cap
The READ_RTC and SET_RTC instructions can be used to set the year, date, and time
values in CPU models CR40 and CR60, but the values will be lost on the next CPU power
off-on cycle. On power-up, the date and time will initialize to January 1, 2000.
S7-200 SMART
7.2 Clock
7.2.2 Read and set real-time clock extended

TODRX T The Read real-time clock extended instruction reads the current time, date, and
daylight saving configuration from the PLC and loads it in a 19-byte buffer begin-
ning at the address assigned by T.
TODWX T The Set real-time clock instruction writes a new time, date, and daylight saving
configuration to the PLC using the 19-byte buffer data that is assigned by byte
address T.

0007H T data error
Input Data type Operand

T BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
Note
READ_RTCX, SET_RTCX programming tips
Invalid dates are not accepted. If you enter February 30, for example, a time-of-day non-fatal
error will occur (0007H).
Do not use the READ_RTCX / SET_RTCX instructions in both the main program and in an
interrupt routine. A READ_RTCX / SET_RTCX instruction in an interrupt routine cannot
execute, while another READ_RTCX / SET_RTCX instruction is executing. In this case,
system flag bit SM4.3 is set, indicating that two simultaneous accesses to the clock were
attempted resulting in a T data error (non-fatal error 0007H).
The time-of-day clock in the CPU uses only the least significant two digits for the year, so for
the year 2000, the year is represented as 00. However, user programs that use the year's
value must take into account the two-digit representation.
Leap year is correctly handled through year 2099.
S7-200 SMART
7.2 Clock
Format of 19 byte time buffer, beginning at byte address T
Note
T bytes (9 to18) or (9 to 20) are used only when a time correction mode is assigned in byte
8. Otherwise, the last values written to bytes (9 to18) or (9 to 20) by
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART or the SET_RTCX instruction are returned.
You must assign all date and time values in BCD format (for example, 16#12 for the year
2012). The BCD value range of 00 to 99 can assign the year in the range of 2000 to 2099.

0 Year 00 to 99 (BCD value) Year 20xx: where xx is the two digit BCD
value in T-byte 0
1 Month 01 to 12 (BCD value)
2 Day 01 to 31 (BCD value)
3 Hour 00 to 23 (BCD value)
4 Minute 00 to 59 (BCD value)
5 Second 00 to 59 (BCD value)
6 reserved Always set to 00
7 Day of week Value ignored when written with the SET_RTCX / TODWX in-
struction.
Value reports correct day of week when read with the
READ_RTCX / TODRX instruction based upon current
Year/Month/Day values.
1 to 7, 1 = Sunday, 7 = Saturday (BCD value)
8 Correction mode: 00H = correction disabled
For Daylight saving time 01H = EU (time zone offset from UTC = 0 hrs) 1
(DST) 02H = EU (time zone offset from UTC = +1 hrs) 1
03H = EU (time zone offset from UTC = +2 hrs) 1
04H-07H = reserved
08H = EU (time zone offset from UTC = -1 hrs) 1
09H-0FH = reserved
10H = US 2
11H = Australia 3
12H = reserved
13H = New Zealand 4
14H-EDH = reserved
EEH = user defined (day of week) (using values in bytes 9-20)
EFH-FDH reserved
FEH = reserved
FFH = user defined (day of month) (using values in bytes 9-18)
The following bytes 9-18 are used only for correction mode = FFH (legacy user assigned)
9 DST correction hours 0 to 23 (BCD value)
10 DST correction minutes 0 to 59 (BCD value)
11 DST beginning month 1 to 12 (BCD value)
12 DST beginning day 1 to 31 (BCD value)
13 DST beginning hour 0 to 23 (BCD value)
14 DST beginning minute 0 to 59 (BCD value)
S7-200 SMART
7.2 Clock

15 DST ending month 1 to 12 (BCD value)
16 DST ending day 1 to 31 (BCD value)
17 DST ending hour 0 to 23 (BCD value)
18 DST ending minute 0 to 59 (BCD value)
The following bytes 9-20 are used only for correction mode = EEH (extended user assigned)
9 DST correction hours 0 to 23 (BCD value)
10 DST correction minutes 0 to 59 (BCD value)
11 DST beginning month 1 to 12 (BCD value)
12 DST beginning week 1 to 5 (BCD value) 5
13 DST beginning weekday 1 to 7 (BCD value)
14 DST beginning hour 0 to 23 (BCD value)
15 DST beginning minute 0 to 59 (BCD value)
16 DST ending month 1 to 12 (BCD value)
17 DST ending week 1 to 5 (BCD value) 5
18 DST ending weekday 1 to 7 (BCD value)
19 DST ending hour 0 to 23 (BCD value)
20 DST ending minute 0 to 59 (BCD value)
1 EU convention: Adjust time ahead one hour on last Sunday in March at 1:00 a.m. UTC. Adjust
time back one hour on last Sunday in October at 2:00 a.m. UTC. (The local time when the correc-
tion is made depends upon the time zone offset from UTC).
2 US convention: 2007 standard - Adjust time ahead one hour on second Sunday in March at 2:00
a.m. local time. Adjust time back one hour on first Sunday in November at 2:00 a.m. local time.
3 Australia convention: 2007 standard - Adjust time ahead one hour on first Sunday in October at
2:00 a.m. local time. Adjust time back one hour on first Sunday in April at 2:00 a.m. local time (also
for Australia - Tasmania).
4 New Zealand convention: 2007 standard - Adjust time ahead one hour on last Sunday in Septem-
ber at 2:00 a.m. local time. Adjust time back one hour on first Sunday in April at 2:00 a.m. local
time.
5 To assign the last occurrence of the weekday in the month (for example, the last Monday in April),
set the week = 5.
Extended power outage effect on the CPU clock

See the S7-200 SMART system manual appendix A CPU specifications, for how long the
real-time clock can maintain the correct time during power outages.
A CPU initializes with the time values shown in the following table, after an extended power
outage.
Date Time Day of week

01-Jan-2000 00:00:00 Saturday
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Note
Compact S7-200 SMART CPU models CR40 and CR60 do not have a RTC (Real Time
Clock) or super cap
The READ_RTC and SET_RTC instructions can be used to set the year, date, and time
values in CPU models CR40 and CR60, but the values will be lost on the next CPU power
off-on cycle. On power-up, the date and time will initialize to January 1, 2000.
7.3 Communication
7.3.1 GET and PUT (Ethernet)

You can use the GET and PUT instructions for communication between S7-200 SMART
CPUs through the Ethernet connection:
Table 7- 1 GET and PUT instructions
LAD/FBD STL Description

GET The GET instruction initiates a communications operation on the
Ethernet port to gather data from a remote device, as defined in the
description table (TABLE).
The GET instruction can read up to 222 bytes of information from a
remote station.
PUT The PUT instruction initiates a communications operation on the
Ethernet port to write data to a remote device, as defined in the
description table (TABLE).
The PUT instruction can write up to 212 bytes of information to a
remote station.
You can have any number of GET and PUT instructions in the program, but only a maximum
of 16 GET and PUT instructions can be activated at any one time. For example, you can
have eight GET and eight PUT instructions, or six GET and ten PUT instructions, active at
the same time in a given CPU.
When you execute a GET or PUT instruction, the CPU makes an Ethernet connection to the
remote IP address in the GET or PUT table. The CPU maintains a maximum of eight
connections at a time. Once a connection is established, that connection is maintained until
the CPU goes to STOP mode.
The CPU utilizes a single connection for all GET/PUT instructions that are directed to the
same IP address. For example, if there are three GET instructions enabled at the same time
when the remote IP address is 192.168.2.10, then the GET instructions execute sequentially
on one Ethernet connection to IP address 192.168.2.10.
If you try to create a ninth connection (a ninth IP address), the CPU searches through the
connections to find the connection that has been inactive for the longest period of time. The
CPU disconnects this connection and then creates a connection to the new IP address.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
The GET and PUT instructions require additional communication background time (refer to
"Configuring communication" (Page 117)) when they are processing/active/busy and also
when they are just maintaining the connection to the other device. The amount of
communication background time required depends on the number of GET and PUT
instruction that are active/busy, how often the GET and PUT instructions are executed, and
the number of connections that are currently open. You should adjust the communication
background time to a higher value if the communication performance is slow.
Table 7- 2 Valid operands for the GET and PUT instructions
Inputs/Outputs Data Type Operands

TABLE BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, *VD, *LD, *AC
Error conditions that set ENO = 0:

0006 (indirect address)
If the function returns an error and sets the E bit of table status byte (see the figure
below)
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
The following figure describes the table that is referenced by the TABLE parameter, and the
following table lists the error codes.
Table 7- 3 Definition of GET and PUT instructions TABLE parameter
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

offset
0 D1 A2 E3 0 Error code
1 Remote
2 station
3 IP
4 Address 4
5 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero)
6 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero)
7
8 Pointer to the data
9 area in the
10 remote station
(I, Q, M, V, or DB1) 5
11 Data length 6
12
13 Pointer to the data
14 area in the
15 local station (this CPU)
(I, Q, M, V, or DB1) 7
1 D - Done (function has been completed)
2 A - Active (function has been queued)
3 E - Error (function returned an error)
4 Remote station IP address: The address of the CPU whose data is to be accessed.
5 Pointer to the data area in the remote station: An indirect pointer to the data that is to be accessed
in the remote station.
6 Data length: The number of bytes of data that are to be accessed in the remote station (1 to 212
bytes for PUT and 1 to 222 bytes for GET).
7 Pointer to the data area in the local station: An indirect pointer to the data that is to be accessed in
the local station (this CPU).
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Table 7- 4 Error codes for the GET and PUT instructions TABLE parameter
Code Definition
0 No error
1 Illegal parameter in the PUT/GET table:
Local area is not I, Q, M, or V
Local area is not large enough for the data length requested
Data length is zero or greater than 222 bytes for a GET or greater than 212 bytes for a PUT
Remote area is not I, Q, M, or V
Remote IP address is illegal (0.0.0.0)
Remote IP address is a broadcast address or a multicast address
Remote IP address is the same as the Local IP address
Remote IP address is on a different subnet
2 Too many PUT/GET instructions are currently active (only 16 allowed)
3 No connection available. All connections are currently active with outstanding requests
4 Error returned from remote CPU:
Too much data was requested or sent
Writing to Q memory is not allowed in STOP mode
Memory area is write-protected (see SDB configuration)
5 No connection available to the remote CPU:
Remote CPU does not have an available server connection
Connection to remote CPU was lost (CPU powered off, physical disconnect)
6 to 9, Not used (Reserved for future use)
A to F
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
The following figure shows an example to illustrate the utility of the GET and PUT
instructions. For this example, consider a production line where tubs of butter are being filled
and sent to one of four boxing machines (case packers). The case packer packs eight tubs
of butter into a single cardboard box. A diverter machine controls the flow of butter tubs to
each of the case packers. Four CPUs control the case packers, and a CPU with a TD 400
operator interface controls the diverter.
t Out of butter tubs to pack; t=1, out of butter tubs

b Box supply is low; b=1, must add boxes in the next 30 minutes
g Glue supply is low; g=1, must add glue in the next 30 minutes
eee Error code identifying the type of fault experienced
f Fault indicator; f=1, the case packer has detected an error
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
The following figure shows the GET table (VB200) and PUT table (VB300) for accessing the
data in station 2. The Diverter CPU uses a GET instruction to read the control and status
information on a continuous basis from each of the case packers. Each time a case packer
has packed 100 cases, the diverter notes this and sends a message to clear the status word
using a PUT instruction.
Table 7- 5 GET and PUT instructions buffer for reading from and clearing the count of Case Packer
1
GET_ Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit PUT_ Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
TABLE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TABLE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
buffer buffer
VB200 D A E 0 Error code VB300 D A E 0 Error code
VB201 Remote station IP address = 192. VB301 Remote station IP address = 192.
VB202 168. VB302 168.
VB203 50. VB303 50.
VB204 2 VB304 2
VB205 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero) VB305 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero)
VB206 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero) VB306 Reserved = 0 (Must be set to zero)
VB207 Pointer to the data VB307 Pointer to the data
VB208 area in the VB308 area in the
VB209 remote station = VB309 remote station =
VB210 (&VB100) VB310 (&VB101)
VB211 Data length = 3 bytes VB311 Data length = 2 bytes
VB212 Pointer to the data VB312 Pointer to the data
VB213 area in the VB313 area in the
VB214 local station (this CPU) = VB314 local station (this CPU) =
VB215 (&VB216) VB315 (&VB316)
VB216 Control VB316 0
VB217 Status MSB VB317 0
VB218 Status LSB
In this example, the data immediately follows the PUT and GET tables. This data can be
placed anywhere in the CPU memory since it is pointed to by the local station pointer in a
table (for example, VB212 - VB215).
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Table 7- 6 Example: GET and PUT instructions
Network 1 On the first scan, clear all

LD SM0.1 receive and transmit buff-
FILL +0, VW200, 40 ers.
FILL +0, VW300, 40
Network 2 When the GET "Done" bit

LD V200.7 (V200.7) is set and
AW= VW217, +100 100 cases have been
MOVB 192, VB301 packed:
MOVB 168, VB302 1. Load the station ad-
MOVB 50, VB303 dress of case packer 1.
MOVB 2, VB304
MOVW 0, VB305 2. Load a pointer to the
MOVD &VB101, VD307 data in the remote sta-
MOVB 2, VB311 tion.
MOVD &VB316, VD312 3. Load the length of data
MOVW 0, VW316 to be transmitted.
PUT VB300 4. Load the data to
transmit.
Reset the number of cases
packed by case packer 1
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Network 3 When the GET "Done" bit

LD V200.7 is set, save the control
MOVB VB216, VB400 data from case packer 1.
Network 4 If not the first scan and

LDN SM0.1 there are no errors:
AN V200.6 1. Load the station ad-
AN V200.5 dress of case packer 1.
MOVB 192, VB201
MOVB 168, VB202 2. Load a pointer to the
MOVB 50, VB203 data in the remote sta-
MOVB 2, VB204 tion.
MOVW 0, VB205 3. Load the length of data
MOVD &VB100, VD207 to be received.
MOVB 3, VB211 4. Read the control and
MOVD &VB216, VD212 status data in case
GET VB200 packer 1.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
7.3.2 Transmit and receive (Freeport on RS485/RS232)

You can use the Transmit (XMT) and Receive (RCV) instructions for communication
between a S7-200 SMART CPU and other devices through the CPU serial port(s). Each
S7-200 SMART CPU provides an integrated RS485 port (Port 0). The standard CPUs
additionally support an optional CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485 port (Port 1). The
communication protocol must be implemented in the user program.

XMT TBL, POR The Transmit instruction (XMT) is used in Freeport mode to transmit data by
T means of the communications port(s).
RCV TBL, POR The Receive instruction (RCV) initiates or terminates the receive message
T function. You must specify a start and an end condition for the Receive box to
operate. Messages received through the specified port (PORT) are stored in
the data buffer (TBL). The first entry in the data buffer specifies the number of
bytes received.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication

0006H Indirect address SM 86.6 Receive message terminated on port 0
0009H Simultaneous Trans- SM 186.6 Receive message terminated on port 1
mit/Receive on port 0
000BH Simultaneous Trans-
mit/Receive on port 1
0090H Port number is invalid
Receive parameter error sets
SM86.6 or SM186.6
CPU is not in Freeport mode

TBL BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, *VD, *LD, *AC
PORT BYTE Constant: 0 or 1
Note: The two available ports are as follows:
Integrated RS485 port (Port 0),
CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485 port (Port 1)
Using Freeport mode to control the serial communications port

You can select the Freeport mode to control the serial communications port of the CPU by
means of the user program. When you select Freeport mode, your program controls the
operation of the communications port through the use of the receive interrupts, the transmit
interrupts, the Transmit instruction, and the Receive instruction. The communications
protocol is entirely controlled by the user program while in Freeport mode. SMB30 and
SMB130 are used to select the baud rate and parity.
Two special memory bytes are assigned to the two physical ports:
SMB30 to the integrated RS485 port (Port 0)
SMB130 to the CM01 RS232/RS485 Signal Board (SB) port (Port 1)
The Freeport mode is disabled and normal communications are re-established (for example,
HMI device access) when the CPU is in STOP mode.
In the simplest case, you can send a message to a printer or a display using only the
Transmit (XMT) instruction. Other examples include a connection to a bar code reader, a
weigh scale, and a welder. In each case, you must write your program to support the
protocol that is used by the device with which the CPU communicates while in Freeport
mode.
Freeport communications are possible only when the CPU is in RUN mode. Enable the
Freeport mode by setting a value of 01 in the protocol select field of SMB30 (Port 0) or
SMB130 (Port 1). While in Freeport mode, communication with an HMI on the same port is
not possible.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Changing PPI communications to Freeport mode

SMB30 and SMB130 configure the communications ports, 0 and 1 respectively, for Freeport
operation and provide selection of baud rate, parity, and number of data bits. The following
figure describes the Freeport control byte. One stop bit is generated for all configurations.
pp Parity select d Data bits per character

00 = No parity 0= 8 bits per character
01 = Even parity 1= 7 bits per character
10 = No parity
11 = Odd parity
bbb Freeport baud rate mm Protocol selection
000 = 38400 00 = PPI slave mode
001 = 19200 01 = Freeport mode
010 = 9600 10 = Reserved (defaults to PPI slave mode)
011 = 4800 11 = Reserved (defaults to PPI slave mode)
100 = 2400
101 = 1200
110 = 115200
111 = 57600
Transmit data
The Transmit instruction lets you send a buffer of one or more characters, up to a maximum
of 255. The following figure shows the format of the Transmit buffer.
Number of bytes to transmit

Characters of the message
If an interrupt routine is attached to the transmit complete event, the CPU generates an
interrupt (interrupt event 9 for port 0 and interrupt event 26 for port 1) after the last character
of the buffer is sent.
You can transmit without using interrupts (for example, sending a message to a printer) by
monitoring SM4.5 (port 0) or SM4.6 (port 1) to signal when transmission is complete.
You can use the Transmit instruction to generate a BREAK condition by setting the number
of characters to zero and then executing the Transmit instruction. This generates a BREAK
condition on the line for 16-bit times at the current baud rate. Transmitting a BREAK is
handled in the same manner as transmitting any other message, in that a Transmit interrupt
is generated when the BREAK is complete and SM4.5 or SM4.6 signals the current status of
the Transmit operation.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Receive data
The Receive instruction lets you receive

a buffer of one or more characters, up to
a maximum of 255. The following figure
shows the format of the Receive buffer.
Number of bytes received (byte field)

Start character
Message
End character
Characters of the message
If an interrupt routine is attached to the receive message complete event, the CPU generates
an interrupt (interrupt event 23 for port 0 and interrupt event 24 for port 1) after the last
character of the buffer is received.
You can receive messages without using interrupts by monitoring SMB86 (port 0) or
SMB186 (port 1). This byte is non-zero when the Receive instruction is inactive or has been
terminated. It is zero when a receive is in progress.
As shown in the following table, the Receive instruction allows you to select the message
start and message end conditions, using SMB86 through SMB94 for port 0 and SMB186
through SMB194 for port 1.
Note
The receive message function is automatically terminated in case of a framing, parity,
overrun, or break error.
You must define a start condition and an end condition (maximum character count) for the
receive message function to operate.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Receive buffer format (SMB86 to SMB94, and SMB186 to SMB194)
Port 0 Port 1 Description

SMB86 SMB186 Receive message status byte
n: 1 = Receive message function terminated; user issued disable command.

r: 1 = Receive message function terminated; error in input parameters or missing start or end con-
dition.
e: 1 = End character received.
t: 1 = Receive message function terminated; timer expired.
c: 1 = Receive message function terminated; maximum character count achieved.
p: 1 = Receive message function terminated; a parity error.
SMB87 SMB187 Receive message control byte
en:
0 = Receive message function is disabled.
1 = Receive message function is enabled.
The enable/disable receive message bit is checked each time the RCV instruction is executed.
sc:
0 = Ignore SMB88 or SMB188.
1 = Use the value of SMB88 or SMB188 to detect start of message.
ec:
1 = Use the value of SMB89 or SMB189 to detect end of message.
il:
1 = Use the value of SMB90 or SMB190 to detect start of message.
c/m:
0 = Timer is an inter-character timer.
1 = Timer is a message timer.
tmr:
0 = Ignore SMW92 or SMW192.
1 = Terminate receive if the time period in SMW92 or SMW192 is exceeded.
bk:
0 = Ignore break conditions.
1 = Use break condition as start of message detection.
SMB88 SMB188 Start of message character.
SMB89 SMB189 End of message character.
SMW90 SMW190 Idle line time period given in milliseconds. The first character received after idle line time has ex-
pired is the start of a new message.
SMW92 SMW192 Inter-character/message timer time-out value given in milliseconds. If the time period is exceeded,
the receive message function is terminated.
SMB94 SMB194 Maximum number of characters to be received (1 to 255 bytes). This range must be set to the
expected maximum buffer size, even if the character count message termination is not used.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Start and End conditions for the Receive instruction

The Receive instruction uses the bits of the receive message control byte (SMB87 or
SMB187) to define the message start and end conditions.
Note
If there is traffic present on the communications port from other devices when the Receive
instruction is executed, the receive message function could begin receiving a character in
the middle of that character, resulting in a possible parity or framing error and termination of
the receive message function. If parity is not enabled the received message could contain
incorrect characters. This situation can occur when the start condition is specified to be a
specific start character or any character, as described in item 2 and item 6 below.
The Receive instruction supports several message start conditions. Specifying a start
condition involving a break or an idle line detection avoids the problem of starting a message
in the middle of a character by forcing the receive message function to synchronize the start
of the message with the start of a character before placing characters into the message
buffer.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
The Receive instruction supports several start conditions:

1. Idle line detection: The idle line condition is defined as a quiet or idle time on the
transmission line. A receive is started when the communications line has been quiet or
idle for the number of milliseconds specified in SMW90 or SMW190. When the Receive
instruction in your program is executed, the receive message function initiates a search
for an idle line condition. If any characters are received before the idle line time expires,
the receive message function ignores those characters and restarts the idle line timer
with the time from SMW90 or SMW190. See the following figure. After the idle line time
expires, the receive message function stores all subsequent characters received in the
message buffer.
The idle line time should always be greater than the time to transmit one character (start
bit, data bits, parity and stop bits) at the specified baud rate. A typical value for the idle
line time is three character times at the specified baud rate.
You use idle line detection as a start condition for binary protocols, protocols where there
is not a particular start character, or when the protocol specifies a minimum time between
messages.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = idle line timeout in milliseconds
Receive instruction is executed: Starts the idle time

Restarts the idle time
Idle time is detected: Starts the Receive Message function
First character is placed in the message buffer
2. Start character detection: The start character is any character which is used as the first
character of a message. A message is started when the start character specified in
SMB88 or SMB188 is received. The receive message function stores the start character
in the receive buffer as the first character of the message. The receive message function
ignores any characters that are received before the start character. The start character
and all characters received after the start character are stored in the message buffer.
Typically, you use start character detection for ASCII protocols in which all messages
start with the same character.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 1, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = don't care, SMB88/SMB188 = start

character
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
3. Idle line and start character: The Receive instruction can start a message with the
combination of an idle line and a start character. When the Receive instruction is
executed, the receive message function searches for an idle line condition. After finding
the idle line condition, the receive message function looks for the specified start
character. If any character but the start character is received, the receive message
function restarts the search for an idle line condition. All characters received before the
idle line condition has been satisfied and before the start character has been received are
ignored. The start character is placed in the message buffer along with all subsequent
characters.
The idle line time should always be greater than the time to transmit one character (start
bit, data bits, parity and stop bits) at the specified baud rate. A typical value for the idle
line time is three character times at the specified baud rate.
Typically, you use this type of start condition when there is a protocol that specifies a
minimum time between messages, and the first character of the message is an address
or something which specifies a particular device. This is most useful when implementing
a protocol where there are multiple devices on the communications link. In this case the
Receive instruction triggers an interrupt only when a message is received for the specific
address or devices specified by the start character.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 1, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 > 0, SMB88/SMB188 = start character

4. Break detection: A break is indicated when the received data is held to a zero value for a
time greater than a full character transmission time. A full character transmission time is
defined as the total time of the start, data, parity and stop bits. If the Receive instruction is
configured to start a message on receiving a break condition, any characters received
after the break condition are placed in the message buffer. Any characters received
before the break condition are ignored.
Typically, you use break detection as a start condition only when a protocol requires it.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 0, bk = 1, SMW90/SMW190 = don't care, SMB88/SMB188 = don't care

5. Break and a start character: The Receive instruction can be configured to start receiving
characters after receiving a break condition, and then a specific start character, in that
sequence. After the break condition, the receive message function looks for the specified
start character. If any character but the start character is received, the receive message
function restarts the search for a break condition. All characters received before the break
condition has been satisfied and before the start character has been received are
ignored. The start character is placed in the message buffer along with all subsequent
characters.
Setup: il = 0, sc = 1, bk = 1, SMW90/SMW190 = don't care, SMB88/SMB188 = start

character
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
6. Any character: The Receive instruction can be configured to immediately start receiving
any and all characters and placing them in the message buffer. This is a special case of
the idle line detection. In this case the idle line time (SMW90 or SMW190) is set to zero.
This forces the Receive instruction to begin receiving characters immediately upon
execution.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = 0, SMB88/SMB188 = don't care
Starting a message on any character allows the message timer to be used to time out the
receiving of a message. This is useful in cases where Freeport is used to implement the
master or host portion of a protocol and there is a need to time out if no response is
received from a slave device within a specified amount of time. The message timer starts
when the Receive instruction executes because the idle line time was set to zero. The
message timer times out and terminates the receive message function if no other end
condition is satisfied.
Setup: il = 1, sc = 0, bk = 0, SMW90/SMW190 = 0, SMB88/SMB188 = don't care, c/m = 1,

tmr = 1, SMW92 = message timeout in milliseconds
The Receive instruction supports several ways to terminate a message. The message can
be terminated on one or a combination of the following:
1. End character detection: The end character is any character which is used to denote the
end of the message. After finding the start condition, the Receive instruction checks each
character received to see if it matches the end character. When the end character is
received, it is placed in the message buffer and the receive is terminated.
Typically, you use end character detection with ASCII protocols where every message
ends with a specific character. You can use end character detection in combination with
the intercharacter timer, the message timer or the maximum character count to terminate
a message.
Setup: ec = 1, SMB89/SMB189 = end character

2. Intercharacter timer: The intercharacter time is the time measured from the end of one
character (the stop bit) to the end of the next character (the stop bit). If the time between
characters (including the second character) exceeds the number of milliseconds specified
in SMW92 or SMW192, the receive message function is terminated. The intercharacter
timer is restarted on each character received. See the following figure.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
You can use the intercharacter timer to terminate a message for protocols which do not
have a specific end-of-message character. This timer must be set to a value greater than
one character time at the selected baud rate since this timer always includes the time to
receive one entire character (start bit, data bits, parity and stop bits).
You can use the intercharacter timer in combination with the end character detection and
the maximum character count to terminate a message.
Setup: c/m = 0, tmr = 1, SMW92/SMW192 = timeout in milliseconds
Restarts the intercharacter timer

The intercharacter timer expires: Terminates the message and generates the Receive mes-
sage interrupt
3. Message timer: The message timer terminates a message at a specified time after the
start of the message. The message timer starts as soon as the start condition(s) for the
receive message function have been met. The message timer expires when the number
of milliseconds specified in SMW92 or SMW192 has passed. See the following figure.
Typically, you use a message timer when the communications devices cannot guarantee
that there will not be time gaps between characters or when operating over modems. For
modems, you can use a message timer to specify a maximum time allowed to receive the
message after the message has started. A typical value for a message timer would be
about 1.5 times the time required to receive the longest possible message at the selected
baud rate.
You can use the message timer in combination with the end character detection and the
maximum character count to terminate a message.
Setup: c/m = 1, tmr = 1, SMW92/SMW192 = timeout in milliseconds
Start of the message: Starts the message timer

The message timer expires: Terminates the message and generates the Receive message
interrupt
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
4. Maximum character count: The Receive instruction must be told the maximum number of
characters to receive (SMB94 or SMB194). When this value is met or exceeded, the
receive message function is terminated. The Receive instruction requires that the user
specify a maximum character count even if this is not specifically used as a terminating
condition. This is because the Receive instruction needs to know the maximum size of
the receive message so that user data placed after the message buffer is not overwritten.
The maximum character count can be used to terminate messages for protocols where
the message length is known and always the same. The maximum character count is
always used in combination with the end character detection, intercharacter timer, or
message timer.
5. Parity errors: The Receive instruction automatically terminates when the hardware signals
a parity, framing, or overrun error; or if a break condition is detected after the start of a
message. Parity errors occur only if parity is enabled in SMB30 or SMB130. Framing
errors occur if the stop bit is not correct. Overrun errors occur if characters come in to
quickly for the hardware to handle. A break condition terminates a message because it
resembles a parity or framing error to the hardware. There is no way to disable this
function.
6. User termination: The user program can terminate a receive message function by
executing another Receive instruction with the enable bit (EN) in SMB87 or SMB187 set
to zero. This immediately terminates the receive message function.
Using character interrupt control to receive data

To allow complete flexibility in protocol support, you can also receive data using character
interrupt control. Each character received generates an interrupt. The received character is
placed in SMB2, and the parity status (if enabled) is placed in SM3.0 just prior to execution
of the interrupt routine attached to the receive character event. SMB2 is the Freeport receive
character buffer. Each character received while in Freeport mode is placed in this location for
easy access from the user program. SMB3 is used for Freeport mode and contains a parity
error bit that is turned on when a parity, framing, overrun, or break error is detected on a
received character. All other bits of the byte are reserved. Use the parity bit either to discard
the message or to generate a negative acknowledgement to the message.
When the character interrupt is used at high baud rates (38.4 kbaud to 115.2 kbaud), the
time between interrupts is very short. For example, the character interrupt for 38.4 kbaud is
260 microseconds, for 57.6 kbaud is 173 microseconds, and for 115.2 kbaud is
86 microseconds. Ensure that you keep the interrupt routines very short to avoid missing
characters, or else use the Receive instruction.
Note
SMB2 and SMB3 are shared between Port 0 and Port 1. When the reception of a character
on Port 0 results in the execution of the interrupt routine attached to that event (interrupt
event 8), SMB2 contains the character received on Port 0, and SMB3 contains the parity
status of that character. When the reception of a character on Port 1 results in the execution
of the interrupt routine attached to that event (interrupt event 25), SMB2 contains the
character received on Port 1 and SMB3 contains the parity status of that character.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
Example: Transmit and Receive instructions
MAIN Network 1 Network 1

//This program receives a string of characters until a line feed character
is received. The message is then transmitted back to the sender.
LD SM0.1 On the first scan:
MOVB 16#09, SMB30 1. Initialize Freeport:
- Select 9600 baud.
- Select 8 data bits.
- Select no parity.
MOVB 16#B0, SMB87 2. Initialize RCV message control byte:
- RCV enabled.
- Detect end of message character.
- Detect idle line condition as the mes-
sage start condition.
MOVB 16#0A, SMB89 3. Set end of message character to
hex 0A (line feed).
MOVW +5, SMW90 4. Set idle line timeout to 5 ms.
MOVB 100, SMB94 5. Set maximum number of characters
to 100.
ATCH INT_0, 23 6. Attach interrupt 0 to the Receive
Complete event.
ATCH INT_2, 9 7. Attach interrupt 2 to the Transmit
Complete event.
ENI 8. Enable user interrupts.
RCV VB100, 0 9. Enable receive box with buffer at
VB100.
INT 0 Network 1 Network 1

LDB= SMB86, 16#20 Receive complete interrupt routine:
MOVB 10, SMB34 1. If receive status shows receive of
ATCH INT_1, 10 end character, then attach a 10 ms
CRETI timer to trigger a transmit and return.
NOT 2. If the receive completed for any
RCV VB100, 0 other reason, then start a new receive.

LD SM0.0 10-ms Timer interrupt:
DTCH 10 1. Detach timer interrupt.
XMT VB100, 0 2. Transmit message back to user on
port.
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication

LD SM0.0 Transmit Complete interrupt: Enable
RCV VB100, 0 another receive.
7.3.3 Get port address and set port address (PPI protocol on RS485/RS232)

GPA ADDR, PORT The GET_ADDR instruction reads the station address of the CPU port speci-
fied in PORT and places the value in the address specified in ADDR.
SPA ADDR, PORT The SET_ADDR instruction sets the port station address (PORT) to the value
specified in ADDR. The new address is not saved permanently. After a power
cycle, the affected port returns to the last address (the one that was down-
loaded with the system block).
Non-fatal error conditions with ENO = 0 SM bits affected

0004H Attempted to perform a
SET_ADDR instruction in an interrupt
routine
0090H Port number is invalid
0091H Port address is invalid

ADDR BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
(A constant value is valid only for the Set Port Address instruction.)
PORT BYTE Constant: 0 or 1
Note: The two available ports are as follows:
Integrated RS485 port (Port 0),
CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485 port (Port 1)
S7-200 SMART
7.3 Communication
7.3.4 Get IP address and set IP address (Ethernet)

GIP ADDR, MASK, GATE The GIP_ADDR instruction copies the CPUs IP address into ADDR, the
CPUs subnet mask into MASK, and the CPUs gateway into GATE.
SIP ADDR, MASK, GATE The SIP_ADDR instruction sets the CPUs IP address to the value found
in ADDR, the CPUs subnet mask to the value found in MASK, and the
CPUs gateway to the value found in GATE.

0004H Attempted to execute a
SIP_ADDR instruction in an interrupt
routine
IP address cannot be changed (see
following note)
IP address is invalid for the current
subnet

ADDR DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
MASK DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
GATE DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Note
In order to use the SIP_ADDR instruction, the "IP address data is fixed to the values
below and cannot be changed by other means" checkbox must be unchecked. This
configuration checkbox is located in the "System Block", "Communication" node in the
"Ethernet" field.
The IP address, subnet mask, and gateway values are written to persistent memory.
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare
7.4 Compare
7.4.1 Compare number values

The compare instructions can compare two number values with the same data type. You can
compare bytes, integers, double integers, and real numbers.
For LAD and FBD: When the comparison is TRUE, the compare instruction sets ON a
contact (LAD network power flow), or output (FBD logic flow).
For STL: When the comparison is TRUE, the compare instructions can load, AND, or OR a 1
with the value on the top of the logic stack.
Types of comparison
Six comparison types are available:
Comparison type The output is TRUE only if

== (LAD/FBD) IN1 is equal to IN2
= (STL)
<> IN1 is not equal to IN2
>= IN1 is greater than or equal to IN2
<= IN1 is less than or equal to IN2
> IN1 is greater than IN2
< IN1 is less than IN2
Selecting the data types to be compared

The data type identifier that you choose determines the required data type for the IN1 and
IN2 parameters.
Data type identifier Required IN1, IN2 data type

B Unsigned byte
W Signed word integer
D Signed double word integer
R Signed real
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare
LAD contacts, FBD boxes STL Comparison result

LDB= IN1, IN2 Compare two unsigned byte values:
OB= IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if IN1 = IN2
AB= IN1, IN2
LDW= IN1, IN2 Compare two signed integer values:

OW= IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if IN1 = IN2
AW= IN1, IN2
LDD= IN1, IN2 Compare two signed double integer values:

OD= IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if IN1 = IN2
AD= IN1, IN2
LDR= IN1, IN2 Compare two signed real values:

OR= IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if IN1 = IN2
AR= IN1, IN2
Note
The following conditions cause a non-fatal error, set power flow to OFF (ENO bit = 0), and
use value 0 as the result of the comparison
Illegal indirect address is encountered (any compare instruction)
Illegal real number (for example, NaN) is encountered for compare real instruction
To prevent these conditions from occurring, ensure that you properly initialize pointers and
values that contain real numbers before executing compare instructions that use these
values.
Compare instructions are executed regardless of the state of power flow.
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare

IN1, IN2 BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BOOL LAD: Power flow
FBD: I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic Flow
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare
Example compare values
LAD STL
Activate I0.1 to load V memory addresses Network 1
with low values that make the compari- LD I0.1
sons FALSE and that set the status indi- MOVW -30000, VW0
cators OFF. MOVD -200000000, VD2
MOVR 1.012E-006, VD6
Activate I0.2 to load V memory addresses Network 2

with high values that make the compari- LD I0.2
sons TRUE and that set the status indica- MOVW +30000, VW0
tors ON. MOVD -100000000, VD2
MOVR 3.141593, VD6
Activate I0.3 to perform comparisons. Network 3

The Integer Word comparison tests to LD I0.3
find if VW0 > +10000 is TRUE. LPS
You can also compare two values stored AW> VW0, +10000
in variable memory like VW0 > VW100. = Q0.2
LRD
AD< -150000000, VD2
= Q0.3
LPP
AR> VD6, 5.001E-006
= Q0.4
See also
Constants (Page 69)
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare
7.4.2 Compare character strings

The compare string instructions can compare two ASCII character strings.
For LAD and FBD: When the comparison is TRUE, the compare instruction turns ON the
contact (LAD), or output (FBD).
For STL: When the comparison is TRUE, the compare instruction loads, ANDs, or ORs a 1
with the value on the top of the logic stack.
Comparisons can be made between two variables, or between a constant and a variable. If a
constant is used in a comparison, then it must be the top parameter (LAD contact / FBD box)
or the first parameter (STL).
In the program editor, a constant string parameter assignment must begin and end with a
double quote character. The maximum length of a constant string entry is 126 characters
(bytes).
In contrast, a variable string is referenced by the byte address of the initial length byte with
the character bytes stored the next byte addresses. A variable string has a maximum length
of 254 characters (bytes) and can be initialized in the data block editor (with beginning and
ending double quote character).
LAD contact STL Description

FBD box
LDS= IN1, IN2 Compare two character strings of STRING data type:
OS= IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if string IN1 equals string IN2.
AS= IN1, IN2
LDS<> IN1, IN2 Compare two character strings of STRING data type:
OS<> IN1, IN2 The result is TRUE, if string IN1 does not equal string IN2.
AS<> IN1, IN2
S7-200 SMART
7.4 Compare
Note
The following conditions cause a non-fatal error, set power flow to OFF (ENO bit = 0), and
use value 0 as the result of the comparison:
Illegal indirect address is encountered (any compare instruction)
A variable string with a length greater than 254 characters is encountered (Compare
String instruction)
A variable string whose starting address and length are such that it will not fit in the
specified memory area (Compare String instruction)
To prevent these conditions from occurring, ensure that you properly initialize pointers and
memory locations that are intended to hold ASCII strings prior to executing compare
instructions that use these values. Ensure that the buffer reserved for an ASCII string can
reside completely within the specified memory area.
Compare instructions are executed regardless of the state of power flow.

IN1 STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant string
IN2 STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
OUT BOOL LAD: Power flow
FBD: I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic Flow
Format of the STRING data type

A string variable is a sequence of characters, with each character stored as a byte. The first
byte of the STRING data type defines the length of the string, which is the number of
character bytes.
The diagram below shows the STRING data type stored as a variable in memory. The string
can have a length of 0 to 254 characters. The maximum storage requirement for a variable
string is 255 bytes (the length byte plus 254 characters).
If a constant string parameter is entered directly in the program editor (126 characters
maximum) or a variable string is initialized in the data block editor (254 characters
maximum), the string assignment must begin and end with double quote characters.
See also Constants (Page 69)
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
7.5 Convert
7.5.1 Standard conversion instructions

These instructions convert an input value IN to the assigned format and store the output
value in the memory location assigned by OUT. For example, you can convert a double
integer value to a real number. You can also convert between integer and BCD formats.
Standard conversions

BTI IN, OUT Byte to integer:
Convert the byte value IN to an integer value and place the result at the ad-
dress assigned to OUT. The byte is unsigned; therefore, there is no sign exten-
sion.
ITB IN, OUT Integer to byte:

Convert the word value IN to a byte value and place the result at the address
assigned to OUT. Values 0 to 255 are converted. All other values result in over-
flow and the output is not affected.
Note: To change an integer to a real number, execute the Integer to Double
Integer instruction and then the Double Integer to Real instruction.
ITD IN, OUT Integer to double integer:
Convert the integer value IN to a double integer value and place the result at
the address assigned to OUT. The sign is extended.
DTI IN, OUT Double Integer to integer:

Convert the double integer value IN to an integer value and place the result at
the address assigned to OUT. If the value that you convert is too large to be
represented in the output, then the overflow bit is set and the output is not af-
fected.
DTR IN, OUT Double integer to real:
Convert a 32-bit, signed integer IN into a 32-bit real number and place the result
at the address assigned to OUT.
BCDI OUT BCD to Integer:

Convert the binary-coded decimal WORD data type value IN to an integer
WORD data type value and load the result in the address assigned to OUT. The
valid range for IN is 0 to 9999 BCD.
IBCD OUT
Integer to BCD:
Convert the input integer WORD data type value IN to a binary-coded decimal
WORD data type and load the result at the address assigned to OUT. The valid
range for IN is 0 to 9999 integer.
For STL, the IN and OUT parameters use the same address.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert

ROUND IN, OUT Round:
Convert the 32-bit real-number value IN to a double integer value and place the
rounded result at the address assigned to OUT. If the fraction portion is 0.5 or
greater, the number is rounded up.
Truncate:
TRUNC IN, OUT
Convert the 32-bit real-number value IN into a double integer value and place
the result at the address assigned to OUT. Only the whole number portion of
the real number is converted, and the fraction is discarded.
Note: If the value that you are converting is not a valid real number or is too
large to be represented in the output, then the overflow bit is set and the output
is not affected.
SEG IN, OUT SEG:
To illuminate the segments of a seven-segment display, the Segment instruc-
tion converts the character byte specified by IN to generate a bit pattern byte at
the address assigned to OUT.
The illuminated segments represent the character in the least significant digit of
the input byte.

0006H Indirect address SM1.1 Overflow
SM1.1 Overflow SM1.6 Invalid BCD
SM1.6 Invalid BCD

IN BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
WORD (BCD_I, IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AIW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
I_BCD), INT
DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, HC, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
WORD (BCD_I, IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
I_BCD)
INT (B_I, DI_I) IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC,, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Coding for a seven-segment display
Example: Using SEG to display the numeral 5 on a seven-segment display
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I1.0
SEG VB48, AC1
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Examples: I_DI, DI_R, and BCD_I
LAD STL
Convert inches to centimeters: Network 1
1. Load a counter value (inches) into LD I0.0
AC1 (ex. C10=101). ITD C10, AC1
DTR AC1, VD0
2. Convert the value to a real number
(ex. VD0=101.0). MOVR VD0, VD8
*R VD4, VD8
3. Multiply by 2.54 to convert to centi-
ROUND VD8, VD12
meters
(ex. VD4=2.54, VD8=256.54).
4. Convert the value back to an integer
(ex. VD12=257).
Convert a BCD value to an integer (ex. Network 2

AC0=1234, execute BCD_I, then LD I0.3
AC0=04D2). BCDI AC0
See also
Assigning a constant value for instructions
See also
Assigning a constant value for instructions (Page 69)
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
7.5.2 ASCII character array conversion
Converting from or to ASCII character byte arrays

The ASCII character array instructions use the BYTE data type for character input or output.
An array of ASCII characters is referenced a sequence of byte addresses.
This is not the STRING data type, as no length byte is used. Use the ASCII string
instructions to work with the variables of the STRING data type.
ASCII to Hex and Hex to ASCII

ATH IN, OUT, LEN ATH converts a number LEN of ASCII characters, starting at IN, to hexadec-
HTA IN, OUT, LEN imal digits starting at OUT. The maximum number of ASCII characters that
can be converted is 255 characters.
HTA converts the hexadecimal digits, starting with the input byte IN, to ASCII
characters starting at OUT. The number of hexadecimal digits to be convert-
ed is assigned by length LEN. The maximum number of ASCII characters or
hexadecimal digits that can be converted is 255.
Valid ASCII input characters are the alphanumeric characters 0 to 9 with a
hexadecimal code value of 30 to 39, and uppercase characters A to F with a
hex code value of 41 to 46.

0006H Indirect address SM1.7 ATH: Illegal ASCII value
SM1.7 ATH: Illegal ASCII value

IN, OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
LEN BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Converting number values to the ASCII character representation (ITA, DTA, and RTA)
ASCII character output number format:
Positive values are written to the output buffer without a sign.
Negative values are written to the output buffer with a leading minus sign (-).
Leading zeros to the left of the decimal point (except the digit adjacent to the decimal
point) are suppressed.
Values are right-justified in the output buffer.
Real numbers: Values to the right of the decimal point are rounded to fit in the assigned
number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Real numbers: The size of the output buffer must be a minimum of three bytes more than
the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Integer to ASCII

ITA IN, OUT, FMT The Integer to ASCII instruction converts the integer value IN to an array of
ASCII characters. The format parameter FMT assigns the conversion precision
to the right of the decimal, and whether the decimal point is to be shown as a
comma or a period. The resulting conversion is placed in 8 consecutive bytes
beginning with the address assigned by OUT.

FMT bit is not zero for 4 most signifi-
cant bits of the FMT byte
nnn > 5

IN INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
FMT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
The size of the output buffer is always 8 bytes. The number of digits to the right of the
decimal point in the output buffer is assigned by the nnn field. The valid range of the nnn
field is 0 to 5. If you assign 0 digits to the right of the decimal point, then the value is
converted with no decimal point. For values of nnn greater than 5, the output buffer is filled
with ASCII space characters. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a
decimal point (c=0) as the separator between whole number and fraction. The most
significant 4 bits must always be zero.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
The following figure shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c=0)
with three digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn=011).
FMT operand for the integer to ASCII (ITA) instruction
Double integer to ASCII

DTA IN, OUT, FMT The Double Integer to ASCII instruction converts a double word IN to an array of
ASCII characters. The format parameter FMT specifies the conversion precision
to the right of the decimal. The resulting conversion is placed in 12 consecutive
bytes beginning with OUT.

0006H Invalid indirect address None
FMT bit is not zero for 4 most signif-
icant bits, of the FMT byte
nnn > 5

IN DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
The size of the output buffer is always 12 bytes. The number of digits to the right of the
converted with no decimal point. For values of nnn bigger than 5, the output buffer is filled
with ASCII spaces. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal point
(c=0) as the separator between whole number and fraction. The most significant 4 bits must
always be zero.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
The following figure shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point (c=0)
with four digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn=100).
FMT operand for the double integer to ASCII (DTA) instruction
Real to ASCII

RTA IN, OUT, FMT The Real to ASCII instruction converts a real-number value IN to ASCII charac-
ters. The format parameter FMT specifies the conversion precision to the right of
the decimal, whether the decimal point is shown as a comma or a period, and
the output buffer size. The resulting conversion is placed in an output buffer
beginning with OUT.

0006H Invalid indirect address None
nnn > 5
ssss < 3
ssss < number of characters in OUT

IN REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
The number (or length) of the resulting ASCII characters is the size of the output buffer and
can be assigned from 3 to 15 bytes or characters.
The real-number format supports a maximum of 7 significant digits. Attempting to display
more than 7 significant digits produces a rounding error.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
The following figure describes the format operand (FMT) for the RTA instruction. The size of
the output buffer is assigned by the ssss field. A size of 0, 1, or 2 bytes is not valid. The
number of digits to the right of the decimal point in the output buffer is assigned by the nnn
field. The valid range of the nnn field is 0 to 5. If you assign 0 digits to the right of the decimal
point, then the value is converted without a decimal point. The output buffer is filled with
ASCII spaces for values of nnn greater than 5 or when the assigned output buffer is too
small to store the converted value. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a
decimal point (c=0) as the separator between whole number and fraction.
The following figure also shows examples of values that are formatted using a decimal point
(c=0) with one digit to the right of the decimal point (nnn=001) and a buffer size of six bytes
(ssss=0110).
FMT Operand for the Real to ASCII (RTA) instruction
Example: ASCII to Hexadecimal
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I3.2
ATH VB30, VB40, 3
1 The "x" indicates that the "nibble" (half of a byte) is unchanged.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Example: Integer to ASCII
LAD STL
Convert the integer value at VW2 to Network 1
8 ASCII characters starting at VB10, LD I2.3
using a format of 16#0B (a comma ITA VW2, VB10, 16#0B
for the decimal point, followed by 3
digits).
Example: Real to ASCII
LAD STL
Convert the real value at VD2 to 10 Network 1
ASCII characters starting at VB10, LD I2.3
using a format of 16#A3 (a period for RTA VD2, VB10, 16#A3
the decimal point, followed by 3 dig-
its).
See also
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
7.5.3 Number value to ASCII string conversion
Format of the STRING data type

A string variable is a sequence of characters, with each character stored as a byte. The first
byte of the STRING data type defines the length of the string, which is the number of
character bytes.
The diagram below shows the STRING data type stored as a variable in memory. The string
can have a length of 0 to 254 characters. The maximum storage requirement for a variable
string is 255 bytes (the length byte plus 254 characters).
If a constant string parameter is entered directly in the program editor (126 characters
maximum) or a variable string is initialized in the data block editor (254 characters
maximum), the string assignment must begin and end with double quote characters.
ASCII output number format

Positive values are written to the output buffer without a sign.
Negative values are written to the output buffer with a leading minus sign (-).
Leading zeros to the left of the decimal point (except the digit adjacent to the decimal
point) are suppressed.
Values are right-justified in the output string.
Real numbers: Values to the right of the decimal point are rounded to fit in the specified
number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Real numbers: The size of the output string must be a minimum of three bytes more than
the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Integer to string conversion

ITS IN, OUT, FMT The Integer to String instruction converts an integer word IN to an ASCII
string with a length of 8 characters. The format (FMT) assigns the conver-
sion precision to the right of the decimal, and whether the decimal point is
to be shown as a comma or a period. The resulting string is written to 9
consecutive bytes starting at OUT.

0006H indirect address None
0091H operand out of range
Illegal format (nnn > 5)
FMT bit is not zero for the four most signif-
icant bits of the FMT byte

IN INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Con-
stant
OUT STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
The length of the output string is always 8 characters. The number of digits to the right of the
converted without a decimal point. For values of nnn greater than 5, the output is a string of
8 ASCII space characters. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal
point (c=0) as the separator between whole number and fraction. The most significant 4 bits
of the format must be zero.
(c= 0) with three digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 011). The value at OUT is the
length of the string stored in the next byte addresses.
FMT parameter for the integer to string instruction
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Double integer to string conversion

DTS IN, OUT, FMT The Double Integer to String instruction converts a double integer IN to an
ASCII string with a length of 12 characters. The format (FMT) assigns the
conversion precision to the right of the decimal, and whether the decimal
point is to be shown as a comma or a period. The resulting string is writ-
ten to 13 consecutive bytes starting at OUT.

Illegal format (nnn > 5)
FMT bit is not zero for the four most signif-
icant bits of the FMT byte

IN DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
The length of the output string is always 12 characters. The number of digits to the right of
the decimal point in the output buffer is specified by the nnn field. The valid range of the nnn
field is 0 to 5. If you assign 0 digits to the right of the decimal point causes, then the value is
displayed without a decimal point. For values of nnn greater than 5, the output is a string of
12 ASCII space characters. The c bit specifies the use of either a comma (c=1) or a decimal
point (c=0) as the separator between the whole number and the fraction. The upper 4 bits of
the format must be zero.
(c= 0) with four digits to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 100). The value at OUT is the
length of the string stored in the next byte addresses.
FMT operand for the double integer to string instruction
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Real to string conversion
LAD / FBD Description

RTS IN, OUT, FMT The Real to String instruction converts a real value IN to an ASCII string.
The format (FMT) assigns the conversion precision to the right of the deci-
mal, whether the decimal point is to be shown as a comma or a period and
the length of the output string. The resulting conversion is placed in a string
beginning with OUT. The length of the resulting string is specified in the
format and can be 3 to 15 characters.

Illegal format
(nnn > 5)
ssss < 3
ssss < number of characters required

IN REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
The real-number format used by the CPU supports a maximum of 7 significant digits. An
attempt to display more than the 7 significant digits produces a rounding error.
The length of the output string is specified by the ssss field. A size of 0, 1, or 2 bytes is not
valid. The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in the output buffer is assigned by
the nnn field. The valid range of the nnn field is 0 to 5. If you assign 0 digits to the right of the
decimal point, then the value is displayed without a decimal point. The output string is filled
with ASCII space characters when nnn is greater than 5 or when the assigned length of the
output string is too small to store the converted value. The c bit specifies the use of either a
comma (c=1) or a decimal point (c=0) as the separator between the whole number and the
fraction.
(c= 0) with one digit to the right of the decimal point (nnn = 001) and an output string length
of 6 characters (ssss = 0110). The value at OUT is the length of the string stored in the next
byte addresses.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
FMT operand for the real to string instruction
See Also
7.5.4 ASCII sub-string to number value conversion

STI IN, INDX, OUT ASCII sub-string to integer value conversion
STD IN, INDX, OUT ASCII sub-string to double integer value conversion
STR IN, INDX, OUT ASCII sub-string to real value conversion

0006H Indirect address SM1.1 Overflow or illegal value
009BH Index = 0
SM1.1 Overflow or illegal value
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert

IN STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant string
INDX BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT INT VW, IW, QW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DINT, REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
String input format for S_I (integer number) and S_DI (double integer number)
[spaces] [+ or -] [digits 0 - 9]
String input format for S_R (real number)

[spaces] [+ or -] [digits 0 - 9] [. or ,] [digits 0 - 9]
INDX parameter
The INDX value is normally set to 1, which starts the conversion with the first character of
the string. The INDX value can be set to other values to start the conversion at different
points within the string. This can be used when the input string contains text that is not part
of the number to be converted. For example, if the input string is "Temperature: 77.8", you
set INDX to a value of 13 to skip over the word "Temperature: " at the start of the string.
The Substring to Real instruction does not convert strings using scientific notation or
exponential forms of real numbers. The instruction does not produce an overflow error
(SM1.1) but converts the string to a real number up to the exponential and then terminates
the conversion. For example, the string '1.234E6' converts without errors to a real value of
1.234.
The conversion is terminated when the end of the string is reached or when the first invalid
character is found. An invalid character is any character that is not a digit (0 - 9), or one of
the following characters: plus (+), minus (-), comma (,), or period (.).
The overflow error (SM1.1) is set whenever the conversion produces an integer value that is
too large for the output value. For example, the Substring to Integer instruction sets the
overflow error if the input string produces a value greater than 32767 or less than -32768.
The overflow error (SM1.1) is also set if no conversion is possible when the input string does
not contain a valid value. For example, if the input string contains 'A123', the conversion
instruction sets SM1.1 (overflow) and the output value remains unchanged.
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
Examples of valid and invalid input strings
Example string conversion: Substring to integer, double integer, and real
LAD STL
S_I converts the numeric string to an inte- Network 1
ger value. LD I0.0
STI VB0, 7, VW100
STD VB0, 7, VD200
S_DI converts the numeric string to a STR VB0, 7, VD300
double integer value.
S_R converts the numeric string to a real

value.
See also
S7-200 SMART
7.5 Convert
7.5.5 Encode and decode

ENCO IN, OUT Encode writes the bit number of the least significant bit set in the input word IN, to
the least significant "nibble" (4 bits) of the output byte OUT.
DECO IN, OUT Decode sets the bit in the output word OUT that corresponds to the bit number
represented by the least significant "nibble" (4 bits) of the input byte IN. All other
bits of the output word are set to 0.
Non-fatal error conditions with ENO = SM bits affected

0

IN WORD (ENCO) IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
BYTE (DECO) IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE (ENCO) IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
WORD (DECO) IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
Example: Encode and decode
LAD STL
If AC2 contains error bits: Network 1
1. The DECO instruction LD I3.1
sets the bit in VW40 that DECO AC2, VW40
corresponds to this error ENCO AC3, VB50
code
2. The ENCO instruction
converts the least signif-
icant bit set to an error
code that is stored in
VB50.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
7.6 Counters
7.6.1 Counter instructions

CTU Cxxx, PV LAD/FBD: The CTU count up instruction counts up from the current value
each time the count up CU input makes the transition from OFF to ON. When
the current value Cxxx is greater than or equal to the preset value PV, the
counter bit Cxxx is set ON. The current count value is reset when the reset
input R is set ON, or when the reset instruction is executed for the Cxxx ad-
dress. The counter stops counting when it reaches the maximum value
32,767.
STL: R reset input is the top of stack value. CU count up input is loaded in the
second stack level
CTD Cxxx, PV LAD/FBD: The CTD count down instruction counts down from the current
value of that counter each time the CD count down input makes the transition
from OFF to ON. When the current value Cxxx is equal to 0, the counter bit
Cxxx turns ON. The counter resets the counter bit Cxxx and loads the current
value with the preset value PV when the LD load input is set ON. The counter
stops upon reaching zero, and the counter bit Cxxx is set ON.
STL: LD load input is the top of stack value. CD count down input value is
loaded in the second stack level
CTUD Cxxx, PV LAD/FBD: The CTUD count up/down instruction counts up each time the CU
count up input makes the transition from OFF to ON, and counts down each
time the CD count down input makes the transition from OFF to ON. The
current value Cxxx of the counter maintains the current count. The PV preset
value is compared to the current value each time the counter instruction is
executed.
Upon reaching maximum value 32,767, the next rising edge at the count up
input causes the current count to wrap around to the minimum value -32,768.
On reaching the minimum value -32,768, the next rising edge at the count
down input causes the current count to wrap around to the maximum value
32,767.
When the current value Cxxx is greater than or equal to the PV preset value,
the counter bit Cxxx is set ON. Otherwise, the counter bit is OFF. The counter
is reset when the R reset input is set ON, or when the Reset instruction is
executed for the Cxxx address.
STL: R reset input is the top of stack value. CD count down input value is
loaded in the second stack level. CU count Up input value is loaded in the
third stack level
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters

Cxxx WORD Constant (C0 to C255)
CU, CD (LAD) BOOL Power flow
CU, CD (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
R (LAD) BOOL Power Flow
R (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
LD (LAD) BOOL Power Flow
LD (FBD) BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Logic flow
PV INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, LW, T, C, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
Note
Since there is one current value for each counter, do not assign the same counter number to
more than one counter. (Up Counters, Up/Down Counters, and Down counters with the
same number access the same current value.)
When you reset a counter using the Reset instruction, the counter bit is reset and the
counter current value is set to zero. Use the counter number to reference both the current
value and the counter bit of that counter.
See also Configuring the retentive ranges - system block configuration
Counter operation
Type Operation Counter bit Power cycle / first scan

CTU CU increments the current value. The counter bit is set ON when: Counter bit is OFF.
Current value >= Preset
Current value continues to incre- Current value can be retained 1
ment until it reaches 32,767.
CTD CD decrements the current value The counter bit is set ON when: Counter bit is OFF.
until the current value reaches 0. Current value = 0
Current value can be retained 1
CTUD CU increments the current value. The counter bit is set ON when: Counter bit is OFF.
Current value >= Preset
CD decrements the current value. Current value can be retained 1
Current value continues to incre-
ment or decrement until the coun-
ter is reset.
1 You can select the current value for the counter to be retentive, but not the counter bit value.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Example CTD count down
LAD STL
Count down counter C1 current value Network 1
counts from 3 to 0 LD I0.0
With I0.1 OFF, I0.0 OFF-ON decre- LD I0.1
ments C1 current value CTD C1, +3
I0.1 ON loads countdown preset value
3
C1 bit is ON when counter C1 current Network 2

value = 0 LD C1
= Q0.0
Timing diagram
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Example CTUD count up/down
LAD STL
I0.0 counts up Network 1
I0.1 counts down LD I0.0
LD I0.1
I0.2 resets current value to 0
LD I0.2
CTUD C48, +4
Count Up/Down counter C48 turns on Network 2

C48 bit when current value >= 4 LD C48
= Q0.0
Timing diagram
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
7.6.2 High-speed counter instructions

High-speed counters can count high-speed events that cannot be controlled by standard
counters. Standard counters operate at a slower rate that is limited by the PLC scan time.
You can use the HDEF and HSC instructions and create your own HSC routines, or you can
simplify the programming tasks by using the High Speed Counter wizard.

HDEF HSC, MODE The High-Speed Counter Definition instruction (HDEF) selects the operating
mode of a specific high-speed counter (HSC0-3). The mode selection de-
fines the clock, direction, and reset functions of the high-speed counter.
You must use one High-Speed Counter Definition instruction for each of up
to four active high-speed counters.
HSC N The High-Speed Counter (HSC) instruction configures and controls the high-
speed counter, based on the state of the HSC special memory bits. The
parameter N specifies the high-speed counter number.
The high-speed counters can be configured for up to eight different modes of
operation.
Each counter has dedicated inputs for clocks, direction control, and reset
where these functions are supported. In AB quadrature phase, you can se-
lect one times (1x) or four times (4x) the maximum counting rate. All coun-
ters run at maximum rates without interfering with one another.
Error conditions with ENO = 0 SM bits affected

HDEF: HSC: None
0003H Input point conflict 0001H HSC before HDEF
0004H Illegal instruction in interrupt 0005H Simultaneous
000AH HSC redefinition HSC/PLS
0016H Attempted to use HSC or Edge 0090H Invalid HSC number

Interrupt on Input that is allocated for
use by Motion Functionality
0090H Invalid HSC number

HSC BYTE HSC number constant (0, 1, 2, or 3)
MODE BYTE Mode number constant: Eight possible modes (0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, or 10)
N WORD HSC number constant (0, 1, 2, or 3)
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC operation
A high-speed counter can be used as the drive for a drum timer, where a shaft rotating at a
constant speed is fitted with an incremental shaft encoder. The shaft encoder provides a
specified number of counts per revolution and a reset pulse that occurs once per revolution.
The clock(s) and the reset pulse from the shaft encoder provide the inputs to the high-speed
counter.
The high-speed counter is loaded with the first of several presets, and the desired outputs
are activated for the time period where the current count is less than the current preset. The
counter is set up to provide an interrupt when the current count is equal to preset and also
when reset occurs.
As each current-count-value-equals-preset-value interrupt event occurs, a new preset is
loaded and the next state for the outputs is set. When the reset interrupt event occurs, the
first preset and the first output states are set, and the cycle is repeated.
Since the program interrupts occur at a much lower rate than the counting rates of the high-
speed counters, precise control of high-speed operations can be implemented with relatively
minor impact to the overall PLC scan cycle time. The method of interrupt attachment allows
each load of a new preset to be performed in a separate interrupt routine for easy state
control. (Alternatively, all interrupt events can be processed in a single interrupt routine.)
HSC input assignments and capabilities

All high-speed counters function the same way for the same mode of operation, but every
mode is not supported for every HSC number. The HSC input connections (clock, direction,
and reset) must use the CPU's integrated input channels as shown in the following table.
Input channels located on a signal board or an expansion module cannot be used for high-
speed counters.
Note
You must ensure that high-speed counter inputs are correctly filtered and wired, for counting
high frequency signals.
In an S7-200 SMART CPU, all high-speed counter inputs are connected to internal input
filter circuits. The S7-200 SMART default input filter setting is 6.4 ms, which limits the
maximum counting rate to 78 Hz. You must change the filter settings to count higher
frequencies.
Refer to "Noise reduction for high-speed inputs (Page 224)" for details about system block
filter options, maximum counting frequencies, shielding requirements, and external pull-down
circuits.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Clock A Dir / Clock B Reset Single phase max. Dual phase / AB quadrature phase max.
clock / input rate clock / input rate
HSC0 I0.0 I0.1 I0.4 200 kHz (S model CPUs)1 S model CPUs:
100 kHz (C model CPUs)2 100 kHz = Maximum 1x count rate
400 kHz = Maximum 4x count rate
C model CPUs:
HSC1 I0.1 200 kHz (S model CPUs)
100 kHz (C model CPUs)
HSC2 I0.2 I0.3 I0.5 200 kHz (S model CPUs) S model CPUs:
100 kHz (C model CPUs) 100 kHz = Maximum 1x count rate
C model CPUs:
1 S model CPUs: SR20, ST20, SR30, ST30, SR40, ST40, SR60, ST60
2 C model CPUs: CR40, CR60
HSC counting mode support

A total of four HSC devices can be used (HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, and HSC3)
HSC0 and HSC2 support eight counter modes (mode 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 10)
HSC1 and HSC3 can only support one counter mode (mode 0)
Available HSC counter types
Single-phase clock counter with internal direction control
Mode 0:
Mode 1: with external reset
Single-phase clock counter with external direction control
Mode 3:
Two-phase clock counter with 2 clock inputs (clock-up and clock-down)
Mode 6:
AB quadrature phase counter
Mode 9:
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC operating rules

Before you use a high-speed counter, you must execute the HDEF instruction (High-
Speed Counter Definition) to select a counter mode. Use the first scan memory bit,
SM0.1 (this bit is ON for the first scan and OFF for subsequent scans) to execute HDEF
directly, or call a subroutine that contains the HDEF instruction.
You can use all counter types with or without a reset input.
When you activate the reset input, it clears the current value and holds it clear until you
deactivate the reset input.
See also
High-speed counter programming examples (Page 226)
High-speed counter initialization sequence examples (Page 238)
Noise reduction for high-speed inputs (Page 224)
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
7.6.3 Noise reduction for high-speed inputs
Counting high-speed pulses with HSC inputs
Note
High-speed input wiring must use shielded cables
Use shielded cable with a maximum length of 50 m, when connecting HSC input channels
I0.0, I0.1, I0.2, and I0.3.
One or both of the following actions may be necessary to correctly operate a high-speed
counter.
Adjust the System Block digital input filter time of the input channels used by the HSC
channel. In an S7-200 SMART CPU. Input filtering is applied before the counting of
pulses by the HSC channel. This means that if an HSC input pulse occurs at a rate that is
filtered out by the input filtering, then the HSC does not detect any pulses on the input.
You must make sure that you configure the filter time of each input of the HSC to a value
that will allow counting at the rate your application requires. This includes direction and
reset inputs. The following table shows the maximum input frequency that can be
detected for each input filter configuration.
Input filter time Maximum detectable frequency

0.2 s 200 kHz for S model CPUs 1
100 kHz for C model CPUs 2
0.4 s 200 kHz for S model CPUs
100 kHz for C model CPUs
6.4 s 78 kHz
12.8 s 39 kHz
0.2 ms 2.5 kHz
0.4 ms 1.25 kHz
0.8 ms 625 Hz
1.6 ms 312 Hz
3.2 ms 156 Hz
6.4 ms 78 Hz
12.8 ms 39 Hz
1 S model CPUs: SR20, ST20, SR30, ST30, SR40, ST40, SR60, ST60
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
If the device generating the HSC input signals does not drive the input signals both high
and low, then signal distortion can occur at high speeds. This can occur if the output of
the device is an open-collector transistor. When the transistor turns off, there is nothing
driving the signal to a low state. The signal will transition to a low state, but the time to do
so will be dependent on the input resistance and capacitance of the circuitry. This
condition can result in missed pulses. This condition can be prevented by wiring a pull-
down resistor to the input signals as seen in the following figure. Since the input voltage
of the CPU is 24V, the resistor would have to be rated for a high wattage. A 100 ohm 5
Watt resistor is a suitable choice.
Figure 7-1 Pull-down resistor wiring for open-collector HSC input drivers
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
7.6.4 High-speed counter programming

You can use the high-speed counter wizard to simplify HSC programming tasks. The wizard
helps you select the counter type/mode, preset/current values, counter options, and will
generate the necessary special memory assignments, subroutines, and interrupt routines.
Note
You must ensure that high-speed counter inputs are correctly filtered and wired, for counting
high frequency signals.
In an S7-200 SMART CPU, all high-speed counter inputs are connected to internal input
filter circuits. The S7-200 SMART default input filter setting is 6.4 ms, which limits the
maximum counting rate to 78 Hz. You must change the filter settings to count higher
frequencies.
Refer to "Noise reduction for high-speed inputs (Page 224)" for details about system block
filter options, maximum counting frequency, shielding requirements, and external pull-down
circuits.
Configuring high-speed counters

Use one of the following actions to configure the high-speed counter wizard:
Open the wizard: Select "High-Speed Counter" in the wizards area of the Tools menu
ribbon strip.
Open the wizard: Double-click "High-Speed Counter" node in the wizards folder, from the
project tree.
With the wizard open, assign the HSC setup values. You can navigate through the wizard
setup pages, modify parameters, and then generate new wizard program code.
Your program must perform the following basic tasks to use a high-speed counter:
Define the counter and mode (execute the HDEF instruction exactly once for each
counter).
Set the control byte in SM memory.
Set the current value (starting value) in SM memory.
Set the preset value (target value) in SM memory.
Assign and enable appropriate interrupt routines.
Activate the high-speed counter (execute the HSC instruction).
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HDEF instruction sets the counting mode

The HDEF instruction assigns HSC counter mode. The following table shows the physical
inputs assigned for clock, direction control, and reset functions. The same input cannot be
used for two different functions, but any input not being used by the present mode of its high-
speed counter can be used for another purpose. For example, if HSC0 is used in mode 1,
which uses I0.0 and I0.4; then I0.1, I0.2, and I0.3 can be used for edge interrupts, HSC3, or
motion control inputs.
Note
All counting modes of HSC0 always use I0.0 and all modes of HSC2 always use I0.2, so
these inputs are never available for other uses when these counters are in use.
Mode Description Input assignment

HSC0 I0.0 I0.1 I0.4
HSC1 I0.1
HSC2 I0.2 I0.3 I0.5
HSC3 I0.3
0 Single-phase counter with internal direction Clock
1 control Clock Reset
3 Single-phase counter with external direction Clock Direction
4 control Clock Direction Reset
6 Two-phase counter with 2 clock inputs Clock Up Clock Down
7 Clock Up Clock Down Reset
9 AB quadrature phase counter Clock A Clock B
10 Clock A Clock B Reset
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
How mode selection affects counter operation

HSC modes 0 and 1
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC modes 3 and 4
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC modes 6 and 7

When you use counting modes 6 or 7, and rising edges on both the up clock and down clock
inputs occur within 0.3 microseconds of each other, the high-speed counter could see these
events as happening simultaneously. If this happens, the current value is unchanged and no
change in counting direction is indicated. As long as the separation between rising edges of
the up and down clock inputs is greater than this time period, the high-speed counter
captures each event separately. In either case, no error is generated and the counter
maintains the correct count value.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC modes 9 and 10 (AB quadrature phase 1x)
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC modes 9 and 10 (AB quadrature phase 4x)
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Reset operation
The operation of reset shown in the following figure applies to all modes that use the reset
input. In the figure below, the reset operation is shown with the active state assigned as the
high level.
HSC reset
HDEF instruction sets the reset active level and counting rate
HSC0 and HSC2 counters have two control bits that are used to configure the active state of
the reset and to select 1x or 4x counting modes (AB quadrature phase counters only). These
bits are located in the HSC control byte for the respective counter and are only used when
the HDEF instruction is executed. These bits are defined in the following table.
Note
You must set these two control bits to the desired state before the HDEF instruction is
executed. Otherwise, the counter takes on the default configuration for the counter mode
selected.
Once the HDEF instruction has been executed, you cannot change the counter setup unless
you first place the CPU in STOP mode.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 Description (used only when HDEF is executed)
SM37.0 Not sup- SM57.0 Not sup- Active level control bit for Reset1:
ported ported
0 = Reset is active high
1 = Reset is active low
SM37.2 Not sup- SM57.2 Not sup- Counting rate selection for AB quadrature phase counters1:
ported ported
0 = 4X counting rate
1 = 1X counting rate
1 The default setting of the reset input is active high, and the AB quadrature phase counting rate is 4x (or four times the
input clock frequency).
Example: High-speed counter definition
LAD STL
MAIN On the first scan: Network 1
1. Select the reset input to be active LD SM0.1
high and select 4x mode. MOVB 16#F8, SMB37
HDEF 0, 10
2. Configure HSC0 for AB quadrature
phase with reset input (mode 10).
HSC instruction enables counters, sets counting direction, and loads preset/current count values
The HSC instruction uses the control byte during execution. After you assign the counter and
the counter mode, you can program the dynamic parameters of the counter. Each high-
speed counter has a control byte in SM memory that allows the following actions:
Enabling or disabling the counter
Controlling the direction (modes 0 and 1 only), or the initial counting direction for all other
modes
Loading the current value
Loading the preset value
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
HSC Control bytes
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 Description

SM37.3 SM47.3 SM57.3 SM137.3 Counting direction control bit:
0 = Count down
1 =Count up
SM37.4 SM47.4 SM57.4 SM137.4 Write the counting direction to the HSC:
0 = No update
1 =Update direction
SM37.5 SM47.5 SM57.5 SM137.5 Write the new preset value to the HSC:
0 = No update
1 = Update preset
SM37.6 SM47.6 SM57.6 SM137.6 Write the new current value to the HSC:
0 = No update
1 =Update current value
SM37.7 SM47.7 SM57.7 SM137.7 Enable the HSC:
0 = Disable the HSC
1 =Enable the HSC
Read the HSC current value with your program

The current value of each high-speed counter can only be read using the data type HC
(High-Speed-Counter Current) followed by the counter identifier number (0, 1, 2, or 3) as
shown in the following table. Use the HC data type whenever you wish to read the current
count, either in a status chart or in the user program. The HC data type is read-only double
word value; you cannot write a new current count to the high speed counter using the HC
data type.
Current values of HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, and HSC3
Value to be read HSC0 ad- HSC1 ad- HSC2 ad- HSC3 ad-
dress dress dress dress
CV (counter current value) HC0 HC1 HC2 HC3
Example: Reading and saving the current count value
LAD STL
MAIN Save the value of HSC0 into Network 1
VD200 when I3.0 transitions LD I3.0
from OFF to ON. EU
MOVD HC0, VD200
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Set current values and preset values with your program

Each high-speed counter has a 32-bit current value (CV) and a 32-bit preset value (PV)
stored internally. The current value is the actual count value of the counter, while the preset
value is a comparison value optionally used to trigger an interrupt when the current value
reaches the preset value. You can read the current value using the HC data type as
described in the previous section. You cannot read the preset value directly. To load a new
current or preset value into the high-speed counter, you must set up the control byte and the
special memory double-word(s) that hold the desired new current and/or new preset values,
and also execute the HSC instruction to cause the new values to be transferred to the high-
speed counter. The table below lists the special memory double words used to hold the
desired new current and preset values.
Use the following steps to write a new current value and/or new preset value to the high-
speed counter (steps 1 and 2 can be done in either order):
1. Load the value to be written into the appropriate SM new-current value and/or new preset
value (see the table below). Loading these new values does not affect the high-speed
counter yet.
2. Set or clear the appropriate bits in the appropriate control byte to indicate whether to
update the current and/or preset values (bit x.5 for preset and x.6 for current).
Manipulating these bits does not affect the high-speed counter yet.
3. Execute the HSC instruction referencing the appropriate high-speed counter number.
Executing this instruction causes the control byte to be examined. If the control byte
specifies an update for the current, the preset, or both, then the appropriate values are
copied from the SM new current value and/or new preset value locations into the high-
speed counter internal registers.
Value to be loaded HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3

New current value (new CV) SMD38 SMD48 SMD58 SMD138
New preset value (new PV) SMD42 SMD52 SMD62 SMD142
Note
Changes to the control byte and the SM locations for new current value and new preset
value will not affect the high-speed counter until the corresponding HSC instruction is
executed.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Example: Updating the current and preset values
LAD STL
MAIN program network Update the current count to Network 1
1000 and the preset value to LD I2.0
2000 for HSC0 when I2.0 EU
transitions from OFF to ON. MOVD 1000, SMD38
MOVD 2000, SMD42
= SM37.5
= SM37.6
HSC 0
Attaching HSC interrupt routines in your program

All counter modes support an interrupt event when the current value of the HSC is equal to
the loaded preset value. Counter modes that use an external reset input support an interrupt
on activation of the external reset. All counter modes except modes 0 and 1 support an
interrupt on a change in counting direction. Each of these interrupt conditions can be
enabled or disabled separately. For a complete discussion on the use of interrupts, see the
section about Interrupt instructions (Page 282).
HSC status byte

A status byte for each high-speed counter provides status memory bits that indicate the
current counting direction and whether the current value is greater or equal to the preset
value. The following table defines these status bits for each high-speed counter.
Note
Status bits are valid only while the high-speed counter interrupt routine is being executed.
The purpose of monitoring the state of the high-speed counter is to enable interrupts for the
events that are of consequence to the operation being performed.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Table 7- 7 Status bits for HSC0, HSC1, HSC2, and HSC3
HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 Description

SM36.5 SM46.5 SM56.5 SM136.5 Current counting direction status bit:
0 = Counting down
1 = Counting up
SM36.6 SM46.6 SM56.6 SM136.6 Current value equals preset value status bit:
0 = Not equal
1 = Equal
SM36.7 SM46.7 SM56.7 SM136.7 Current value greater than preset value status
bit:
0 = Less than or equal
1 = Greater than
See Also
High-speed counter instructions (Page 220)
Example initialization sequences for the high-speed counters (Page 238)
7.6.5 Example initialization sequences for high-speed counters

HSC0 is used as the counter in the following descriptions of the initialization and operation
sequences.
HSC0 and HSC2 support counting modes (0, 1), (3, 4), (6, 7), and (9, 10).
HSC1 and HSC3 only support counting mode 0.
The initialization descriptions assume that the CPU has just been placed in RUN mode, and
for that reason, the first scan memory bit is true. If this is not the case, remember that the
HDEF instruction can be executed only one time for each high-speed counter, after entering
RUN mode. Executing HDEF for a high-speed counter a second time generates a run-time
error and does not change the counter setup from the way it was set up on the first execution
of HDEF for that counter.
Note
Although the following sequences show how to change direction, current value, and preset
value individually, you can change all or any combination of them in the same sequence by
setting the value of SMB37 appropriately and then executing the HSC instruction.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Initialization of modes 0 and 1

The following steps describe how to initialize HSC0 for single-phase up/down counter with
internal direction (modes 0 and 1).
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operation is
performed. Since you use a subroutine call, subsequent scans do not make the call to the
subroutine, which reduces scan time execution and provides a more structured program.
2. In the initialization subroutine, load SMB37 according to the desired control operation.
For example: SMB37 = 16#F8 produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Writes a new current value
Writes a new preset value
Sets the direction to count up
Sets the reset input to be active high
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 0 and the MODE input set to one
of the following:
Mode 0 for no external reset
Mode 1 for external reset
4. Load SMD38 (double-word-sized value) with the desired current value (load with 0 to
clear it).
5. Load SMD42 (double-word-sized value) with the desired preset value.
6. In order to capture the current value equal to preset event, program an interrupt by
attaching the CV = PV interrupt event (event 12) to an interrupt routine. See the section
that discusses the Interrupt instructions for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. In order to capture an external reset event, program an interrupt by attaching the external
reset interrupt event (event 28) to an interrupt routine.
8. Execute the global interrupt enable instruction (ENI) to enable interrupts.
9. Execute the HSC instruction to cause the CPU to program HSC0.
10.Exit the subroutine.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters

The following steps describe how to initialize HSC0 for single-phase up/down counter with
external direction control (modes 3 and 4):
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operation is
Enables the counter
Sets the initial direction of the HSC to count up
of the following:
clear it).
6. In order to capture the current-value-equal-to-preset event, program an interrupt by
that discusses the Interrupt instructions for complete details on interrupt processing.
7. In order to capture direction changes, program an interrupt by attaching the direction
changed interrupt event (event 27) to an interrupt routine.
10.Execute the HSC instruction to cause the CPU to program HSC0.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters

The following steps describe how to initialize HSC0 for two-phase up/down counter with
up/down clocks (modes 6 and 7):
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operations are
Enables the counter
3. Execute the HDEF instruction with the HSC input set to 0 and the MODE set to one of the
following:
clear it).
on interrupts.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters

The following steps describe how to initialize HSC0 as an AB quadrature phase counter (for
modes 9 and 10:
1. Use the first scan memory bit to call a subroutine in which the initialization operations are
Example (1x counting mode): SMB37 = 16#FC produces the following results:
Enables the counter
Example (4x counting mode): SMB37 = 16#F8 produces the following results:
Enables the counter
of the following:
clear it).
on enabling interrupts (ENI) for complete details on interrupt processing.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Change direction in modes 0 and 1

The following steps describe how to configure HSC0 for change direction for single-phase
counter with internal direction (modes 0 and 1):
1. Load SMB37 to write the desired direction:
SMB37 = 16#90
Enables the counter
Sets the direction of the HSC to count down
SMB37 = 16#98
Enables the counter
Sets the direction of the HSC to count up
Loading a new current value (any mode)

The following steps describe how to change the counter current value of HSC0 (any mode):
1. Load SMB37 to write the desired current value:
SMB37 = 16#C0
Enables the counter
Writes the new current value
clear it).
Loading a new preset value (any mode)

The following steps describe how to change the preset value of HSC0 (any mode):
1. Load SMB37 to write the desired preset value:
SMB37 = 16#A0
Enables the counter
Writes the new preset value
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Disabling a high-speed counter (any mode)

The following steps describe how to disable the HSC0 high-speed counter (any mode):
1. Load SMB37 to disable the counter:
SMB37 = 16#00
Disables the counter
2. Execute the HSC instruction to disable the counter.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
Example: high-speed counter instruction
LAD STL
MAIN On the first scan, call SBR_0. Network 1
LD SM0.1
CALL SBR_0
SBR0 On the first scan, configure HSC0: Network 1

1. Enable the counter LD SM0.1
MOVB 16#F8, SMB37
Write a new current value.
HDEF 0, 10
Write a new preset value. MOVD +0, SMD38
Set the initial direction to MOVD +50, SMD42
count up. ATCH INT_0, 12
Select the reset input to be ac- ENI
tive high. HSC 0
Select 4x mode.
2. Configure HSC0 for AB quadra-
ture phase with reset input.
3. Clear the current value of HSC0.
4. Set the HSC0 preset value to 50.
5. Attach event 12 to interrupt rou-
tine INT_0. The interrupt is exe-
cuted when HSC0 current value =
preset value.
6. Global interrupt enable
7. Configure HSC0.
S7-200 SMART
7.6 Counters
LAD STL
INT0 Program HSC0: Network 1
1. Clear the current value of HSC0. LD SM0.0
MOVD +0, SMD38
2. Select to write only a new current
MOVB 16#C0, SMB37
and leave HSC0 enabled.
HSC 0
3. Configure HSC0.
See also
High-speed counter instructions (Page 220)
High-speed counter programming (Page 226)
Interrupt instructions (Page 282)
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
7.7 Pulse output
7.7.1 Pulse output instruction (PLS)

The Pulse output (PLS) instruction controls the Pulse train output (PTO) and Pulse width
modulation (PWM) functions available on the high-speed outputs (Q0.0, Q0.1, and Q0.3).
When using PWM, you can use an optional wizard to create the PWM instructions.

PLS N You can use the PLS instruction to create up to three PTO or PWM opera-
tions. PTO allows the user to control the frequency and number of pulses for a
square wave (50% duty cycle) output. PWM allows the user control of a fixed
cycle time output with a variable duty cycle.

0005H: Simultaneous HSC/PLS None
000DH: Attempt to redefine pulse
output while it is active
000EH: Number of PTO profile seg-
ments was set to 0
0017H: Attempt to assign resource for
PTO/PWM that is already assigned to
motion control
001BH: Attempt to change time base
on enabled PWM
0090H: N is not 0, 1, or 2.
0091H: Range error

N (channel) WORD Constant: 0 (= Q0.0), 1 (= Q0.1), or 2 (= Q0.3)
The CPU has three PTO/PWM generators (PLS0, PLS1, and PLS2) that create either a
high-speed pulse train or a pulse width modulated waveform. PLS0 is assigned to digital
output point Q0.0, PLS1 is assigned to digital output point Q0.1, and PLS2 is assigned to
digital output point Q0.3. A designated special memory (SM) location stores the following
data for each generator: a PTO status byte (8-bit value), a control byte (8-bit value), a cycle
time or frequency (unsigned 16-bit value), a pulse width value (unsigned 16-bit value), and a
pulse count value (unsigned 32-bit value).
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
The PTO/PWM generators and the process image register share the use of Q0.0, Q0.1, and
Q0.3. When a PTO or PWM function is active on Q0.0, Q0.1, or Q0.3, the PTO/PWM
generator has control of the output, and normal use of the output point is inhibited. The
output waveform is not affected by the state of the process image register, the forced value
of the point, or the execution of immediate output instructions. When the PTO/PWM
generator is inactive, control of the output reverts to the process image register. The process
image register determines the initial and final state of the output waveform, causing the
waveform to start and end at a high or low level.
Note
PTO/PWM through the PLS instruction is not possible if the selected output point is already
configured for use with motion control through use of the Motion wizard.
The PTO/PWM outputs must have a minimum load of at least 10% of rated load to provide
crisp transitions from off to on, and from on to off.
Before enabling PTO/PWM operation, set the value of the process image register for Q0.0,
Q0.1, and Q0.3 to 0.
Default values for all control bits, cycle time/frequency, pulse width, and pulse count values
are 0.
Note
The Pulse Output (PLS) instruction can only be used with the following S7-200 SMART
CPUs:
SR20 / ST20 (Two channels, Q0.0 and Q0.1)
SR30 / ST30, SR40 / ST40, and SR60 / ST60 (Three channels, Q0.0, Q0.1, and Q0.3)
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
7.7.2 Pulse train output (PTO)

PTO provides a square wave with a 50% duty cycle output for a specified number of pulses
at a specified frequency. Refer to the figure below. PTO can produce either a single train of
pulses or multiple trains of pulses using a pulse profile. You specify the number of pulses
and the frequency:
Number of pulses: 1 to 2,147,483,647

Frequency:
1 to 100,000 Hz (multiple-segment)
1 to 65,535 Hz (single-segment)
Use the following formula to convert from cycle time to frequency:

F = 1 / CT
where:
F Frequency (Hz)
CT Cycle time (seconds)
See the following table for pulse count and frequency limitations:
Table 7- 8 Pulse count and frequency in the PTO function
Pulse count / frequency Reaction

Frequency < 1 Hz Frequency defaults to 1 Hz
Frequency > 100,000 Hz Frequency defaults to 100,000 Hz
Pulse count = 0 Pulse count defaults to 1 pulse
Pulse count > 2,147,483,647 Pulse count defaults to 2,147,483,647 pulses
The PTO function allows the "chaining" or "pipelining" of pulse trains. When the active pulse
train is complete, the output of a new pulse train begins immediately. This allows continuity
between subsequent output pulse trains.
Single-Segment pipelining of PTO pulses

In single-segment pipelining, you are responsible for updating the SM locations for the next
pulse train. After the initial PTO segment has started, you must immediately modify the SM
locations with the parameters of the second waveform. After you update the SM values,
execute the PLS instruction again. The PTO function holds the attributes of the second pulse
train in a pipeline until it completes the first pulse train. The PTO function can store only one
entry at a time in the pipeline. When the first pulse train completes, the output of the second
waveform begins, and you can store a new pulse train specification in the pipeline. You can
then repeat this process to set up the characteristics of the next pulse train. Attempting to
load the pipeline while it is still full results in the PTO Overflow bit (SM66.6, SM76.6, or
SM566.6) being set and the instruction being ignored.
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
Smooth transitions between pulse trains occur unless the active pulse train completes before
a new pulse train setup is captured by the execution of the PLS instruction.
Note
In single-segment pipelining, the frequency has an upper limit of 65,535 Hz. If a higher
frequency is needed (up to 100,000 Hz), multiple-segment pipelining must be used.
Multiple-Segment pipelining of PTO pulses

In multiple-segment pipelining, the S7-200 SMART automatically reads the characteristics of
each pulse train segment from a profile table located in V memory. The SM locations used in
this mode are the control byte, the status byte, and the starting V memory offset of the profile
table (SMW168, SMW178, or SMW578). Execution of the PLS instruction starts the multiple
segment operation.
Each segment entry is 12 bytes in length and is composed of a 32 bit starting frequency, a
32 bit ending frequency, and a 32-bit pulse count value. The table below shows the format of
the profile table configured in V memory.
The PTO generator automatically increases or decreases the frequency linearly from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The frequency is increased or decreased by a
constant value at a constant rate. Once the number of pulses reaches the specified pulse
count, the next PTO segment is loaded. This sequence repeats until it reaches the end of the
profile. If a segment's time duration is less than 500 microseconds, the PTO pipeline
underflow bit (SM66.6, SM76.6, and SM566.6) can be set to 1 and the PTO operation
terminated. This indicates that the CPU does not have enough time to calculate the PTO
segment values.
While the PTO profile is operating, the number of the currently active segment is available in
SMB166, SMB176, or SMB576.
Table 7- 9 Profile table format for multiple-segment PTO operation1
Byte offset Segment Description of table entries

0 Number of segments: 1 to 2552
1 #1 Starting Frequency (1 to 100,000 Hz)
5 Ending Frequency (1 to 100,000 Hz)
9 Pulse count (1 to 2,147,483,647)
13 #2 Starting Frequency (1 to 100,000 Hz)
17 Ending Frequency (1 to 100,000 Hz)
21 Pulse count (1 to 2,147,483,647)
(Continues) #3 (Continues)
1 Entering a profile offset and number of segments that places any part of the profile table outside of
V memory generates a non-fatal error. The PTO function does not generate a PTO output.
2 Entering a value of 0 for the number of segments generates a non-fatal error. No PTO output is
generated.
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
7.7.3 Pulse width modulation (PWM)

PWM provides three channels that allow a fixed cycle time output with a variable duty cycle.
Refer to the figure below. You can specify the cycle time and the pulse width in either
microsecond or millisecond increments:
Cycle time: 10 s to 65,535 s or 2 ms to

65,535 ms
Pulse width time: 0 s to 65,535 s or
0 ms to 65,535 ms
As shown in the following table, setting the pulse width equal to the cycle time (which makes
the duty cycle 100 percent) turns the output on continuously. Setting the pulse width to 0
(which makes the duty cycle 0 percent) turns the output off.
Pulse width time and cycle time and reactions in the PWM function
Pulse width time / cycle time Reaction

Pulse width time >= Cycle time value The duty cycle is 100%: the output is turned on continuously.
Pulse width time = 0 The duty cycle is 0%: the output is turned off continuously.
Cycle time < 2 time units The cycle time defaults to two time units.
Changing the characteristics of a PWM waveform

You can only use synchronous updates to change the characteristics of a PWM waveform.
With a synchronous update, the change in the waveform characteristics occurs on a cycle
boundary, providing a smooth transition.
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
7.7.4 Using SM locations to configure and control the PTO/PWM operation

The PLS instruction reads the data stored in the specified SM memory locations and
programs the PTO/PWM generator accordingly. SMB67 controls PTO0 or PWM0, SMB77
controls PTO1 or PWM1, and SMB567 controls PTO2 or PWM2. The "SM locations for the
PTO/PWM control registers" table (the first table below) describes the registers used to
control the PTO/PWM operation. You can use the "PTO/PWM control byte reference" table
(the second table below) as a quick reference to determine the value to place in the
PTO/PWM control register to invoke the desired operation.
You can change the characteristics of a PTO or PWM waveform by modifying the locations
in the SM area (including the control byte) and then executing the PLS instruction. You can
disable the generation of a PTO or PWM waveform at any time by writing 0 to the PTO/PWM
enable bit of the control byte (SM67.7, SM77.7, or SM567.7) and then executing the PLS
instruction. The output point immediately reverts back to process image register control.
If you disable the PTO or PWM operation while the operation is producing a pulse, that pulse
internally completes its full cycle time duration. However, the pulse is not present at the
output point because, at that time, the process image register regains control of the output.
Because the pulse must be completed internally, it is important to note that setting the
enable bit and executing the PLS instruction before the pulse completes results in a non-fatal
error and an ignored instruction. Before executing the PLS instruction again, be sure to have
a time delay equal to the maximum cycle time of the last active pulse.
The PTO Idle bit in the status byte (SM66.7, SM76.7, or SM566.4) is provided to indicate the
completion of the programmed pulse train. In addition, an interrupt routine can be invoked
upon the completion of a pulse train. (Refer to the descriptions of the Interrupt instructions
(Page 282).) If you are using the single segment operation, the interrupt routine is invoked
upon the completion of each PTO. For example, if a second PTO is loaded into the pipeline,
the PTO function invokes the interrupt routine upon the completion of the first PTO, and
again upon the completion of the second PTO that was loaded into the pipeline. When using
the multiple segment operation, the PTO function invokes the interrupt routine upon
completion of the profile table.
The following conditions set the bits of the status byte (SMB66, SMB76, and SMB566):
If an "Add Error" occurs in the pulse generator that results in an invalid frequency value,
the PTO function terminates and the Delta Calculation Error bit (SM66.4, SM76.4, or
SM566.4) is set to 1. The output reverts to image register control. To correct this issue,
try adjusting the PTO profile parameters.
Manually disabling a PTO profile in progress sets the PTO Profile Disabled bit (SM66.5,
SM76.5, or SM566.5) to 1.
The PTO/PWM overflow/underflow bit (SM66.6, SM76.6, or SM566.6) is set to 1 if either
of these situations occur:
An attempt is made to load the pipeline while it is full; this is an overflow condition.
A PTO profile segment is too short to allow the CPU to calculate the next segment,
and an empty pipeline is transferred; this is an underflow condition, and the output
reverts to image register control.
You must clear the PTO/PWM overflow/underflow bit manually after it is set to detect
subsequent overflows. The transition to RUN mode initializes this bit to 0.
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
Note
Ensure that you understand the definition of the PTO/PWM mode select bit (SM67.6,
SM77.6, and SM567.6). The bit definition may not be the same as some legacy products
that support a Pulse instruction. In the S7-200 SMART, the user selects PTO or PWM
mode with the following definition: 0 = PWM, 1 = PTO.
When you load a cycle time/frequency (SMW68, SMW78, or SMW568), pulse width
(SMW70, SMW80, or SMW570), or pulse count (SMD72, SMD82, or SMD572), also set
the appropriate update bits in the control register before you execute the PLS instruction.
For a multiple segment pulse train operation, you must also load the starting offset
(SMW168, SMW178, or SMW578) of the profile table and the profile table values before
you execute the PLS instruction.
If you attempt to change the time base of a PWM output while the PWM is executing, the
request is ignored and a non-fatal error (0x001B - ILLEGAL PWM TIMEBASE CHG) is
created.
Table 7- 10 SM locations for the PTO/PWM control registers
Q0.0 Q0.1 Q0.3 Status bits

SM66.4 SM76.4 SM566.4 PTO delta calculation error (due to an add error):
0 = No error
1 = Aborted due to error
SM66.5 SM76.5 SM566.5 PTO profile disabled (due to user command):
0 = Profile not manually disabled
1 = User disabled profile
SM66.6 SM76.6 SM566.6 PTO/PWM pipeline overflow/underflow:
0 = No overflow/underflow
1 = Overflow/underflow
SM66.7 SM76.7 SM566.7 PTO idle:
0 = In progress
1 = PTO idle
Q0.0 Q0.1 Q0.3 Control bits
SM67.0 SM77.0 SM567.0 PTO/PWM update the frequency/cycle time:
0 = No update
1 = Update frequency/cycle time
SM67.1 SM77.1 SM567.1 PWM update the pulse width time:
0 = No update
1 = Update pulse width
SM67.2 SM77.2 SM567.2 PTO update the pulse count value:
0 = No update
1 = Update pulse count
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
SM67.3 SM77.3 SM567.3 PWM time base:

0 = 1 s/tick
1 = 1 ms/tick
SM67.4 SM77.4 SM567.4 Reserved
SM67.5 SM77.5 SM567.5 PTO single/multiple segment operation:
0 = Single
1 = Multiple
SM67.6 SM77.6 SM567.6 PTO/PWM mode select:
0 = PWM
1 = PTO
SM67.7 SM77.7 SM567.7 PWM enable:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Q0.0 Q0.1 Q0.3 Other registers
SMW68 SMW78 SMW568 PTO frequency or PWM cycle time value: 1 to 65,535 Hz (PTO); 2
to 65,535 (PWM)
SMW70 SMW80 SMW570 PWM pulse width value: 0 to 65,535
SMD72 SMD82 SMD572 PTO pulse count value: 1 to 2,147,483,647
SMB166 SMB176 SMB576 Number of the segment in progress:
Multiple-segment PTO operation only
SMW168 SMW178 SMW578 Starting location of the profile table (byte offset from V0):
Multiple-segment PTO operation only
Table 7- 11 PTO/PWM control byte reference
Result of executing the PLS instruction

Control Enable Select PTO Time base Pulse Pulse Cycle time
register mode Segment count width / frequen-
(Hex val- operation cy
ue)
16#80 Yes PWM 1 s/cycle
16#81 Yes PWM 1 s/cycle Update
cycle time
16#82 Yes PWM 1 s/cycle Update
16#83 Yes PWM 1 s/cycle Update Update
cycle time
16#88 Yes PWM 1 ms/cycle
16#89 Yes PWM 1 ms/cycle Update
cycle time
16#8A Yes PWM 1 ms/cycle Update
16#8B Yes PWM 1 ms/cycle Update Update
cycle time
16#C0 Yes PTO Single
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
Result of executing the PLS instruction

Control Enable Select PTO Time base Pulse Pulse Cycle time
register mode Segment count width / frequen-
(Hex val- operation cy
ue)
16#C1 Yes PTO Single Update
frequency
16#C4 Yes PTO Single Update
16#C5 Yes PTO Single Update Update
frequency
16#E0 Yes PTO Multiple
7.7.5 Calculating the profile table values

The multiple-segment pipelining capability of the PTO generators can be useful in many
applications, particularly in stepper motor control.
For example, you can use PTO with a pulse profile to control a stepper motor through a
simple ramp up (acceleration), run (no acceleration), and ramp down (deceleration)
sequence. More complicated sequences can be created by defining a pulse profile that
consists of up to 255 segments, with each segment corresponding to a ramp up, run, or
ramp down operation.
The figure below illustrates sample profile table values required to generate an output
waveform:
Segment 1: Accelerates a stepper motor
Segment 2: Operates the motor at a constant speed
Segment 3: Decelerates the motor
To achieve the desired number of motor revolutions for this example, the PTO generator
requires the following values:
Starting and final pulse frequencies of 2 kHz
A maximum pulse frequency of 10 kHz
4000 pulses
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
During the acceleration portion of the output profile, the output wave form should reach
maximum pulse frequency in approximately 200 pulses. The output wave form should
complete the deceleration portion of the profile in approximately 400 pulses.
Segment 1: 200 pulses

The following table lists the values for generating the example waveform. The profile table,
for this example, is in V memory and starts at VB500. You can use any block of V memory
that is available for a PTO profile table. You can include instructions in your program to load
these values into V memory, or you can define the values of the profile in the data block.
Table 7- 12 Profile table values
Address Value Description

VB500 3 Total number of segments
VD501 2,000 Starting frequency (Hz)
VD505 10,000 Ending frequency (Hz) Segment 1
VD509 200 Number of pulses
VD521 3,400 Number of pulses
VD533 400 Number of pulses
The PTO generator begins by running Segment 1. After the PTO generator reaches the
required number of pulses for Segment 1, it automatically loads Segment 2. This continues
until the last segment. After the number of pulses for the last segment is reached, the
S7-200 SMART CPU disables the PTO generator.
For each segment of the PTO profile, the pulse train begins at the starting frequency
assigned in the table. The PTO generator increases or decreases the frequency at a
constant rate to achieve the ending frequency with the correct number of pulses. However,
the PTO generator limits the frequency to the starting and ending frequencies specified in
the table.
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
The PTO generator performs repeated additions to the working frequency to create a linear
change in frequency over time. The constant value added to the frequency has a limited
resolution. This limited resolution can introduce some truncation error into the resulting
frequency. Thus, the PTO generator does not guarantee that the pulse train frequency can
reach the ending frequency that was specified for that segment. In the figure below, you can
see that the truncation error affects the accelerating PTO frequency. The output should be
measured to verify that the frequency is within an acceptable frequency range.
Desired frequency plot

Actual frequency plot
If the frequency difference (f) between the end of a segment and the beginning of the next
is not acceptable, try adjusting the ending frequency to compensate for the difference. This
adjustment might be an iterative process to get the output within an acceptable frequency
range.
Note that changes in segment parameters affect the time it takes the PTO to complete. You
can use the equation for the time duration of the segment, found later in this section of the
manual, to see what effect this has on the timing. An accurate segment duration time can
require some flexibility in the value of the ending frequency or the number of pulses for a
given segment.
While the simplified example above is useful as an introduction, real applications can require
more complicated waveform profiles. Remember that you can only assign frequencies as an
integer number of Hz and perform the frequency modification at a constant rate. The
S7-200 SMART CPU selects that constant rate and that rate can be different for each
segment.
For legacy projects that were developed in terms of cycle time, instead of frequency, you can
use the following formulas to convert to frequency:
CTFinal = CTInitial + (CT * PC)
FInitial = 1 / CTInitial
FFinal = 1 / CTFinal
where:
CTInitial Starting cycle time (s) for this segment

CT Delta cycle time (s) of this segment
PC Quantity of pulses in this segment
CTFinal Ending cycle time (s) for this segment
FInitial Starting frequency (Hz) for this segment
FFinal Ending frequency (Hz) for this segment
S7-200 SMART
7.7 Pulse output
The acceleration (or deceleration) and time duration of a given PTO profile segment can be
useful in the process of determining correct profile table values. Use the following formulas
to calculate the length of time, as well as the acceleration for a given profile:
F = FFinal - FInitial
Ts = PC / (Fmin + ( | F | / 2 ) )
As = F / Ts
where:
Ts Time duration (s) of this segment

As Frequency acceleration (Hz/s) of this segment
PC Quantity of pulses in this segment
Fmin Minimum frequency (Hz) for this segment
F Delta (total change in) frequency (Hz) for this segment
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
7.8 Math
7.8.1 Add, subtract, multiply, and divide

+I IN1, OUT The Add Integer instruction adds two 16-bit integers to produce a 16-bit
+D IN1, OUT result. The Add Double Integer instruction adds two 32-bit integers to pro-
+R IN1, OUT duce a 32-bit result. The Add Real (+R) instruction adds two 32-bit real
numbers to produce a 32-bit real number result.
LAD and FBD: IN1 + IN2 = OUT
ADD_DI STL: IN1 + OUT = OUT
ADD_R
-I IN1, OUT The Subtract Integer instruction subtracts two 16-bit integers to produce a
-D IN1, OUT 16-bit result. The Subtract Double Integer (-D) instruction subtracts two 32-
-R IN1, OUT bit integers to produce a 32-bit result. The Subtract Real (-R) instruction
subtracts two 32-bit real numbers to produce a 32-bit real number result.
LAD and FBD: IN1 - IN2 = OUT
SUB_DI STL: OUT - IN1 = OUT

SUB_R
*I IN1, OUT The Multiply Integer instruction multiplies two 16-bit integers to produce a
*D IN1, OUT 16-bit result. The Multiply Double Integer instruction multiplies two 32-bit
*R IN1, OUT integers to produce a 32-bit result. The Multiply Real instruction multiplies
two 32-bit real numbers to produce a 32-bit real number result.
LAD and FBD: IN1 * IN2 = OUT
MUL_DI STL: IN1 * OUT = OUT
MUL_R
/I IN1, OUT The Divide Integer instruction divides two 16-bit integers to produce a 16-bit
/D IN1, OUT result. (No remainder is kept.) Divide Double Integer instruction divides two
/R IN1, OUT 32-bit integers to produce a 32-bit result. (No remainder is kept.) The Divide
Real (/R) instruction divides two 32-bit real numbers to produce a 32-bit real
number result.
LAD and FBD: IN1 / IN2 = OUT
DIV_DI
DIV_R STL: OUT / IN1 = OUT

0006H Indirect address SM1.0 Result of operation = zero
SM1.1 Overflow SM1.1 Overflow, illegal value generated during the operation, or illegal
SM1.3 Divide by zero input
SM1.2 Negative result
SM1.3 Divide by zero
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
SM1.1 indicates overflow errors and illegal values. If SM1.1 is set, then the status of SM1.0
and SM1.2 is not valid and the original input operands are not altered. If SM1.1 and SM1.3
are not set, then the math operation has completed with a valid result and SM1.0 and SM1.2
contain valid status. If SM1.3 is set during a divide operation, then the other math status bits
are left unchanged.
Input / output Data Type Operand

IN1, IN2 INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
REAL1 ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, LW, T, C, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
1 Real (or floating-point) numbers are represented in the format described in the ANSI/IEEE 754-1985 standard (single-
precision). Refer to that standard for more information.
Example: Integer math instructions
LAD STL
Network
LD I0.0
+I AC1, AC0
*I AC1, VW100
/I VW10, VW200
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
Integer operations from the LAD example
IN1 IN2 OUT

Add data 40 + 60 = 100
Data address AC1 AC0 AC0
Multiply data 40 * 20 = 800

Data address AC1 VW100 VW100
Divide data 4000 / 40 = 100

Data address W200 VW10 VW200
Example: Real math instructions
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I0.0
+R AC1, AC0
*R AC1, VD100
/R VD10, VD200
Real number operations from the LAD example
IN1 IN2 OUT

Add data 4000.0 + 6000.0 = 10000.0
Data address AC1 AC0 AC0
Multiply data 400.0 * 200.0 = 80000.0

Data address AC1 VD100 VD100
Divide data 4000.0 / 41.0 = 97.5609

Data address VD200 VD10 VD200
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
7.8.2 Multiply integer to double integer and divide integer with remainder

MUL IN1, OUT The multiply integer to double Integer instruction multiplies two 16-bit integers and
produces a 32-bit product.
In STL, the least-significant word (16 bits) of the 32-bit OUT is used as one of the
factors.
LAD and FBD: IN1 * IN2 = OUT
STL: IN1 * OUT = OUT
DIV IN1, OUT The divide integer with remainder instruction divides two 16-bit integers and pro-
duces a 32-bit result consisting of a 16-bit remainder (the most-significant word) and
a 16-bit quotient (the least-significant word).
In STL, the least-significant word (16 bits) of the 32-bit OUT is used as the dividend.
LAD and FBD: IN1 / IN2 = OUT
STL: OUT / IN1 = OUT
Non-fatal errors with ENO=0 SM bits affected 1

SM1.1 Overflow SM1.1 Overflow, illegal value generated during the operation, or illegal input
SM1.3 Divide by zero SM1.2 Negative result
SM1.3 Divide by zero
1 For both of these instructions, SM bits indicate errors and illegal values. If SM1.3 (divide by zero) is set during a divide
operation, then the other math status bits are left unchanged. Otherwise, all supported math status bits contain valid
status upon completion of the math operation.

IN1, IN2 INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
Example: MUL and DIV instructions
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I0.0
MUL AC1, VD100
DIV VW10, VD200
1 VD100 contains: VW100 and VW102, and VD200 contains: VW200 and VW202.
Real number operations from the LAD example
IN1 IN2 OUT

MUL data 400 * 200 = 80000
Data address AC1 VW102 VD100
remainder quotient
DIV data 4000 / 41 = 23 97
Data address VW202 VW10 VW200 VW202
VD200
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
7.8.3 Trigonometry, natural logarithm/exponential, and square root
Sine (SIN), Cosine (COS), and Tangent (TAN) instructions

SIN IN, OUT The sine (SIN), cosine (COS), and tangent (TAN) instructions evaluate the trigo-
nometric function of the angle value IN and place the result in OUT. The input
angle value is measured in radians.
SIN (IN) = OUT
COS (IN) = OUT
COS IN, OUT
TAN (IN) = OUT
To convert an angle from degrees to radians: Use the MUL_R (*R) instruction to
multiply the angle in degrees by 1.745329E-2 (approximately by /180).
TAN IN, OUT
For the numeric functions instructions, SM1.1 is used to indicate overflow errors
and illegal values. If SM1.1 is set, then the status of SM1.0 and SM1.2 is not
valid and the original input operands are not altered. If SM1.1 is not set, then the
math operation has completed with a valid result and SM1.0 and SM1.2 contain
valid status.


IN REAL1 ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT REAL1 ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math
Natural logarithm (LN) and natural exponential (EXP) instructions

LN IN, OUT The Natural Logarithm instruction (LN) performs the natural logarithm of the
value in IN and places the result in OUT.
The Natural Exponential instruction (EXP) performs the exponential operation of
e raised to the power of the value in IN and places the result in OUT.
LN (IN) = OUT
EXP IN, OUT
EXP (IN)= OUT
To obtain the base 10 logarithm from the natural logarithm: Divide the natural
logarithm by 2.302585 (approximately the natural logarithm of 10).
To raise any real number to the power of another real number, including frac-
tional exponents: Combine the Natural Exponential instruction with the Natural
Logarithm instruction. For example, to raise X to the Y power, use EXP (Y *
LN (X)).


Square root (SQRT) instruction

SQRT IN, OUT The Square Root instruction (SQRT) takes the square root of a real number (IN)
and produces a real number result OUT.
SQRT (IN)= OUT
To obtain other roots:
5 cubed = 5^3 = EXP(3*LN(5)) = 125
The cube root of 125 = 125^(1/3) = EXP((1/3)*LN(125))= 5
The square root of 5 cubed = 5^(3/2) = EXP(3/2*LN(5)) = 11.18034
S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math


7.8.4 Increment and decrement

INCB OUT The increment instructions add 1 to the input value IN and place the result into the
INCW OUT location at OUT.
INCD OUT LAD and FBD: IN + 1 = OUT
STL: OUT + 1 = OUT
Increment byte (INC_B) operations are unsigned. Increment word (INC_W) operations
INC_W
are signed. Increment double word (INC_DW) operations are signed.
INC_DW
DECB OUT The decrement instructions subtract 1 from the input value IN and place the result into
DECW OUT the location at OUT.
DECD OUT LAD and FBD: IN - 1 = OUT
STL: OUT - 1= OUT
DEC_W Decrement byte (DEC_B) operations are unsigned. Decrement Word (DEC_W) opera-
DEC_DW tions are signed. Decrement double Word (DEC_D) operations are signed.

S7-200 SMART
7.8 Math

INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC,*VD, *LD, *AC
DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Example: Increment and decrement
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I4.0
INCW AC0
DECD VD100
Increment/decrement operations from the LAD example
IN OUT
Increment word 125 + 1 = 126
Data address AC0 AC0
Decrement double word 128000 - 1 = 127999

Data address VD100 VD100
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
7.9 PID

PID TBL, LOOP The PID loop instruction (PID) executes a PID loop calculation on the referenced
LOOP based upon the input and configuration information in Table (TBL).

0013H Illegal PID loop table SM1.1 Overflow

TBL BYTE VB
LOOP BYTE Constant (0 to 7)
The PID loop instruction (Proportional, Integral, Derivative Loop) is provided to perform the
PID calculation. The top of the logic stack (TOS) must be ON (power flow) to enable the PID
calculation. The instruction has two operands: a TABLE address which is the starting
address of the loop table and a LOOP number which is a constant from 0 to 7.
Eight PID instructions can be used in a program. If two or more PID instructions are used
with the same loop number (even if they have different table addresses), the PID
calculations will interfere with one another and the output will be unpredictable.
The loop table stores nine parameters used for controlling and monitoring the loop operation
and includes the current and previous value of the process variable, the setpoint, output,
gain, sample time, integral time (reset), derivative time (rate), and the integral sum (bias).
To perform the PID calculation at the desired sample rate, the PID instruction must be
executed either from within a timed interrupt routine or from within the main program at a
rate controlled by a timer. The sample time must be supplied as an input to the PID
instruction via the loop table.
Auto-Tune capability has been incorporated into the PID instruction. Refer to "PID loops and
tuning" (Page 467) for a detailed description of auto-tuning. The "PID Tune control panel"
(Page 476) only works with PID loops created by the PID wizard.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART offers the PID wizard to guide you in defining a PID algorithm for
a closed-loop control process. Select the "Instruction wizard" command from the "Tools"
menu and then select "PID" from the "Instruction wizard" window.
Note
The setpoint of the low range and the setpoint of the high range should correspond to the
process variable low range and high range.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
7.9.1 Using the PID wizard
Use the PID wizard to configure your PID loop
Screen Description
In this dialog, you select which loops
to configure. You can configure a
maximum of eight loops.
When you select a loop on this dialog,
the tree view on the left side of the PID
wizard updates with all nodes neces-
sary for configuring that loop.
You can configure a custom name for

your loop. The default name of this
screen is "Loop x", where "x" is equal
to the loop number.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Screen Description
Set the following loop parameters:
Gain (Default value = 1.00)
Sample Time (Default value =
1.00)
Integral Time (Default value =
10.00)
Derivative Time (Default value =
0.00)
You assign how the loop Process

Variable (PV) is to be scaled. You can
choose from the following options:
Unipolar (default: 0 to 27648; can
edit)
Bipolar (default: -27648 to 27648;
can edit)
Unipolar 20% offset (range: 5530
to 27648; set and unchangeable)
Temperature x 10 C
Temperature x 10 F
In the Scaling parameter, you assign
how the loop setpoint (SP) is to be
scaled. Default is a real number be-
tween 0.0 and 100.0.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Screen Description
You enter the loop output options:
How the loop output is to be
scaled:
Analog
Digital
Analog scaling parameter:
Unipolar (default: 0 to 27648;
can edit)
Bipolar (default: -27648 to
24678; can edit)
Unipolar 20% offset (range:
5530 to 27648; is set and un-
changeable
Analog range parameter: Assign
the loop output range. The possible
range is -27648 to +27648, de-
pending on your scaling selection.
You can assign what conditions to

recognize with alarm inputs. Use the
checkboxes to enable the alarms as
required:
Low Alarm (PV): Set normalized
low alarm limit from 0.0 to high
alarm limit; default is 0.10.
High Alarm (PV): Set normalized
high alarm limit from low alarm limit
to 1.00; default is 0.90.
Analog Input Error: Assign where
the input module is attached to the
PLC.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Screen Description
You can make the following code
selections:
Subroutine: The PID wizard cre-
ates a subroutine for initializing the
selected PID configuration.
Interrupt: The PID wizard creates
an interrupt routine for the PID loop
execution.
Note: The wizard assigns a default

name for the subroutine and the in-
terrupt routine; you can edit the de-
fault names.
Manual control: Use the "Add
Manual Control of the PID" check-
box to allow manual control of your
PID loops.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Screen Description
You can assign the starting address of
the V memory byte where the configu-
ration is placed in the data block. The
wizard can suggest an address that
represents an unused block of
V memory of the correct size.
This screen shows a list of the subrou-

tines and interrupt routines generated
by the PID wizard and gives a brief
description of how these should be
integrated into your program.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART includes a PID tune control panel (Page 476) that allows you to
graphically monitor the behavior of your PID loops. In addition, the control panel allows you
to initiate the auto-tune sequence, abort the sequence, and apply the suggested tuning
values or your own tuning values.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
7.9.2 PID algorithm

In steady state operation, a PID controller regulates the value of the output so as to drive the
error (e) to zero. A measure of the error is given by the difference between the setpoint (SP)
(the desired operating point) and the process variable (PV) (the actual operating point). The
principle of PID control is based upon the following equation that expresses the output, M(t),
as a function of a proportional term, an integral term, and a differential term:
Output = Proportional term + Integral term + Differential term
M(t) = KC * e + KC 0t e dt + Minitial + KC * de/dt
where:
M(t) Loop output as a function of time

KC Loop gain
e Loop error (the difference between setpoint and process variable)
Minitial Initial value of the loop output
In order to implement this control function in a digital computer, the continuous function must
be quantized into periodic samples of the error value with subsequent calculation of the
output. The corresponding equation that is the basis for the digital computer solution is:
Mn = Kc * en + KI * 1nex + Minitial + KD * (en - en-1)
where:
Mn Calculated value of the loop output at sample time n

Kc Loop gain
en Value of the loop error at sample time n
en-1 Previous value of the loop error (at sample time n - 1)
KI Proportional constant of the integral term
M initial Initial value of the loop output
KD Proportional constant of the differential term
From this equation, the integral term is shown to be a function of all the error terms from the
first sample to the current sample. The differential term is a function of the current sample
and the previous sample, while the proportional term is only a function of the current sample.
In a digital computer, it is not practical to store all samples of the error term, nor is it
necessary.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Since the digital computer must calculate the output value each time the error is sampled
beginning with the first sample, it is only necessary to store the previous value of the error
and the previous value of the integral term. As a result of the repetitive nature of the digital
computer solution, a simplification in the equation that must be solved at any sample time
can be made. The simplified equation is:
Mn = KC * en + KI * en + MX + KD * (en - en-1)
where:

Kc Loop gain
en Value of the loop error at sample time n
en-1 Previous value of the loop error (at sample time n - 1)
KI Proportional constant of the integral term
MX Previous value of the integral term (at sample time n - 1)
KD Proportional constant of the differential term
The CPU uses a modified form of the above simplified equation when calculating the loop
output value. This modified equation is:
Mn = MPn + MIn + MDn
where:

MPn Value of the proportional term of the loop output at sample time n
MIn Value of the integral term of the loop output at sample time n
MDn Value of the differential term of the loop output at sample time n
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
Understanding the elements of the PID equation

Proportional term of the PID equation: The proportional term MP is the product of the gain
(KC), which controls the sensitivity of the output calculation, and the error (e), which is the
difference between the setpoint (SP) and the process variable (PV) at a given sample time.
The equation for the proportional term as solved by the CPU is:
MPn = KC * (SPn - PVn)
where:
MPn Value of the proportional term of the loop output at sample time n
KC Loop gain
SPn Value of the setpoint at sample time n
PVn Value of the process variable at sample time n
Integral term of the PID equation: The integral term MI is proportional to the sum of the error
(e) over time. The equation for the integral term as solved by the CPU is:
MIn = K1 en + MX = KC * (TS / TI) * (SPn - PVn) + MX
where:
MIn Value of the integral term of the loop output at sample time n
KC Loop gain
TS Loop sample time
TI Integral time (also called the integral time or reset)
PVn Value of the process variable at sample time n
MX Value of the integral term at sample time n-1 (also called the integral sum or the
bias)
The integral sum or bias (MX) is the running sum of all previous values of the integral term.
After each calculation of MIn, the bias is updated with the value of MIn which might be
adjusted or clamped (see the section "Variables and Ranges" for details). The initial value of
the bias is typically set to the output value (Minitial) just prior to the first loop output calculation.
Several constants are also part of the integral term, the gain (KC), the sample time (TS),
which is the cycle time at which the PID loop recalculates the output value, and the integral
time or reset (TI), which is a time used to control the influence of the integral term in the
output calculation.
Differential term of the PID equation: The differential term MD is proportional to the change
in the error. The CPU uses the following equation for the differential term:
MDn = KC * (TD / TS) * ((SPn - PVn) - (SPn-1 - PVn-1))
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
To avoid step changes or bumps in the output due to derivative action on setpoint changes,
this equation is modified to assume that the setpoint is a constant (SPn = SPn-1). This results
in the calculation of the change in the process variable instead of the change in the error as
shown:
MDn = KC * (TD / TS) * ((SPn - PVn) - (SPn-1 - PVn-1))
or just:
MDn = KC * (TD / TS) * (PVn-1 - PVn)
where:
MDn Value of the differential term of the loop output at sample time n
KC Loop gain
TS Loop sample time
TD Differentiation period of the loop (also called the derivative time or rate)
SPn-1 Value of the setpoint at sample time n - 1
PVn Value of the process variable at sample time n - 1
PVn-1 Value of the process variable at sample time n - 1
The process variable rather than the error must be saved for use in the next calculation of
the differential term. At the time of the first sample, the value of PVn - 1 is initialized to be
equal to PVn.
Selecting the type of loop control

In many control systems, it might be necessary to employ only one or two methods of loop
control. For example, only proportional control or proportional and integral control might be
required. The selection of the type of loop control desired is made by setting the value of the
constant parameters.
If you do not want integral action (no "I" in the PID calculation), then a value of infinity "INF",
should be specified for the integral time (reset). Even with no integral action, the value of the
integral term might not be zero, due to the initial value of the integral sum MX.
If you do not want derivative action (no "D" in the PID calculation), then a value of 0.0 should
be assigned for the derivative time (rate).
If you do not want proportional action (no "P" in the PID calculation) and you want I or ID
control, then a value of 0.0 should be specified for the gain. Since the loop gain is a factor in
the equations for calculating the integral and differential terms, setting a value of 0.0 for the
loop gain will result in a value of 1.0 being used for the loop gain in the calculation of the
integral and differential terms.
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
7.9.3 Converting and normalizing the loop inputs

A loop has two input variables, the setpoint and the process variable. The setpoint is
generally a fixed value such as the speed setting on the cruise control in your automobile.
The process variable is a value that is related to loop output and therefore measures the
effect that the loop output has on the controlled system. In the example of the cruise control,
the process variable would be a tachometer input that measures the rotational speed of the
tires.
Both the setpoint and the process variable are real world values whose magnitude, range,
and engineering units could be different. Before these real world values can be operated
upon by the PID instruction, the values must be converted to normalized, floating-point
representations.
The first step is to convert the real world value from a 16-bit integer value to a floating-point
or real number value. The following instruction sequence is provided to show how to convert
from an integer value to a real number.
ITD AIW0, AC0 //Convert an input value to a double word

DTR AC0, AC0 //Convert the 32-bit integer to a real number
The next step is to convert the real number value representation of the real world value to a
normalized value between 0.0 and 1.0. The following equation is used to normalize either the
setpoint or process variable value:
RNorm = ((RRaw / Span) + Offset)
where:
RNorm is the normalized, real number value representation of the real world value
RRaw is the un-normalized or raw, real number value representation of the real world
value
Offset is 0.0 for unipolar values
is 0.5 for bipolar values
Span is the maximum possible value minus the minimum possible value:
= 27,648 for unipolar values (typical)
= 55,296 for bipolar values (typical)
The following instruction sequence shows how to normalize the bipolar value in AC0 (whose
span is 55,296) as a continuation of the previous instruction sequence:
/R 55296.0, AC0 //Normalize the value in the accumulator

+R 0.5, AC0 //Offset the value to the range from 0.0 to 1.0
MOVR AC0, VD100 //Store the normalized value in the loop TABLE
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
7.9.4 Converting the loop output to a scaled integer value

The loop output is the control variable, such as the throttle setting of the cruise control on an
automobile. The loop output is a normalized, real number value between 0.0 and 1.0. Before
the loop output can be used to drive an analog output, the loop output must be converted to
a 16-bit, scaled integer value. This process is the reverse of converting the PV and SP to a
normalized value. The first step is to convert the loop output to a scaled, real number value
using the formula given below:
RScal is the scaled, real number value of the loop output

Mn is the normalized, real number value of the loop output
Offset is 0.0 for unipolar values
is 0.5 for bipolar values
Span is the maximum possible value minus the minimum possible value
= 27,648 for unipolar values (typical)
= 55,296 for bipolar values (typical)
The following instruction sequence shows how to scale the loop output:
MOVR VD108, AC0 //Moves the loop output to the accumulator

-R 0.5, AC0 //Include this statement only if the value is bipolar
*R 55296.0, AC0 //Scales the value in the accumulator
Next, the scaled, real number value representing the loop output must be converted to a 16-
bit integer. The following instruction sequence shows how to do this conversion:
ROUND AC0, AC0 //Converts the real number to a 32-bit integer

DTI AC0, LW0 //Converts the value to a 16-bit integer
MOVW LW0, AQW0 //Writes the value to the analog output
7.9.5 Forward- or reverse-acting loops

The loop is forward-acting if the gain is positive and reverse-acting if the gain is negative.
(For I or ID control, where the gain value is 0.0, specifying positive values for integral and
derivative time will result in a forward-acting loop, and specifying negative values will result
in a reverse-acting loop.)
Variables and ranges

The process variable and setpoint are inputs to the PID calculation. Therefore the loop table
fields for these variables are read but not altered by the PID instruction.
The output value is generated by the PID calculation, so the output value field in the loop
table is updated at the completion of each PID calculation. The output value is clamped
between 0.0 and 1.0. The output value field can be used as an input by the user to specify
an initial output value when making the transition from manual control to PID instruction
(auto) control of the output. (See the discussion in the "Modes" section below.)
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
If integral control is being used, then the bias value is updated by the PID calculation and the
updated value is used as an input in the next PID calculation. When the calculated output
value goes out of range (output would be less than 0.0 or greater than 1.0), the bias is
adjusted according to the following formulas:
when the calculated output Mn > 1.0
when the calculated output Mn < 0
MX is the value of the adjusted bias

MPn is the value of the proportional term of the loop output at sample time n
MDn is the value of the differential term of the loop output at sample time n
Mn is the value of the loop output at sample time n
By adjusting the bias as described, an improvement in system responsiveness is achieved

once the calculated output comes back into the proper range. The calculated bias is also
clamped between 0.0 and 1.0 and then is written to the bias field of the loop table at the
completion of each PID calculation. The value stored in the loop table is used in the next PID
calculation.
The bias value in the loop table can be modified by the user prior to execution of the PID
instruction in order to address bias value problems in certain application situations. Care
must be taken when manually adjusting the bias, and any bias value written into the loop
table must be a real number between 0.0 and 1.0.
A comparison value of the process variable is maintained in the loop table for use in the
derivative action part of the PID calculation. You should not modify this value.
Modes
There is no built-in mode control for PID loops. The PID calculation is performed only when
power flows to the PID box. Therefore, "automatic" or "auto" mode exists when the PID
calculation is performed cyclically. "Manual" mode exists when the PID calculation is not
performed.
The PID instruction has a power-flow history bit, similar to a counter instruction. The
instruction uses this history bit to detect a 0-to-1 power-flow transition. When the power-flow
transition is detected, it will cause the instruction to perform a series of actions to provide a
bumpless change from manual control to auto control. In order for change to auto mode
control to be bumpless, the value of the output as set by the manual control must be
supplied as an input to the PID instruction (written to the loop table entry for Mn) before
switching to auto control. The PID instruction performs the following actions to values in the
loop table to ensure a bumpless change from manual to auto control when a 0-to-1 power-
flow transition is detected:
Sets setpoint (SPn) = process variable (PVn)
Sets old process variable (PVn-1) = process variable (PVn)
Sets bias (MX) = output value (Mn)
S7-200 SMART
7.9 PID
The default state of the PID history bits is "set" and that state is established at startup and on
every STOP-to-RUN mode transition of the controller. If power flows to the PID box the first
time that it is executed after entering RUN mode, then no power-flow transition is detected
and the bumpless mode change actions are not performed.
Alarm checking and special operations

The PID instruction is a simple but powerful instruction that performs the PID calculation. If
other processing is required such as alarm checking or special calculations on loop
variables, these must be implemented using the basic instructions supported by the CPU.
Error conditions
When it is time to compile, the CPU will generate a compile error (range error) and the
compilation will fail if the loop table start address or PID loop number operands specified in
the instruction are out of range.
Certain loop table input values are not range checked by the PID instruction. You must take
care to ensure that the process variable and setpoint (as well as the bias and previous
process variable if used as inputs) are real numbers between 0.0 and 1.0.
If any error is encountered while performing the mathematical operations of the PID
calculation, then SM1.1 (overflow or illegal value) is set and execution of the PID instruction
is terminated. (Update of the output values in the loop table could be incomplete, so you
should disregard these values and correct the input value causing the mathematical error
before the next execution of the loop's PID instruction.)
Loop table
The loop table is 80 bytes long and has the format shown in the following table.
Offset Field Format Type Description

0 Process variable (PVn) REAL In Contains the process variable, which must be scaled
between 0.0 and 1.0.
4 Setpoint (SPn) REAL In Contains the setpoint, which must be scaled be-
tween 0.0 and 1.0.
8 Output (Mn) REAL In/Out Contains the calculated output, scaled between 0.0
and 1.0.
12 Gain (KC) REAL In Contains the gain, which is a proportional constant.
Can be a positive or negative number.
16 Sample time (TS) REAL In Contains the sample time, in seconds. Must be a
positive number.
20 Integral time or reset (TI) REAL In Contains the integral time or reset, in minutes. Must
be a positive number.
24 Derivative time or rate (TD) REAL In Contains the derivative time or rate, in minutes. Must
be a positive number.
28 Bias (MX) REAL In/Out Contains the bias or integral sum value between 0.0
and 1.0.
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt

32 Previous process variable REAL In/Out Contains the value of the process variable stored
(PVn-1) from the last execution of the PID instruction.
36 to 79 Reserved for auto-tuning variables. Refer to PID loop definition table (Page 468) for details.
7.10 Interrupt
7.10.1 Interrupt instructions

When you make the transition to RUN mode, interrupts are initially disabled. In RUN mode,
you can enable interrupt processing by executing the ENI (enable Interrupt) instruction.
Executing the DISI (disable interrupt) instruction inhibits the processing of interrupts;
however, active interrupt events will continue to be queued.
ENI, DISI, and CRETI

ENI The enable interrupt instruction globally enables processing of all attached inter-
rupt events.
DISI The disable interrupt instruction globally disables processing of all interrupt
events.
CRETI The conditional return from interrupt instruction can be used to return from an
interrupt, based upon the condition of the preceding program logic.

0004H Attempted ENI or DISI exe- None
cution disallowed in an interrupt
routine
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
ATCH, DTCH, and CEVENT

ATCH INT, EVNT The attach interrupt instruction associates an interrupt event EVNT with an inter-
rupt routine number INT and enables the interrupt event.
DTCH EVNT The detach interrupt instruction disassociates an interrupt event EVNT from all
interrupt routines and disables the interrupt event.
CEVENT EVNT The clear interrupt event instruction removes all interrupt events of type EVNT
from the interrupt queue. Use this instruction to clear the interrupt queue of un-
wanted interrupt events. If this instruction is being used to clear out spurious
interrupt events, then you should detach the event before clearing the events
from the queue. Otherwise new events will be added to the queue after the clear
event instruction has been executed.

0002H Conflicting assignment of None
inputs to an HSC
0016H Attempt to use HSC or edge
interrupt on input channel that is al-
ready allocated to a motion control
function
0019H Attempt to use a signal
board function without a signal
board installed and configured
0090H Invalid operand (illegal event
number)

INT BYTE Constant: interrupt routine number (0 to 127)
EVNT BYTE Constant: interrupt event number
CPU CR40, CR60: 0-13, 16-18, 21-23, 27, 28, and 32
CPU SR20/ST20, SR30/ST30, SR40/ST40, SR60/ST60: 0-13, 16-28, 32, and 34-
38
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
7.10.2 Interrupt routine overview and CPU model event support

Before an interrupt routine can be invoked, an association must be assigned between the
interrupt event and the program segment that you want to execute when the event occurs.
Use the attach interrupt instruction to associate an interrupt event (specified by the interrupt
event number) and the program segment (specified by an interrupt routine number). You can
attach multiple interrupt events to one interrupt routine, but one event cannot be concurrently
attached to multiple interrupt routines.
When you attach an event and interrupt routine, new occurrences of this event will cause
execution of the attached interrupt routine only if the global ENI (enable interrupts)
instruction was executed and interrupt event processing is active. Otherwise, the event is
added to the interrupt event queue. If you disable all interrupts using the global DISI (disable
interrupts) instruction, each occurrence of the interrupt event is queued until interrupts are
re-enabled, using the global ENI (enable interrupt) instruction, or the interrupt queue
overflows.
You can disable individual interrupt events by breaking the association between the interrupt
event and the interrupt routine with the detach Interrupt instruction. The detach interrupt
instruction returns the interrupt to an inactive or ignored state. The following table lists the
different types of interrupt events.
Event Description CR40/CR60 SR20/ST20

SR30/ST30
SR40/ST40
SR60/ST60
0 Rising edge I0.0 Y Y
1 Falling edge I0.0 Y Y
8 Port 0 Receive character Y Y
9 Port 0 Transmit complete Y Y
10 Timed interrupt 0 (SMB34 controls the time interval) Y Y
11 Timed interrupt 1 (SMB35 controls the time interval) Y Y
12 HSC0 CV=PV (current value = preset value) Y Y
14-15 Reserved N N
17 HSC2 Direction changed Y Y
18 HSC2 External reset Y Y
19 PLS0 PTO pulse count complete interrupt N Y
21 Timer T32 CT=PT (current time = preset time) Y Y
22 Timer T96 CT=PT (current time = preset time) Y Y
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
Event Description CR40/CR60 SR20/ST20

SR30/ST30
SR40/ST40
SR60/ST60
23 Port 0 Receive message complete Y Y
24 Port 1 Receive message complete N Y
25 Port 1 Receive character N Y
26 Port 1 Transmit complete N Y
27 HSC0 Direction changed Y Y
28 HSC0 External reset Y Y
29-31 Reserved N N
33 Reserved N N
35 Rising edge, signal board input 0 N Y
36 Falling edge, signal board input 0 N Y
37 Rising edge, signal board Input 1 N Y
38 Falling edge, signal board input 1 N Y
7.10.3 Interrupt programming guidelines
Interrupt routine execution

An interrupt routine executes in response to an associated internal or external event. Once
the last instruction of an interrupt routine has executed, control returns to the point in the
scan cycle at the point of the interruption. You can exit the routine by executing a conditional
return from interrupt instruction (CRETI).
Interrupt processing provides quick reaction to special internal or external events. Optimize
your interrupt routines to perform a specific task, and then return control to the scan cycle.
Note
You cannot use the disable interrupt (DISI), enable interrupt (ENI), high-speed counter
definition (HDEF), and end (END) instructions in an interrupt routine.
Keep interrupt routine program logic short and to the point, so execution is quick and
other processes are not deferred for long periods of time. If this is not done, unexpected
conditions can cause abnormal operation of equipment controlled by the main program.
System support for interrupts

Because interrupts can affect contact, coil, and accumulator logic, the system saves and
reloads the logic stack, accumulator registers, and the special memory bits (SM) that
indicate the status of accumulator and instruction operations. This avoids disruption to the
main user program caused by branching to and from an interrupt routine.
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
Calling subroutines from interrupt routines

You can call four nesting levels of subroutines from an interrupt routine. The accumulators
and the logic stack are shared between an interrupt routine and the four nesting levels of
subroutines called from the interrupt routine
Sharing data between the main program and the interrupt routines
You can share data between the main program and one or more interrupt routines. Because
it is not possible to predict when the CPU might generate an interrupt, it is desirable to limit
the number of variables that are used by both the interrupt routine and elsewhere in the
program. Problems with the consistency of shared data can result due to the actions of
interrupt routines when the execution of instructions in your main program is interrupted by
interrupt events. Use the interrupt block "variable table" (block call interface table) to ensure
that your interrupt routine uses only the temporary memory and does not overwrite data used
somewhere else in your program.
Ensuring access for a single shared variable

For an STL program that is sharing a single variable: If the shared data is a single byte,
word, or double word variable and your program is written in STL, then correct shared
access can be ensured by storing the intermediate values from operations on shared
data only in non-shared memory locations or accumulators.
For a LAD program that is sharing a single variable: If the shared data is a single byte,
word, or double word variable and your program is written in LAD, then correct shared
access can be ensured by establishing the convention that access to shared memory
locations be made using only Move instructions (MOVB, MOVW, MOVD, MOVR). While
many LAD instructions are composed of interruptible sequences of STL instructions,
these Move instructions are composed of a single STL instruction whose execution
cannot be affected by interrupt events.
Ensuring access for multiple shared variables

For an STL or LAD program that is sharing multiple variables: If the shared data is
composed of a number of related bytes, words, or double words, then the interrupt
disable/enable instructions (DISI and ENI) can be used to control interrupt routine execution.
At the point in your main program where operations on shared memory locations are to
begin, disable the interrupts. Once all actions affecting the shared locations are complete, re-
enable the interrupts. During the time that interrupts are disabled, interrupt routines cannot
be executed and therefore cannot access shared memory locations; however, this approach
can result in delayed response to interrupt events.
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
7.10.4 Types of interrupt events that the S7-200 SMART CPU supports
Communication port interrupts

The serial communications port of the CPU can be controlled by your program. This mode of
operating the communications port is called Freeport mode. In Freeport mode, your program
defines the baud rate, bits per character, parity, and protocol. The Receive and Transmit
interrupts are available to facilitate your program-controlled communications. Refer to the
Transmit and Receive instructions for more information.
I/O interrupts
I/O interrupts include rising/falling edge interrupts, high-speed counter interrupts, and pulse
train output interrupts. The CPU can generate an interrupt on rising and/or falling edges of
an input for input channels I0.0, I0.1, I0.2, and I0.3 (and for I7.0 and I7.1 for standard CPUs
with an optional digital input signal board). The rising edge and the falling edge events can
be captured for each of these input points. These rising/falling edge events can be used to
signify a condition that must receive immediate attention when the event happens.
The high-speed counter interrupts allow you to respond to conditions such as the current
value reaching the preset value, a change in counting direction that might correspond to a
reversal in the direction in which a shaft is turning, or an external reset of the counter. Each
of these high-speed counter events allows action to be taken in real time in response to high-
speed events that cannot be controlled at programmable logic controller scan speeds.
The pulse train output interrupts provide immediate notification of completion of the output of
the prescribed number of pulses. A typical use of pulse train outputs is stepper motor control.
You enable each of the above interrupts by attaching an interrupt routine to the related I/O
event.
Time-based interrupts
Time-based interrupts include timed interrupts and the timer T32/T96 interrupts. You can
specify actions to be taken on a cyclic basis using a timed interrupt. The cycle time is set in
1-ms increments from 1 ms to 255 ms. You must write the cycle time in SMB34 for timed
interrupt 0, and in SMB35 for timed interrupt 1.
The timed interrupt event transfers control to the appropriate interrupt routine each time the
timer expires. Typically, you use timed interrupts to control the sampling of analog inputs or
to execute a PID loop at regular intervals.
A timed interrupt is enabled and timing begins when you attach an interrupt routine to a
timed interrupt event. During the attachment, the system captures the cycle time value, so
subsequent changes to SMB34 and SMB35 do not affect the cycle time. To change the cycle
time, you must modify the cycle time value, and then re-attach the interrupt routine to the
timed interrupt event. When the re-attachment occurs, the timed interrupt function clears any
accumulated time from the previous attachment and begins timing with the new value.
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
After being enabled, the timed interrupt runs continuously and executes the attached
interrupt routine, at the end of each successive time interval. If you exit RUN mode or detach
the timed interrupt, the timed interrupt is disabled. If the global DISI (disable interrupt)
instruction is executed, timed interrupts continue to occur, but the attached interrupt routine
is not processed yet. Each occurrence of the timed interrupt is queued (until either interrupts
are enabled or the queue is full).
The timer T32/T96 interrupts allow timely response to the completion of a specified time
interval. These interrupts are only supported for the 1-ms resolution on-delay (TON) and off-
delay (TOF) timers T32 and T96. The T32 and T96 timers otherwise behave normally. Once
the interrupt is enabled, the attached interrupt routine is executed when the active timer's
current value becomes equal to the preset time value during the normal 1-ms timer update
performed in the CPU. You enable these interrupts by attaching an interrupt routine to the
T32 (event 21) and T96 (event 22) interrupt events.
7.10.5 Interrupt priority, queuing, and example program
Interrupt service
Interrupts are serviced by the CPU on a first-come-first-served basis within their respective
priority group. Only one user-interrupt routine is ever being executed at any point in time.
Once the execution of an interrupt routine begins, the routine is executed to completion. It
cannot be pre-empted by another interrupt routine, even by a higher priority routine.
Interrupts that occur while another interrupt is being processed are queued for later
processing. The following table shows the three interrupt queues and the maximum number
of interrupts they can store.
It is possible that more interrupts can occur than a queue can hold. Therefore, queue
overflow memory bits (identifying the type of interrupt events that have been lost) are
maintained by the system. The following table shows the interrupt queue overflow bits. You
should use these bits only in an interrupt routine because they are reset when the queue is
emptied, and control is returned to the scan cycle.
If multiple interrupt events occur at the same time, the priority (group and within a group)
determines which interrupt event is processed first. Once the highest priority has been
handled, the queue is examined to find the current highest priority event that remains in the
queue and the interrupt routine attached to that event is executed. This continues until the
queue is empty and control is returned to the scan cycle.
Maximum number of entries per interrupt queue

The following table shows all interrupt events, with their priority and assigned event number.
Queue Queue depth for all S7-200 SMART CPU models

Communications queue 4
I/O interrupt queue 16
Timed interrupt queue 8
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
Interrupt queue overflow bits
Description (0 = No Overflow, 1 = SM Bit

Overflow)
Communications queue SM4.0
I/O Interrupt queue SM4.1
Timed Interrupt queue SM4.2
Priority order for interrupt events
Priority group Event Description

Communications 8 Port 0 Receive character
Highest Priority 9 Port 0 Transmit complete
23 Port 0 Receive message complete
25 Port 1 Receive character
26 Port 1 Transmit complete
Discrete 19 PLS0 Pulse Count Complete
Medium Priority 20 PLS1 Pulse Count Complete
34 PLS2 Pulse Count Complete
0 I0.0 Rising edge
2 I0.1 Rising edge
4 I0.2 Rising edge
6 I0.3 Rising edge
35 I7.0 Rising edge (signal board)
1 I0.0 Falling edge
3 I0.1 Falling edge
5 I0.2 Falling edge
7 I0.3 Falling edge
36 I7.0 Falling edge (signal board)
12 HSC0 CV=PV (current value = preset value)
27 HSC0 Direction changed
28 HSC0 External reset
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt

Timed 10 Timed interrupt 0 SMB34
Lowest Priority 11 Timed interrupt 1 SMB35
21 Timer T32 CT=PT interrupt
Example 1: Input signal edge detector interrupt
LAD STL
MAIN On the first scan: Network 1
Network 1 1. Define interrupt routine LD SM0.1
INT_0 to be a falling-edge ATCH INT_0, 1
interrupt for I0.0. ENI
2. Globally enable interrupts.
Network 2 If an I/O error is detected, disa- Network 2

ble the falling-edge interrupt for LD SM5.0
I0.0. DTCH 1
(This network is optional.)
Network 3 When M5.0 is on, disable all Network 3

interrupts. When disabled, LD M5.0
attached interrupt events will be DISI
queued, but the corresponding
interrupt routines will not be
executed until interrupts are re-
enabled with the ENI instruc-
tion.
INT 0 I0.0 falling-edge interrupt rou- Network 1
Network 1 tine: Conditional return based LD SM5.0
on an I/O error. CRETI
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
Example 2: Timed interrupt for reading the value of an analog input
LAD STL
MAIN On the first scan, call subrou- Network 1
Network 1 tine 0. LD SM0.1
CALL SBR_0
SBR 0 Set the interval for the timed Network 1

Network 1 interrupt 0 to 100 ms. LD SM0.0
MOVB 100, SMB34
ATCH INT_0, 10
ENI
Attach timed interrupt 0

(Event 10) to INT_0.
Global interrupt enable.
INT 0 Read the value of AIW16 every Network 1

Network 1 100 ms. LD SM0.0
MOVW AIW16, VW100
S7-200 SMART
7.10 Interrupt
Example 3: Clear interrupt event instruction
LAD STL
SBR 1 HSC instruction wizard: Network 1
Network 1 Set control bits, write preset. LD SM0.0
MOVB 16#A0, SMB47
MOVD +6, SMD52
ATCH HSC1_STEP1, 13
PV = 6
Attach interrupt
HSC1_STEP1:
CV = PV for HC1
Configure HSC 1.
SBR 1 Clear unwanted interrupts Network 2

Network 2 caused by machine vibration. LD SM0.0
CEVNT 13
S7-200 SMART
7.11 Logical operations
7.11.1 Invert

INVB OUT The Invert Byte, Invert Word, and Invert Double Word instructions form the one's
INVW OUT complement of the input IN and load the result into the memory location OUT
INVD OUT


WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC,*VD, *LD, *AC
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
DWORD ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Example: Invert instruction
LAD STL
Invert word value in AC0. Result is put in Network 1
AC0. LD I4.0
INVW AC0
S7-200 SMART
7.11.2 AND, OR, and exclusive OR

ANDB IN1, The AND Byte, AND Word, and AND Double Word instructions logically AND the corre-
OUT sponding bits of two input values IN1 and IN2 and load the result in a memory location
ANDW IN1, assigned to OUT.
OUT LAD and FBD: IN1 AND IN2 = OUT
ANDD IN1,
STL: IN1 AND OUT = OUT
OUT
WAND_W
WAND_DW
ORB IN1, The OR Byte, OR Word, and OR Double Word instructions logically OR the correspond-
OUT ing bits of two input values IN1 and IN2 and load the result in a memory location as-
ORW IN1, signed to OUT.
OUT LAD and FBD: IN1 OR IN2 = OUT
ORD IN1,
STL: IN1 OR OUT = OUT
OUT
WOR_W
WOR_DW
XORB IN1, The Exclusive OR Byte, Exclusive OR Word, and Exclusive OR Double Word instruc-
OUT tions logically XOR the corresponding bits of two input values IN1 and IN2 and load the
XORW IN1, result in a memory location OUT.
OUT LAD and FBD: IN1 XOR IN2 = OUT
XORD IN1,
STL: IN1 XOR OUT = OUT
OUT
WXOR_W
WXOR_DW


IN1, IN2 BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
S7-200 SMART
Example: AND, OR, and Exclusive OR instructions
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I4.0
ANDW AC1, AC0
ORW AC1, VW100
XORW AC1, AC0
S7-200 SMART
7.12 Move
7.12 Move
7.12.1 Move byte, word, double word, or real

MOVB IN, OUT The Move Byte, Move Word, Move Double Word, and Move Real instructions move
MOVW IN, OUT a data value from a source (constant or memory location) IN to a new memory
MOVD IN, OUT location OUT, without changing the value stored in a source memory location.
MOVR IN, OUT Use the Move Double Word instruction to create a pointer. For more information,
refer to the section on pointers and indirect addressing (Page 70).
Non-fatal error with ENO = 0 SM bits affected


WORD, INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
DWORD, DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, HC, &VB, &IB, &QB, &MB, &SB, &T, &C, &SMB,
&AIW, &AQW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
WORD, INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DWORD, DINT, ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
REAL
S7-200 SMART
7.12 Move
7.12.2 Block move

BMB IN, OUT, The Block Move Byte, Block Move Word, and Block Move Double Word instruc-
N tions move an assigned block of data values from a source memory location
BMW IN, OUT, (starting address IN and successive addresses) to a new memory location (start-
N ing address OUT and successive addresses). Parameter N assigns the number
BMD IN, OUT, of bytes, words, or double words to move. The block of data values stored in the
N source location are not changed.
N has a range of 1 to 255.


IN BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC
WORD, INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DWORD, DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, *VD, *LD, *AC
WORD, INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
DWORD, DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, *VD, *LD, *AC
N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.12 Move
Example: Block Move instruction
LAD STL
Move (copy) data in source four byte Network 1
address sequence (VB20 to VB23) to LD I2.1
destination four byte address se- BMB VB20, VB100, 4
quence (VB100 to VB103).
Source data values 30 31 32 33

Source data addresses VB20 VB21 VB22 VB23
If I2.1 = 1, then execute BLKMOV_B to move source data values to destination addresses
Destination data values 30 31 32 33
Destination data addresses VB100 VB101 VB102 VB103
7.12.3 Swap bytes

SWAP IN The Swap Bytes instruction exchanges the most significant byte with the least signifi-
cant byte of the word IN.


IN WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.12 Move
Example: Swap instructions
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I2.1
SWAP VW50
Hexadecimal data values D6 C3

Data addresses VB50 VB51
If I2.1 = 1, then execute SWAP to exchange the byte data in a data word
Hexadecimal data values C3 D6
Data addresses VB50 VB51
7.12.4 Move byte immediate (read and write)

BIR IN, OUT The Move Byte Immediate Read instruction reads the state of physical input IN
and writes the result to the memory address OUT, but the process image register
is not updated.
BIW IN, OUT The Move Byte Immediate Write instruction reads the data from the memory
address IN and writes to physical output OUT, and the corresponding process
image location.

Unable to access expansion mod-
ule

IN (BIR) BYTE IB, *VD, *LD, *AC
IN (BIW) BYTE B, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT (BIR) BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
OUT (BIW) BYTE QB, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.13 Program control
7.13.1 FOR-NEXT loop

FOR INDX, The FOR instruction executes the instructions between the FOR and the NEXT
INIT, FINAL instructions. You assign the index value or current loop count INDX, the starting
loop count INIT, and the ending loop count FINAL.
NEXT The NEXT instruction marks the end of the FOR loop program segment.


INDX INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
INIT, FINAL INT VW, IW, QW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
Use the FOR and NEXT instructions to execute a program segment in a loop that is
repeated for the assigned count. Each FOR instruction requires one NEXT instruction. You
place a FOR-NEXT loop within a FOR-NEXT loop to a maximum nesting depth of eight.
If you enable a FOR-NEXT loop, the execution loop continues until it finishes the iterations,
unless you change the FINAL value from within the loop itself. You can change the values
while the FOR-NEXT loop is in the looping process. When the loop is enabled again, it
copies the INIT value to the INDX value (current loop number).
For example, given an INIT value of 1 and a FINAL value of 10, the instructions between the
FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction are executed 10 times with the INDX value being
incremented: 1, 2, 3, ... 10.
If the INIT value is greater than the FINAL value, the loop is not executed. After each
execution of the instructions between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction, the
INDX value is incremented and the result is compared to the final value. If the INDX is
greater than the final value, the execution loop is terminated.
For STL, if the top of the logic stack value is 1 when your program enters the FOR-NEXT
loop, then the top of the logic stack will be 1 when your program exits the FOR-NEXT loop.
S7-200 SMART
Example: FOR-NEXT loop
LAD STL
When I2.0 is ON, the outside Network 1
loop (Network 1 - 4) is exe- LD I2.0
cuted 100 times. FOR VW100, +1,
+100
The inside loop (Network 2 - Network 2

3) is executed twice for each LD I2.1
execution of the outside loop FOR VW225, +1, +2
when I2.1 is on.
End of inside loop Network 3

NEXT
End of outside loop Network 4

NEXT
7.13.2 JMP (jump to label)
You can use the JMP (Jump) instruction in the main program, in subroutines, or in interrupt
routines. The JMP and its corresponding LBL (Label) instruction must be located within the
same program segment either in the main program, a subroutine, or an interrupt routine.
Note
You cannot jump from the main program to a label in either a subroutine or an interrupt
routine. Likewise, you cannot jump from a subroutine or interrupt routine to a label outside
that subroutine or interrupt routine.
You can use a Jump instruction within an SCR program segment, but the corresponding
Label instruction must be located within the same SCR program segment.
S7-200 SMART

JMP N The JMP (Jump) instruction performs a branch to the label N within the program.
LBL N The LBL (Label) instruction marks the location of the jump destination n.

n WORD Constant (0 to 255)
Example: Jump to Label
LAD STL
If the retentive data has not been Network 1
lost, jump to label 4. LDN SM0.2
JMP 4
Label 4 Network 2
LBL 4
S7-200 SMART
7.13.3 SCR (sequence control relay)

SCR (Sequence Control Relay) instructions provide a simple yet powerful state control
programming technique for a LAD, FBD, or STL program. Whenever an application consists
of a sequence of operations that must be performed repetitively, you can use SCRs to
structure the program so that it corresponds directly to your application. As a result, you can
program and debug the application quickly and easily.
WARNING
S bit usage in POUs
Do not use the same S bit in more than one POU. For example, if you use S0.1 in the main
program, do not use it in a subroutine.
Multiple POUs accessing the same S bit could result in unexpected process operation,
Check your program to ensure that multiple POUs do not access the same S bit.
Note
SCR programming restrictions
You cannot jump into or out of an SCR segment; however, you can use Jump and Label
instructions to jump around SCR segments or to jump within an SCR segment.
You cannot use the END instruction in an SCR segment.
S7-200 SMART

LSCR S_bit The SCR instruction loads the SCR and logic stacks with the value of the
S bit referenced by the instruction.
The resulting value of the SCR stack either energizes or de-energizes the
SCR stack. The value of the SCR stack is copied to the top of the logic
stack so that LAD boxes or output coils can be tied directly to the left
SCRT S_bit
power rail and no preceding contact instruction is required.
CSCRE The SCRT instruction identifies the SCR bit to be enabled (the next S_bit
to be set). When power flows to the coil or FBD box, the CPU turns on the
referenced S_bit and turns off the S_bit of the LSCR instruction (that ena-
bled this SCR segment).
SCRE
The CSCRE (conditional SCR end) instruction, for STL and FBD, termi-
nates execution of the SCR segment when enabled. For LAD, a condi-
tional contact placed before a SCRE coil performs the conditional SCR
end function.
The SCRE (unconditional SCR end) instruction, for STL and FBD, termi-
nates execution of the SCR segment. For LAD, an SCRE coil connected
directly to the power rail performs the unconditional SCR end function.

S_bit BOOL S
S7-200 SMART
S stack and logic stack interaction
The figure shows the S stack and the logic

stack and the effect of executing the
Load SCR instruction.
Controlling program flow with SCR segments

The main program consists of instructions that execute sequentially once per scan of the
PLC. For many applications, it may be appropriate to logically divide the main program into a
series of operational steps that mirror steps within a controlled process (for example, a
series of machine operations).
One way to logically divide a program into multiple steps is to use SCR segments. SCR
segments can divide your program into a single stream of sequential steps, or into multiple
streams that can be active simultaneously. It is possible to have a single stream conditionally
diverge into multiple streams, and to have multiple streams conditionally re-converge into a
single stream.
S7-200 SMART
SCR operations
SCR (Load SCR) marks the beginning of an SCR segment, and the SCRE (End SCR)
marks the end of an SCR program segment. All logic between the SCR and the SCRE
instructions is dependent upon the value of the S stack for its execution. Logic between
SCRE and the next SCR instruction is not dependent on the value of the S stack.
SCRT (SCR Transition) transfers control from an active SCR segment to another SCR
segment.
Execution of the SCR transition instruction, when it has power flow, will reset the S bit of
the currently active SCR segment and will set the S bit of the referenced segment.
Resetting the S bit of the active segment does not affect the S stack at the time the SCR
Transition instruction executes. Consequently, the SCR segment remains energized until
it is exited.
The STL only instruction CSRE (Conditional SCR End) exits an active SCR segment
without executing the instructions between the CSRE and the SCRE (SCR End)
instructions. The Conditional SCR End instruction does not affect any S bit nor does it
affect the S stack.
S7-200 SMART
Example: SCR sequential control flow

In the following sample program, the first scan bit SM0.1, is used to set S0.1, which will be
the active State 1 on the first scan. After a 2-second delay, T37 causes a transition to State
2. This transition deactivates the State 1 SCR (S0.1) segment and activates the State 2 SCR
(S0.2) segment.
LAD STL
On the first scan enable state 1. Network 1
LD SM0.1
S S0.1, 1
Beginning of state 1 control Network 2

region. LSCR S0.1
Control the signals for street 1: Network 3

1. Set: Turn on the red light. LD SM0.0
S Q0.4, 1
2. Reset: Turn off the yellow
R Q0.5, 2
and green lights.
TON T37, +20
3. Start a 2-second timer.
After a 2 second delay, transi- Network 4

tion to state 2. LD T37
SCRT S0.2
End of SCR region for state 1. Network 5

SCRE
Beginning of state 2 control Network 6

region. LSCR S0.2
Control the signals for street 2: Network 7

1. Set: Turn on the green light. LD SM0.0
S Q0.2, 1
2. Start a 25-second timer.
TON T38, +250
After a 25 second delay, transi- Network 8

tion to state 3. LD T38
SCRT S0.3
S7-200 SMART
LAD STL
End of SCR region for state 2. Network 9
SCRE
Sequential control flow

A process with a well-defined sequence of steps is easy to model with SCR segments. For
example, consider a cyclical process, with 3 steps, that should return to the first step when
the third has completed.
Divergent control flow

In many applications, a single stream of sequential states must be split into two or more
different streams. When a control stream diverges into multiple streams, all outgoing streams
must be activated simultaneously.
S7-200 SMART
The divergence of control streams can be implemented in an SCR program by using multiple
SCRT instructions enabled by the same transition condition, as shown in the following
example.
Example: SCR divergent flow control
LAD STL
Beginning of state L control re- Network 1
gion LSCR S3.4
S3.5: Transition to state M Network 2

S6.5: Transition to state N LD M2.3
A I2.1
SCRT S3.5
SCRT S6.5
End of the state region for state L Network 3

SCRE
Convergent flow control

When streams converge, all incoming streams must be complete before the next state is
executed.
The convergence of control streams can be implemented in an SCR program by making the
transition from state L to state L' and by making the transition from state M to state M'. When
both SCR bits representing L' and M' are true, state N is enabled as shown in the following
example.
S7-200 SMART
Example: SCR convergent flow control
LAD STL
Beginning of state L control region Network 1
LSCR S3.4
Transition to State L' Network 2

LD V100.5
SCRT S3.5
End of SCR region for state L Network 3

SCRE
Beginning of state M control re- Network 4

gion LSCR S6.4
Transition to state M' Network 5

LD C50
SCRT S6.5
End of SCR region for state M Network 6

SCRE
When both State L' and State M' Network 7

are activated: LD S3.5
Enable State N (S5.0) A S6.5
S S5.0, 1
Reset State L' (S3.5)
R S3.5, 1
Reset State M' (S6.5) R S6.5, 1
S7-200 SMART
Divergence of a control stream, depending on transition conditions

In other situations, a control stream might be directed into one of several possible control
streams, depending upon which transition condition becomes true first.
Example: SCR divergent flow control, depending of transition conditions
LAD STL
Beginning of state L control region Network 1
LSCR S3.4
Transition to state M Network 2

LD M2.3
SCRT S3.5
Transition to state N Network 3

LD I3.3
SCRT S6.5
End of SCR region for state L Network 4

SCRE
S7-200 SMART
7.13.4 END, STOP, and WDR (watchdog timer reset)

END The conditional END instruction terminates the current scan based
upon the condition of the preceding logic. You can use the conditional
END instruction in the main program, but you cannot use it in either
subroutines or interrupt routines.
STOP The conditional STOP instruction terminates the execution of your pro-
gram by causing a transition of the CPU from RUN to STOP mode.
If the STOP instruction is executed in an interrupt routine, the interrupt
routine is terminated immediately and all pending interrupts are ig-
nored. Remaining actions in the current scan cycle are completed,
including execution of the main user program. The transition from RUN
to STOP mode is made at the end of the current scan.
WDR The watchdog reset instruction retriggers the system watchdog timer
and adds 500 milliseconds to the time allowed for the scan to complete
before a watchdog timeout error occurs.
Watchdog timer operation

When the CPU is in RUN mode, the duration of the main scan is limited to 500 milliseconds,
by default. If the duration of the main scan exceeds 500 milliseconds, then the CPU
automatically transitions to STOP mode and the non-fatal error 001AH (Scan watchdog
timeout) is issued.
You can extend the duration of the Main Scan by executing the Watchdog Reset (WDR)
instruction in your program. The scan watchdog timeout period is reset to 500 milliseconds
each time the WDR instruction is executed.
However, there is an absolute maximum main scan duration of 5 seconds. The CPU will
unconditionally transition to STOP mode if the current scan duration reaches 5 seconds.
Example: STOP, END, and WDR (Watchdog reset) instructions
LAD STL
When an I/O error is detected, Network 1
force the transition to STOP LD SM5.0
mode. STOP
When M5.6 is ON, execute the Network 1

watchdog reset instruction to LD SM5.6
extend the allowed scan time by WDR
500 milliseconds.
When I0.0 is ON, terminate the Network 1

current scan. LD I.0
END
S7-200 SMART
Note
If you expect your scan time to exceed 500 ms, or if you expect a burst of interrupt activity
that prevents returning to the main scan for more than 500 ms, you should use the watchdog
reset instruction to retrigger the watchdog timer.
Use the watchdog reset instruction carefully. If program execution loops prevent scan
completion or excessively delay the completion of the scan, then the following processes are
inhibited until the scan cycle is completed.
Communications (except Freeport mode)
I/O updating (except Immediate I/O)
Forced values updating
SM bit updating (SM0, SM5 to SM29 are not updated)
RUN-time diagnostics
STOP instruction, when used in an interrupt routine
7.13.5 GET_ERROR (Get non-fatal error code)

GERR ECODE The get non-fatal error code instruction stores the CPU's current non-fatal error
code in the location assigned to ECODE. After the error code is stored, the non-
fatal error code is cleared in the CPU.


ECODE WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
Non-fatal run-time errors also affect certain special memory error flag addresses that can be
evaluated along with the GET_ERROR instruction to determine the cause of a run-time fault.
In the event that the generic error flag SM4.3 = 1 (Run-time programming problem) is active,
a GET_ERROR execution can be used to identify the specific error.
Non-fatal error code 0000H indicates that no actual error currently exists. In the case of a
temporary run-time non-fatal error, a GET_ERROR (ECODE output) produces a non-zero
error value and then the next program scan can produce a zero ECODE value.
S7-200 SMART
You should use compare logic to save the ECODE value in another memory location. Your
program can then test the saved error code value and begin a programmatic reaction.
Note
The error codes for the ECODE output are listed in the PLC non-fatal error codes table (see
reference below). The error code values are in hexadecimal (16#xxxx).
See Also
PLC non-fatal error codes (Page 657)
PLC non-fatal error SM flags (Page 660)
S7-200 SMART
7.14 Shift and rotate
7.14.1 Shift and rotate
Shift instructions (only the byte size LAD box is illustrated, the others are similar)
LAD / FBD STL Shift type Description

SLB OUT, Shift left byte The shift instructions shift the bit values of input value IN right or left by
N the bit position shift count N and load the result in the memory location
assigned to OUT.
The shift instructions fill empty bit positions with zero as each bit is shift-
ed out. If the shift count N is greater than or equal to the maximum al-
lowed (8 for byte operations, 16 for word operations, and 32 for double
Shift right byte word operations), the value is shifted the maximum number of times for
SRB OUT, the operation. If the shift count is greater than 0, the overflow memory bit
N SM1.1 is set to the value of the last bit shifted out. The SM1.0 zero
memory bit is set if the result of the shift operation is zero.
Byte operations are unsigned. For word and double word operations, the
sign bit is shifted when you use signed data values.
SHL_W SLW OUT, Shift left word
SHR_W N Shift right word
SRW OUT,
N
SHL_DW SLD OUT, Shift left double
SHR_DW N word
SRD OUT, Shift right double
N word
Non-fatal errors with ENO=0 SM bits affected

SM1.1 Overflow (last bit shifted out)
Input / out- Data type Operand

put
N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
S7-200 SMART
Rotate instructions (only the byte size LAD box is illustrated, the others are similar)
LAD / FBD STL Rotate type Description

RLB OUT, Rotate left byte The rotate instructions rotate the bit values of input value IN right or left by
N the bit position rotate count N and load the result in the memory location
assigned to OUT. The rotate operation is circular.
If the rotate count is greater than or equal to the maximum for the operation
(8 for a byte operation, 16 for a word operation, or 32 for a double-word
operation), the CPU performs a modulo operation on the rotate count to
obtain a valid shift count before the rotation is executed. This result is a shift
Rotate right byte count of 0 to 7 for byte operations, 0 to 15 for word operations, and 0 to 31
RRB OUT, for double-word operations.
N If the rotate count is 0, a rotate operation is not performed. If the rotate oper-
ation is performed, the overflow bit SM1.1 is set to the value of the last bit
rotated out.
ROL_W RLW OUT, Rotate left word
If the rotate count is not an integer multiple of 8 (for byte operations), 16 (for
ROR_W N Rotate right word operations), or 32 (for double-word operations), the last bit value rotat-
RRW OUT, word ed out is copied to the overflow memory bit SM1.1. The zero memory bit
N SM1.0 is set when the value to be rotated is zero.
ROL_DW RLD OUT, Rotate left dou- Byte operations are unsigned. For word and double word operations, the
ROR_DW N ble word sign bit is rotated when you use signed data types.
RRD OUT, Rotate right
N double word

SM1.1 Overflow (last bit shifted out)
Input / out- Data type Operand

put
S7-200 SMART
Example: Shift and Rotate instructions
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I4.0
RRW AC0, 2
SLW VW200, 3
7.14.2 Shift register bit

The Shift Register Bit instruction shifts a bit value into the Shift Register. This instruction
provides an easy method for sequencing and controlling product flow or data. Use this
instruction to shift the entire register one bit, once per scan.

SHRB DATA, The shift register bit instruction shifts the bit value of DATA into the Shift Register.
S_bit, N S_BIT assigns the location of the least significant bit of the shift register. N assigns
the length of the Shift Register and the direction of the shift (Shift Plus = N, Shift
Minus = -N).
Each bit value shifted out by the SHRB instruction is copied to the overflow memory
bit SM1.1.
The shift register bits are defined by both the least significant bit S_BIT location and
the number of bits assigned by the length N.
S7-200 SMART

0006H Indirect address SM1.1 Overflow (last bit shifted out)
0092H Error in count field

DATA, S_bit BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Use the following equation to compute the address of the most significant bit of the Shift
Register (MSB.b):
MSB.b = [(Byte of S_BIT) + ([N] - 1 + (bit of S_BIT)) / 8].[remainder of the division by 8]
For example: if S_BIT is V33.4 and N is 14, the following calculation shows that the MSB.b is
V35.1.
MSB.b = V33 + ([14] - 1 +4)/8
= V33 + 17/8
= V33 + 2 with a remainder of 1
= V35.1
The following figure shows bit shifting for negative and positive values of N.
A Shift Minus operation is indicated by a nega-

tive value of length N. The input value of DATA
shifts into the most significant bit of the shift reg-
ister, and shifts out of the least significant bit
location assigned by S_BIT. The data shifted out
is then placed in the overflow memory bit SM1.1.
A Shift Plus operation is indicated by a positive
value of length N. The input value of DATA shifts
into the least significant bit location assigned by
S_BIT and out of the most significant bit of the
Shift Register. The bit value shifted out is then
placed in the overflow memory bit SM1.1.
The maximum length of the shift register as-
signed by N is 64 bits (positive or negative).
S7-200 SMART
Example: SHRB instruction
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I0.2
EU
SHRB I0.3, V100.0, +4
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String
7.15 String
7.15.1 String (Get length, copy, and concatenate)
SLEN (String length)

SLEN IN, OUT The string length instruction returns the length in bytes of the string specified by
IN.
Note: Because Chinese characters are not represented by a single byte, the
STR_LEN function does not return the number of characters in a string contain-
ing Chinese characters.


SCPY and SCAT (String copy and string concatenate)

SCPY IN, OUT The copy string instruction copies the string assigned by IN to the string as-
signed by OUT.
SCAT IN, OUT The concatenate string instruction appends the string assigned by IN to the
end of the string assigned by OUT.
Note: The STR_CPY and STR_CAT instructions operate on bytes and not characters. Because Chinese characters are not
represented by a single byte, unexpected results can occur with the STR_CPY and STR_CAT instructions with strings
containing Chinese characters. If you know the number of bytes that a character string occupies, you can use the
STR_CPY and STR_CAT instructions with the correct number of bytes.
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String

Inputs/Outputs Data types Operands

Example: Concatenate string, copy string, and string length Instructions
LAD STL
1. Append the string "WORLD" to the Network 1
string at VB0. LD I0.0
2. Copy the string at VB0 to a new string SCAT "WORLD", VB0
at VB100. SCPY VB0, VB100
3. Get the length of the string that starts SLEN VB100, AC0
at VB100.
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String
7.15.2 Copy substring from string

SSCPY IN, The copy substring from string instruction copies the assigned number of charac-
INDX, N, OUT ters N from the string specified by IN, starting at the index INDX, to a new
string assigned by OUT.
Note: The SSTR_CPY instruction operates on bytes and not characters. Because
Chinese characters are not represented by a single byte, unexpected results can
occur with the SSTR_CPY instruction with strings containing Chinese characters.
If you know the number of bytes that a character string occupies, you can use the
SSTR_CPY instruction with the correct number of bytes.

009BH Index = 0

INDX, N BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
Example: Copy substring instruction
AD STL
Starting at the seventh byte after the Network 1
byte count in the string at VB0, copy 5 LD I0.0
bytes to a new string at VB20. SSCPY VB0, 7, 5, VB20
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String
7.15.3 Find string and first character within string

SFND IN1, IN2, OUT STR_FIND searches for the first occurrence of the string IN2 within the
string IN1. The search begins at the starting position assigned by the initial
value of OUT (which must be in the range of 1 to the IN1 string length be-
fore STR_FIND execution). If a sequence of characters is found that match-
es exactly the string IN2, the position of the first character in the sequence
within the IN1 string is written to OUT. If the string IN2 was not found in the
string IN1, then OUT is set to 0.
CFND IN1, IN2, OUT CHR_FIND searches the string IN1 for the first occurrence of any character
from the character set in the string IN2. The search begins at starting posi-
tion assigned by the initial value of OUT (which must be in the range of 1 to
the IN1 string length before CHR_FIND execution). If a matching character
is found, then the position of the character is written to OUT. If no matching
character is found, OUT is set to 0.
Note: Because Chinese characters are not represented by a single byte, and the string instructions operate on bytes and
not characters, unexpected results can occur with the STR_FIND and CHR_FIND instructions with strings containing
Chinese characters.

009BH Index = 0

IN1, IN2 STRING VB, LB, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant String
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String
Example: Find string within string instruction

A string stored at VB0 is used as a command for turning a pump on or off. A string "On" is
stored at VB20 and a string "Off" is stored at VB30. The result of the find string within string
instruction is stored in AC0 (the OUT parameter). If the result is not 0, then the string 'On'
was found in the command string (VB12).
LAD STL
1. Set AC0 to 1. (AC0 is used as the Network 1
OUT parameter.) LD I0.0
2. Search the string at VB0 for the MOVB 1, AC0
string at VB20 ('On'), starting at SFND VB0, VB20, AC0
the first position (AC0=1).
S7-200 SMART
7.15 String
Example: Find character within string instruction

A string stored at VB0 contains the temperature. The string constant at IN1 provides all the
numeric characters (0-9, +, and -) that can identify a temperature number in a string.
CHR_FIND execution finds the starting position of the character "9" in the VB0 string and
then S_R execution converts the real number characters into a real number value. VD200 is
used to store the real-number value of the temperature.
LAD STL
1. Set AC0 to 1. (AC0 is used as the Network 1
OUT parameter and points to the LD I0.0
first character position in the MOVB 1, AC0
string.) CFND VB0, VB20, AC0
2. Find the first numeric character in STR VB0, AC0, VD200
the string stored at VB0.
3. Convert the string to a real num-
ber value.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
7.16 Table
7.16.1 Add to table

ATT DATA, The add to table instruction adds word values DATA to a table TBL. The first value in
TBL the table is the maximum table length TL. The second value is the entry count EC,
which stores the number of entries in the table and is updated automatically. New data
are added to the table after the last entry. Each time new data are added to the table,
the entry count is incremented.
A table can have up to 100 data entries.

0006H Indirect address SM1.4 Set to 1 if you try to overfill the table
SM1.4 Table overfill

DATA INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
TBL WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, *VD, *LD, *AC
Note
To create a table, first make an entry for the maximum number of table entries. If you do not
do this, then you cannot make any entries in the table.
Edge trigger instructions must activate all table read and table write instructions.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
Example: Add to Table instruction
LAD STL
On the first scan only, load the maximum table Network 1
length 6 to VW200. LD SM0.1
MOVW +6, VW200
When I0.0 makes a transition to 1, add a third data Network 2

value (from VW100) to the table at VW200. Two LD I0.0
data entries were previously stored in the table ATT VW100, VW200
which can hold up to six entries.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
7.16.2 First-in-first-out and last-in-first-out
Table 7- 13 FIFO and LIFO instructions

FIFO TBL, DATA The first-in-first-out instruction moves the oldest (or first) entry in a table to an output
memory address, by removing the first entry in the assigned table (TBL) and moving
the value to the location assigned by DATA. All other entries of the table are shifted
up one location. The entry count in the table is decremented for each FIFO execu-
tion.
LIFO TBL, DATA The last-in-first-out instruction moves the newest (or last) entry in the table to an
output memory address, by removing the last entry in the table (TBL) and moving
the value to the location assigned by DATA. The entry count in the table is decre-
mented for each LIFO execution.

0006H Indirect address SM1.5: Attempt to remove entry from empty table
SM1.5: Attempt to remove entry
from empty table

DATA INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
Note
All table read and table write instructions must be activated by edge trigger instructions.
To create a table, you must first make an entry for the maximum number of table entries
before any entries can be put in the table.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
Example: FIFO instruction
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I4.1
FIFO VW200, VW400
Example: LIFO instruction
Network 1
LD I0.1
LIFO VW200, VW300
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
7.16.3 Memory fill

FILL IN, OUT, The memory fill instruction writes N consecutive words, beginning at address OUT,
N with the word value contained in address IN.
N has a range of 1 to 255.


IN INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
OUT INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC
Example: Memory fill instruction
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I2.1
FILL +0, VW200, 10
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
7.16.4 Table find

FND= TBL, PTN, The Table Find instruction searches a table for data that matches your search
INDX criteria. The Table Find instruction searches the table TBL, starting with the
FND<> TBL, PTN, table entry INDX, for the data value or pattern PTN that matches the search
INDX criteria defined by CMD. The command parameter CMD is given a numeric
FND< TBL, PTN, value of 1 to 4 that corresponds to =, <>, <, and >, respectively.
INDX If a match is found, the INDX points to the matching entry in the table. To find
FND> TBL, PTN, the next matching entry, the INDX must be incremented before invoking the
INDX table find instruction again. If a match is not found, the INDX has a value equal
to the entry count.
A table can have up to 100 data entries. The data entries (area to be searched)
are numbered from 0 to a maximum value of 99.


PTN INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
INDX WORD IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
CMD BYTE Constant:
1 = Equal (=)
2 = Not Equal (<>)
3 = Less Than (<)
4 = Greater Than (>)
Note
When you use the table find instruction with tables generated with the Add-to-table, Last-in-
first-out, and First-in-first-out instructions, the entry count and the data entries correspond
directly. The maximum-number-of-entries word required for the Add-to-table, Last-in-first-out,
or First-in-first-out instructions is not required by the Table find instruction. See the following
figure.
Consequently, you should set the TBL operand of a Find instruction to one-word address
(two bytes) higher than the TBL operand of a corresponding the Add-to-table, Last-in-first-
out, or First-in-first-out instruction.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
Differences in table formats for ATT, LIFO, FIFO, and TBL_FIND instructions
Example: Table Find instruction
LAD STL
Network 1
LD I2.1
FND= VW202, 16#3130, AC1
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
Example: Table
The following program creates a table with 20 entries. The first memory location of the table
contains the length of the table (in this case 20 entries). The second memory location shows
the current number of table entries. The other locations contain the entries. A table can have
up to 100 entries. It does not include the parameters defining the maximum length of the
table or the actual number of entries (here VW0 and VW2). The actual number of entries in
the table (here VW2) is automatically incremented or decremented by the CPU with every
command.
Before you work with a table, assign the maximum number of table entries. Otherwise, you
cannot make entries in the table. Also, be sure that all read and write commands are
activated with edge instructions.
S7-200 SMART
7.16 Table
To search the table, the index (VW106) must set to 0 before doing the find. If a match is
found, the index will have the table entry number, but if no match is found, the index will
match the current entry count for the table (VW2).
LAD STL
Create table with 20 entries start- Network 1
ing with memory location 4. LD SM0.1
On the first scan, define the MOVW +20, VW0
maximum length of the table.
Reset table with input I0.0. Network 2

LD I0.0
On the rising edge of I0.0, fill
EU
memory locations from VW2
FILL +0, VW2, 21
with "+0".
Write value to table with input I0.1. Network 3

LD I0.1
On the rising edge of I0.1, copy
EU
value of memory location
ATT VW100, VW0
VW100 to table.
Read last table value with input Network 4

I0.2. LD I0.2
Move the last table value to EU
location VW102. This reduces LIFO VW0, VW102
the number of entries. On the
rising edge of I0.2, move last
table value to VW102.
Read first table value with input Network 5
I0.3. LD I0.3
Move the first table value to EU
location VW104. This reduces FIFO VW0, VW104
the number of entries. On the
rising edge of I0.3, move first
table value to VW104.
Search table for the first location Network 6
that has a value of 10. LD I0.4
On the rising edge of I0.4, reset EU
index pointer. MOVW +0, VW106
FND= VW2, +10, VW106
Find a table entry that equals
10.
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
7.17 Timer
7.17.1 Timer instructions

TON Txxx, PT Use TON On-delay timers for a timing a single time interval.
TONR Txxx, PT Use TONR On-delay retentive timers for accumulating the time value of many timed
intervals.
TOF Txxx, PT Use the TOF Off-delay timer for extending a time interval past an OFF (or FALSE)
condition, such as a delay time for cooling a motor.

Txxx WORD Timer number (T0 to T255)
IN BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
PT INT IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC, Constant
Timer resolution
TON, TONR, and TOF timers are available in three resolutions. The resolution is determined
by the timer number, as shown below. Each unit of the current value is a multiple of the time
base. For example, a count of 50 on a 10 ms timer represents 500 ms of elapsed time.
Your Txxx timer number assignment determines the resolution of the timer. When a valid
timer number is assigned, the resolution is displayed in LAD or FBD timer boxes.
Timer number and resolution options
Timer type Resolution Maximum value Timer number

TON, TOF 1 ms 32.767 s T32, T96
10 ms 327.67 s T33-T36, T97-T100
100 ms 3276.7 s T37-T63, T101-T255
TONR 1 ms 32.767 s T0, T64
10 ms 327.67 s T1-T4, T65-T68
100 ms 3276.7 s T5-T31, T69-T95
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Note
Avoid timer number conflicts
You cannot use the same timer number for both a TON and TOF timer. For example, you
cannot have both a TON T32 and a TOF T32.
Note
To guarantee a minimum time interval, increase the preset value (PV) by 1.
For example: To ensure a minimum timed interval of at least 2100 ms for a 100-ms timer, set
the PV to 22.
TON and TONR timer operation

The TON and TONR instructions begin timing when the enabling input IN is ON. When the
current value is equal to or greater than the preset time, the timer bit is set ON.
The current value of a TON timer is cleared when the enabling input is OFF.
The current value of the TONR timer is maintained when the enabling input is OFF. You
can use the TONR timer to accumulate time when the input IN is ON. Use the Reset
instruction (R) to clear the current value of the TONR.
Both the TON and the TONR timers continue timing after the preset time is reached, and
they stop timing at the maximum value of 32,767.
TOF timer operation

The TOF instruction is used to delay turning an output OFF for a fixed period of time after the
input turns OFF. When the enabling input turns ON, the timer bit turns ON immediately, and
the current value is set to 0. When the input turns OFF, timing begins and continues until the
current time equals the preset time.
When the preset is reached, the timer bit turns OFF and the current value stops
incrementing; however, if the enabling input turns ON again before the TOF reaches the
preset value, the timer bit remains ON.
The enabling input must make an ON-OFF transition for a TOF timer to begin timing the
OFF-delay time interval.
If a TOF timer is inside an SCR region and the SCR region is inactive, then the current
value is set to 0, the timer bit is turned OFF, and the current value does not increment.
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Type Current >= Preset State of IN, the enabling input Power cycle / first scan
TON Timer bit ON ON: Current value = timing value Timer bit = OFF
Current value continues OFF: Timer bit OFF, current value Current value = 0
timing to 32,767 =0
TONR1 Timer bit ON ON: Current value = timing value Timer bit = OFF
Current value continues OFF: Timer bit and current value Current value can be
timing to 32,767 maintain last state and value maintained1
TOF Timer bit OFF ON: Timer bit ON, current value = Timer bit = OFF
Current = Preset, stops 0 Current value = 0
timing OFF: Timer begins timing after
ON-to-OFF transition
1 The retentive timer current value can be assigned for retention through a power cycle. See Config-
uring the retentive ranges for details (Page 122).
Note
Using the Reset instruction with timer instructions
The TONR timer can only be reset with the Reset (R) instruction.
The TON and TOF timers can be reset by the timer's enable input and also the Reset (R)
instruction.
The Reset instruction performs the following actions:
Timer bit = OFF
Timer current value = 0
After a reset, TOF timers require the enable input to make the transition from ON-to-OFF
in order restart the OFF-delay timer.
7.17.2 Timer programming tips and examples
Timer types
You can use timers to implement time-based counting functions. The S7-200 instruction set
provides three different types of timers.
On-Delay Timer (TON) for timing a single interval
Retentive On-Delay Timer (TONR) for accumulating a number of timed intervals
Off-Delay Timer (TOF) for extending time past an off (or false condition), such as for
cooling a motor after it is turned off
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Addressing timer values

The meaning of the T number depends on the context in your program.
"T37" assigned to a timer box identifies which timer is to use.
"T37" assigned to normally open contacts addresses the Boolean T37 timer bit.
"T37" assigned to integer operations addresses the T37 current time value, as a data
word.
1-millisecond resolution
The 1-ms timers count the number of 1-ms timer intervals that have elapsed since the active
1-ms timer was enabled. The execution of the timer instruction starts the timing; however,
the 1-ms timers are updated (timer bit and timer current) every millisecond asynchronous to
the scan cycle. In other words, the timer bit and timer current are updated multiple times
throughout any scan that is greater than 1 ms.
The timer instruction is used to turn the timer on, reset the timer, or, in the TONR timer, to
turn the timer off.
Since the timer can be started anywhere within a millisecond, the preset must be set to one
time interval greater than the minimum desired timer interval. For example, to guarantee a
timed interval of at least 56 ms using a 1-ms timer, the preset time value should be set to 57.
The 10-ms timers count the number of 10-ms timer intervals that have elapsed since the
active 10-ms timer was enabled. The execution of the timer instruction starts the timing;
however the 10-ms timers are updated at the beginning of each scan cycle (in other words,
the timer current and timer bit remain constant throughout the scan), by adding the
accumulated number of 10-ms intervals (since the beginning of the previous scan) to the
current value for the active timer.
Since the timer can be started anywhere within a 10-ms interval, the preset must be set to
one time interval greater than the minimum desired timer interval. For example, to guarantee
a timed interval of at least 140 ms using a 10-ms timer, the preset time value should be set
to 15.
The 100-ms timers count the number of 100-ms timer intervals that have elapsed since the
active 100-ms timer was last updated. These timers are updated by adding the accumulated
number of 100-ms intervals (since the previous scan cycle) to the timers current value when
the timer instruction is executed.
The current value of a 100-ms timer is updated only if the timer instruction is executed.
Consequently, if a 100-ms timer is enabled but the timer instruction is not executed each
scan cycle, the current value for that timer is not updated and it loses time. Likewise, if the
same 100-ms timer instruction is executed multiple times in a single scan cycle, the number
of 100-ms intervals is added to the timers current value multiple times, and it gains time.
100-ms timers should only be used where the timer instruction is executed exactly once per
scan cycle.
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Since the timer can be started anywhere within a 100-ms interval, the preset must be set to
one time interval greater than the minimum desired timer interval. For example, to guarantee
a timed interval of at least 2100 ms using a 100-ms timer, the preset time value should be
set to 22.
TON On-delay timer example
LAD STL
100 ms timer T37 times out after 1 s Network 1
(10 x 100 ms) LD I0.0
I0.0 ON = T37 enabled, TON T37, +10
I0.0 OFF = disable and reset T37
T37 bit is controlled by timer T37 Network 2

LD T37
= Q0.0
Timing Diagram
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
TON self-resetting On-delay timer example
LAD STL
10 ms timer T33 times out after 1 s Network 1
(100 x 10 ms). LDN M0.0
M0.0 pulse is too fast to monitor with TON T33, +100
Status view.
The Compare contact becomes TRUE Network 2

at a rate that is visible in Status view. LDW>= T33, +40
Turn ON Q0.0 after (40 x 10 ms) for = Q0.0
40% OFF / 60% ON.
T33 (bit) pulse is too fast to monitor Network 3
with Status view. LD T33
Reset the timer with M0.0 after the (100 = M0.0
x 10 ms) period.
Timing Diagram
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
TONR retentive On-delay timer example
LAD STL
10 ms TONR timer T1 times out at Network 1
PT = 1 s (100 x 10 ms). LD I0.0
TONR T1, +100
T1 bit is controlled by timer T1. Network 2

Q0.0 is ON after the timer accumulates LD T1
a total of 1 second. = Q0.0
TONR timers must be reset by a Reset Network 3

instruction with a T address. LD I0.1
Reset timer T1 (current value and bit) R T1, 1
when I0.1 is on.
Timing Diagram
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
TOF Off-delay timer example
LAD STL
10-ms timer T33 times out after 1 s Network 1
(100 x 10 ms). LD I0.0
I0.0 ON-to-OFF = T33 enabled TOF T33, +100
I0.0 OFF-to-ON=disable and reset

T33
Timer T33 controls Q0.0 through timer Network 2
contact T33. LD T33
= Q0.0
Timing Diagram
Effect of timer resolution on when timer bits and current time values are updated
1 ms timer: The timer bit and the current value are updated asynchronous to the scan
cycle. For scans greater than 1 ms, the timer bit and the current value are updated
multiple times throughout the scan.
10 ms timer: The timer bit and the current value are updated at the beginning of each
scan cycle. The timer bit and current value remain constant throughout the scan. Time
intervals that accumulate during the scan are added to the current value at the start of
each scan.
100 ms timer: The timer bit and current value are updated when the instruction is
executed; therefore, ensure that your program executes the instruction for a 100-ms timer
only once per scan cycle in order for the timer to maintain the correct timing.
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Example: automatically retriggered One-shot timers

The corrected examples use the normally closed contact Q0.0 instead of the timer bit as the
timer enabling input. This ensures that output Q0.0 is turned ON for one scan cycle, each
time a timer reaches the preset value.
1 ms timer
Q0.0 is turned ON for one scan whenever the timer's current value is updated after the
normally closed contact T32 is executed and before the normally open contact T32 is
executed.
10 ms timer
Q0.0 is never turned ON, because the timer bit T33 is turned ON from the top of the scan to
the point where the timer box is executed. Once the timer box has been executed, the
timers current value and its Tbit are set to zero. When the normally open contact T33 is
executed, T33 is OFF and Q0.0 is turned OFF.
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
100 ms timer
Q0.0 is always turned ON for one scan whenever the timers current value reaches the
preset value.
7.17.3 Interval timers

BITIM OUT The Begin interval time instruction reads the current value of the built-in 1 milli-
second counter and stores the value in OUT. The maximum timed interval for a
DWORD millisecond value is 2 raised to the 32 power or 49.7 days.
CITIM IN, OUT The Calculate interval time instruction calculates the time difference between the
current time and the time provided at IN. The difference is stored in OUT. The
maximum timed interval for a DWORD millisecond value is 2 raised to the 32
power or 49.7 days. CITIM automatically handles the one millisecond timer rollo-
ver that occurs within the maximum interval, depending on when the BITIM in-
struction was executed.


IN DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
OUT DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC
S7-200 SMART
7.17 Timer
Example: Begin and Calculate interval timers
LAD STL
Capture the time that Q0.0 Network 1
turned ON. LD Q0.0
EU
BITIM VD0
Ex1_Interval_time_net1
Calculate the time Q0.0 has Network 2

been ON. LD Q0.0
CITIM VD0, VD4
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
7.18 Subroutine
7.18.1 CALL (subroutine) and RET (conditional return)
To add a new subroutine, select the Edit ribbon strip then Insert Object and Subroutine
command. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART automatically adds an unconditional return from each
subroutine. You can also add conditional return CRET instructions within the subroutine.
From the main program, you can nest subroutines (place a subroutine call within a
subroutine) to a depth of eight.
From an interrupt routine, you can nest subroutines to a depth of four.
Note
Recursion (a subroutine that calls itself) is not prohibited, but you should use caution when
using recursion with subroutines.

CALL SBR_n, The Call subroutine instruction transfers control to subroutine SBR_n. You can
x1, x2, x3 use a Call subroutine instruction with or without parameters. After the subroutine
completes its execution, control returns to the instruction that follows the Call
subroutine.
The call parameters x1 (IN), x2 (IN_OUT), and x3 (OUT) represent three call
parameters passed in, in and out, or out of the subroutine. The call parameters
are optional. You may use from 0 to 16 call parameters.
When a subroutine is called, the entire logic stack is saved, the top of stack is set
to one, all other stack locations are set to zero, and control is transferred to the
called subroutine. When this subroutine is completed, the stack is restored with
the values saved at the point of call, and control is returned to the calling routine.
Accumulators are common to subroutines and the calling routine. No save or
restore operation is performed on accumulators due to subroutine use.
When a subroutine is called more than once in the same cycle, the edge up, edge
down, timer and counter instructions should not be used.
CRET The Conditional Return from Subroutine instruction (CRET) terminates the sub-
routine based upon the preceding logic.
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine

008H Maximum subroutine nesting
exceeded

SBR_n WORD Constant: 0-127
IN BOOL V, I, Q, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow (LAD), Logic flow (FBD)
BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1, Constant
WORD, INT VW, T, C, IW, QW, MW, SMW, SW, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *LD, *AC1, Constant
DWORD, DINT VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, HC, *VD, *LD, *AC1, &VB, &IB, &QB, &MB,
&T, &C, &SB, &AI, &AQ, &SMB, Constant
STRING *VD, *LD, *AC1, Constant
IN_OUT BOOL V, I, Q, M, SM2, S, T, C, L
BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SMB2, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1
WORD, INT VW, T, C, IW, QW, MW, SMW2, SW, LW, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1
DWORD, DINT VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD2, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1
OUT BOOL V, I, Q, M, SM2, S, T, C, L
BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SMB2, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1
WORD, INT VW, T, C, IW, QW, MW, SMW2, SW, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *LD, *AC1
DWORD, DINT VD, ID, QD, MD, SMD2, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *LD, *AC1
1 Only AC1, AC2 or AC3 (AC0 not allowed)
2 Must be from byte offset 30 to byte offset 999 for read/write access
Calling a subroutine with call parameters

Subroutines have the option of using passed parameters. The parameters are defined in the
variable table of the subroutine. Each parameter must be assigned a local symbol name (a
maximum of 23 characters), a variable type, and a data type. A maximum of sixteen
parameters can be passed to or from a subroutine. The VAR_Type type field in the variable
table defines whether the variable is passed into the subroutine (IN), passed into and out of
the subroutine (IN_OUT), or passed out of the subroutine (OUT).
To add a new parameter row, place the cursor on the Var_Type field of the type (IN,
IN_OUT, OUT, or TEMP) that you want to add. Click the right mouse button to get a menu of
options. Select the Insert option and then the Row Below option. Another parameter row of
the selected type will appear below the current entry.
Temporary (TEMP) parameters can be assigned in the variable table to store data that is
valid only within the scope of the subroutine execution. Local TEMP data is not passed as a
call parameter. You can also assign TEMP parameters in the main routine and interrupt
routines, but only subroutines can use IN, IN_OUT, and OUT call parameters.
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
Variable table parameter types for a subroutine
Parameter Description
IN Parameters are passed into the subroutine. If the parameter is a direct address (such as VB10), the
value at the specified location is passed into the subroutine. If the parameter is an indirect address (such
as *AC1), the value at the location pointed to is passed into the subroutine. If the parameter is a data
constant (16#1234) or an address (&VB100), the constant or address value is passed into the subrou-
tine.
IN_OUT The value at the specified parameter location is passed into the subroutine, and the result value from the
subroutine is returned to the same location. Constants (such as 16#1234) and addresses (such as
&VB100) are not allowed for input/output parameters.
OUT The result value from the subroutine is returned to the specified parameter location. Constants (such as
16#1234) and addresses (such as &VB100) are not allowed as output parameters. Since output param-
eters do not retain the value assigned by the last execution of the subroutine, you must assign values to
outputs each time the subroutine is called.
TEMP Any local memory that is not used for passed parameters can be used for temporary storage within the
subroutine.
Data types allowed for call parameters

Power Flow: Boolean power flow is allowed only for bit (Boolean) inputs. This declaration
assigns an input parameter to the result of power flow based on a combination of bit logic
instructions. Power flow inputs are similar to the EN input in that they connect to bit logic
(for ex. LAD contacts) and not to a direct/indirect address assignment. Boolean power
flow input(s) must be assigned in the top row(s) of the variable table before any non-
BOOL data type assignment. Only input parameters are allowed to be used this way. The
enable input (EN) and the IN1 inputs in the following example use power flow logic.
BOOL: This data type is used for single bit inputs and outputs. IN3 in the following
example is a Boolean input assigned to a direct address.
BYTE, WORD, DWORD: These data types identify an unsigned input or output parameter
of 1, 2, or 4 bytes, respectively.
INT, DINT: These data types identify signed input or output parameters of 2 or 4 bytes,
respectively.
REAL: This data type identifies a single precision (4 byte) IEEE floating-point value.
STRING: This data type is used as a four-byte pointer to a string.
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
Example variable table
Example: Subroutine call with call parameters
LAD STL
STL only:
Network 1
LD I0.0
CALL SBR_0, I0.1, VB10, I1.0, &VB100, *AC1, VD200
To display correctly in LAD and FBD:

Network 1
LD I0.0
= L60.0
LD I0.1
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL SBR_0, L63.7, VB10, I1.0, &VB100, *AC1, VD200
Note
There are two STL examples provided above. STL programmers can use the first simplified
STL instructions, which can only be displayed in the STL editor. This is because the BOOL
parameters used as LAD/FBD power flow inputs are not saved to L memory.
The second set of compiler generated STL instructions can be displayed in the LAD, FBD,
and STL editors, because L memory is used by the program compiler to save the state of the
BOOL input parameters that are assigned as power flow inputs in LAD/FBD.
Address parameters such as IN4 (&VB100) are passed into a subroutine as a DWORD
(unsigned double word) value. The type of a constant parameter must be specified for the
parameter in the calling routine with a constant descriptor in front of the constant value. For
example, to pass an unsigned double word constant with a value of 12,345 as a parameter,
the constant parameter must be specified as DW#12345. If the constant describer is omitted
from the parameter, the constant can be assumed to be a different type.
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
There are no automatic data type conversions performed on the input or output parameters.
For example, if the variable table specifies that a parameter has the data type REAL, and in
the calling routine a double word (DWORD) is specified for that parameter, the value in the
subroutine will be a double word.
When values are passed to a subroutine, they are placed into the local memory of the
subroutine. The left-most column of the variable table shows the local memory address for
each passed parameter. Input parameter values are copied to the subroutine's local memory
when the subroutine is called. Output parameter values are copied from the subroutine's
local memory to the specified output parameter addresses when the subroutine execution is
complete.
The data element size and type are represented in the coding of the parameters.
Assignment of parameter values to local memory in the subroutine is as follows:
Parameter values are assigned to local memory in the order specified by the call
subroutine instruction with parameters starting at L 0.0.
One to eight consecutive bit parameter values are assigned to a single byte starting with
Lx.0 and continuing to Lx.7.
Byte, word, and double word values are assigned to local memory on byte boundaries
(LBx, LWx, or LDx).
In the Call Subroutine instruction with parameters, parameters must be arranged in order
with input parameters first, followed by input/output parameters, and then followed by output
parameters.
If you are programming in STL, the format of the CALL instruction is:
CALL subroutine number, parameter 1, parameter 2, ... , parameter 16
Example: Subroutine and return from subroutine instructions
LAD STL
MAIN On the first scan, call subroutine 0 Network 1
for initialization. LD SM0.1
CALL SBR_0
SBR0 You can use a conditional return to Network 1

leave the subroutine before the last LD M14.3
network. CRET
SBR0 This network will be skipped if Network 2

M14.3 is ON. LD SM0.0
MOVB 10, VB0
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
Example: Subroutine call using string parameter

This example copies a different string literal to a unique address depending upon the given
input. The unique address of this string is saved. The string address is then passed to the
subroutine by using an indirect address. The data type of the subroutine input parameter is
string. The subroutine then moves the string to a different location.
A string literal can also be passed to the subroutine. The string reference inside the
subroutine is always the same.
STL
LAD
MAIN Network 1
LD I0.0
SCPY "string1", VB100
AENO
MOVD &VB100, VD0
MAIN Network2
LD I0.1
SCPY "string2", VB200
AENO
MOVD &VB200, VD0
MAIN Network3
LD I0.2
CALL SBR_0, *VD0
MAIN Network4
LD I0.3
CALL SBR_0, "string3"
SBR0 Network 1
LD SM0.0
SSCPY *LD0, VB300
S7-200 SMART
7.18 Subroutine
S7-200 SMART
Communication 8
The S7-200 SMART offers several types of communication between CPUs, programming
devices, and HMIs:
Ethernet:
Exchange of data from the programming device to the CPU
S7 peer-to-peer communication with other S7-200 SMART CPUs
PROFIBUS:
High speed communications for distributed I/O (up to 12 Mbps)
One bus master connects to many I/O devices (supports 126 addressable devices).
Exchange of data between the master and I/O devices
EM DP01 module is a PROFIBUS I/O device.
RS485:
Supports a total of 126 addressable devices (32 devices per network segment)
Supports PPI (point-to-point interface) protocol
instructions)
RS232:
Supports a point-to-point connection to one device
Supports PPI protocol
instructions)
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.1 CPU communication connections
8.1 CPU communication connections

The CPU supports the following maximum number of simultaneous, asynchronous
communication connections:
Ethernet programming port: The CPU provides the following connections:
HMI/OPC connections: Eight dedicated HMI/OPC connections.
PG connections: One programming device (PG) connection.
Peer-to-peer (GET/PUT) connections: Eight connections to support S7-200 SMART
CPUs or network devices.
Note
The S7-200 SMART CPU uses the GET and PUT instructions for CPU-to-CPU
communication.
PROFIBUS port: Each EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module can support six connections
with one reserved for an HMI device.
Integrated RS485 port (Port 0): Four connections to support HMI devices.
CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485 port (Port 1): Four connections to support HMI
devices.
Note
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART can only connect to an S7-200 SMART CPU through the
Ethernet port. Only one PG can monitor one CPU at a time.
The RS485 and RS232 ports are only for HMI access (Data read/write) and Freeport
communications.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.2 CPU communication ports
8.2 CPU communication ports

There are four communication interfaces on the S7-200 SMART CPU that provide the
following communication types:
Ethernet port:
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART programming
GET/PUT communication
HMI: Ethernet type
PROFIBUS port: The S7-200 SMART CPUs can support two EM DP01 modules for
PROFIBUS DP and HMI communication.
RS485 port (Port 0):
TDs/HMI: RS485 type
Freeport (XMT/RCV) including Siemens-provided USS and Modbus libraries
RS485/RS232 signal board (SB) (if present, Port 1):
TDs/HMIs: RS485 or RS232 type
Freeport (XMT/RCV) including Siemens-provided USS (RS485 only) and Modbus
(RS485 or RS432) libraries
8.3 HMIs and communication drivers
HMIs
The S7-200 SMART supports the HMIs from the following Siemens HMI families:
COMFORT HMIs:
SIMATIC HMI TP700 COMFORT
SIMATIC HMI KP400 COMFORT
SIMATIC HMI KTP400 COMFORT
SMART HMIs:
SMART 700 IE
SMART 1000 IE
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.3 HMIs and communication drivers
BASIC HMIs:
SIMATIC HMI KTP400 BASIC MONO PN
SIMATIC HMI KTP600 BASIC MONO PN
SIMATIC HMI KTP600 BASIC COLOR DP
SIMATIC HMI KTP600 BASIC COLOR PN
SIMATIC HMI KTP1000 BASIC COLOR DP
SIMATIC HMI KTP1000 BASIC COLOR PN
SIMATIC HMI TP1500 BASIC COLOR PN
SIMATIC HMI KP300 BASIC MONO PN
Micro HMIs:
TD 400C TEXT DISPLAY, 4 LINES
Communication drivers
Communication drivers for your S7-200 SMART HMIs can be selected in two locations:
WinCC Flexible software
TIA portal
WinCC Flexible
In the WinCC Flexible software package, you can select the required "Communication driver"
with the following menu selections:
Communications
Connections table
In the "Connections table", select the "SIMATIC S7 200 SMART" driver. If the SMART driver
is not in the list, select the "SIMATIC S7 200" driver.
TIA portal
In the TIA portal, you can select the required "Communication driver" with the following menu
selections:
HMI tags
Connections
In "Connections", select the "SIMATIC S7 200" driver.
Note
If the HMI panel is using a DP connection (RS485), then also set the "Network Profile" to
PPI.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.1 Overview
An Ethernet network is a differential (multi-point) network that can have up to 32 segments
and 1,024 nodes. Ethernet allows for data transfer at a high speed (up to 100 Mbit/s) and
long distances (Copper: Maximum approximately 1.5km; Optical: Maximum approximately
4.3km).
Possible Ethernet connections include connections for the following:
Programming devices
CPU-to-CPU GET/PUT communication
HMI displays
8.4.2 TCP/IP protocol

TCP/IP Ethernet allows an S7-200 SMART CPU to be linked to an Industrial Ethernet
network.
The Industrial Ethernet network includes the following features:
Communication based upon TCP/IP communication standards
Factory installed MAC address
Auto sensory full duplex or half duplex communications, 10 Mbits and 100 Mbits
Multiple connections:
Up to eight HMI connections
One programmer connection
Up to eight GET/PUT active connections
Up to eight GET/PUT passive connections
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.3 Local/partner connection

A Local / Partner (remote) connection defines a logical assignment of two communication
partners to establish a communication connection. A connection is defined by the following:
Communication partners involved (one active, one passive)
Type of connection (programming device, HMI, CPU, or other device)
Connection path (network, IP address, subnet mask, gateway)
The communication partners set up and establish the communication connection. The active
device establishes the connection, and the passive device either accepts or rejects the
connection request from the active device. After a connection is established, it is
automatically maintained by the active device and monitored by both the devices.
If the connection is terminated (for example, due to a line break or one of the partners breaks
the connection), the active partner attempts to re-establish the connection. The passive
device will also note the termination of the connection and take actions (for example,
revoking the password privileges of the now disconnected active partner).
The S7-200 SMART CPUs are both active and passive devices. When an active device (for
example, a computer running STEP 7-MicroWIN SMART or an HMI) establishes a
connection, the CPU decides whether to accept or reject the connection request, based
upon the type of the connection and how many connections of a given type are allowed.
8.4.4 Sample Ethernet network configurations

You have three different types of communication options when using the
S7-200 SMART CPU Ethernet network:
Connecting a CPU to a programming device
Connecting a CPU to an HMI
Connecting a CPU to another S7-200 SMART CPU
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
Programming device connected to the CPU
HMI connected to the CPU
A CPU connected to another CPU
The Ethernet port on the CPU does not contain an Ethernet switching device. A direct
connection between a programming device or HMI and a CPU does not require an Ethernet
switch. However, a network with more than two CPUs or HMI devices requires an Ethernet
switch.
CSM1277 Ether-
net switch
You can use the rack-mounted CSM1277 4-port Ethernet switch for connecting multiple
CPUs and HMI devices.
8.4.5 Assigning Internet Protocol (IP) addresses
8.4.5.1 Assigning IP addresses to programming and network devices

If your programming device is using an on-board adapter card connected to your plant LAN
(and possibly the world-wide web), both the programming device and the CPU must exist on
the same subnet. The subnet is specified as a combination of the IP Address and subnet
mask for the device. Please see your local network administrator for help.
The Network ID is the first part of the IP address (first three octets) (for example,
211.154.184.16) that determines what IP network you are on. The subnet mask normally has
a value of 255.255.255.0; however, since your computer is on a plant LAN, the subnet mask
may have various values (for example, 255.255.254.0) in order to set up unique subnets.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
The subnet mask, when combined with the device IP address in a logical AND operation,
defines the boundaries of an IP subnet.
Note
In a World Wide Web scenario, where your programming devices, network devices, and IP
routers will communicate with the world, unique IP addresses must be assigned to avoid
conflict with other network users. Contact your company IT department personnel, who are
familiar with your plant networks, for assignment of your IP addresses.
Note
A secondary network adapter card is useful when you do not want your CPU on your
company LAN. During initial testing or commissioning tests, this arrangement is particularly
useful.
Assigning or checking the IP address of your programming device using "My Network Places" (on
your desktop)
If you are using Windows 7, you can assign or check your programming device's IP address
with the following menu selections:
"Start"
"Control Panel"
"Network and Sharing Center"
"Local Area Connection" for the network adapter connected to your CPU
"Properties"
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
In the "Local Area Connection Properties" dialog, in the "This connection uses the
following items:" field:
Scroll down to "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)".
Click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)".
Click the "Properties" button.
Select "Obtain an IP address automatically (DCP)" or "Use the following IP address"
(to enter a static IP address).
If you have the "Obtain an IP address automatically" selected you may want to change
the selection to "Use the following IP address" to connect to the S7-200 SMART CPU:
Select an IP address on the same subnet as the CPU (192.168.2.1).
Set the IP address to an address with the same Network ID (for example,
192.168.2.200).
Select a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
Leave the default gateway blank.
This will allow you to connect to the CPU.
Note
The Network Interface Card and the CPU must be on the same subnet to allow
STEP 7-MicroWIN SMART to find and communicate to the CPU.
Consult your IT personnel to help you set up a network configuration to allow you to connect
to the S7-200 SMART CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.5.2 Configuring or changing an IP address for a CPU or device in your project

You must enter the following IP information for each S7-200 SMART CPU that is attached to
your Ethernet network:
IP address: Each CPU or device must have an Internet Protocol (IP) address. The CPU
or device uses this address to deliver data on a more complex, routed network. Each IP
address is divided into four 8-bit segments and is expressed in a dotted, decimal format
(for example, 211.154.184.16). The first part of the IP address is used for the Network ID
(What network are you on?), and the second part of the address is for the Host ID
(unique for each device on the network). An IP address of 192.168.x.y is a standard
designation recognized as part of a private network that is not routed on the Internet.
Note
All S7-200 SMART CPUs have a default IP address of: 192.168.2.1
Note
You must have a unique IP address for each device on your network.
Subnet mask: A subnet is a logical grouping of connected network devices. Nodes on a

subnet are usually located in close physical proximity to each other on a Local Area
Network (LAN). The subnet mask defines the boundaries of an IP subnet.
Note
A subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 is generally suitable for a local network.
Default gateway IP address: Gateways (or IP routers) are the link between LANs. Using a
gateway, a computer in a LAN can send messages to other networks, which might have
other LANs behind them. If the data destination is not within the LAN, the gateway
forwards the data to another network or group of networks where it can be delivered to its
destination. Gateways rely on IP addresses to deliver and receive data packets.
Ethernet port
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
There are three ways to configure or change the IP information for the onboard Ethernet port
of a CPU or device:
Configuring the IP information in the "Communications" dialog (dynamic IP information)
Configuring the IP information in the "System Block" dialog (static IP information)
Configuring the IP information in the user program (dynamic IP information)
Note
You can have static or dynamic IP information in the CPU:
Static IP information: If the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot be
changed by other means" checkbox in the system block is checked, then the Ethernet
network information that you enter is static. Static IP information must be downloaded
to the CPU before it is active in the CPU, and, if you want to change the IP
information, this IP information can only be changed in the system block dialog and
once again downloaded to the CPU.
Dynamic IP information: If the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot
be changed by other means" checkbox in the system block is not checked, then you
change the IP address of the CPU through other means and this IP address
information is considered to be dynamic. You can change the IP address information
in the Communications dialog or with the SIP_ADDR instruction in the user program.
For both static and dynamic IP, the information is stored in persistent memory.
Configuring the IP information in the Communications dialog (dynamic IP information)

IP information changes done through the Communications dialog are immediate and do not
require a download of the project.
To access this dialog, perform one of the following:
In the Navigation bar, click the "Communications" button.

In the Project tree, select the "Communications" node,
then press Enter; or double-click the "Communications"
node.
You can access CPUs in one of two ways:

"Found CPUs": CPUs located on your local network
"Added CPUs": CPUs on the local or remote networks (for example, CPUs accessed on
another network through a router)
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
For "Found CPUs" (CPUs located on your local network), use the "Communications dialog"
to connect with your CPU:
Click the "Network Interface Card" dropdown list, and select the "TCP/IP" Network
Interface Card (NIC) for your programming device.
Click the "Find CPUs" button to display all operational CPUs ("Found CPUs") on the local
Ethernet network. All CPUs have a default IP address.
For "Added CPUs" (CPUs on the local or remote networks), use the "Communications
dialog" to connect with your CPU:
Click the "Network Interface Card" dropdown list, and select the "TCP/IP" Network
Interface Card (NIC) for your programming device.
Click the "Add CPU" button to do one of the following:
Enter the IP address of a CPU that is accessible from the programming device, but is
not on the local network.
You can add these CPUs, select them as the communication partner in STEP
7-Micro/WIN SMART, and program and operate these CPUs in the same way you
would a CPU on the local network. As long as there is a valid network path through
routers, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART can communicate with any S7-200 SMART CPU.
Enter the IP address of a CPU directly that is on the local network.
You can add multiple CPUs, on the local network and/or remote network. As always,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART communicates with one CPU at a time. All CPUs have a
default IP address.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
To enter or change IP information, perform the following:

Click the required CPU.
If you need to identify which CPU to configure or change, click the "Flash Lights" button.
This button flashes the STOP, RUN, and FAULT lights for the highlighted CPU in the list.
Click the "Edit" button to make changes in the IP information.
Change the following IP information:
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Station name
Press the "Set" button. When the "Set" button is pressed, these values are updated within
the CPU.
When finished, click "OK".
When you configure IP information for the onboard Ethernet port in the Communications
dialog, this information is "dynamic". If the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and
cannot be changed by other means" checkbox in the system block dialog is not checked,
then you must enter IP information in the Communications dialog. You can enter new IP
address information and update this information in the CPU by clicking the "Set" button.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
Configuring the IP information in the System Block dialog (static IP information)

IP information configuration or changes done in the system block are part of the project and
do not become active until you download your project to the CPU.
To access this dialog, perform one of the following:
In the Navigation bar, click the "System Block" button.
In the Project tree, select the "System Block" node, then

press Enter; or double-click the "System Block" node.
To enter or change IP information, perform the following:

If not already checked, click the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot
be changed by other means" checkbox. The Ethernet port IP information fields are
enabled.
Enter or change the following IP information:
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Station name
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
Note
The Station Name follows the standard DNS (Domain Name System) naming
conventions. The S7-200 SMART CPUs limit the Station Name to a maximum of 63
characters. The Station Name can consist of the lower case letters a through z, the
digits 0 through 9, the hyphen character (minus sign), and the period character.
Certain names are not allowed and this can depend on the tool used to set the Station
Name. The Station Name must not have the format "n.n.n.n" where n is a value of 0
through 999. The Station Name cannot begin with the string "port-nnn" or the string
"port-nnn-nnnnn" where "n" is a digit 0 through 9 (for example, "port-123" and "port-
123-45678" are illegal). The Station Name cannot start or end with the hyphen or
period.
When you check the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot be changed by
other means" checkbox in the system block dialog, the IP information that you enter for the
onboard Ethernet port is static. Static IP information must be downloaded to the CPU before
it is active in the CPU. If you want to change the IP information, this IP information can only
be changed in the system block dialog and once again downloaded to the CPU.
Note
If the "IP address data is fixed to the values below and cannot be changed by other means"
checkbox is checked, then the IP information cannot be set in the Communications dialog.
In order to use the SIP_ADDR instruction, the "IP address data is fixed to the values below
and cannot be changed by other means" checkbox must be unchecked.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
After completing the IP information configuration, download the project to the CPU. All CPUs
and devices that have valid IP addresses are displayed in the Communications dialog.
Configuring the IP information in the user program (dynamic IP information)

The SIP_ADDR instruction sets the CPUs IP address to the value found in its "ADDR" input,
the CPUs subnet mask to the value found in its "MASK" input, and the CPUs gateway to the
value found in its "GATE" input.
IP information or changes done through the SIP_ADDR instruction are immediate and do not
require a download of the project. The IP address information set with the SIP_ADDR
instruction is stored in permanent memory in the CPU.
Refer to the "Get IP address and set IP address (Ethernet)" (Page 191) instructions for more
information.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.5.3 Searching for CPUs and devices on your Ethernet network

You can search for and identify the S7-200 SMART CPUs that are attached to your Ethernet
network in the "Communications" dialog. To access this dialog, click one of the following:
Communications button in the navigation bar
Communications in the project tree
Communications from the Component drop-down list in the

Windows area of the View menu ribbon strip
The "Communications" dialog will autodetect all connected and available

S7-200 SMART CPUs on a given Ethernet network by creating a lifelist. (See the figure
below.) After selecting a CPU, the following detailed information about the CPU is listed:
MAC address
IP information
Station name
The IP address of a CPU is not associated with a STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project.
Opening a STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project does not automatically select an IP address
or establish a connection to a CPU. Every time you create a new or open an existing
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project, you must go to the Communications dialog to establish
a connection to a CPU. The Communications dialog will show the last selected CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.6 Locating the Ethernet (MAC) address on the CPU

In Ethernet networking, a Media Access Control address (MAC address) is an identifier
assigned to the network interface by the manufacturer for identification. A MAC address
usually encodes the manufacturer's registered identification number.
The standard (IEEE 802.3) format for printing MAC addresses in human-friendly form is six
groups of two hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens (-) or colons (:), for example, 01-23-
45-67-89-ab or 01:23:45:67:89:ab.
Note
Each CPU is loaded at the factory with a permanent, unique MAC address. You cannot
change the MAC address of a CPU.
The MAC address is printed on the front, upper-left corner of the CPU. Note that you have to
open the upper door to see the MAC address information.
MAC address
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.4 Ethernet
8.4.7 HMI-to-CPU communication
The CPU supports Ethernet communication

connections to HMIs. The following require-
ments must be considered when setting up
communications between CPUs and HMIs:
Configuration/Setup:
The CPU must be configured with an IP address.
The HMI must be setup and configured to connect with the IP address of the CPU.
No Ethernet switch is required for one-to-one communications; an Ethernet switch is
required for more than two devices in a network.
Note
The rack-mounted CSM1277 4-port Ethernet switch can be used to connect your CPUs
and HMI devices. The Ethernet port on the CPU does not contain an Ethernet switching
device.
Supported functions:
The HMI can read/write data to the CPU.
Messages can be triggered, based upon information retrieved from the CPU.
System diagnostics
To ensure that your CPU and HMI are communicating properly, follow the sequence of steps
in the table below:
Table 8- 1 Required steps in configuring communications between an HMI and a CPU
Step Task
1 Establishing the hardware communications connection
An Ethernet interface establishes the physical connection between an HMI and a CPU. Since Auto-Cross-Over
functionality is built into the CPU, you can use either a standard or crossover Ethernet cable for the interface.
An Ethernet switch is not required to connect an HMI and a CPU.
Refer to "Establishing the hardware communications connection" (Page 27) for more information.
2 If you have already created a project with a CPU, open your project in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART. If not, cre-
ate a project and insert a CPU In the project.
3 Configuring an IP address in your project
Use the same configuration process; however, you must configure IP addresses for the HMI and the CPU. You
must download the configuration for each CPU and HMI device.
Refer to "Configuring or changing an IP address for a CPU or device in your project" (Page 362) for more in-
formation.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Note
You can restrict communication writes to a specific range of V memory; this can affect HMI
communications. See "Configuring system security" (Page 124) for more information.
8.5 PROFIBUS
The PROFIBUS protocol is designed for high-speed communications with distributed I/O
devices (remote I/O). A PROFIBUS system uses a bus master to poll DP I/O devices
distributed in a multi-drop fashion on an RS485 serial bus.
There are many PROFIBUS devices available from a variety of manufacturers. These
devices range from simple input or output modules to motor controllers and PLCs. A
PROFIBUS DP device is any peripheral device which processes information and sends its
output to the master. The DP device forms a passive station on the network (since it does
not have bus access rights) and can only acknowledge received messages or send
response messages to the master upon request. All PROFIBUS DP devices have the same
priority, and all network communication originates from the master.
A PROFIBUS master forms an "active station" on the network. PROFIBUS DP defines two
classes of masters. A class 1 master (normally a central programmable controller (PLC) or a
PC running special software) handles the normal communication or exchange of data with
the DP devices assigned to it. A class 2 master (usually a configuration device, such as a
laptop or programming console used for commissioning, maintenance, or diagnostics
purposes) is a special device primarily used for commissioning DP devices and for
diagnostic purposes.
PROFIBUS networks typically have one master and several DP I/O devices. (Refer to the
figure below.) The master device is configured to know what types of DP devices are
connected and at what addresses. The master initializes the network and verifies that the
DP devices on the network match the configuration. The master continuously writes output
data to the DP devices and reads input data from them.
When a PROFIBUS DP master configures a DP device successfully, it then owns that
DP device. If there is a second master device on the network, it has very limited access to
the DP devices owned by the first master.
The S7-200 SMART CPU is connected to a PROFIBUS network as a DP device with the
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module. The EM DP01 can be the communications partner of DP
V0/V1 masters. You can access the EM DP01 GSD file at Siemens Customer Support.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
In the figure below, the S7-200 SMART CPU is a DP device for an S7-1200 controller:
You can configure two PROFIBUS EMs per S7-200 SMART CPU (ST and SR models only).
The local CPU stores the PROFIBUS EM configuration data, and you set the PROFIBUS
addresses with switches on each module. This allows simple replacement of these
communications modules when necessary.
8.5.1 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module
8.5.1.1 Distributed Peripheral (DP) standard communications

PROFIBUS DP (or DP Standard) is a remote I/O communications protocol defined by the
European Standard EN 50170. Devices that adhere to this standard are compatible even
though they are manufactured by different companies. DP stands for distributed peripherals,
that is, remote I/O. PROFIBUS stands for Process Field Bus.
The EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module has implemented the DP Standard protocol as
defined for DP devices in the following communications protocol standards:
EN 50 170 (PROFIBUS) describes the bus access and transfer protocol and specifies the
properties of the data transfer medium.
EN 50 170 (DP Standard) describes the high-speed cyclic exchange of data between
DP masters and DP devices. This standard defines the procedures for configuration and
parameter assignment, explains how cyclic data exchange with distributed I/O functions,
and lists the diagnostic options which are supported.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
A DP master is configured to know the addresses, DP device types, and any parameter
assignment information that the DP devices require. The DP master is also told where to
place data that is read from the DP devices (inputs) and where to get the data to write to the
DP devices (outputs). The DP master establishes the network and then initializes its
DP devices. The DP master writes the parameter assignment information and I/O
configuration to the DP device. The DP master then reads the diagnostics from the
DP device to verify that the DP device accepted the parameters and the I/O configuration.
The DP master then begins to exchange I/O data with the DP device. Each transaction with
the DP device writes outputs and reads inputs. The data exchange mode continues
indefinitely. The DP devices can notify the DP master if there is an exception condition, and
the DP master then reads the diagnostic information from the DP device.
Once a DP master has written the parameters and I/O configuration to a DP device, and the
DP device has accepted the parameters and configuration from the DP master, the
DP master owns that DP device. The DP device only accepts write requests from the
DP master that owns it. Other DP masters on the network can read the DP device's inputs
and outputs, but they cannot write anything to the DP device.
8.5.1.2 Using the EM DP01 to connect an S7-200 SMART as a DP device

The S7-200 SMART CPU can be connected to a PROFIBUS DP network through the
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module. The EM DP01 is connected to the S7-200 SMART CPU
as an expansion module. The PROFIBUS network is connected to the EM DP01
PROFIBUS DP module through its DP communications port. This port operates at any
PROFIBUS baud rate between 9600 baud and 12 Mbaud. Refer to the
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module Technical Specifications for the baud rates supported.
As a PROFIBUS DP device, the EM DP01 accepts several different I/O configurations from
the DP master, allowing you to tailor the amount of data transferred to meet the
requirements of the application. Unlike many DP devices, the EM DP01 does not transfer
only I/O data. The EM DP01 also transfers inputs, counter values, timer values, or any other
values that you move to the variable memory in the S7-200 SMART CPU. Likewise, the
EM DP01 transfers data from the DP master to the variable memory in the S7-200 SMART
CPU. You can then move this data from variable memory to other data areas.
The DP port of the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module can be attached to a DP master on the
network and still communicate as an MPI device with other master devices such as SIMATIC
HMI devices or S7-300 / S7-400 CPUs on the same network. The following figure shows a
PROFIBUS network with an S7-200 SMART CPU SR20 and an EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP
module:
The S7-300 with CPU 315-2 is the DP master and has been configured by a SIMATIC
programming device with STEP 7 programming software. The S7-315-2 DP can read
data from or write data to the EM DP01, from 1 byte up to 244 bytes.
The S7-200 SMART CPU SR20 is a DP device owned by the CPU 315-2. The ET 200 I/O
module is also a DP device owned by the CPU 315-2.
The S7-400 CPU is attached to the PROFIBUS network and is reading data from the
CPU SR20 by means of X_GET instructions in the S7-400 CPU user program. (Other
SIMATIC CPUs can use DB1 to access V memory in the S7-200 SMART CPU.)
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
8.5.1.3 Configuring the EM DP01
Procedure
1. To use the S7-200 SMART EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module as a DP device, you must
set the station address of the DP port to match the address in the configuration of the
DP master. The station address is set with the rotary switches on the EM DP01.
2. You must power cycle the S7-200 SMART CPU after you have made a switch change in
order for the new DP device address to take effect.
Result
The DP master device exchanges data with each of its DP devices by sending information
from its output area to the DP device's output buffer. The DP device responds to the
message from the DP master by returning an input buffer which the DP master stores in an
input area.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Configuration steps
The S7-200 SMART EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module can be configured by the DP master
to accept output data from the DP master and return input data to the DP master. The output
and input data buffers reside in the variable memory (V memory) of the S7-200 SMART
CPU. When you configure the DP master, you define the byte location in V memory where
the output data buffer starts as part of the parameter assignment information for the
EM DP01. You also define the I/O configuration as the amount of output data to be written to
the S7-200 SMART CPU and amount of input data to be returned from the S7-200 SMART
CPU. The EM DP01 determines the size of the input and output buffers from the I/O
configuration. The DP master writes the parameter assignment and I/O configuration
information to the EM DP01. The EM DP01 then transfers the V memory address and input
and output data lengths to the S7-200 SMART CPU. These values are available in the
special memory (SM) of the S7-200 SMART CPU for use in the user program. Refer to the
SM status information in "User program considerations" (Page 384) for further details.
8.5.1.4 Data consistency

PROFIBUS supports three types of data consistency:
Byte: Ensures that bytes are transferred as whole units
Word: Ensures that word transfers cannot be interrupted by other processes in the CPU.
Buffer: Ensures that the entire buffer of data is transferred as a single unit, uninterrupted
by any other process in the CPU.
The EM DP01 always utilizes buffer consistency in its data handling.
S7-200 SMART CPU and EM DP01 data buffer consistency

The EM DP01 and S7-200 SMART CPU offer buffer consistency for the entire transfer:
The EM DP01 receives the outputs from the DP master in one message.
The EM DP01 transfers all outputs to the S7-200 SMART CPU in one message that
cannot be interrupted.
The S7-200 SMART CPU transfers all outputs to the V memory area at one time. The
transfer cannot be interrupted by a user interrupt.
The same consistency is true for the inputs to the DP master:
The S7-200 SMART CPU transfers all inputs from the V memory at one time. The
transfer cannot be interrupted by a user interrupt.
The S7-200 SMART CPU transfers all the inputs to the EM DP01 in one message. This
transfer cannot be interrupted.
The EM DP01 sends the inputs to the DP master in one message.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
DP master consistency
Consistency in the DP master CPU is not always buffer consistent. The DP master CPUs do
not handle the entire DP message as one indivisible object unless it is very small. The
DP master CPUs usually move the PROFIBUS data in smaller pieces. They can either move
the data to the I/O area or the user can control the movement with DPRD_DAT (Read
consistent data for DP devices) and DPWR_DAT (Write consistent data for DP devices)
instructions. Using the DPRD_DAT and DPWR_DAT instructions, you obtain the information
for one configuration "slot" at a time. Since we allow two configuration slots, it can take two
DPRD_DAT instructions to obtain all of the data. Consistency is only guaranteed for each
DPRD_DAT instruction.
8.5.1.5 Supported configurations

The following table lists the configurations that are supported by the S7-200 SMART
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module:
Table 8- 2 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP configuration options
Configuration Inputs to master Outputs from master Data consistency

1 Universal module Buffer consistency 1
2 4 bytes 4 bytes
3 8 bytes 8 bytes
4 16 bytes 16 bytes
5 32 bytes 32 bytes
6 64 bytes 64 bytes
7 122 bytes 122 bytes
8 128 bytes 128 bytes
1 All EM DP01 configurations are buffer consistent.
We can mix and match any two of these configurations in an EM DP01 configuration. Here
are two examples:
A configuration of 32 bytes input and output plus a configuration of 8 bytes input and
output yields a total of 40 input bytes and 40 output bytes.
A configuration of 122 bytes input and output plus a configuration of 122 bytes input and
output yields a total of 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes.
The EM DP01 allows a maximum of 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes. If you use two
configurations for the EM DP01, all of the input data is contiguous, and all of the output data
is contiguous. Refer to "Example of V memory and I/O address area" (Page 382) for further
information.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
8.5.1.6 Installing the EM DP01 GSD file

A PROFIBUS GSD file describes the DP device and its capabilities. The programmer uses
the GSD file to configure the DP master.
To install the EM DP01 GSD file, follow these steps:
1. Start the TIA Portal software.
2. Create a new project.
3. In the project view, locate the menu bar and select: Options > Manage general station
description files (GSD)
4. In the Source path, using the dropdown button, locate the EM DP01 GSD file that you
have previously loaded on your computer.
5. Select the check box for the GSD file line.
6. Click the Install button:
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
7. This action installs the EM DP01 GSD file in the Hardware catalog as shown in the
following figure:
8. Insert a CPU 315-2 DP, for example, as the DP master.

9. Insert the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module.
10.Create a PROFIBUS network between the DP master and device as shown in the figure
above.
8.5.1.7 Configuring the EM DP01 I/O

You can configure the EM DP01 I/O by using pre-configured or universal module I/O
configuration selections. The EM DP01 configuration allows for two slots so that you can
have more than 128 bytes of data transferred between the DP master and the
S7-200 SMART CPU. This makes it possible for you to configure the maximum of 244 bytes
that PROFIBUS allows. Two possible I/O configuration combinations are shown in the
following examples.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
32 Bytes In/Out and 8 Bytes In/Out configuration

In this example, slot one contains the "32 Bytes In/Out" pre-configured I/O selection, and slot
two contains the "8 Bytes In/Out" pre-configured I/O selection.
In the "Properties"", "General" tab area navigation, click on "Device-specific parameters" to

display the "I/O Offset in the V memory" field. Here, you can assign the starting address of
the section of V memory reserved for this operation.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Universal module configuration

In this example, slots one and two contain the "Universal module" I/O selection, and you can
configure these two slots with the number of inputs and outputs your application requires (up
to a maximum of 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes).
In the "Properties", "General" tab area navigation, click on "I/O addresses" to display the
input/output address configuration fields. In the "Input/output type:" field, you must make one
of the following selections for the universal module in this slot:
Input
Output
Input/output
Then, you can configure the Input and/or output address ranges for your application.
Note
"Empty slot" is the default selection for the "Input/output type:" field. You must change
"Empty slot" to 'Input", "Output", or "Input/output" in order to configure your I/O addresses.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Note
In the examples above, the CPU 315-2 DP is the configured DP master. Depending on the
master CPU type, the EM DP01 "Properties" can appear slightly different than those shown
here.
8.5.1.8 Example of V memory and I/O address area

The following figure shows an example of the V memory in the S7-200 SMART CPU and the
I/O address area of an S7-300 PROFIBUS DP master:
In this example, the DP master has defined an I/O configuration consisting of two slots and a
V memory offset of 1000. The example configures the first slot as 32 bytes in and out and
the second slot as 8 bytes in and out. The output and input buffers in the S7-200 SMART
CPU are both 40 bytes (32 + 8). The output data (from the DP master) buffer starts at
V1000; the input data (to the DP master) buffer immediately follows the output buffer and
begins at V1040.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
All of the output data (all 40 bytes) is treated as one buffer consistent block of data in the
EM DP01 and SMART CPU. The output data in the S7-300 is treated with different
consistencies depending on whether the user utilizes the I and Q areas or whether they use
the DPRD_DAT (Read consistent data for DP devices) and DPWR_DAT (Write consistent
data for DP devices) instructions. Even using the DPRD_DAT and DPWR_DAT instructions,
the data is only consistent within the 32 byte and 8 bytes blocks. The entire 40 bytes is
consistent only if the user manages this by not reading or writing the data in user interrupt
blocks.
Note
If you are working with a data unit (consistent data) greater than four bytes, you can use the
DPRD_DAT instruction to read the inputs of the DP device and the DPWR_DAT instruction
to address the outputs of the DP device. For further information, refer to "Data consistency"
and the System Software for S7-300 and S7-400 System and Standard Functions Reference
Manual.
You can configure the location of the input and output buffers to be anywhere in the
V memory of the S7-200 SMART CPU. The default address for the input and output buffers
is VB0. The location of the input and output buffers is part of the parameter assignment
information that the DP master writes to the S7-200 SMART CPU. You configure the
DP master to recognize its DP devices and to write the required parameters and I/O
configuration to each of its DP devices.
You configure SIMATIC S7 DP masters using STEP 7 programming software. For detailed
information about using this configuration and programming software package, refer to the
manuals for these devices. For detailed information about the PROFIBUS network and its
components, refer to the ET 200 Distributed I/O System Manual.
See also
Data consistency (Page 376)
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
8.5.1.9 User program considerations

Once the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module has been successfully configured by a
DP master, the EM DP01 and the DP master enter data exchange mode. In data exchange
mode, the DP master writes output data to the EM DP01, and the EM DP01 then responds
with the most recent S7-200 SMART CPU input data. The EM DP01 continuously updates its
inputs from the S7-200 SMART CPU in order to provide the most recent input data to the
DP master. The EM DP01 then transfers the output data to the S7-200 SMART CPU. The
output data from the DP master is placed into V memory (the output buffer) starting at the
address that the DP master supplied during initialization. The input data to the DP master is
taken from the V memory locations (the input buffer) immediately following the output data.
The output data from the DP master must be moved by the user program in the
S7-200 SMART CPU from the output buffer to the data areas where it is to be used.
Likewise, the input data to the DP master must be moved from the various data areas to the
input buffer for transfer to the master.
Output data from the DP master is placed into V memory immediately prior to the user
program portion of the scan. Input data (to the DP master) is copied from V memory to the
EM DP01 for transfer to the DP master after the user program portion of the scan.
Input data to the DP master is transmitted to the master on the EM DP01's next data
exchange with the DP master.
Status information
There are 50 bytes of special memory (SM) allocated to each expansion module based upon
its physical position. The module updates the SM locations corresponding to the modules'
relative position to the CPU (with respect to other modules). If it is the first module, it updates
SMB1400 through SMB1449. If it is the second module, it updates SMB1450 through
SMB1499, and so on. Refer to the table below:
Table 8- 3 Special memory bytes SMB1400 to SMB1699
Special memory bytes SMB1400 to SMB1699

Intelligent Intelligent Intelligent Intelligent Intelligent Intelligent
module in module in module in module in module in module in
slot 0 slot 1 slot 2 slot 3 slot 4 slot 5
SMB1400 to SMB1450 to SMB1500 to SMB1550 to SMB1600 to SMB1650 to
SMB1449 SMB1499 SMB1549 SMB1599 SMB1649 SMB1699
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
These SM locations show default values if DP communications have not been established
with a DP master. After a DP master has written parameters and I/O configuration to the
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module, these SM locations show the configuration set by the DP
master. You should check the protocol status byte (for example SMB1424 for slot 0) to be
sure that the EM DP01 is currently in data exchange mode with the DP master before using
the information in the SM locations shown in the following table or data in the V memory
buffer.
Note
You cannot configure the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP I/O buffer sizes or buffer location by
writing to SM memory locations. Only the DP master can configure the EM DP01
PROFIBUS DP module for DP operation.
Table 8- 4 Special memory bytes for the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP
Intelligent ... Intelligent Description

module in module in
slot 0 slot 5
SMB1400 ... SMB1650 DP device's station address as set by address switches (0 - 99
decimal)
SMB1401 ... SMB1651 Address of the DP device's master (0 to 126) (displays 255 if no DP
master is attached)
SMW1402 ... SMW1652 V memory address of the output buffer as an offset from VB (for
example, 1000 means VB1000).
SMB1404 ... SMB1654 Number of bytes of output data
SMB1405 ... SMB1655 Number of bytes of input data
SMB1406 ... SMB1656 DP standard protocol status byte
Num- Description
ber
0 DP communications not initiated since power on
1 Configuration/parameterization error detected
2 Currently in data exchange mode
3 Dropped out of data exchange mode
SMB1407 to ... SMB1657 to Reserved - cleared on power up
SMB1449 SMB1699
Note: SM locations are updated each time the DP device accepts configuration / parameterization
information. These locations are updated even if a configuration/parameterization error is detected.
The locations are cleared on each power up.
Note: This information is also available in the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART "PLC information" for the
EM DP01.
Note: The user program can access this information and use it to process the EM DP01 data.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
8.5.1.10 LED status indicators for the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP

The EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module has four status LEDs on the front panel to indicate the
operational state of the DP port:
DIAG LED:
Dual color (green / red) LED indicates the operating state and fault status of the
EM DP01
Flashing red: Upon startup, until the EM DP01 is logged in by the CPU, or if there is a
fault in the EM DP01
Flashing green: While the EM DP01 is waiting on configuration and parameterization
from the S7-200 SMART CPU (immediately after login), or during a firmware update
ON green: No fault is present and the EM DP01 is configured
POWER LED:
ON green: If user 24 V DC is applied
OFF: No user 24 V DC
DP ERROR LED:
Flashing red: If there is an error in the I/O configuration or parameter information that
the DP master writes to the EM DP01
ON red: If DP communications are interrupted
OFF: No error or data exchange has never been established
DX MODE LED:
OFF: After the S7-200 SMART CPU is turned ON as long as DP communications are
not attempted, or if DP communications are interrupted
ON green: Once DP communications have been successfully initiated (the EM DP01
has entered Data Exchange Mode with the DP master); remains on until the EM DP01
exits Data Exchange Mode
Note
If DP communications are lost, which forces the EM DP01 to exit Data Exchange Mode, the
DX MODE LED turns OFF and the DP ERROR LED turns red. This condition persists until
the S7-200 SMART CPU is powered off or Data Exchange Mode is resumed.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
The following table summarizes the status indications signified by the EM DP01 status LEDs:
Table 8- 5 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module status LEDs
LED Off Red Flashing red Flashing green Green

DIAG - Internal module Upon startup, While the No fault is
failure until the EM DP01 is present;
EM DP01 is waiting on con- EM DP01 is
logged in by the figuration and configured
CPU, or if there parameterization
is a fault in the from the
EM DP01 S7200 SMART
CPU, or during a
firmware update
POWER No 24 V DC - - 24 V DC user
user power power good
DP No error DP communica- Parameteriza- -
ERROR tions interrupt- tion / configura-
ed; Data tion error (from
Exchange Mode the DP Master)
stopped
DX MODE Data Exchange - - Data Exchange
Mode inactive, Mode active
or DP commu-
nications inter-
rupted
8.5.1.11 Using HMIs and S7-CPUs with the EM DP01

The EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module can be used as a communications interface to MPI
masters, whether or not it is being used as a PROFIBUS DP device. The EM DP01 can
provide a connection from an S7-300/400 to the S7-200 SMART using the X_GET/X_PUT
functions of the S7-300/400. HMI devices such as the SMART HMI or the TD 400 can be
used to communicate with the S7-200 SMART through the EM DP01.
Some devices allow you to select V memory as the memory area in the S7-200 SMART
CPU. If V memory is not an option, you should configure the client (CPU or HMI device) to
read and write to DB1 to access the V memory in the S7-200 SMART CPU. For example, a
X_GET would need the remote address set to P#DB1.DBX100.0 BYTE 20 to read 20 bytes
of V memory starting at VB100.
Note
An S7-1200 PROFIBUS DP master cannot access an S7-200 SMART CPU using GET/PUT
functions. The S7-1200 DP master can still access the S7-200 SMART CPU using
PROFIBUS Data Exchange Mode.
When the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module is used for MPI communications, the address
parameter of the XGET/XPUT functions must be set to the address of the EM DP01
(address switches). MPI messages sent to the EM DP01 are passed on to the
S7-200 SMART CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Messages from MPI and HMI devices are (serviced during)/(subject to) the communication
background time in the S7-200 SMART CPU. The communication background time can be
increased to provide faster responses to the MPI and HMI requests.
A maximum of six connections (six devices) in addition to the DP master can be connected
to the EM DP01. The EM DP01 reserves one of the six connections for an HMI device. In
order for the EM DP01 to communicate with multiple masters, all masters must be operating
at the same baud rate. Refer to the figure below for one possible network configuration:
8.5.1.12 Device database file: GSD

Different PROFIBUS devices have different performance characteristics. These
characteristics differ with respect to functionality (for example, the number of I/O signals and
diagnostic messages) or bus parameters, such as transmission speed and time monitoring.
These parameters vary for each device type and vendor and are usually documented in a
technical manual. To help you achieve a simple configuration of PROFIBUS, the
performance characteristics of a particular device are specified in an electronic data sheet
called a device database file, or GSD file. Configuration tools based upon GSD files allow
simple integration of devices from different vendors in a single network.
The GSD device database file provides a comprehensive description of the characteristics of
a device in a precisely defined format. These GSD files are prepared by the vendor for each
type of device and made available to the PROFIBUS user. The GSD file allows the
configuration system to read in the characteristics of a PROFIBUS device and use this
information when configuring the network.
If your version of software does not include a configuration file for the EM DP01, you can
access the latest GSD file (SIEM81C7.GSD) from Siemens Customer Support.
If you are using a non-Siemens master device, refer to the documentation provided by the
manufacturer on how to configure the master device by using the GSD file.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
GSD file for the EM DP01 PROFIBUS-DP

MLFB: 6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0
Table 8- 6 General parameters
Parameters Values
#Profibus_DP
GSD_Revision =5
Vendor_Name = "Siemens"
Model_Name = "EM DP01 PROFIBUS-DP"
Revision = "V01.00.00"
Ident_Number = 0x81C7
Protocol_Ident =0
Station_Type =0
FMS_supp =0
Hardware_Release =1
Software_Release = "V01.00.00"
;
9.6_supp =1
19.2_supp =1
45.45_supp =1
93.75_supp =1
187.5_supp =1
500_supp =1
1.5M_supp =1
3M_supp =1
6M_supp =1
12M_supp =1
;
MaxTsdr_9.6 = 40
MaxTsdr_19.2 = 40
MaxTsdr_45.45 = 40
MaxTsdr_93.75 = 40
MaxTsdr_187.5 = 40
MaxTsdr_500 = 40
MaxTsdr_1.5M = 40
MaxTsdr_3M = 50
MaxTsdr_6M = 100
MaxTsdr_12M = 200
;
Redundancy =0
Repeater_Ctrl_Sig =2
24V_Pins =2
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Parameters Values
Implementation_Type = "DPC31"
Bitmap_Device = "EM_DP01N"
Table 8- 7 Slave-Specification
Parameters Values
OrderNumber = "6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0"
Periphery = "SIMATIC S7"
Info_Text = "PROFIBUS module for SMART CPU family."
Slave_Family = 10@TdF@SIMATIC
Freeze_Mode_supp =1
Sync_Mode_supp =1
Set_Slave_Add_Supp =0
Auto_Baud_supp =1
Min_Slave_Intervall =1
Fail_Safe =0
;
Modular_Station =1
Max_Module =2
Modul_Offset =0
;
Max_Input_len = 244
Max_Output_len = 244
Max_Data_len = 488
Max_Diag_Data_Len =6
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Table 8- 8 DPV1 support
Parameters Values
DPV1_Slave =1
C1_Read_Write_supp =1
C2_Read_Write_supp =1
C1_Max_Data_Len = 240
C2_Max_Data_Len = 240
C1_Response_Timeout = 100
C2_Response_Timeout = 100
C1_Read_Write_required =0
C2_Read_Write_required =0
C2_Max_Count_Channels =6
Max_Initiate_PDU_Length = 64
Ident_Maintenance_supp =1
DPV1_Data_Types =0
WD_Base_1ms_supp =0
Check_Cfg_Mode =0
Publisher_supp =0
Table 8- 9 UserPrmData-Definition
Parameters Values
ExtUserPrmData = 1 "I/O Offset in the V-memory"
Unsigned16 0 0-20479
EndExtUserPrmData
Table 8- 10 UserPrmData: Length and Preset
Parameters Values
Max_User_Prm_Data_Len =5
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Const (0) = 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Ref (3) =1
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Table 8- 11 Module Definition List
Parameters Values
Module = " 4 Bytes In/Out" 0xF1
20
EndModule
21
EndModule
22
EndModule
Module = " 32 Bytes In/Out" 0xFF
23
EndModule
Module = " 64 Bytes In/Out" 0xC0, 0xDF, 0xDF
24
EndModule
Module = "122 Bytes In/Out" 0xC0, 0xFC, 0xFC
25
EndModule
Module = "128 Bytes In/Out" 0xC0, 0xFF, 0xFF
26
EndModule
8.5.1.13 PROFIBUS DP communications to a CPU example program

An example program for the PROFIBUS DP module in slot 0 for a CPU that uses the DP port
information in SM memory is shown below. The program determines the location of the DP
buffers from SMW1402 and the sizes of the buffers from SMB1404 and SMB1405. This
information is used to copy the data in the DP output buffer to the process image output
register of the CPU. Similarly, the data in the process image input register of the CPU are
copied into the V memory input buffer.
In the following example program for a DP module in position 0, the DP configuration data in
the SM memory area provides the configuration of the DP device. The program uses the
following data:
SMB1406 DP Status
SMB1401 Master Address
SMW1402 V memory offset of outputs
SMB1404 Number of bytes of output data
SMB1405 Number of bytes of input data
VD1000 Output Data Pointer
VD1004 Input Data Pointer
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS
Table 8- 12 Example: Configuring DP communications to an S7-200 SMART CPU
LAD/FBD Description STL

Network 1: Calculate the Output LDB= SMB224, 2
data pointer. If in data MOVD &VB0, VD1000
exchange mode:
ITD SMW226, AC0
1. Output buffer is an
+D AC0, VD1000
offset from VB0.
2. Convert V memory
offset to double in-
teger.
3. Add to VB0 ad-
dress to get output
data pointer.
Network 2: Calculate the Input LDB= SMB224, 2

data pointer. If in data MOVD VD1000,
exchange mode: VD1004
1. Copy the output BTI SMB228, AC0
data pointer.
ITD AC0, AC0
2. Get the number of
+D AC0, VD1004
output bytes.
3. Add to output data
pointer to get start-
ing input data
pointer.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.5 PROFIBUS

Network 3: Transfer Master out- LDB= SMB224, 2
puts to CPU outputs. BMB *VD1000, QB0,
Copy CPU inputs to VB1008
the Master inputs. If in
BMB IB0, *VD1004,
data exchange mode:
VB1009
1. Copy Master out-
puts to CPU out-
puts.
2. Copy CPU inputs
to Master inputs.
8.5.1.14 Reference to the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module technical specifications

For further information on the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module, refer to the
"EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module" (Page 648) technical specifications.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6 RS485
An RS485 network is a differential (multi-point) network and can have up to 126 addressable
nodes per network and up to 32 devices per segment. Repeaters are used to segment the
network. Repeaters are not addressable nodes; therefore, they are not included in the count
of addressable nodes, but are counted in the devices per segment.
RS485 allows for data transfer at a high speed (from 100 m at 12 Mbit/s to 1 km at 187.5
Kbit/s).
RS485 can operate with the PPI protocol and Freeport:
PPI protocol: Can operate on RS485 or RS232 (half-duplex). Possible connections
include:
PPI protocol devices
RS485 HMI displays
Freeport: Can operate on RS485 or RS232 (half-duplex). Possible connections include:
RS485-compatible devices (for example, a bar code scanner)
Devices that have RS485 interfaces (for example, a control system)
Third-party devices using Freeport
Modems
8.6.1 PPI protocol
Definition
PPI is a master-slave protocol: the master devices send requests to the slave devices, and
the slave devices respond. See the following figure. Slave devices do not initiate messages,
but wait until a master sends them a request or polls them for a response.
Masters communicate to slaves by means of a shared connection which is managed by the

PPI protocol. PPI does not limit the number of masters that can communicate with any one
slave; however, you cannot install more than 32 masters on the network.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
PPI protocol and S7-200 SMART CPUs

PPI Advanced allows network devices to establish a logical connection between the devices.
With PPI Advanced, there are a limited number of connections supplied by each device. See
the following table for the number of connections supported by the S7-200 SMART CPU.
All S7-200 SMART CPUs support both PPI and PPI Advanced protocols.
Table 8- 13 Number of connections for the S7-200 SMART CPU
Module Baud rate Connections

RS485 port 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, or 187.5 kbaud 4
RS485/RS232 signal board 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, or 187.5 kbaud 4
8.6.2 Baud rate and network address
8.6.2.1 Definition of baud rate and network address
Baud rate
The speed that data is transmitted across the network is the baud rate, which is typically
measured in units of kilobaud (kbaud) or megabaud (Mbaud). The baud rate measures how
much data can be transmitted within a given amount of time. For example, a baud rate of
19.2 kbaud describes a transmission rate of 19,200 bits per second.
Every device that communicates over a given network must be configured to transmit data at
the same baud rate. Therefore, the fastest baud rate for the network is determined by the
slowest device connected to the network.
The following table lists the baud rates supported by the S7-200 SMART CPU.
Table 8- 14 Baud rate supported by the S7-200 SMART CPU
Network Baud rate

PPI protocol 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, and 187.5 kbaud only
Freeport Mode 1200 baud to 115.2 kbaud
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Network address
The network address is a unique number that you assign to each device on the network. The
unique network address ensures that the data is transferred to or retrieved from the correct
device. The S7-200 SMART CPU supports network addresses from 0 to 126. The following
table lists the default (factory) settings for the S7-200 SMART devices.
Table 8- 15 Default addresses for S7-200 SMART devices
S7-200 SMART device Default address

HMI 1
S7-200 SMART CPU 2
8.6.2.2 Setting the baud rate and network address for the S7-200 SMART CPU
Introduction
You must configure the RS485 port network address and baud rate for the
S7-200 SMART CPU so that the CPU can communicate with SIMATIC HMIs over the RS485
network (for example, the TD400C).
The RS485 port network address must be unique from the network addresses of other
devices on the RS485 network, and the RS485 port baud rate must be the same as the other
devices on the RS485 network. The default RS485 port network address is 2, and the default
RS485 port baud rate for each CPU port is 9.6 kbaud.
The system block of the CPU stores the RS485 port network address and baud rate. After
you select the parameters for the CPU, you must download the system block to the
S7-200 SMART CPU.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Procedure
To access the "System Block" dialog, click one of the following:
System block button in the navigation bar
System block in the project tree
System block in the Component drop-down list in the Win-

dows area of the View menu ribbon strip
After you select the "System Block" dialog, you perform the following steps:
1. Select the network address and baud rate for the RS485 port.
2. Download the system block to the CPU.
Note
Freeport protocol baud rates are set using SM memory.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6.3 Sample RS485 network configurations
8.6.3.1 Single-master PPI networks
Introduction
The following network configurations are possible using only S7-200 SMART devices:
Single-master PPI networks
Multi-master and multi-slave PPI networks
Complex PPI networks
Single-master PPI networks

In the sample network in the figure below, a human-machine interface (HMI) device (for
example, a TD400C, TP, or KP) is the network master:
In the sample network, the CPU is a slave that responds to requests from the master.
8.6.3.2 Multi-master and multi-slave PPI networks

The following figure shows a sample network of multiple masters with one slave. The HMI
devices share the network.
The HMI devices are masters and must have separate network addresses. The
S7-200 SMART CPU is a slave.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
The following figure shows a PPI network with multiple masters communicating with multiple
slaves. In this example, the HMI can request data from any CPU slave.
All devices (masters and slaves) have different network addresses. The
S7-200 SMART CPUs are slaves.
8.6.4 Building your network
8.6.4.1 General guidelines

Always install appropriate surge suppression devices for any wiring that could be subject to
lightning surges.
Avoid placing low-voltage signal wires and communication cables in the same wire tray with
AC wires and high-energy, rapidly switched DC wires. Always route wires in pairs, with the
neutral or common wire paired with the hot or signal-carrying wire.
The communication port of the S7-200 SMART CPU is not isolated. Consider using an
RS485 repeater to provide isolation for your network.
NOTICE
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted currents
to flow through the interconnecting cable.
These unwanted currents can cause communications errors or can damage equipment.
Be sure all equipment that you are about to connect with a communications cable either
shares a common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6.4.2 Determining the distances, transmission rates, and cable lengths for your network
As shown in the following table, the maximum length of a network segment is determined by
two factors: isolation (using an RS485 repeater) and baud rate.
Isolation is required when you connect devices at different ground potentials. Different
ground potentials can exist when grounds are physically separated by a long distance. Even
over short distances, load currents of heavy machinery can cause a difference in ground
potential.
Table 8- 16 Maximum length for a network cable
Baud rate Non-isolated CPU port1 CPU port with repeater

9.6 kbaud to 187.5 kbaud 50 m 1,000 m
500 kbaud Not supported 400 m
1 Mbaud to 1.5 Mbaud Not supported 200 m
3 Mbaud to 12 Mbaud Not supported 100 m
1The maximum distance allowed without using an isolator or repeater is 50 m. You measure this
distance from the first node to the last node in the segment.
8.6.4.3 Repeaters on the network

An RS485 repeater provides bias and termination for the network segment. You can use a
repeater for the following purposes:
To increase the length of a network
Adding a repeater to your network allows you to extend the network another 50 m. If you
connect two repeaters with no other nodes in between, (as shown in the figure below),
you can extend the network to the maximum cable length for the baud rate. You can use
up to 9 repeaters in series on a network, but the total length of the network must not
exceed 9600 m.
To add devices to a network
Each segment can have a maximum of 32 devices connected up to 50 m at 9600 baud.
Using a repeater allows you to add another segment (32 devices) to the network.
To electrically isolate different network segments
Isolating the network improves the quality of the transmission by separating the network
segments which may be at different ground potentials.
A repeater on your network counts as one of the nodes on a segment, even though it is not
assigned a network address. The following is a sample network with repeaters.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6.4.4 Selection of the network cable

S7-200 SMART CPU networks use the RS485 standard on twisted pair cables. The following
table lists the specifications for the network cable. You can connect up to 32 devices on a
network segment.
Specifications Description
Cable type Shielded, twisted pair
Loop resistance 115 /km
Effective capacitance 30 pF/m
Nominal impedance Approximately 135 to 160
(frequency = 3MHz to 20 MHz)
Attenuation 0.9 dB/100 m (frequency=200 kHz)
Cross-sectional core area 0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
Cable diameter 8 mm +0.5 mm
8.6.4.5 Connector pin assignments

The RS485 communication port on the S7-200 SMART CPUs is RS485-compatible on a
nine-pin subminiature D connector, in accordance with the PROFIBUS standard as defined
in the European Standard EN 50170. The following table shows the connector that provides
the physical connection for the communication port and describes the communication port
pin assignments.
Table 8- 17 Pin assignments for the S7-200 SMART CPU integrated RS485 port (Port 0)
Pin number Connector Signal Integrated RS485 port (Port 0)

1 Shield Chassis ground
2 24 V Return Logic common
3 RS485 Signal RS485 Signal B
B
4 Request-to- RTS (TTL)
Send
5 5 V Return Logic common
6 +5 V +5 V, 100 series resistor
7 +24 V +24 V
8 RS485 Signal RS485 Signal A
A
9 Not applicable 10-bit protocol select (input)
Connector Shield Chassis ground
shell
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
The CM01 signal board is RS485-compatible. The following table shows the connector that
provides the physical connection for the signal board and describes the pin assignments.
Table 8- 18 Pin assignments for the S7-200 SMART CM01 Signal Board (SB) port (Port 1)
Pin number Connector Signal CM01 Signal Board (SB) port (Port 1)
1 Ground Chassis ground
2 Tx/B RS232-Tx/RS485-B
3 Request-to- RTS (TTL)
Send
4 M-ground Logic common
5 Rx/A RS232-Rx/RS485-A
6 +5 V DC +5 V, 100 series resistor
8.6.4.6 Biasing and terminating the network cable

Siemens provides two types of network connectors that you can use to easily connect
multiple devices to a network:
Standard network connector
Connector that includes a port which allows you to connect an HMI device to the network
without disturbing any existing network connections
The programming port connector passes all signals (including the power pins) from the
S7-200 SMART CPU through to the programming port, which is especially useful for
connecting devices that draw power from the S7-200 SMART CPU (such as a TD 400C).
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Both connectors have two sets of terminal screws to allow you to attach the incoming and
outgoing network cables. Both connectors also have switches to bias and terminate the
network selectively. The following shows typical biasing and termination for the cable
connectors.
Table 8- 19 Biasing and termination for cable connectors
Cable must be terminated and biased at both ends. Bare shielding: Approximately 12 mm (1/2 in)
must contact the metal guides of all locations.
Switch position = On: Terminated and biased

Switch position = Off: No termination or bias
Switch position = On: Terminated and biased
Table 8- 20 Termination and bias switch positions
Switch position = On: Termination and biased Switch position = Off: No termination or bias
Pin number
Network connector
Cable shield
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6.4.7 Biasing and terminating the CM01 signal board

You can use the CM01 signal board to easily connect multiple devices to a network.
The signal board passes all signals (including the power pins) from the S7-200 SMART CPU
through to the programming port, which is especially useful for connecting devices that draw
power from the S7-200 SMART CPU (such as a TD 400C).
Terminal name
Terminal block
Cable shield
8.6.4.8 Using HMI devices on your RS485 network
Introduction
The S7-200 SMART CPU supports many types of RS485 HMI devices from Siemens and
also from other manufacturers. While some of these HMI devices (such as the TD400C) do
not allow you to select the communication protocol used by the device, other devices (such
as the KP and TP product lines) allow you to select the communication protocol for that
device.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Guidelines
If your HMI device allows you to select the communication protocol, consider the following
guidelines:
For an HMI device connected to the communication port of the CPU, with no other
devices on the network, select the PPI protocol for the HMI device.
For an HMI device connected to the communication port of the CPU which has been
configured as a master, select the PPI protocol for the HMI device. Advanced PPI is
optimal.
For more information about how to configure the HMI device, refer to the specific manual for
your device (see the following table). These manuals are included in the
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART documentation CD.
Table 8- 21 RS485 HMI devices supported by the S7-200 SMART CPU
HMI Configuration software

TD400C Text Display wizard (part of STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART)
KTP600 DP WinCC flexible
KTP1000 DP WinCC flexible
8.6.5 Freeport mode
8.6.5.1 Creating user-defined protocols with Freeport mode
Introduction
Freeport mode allows your program to control the communication port of the
S7-200 SMART CPU. You can use Freeport mode to implement user-defined
communication protocols to communicate with many types of intelligent devices. Freeport
mode supports both ASCII and binary protocols.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Using Freeport mode

To enable Freeport mode, you use special memory bytes SMB30 (for the Integrated RS485
port (Port 0)) and SMB130 (for the CM01 Signal Board (SB) port (Port 1)). Your program
uses the following to control the operation of the communication port:
Transmit instruction (XMT) and the transmit interrupt:
The Transmit instruction allows the S7-200 SMART CPU to transmit up to 255 characters
from the COM port. The transmit interrupt notifies your program in the CPU when the
transmission has been completed.
Receive character interrupt:
The receive character interrupt notifies the user program that a character has been
received on the COM port. Your program can then act on that character, based on the
protocol being implemented.
Receive instruction (RCV):
The Receive instruction receives the entire message from the COM port and then
generates an interrupt for your program when the message has been completely
received. You use the SM memory of the CPU to configure the Receive instruction for
starting and stopping the receiving of messages, based on defined conditions. The
Receive instruction allows your program to start or stop a message based on specific
characters or time intervals. Most protocols can be implemented with the Receive
instruction, instead of using the more cumbersome receive-character interrupt method.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
Freeport mode is active only when the CPU is in RUN mode. Setting the CPU to STOP
mode halts all Freeport communication, and the communication port then reverts to the PPI
protocol with the settings which were configured in the system block of the CPU.
Table 8- 22 Using Freeport mode
Network configuration Description

Using Freeport over an Example: Using an S7-200 SMART CPU with an
RS232 connection electronic scale that has an RS232 port.
Connect the two devices using one of the follow-
ing methods:
RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable connects the
RS232 port on the scale to the RS485 port
on the CPU. (Set the cable to PPI/Freeport
mode, switch 5 = 0.)
Using the CM01 signal board (SB) (S CPUs
only) which supports RS232 and RS485, you
can connect the RS232 device directly to the
CPU SB RS232 without using the PC/PPI
cable.
CPU uses Freeport to communicate with the
scale.
Baud rate can be from 1200 baud to
115.2 kbaud.
User program defines the protocol.
Using USS protocol Example: Using an S7-200 SMART CPU with
SIMODRIVE MicroMaster drives.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a USS
library.
The CPU is a master, and the drives are slaves.
Creating a user program Example: Connecting S7-200 SMART CPUs to a

that emulates a slave Modbus network.
device on another net-
User program in the CPU emulates a Modbus
work
slave.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a Modbus
library.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.6 RS485
8.6.5.2 Using the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable and Freeport mode with RS232 devices
Purpose
You can use the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable and the Freeport communication functions to
connect the S7-200 SMART CPU to many devices that are compatible with the RS232
standard. The cable must be set to PPI/Freeport mode (switch 5 = 0) for Freeport operation.
Switch 6 selects either Local mode (DCE) (switch 6 = 0), or Remote mode (DTE) (switch
6 = 1).
The RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable is in Transmit mode when data is transmitted from the
RS232 port to the RS485 port. The cable is in Receive mode when it is idle or is transmitting
data from the RS485 port to the RS232 port. The cable changes from Receive to Transmit
mode immediately when it detects characters on the RS232 transmit line.
The CM01 signal board (SB) (S CPUs only) supports both RS232 half-duplex and RS485.
With the CM01 signal board, you can connect an RS232 device directly to the CPU SB
RS232 port without using a PC/PPI cable.
Baud Rates and turnaround time

The RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable supports baud rates between 1200 baud and
115.2 kbaud. Use the DIP switches on the housing of the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable to
configure the cable for the correct baud rate. The following table shows the baud rates and
switch positions.
Table 8- 23 Turnaround time and settings
Baud rate Turnaround time Settings (1 = Up)

115200 0.15 ms 110
57600 0.3 ms 111
38400 0.5 ms 000
19200 1.0 ms 001
9600 2.0 ms 010
4800 4.0 ms 011
2400 7.0 ms 100
1200 14.0 ms 101
The cable switches back to Receive mode when the RS232 transmit line is in the idle state
for a period of time defined as the turnaround time of the cable. The baud rate selection of
the cable determines the turnaround time, as shown in the table.
S7-200 SMART
Communication
8.7 RS232
If you are using the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable in a system where Freeport
communications is used, the program in the S7-200 SMART CPU must comprehend the
turnaround time for the following situations:
The CPU responds to messages transmitted by the RS232 device.
After the CPU receives a request message from the RS232 device, the CPU must delay
the transmission of a response message for a period of time greater than or equal to the
turnaround time of the cable.
The RS232 device responds to messages transmitted from the CPU.
After the CPU receives a response message from the RS232 device, the CPU must delay
the transmission of the next request message for a period of time greater than or equal to
the turnaround time of the cable.
In both situations, the delay allows the RS232/PPI Multi-Master cable sufficient time to
switch from Transmit mode to Receive mode so that data can be transmitted from the RS485
port to the RS232 port.
8.7 RS232
An RS232 network is a point-to-point connection between two devices. RS232 allows for
data transfer at relatively slow speeds (up to 115.2 kbaud) and short distances (up to 50
feet).
Possible RS232 connections include the following:
Freeport
Modems
RS232-compatible devices (for example, a bar code scanner)
Devices that have RS232 interfaces (for example, a control system)
RS232 displays
S7-200 SMART
Libraries 9
9.1 Creating a user-defined library of instructions
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART allows you either to create a custom library of instructions, or to
use a library created by someone else.
Creating a library
To create a user-defined library of instructions, you create standard
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART subroutines and group them together. By grouping these
subroutines into a library, you can hide the code to prevent unwanted changes and to protect
the technology (know-how) of the author.
To create a user-defined library, perform the following tasks:
1. Write the program as a standard project and put the function to be included in the library
into subroutines.
2. Ensure that you have assigned a symbolic name to all V memory locations in the
subroutines or interrupt routines. To minimize the amount of V memory that the library
requires, use sequential V memory locations.
3. Rename the subroutines to the names that you want to appear in the instruction library.
4. Click the Create button from the Libraries area of the File menu ribbon strip to
compile and create the new library from the subroutines you selected. If the subroutine
references interrupts, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART also includes the interrupt routines in
the library.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.1 Creating a user-defined library of instructions
Adding a library to a project

Use the following procedure to add a library to a project and use the library instructions:
1. Click the Add/Remove button from the

Libraries area of the File menu ribbon strip to add a
new library.
2. Navigate to and select the specific library you wish to
add.
3. After you add the library to your project you can add
instructions from the Libraries folder of the
Instructions folder in the project tree into your
program as you would any standard instruction.
If the library routine requires any V memory,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART prompts you when you
compile the project to assign a block of memory. Click
the Memory button from the Libraries area of
the File menu ribbon strip to assign a starting address
for the V memory that the user-defined library requires.
Alternatively, you can right-click the Program Block
node in the project tree and select "Library Memory"
from the context menu.
Further information
See the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART online help library topics for library programming tips
and a user-defined library example.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2 USS library instructions
9.2.1 USS communication overview
9.2.1.1 USS protocol overview

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART instruction libraries make controlling Siemens drives easier by
including pre-configured subroutines and interrupt routines that are specifically designed for
using the USS protocol to communicate with a motor drive. You can control the physical
drive and the read/write drive parameters with the USS instructions.
Siemens designed the USS communications library for use with Siemens general purpose
drives such as the Siemens Micromaster series. Siemens does not intend for the USS
communications library to be used with special purpose drives such as the V90 servo drive.
The control interface of the V90 servo drive is different from that of a general purpose drive.
For this reason, do not use the USS communications library with the V90 servo drive.
You find these instructions in the "Libraries" folder of the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
instruction tree. When you select a USS instruction, one or more associated subroutines and
interrupts are added automatically.
The USS protocol library overview discusses the following subjects:
Requirements for using the USS protocol (Page 414)
Calculating the time required for communicating with the drive (Page 415)
Refer to "Using the USS protocol instructions (Page 416)" for a listing of USS protocol
instructions, error codes, and example programs.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.1.2 Requirements for using the USS protocol

The STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART instruction libraries provide subroutines, interrupt routines,
and instructions to support the USS protocol. The USS instructions use the following
resources in the S7-200 SMART CPU:
The USS protocol is an interrupt driven application. In the worst case, the receive
message interrupt routine requires up to 2.5 ms to execute. During this time, all other
interrupt events are queued for service after the receive message interrupt routine has
been executed. If your application cannot tolerate this worst case delay, then you may
want to consider other solutions for controlling drives.
Initializing the USS protocol dedicates an S7-200 SMART CPU port for USS
communications.
You use the USS_INIT instruction to select either USS or PPI for port 0 or port 1. (USS
refers to the USS protocol for Siemens drives.) When a port is set to use the USS
protocol for communicating with drives, you cannot use the port for any other purpose,
including communicating with an HMI. The second communications port allows
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to monitor the control program while USS protocol is running.
The USS instructions affect all of the SM locations that are associated with Freeport
communication on the assigned port.
The USS subroutines and interrupt routines are stored in your program. The USS
instructions increase the amount of memory required for your program by up to 3050
bytes. Depending on the specific USS instructions used, the support routines for these
instructions can increase the overhead for the control program by at least 2150 bytes and
up to 3050 bytes.
The variables for the USS instructions require a 400-byte block of V memory. The starting
address for this block is assigned by the user and is reserved for USS variables.
Some of the USS instructions also require a 16-byte communications buffer. As a
parameter for the instruction, you provide a starting address in V memory for this buffer. It
is recommended that a unique buffer be assigned for each instance of USS instructions.
When performing calculations, the USS instructions use accumulators AC0 to AC3. You
can also use the accumulators in your program; however, the values in the accumulators
will be changed by the USS instructions.
The USS instructions cannot be used in an interrupt routine.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.1.3 Calculating the time required for communicating with the drive
Communications with the drive are asynchronous to the S7-200 SMART CPU scan. The
CPU typically completes several scans before one drive communications transaction is
completed. The following factors help determine the amount of time required:
Number of drives present
Baud rate
Scan time of the CPU
Some drives require longer delays when using the parameter access instructions. The
amount of time required for a parameter access is dependent on the drive type and the
parameter being accessed.
After a USS_INIT instruction assigns Port 0 to use the USS Protocol (or USS_INIT_P1 for
port 1), the CPU regularly polls all active drives at the intervals shown in the following table.
You must set the time-out parameter of each drive to allow for this task:
Table 9- 1 Communications times
Baud rate Time between polls of active drives

(with no parameter access instructions active)
1200 240 ms (maximum) times the number of drives
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2 USS program instructions
9.2.2.1 Using the USS protocol instructions
Procedure
To use the USS protocol instructions in your S7-200 SMART program, follow these steps:
1. Insert the USS_INIT instruction in your program and execute the USS_INIT instruction for
one scan only. You can use the USS_INIT instruction either to initiate or to change the
USS protocol communication parameters.
When you insert the USS_INIT instruction, several hidden subroutines and interrupt
routines are automatically added to your program.
2. Place only one USS_CTRL instruction in your program for each active drive.
You can add as many USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x instructions as required, but only
one of these can be active at a time.
3. Click the Memory button from the Libraries area of the File menu ribbon strip to
assign a starting address for the V Memory that the USS library requires. Alternatively,
you can right-click the Program Block node in the project tree and select "Library
Memory" from the context menu.
4. Configure the drive parameters to match the baud rate and address used in the program.
5. Connect the communications cable between the S7-200 SMART CPU and the drives.
Ensure that all of the control equipment, such as the S7-200 SMART CPU, that is
connected to the drive be connected by a short, thick cable to the same ground or star
point as the drive.
CAUTION
Interconnecting equipment with different reference potentials can cause unwanted
currents to flow through the interconnecting cable. These unwanted currents can cause
communications errors or damage equipment.
Ensure that all equipment that is connected with a communications cable either shares
a common circuit reference or is isolated to prevent unwanted current flows.
The shield must be tied to chassis ground or pin 1 on the 9-pin connector. It is
recommended that you tie terminal 2-0V on the drive to chassis ground.
The USS protocol instructions consist of the following:

USS_INIT (Page 417)
USS_CTRL (Page 419)
USS_RPM_X (Page 422)
USS_WPM_x (Page 425)
USS protocol program examples (Page 429) and a listing of USS protocol error codes
(Page 428) are also discussed in this section.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.2 USS_INIT instruction
Table 9- 2 USS_INIT instruction

CALL USS_INIT, Mode, Baud, The USS_INIT instruction is used to enable and initialize,
Port, Active, Done, Error or to disable Siemens drive communications. Before any
other USS instruction can be used, the USS_INIT instruc-
tion must be executed without errors. The instruction
completes and the "Done" bit is set immediately, before
continuing to the next instruction.
The instruction is executed on each scan when the "EN" input is on.
Execute the USS_INIT instruction only once for each change in communications state. Use
an edge detection instruction to pulse the "EN" input on. To change the initialization
parameters, execute a new USS_INIT instruction.
Table 9- 3 Parameters for the USS_INIT instruction
Inputs/outputs Data type Operands

Mode, Port BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Baud, Active DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, Constant, AC *VD, *AC, *LD
Done BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L
Error BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Table 9- 4 USS_INIT parameter descriptions
Mode This value selects the communications protocol:
An input value of 1 assigns the port to USS protocol and enables the protocol.
An input value of 0 assigns the port to PPI and disables the USS protocol.
Baud Sets the baud rate at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200
Port Sets the physical communication port (0 = RS485 integrated in CPU, 1 = RS485 or
RS232 located on the optional CM01 signal board)
Active Indicates which drives are active. Some drives only support addresses 0 through
30.
Done Turned on when the USS_INIT instruction completes
Error This output byte contains the result of executing the instruction. The USS protocol
execution error codes (Page 428) define the error conditions that could result from
executing the instruction.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Table 9- 5 Format for the Active drive parameter
This figure shows the description and format of

the active drive input. Any drive that is marked as
"Active" is automatically polled in the background
to control the drive, collect status, and prevent
serial link time-outs in the drive.
D0 (Drive 0 active bit):
0 - drive not active
1 - drive active
D1 (Drive 1 active bit):
0 - drive not active
1 - drive active
...
Refer to the USS protocol execution error codes (Page 428) to compute the time between
status polls and the error conditions that could result from executing the instruction.
Table 9- 6 USS_INIT example program
Network 1 Network 1
LD SM0.1
CALL USS_INIT, 1, 19200, 1, 16#1, M0.0,
VB1
Refer to "Using the USS protocol instructions" (Page 416) for and a listing of USS protocol
instructions and error codes and example programs.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.3 USS_CTRL instruction
Table 9- 7 USS_CTRL instruction

CALL USS_CTRL, RUN, OFF2, OFF3, The USS_CTRL instruction is used to control an
F_ACK, DIR, Drive, Type, active Siemens drive. The USS_CTRL instruction
Speed_SP, Resp_R, Error, Status, places the selected commands in a communications
Speed, Run_EN, D_Dir, Inhibit, buffer, which is then sent to the addressed drive
Fault ("Drive" parameter), if that drive has been selected in
the "Active" parameter of the USS_INIT instruction.
Only one USS_CTRL instruction should be assigned to each drive.

Some drives report speed only as a positive value. If the speed is negative, the drive reports
the speed as positive, but reverses the "D_Dir" (direction) bit.
The "EN" bit must be on to enable the USS_CTRL instruction. This instruction should always
be enabled.
Table 9- 8 Parameters of the USS_CTRL instruction
Inputs/outputs Data types Operands

RUN, OFF 2, OFF 3, F_ACK, DIR BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L, Power Flow
Resp_R, Run_EN, D_Dir, Inhibit, Fault BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L
Drive, Type BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Status WORD VW, T, C, IW, QW, SW, MW, SMW, LW, AC, AQW, *VD, *AC,
*LD
Speed_SP REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Speed REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
RUN parameter
RUN (RUN/STOP) indicates whether the drive is on (1) or off (0). When the "RUN" bit is on,
the drive receives a command to start running at the specified speed and direction. In order
for the drive to run, the following must be true:
Drive must be selected as "Active" in USS_INIT.
"OFF2" and "OFF3" must be set to 0.
"Fault" and "Inhibit" must be 0.
When "RUN" is off, a command is sent to the drive to ramp the speed down until the motor
comes to a stop:
The "OFF2" bit is used to allow the drive to coast to a stop.
The "OFF3" bit is used to command the drive to stop quickly.
Resp_R parameter
The "Resp_R" (response received) bit acknowledges a response from the drive. All the
Active drives are polled for the latest drive status information. Each time the CPU receives a
response from the drive, the "Resp_R" bit is turned on for one scan and all the following
values are updated:
F_ACK Bit that acknowledges a fault in the drive. The drive clears the fault ("Fault" bit)
(fault when "F_ACK" goes from 0 to 1.
acknowledge)
DIR Bit that indicates in which direction the drive should move.
(direction)
Drive Input for the address of the drive to which the USS_CTRL command is to be sent.
(drive address) Valid addresses: 0 to 31
Type Input that selects the type of drive
(drive type)
Speed_SP Drive speed as a percentage of full speed:
(speed setpoint)
Negative values of "Speed_SP" cause the drive to reverse its direction of rota-
tion.
Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
Error Byte that contains the result of the latest communications request to the drive. The
USS protocol execution error codes (Page 428) define the error conditions that
could result from executing the instruction.
Status Raw value of the status word returned by the drive. The figures below show the
status bits for standard status word and main feedback.
Speed Drive speed as a percentage of full speed. Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
Run_EN Indicates the drive condition:
(RUN enable)
Running (1)
Stopped (0)
D_Dir Indicates the drive's direction of rotation
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Inhibit Indicates the state of the "Inhibit" bit on the drive:
0: not inhibited
1: inhibited
To clear the "Inhibit" bit, the following bits must be OFF:
"Fault"
"RUN"
"OFF2"
"OFF3"
Fault Indicates the state of the "Fault" bit:
0: no fault
1: fault
The drive displays the fault code. (Refer to the manual for your drive). To clear the
"Fault" bit, correct the cause of the fault and turn on the "F_ACK" bit.
Table 9- 9 USS_CTRL example program
To display in LAD or FBD:

Network 1 // Control box for drive 0
LD SM0.0
= L60.0
LD M10.0
= L63.7
LD M10.1
= L63.6
LD M10.2
= L63.5
LD M10.3
= L63.4
LD M10.4
= L63.3
LD L60.0
CALL USS_CTRL, L63.7, L63.6, L63.5, L63.4,
L63.3, 0, 1, 100.0, M1.0, VB2, VW4, VD6,
M0.1, M0.2, M0.3, M0.4
To display in STL only:
Network 1 // Control box for drive 0
LD SM0.0
CALL USS_CTRL, M10.0, M10.1, M10.2, M10.3,
M10.4, 0, 1, 100.0, M1.0, VB2, VW4, VD6,
M0.1, M0.2, M0.3, M0.4
Refer to "Using the USS protocol instructions" (Page 416) for a listing of USS protocol
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.4 USS_RPM_x instruction
Table 9- 10 USS_RPM_x instructions

CALL USS_RPM_W, XMIT_REQ, Drive, There are three read instructions for the USS protocol:
Param, Index, DB_Ptr, Done, Er-
USS_RPM_W instruction reads an unsigned word
ror, Value
parameter.
CALL USS_RPM_D, XMIT_REQ, Drive,
Param, Index, DB_Ptr, Done, Er- USS_RPM_D instruction reads an unsigned double
ror, Value word parameter.
CALL USS_RPM_R, XMIT_REQ, Drive, USS_RPM_R instruction reads a floating-point
Param, Index, DB_Ptr, Done, Er- parameter.
ror, Value Only one read (USS_RPM_x) or write
(USS_WPM_x) instruction can be active at a time.
The USS_RPM_x transactions complete when the drive acknowledges receipt of the
command or when an error condition is posted. The logic scan continues to execute while
this process awaits a response.
Table 9- 11 Valid operands for the USS_RPM_x instructions

XMT_REQ BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L, Power Flow conditioned by a rising edge detection
element
Drive BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Param, Index WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, T, C, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
DB_Ptr DWORD &VB
Value WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, T, C, AC, AQW, *VD, *AC, *LD
DWORD, REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, *VD, *AC, *LD
Error BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC. *VD, *AC, *LD
The "EN" bit must be on to enable transmission of a request, and should remain on until the
"Done" bit is set, signaling completion of the process. For example, a USS_RPM_x request
is transmitted to the drive on each scan when the "XMT_REQ" input is on. Therefore, the
"XMT_REQ" input should be pulsed on through an edge detection element which causes
one request to be transmitted for each positive transition of the "EN" input.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Table 9- 12 USS_RPM_x parameter descriptions
XMT_REQ When ON, a USS_RPM_x request is transmitted to the drive on every scan.
(transmit re-
quest)
Drive Address of the drive to which the USS_RPM_x command is to be sent. Valid ad-
dresses of individual drives are 0 to 31.
Param Parameter number
Index Index value of the parameter that is to be read
DB_Ptr The address of a 16-byte buffer must be supplied to the "DB_Ptr" input. This buffer
is used by the USS_RPM_x instruction to store the results of the command issued
to the drive.
Done Turned on when the USS_RPM_x instruction completes
Value Parameter value returned
When the USS_RPM_x instruction completes, the "Done" output is turned on and the "Error"
output byte and the "Value" output contain the results of executing the instruction. The
"Error" and "Value" outputs are not valid until the "Done" output turns on.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x example program
Table 9- 13 USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x example program
Network 1 Network 1
LD M10.5
= L60.0
LD M10.5
EU
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL USS_RPM_W, L63.7, 0, 5, 0, &VB20,
M1.1, VB10, VW12
Network 2 Network 2
LD M10.6
= L60.0
LD M10.6
EU
= L63.7
LDN SM0.0
= L63.6
LD L60.0
CALL USS_WPM_W, L63.7, L63.6, 0, 2000, 0,
50.0, &VB40, M1.2, VB14
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.5 USS_WPM_x instruction
Table 9- 14 USS_WPM_x instructions

CALL USS_WPM_W, XMT_REQ, EEPROM, There are three write instructions for the USS protocol:
Drive, Param, Index, Value,
USS_WPM_W instruction writes an unsigned word
DB_Ptr, Done, Error
parameter.
CALL USS_WPM_D, XMT_REQ, EEPROM,
Drive, Param, Index, Value, USS_WPM_D instruction writes an unsigned dou-
DB_Ptr, Done, Error ble word parameter.
CALL USS_WPM_R, XMT_REQ, EEPROM, USS_WPM_R instruction writes a floating-point
Drive, Param, Index, Value, parameter.
DB_Ptr, Done, Error Only one read (USS_RPM_x) or write (USS_WPM_x)
instruction can be active at a time.
The USS_WPM_x transactions complete when the drive acknowledges receipt of the
command or when an error condition is posted. The logic scan continues to execute while
this process awaits a response.
Table 9- 15 Valid operands for the USS_WPM_x instructions

XMT_REQ BOOL I, Q, M, S,SM,T,C,V,L, Power Flow conditioned by a rising edge detection element
EEPROM BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L, Power Flow
Drive BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Param, Index WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, T, C, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
DB_Ptr DWORD &VB
Value WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, T, C, AC, AQW, *VD, *AC, *LD
DWORD, REAL VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, *VD, *AC, *LD
Error BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC. *VD, *AC, *LD
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
The "EN" bit must be on to enable transmission of a request, and should remain on until the
"Done" bit is set, signaling completion of the process. For example, a USS_WPM_x request
is transmitted to the drive on each scan when "XMT_REQ" input is on. Therefore, the
"XMT_REQ" input should be pulsed on through an edge detection element which causes
one request to be transmitted for each positive transition of the "EN" input.
Table 9- 16 USS_WPM_x parameter descriptions
XMT_REQ When ON, a USS_WPM_x request is transmitted to the drive on every scan.
(transmit re-
quest)
EEPROM This input enables writing to both RAM and EEPROM of the drive when it is on and
only to the RAM when it is off.
Drive Address of the drive to which the USS_WPM_x command is to be sent. Valid ad-
dresses of individual drives are 0 to 31.
Param Parameter number
Index Index value of the parameter that is to be written
Value Parameter value to be written to the RAM in the drive.
DB_Ptr The address of a 16-byte buffer must be supplied to the "DB_Ptr" input. This buffer
is used by the USS_RPM_x instruction to store the results of the command issued
to the drive.
Done Turned on when the USS_RPM_x instruction completes
When the USS_WPM_x instruction completes, the "Done" output is turned on and the "Error"
output byte contains the result of executing the instruction. The "Error" output is not valid
until the "Done" output turns on.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
EEPROM
When the "EEPROM" input is turned on, the instruction writes to both the RAM and the
EEPROM of the drive. When the input is turned off, the instruction writes only to the RAM of
the drive.
NOTICE
Do not exceed the maximum number of write cycles to the EEPROM
When you use an USS_WPM_x instruction to update the parameter set stored in drive
EEPROM, you must ensure that the maximum number of write cycles (approximately
50,000) to the EEPROM is not exceeded.
Exceeding the maximum number of write cycles will result in corruption of the stored data
and subsequent data loss, and possible property damage. The number of read cycles is
unlimited.
Do not exceed the maximum number of write cycles to the EEPROM.
USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x example program
Table 9- 17 USS_RPM_x and USS_WPM_x example program
Network 1 Network 1
LD M10.5
= L60.0
LD M10.5
EU
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL USS_RPM_W, L63.7, 0, 5, 0, &VB20,
M1.1, VB10, VW12
Network 2 Network 2
LD M10.6
= L60.0
LD M10.6
EU
= L63.7
LDN SM0.0
= L63.6
LD L60.0
CALL USS_WPM_W, L63.7, L63.6, 0, 2000, 0,
50.0, &VB40, M1.2, VB14
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.6 USS protocol execution error codes
Table 9- 18 USS protocol execution error codes
Error code Description

0 No error
1 Drive did not respond.
2 A checksum error in the response from the drive was detected.
3 A parity error in the response from the drive was detected.
4 An error was caused by interference from the user program.
5 An illegal command was attempted.
6 An illegal drive address was supplied.
7 The communications port was not set up for USS protocol.
8 The communications port is busy processing an instruction.
9 The drive speed input is out-of-range.
10 The length of the drive response is incorrect.
11 The first character of the drive response is incorrect.
12 The length character in the drive response is not supported by USS instructions.
13 The wrong drive responded.
14 The DB_Ptr address supplied is incorrect.
15 The parameter number supplied is incorrect.
16 An invalid protocol was selected.
17 USS is active; change is not allowed.
18 An illegal baud rate was specified.
19 No communications: the drive is not ACTIVE.
20 The parameter or value in the drive response is incorrect or contains an error code.
21 A double word value was returned instead of the word value requested.
22 A word value was returned instead of the double word value requested.
23 Invalid port number
24 Signal board (SB) port 1 is missing or not configured.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.2.2.7 USS protocol example program
Table 9- 19 Sample USS program
Network 1 Network 1:
Initialize USS protocol: On the first scan, enable USS
protocol for port 1 at 19200 with drive address "0"
active.
LD SM0.1
CALL USS_INIT, 1, 19200, 16#00000001,
Q0.0, VB1
Control parameters for Drive 0
LD SM0.0
CALL USS_CTRL, M10.0, M10.1, M10.2,
M10.3, M10.4, 0, 1, 100.0, M1.0, VB2,
VW4, VD6, M0.1, M0.2, M0.3, M0.4
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Read a Word parameter from Drive 0.
Read parameter 5, index 0:
1. Save the state of M10.5 to a temporary location so
that this network displays in LAD.
2. Save the rising edge pulse of I0.5 to a temporary
L location so that it can be passed to the subrou-
tine.
LD M10.5
= L60.0
LD M10.5
EU
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL USS_RPM_W, L63.7, 0, 5, 0, &VB20,
M1.1, VB10, VW12
Write a Word parameter to Drive 0. Write parame-
ter 2000, index 0.
Note: This STL code does not compile to LAD or FBD.
LD M10.6
= L60.0
LD M10.6
EU
= L63.7
LDN SM0.0
= L63.6
LD L60.0
CALL USS_WPM_R, L63.7, L63.6, 0, 2000,
0, 50.0, &VB40, M1.2, VB14
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.3 Modbus library instructions
9.3.1 Modbus communication overview
9.3.1.1 Modbus library features

When you install STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, the Siemens Modbus library is also installed.
The Modbus library makes communicating to Modbus RTU master and slave devices easier
by including pre-configured subroutines and interrupt routines that are designed for Modbus
RTU communication.
Modbus communication over RS-485 (integrated port 0 and optional signal board port 1) and
RS-232 (optional signal board port 1 only) is supported for both master and slave devices.
Modbus master instructions can configure the S7-200 SMART to act as a Modbus RTU
master device and communicate to one or more Modbus RTU slave devices.
Modbus slave instructions can configure the S7-200 SMART to act as a Modbus RTU slave
device and communicate with Modbus RTU master devices.
Open the libraries folder in the instruction branch of the project tree for access to the Modbus
instructions. When you place a Modbus instruction in your program, one or more associated
POUs are automatically added to your project.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Modbus RTU master protocol

Modbus master instructions use the following resources from the CPU:
MBUS_CTRL execution initializes the Modbus master protocol and dedicates the
assigned CPU port (0 or 1), for Modbus master communication.
When a CPU port is used for Modbus communications, it cannot be used for any other
purpose, including communication with an HMI.
Modbus master instructions affect all of the SM locations associated with Freeport
communications on the port assigned by the MBUS_CTRL instruction.
Modbus master instructions use interrupts for some functions. These interrupts must not
be disabled by the user program.
Modbus master instructions program size
3 subroutines and 1 interrupt routine
1942 bytes of program space for two master instructions and support routines
Variables for Modbus master instructions require a 286 byte block of V memory. The
starting address for this block is assigned by the user and is reserved for Modbus
variables.
Note
To change the CPU communication port from Modbus back to PPI so that you can
communicate with an HMI device, set the mode parameter of the MBUS_CTRL
instruction to a zero (0).
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Modbus RTU slave protocol

Modbus slave protocol instructions use the following resources from the CPU:
The MBUS_INIT instruction initializes the Modbus slave protocol and dedicates the
assigned CPU port (0 or 1), for Modbus slave communication.
When a CPU port is used for Modbus communication, it cannot be used for any other
purpose, including communications with an HMI.
Modbus slave instructions affect all of the SM locations associated with a Freeport
communications on the port assigned by the MBUS_INIT instruction.
Modbus slave instructions program size
Modbus slave instructions use 3 subroutines and 2 interrupts.
Modbus slave instructions require 2113 bytes of program space for the two slave
instructions and support routines.
The variables for the Modbus slave instructions require a 786 byte block of V memory.
The starting address for this block is assigned by the user and is reserved for Modbus
variables.
Note
To change the CPU communication port from Modbus back to PPI so that you can
communicate with an HMI device, set the mode parameter of the MBUS_INIT
instruction to a zero (0).
9.3.1.2 Initialization and execution time for Modbus protocol

Modbus RTU master protocol: The master protocol requires a small amount of time every
scan to execute the MBUS_CTRL instruction. The time will be about .2 milliseconds when
the MBUS_CTRL is initializing the Modbus master (first scan), and about 0.1 milliseconds
on subsequent scans.
The scan time is extended when the MBUS_MSG instruction executes a request. Most of
the time is spent calculating the Modbus CRC for the request and response. The CRC
(Cyclic Redundancy Check) insures the integrity of the communications message. The
PLC scan time is extended by about 86 microseconds for each word in request and in the
response. A maximum request/response (read or write of 120 words) extends the scan
time to approximately 10.3 milliseconds. A read request extends the scan mainly when
the response is received from a slave, and to a lesser extent when the request is sent. A
write request extends the scan mainly when the data is sent to a slave, and to a lesser
extent when the response is received.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Modbus RTU slave protocol: Modbus communications uses a CRC (cyclic redundancy
check) to insure the integrity of the communications messages. The Modbus slave
protocol uses a table of pre-calculated values to decrease the time required to process a
message. The initialization of this CRC table requires about 11.3 milliseconds. This
initialization is done inside the MBUS_INIT instruction and is normally done in the first
scan of the user program after entering RUN mode. You are responsible for resetting the
watchdog timer, if the time required by the MBUS_INIT instruction and any other user
initialization exceeds the 500 millisecond scan watchdog time. The output module
watchdog timer is reset by writing to the outputs of the module.
The scan time is extended when the MBUS_SLAVE subroutine services a request. Since
most of the time is spent calculating the Modbus CRC, the scan time is extended by
about 40 microseconds for every byte in the request and in the response. A maximum
request/response (read or write of 120 words) extends the scan time by approximately
4.8 milliseconds.
9.3.1.3 Modbus addressing

Modbus addresses are normally written as 5 character values containing the data type and
the offset. The first character determines the data type and the last four characters contain
the value.
Modbus master addressing

Modbus master instructions map the address to the correct functions to send to the slave
device. The following Modbus addresses are supported by the Modbus master instructions:
00001 to 09999 are discrete outputs (coils)
10001 to 19999 are discrete inputs (contacts)
30001 to 39999 are input registers (generally analog inputs)
(40001 to 49999) and (400001 to 465535) are holding registers
All Modbus addresses are one-based, meaning that the first data value starts at address
one. The actual range of valid addresses will depend on the slave device. Different slave
devices will support different data types and address ranges.
Modbus slave addressing

The Modbus master device maps the addresses to the correct functions. The following
addresses are supported by the Modbus slave instructions:
00001 to 00256 are discrete outputs mapped to Q0.0 - Q31.7
10001 to 10256 are discrete inputs mapped to I0.0 - I31.7
30001 to 30056 are analog input registers mapped to AIW0 - AIW110
40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465535 are holding registers mapped to V memory.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Mapping Modbus addresses to CPU addresses

All Modbus addresses are one-based.
Table 9- 20 Mapping Modbus addresses to CPU addresses
Modbus address CPU address

00001 Q0.0
00002 Q0.1
00003 Q0.2
... ...
00255 Q31.6
00256 Q31.7
10001 I0.0
10002 I0.1
10003 I0.2
... ...
10255 I31.6
10256 I317
30001 AIW0
30002 AIW2
30003 AIW4
... ...
30056 AIW110
40001 400001 Vx (Holding reg. start)
40002 400002 Vx+2 =(Hold reg. start+2)
40003 400003 Vx+4 =(Hold reg. start+4)
... ...
4yyyy 4zzzzz Vx+2(yyyy-1) or Vx+2(zzzzz-1)
MBUS_INIT parameters that limit slave accessibility

The Modbus slave protocol allows you to limit the number of inputs, outputs, analog inputs,
and holding registers (V memory) that are accessible to a Modbus master.
MaxIQ assigns the maximum number of discrete inputs or outputs (Is or Qs) a Modbus
master is allowed to access.
MaxAI assigns the maximum number of input registers (AIWs) a Modbus master is
allowed to access.
MaxHold assigns the maximum number of holding registers (V memory words) a Modbus
master is allowed to access.
See the description of the MBUS_INIT instruction for more information on setting up the
memory restrictions for the Modbus slave.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.3.2 Modbus RTU master
9.3.2.1 Using the Modbus master instructions
Procedure
To use the Modbus RTU master instructions in your S7-200 SMART program, follow these
steps:
1. Insert the MBUS_CTRL instruction in your program and execute the MBUS_CTRL on
every scan. You can use the MBUS_CTRL instruction either to initiate or to change the
Modbus communications parameters. When you insert the MBUS_CTRL instruction,
several protected subroutines and interrupt routines are automatically added to your
program.
assign a starting address for the V-Memory that the Modbus library requires.
Alternatively, you can right-click the Program Block node in the project tree and select
"Library Memory" from the context menu.
3. Place one or more MBUS_MSG instructions in your program. You can add as many
MBUS_MSG instructions to your program as you require, but only one of these
instructions can be active at a time.
4. Connect a communications cable between the S7-200 SMART CPU port you assigned
with the MBUS_CTRL port parameter and the Modbus slave devices.
NOTICE
The Modbus master instructions utilize the Modbus functions shown below to read or write a
specific Modbus address. The Modbus slave device must support the Modbus function(s)
required to read or write a particular Modbus address.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Table 9- 21 Required Modbus slave function support
Modbus address Read or write Modbus slave function required

00001 09999 discrete outputs Read Function 1
Write Function 5 for a single output point
Function 15 for multiple output points
10001 19999 discrete inputs Read Function 2
Write not possible
30001 39999 input registers Read Function 4
Write not possible
40001 49999 holding registers Read Function 3
400001 - 465535 Write Function 6 for a single register
Function 16 for multiple registers
9.3.2.2 MBUS_CTRL instruction (initialize master)
Table 9- 22 MBUS_CTRL instruction

CALL MBUS_CTRL, Mode, Baud, The MBUS_CTRL instruction is used to initialize, monitor,
Parity, Port, Timeout, Done, or to disable Modbus communications.
Error Before the MBUS_MSG instruction can be used, the
MBUS_CTRL instruction must be executed without er-
rors. The instruction completes and the Done bit is set
ON, before continuing to the next instruction.
This instruction is executed on each scan when the EN
input is on.
The MBUS_CTRL instruction must be called every scan (including the first scan) to allow it to
monitor the progress of any outstanding messages initiated with the MBUS_MSG instruction.
The Modbus master protocol will not operate correctly unless MBUS_CTRL is called every
scan.
Table 9- 23 Parameters for the MBUS_CTRL instruction
Parameter Data type Operands

Mode BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L
Baud DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Parity, Port BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Timeout WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
The value for the Mode input selects the communications protocol. An input value of 1
assigns the CPU port to Modbus protocol and enables the protocol. An input value of 0
assigns the CPU port to PPI system protocol and disables Modbus protocol.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Parameter Parity is set to match the parity of the Modbus slave device. All settings use one
start bit and one stop bit. The allowed values are: 0 (no parity). 1 (odd parity), and 2 (even
parity).
Parameter Port sets the physical communication port (0 = RS-485 integrated in CPU, 1 =
RS-485 or RS-232 located on the optional CM01 signal board).
Parameter Timeout is set to the number of milliseconds to wait for the response from the
slave. The Timeout value can be set anywhere in the range of 1 millisecond to 32767
milliseconds. A typical value would be 1000 milliseconds (1 second). The Timeout parameter
should be set to a value large enough so that the slave device has time to respond at the
selected baud rate.
The Timeout parameter is used to determine if the Modbus slave device is responding to a
request. The Timeout value determines how long the Modbus Master will wait for the first
character of the response after the last character of the request has been sent. The Modbus
master will receive the entire response from the Modbus slave device if at least one
character of the response is received within the Timeout time.
When the MBUS_CTRL instruction completes, the Done output is turned ON.
The Error output contains the result of executing the instruction.
See also Modbus master execution error codes (Page 442)
9.3.2.3 MBUS_MSG instruction
Table 9- 24 MBUS_MSG instruction

CALL MBUS_MSG, First, Slave, The MBUS_MSG instruction (or MBUS_MSG_P1 for port
RW, Addr, Count, DataPtr, 1) is used to initiate a request to a Modbus slave and
Done, Error process the response.
The MBUS_MSG instruction initiates a master request to a Modbus slave when both the EN
input and the First inputs are ON. Sending the request, waiting for the response, and
processing the response usually requires several PLC scan times. The EN input must be ON
to enable the send request, and should remain ON until the Done bit is set ON.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Only one MBUS_MSG instruction can be active at a time. If there is more than one
MBUS_MSG instruction enabled, the first MBUS_MSG instruction executed will be
processed and all subsequent MBUS_MSG instructions will abort with an error code 6.
Table 9- 25 Parameters for the MBUS_MSG instruction
Parameter Data type Operands

First BOOL I, Q, M, S, SM, T, C, V, L (Power flow conditioned by a positive edge detection ele-
ment)
Slave BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
RW BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Addr DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Count INT VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
DataPtr DWORD &VB
Parameter First should be ON for only one scan when there is a new request to send. The
First input should be pulsed on through an edge detection element (for example, Positive
Edge) which will cause the request to be transmitted one time. See the example program for
details.
Parameter Slave is the address of the Modbus slave device. The allowed range is 0 through
247. Address 0 is the broadcast address and can only be used for write requests. There is
no response to a broadcast request to address 0. Not all slave devices will support the
broadcast address. The S7-200 SMART Modbus slave library does not support the
broadcast address.
Parameter RW assigns if this message is to be a read or a write. The following two values
are allowed for RW: 0 (Read) and 1 (Write).
Discrete outputs (coils) and holding registers support both read and write requests. Discrete
inputs (contacts) and input registers only support read requests.
Parameter Addr is the starting Modbus address. The following ranges of values are allowed:
00001 to 09999 for discrete outputs (coils)
10001 to 19999 for discrete inputs (contacts)
30001 to 39999 for input registers
40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465535 for holding registers
The actual range of values for Addr are based on the addresses that the Modbus slave
device supports.
Parameter Count assigns the number of data elements to read or write in this request. The
Count will be the number of bits for the bit data types, and the number of words for the word
data types.
Address 0xxxx Count is the number of bits to read or write
Address 1xxxx Count is the number of bits to read
Address 3xxxx Count is the number of input register words to read
Address 4xxxx or 4yyyyy Count is the number of holding register words to read or write
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
The MBUS_MSG instruction will read or write a maximum of 120 words or 1920 bits (240
bytes of data). The actual limit on the value of Count will depend upon the limits in the
Modbus slave device.
The parameter DataPtr is an indirect address pointer which points to the V memory in the
CPU for the data associated with the read or write request. For a read request, DataPtr
should point to the first CPU memory location used to store the data read from the Modbus
slave. For a write request, DataPtr should point to the first CPU memory location of the data
to be sent to the Modbus slave.
The DataPtr value is passed into MBUS_MSG as an indirect address pointer. For example, if
the data to be written to a Modbus slave device starts at address VW200 in the CPU, the
value for the DataPtr would be &VB200 (address of VB200). Pointers must always be a type
VB even if they point to word data.
Holding registers (address 4xxxx or 4yyyyy) and input registers (address 3xxxx) are word
values (2 bytes or 16 bits). CPU words are formatted the same as Modbus registers. The
lower numbered V memory address is the most significant byte of the register. The higher
numbered V memory address is the least significant byte of the register. The table below
shows how the CPU byte and word addressing corresponds to the Modbus register format.
Table 9- 26 Modbus Holding Register
CPU memory byte address CPU memory word address Modbus holding register address
Address Hex data Address Hex data Address Hex data
VB200 12 VW200 12 34 40001 12 34
VB201 34
VB202 56 VW202 56 78 40002 56 78
VB203 78
VB204 9A VW204 9A BC 40003 9A BC
VB205 BC
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
The bit data (addresses 0xxxx and 1xxxx)

areas are read and written as packed
bytes, that is, 8 bits are packed into each
byte of data. The least significant bit of the
first data byte is the addressed bit number
(the parameter Addr). If only a single bit is
written then the bit must be in the least
significant bit of the byte pointed to by
DataPtr. Format for Packed Bytes (Discrete Input Ad-
dresses)
For bit data addresses that do not start on
even byte boundaries, the bit correspond-
ing to the starting address must be in the
least significant bit of the byte. See the
example of the packed byte format for 3
bits starting at Modbus address 10004.
Format for Packed Bytes (Discrete input starting

at address 10004)
When writing to the discrete output data type (coils), the user is responsible for placing the
bits in the correct bit positions within the packed byte before the data is passed to the
MBUS_MSG instruction via the DataPtr.
The Done output is OFF while a request is being sent and the response is being received.
The Done output is ON when the response is complete or when the MBUS_MSG instruction
was aborted because of an error.
The Error output is valid only when the Done output is ON.
See also Modbus master execution error codes (Page 442)
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.3.2.4 Modbus master execution error codes

The high numbered error codes (starting with 101) are errors that are returned by the
Modbus slave device. These errors indicate that the slave does not support the requested
function or that the requested address (either data type or range of addresses) is not
supported by the Modbus slave device.
The low numbered error codes (1 through 12) are errors that are detected by the
MBUS_MSG instruction. These error codes generally indicate a problem with the input
parameters of the MBUS_MSG instruction, or a problem receiving the response from the
slave. Parity and CRC errors indicate that there was a response but that the data was not
received correctly. This is usually caused by an electrical problem such as a bad connection
or electrical noise.
MBUS_CTRL Description
error codes
0 No error
1 Invalid parity type
2 Invalid baud rate
3 Invalid timeout
4 Invalid mode
10 Signal board port 1 missing or not configured
MBUS_MSG Description
error codes
0 No error
1 Parity error in response: This is only possible if even or odd parity is used. The
transmission was disturbed and possibly incorrect data was received. This error is
usually caused by an electrical problem such as incorrect wiring or electrical noise
affecting the communication.
2 Not used
3 Receive timeout: There was no response from the slave within the Timeout time.
Some possible causes are bad electrical connections to the slave device, master and
slave are set to a different baud rate / parity setting, and incorrect slave address.
4 Error in request parameter: One or more of the input parameters (Slave, RW, Addr,
or Count) is set to an illegal value. Check the documentation for allowed values for
the input parameters.
5 Modbus master not enabled: Call MBUS_CTRL on every scan prior to calling
MBUS_MSG.
6 Modbus is busy with another request: Only one MBUS_MSG instruction can be ac-
tive at a time.
7 Error in response: The response received does not correspond to the request. This
indicates some problem in the slave device or that the wrong slave device answered
the request.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
MBUS_MSG Description
error codes
8 CRC error in response: The transmission was disturbed and possibly incorrect data
was received. This error is usually caused by an electrical problem such as incorrect
wiring or electrical noise affecting the communication.
101 Slave does not support the requested function at this address: See the required
Modbus slave function support table in the "Using the Modbus master Instructions"
help topic.
102 Slave does not support the data address: The requested address range of Addr plus
Count is outside the allowed address range of the slave.
103 Slave does not support the data type: The Addr type is not supported by the slave
device.
104 Slave device failure
105 Slave accepted the message but the response is delayed: This is an error for
MBUS_MSG and the user program should resend the request at a later time.
106 Slave is busy and rejected the message: You can try the same request again to get a
response.
107 Slave rejected the message for an unknown reason.
108 Slave memory parity error: There is an error in the slave device.
9.3.3 Modbus RTU slave
9.3.3.1 Using the Modbus slave instructions
Procedure
To use the Modbus slave instructions in your S7-200 SMART program, follow these steps:
1. Insert the MBUS_INIT instruction in your program and execute the MBUS_INIT instruction
for one scan only. You can use the MBUS_INIT instruction either to initiate or to change
the communications parameters. When you insert the MBUS_INIT instruction, several
hidden subroutines and interrupt routines are automatically added to your program.
assign a starting address for the V memory that the Modbus library requires. Alternatively,
you can right-click the Program Block node in the project tree and select "Library
Memory" from the context menu. In addition to this V memory block, you define another V
memory block with the HoldStart and MaxHold parameters of MBUS_INIT. Be careful that
your program assignments in V memory do not overlap. If there is any overlap of the
memory areas, the MBUS_INIT instruction returns an error.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
3. Place only one MBUS_SLAVE instruction in your program. This instruction should be
called every scan to service any requests that have been received.
4. Connect a communications cable between the S7-200 SMART CPU port you assigned
with the MBUS_INIT port parameter and the Modbus master device.
NOTICE
The accumulators (AC0, AC1, AC2, AC3) are used by the Modbus slave instructions and
appear in the Cross Reference listing. Prior to execution, the values in the accumulators of a
Modbus slave instruction are saved and restored to the accumulators before the Modbus
slave instruction is complete, ensuring that all user data in the accumulators is preserved
while executing a Modbus slave instruction.
The Modbus slave instructions support the Modbus RTU protocol. These instructions use the
Freeport feature of the S7-200 SMART CPU to support the most common Modbus functions.
The following Modbus functions are supported:
Function Description
1 Read single/multiple coil (discrete output) status. Function 1 returns the on/off status of
any number of output points (Qs).
2 Read single/multiple contact (discrete input) status. Function 2 returns the on/off status
of any number of input points (Is).
3 Read single/multiple holding registers. Function 3 returns the contents of V memory.
Holding registers are word values under Modbus and allow you to read up to 120 words
in one request.
4 Read single/multiple input registers. Function 4 returns analog Input values.
5 Write single coil (discrete output). Function 5 sets a discrete output point to the specified
value. The point is not forced and the program can overwrite the value written by the
Modbus request.
6 Write single holding register. Function 6 writes a single holding register value to the V
memory of the S7-200 SMART.
15 Write multiple coils (discrete outputs). Function 15 writes the discrete output values to
the Q image register of the S7-200 SMART. The starting output point must begin on a
byte boundary (for example, Q0.0 or Q2.0) and the number of outputs written must be a
multiple of eight. This is a restriction for the Modbus slave protocol instructions. The
points are not forced and the program can overwrite the values written by the Modbus
request.
16 Write multiple holding registers. Function 16 writes multiple holding registers to the V
memory of the S7-200 SMART. There can be up to 120 words written in one request.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.3.3.2 MBUS_INIT instruction (initialize slave)
Table 9- 27 MBUS_INIT instruction
LAD/ FBD STL Description

CALL MBUS_INIT, Mode, Addr, Baud, The MBUS_INIT instruction enables, initializes,
Parity, Port, Delay, MaxIQ, MaxAI, or disables Modbus communications. Before an
MaxHold, HoldStart, Done, Error MBUS_SLAVE instruction can be used,
MBUS_INIT must be executed without errors.
The instruction completes and the Done bit is
set immediately, before continuing to the next
instruction.
The instruction is executed on each scan when
the EN input is ON.
The MBUS_INIT instruction should be executed exactly once for each change in
communications state. Therefore, the EN input should be pulsed on through an edge
detection element, or executed only on the first scan.
Table 9- 28 MBUS_INIT parameters

Mode, Addr, Parity, Port BYTE VB, IB, QB, MB, SB, SMB, LB, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Baud, HoldStart DWORD VD, ID, QD, MD, SD, SMD, LD, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
Delay, MaxIQ, MaxAI, MaxHold WORD VW, IW, QW, MW, SW, SMW, LW, AC, Constant, *VD, *AC, *LD
The value for the Mode input selects the communications protocol: an input value of 1
assigns Modbus protocol and enables the protocol, and an input value of 0 PPI protocol and
disables Modbus protocol.
Parameter Addr sets the address at inclusive values between 1 and 247.
Parameter Baud sets the baud rate at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or
115200.
Parameter Parity is set to match the parity of the Modbus master. All settings use one stop
bit. The accepted values are: 0 (no parity), 1 (odd parity), and 2 (even parity).
Parameter Port sets the physical communication port (0 = RS-485 integrated in CPU, 1 =
RS-485 or RS-232 located on an optional signal board).
Parameter Delay extends the standard Modbus end-of-message timeout condition by adding
the assigned number of milliseconds to the standard Modbus message timeout. The typical
value for this parameter should be 0 when operating on a wired network. If you are using
modems with error correction, set the delay to a value of 50 to 100 milliseconds. If you are
using spread spectrum radios, set the delay to a value of 10 to 100 milliseconds. The Delay
value can be 0 to 32767 milliseconds.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Parameter MaxIQ sets the number of I and Q points available to Modbus addresses 0xxxx
and 1xxxx at values of 0 to 256. A value of 0 disables all reads and writes to the inputs and
outputs. The suggested value for MaxIQ is 256.
Parameter MaxAI sets the number of word input (AI) registers available to Modbus address
3xxxx at values of 0 to 56. A value of 0 disables reads of the analog inputs. The suggested
value for MaxAI to allow access to all of the CPU analog inputs, is as follows:
0 for CPU CR40
56 for all other CPU models
Parameter MaxHold sets the number of word holding registers in V memory available to
Modbus address 4xxxx or 4yyyyy. For example, if you want to allow Modbus master access
for 2000 bytes of V memory, set MaxHold to a value of 1000 words (holding registers).
Parameter HoldStart is the address of the start of the holding registers in V memory. This
value is generally set to VB0, so the parameter HoldStart is set to &VB0 (address of VB0).
Other V memory addresses can be specified as the starting address for the holding registers
to allow VB0 to be used elsewhere in the project. The Modbus master has access to
MaxHold number of words of V memory starting at HoldStart.
When the MBUS_INIT instruction completes, the Done output is turned ON.
The Error output byte contains the result of executing the instruction. This output is only valid
if Done is ON. If Done is OFF, the error parameter is not changed.
See also Modbus slave execution error codes (Page 448)
9.3.3.3 MBUS_SLAVE instruction
Table 9- 29 MBUS_SLAVE instruction

CALL MBUS_SLAVE, Done, Error The MBUS_SLAVE instruction is used to ser-
vice a request from the Modbus master and
must be executed every scan to allow it to
check for and respond to Modbus requests.
The instruction is executed on each scan when
the EN input is ON.
The MBUS_SLAVE instruction has no input
parameters.
Table 9- 30 Parameters for the MBUS_SLAVE Instruction
Parameter Data Type Operands

The Done output is ON when the MBUS_SLAVE instruction responds to a Modbus request.
The Done output is OFF, if there was no request serviced.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
The Error output contains the result of executing the instruction. This output is only valid if
Done is ON. If Done is OFF, the error parameter is not changed.
Table 9- 31 Example program of S7-200 SMART CPU operating as a Modbus slave
LAD STL
Initialize the Modbus Slave protocol on Network 1
the first scan. Set the slave address to LD SM0.1
1, set port 0 to 9600 baud with even CALL MBUS_INIT, 1, 1, 9600,
parity, all access to all I, Q and AI val- 2, 0, 128, 32, 1000, &VB0,
ues, allow access to 1000 holding reg- M0.1, MB1
isters (2000 bytes) starting at VB0.
Execute the Modbus Slave protocol on Network 2

every scan. LD SM0.0
CALL MBUS_SLAVE, M0.2, MB2
See also Modbus slave execution error codes (Page 448)
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
9.3.3.4 Modbus slave execution error codes
Table 9- 32
Error codes Description

0 No error
1 Memory range error
2 Illegal baud rate or parity
3 Illegal slave address
4 Illegal value for Modbus parameter
5 Holding registers overlap Modbus Slave symbols
6 Receive parity error
7 Receive CRC error
8 Illegal function request/function not supported
9 Illegal memory address in request
10 Slave function not enabled
9.3.4 Modbus master example program

This example program shows how to use the Modbus Master instructions to write and read
four holding registers to and from a Modbus slave each time input I0.0 is turned on.
The CPU writes four words starting at VW100 to the Modbus slave. The data is written to
four holding registers in the slave starting at address 40001.
The CPU then reads four holding registers from the Modbus slave. The data comes from
holding registers 40010 - 40013 and is placed into the V memory of the CPU starting at
VW200.
Figure 9-1 Example Program Data Transfers
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
The following program turns on outputs Q0.1 and Q0.2 if there is an error returned from the
MBUS_MSG instruction.
Table 9- 33 Example Modbus master program
LAD Description
Network 1:
Initialize and monitor the Modbus master by calling
MBUS_CTRL on every scan. The Modbus master is set for
9600 baud and no parity. The slave device is allowed 1000
milliseconds (1 second) to respond.
Network 2
On the first scan, reset the enable flags (M2.0 and M2.1)
used for the two MBUS_MSG instructions.
Network 3
When I0.0 changes from OFF to ON, set the enable flag for
the first MBUS_MSG instruction (M2.0).
Network 4
Call the MBUS_MSG instruction when the first enable flag
(M2.0) is ON. The First parameter must be set for only the
first scan that the instruction is enabled.
This instruction writes (RW = 1) 4 holding registers to
slave 2. The write data is taken from VB100-VB107
(4 words) in the CPU and written to address 40001 - 40004
in the Modbus slave.
Network 5
When the first MBUS_MSG instruction is complete
(Done goes from 0 to 1), clear the enable for the first
MBUS_MSG and set the enable for the second
If Error (MB1) is not zero, then set Q0.1 to show the error.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
LAD Description
Network 6
Call the second MBUS_MSG instruction when the second
enable flag (M2.1) is ON. The First parameter must be set
for only the first scan that the instruction is enabled.
This instruction reads (RW = 0) 4 holding registers from
slave 2. The data is read from address 40010 - 40013 in the
Modbus slave and copied to VB200 - VB207 (4 words) in
the CPU.
Network 7
When the second MBUS_MSG instruction is complete
(Done goes from 0 to 1), clear the enable for the second
If Error (MB1) is not zero, then set Q0.2 to show the error.
9.3.5 Modbus advanced user information
Overview
This topic contains information for advanced users of the Modbus RTU master library. Most
users should not need this information and should not modify the default operation of the
Modbus RTU master library.
Retries
The Modbus master instructions automatically resends the request to the slave device if one
of the following errors is detected:
There is no response within the response timeout time (parameter Timeout on the
MBUS_CTRL) instruction (Error code 3).
The time between characters of the response exceeded the allowed value (Error code 3).
There is a parity error in the response from the slave (Error code 1).
There is a CRC error in the response from the slave (Error code 8).
The returned function did not match the request (Error code 7).
The Modbus Master resends the request two additional times before setting the Done and
Error output parameters.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
You can change the number of retries by finding the symbol mModbusRetries in the Modbus
master symbol table and changing this value after MBUS_CTRL has been executed. The
mModbusRetries value is a BYTE with a range of 0 to 255 retries.
Inter-character timeout
Modbus master execution aborts a response from a slave device if the time between
characters in the response exceeds an assigned time limit. The default time is set to 100
milliseconds which should allow the Modbus master instructions to work with most slave
devices over wire or telephone modems. If this error is detected, the MBUS CTRL Error
parameter is set to error code 3.
There may be cases where a longer time between characters is required, either because of
the transmission medium (for example, telephone modem) or because the slave device itself
requires more time. You can lengthen this timeout by finding the symbol
mModbusCharTimeout in the Modbus master symbol table and changing this value after
MBUS_CTRL has been executed. The mModbusCharTimeout value is an INT with a range
of 1 to 30000 milliseconds.
Single vs. multiple bit / word write functions

Some Modbus slave devices do not support the Modbus functions to write a single discrete
output bit (Modbus function 5) or to write a single holding register (Modbus function 6).
These devices only support the multiple bit write (Modbus function 15) or multiple register
write (Modbus function 16) instead. The MBUS_MSG instruction returns an error code 101 if
the slave device does not support the single bit/word Modbus functions.
The Modbus master protocol allows you to force the MBUS_MSG instruction to use the
multiple bit/word Modbus functions instead of the single bit/word Modbus functions. You can
force the multiple bit/word instructions by finding the symbol mModbusForceMulti in the
Modbus master symbol table and changing this value after MBUS_CTRL has been
executed. The mModbusForceMulti value is a data type BOOL value and should be set to a
"1" to force the use of the multiple bit/word functions when a single bit/register is written.
Accumulator usage
The accumulators (AC0, AC1, AC2, AC3) are used by the Modbus master instructions and
appear in the Cross Reference listing. The values in the accumulators are saved and
restored by the Modbus master instructions. All user data in the accumulators is preserved
while executing the instructions.
S7-200 SMART
Libraries
Holding register addresses greater than 49999

Modbus holding addresses are within the range of 40001 to 49999. This range is adequate
for most applications but there are some Modbus slave devices with data mapped into
holding registers at a higher address range.
The MBUS_MSG instruction allows an additional range for the parameter Addr to support an
extended range of holding register addresses at addresses 400001 to 465536.
For example: to access holding register 16768, the Addr parameter of MBUS_MSG should
be set to 416768.
The extended addressing allows access to the full range of 65536 possible addresses
supported by the Modbus protocol. This extended addressing is only supported for holding
registers.
S7-200 SMART
Debugging and troubleshooting 10
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides software tools to help you debug and test your
program. These features include viewing the status of the program as it is executed by the
CPU, selecting to run the CPU for a specified number of scans, and forcing values.
Use the hardware troubleshooting guide (Page 465) as a guide for determining the cause
and possible solution when troubleshooting problems with the hardware.
10.1 Debugging your program
10.1.1 Bookmark functions

You can set bookmarks in your program to make it easy to move back and forth between
designated networks in a long program:
Toggle Bookmark: Click this button to set or remove a bookmark at the pro-
gram network designated by the current cursor location.
Next Bookmark: Click this button to move to the next bookmarked network of
your program.
Previous Bookmark: Click this button to move to the previous bookmarked
network of your program.
Remove All Bookmarks: Click this button to remove all bookmarks in your
program.
S7-200 SMART
Debugging and troubleshooting
10.1.2 Cross reference table
Note
You must compile your program in order to view the cross reference table.
Use the cross reference table when you want to know whether a symbolic name or memory
assignment is already in use in your program, and where it is used. The cross reference
table identifies all operands used in the program, and identifies the POU, network or line
location, and instruction context of the operand each time it is used. Double-clicking an
element in the cross-reference table displays that part of your POU.
Element refers to the operands used in your program. You can use the toggle button to
toggle between symbolic and absolute addressing to change the representation of all
operands.
Block refers to the POU where the operand is used.
Location refers to the line or network where the operand is used.
Context refers to the program instruction where the operand is used.
S7-200 SMART
Examples
The following examples show the cross-reference table for a simple program in all three
languages: LAD, FBD, and STL.
Language Program Cross reference

LAD
FBD
STL
S7-200 SMART
10.2 Displaying program status
10.2.1 Displaying status in the program editor

To display current data values and I/O status in the program editor, click the Program Status
ON/OFF button from either the program editor toolbar or from the Debug menu ribbon
strip .
Status data collection begins and shows the results of all logic operations during the
execution of the program. You can also pause and resume program status collection with the
Pause Status ON/OFF button from either the program editor toolbar or from the Debug
menu ribbon strip .
A status chart (Page 460) displays values at the end of scan.
Execution status coloring

The power rail (LAD) is colored when the program is being scanned.
Power flow or logic flow in the diagrams is indicated by coloring.
Contacts and coils (LAD) that have power or are logically true are colored blue.
You can assign your own color choice from the Options settings of the Tool menu ribbon
strip and selecting the Colors tab.
Box instructions The box instructions are colored when the instruction has power and
the instruction successfully executes without an error.
Green timers and counters indicate that the Timer or Counter has valid data.
Red indicates an instruction executed with an error.
Jump and Label instructions display in the powerflow color when active. If not active, they
display in gray.
Gray color (default assignment) indicates no power flow - the instruction not scanned
(jumped over or not called), or the PLC is in STOP mode.
Blue color for Boolean Powerflow bits (FBD only).
LAD, FBD, and STL program editors display the value of operands and indicate
powerflow as each instruction executes during the execute program phase of a scan
cycle. Execution status can display intermediate data values that may be overwritten by
executing subsequent program instructions. All displayed PLC data values are collected
from a single program scan cycle.
S7-200 SMART
Example program status in an STL program

When you start program status in STL, the program editor window is divided into a code
region and a status region. You can customize the status region according to the types of
values that you want to monitor.
There are three categories of values that you can monitor in STL Status:
Operands You can monitor up to 17 operands per instruction.

Logic stack You can monitor up to the four most recent values from the logic
stack.
Instruction status bits You can monitor up to eleven status bits.
The STL Status tab of the Program Editor options (Page 459) in the Options settings of the
Tools menu ribbon strip allows you to select or deselect any of these categories of values. If
you deselect an item, it does not appear in the status display.
S7-200 SMART
Example program status in the LAD program editor

The example below shows status in the LAD program editor. The program editor displays the
values of operands and indicates powerflow as each instruction executes during the execute
program phase of a scan cycle.
Example program status in the FBD program editor

The example below shows status in the FBD program editor. The red color of the ADD_I
instruction box indicates errors in the operands.
S7-200 SMART
10.2.2 Configuring the STL status options

To configure the STL program status display options, follow these steps:
1. Click the Options button from the Settings area of the Tools menu ribbon strip.
2. Under Options, click Program Editor > STL > Status.

3. Configure the following STL program status options:
Type Select the font type for STL program status text.
Style Select Regular, Italic, Bold, or Bold Italic for the text style.
Size Select the point size for the font.
Watch Values The check boxes and selection boxes allow you to include or re-
move operands, stack values, and instruction status bits (that is,
flags) from the Program Status display.
Number of operands If you chose to include operands in the Program Status display,
you can edit the Operands list box to display more or fewer oper-
ands. The maximum number possible is 17.
Number of Stack Bits If you chose to include logic stack values in the Program Status
display, you can edit the Logic Stack list box to display more or
fewer stack values. The maximum number possible is four.
Instruction Status Bits If you chose to include instruction status bits in the program status
display, select the Instruction Status Bits that you want to be
shown and which (if any) should be omitted.
A check mark indicates that you are choosing to watch a particular
status bit in the program status display; if you deselect the check-
box, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART does not display that status bit in
the Program Status.
See also
How to display status in the program editor (Page 456)
S7-200 SMART
10.3 Using a status chart to monitor your program

In a status chart, you can enter addresses or defined symbol names to monitor or modify the
status of program inputs, outputs, or variables by displaying the current values. The status
chart also allows you to force or change the values of the process variables. You can create
multiple status charts in order to view elements from different portions of your program.
You can display timer and counter values as either bits or words. If you display a timer or
counter value as a bit, you see the output status of the instruction (0 or 1). If you display a
timer or counter value as a word, you see the current value of the timer or counter.
Creating a new chart

To create a new status chart, make sure that Chart Status and Program Status is off and use
one of these methods to create a new chart:
From the project tree, right-click the Status Chart folder and select the context menu
command Insert > Chart.
From the Insert area of the Edit menu ribbon strip, click the down arrow beneath "Object"
and select "Chart" from the drop-down menu.
From a status chart tab in the status chart editor, or from any cell in an existing status
chart, right-click and select the context menu command Insert > Chart.
From the status chart toolbar, click the insert button and select "Chart".
After you successfully insert a new status chart, the new chart appears under "Status Chart"
in the project tree and a new tab appears at the bottom of the Status Chart window.
Opening an existing chart

If the status chart editor is not open, you can open an existing status chart from the project
tree, navigation bar, or from the Component drop-down list in the Windows area of the View
menu. If the status chart editor is open, you can click a status chart tab in the editor to switch
to that status chart.
S7-200 SMART
Building a status chart

To build a status chart, follow these steps:
1. Enter the address (or symbol name) for each desired value in the Address field. Symbol
names must be names that you have already defined in the symbol table.
2. If the element is a bit (I, Q, or M, for example), the format is set as bit in the Format
column. If the element is a byte, word, or double word, select the drop-down list in the
Format column and select the valid format from the available options.
3. To insert an additional row, use one of the following methods:
Click the insert button on the status chart toolbar and select "Row".
From the Insert area of the Edit menu ribbon strip, click the "Row" button.
Right-click a cell in the status chart to bring up a context menu, and select the menu
command Insert > Row.
The new row is inserted above the current location of the cursor in the status chart.
You can also place the cursor in the last cell of the last row and press the DOWN
ARROW key to insert a row at the bottom of the status chart.
Building a status chart from a section of program code

Highlight a selection of networks in the program editor, right-click, and select "Create Status
Chart" from the context menu. The new chart contains an entry for each unique operand in
the selected region for which status can be gathered. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART places the
entries in the order of their occurrence in the program, gives the chart a default name, and
adds this chart after the last tab in the status chart editor.
When creating a chart from the program editor, note that only the first 150 addresses can be
added each time you select "Create Status Chart". After STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART creates
the status chart, you can edit the chart entries.
S7-200 SMART
10.4 Forcing specific values
You can also add an entry to a status chart by pressing the Ctrl key and dragging an
operand from the LAD or FBD program editor to the status chart. From STL, you can select
an address and drag it to a status chart.
Additionally, you can also copy and paste data from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Note
A project can store a maximum of 32 status charts.
Copying symbols from the symbol table to a status chart

You can copy addresses or symbol names from the symbol table and paste them into the
status chart to build your chart more quickly.
10.4 Forcing specific values

The CPU allows you to force any or all of the I/O points (I and Q bits). In addition, you can
also force up to 16 memory values (V or M) or analog I/O values (AI or AQ). V memory or
M memory values can be forced in bytes, words, or double words. Analog values are forced
as words only, on even-numbered byte boundaries, such as AIW6 or AQW14. All forced
values are stored in the non-volatile memory of the CPU.
Because the forced data might be changed during the scan cycle (either by the program, by
the I/O update cycle, or by the communication-processing cycle), the CPU reapplies the
forced values at various times in the scan cycle.
Reading the inputs: The CPU applies the forced values to the inputs as they are read.
Executing the control logic in the program: The CPU applies the forced values to all
immediate I/O accesses. Forced values are applied for up to 16 memory values after the
program has been executed.
Processing any communications requests: The CPU applies the forced values to all
read/write communications accesses.
Writing to the outputs: The CPU applies the forced values to the outputs as they are
written.
Note
The Force function overrides a Read Immediate or Write Immediate instruction. The
Force function also overrides the STOP mode values that you configured in the system
block. If the CPU goes to STOP mode, the output reflects the forced value and not the
STOP mode value that you configured for the output in the system block.
S7-200 SMART
10.5 Writing and forcing outputs in STOP mode
You can use the status chart to force values.

1. To force a new value, enter the value in the New Value column of the Status Chart, then
click the Force button on the status chart toolbar, or right-click in the New Value
column and select "Force" from the context menu.
2. To force an existing value, select the value in the Current Value column and click the
Force button on the status chart toolbar, or right-click the value in the Current Value
column and select "Force" from the context menu.
10.5 Writing and forcing outputs in STOP mode

To enable Write and Force functions while in STOP mode, click the "Force in Stop" button
from the Settings area of the Debug menu ribbon strip.
The S7-200 SMART PLCs support writing and forcing outputs (both analog and digital) while
the PLC is in STOP mode. However, as a safety precaution, you must specifically enable
this functionality in STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART with the "Force in Stop" setting.
WARNING
Effect on process equipment of writing or forcing outputs
If the S7-200 SMART PLC is connected to equipment when you write or force an output,
these changes can be transmitted to the equipment. This could result in unanticipated
activity in the equipment, which could also cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/
or property damage.
Only write or force outputs when your process equipment can safely accept those changes.
Each time you open STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, the menu option for "Force in Stop"
defaults to unselected, and you are prevented from writing or forcing outputs while the PLC
is in STOP mode. Selecting the menu option enables writing and forcing for the current
editing session with the current project. When you open a different project, "Force in Stop"
returns to its default state and you are prevented from either writing or forcing output
addresses while the PLC is in STOP mode.
S7-200 SMART
10.6 How to execute a limited number of scans
10.6 How to execute a limited number of scans

You can specify that the PLC execute your program for a limited number of scans (from 1
scan to 65,535 scans). By selecting the number of scans for the PLC to run, you can monitor
the program as it changes the process variables.
On the first scan, the value of SM0.1 is one (ON).
Before executing a single scan or multiple scans, change the PLC to STOP mode (Page 36)
if the PLC is not already in STOP mode.
Executing a single scan

To execute a single scan, click the "Execute Single" button from the Scan area of the Debug
menu ribbon strip.
Executing multiple scans

To execute multiple scans, follow these steps:
1. Click the "Execute Multiple" button from the Scan area of the Debug menu ribbon strip.
The Execute Scans dialog box appears.
2. Enter a value for the desired number of scans, and click "Start" to execute the number of
scans you entered.
Note
When you are ready to resume normal program operation, change the PLC back to RUN
mode (Page 36).
S7-200 SMART
10.7 Hardware troubleshooting guide
See also
Overview of debugging and monitoring features (Page 453)
How to display status in the editor windows (Page 456)
How to display status in a status chart (Page 460)
How to download a program (Page 75)
Timestamp mismatch error (Page 663) (ensuring that project in programming device
matches project in PLC)
Cross reference and element usage (Page 454) (ensuring that program edits do not cause
duplicate assignments)
Forcing values (Page 462)
Forcing outputs in STOP mode (Page 463)
Table 10- 1 Troubleshooting guide for the S7-200 SMART hardware
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Outputs stop working The device being controlled has When connecting to an inductive load
caused an electrical surge that dam- (such as a motor or relay), a proper
aged the output suppression circuit should be used.
Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chap-
ter 3.
Wiring loose or incorrect Check wiring and correct
Excessive load Check load against contact ratings
Output point is forced Check the CPU for forced I/O
ERROR light on the CPU turns on Electrical noise Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chap-
(Red) ter 3. It is very important that the con-
trol panel is connected to a good
ground and that high voltage wiring is
not run in parallel with low voltage
wiring.
Connect the M terminal on the 24 V DC
Sensor Power Supply to ground
Component damage Send in hardware for repair or re-
placement
None of the CPU LEDs turn on Blown fuse Use a line analyzer and monitor the
input power to check the magnitude
and duration of the over-voltage spikes.
Based on this information, add the
proper type surge arrestor device to
your power wiring.
Reversed 24 V power wires Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chap-
S7-200 SMART
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Incorrect voltage ter 3 for information about installing the
field wiring.
Intermittent operation associated with Improper grounding Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chap-
high energy devices ter 3.
Routing of wiring within the control It is very important that the control
cabinet panel is connected to a good ground
and that high voltage wiring is not run
in parallel with low voltage wiring.
Connect the M terminal on the 24 V DC
Sensor Power Supply to ground.
Time delay on input filters too short Increase the input filter delay in the
system data block.
Serial communications (RS-485 or RS- The communications cable can provide Refer to the wiring guidelines in
232) are damaged when connecting to a path for unwanted currents if all non- Chapter 3 and to the network guide-
an external device. isolated devices, such as PLCs, com- lines in Chapter 8.
Either the port on the external device or puters, or other devices do not share
the same network circuit common ref- Purchase network isolators or iso-
the port on the CPU is damaged.
erence. The unwanted currents can lated RS485-to-RS485 repeaters
cause communications errors or dam- when you connect devices that do
age to electric circuits. not have a common electrical refer-
ence.
Refer to Appendix F for information
about article numbers for S7-
200 SMART equipment.
Other communications problems Refer to Chapter 8 for information
(STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART) about network communications.
Error handling Refer to Appendix C for information
about error codes.
S7-200 SMART
PID loops and tuning 11
PID auto-tune capability is incorporated into the CPU, and STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART adds
a PID Tune control panel. Together, these two features greatly enhance the utility and ease-
of-use of the PID function provided.
You can initiate auto-tune in the user program, from an operator panel, or by the PID Tune
control panel. The PID Auto-Tuner computes suggested (near optimum) values for the gain,
integral time (reset), and derivative time (rate) tuning values. You can select tuning for fast,
medium, slow, or very slow response of your loop.
With the PID Tune control panel, you can initiate the auto-tuning process, abort the auto-
tuning process, and monitor the results in a graphical form. The control panel displays any
error conditions or warnings that might be generated. You can apply the gain, reset, and rate
values computed by auto-tune.
The purpose of the PID Auto-Tuner is to determine a set of tuning parameters that provide a
reasonable approximation to the optimum values for your loop. Starting with the suggested
tuning values will allow you to make fine tuning adjustments and truly optimize your process.
The auto-tuning algorithm used in the CPU is based upon a technique called relay feedback
suggested by K. J. strm and T. Hgglund in 1984. Over the past twenty years, relay
feedback has been used across a wide variety of industries.
The relay feedback concept produces a small, but sustained oscillation in an otherwise
stable process. Based upon the period of the oscillations and the amplitude changes
observed in the process variable, the ultimate frequency and the ultimate gain of the process
are determined. Then, using the ultimate gain and ultimate frequency values, the PID Auto-
tuner suggests a value for the gain, reset, and rate tuning values.
The values suggested depend upon your selection for speed of response of the loop for your
process. You can select fast, medium, slow, or very slow response. Depending upon your
process, a fast response can overshoot and corresponds to an underdamped tuning
condition. A medium speed response can be on the verge of overshoot and corresponds to a
critically-damped tuning condition. A slow response cannot have any overshoot and
corresponds to an overdamped tuning condition. A very slow response cannot have
overshoot and corresponds to a heavily overdamped tuning condition.
In addition to suggesting tuning values, the PID Auto-tuner can automatically determine the
values for hysteresis and peak PV deviation. You use these parameters to reduce the effect
of the process noise, while limiting the amplitude of the sustained oscillations set up by the
PID Auto-Tuner.
The PID Auto-Tuner can determine suggested tuning values for both direct-acting and
reverse-acting P, PI, PD, and PID loops.
S7-200 SMART
PID loops and tuning
11.1 PID loop definition table

Eighty (80) bytes are allocated for the loop table from the starting address you enter for
Table (TBL) in the PID instruction box. The PID instruction for the S7-200 SMART CPU
references this loop table that contains the loop parameters.
If you use the PID Tune control panel, all interaction with the PID loop table is handled for
you by the control panel. If you need to provide auto-tuning capability from an operator
panel, your program must provide the interaction between the operator and the PID loop
table to initiate and monitor the auto-tuning process, and then apply the suggested tuning
values.
Table 11- 1 Loop table

0 Process variable (PVn) REAL In Contains the process variable, which must be scaled
between 0.0 and 1.0.
4 Setpoint (SPn) REAL In Contains the setpoint, which must be scaled between
0.0 and 1.0.
8 Output (Mn) REAL In/Out Contains the calculated output, scaled between 0.0 and
1.0.
12 Gain (KC) REAL In Contains the gain, which is a proportional constant. Can
be a positive or negative number.
16 Sample time (TS) REAL In Contains the sample time, in seconds. Must be a posi-
tive number.
20 Integral time or reset (TI) REAL In Contains the integral time or reset, in minutes.
24 Derivative time or rate REAL In Contains the derivative time or rate, in minutes.
(TD)
28 Bias (MX) REAL In/Out Contains the bias or integral sum value between 0.0 and
1.0.
32 Previous process varia- REAL In/Out Contains the value of the process variable stored from
ble (PVn-1) the last execution of the PID instruction.
36 PID Extended Table ID ASCII Constant 'PIDA' (PID Extended Table, Version A): ASCII constant
40 AT Control (ACNTL) BYTE In See the following table
41 AT Status (ASTAT) BYTE Out See the following table
42 AT Result (ARES) BYTE In/Out See the following table
43 AT Config (ACNFG) BYTE In See the following table
44 Deviation (DEV) REAL In Normalized value of the maximum PV oscillation ampli-
tude (range: 0.025 to 0.25).
S7-200 SMART

48 Hysteresis (HYS) REAL In Normalized value of the PV hysteresis used to deter-
mine zero crossings (range: 0.005 to 0.1). If the ratio of
DEV to HYS is less than 4, a warning will be indicated
during auto-tune.
52 Initial Output Step REAL In Normalized size of the step change in the output value
(STEP) used to induce oscillations in the PV (range: 0.05 to
0.4).
56 Watchdog Time (WDOG) REAL In Maximum time allowed between zero crossings in sec-
onds (range: 60 to 7200).
60 Suggested Gain (AT_KC) REAL Out Suggested loop gain as determined by the auto-tune
process.
64 Suggested Integral Time REAL Out Suggested integral time as determined by the auto-tune
(AT_TI) process.
68 Suggested Derivative REAL Out Suggested derivative time as determined by the auto-
Time (AT_TD) tune process.
72 Actual Step size REAL Out Normalized output step size value as determined by the
(ASTEP) auto-tune process.
76 Actual Hysteresis REAL Out Normalized PV hysteresis value as determined by the
(AHYS) auto-tune process.
S7-200 SMART
Table 11- 2 Expanded description of control and status fields
Field Description
AT Control (ACNTL)
Input - Byte
EN Set to 1 to start auto-tune; set to 0 to abort auto-tune

AT Status (ASTAT)
Output - Byte
W0 Warning: The deviation setting is not four times greater than the hysteresis set-
ting.
W1 Warning: Inconsistent process deviations may result in incorrect adjustment of the
output step value.
W2 Warning: Actual average deviation is not four times greater than the hysteresis
setting.
AH Auto-hysteresis calculation in progress:
0 - not in progress
1 - in progress
IP Auto-tune in progress:
0 - not in progress
1 - in progress
Each time an auto-tune sequence is started the CPU clears the warning bits and sets the in
progress bit. Upon completion of auto-tune, the CPU clears the in progress bit.
AT Result (ARES)
Input/Output - Byte
Result code
D Done bit:
0 - auto-tune not complete
1 - auto-tune complete
Must be set to 0 before auto-tune can start
Result 00 - completed normally (suggested tuning values available)
Code 01 - aborted by the user
02 - aborted, watchdog timed out waiting for a zero crossing
03 - aborted, process (PV) out-of-range
04 - aborted, maximum hysteresis value exceeded
05 - aborted, illegal configuration value detected
06 - aborted, numeric error detected
07 - aborted, PID instruction executed without having power flow (loop in manual
mode)
08 - aborted, auto-tuning allowed only for P, PI, PD, or PID loops
09 to 7F - reserved
S7-200 SMART
Field Description
AT Config (ACNFG)
Input - Byte
R1 R0 Dynamic response
0 0 Fast response
0 1 Medium response
1 0 Slow response
1 1 Very slow response
DS Deviation setting:
0 - use deviation value from loop table
1 - determine deviation value automatically
HS Hysteresis setting:
0 - use hysteresis value from loop table
1 - determine hysteresis value automatically
Note
The standard PID instruction (Page 268) is not used directly by projects with PID wizard
configurations. If you use a PID wizard configuration, then your program must use
"PIDx_CTRL", to activate the PID wizard subroutine.
To simplify the use of PID loop control in your application, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
provides a PID wizard (Page 269) to configure your PID loops.
S7-200 SMART
11.2 Prerequisites
11.2 Prerequisites
The loop that you want to auto-tune must be in automatic mode. The loop output must be
controlled by the execution of the PID instruction. Auto-tune will fail if the loop is in manual
mode.
Before initiating an auto-tune operation, your process must be brought to a stable state
which means that the PV has reached setpoint (or for a P-type loop, a constant difference
between PV and setpoint) and the output is not changing erratically.
Ideally, the loop output value needs to be near the center of the control range when auto-
tuning is started. The auto-tune procedure sets up an oscillation in the process by making
small step changes in the loop output. If the loop output is close to either extreme of its
control range, the step changes introduced in the auto-tune procedure can cause the output
value to attempt to exceed the minimum or the maximum range limit.
If this happens, the generation of an auto-tune error condition results, and the determination
of less than near optimal suggested values certainly results.
11.3 Auto-hysteresis and auto-deviation
Hysteresis parameter
The hysteresis parameter specifies the excursion (plus or minus) from setpoint that the PV
(process variable) is allowed to make without causing the relay controller to change the
output. This value is used to minimize the effect of noise in the PV signal to more accurately
determine the natural oscillation frequency of the process.
If you select to automatically determine the hysteresis value, the PID Auto-Tuner will enter a
hysteresis determination sequence. This sequence involves sampling the process variable
for a period of time and then performing a standard deviation calculation on the sample
results.
In order to have a statistically meaningful sample, a set of at least 100 samples must be
acquired. For a loop with a sample time of 200 msec, acquiring 100 samples takes 20
seconds. For loops with a longer sample time it will take longer. Even though 100 samples
can be acquired in less than 20 seconds for loops with sample times less than 200 msec, the
hysteresis determination sequence always acquires samples for at least 20 seconds.
Once all the samples have been acquired, the standard deviation for the sample set is
calculated. The hysteresis value is defined to be two times the standard deviation. The
calculated hysteresis value is written into the actual hysteresis field (AHYS) of the loop table.
Note
While the auto-hysteresis sequence is in progress, the normal PID calculation is not
performed. Therefore, it is imperative that the process be in a stable state prior to initiating
an auto-tune sequence. This will yield a better result for the hysteresis value and it will
ensure that the process does not go out of control during the auto-hysteresis determination
sequence.
S7-200 SMART
11.4 Auto-tune sequence
Deviation parameter
The deviation parameter specifies the desired peak-to-peak swing of the PV around the
setpoint. If you select to automatically determine this value, the desired deviation of the PV is
computed by multiplying the hysteresis value by 4.5. The output will be driven proportionally
to induce this magnitude of oscillation in the process during auto-tuning.

The auto-tuning sequence begins after the hysteresis and deviation values have been
determined. The tuning process begins when the initial output step is applied to the loop
output.
This change in output value causes a corresponding change in the value of the process
variable. When the output change drives the PV away from setpoint far enough to exceed
the hysteresis boundary, a zero-crossing event is detected by the auto-tuner. Upon each
zero-crossing event, the auto-tuner drives the output in the opposite direction.
The tuner continues to sample the PV and waits for the next zero-crossing event. The tuner
requires a total of twelve zero-crossings to complete the sequence. The magnitude of the
observed peak-to-peak PV values (peak error) and the rate at which zero-crossings occur
are directly related to the dynamics of the process.
Early in the auto-tuning process, the output step value is proportionally adjusted once to
induce subsequent peak-to-peak swings of the PV to more closely match the desired
deviation amount. Once the adjustment is made, the new output step amount is written into
the Actual Step Size field (ASTEP) of the loop table.
If the time between zero-crossings exceeds the zero-crossing watchdog interval time, the
auto-tuning sequence is terminated with an error. The default value for the zero-crossing
watchdog interval time is two hours.
The following figure shows the output and process variable behaviors during an auto-tuning
sequence on a direct acting loop. You use the PID Tune control panel to initiate and monitor
the tuning sequence.
S7-200 SMART
Notice how the auto-tuner switches the output to cause the process (as evidenced by the PV
value) to undergo small oscillations. The frequency and the amplitude of the PV oscillations
are indicative of the process gain and natural frequency.
Based upon the information collected about the frequency and gain of the process during the
auto-tune process, the ultimate gain and ultimate frequency values are calculated. From
these values, the suggested values for gain (loop gain), reset (integral time), and rate
(derivative time) are calculated.
Note
Your loop type determines which tuning values are calculated by the auto-tuner. For
example, for a PI loop, the auto-tuner will calculate gain and integral time values, but the
suggested derivative time will be 0.0 (no derivative action).
Once the auto-tune sequence has completed, the output of the loop is returned to its initial
value. The next time the loop is executed, the normal PID calculation will be performed.
S7-200 SMART
11.5 Exception conditions
11.5 Exception conditions
Warning conditions
Tuning execution can generate three warning conditions. Tuning execution reports these
warnings in three bits of the ASTAT field of the loop table, and, once set, these bits remain
set until the next auto-tune sequence is initiated:
Warning 0: Generated if the deviation value is not at least 4X greater than the hysteresis
value. This check is performed when the hysteresis value is actually known, which
depends upon the auto-hysteresis setting.
Warning 1: Generated if there is more than an 8X difference between the two peak error
values gathered during the first 2.5 cycles of the auto-tune procedure
Warning 2: Generated if the measured average peak error is not at least 4X greater than
the hysteresis value
Error conditions
In addition to the warning conditions, several error conditions are possible. The following
table lists the error conditions, along with a description of the cause of each error.
Table 11- 3 Error conditions during tuning execution
Result code (in ARES) Condition

01 aborted by user EN bit cleared while tuning is in progress
02 aborted due to a zero-crossing watchdog Half-cycle elapsed time exceeds zero-crossing watchdog interval
timeout
03 aborted due to the process out-of-range PV goes out-of-range:
during the auto-hysteresis sequence, or
twice before the fourth zero-crossing, or
after the fourth zero crossing
04 aborted due to hysteresis value exceeding User-specified hysteresis value, or
maximum automatically determined hysteresis value > maximum
05 aborted due to illegal configuration value The following range checking errors:
Initial loop output value is < 0.0 or > 1.0
User-specified deviation value is <= hysteresis value, or is >
maximum
Initial output step is <= 0.0 or is > maximum
Zero-crossing watchdog interval time is < minimum
Sample time value in loop table is negative
06 aborted due to a numeric error Illegal floating point number or divide by zero encountered
07 PID instruction was executed with no power PID instruction executed with no power flow while auto-tuning is in
flow (manual mode) progress or is requested
08 auto-tuning allowed only for P, PI, PD, or PID Loop type is not P, PI, PD, or PID
loops
S7-200 SMART
11.6 Notes concerning PV out-of-range (result code 3)
11.6 Notes concerning PV out-of-range (result code 3)

The process variable is considered to be in-range by the auto-tuner if its value is greater
than 0.0 and less than 1.0.
If the PV is detected to be out-of-range during the auto-hysteresis sequence, then the tuning
is immediately aborted with a process out-of-range error result.
If the PV is detected to be out-of-range between the starting point of the tuning sequence
and the fourth zero-crossing, then the output step value is cut in half and the tuning
sequence is restarted from the beginning. If a second PV out-of-range event is detected after
the first zero-crossing following the restart, then the tuning is aborted with a process out-of-
range error result.
Any PV out-of-range event occurring after the fourth zero-crossing results in an immediate
abort of the tuning and a generation of a process out-of-range error result.
11.7 PID Tune control panel

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART includes a PID Tune control panel that allows you to graphically
monitor the behavior of your PID loops. In addition, the control panel allows you to initiate the
auto-tune sequence, abort the sequence, and apply the suggested tuning values or your own
tuning values.
To use the control panel, you must be communicating with the CPU and a wizard-generated
configuration for a PID loop must exist in the CPU. The CPU must be in RUN mode for the
control panel to display the operation of a PID loop.
To open the PID control panel, use one of the following methods:
Click the "PID Control Panel" button from the Tools area of the Tools menu ribbon strip.
Open the Tools folder in the project tree, select the "PID Tune Control Panel" node and
press Enter; or double-click the "PID Tune Control Panel" node.
S7-200 SMART
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART opens the PID control panel if the connected CPU is in RUN
mode:
The PID control panel includes the following fields:

Current values: The values of the SP (Setpoint), PV (Process Variable), OUT (Output),
Sample Time, Gain, Integral time, and Derivative time are displayed. The SP, PV, OUT
are shown in green, red, and blue, respectively; the same color legend is used to plot the
PV, SP, and OUT values.
Graphical display: The graphical display shows color-coded plots of the PV, SP, and
Output as a function of time. The PV and SP share the same vertical scale which is
located at the left hand side of the graph while the vertical scale for the output is located
on the right hand side of the graph.
Tuning Parameters: At the bottom left-hand side of the screen are the Tuning Parameters
(Minutes). Here, the Gain, Integral Time, and Derivative Time values are displayed. You
click in the "Calculated" column to modify any one of the three sources for these values.
"Update CPU" button: You can use the" Update CPU" button to transfer the displayed
Gain, Integral Time, and Derivative Time values to the CPU for the PID loop that is being
monitored. You can use the "Start" button to initiate an auto-tuning sequence. Once an
auto-tuning sequence has started, the "Start" button becomes a "Stop" button.
S7-200 SMART
Sampling: In the "Sampling" area, you can select the graphical display sampling rate from
1 to 480 seconds per sample.
You can freeze the graph by clicking the "Pause" button. Click the "Resume" button to
resume sampling data at the selected rate. To clear the graph, select "Clear" from the
right-mouse button within the graph.
Advanced Options: You can use the "Options" button to further configure parameters for
the auto-tuning process. (See the figure below.)
From the advanced screen, you can check the box that causes the auto-tuner to
automatically determine the values for the Hysteresis and Deviation (default setting), or
you can enter the values for these fields that minimize the disturbance to your process
during the auto-tune procedure.
In the "Dynamic Response" field, use the dropdown button to select the type of loop
response (Fast, Medium, Slow, or Very Slow) that you wish to have for your process.
Depending upon your process, a fast response may have overshoot and would
correspond to an underdamped tuning condition. A medium speed response may be on
the verge of having overshoot and would correspond to a critically damped tuning
condition. A slow response may not have any overshoot and would correspond to an
overdamped tuning condition. A very slow response may not have overshoot and would
correspond to a heavily overdamped tuning condition.
Once you have made the desired selections, click OK to return to the main screen of the
PID Tune Control Panel.
S7-200 SMART
Loop monitoring
After you have completed the auto-tune sequence and have transferred the suggested
tuning parameters to the CPU, you can use the control panel to monitor your loop's response
to a step change in the setpoint.
In the figure below, the loop responds to a setpoint change with the original tuning
parameters (before running auto-tune). Notice the overshoot and the long, damped ringing
behavior of the process using the original tuning parameters.
S7-200 SMART
The loop responds to the same setpoint change after applying the values determined by the
auto-tune process using the selection for a fast response. Notice that for this process there is
no overshoot, but there is just a little bit of ringing.
To eliminate the ringing at the expense of the speed of response, select a medium or a slow
response and re-run the auto-tuning process.
After you have a good starting point for the tuning parameters for your loop, you can use the
control panel to tweak the parameters. Then you can monitor the loop's response to a
setpoint change. In this way, you can fine tune your process for an optimum response in
your application.
To simplify the use of PID loop control in your application, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
provides a PID wizard (Page 269) to configure your PID loops.
S7-200 SMART
Open loop motion control 12
The S7-200 SMART CPU provides three methods of open loop motion control:
Pulse Train Output (PTO): Built into the CPU for speed and position control. See Pulse
Output instruction. (Note: There is no PTO wizard available. Use the Motion wizard
instead.)
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Built into the CPU for speed, position, or duty cycle
control. See Pulse Output instruction.
Axis of Motion: Built into the CPU for speed and position control
The CPU provides three digital outputs (Q0.0, Q0.1, and Q0.3) that you can configure as
PTO or PWM outputs by the PLS Instruction, PWM outputs by the PWM wizard, or as motion
control outputs by the Motion wizard.
When you configure an output for PTO operation, the CPU generates aa 50% duty cycle
pulse train for open loop control of the speed and position for either stepper motors or servo
motors. The built-in PTO function only provides the pulse train output. Direction and limit
controls must be supplied by your application program using I/O built into the PLC or
provided by expansion modules.
When you configure an output for PWM operation, the CPU fixes the cycle time of the
output, and your program controls the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse. You can use the
variations in pulse width to control the speed or position in your application.
The Axis of Motion provides a single pulse train output with integrated direction control and
disable outputs. It also includes programmable inputs which allow the CPU to be configured
for several modes of operation, including automatic reference point seek. The Axis of Motion
provides a unified solution for open loop control of the speed and position for either stepper
motors or servo motors.
To simplify the use of motion control in your application, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
provides a Motion wizard to configure Axis of Motion and a PWM wizard to configure PWM.
The wizards generate motion instructions that you can use to provide dynamic control of
speed and motion in your application. For the Axis of Motion, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
also provides a control panel that allows you to control, monitor, and test your motion
operations.
S7-200 SMART
Open loop motion control
12.1 Using the PWM output

PWM provides a fixed cycle time output with a variable duty cycle. The PWM output runs
continuously after being started at the specified frequency (cycle time). The pulse width is
varied as required to affect the desired control. Duty cycle can be expressed as a
percentage of the cycle time or as a time value corresponding to pulse width. The pulse
width can vary from 0% (no pulse, always off) to 100% (no pulse, always on). See the
following figure.
Since the PWM output can be varied from 0% to 100%, it provides a digital output that in
many ways is analogous to an analog output. For example the PWM output can be used to
control the speed of a motor from stop to full speed or it can be used to control the position
of a valve from closed to full open.
12.1.1 Configuring the PWM output

To configure one of the built-in outputs for PWM control, use the PWM wizard.
S7-200 SMART
Use one of the following methods to open the PWM wizard:

Click the "PWM" button from the Wizards area of the Tools menu.
Open the Wizards folder in the project tree and double-click "PWM", or select "PWM" and
press the Enter key.
1. Select a pulse generator.
2. Change the name of a PWM channel, if required.
3. Configure the PWM channel output time base.
4. Generate project components.
5. Use the PWMx_RUN subroutine to control the duty cycle of your PWM output.
Note
PWM channels are hard-coded to specific outputs:
PWM0 is assigned to Q0.0.
12.1.2 PWMx_RUN subroutine

To simplify the use of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control in your application,
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a PWM wizard (Page 482) to configure your on-board
PWM generators and control the duty cycle of a PWM output.
The PWMx_RUN subroutine is used to execute PWM under program control.

CALL PWMx_RUN, Cycle, Pulse, Error The PWMx_RUN subroutine allows you to
control the duty cycle of the output by vary-
ing the pulse width from 0 to the pulse
width of the cycle time.
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 1 Parameters for the PWMx_RUN subroutine
Inputs/Outputs Data types Operands

Cycle, Pulse Word IW, QW, VW, MW, SMW, SW, T, C, LW, AC, AIW, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Error Byte IB, QB, VB, MBV, SMB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
The Cycle input is a word value that defines the cycle time for the pulse width modulation
(PWM) output. The allowed range is from 2 to 65535 when milliseconds is the time base and
10 to 65535 when microseconds is the time base.
The Pulse input is a word value that defines the pulse width (Duty Cycle) for the PWM
output. The allowed range of values is from 0 to 65535 units of the time base (microseconds
or milliseconds) that was specified within the PWM wizard.
The Error is a byte value returned by the PWMx_RUN subroutine that indicates the result of
execution. See the following table for a description of the possible error codes.
Table 12- 2 PWMx_RUN instruction error codes

0 No error, normal completion
131 Pulse generator already in use by another PWM or by a motion axis, or illegal time base change
S7-200 SMART
12.2 Using motion control

The motion control built into the CPU uses an Axis of Motion to control both the speed and
motion of a stepper motor or a servo motor.
Using the Axis of Motion requires expertise in the field of motion control. This chapter is not
meant to educate the novice in this subject. However, it provides fundamental information
that will help as you use the Motion wizard to configure the Axis of Motion for your
application.
12.2.1 Maximum and start/stop speeds
The Motion wizard prompts you for the maximum

speed (MAX_SPEED) and Start/Stop Speed
(SS_SPEED) for your application.
MAX_SPEED
SS_SPEED
MAX_SPEED: Enter the value for the optimum operating speed of your application within
the torque capability of your motor. The torque required to drive the load is determined by
friction, inertia, and the acceleration/deceleration times.
The Motion wizard calculates and displays the minimum speed that can be controlled by
the Axis of Motion based upon the MAX_SPEED that you specify.
SS_SPEED: Enter a value within the capability of your motor to drive your load at low
speeds. If the SS_SPEED value is too low, the motor and load could vibrate or move in
short jumps at the beginning and end of travel. If the SS_SPEED value is too high, the
motor could lose pulses on start up, and the load could overdrive the motor when
attempting to stop.
S7-200 SMART
Motor data sheets have different ways of specifying the start/stop (or pull-in/pull-out) speed
for a motor and given load. Typically, a useful SS_SPEED value is 5% to 15% of the
MAX_SPEED value. To help you select the correct speeds for your application, refer to the
data sheet for your motor. The following figure shows a typical motor torque/speed curve.
Torque required to drive the load

Motor torque versus speed characteristic
Start/Stop speed versus torque: This curve moves towards lower speed as the load inertia
increases.
Maximum speed that the motor can drive the load: MAX_SPEED should not exceed this value.
Start/Stop speed (SS_SPEED) for this load
12.2.2 Entering the acceleration and deceleration times
As part of the configuration, you set the

acceleration and deceleration times. The
default setting for both the acceleration
time and the deceleration time is 1 sec-
ond. Typically, motors can work with
less than 1 second. See the following
figure.
MAX_SPEED
SS_SPEED
ACCEL_TIME
DECEL_TIME
Note
Motor acceleration and deceleration times are determined by trial and error. You should start
by entering a large value. Optimize these settings for the application by gradually reducing
the times until the motor starts to stall.
S7-200 SMART
Specify the following times in milliseconds:

ACCEL_TIME: Time required for the motor to accelerate from SS_SPEED to
MAX_SPEED. Default = 1000 ms
DECEL_TIME: Time required for the motor to decelerate from MAX_SPEED to
SS_SPEED. Default = 1000 ms
12.2.3 Configuring the motion profiles

A profile is a pre-defined motion description consisting of one or more speeds of movement
that effect a change in position from a starting point to an ending point. You do not have to
define a profile in order to use the Axis of Motion. The Motion wizard provides instructions for
you to use to control moves without running a profile.
A profile is programmed in steps consisting of an acceleration/deceleration to a target speed
followed by a fixed number of pulses at the target speed. In the case of single step moves or
the last step in a move, there is also a deceleration from the target speed (last target speed)
to stop.
The Axis of Motion supports a maximum of 32 profiles.
Defining the motion profile

The Motion wizard guides you through a motion profile definition, where you define each
motion profile for your application. For each profile, you select the operating mode and
define the specifics of each individual step for the profile. The Motion wizard also allows you
to define a symbolic name for each profile by simply entering the symbol name as you define
the profile.
S7-200 SMART
Selecting the mode of operation for the profile

You configure the profile according to the mode of operation desired. The Axis of Motion
supports absolute position, relative position, single-speed continuous rotation, and two-
speed continuous rotation. The following figure shows the different modes of operation.
Mode selections for the Axis of Motion

Absolute Position Single-Speed, Continuous Rotation
Single-speed, Continuous Rotation, with triggered Relative Position

stop
Two-Speed, Continuous Rotation
S7-200 SMART
Mode selections for the Axis of Motion

Two-Speed, Continuous Rotation, with triggered stop
Creating the steps of the profile
A step is a fixed distance that a tool

moves, including the distance covered
during acceleration and deceleration
times. The Axis of Motion supports a max-
imum of 16 steps in each profile.
You specify the target speed and ending position or number of pulses for each step.
Additional steps are entered one at a time. The figure illustrates a one-step, two-step, three-
step, and a four-step profile.
Notice that a one-step profile has one constant speed segment, a two-step profile has two
constant speed segments, and so on. The number of steps in the profile matches the
number of constant speed segments of the profile.
S7-200 SMART
12.3 Features of motion control

Motion control provides the functionality and performance that you need for open-loop
position control in up to three Axes of Motion:
Provides high-speed control, with a range from 20 pulses per second up to 100,000
pulses per second
Supports both jerk (S curve) or linear acceleration and deceleration
Provides a configurable measuring system that allows you to enter data either as
engineering units (such as inches or centimeters) or as a number of pulses
Provides configurable backlash compensation
Supports absolute, relative, and manual methods of position control
Provides continuous operation
Provides up to 32 motion profiles, with up to 16 speed changes per profile
Provides four different reference-point seek modes, with a choice of the starting seek
direction and the final approach direction for each sequence
Provides support for SINAMICS V90 drives
You use STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to create all of the configuration and profile information
used by the Axis of Motion. This information is downloaded to the CPU with your program
blocks.
Motion control provides six digital inputs and four digital outputs that provide the interface to
your motion application. See the following table. These inputs and outputs are local to the
CPU. The CPU technical specifications (Page 570) provide detailed information for the CPUs
and include wiring diagrams for connecting each CPU to some of the more common motor
driver/amplifier units.
Table 12- 3 Motion control CPU inputs to configure
Signal Description
STP The STP input causes the CPU to stop the motion in progress. You can select the desired operation of
STP within the Motion wizard.
RPS The RPS (Reference Point Switch) input establishes the reference point or home position for absolute
move operations. In some modes, the RPS input is also used to stop the motion in progress after travel-
ling a specified distance.
ZP The ZP (Zero Pulse) input helps establish the reference point or home position. Typically, the motor
driver/amplifier pulses ZP once per motor revolution.
Note: Only used in RP Seek Modes of 3 and 4.
LMT+ LMT+ and LMT- inputs establish the maximum limits for motion travel. The Motion wizard allows you to
LMT- configure the operation of LMT+ and LMT- inputs.
TRIG The TRIG (Trigger) input causes the CPU, in some modes, to stop the motion in progress after travelling
a specified distance.
S7-200 SMART
WARNING
level input value may need to be presented for up to 12.8 ms accumulated duration before
the filter becomes fully responsive to new inputs. During this time, short "0" pulse events of
duration less than 12.8 ms may not be detected or counted.
This changing of filter times can result in unexpected machine or process operation, which
may cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
To ensure that a new filter time goes immediately into effect, cycle the power of the CPU.
Table 12- 4 Motion control CPU hard-coded outputs
Signal Description
P0 P0 and P1 are pulse outputs that control the movement and direction of movement of the motor.
P1
DIS DIS is an output used to disable or enable the motor driver/amplifier.
S7-200 SMART
12.4 Programming an Axis of Motion
12.4 Programming an Axis of Motion

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides easy-to-use tools for configuring and programming the
Axis of Motion. Simply follow these steps:
1. Configure the Axis of Motion: STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a Motion wizard for
creating the configuration/profile table and the position instructions. See "Configuring the
Axis of Motion" for information about configuring the Axis of Motion.
2. Test the operation of the Axis of Motion: STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a Motion
control panel for testing the wiring of the inputs and outputs, the configuration of the Axis
of Motion, and the operation of the motion profiles. See "Monitoring the Axis of Motion
with the Motion control panel" for information about the Motion control panel.
3. Create the program to be executed by the CPU: The Motion wizard automatically creates
the motion instructions that you insert into your program. See "Instructions created by the
Motion wizard for the Axis of Motion" for information about the motion instructions. Insert
the following instructions into your program:
To enable the Axis of Motion, insert an AXISx_CTRL instruction. Use SM0.0 (Always
On) to ensure that this instruction is executed every scan.
To move the motor to a specific location, use an AXISx_GOTO or an AXISx_RUN
instruction. The AXISx_GOTO instruction moves to a location specified by the inputs
from your program. The AXISx_RUN instruction executes the motion profiles you
configured with the Motion wizard.
To use absolute coordinates for your motion, you must establish the zero position for
your application. Use an AXISx_RSEEK or an AXISx_LDPOS instruction to establish
the zero position.
The other instructions that are created by the Motion wizard provide functionality for
typical applications and are optional for your specific application.
4. Compile your program and download the system block, data block, and program block to
the CPU.
Note
Make sure to match the measurement system configuration to the pulses/revolution and
distance/revolution specifications of your stepper/servo motor controller system.
S7-200 SMART
12.5 Configuring an Axis of Motion
Configuration/profile table
You must create a configuration/profile table for the Axis of Motion in order for the CPU to
control your motion application. The Motion wizard makes the configuration process quick
and easy by leading you step-by-step through the configuration process. Refer to the
"Advanced Topics" section of this chapter for detailed information about the
configuration/profile table.
The Motion wizard also allows you to create the configuration/profile table offline. You can
create the configuration without being connected to a CPU.
Starting the Motion wizard

To start the Motion wizard, either click the Tools icon in the navigation bar and then double-
click the Motion wizard icon, or select the Tools > Motion wizard menu command.
Selecting type of measurement

Select the measurement system: You can select either engineering units or pulses:
If you select pulses, no other information is required.
If you select engineering units, enter the number of pulses required to produce one
revolution of the motor (refer to the data sheet for your motor or drive), the base unit of
measurement (such as inch, foot, millimeter, or centimeter), and the distance traveled in
one revolution of the motor.
If you change the measurement system later, you must delete the entire configuration
including any instructions generated by the Motion wizard. You must then enter your
selections consistent with the new measurement system.
S7-200 SMART
Configuring the input pin locations

You can program inputs related to motion control, to include STP, LMT-, LMT+, RPS, TRIG,
and ZP, with a configuration in SDB0.
Table 12- 5 STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-, TRIG, and ZP pin locations
Pin definition for inputs Description

LMT+, LMT-, STP, RPS, TRIG Input pin 0 of the CPU can act as the LMT+, LMT-, STP, RPS, TRIG
input (I0.0).
Input pin 1 of the CPU can act as the LMT+, LMT-, STP, RPS, TRIG
input (I0.1).
input (I0.2).
input (I0.3).
input (I0.4).
input (I0.5).
input (I0.6).
input (I0.7).
input (I1.0).
input (I1.1).
Input pin 10 of the CPU can act as the LMT+, LMT-, STP, RPS,
TRIG input (I1.2).
Input pin 11 of the CPU can act as the LMT+, LMT-, STP, RPS,
TRIG input (I1.3).
ZP HSC HSC0 of the CPU acts as the ZP input (I0.0).
HSC1 of the CPU acts as the ZP input (I0.1).
Note
After you configure an input to a specific function (for example, RPS) for a particular Axis of
Motion, you cannot use that input for any other Axis of Motion or for any other input, counter,
or interrupt function.
Note
High-speed input wiring must use shielded cables
Use shielded cable with a maximum length of 50 m, when connecting HSC input channels
I0.0, I0.1, I0.2, and I0.3.
S7-200 SMART
Mapping the I/O

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART enforces a fixed output assignment for PWM and Axis of Motion.
P0 and P1 outputs
At a minimum, any axis that is enabled has a P0 output pin configured for it. It may also have
P1 output if its "Phase" configuration is anything other than "Single-phase (1 output)". Refer
to the "Editing default input and output configuration" section for more information. These
output pins are hard-coded to a specific output, depending on the following criteria:
Axis 0 P0 for Axis 0 is always configured for Q0.0.

P1 for Axis 0 is configured for Q0.2 if the "Phase" for the axis is not configured to
"Single phase (1 output)".
P1 for Axis 1 is mapped in two possible locations based upon axis configuration as
follows:
If the "Phase" for Axis 1 is configured for "Single-phase (1 output)", then no P1
output is assigned.
If the "Phase" for Axis 1 is configured for "Two-phase (2 output)" or "AB quadra-
ture phase (2 output)", then P1 is configured for Q0.3.
Else, P1 for Axis 1 is configured for Q0.7.
P1 for Axis 2 is configured for Q1.0 if the "Phase" for the axis is not configured to
"Single phase (1 output)".
Axis 2 is not available for use if the configured "Phase" for Axis 1 is configured to
"Two-phase (2 output)" or "AB quadrature phase (2 output)".
DIS outputs
If an axis has a DIS output configured, then an entry is present in the mapping table for that
output. The DIS output is also hard-coded to specific outputs based upon the following rules:
DIS for Axis 0 is always configured for Q0.4.
Pulse output units are connected to standard 24V outputs.
S7-200 SMART
Editing default input and output configuration

To change or view the default configuration of the integrated inputs/outputs select the
required input/output node:
In the "Active level" field, use the dropdown list to select the active level (High or Low).
When the level is set to High, a logic 1 is read when current is flowing in the input. When
the level is set to Low, a logic 1 is read when there is no current flow in the input. A logic
1 level is always interpreted as meaning the condition is active. The LEDs are illuminated
when current flows in the input, regardless of activation level. (Default = active high)
In the "System Block", "Digital Inputs" node, you can select the filter time constant (0.20
ms to 12.80 ms) for the STP, RPS, LMT+, LMT-, and TRIG inputs. Increasing the filter
time constant eliminates more noise, but it also slows down the response time to a signal
state change. (Default = 6.4 ms)
WARNING
level input value may need to be presented for up to 12.8 ms accumulated duration
before the filter becomes fully responsive to new inputs. During this time, short "0" pulse
events of duration less than 12.8 ms may not be detected or counted.
This changing of filter times can result in unexpected machine or process operation,
which may cause death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
To ensure that a new filter time goes immediately into effect, a power cycle of the CPU
must be applied.
In the "Directional Control" node, you can select the following "Phasing" modes:
Single phase (2 output)
Two-phase (2 output)
AB quadrature phase (2 output)
Single phase (1 output)
You can also select the "Polarity" (positive or negative) of the outputs.
S7-200 SMART
Phasing
You have four options for the "Phasing" interface to the stepper/servo drive. These options
are as follows:
Single phase (2 output): If you select the single phase (2 output) option, then one output
(P0) controls the pulsing, and one output (P1) controls the direction. P1 is high (active) if
pulsing is in the positive direction. P1 is low (inactive) if pulsing is in the negative
direction. Single phase (2 output) is shown in the figure below (assuming positive
polarity):
Two-phase (2 output): If you select the Two-phase (2 output) option, then one output (P0)
pulses for positive directions, and a different output (P1) pulses for negative directions.
Two-phase (2 output) is shown in the figure below (assuming positive polarity):
AB quadrature phase (2 output): If you select the AB quadrature phase (2 output) option,
then both outputs pulse at the speed specified, but 90 degrees out-of-phase. The AB
quadrature phase (2 output) is a 1X configuration, meaning a generated pulse is
measured from one positive transition of the output to the next positive transition of the
same output. In this case, the direction is determined by which output transitions high
first. P0 leads P1 for the positive direction. P1 leads P0 for the negative direction. AB
quadrature phase (2 output) is shown in the figures below (assuming positive polarity):

(Positive polarity): positive rotation (Positive polarity): negative rotation
P0 leads P1 P1 leads P0
S7-200 SMART
Single phase (1 output): If you select the single phase (1 output) option, then the output
(P0) controls the pulsing. Only positive motion commands are accepted by the CPU in
this mode. The Motion wizard restricts you from making illegal negative configurations
when you select this mode. You can save an output if your motion application is in one
direction only. Single phase (1 output) is shown in the figure below (assuming positive
polarity):
Polarity
You can switch positive and negative directions with the "Polarity" parameter. If the motor is
wired in the wrong direction, this is typically done. You can avoid re-wiring the hardware by
setting this parameter to negative. The negative setting changes the output operation as
follows:
Single phase (2 output): P1 is low (inactive) if pulsing is in the positive direction. P1 is
high (active) if pulsing is in the negative direction. This is shown in the figure below:
Two-phase (2 output): P0 pulses for negative directions. P1 pulses for positive directions.
This is shown in the figure below:
S7-200 SMART
AB quadrature phase (2 output): P0 leads P1 for a negative direction. P1 leads P0 for a

positive direction. This is shown in the figure below:

(Negative polarity): positive rotation (Negative polarity): negative rotation
P1 leads P0 P0 leads P1
Single phase (1 output): Negative polarity is not allowed in this phasing mode.
The default setting for the "Directional Control" dialog is "Single phase (2 output)" and
"Positive polarity".
Note
You cannot choose to which pins P0 and P1 are configured; this is hardcoded to a specific
pin. Refer to the Mapping I/O section (preceding this section) for the pin mapping list.
WARNING
Safety precautions when using an Axis of Motion
The limit and stop functions in the Axis of Motion are electronic logic implementations that
do not provide the level of protection provided by electromechanical controls.
Control devices and Axis of Motion functions can fail in unsafe conditions, which can result
in unpredictable operation of controlled equipment. Such unpredictable operations could
result in death or serious personal injury, and/or property damage.
Consider using an emergency stop function, electromechanical overrides, or redundant
safeguards that are independent of the Axis of Motion and the CPU.
Configure response to physical inputs

1. Select the response to the LMT+, the LMT-, and the STP inputs.
2. Use the dropdown list to select: decelerate to a stop (default) or immediate stop.
Entering maximum start and stop speed

Enter the maximum speed (MAX_SPEED) and Start/Stop Speed (SS_SPEED) for your
application.
S7-200 SMART
Entering jog parameters

Enter the JOG_SPEED and the JOG_INCREMENT values:
JOG_SPEED: The JOG_SPEED (Jog speed for the motor) is the maximum speed that
can be obtained while the JOG command remains active.
JOG_INCREMENT: Distance that the tool is moved by a momentary JOG command.
The following figure shows the operation of the Jog command. When the Axis of Motion
receives a Jog command, it starts a timer. If the Jog command is terminated before 0.5
seconds has elapsed, the Axis of Motion moves the tool the amount specified in the
JOG_INCREMENT at the speed defined by JOG_SPEED. If the Jog command is still
active when the 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the Axis of Motion accelerates to the
JOG_SPEED. Motion continues until the Jog command is terminated. The Axis of Motion
then performs a decelerated stop. You can enable the Jog command either from the
Motion Control Panel or with a motion instruction. A representation of a JOG operation is
shown in the figure below.
MAX_SPEED
JOG_SPEED
SS_SPEED
JOG_INCREMENT: JOG command is active for less than 0.5 seconds.
JOG command is active for more than 0.5 seconds.
JOG command is terminated (Starts ramp from JOG_SPEED to SS_SPEED).
The speed reached can be anywhere from the SS_SPEED to the JOG_SPEED, depending
on the length of the JOG_INCREMENT.
Entering acceleration time

Enter the acceleration and deceleration times in the edit boxes.
S7-200 SMART
Entering jerk time

Available on certain types of moves, jerk compensation provides smoother position control
by reducing the jerk (rate of change) in the acceleration and deceleration parts of the motion
profile. See the following figure:
Jerk compensation is also known as "S curve profiling". This compensation is applied equally
to the beginning and ending portions of both the acceleration and deceleration curve. Jerk
compensation is not applied to the initial and final step between zero speed and SS_SPEED.
Specify the jerk compensation by entering a time value (JERK_TIME). This is the time
required for acceleration to change from zero to the maximum acceleration rate. A longer
jerk time yields smoother operation with a smaller increase in total cycle time than would be
obtained by decreasing the ACCEL_TIME and DECEL_TIME. A value of 0 ms (the default
value) indicates that no compensation is to be applied.
Note
A good first value for JERK_TIME is 40% of ACCEL_TIME.
Note
Jerk compensation is not available for two speed moves, manual speed change moves,
aborted moves, and automatic deceleration reactions upon reaching a limit or STP input.
Configuring the Backlash compensation

Backlash compensation: Distance that the motor must move to eliminate the backlash
(slack) in the system on a direction change. Backlash compensation is always a positive
value:
Default = 0
Choose a Reference Point search sequence to use backlash.
S7-200 SMART
Configuring reference point and seek parameters

1. Select using a reference point or not using a reference point for your application:
If your application requires that movements start from or be referenced to an absolute
position, you must establish a reference point (RP) or zero position that fixes the
position measurements to a known point on the physical system.
If a reference point is used, you will want to define a way to automatically relocate the
reference point. The process of automatically locating the reference point is called
Reference Point Seek. Defining the Reference Point Seek process requires two steps
in the wizard.
2. Enter the Reference Point seek speeds (a fast seek speed and a slow seek speed):
RP_FAST is the initial speed the module uses when performing an RP seek
command. Typically, the RP_FAST value is approximately 2/3 of the MAX_SPEED
value.
RP_SLOW is the speed of the final approach to the RP. A slower speed is used on
approach to the RP, so as not to miss it. Typically, the RP_SLOW value is the
SS_SPEED value.
3. Define the initial seek direction and the final reference point approach direction:
RP_SEEK_DIR is the initial direction for the RP seek operation. Typically, this is the
direction from the work zone to the vicinity of the RP. Limit switches play an important
role in defining the region that is searched for the RP. When performing a RP seek
operation, encountering a limit switch can result in a reversal of the direction, which
allows the search to continue. (Default = Negative)
RP_APPR_DIR is the direction of the final approach to the RP. To reduce backlash
and provide more accuracy, the reference point should be approached in the same
direction used to move from the RP to the work zone. (Default = Positive)
4. The Motion wizard provides advanced reference point options that allow you to specify an
RP offset (RP_OFFSET), which is the distance from the RP to the zero position. See the
following figure:
RP_OFFSET: Distance from the RP to the zero position of the physical measuring
system.
Default = 0
S7-200 SMART
5. The Axis of Motion provides a reference point switch (RPS) input that is used when
seeking the RP. The RP is identified by a method of locating an exact position with
respect to the RPS. The RP can be centered in the RPS Active zone, the RP can be
located on the edge of the RPS Active zone, or the RP can be located a specified number
of zero pulse (ZP) input transitions from the edge of the RPS Active zone.
6. You can configure the sequence that the Axis of Motion uses to search for the reference
point. The following figure shows a simplified diagram of the default RP search sequence.
Select one of the following options for the RP search sequence:
RP Seek mode 0: Does not perform a RP seek sequence
RP Seek mode 1: The RP is where the RPS input goes active on the approach from
the work zone side. (Default)
RP Seek mode 2: The RP is centered within the active region of the RPS input.
RP Seek mode 3: The RP is located outside the active region of the RPS input.
RP_Z_CNT specifies how many ZP (Zero Pulse) input counts should be received after
the RPS becomes inactive.
RP Seek mode 4: The RP is generally within the active region of the RPS input.
RP_Z_CNT specifies how many ZP (Zero Pulse) input counts should be received after
the RPS becomes active.
RP seek mode 1
Figure 12-1 : RP seek direction

: RP approach direction
Note
The RPS Active region (which is the distance that the RPS input remains active) must be
greater than the distance required to decelerate from the RP_FAST speed to the RP_SLOW
speed. If the distance is too short, the Axis of Motion generates an error.
S7-200 SMART
Defining the motion profile

1. In the motion profile definition screen, click the new profile button to enable defining the
profile.
2. Choose the desired mode of operation:
For an absolute position profile:
Fill in the target speed and the ending position.
If more than one step is needed, click the new step button and fill in the step
information as required.
For a relative position profile:
Fill in the target speed and the ending position.
If more than one step is needed, click the new step button and fill in the step
information as required.
For a single-speed, continuous rotation:
Enter the target speed value in the edit box.
Select the direction of rotation.
If you wish to terminate the single speed, continuous rotation move using the RPS
input, click the checkbox.
Fill in the distance to move after the RPS input goes active (RPS input must be
enabled).
For a two-speed, continuous rotation (RPS input must be enabled):
Enter the target speed value when RPS is inactive in the edit box.
Enter the target speed value when RPS is active in the edit box.
Select the direction of rotation.
If you wish to terminate the two speed, continuous rotation move using the TRIG input,
click the checkbox. (TRIG input must be enabled.)
Fill in the distance to move after the TRIG input goes active.
3. Define as many profiles and steps as you need to perform the desired movement.
S7-200 SMART
Finishing the configuration

1. After you have configured the operation of the Axis of Motion, you simply click
"Generate".
The Motion wizard performs the following tasks:
Inserts the axis configuration and profile table into the system block and data block for
your CPU program
Creates a global symbol table for the motion parameters
Adds the motion instruction subroutines into the project program block for you to use
in your application
2. You can run the Motion wizard again in order to modify any configuration or profile
information.
Note
Because the Motion wizard makes changes to the program block, the data block, and the
system block, you must download all three blocks to the CPU. Otherwise, the Axis of
Motion will not have all the program components that it needs for proper operation.
S7-200 SMART
12.6 Subroutines created by the Motion wizard for the Axis of Motion
You must ensure for each motion action that only one motion subroutine is active at a time in
addition to the AXISx_CTRL, which must be active every scan. Each motion subroutine is
prefixed with an "AXISx_" where "x" is the axis number channel. There are 13 motion
subroutines.
Motion subroutine Description

AXISx_CTRL Provides initialization and overall control of the axis
(Page 507)
AXISx_MAN Used for manual mode operation of the axis
(Page 509)
AXISx_GOTO Commands the axis to go to a specified location
(Page 510)
AXISx_RUN Commands the axis to execute a configured motion profile
(Page 512)
AXISx_RSEEK Initiates a reference point seek operation
(Page 513)
AXISx_LDOFF Establishes a new zero position that is offset from the reference point position
(Page 514)
AXISx_LDPOS Changes the axis position to a new value
(Page 515)
AXISx_SRATE Modifies the configured acceleration, deceleration, and jerk compensation
(Page 516) times
AXISx_DIS Controls the DIS output
(Page 517)
AXISx_CFG Reads the configuration block and updates the axis setup as required
(Page 518)
AXISx_CACHE Pre-caches a configured motion profile
(Page 519)
AXISx_RDPOS Returns the current axis position
(Page 520)
AXISx_ABSPOS Reads the absolute position value from a SINAMICS V90 servo drive
(Page 521)
Note
The motion subroutines increase the amount of memory required for your program by up to
1700 bytes. You can delete unused motion subroutines to reduce the amount of memory
required. To prevent the generation of unneeded motion subroutines, uncheck the
"Generate" box for each unneeded subroutine in the "Components" node of the Motion
wizard. To restore generation of a particular motion subroutine, start the Motion wizard
again, navigate to the "Components" node, and check the "Generate" box for the subroutine.
Click the "Generate" button to rebuild the wizard-generated subroutines.
See also
Using the Motion wizard (Page 481)
S7-200 SMART
12.6.1 Guidelines for using the Motion subroutines

You must ensure that only one motion subroutine is active at a time.
You can execute the AXISx_RUN and AXISx_GOTO from an interrupt routine as long as the
interrupt is called cyclically. However, it is very important that you do not attempt to start a
motion subroutine in an interrupt routine if the Axis of Motion is busy processing another
command. If you start a subroutine in an interrupt routine, then you can use the outputs of
the AXISx_CTRL subroutine to monitor when the Axis of Motion has completed the
movement.
The Motion wizard automatically configures the values for the speed parameters (Speed and
C_Speed) and the position parameters (Pos or C_Pos) according to the measurement
system that you selected. For pulses, these parameters are DINT values. For engineering
units, the parameters are REAL values for the type of unit that you selected. For example:
selecting centimeters (cm) stores the position parameters as REAL values in centimeters
and stores the speed parameters as REAL values in centimeters per second (cm/sec).
Some "generate" guidelines when using motion subroutines are as follows:
Insert the AXISx_CTRL subroutine in your program, and use the SM0.0 contact to
execute it every scan.
To specify motion to an absolute position, you must first use either an AXISx_RSEEK or
an AXISx_LDPOS subroutine to establish the zero position.
To move to a specific location, based upon inputs from your program, use the
AXISx_GOTO subroutine.
To run the motion profiles you configured with the Motion wizard, use the AXISx_RUN
subroutine.
12.6.2 AXISx_CTRL subroutine
Table 12- 6 AXISx_CTRL

CALL AXISx_CTRL, The AXISx_CTRL subroutine (Control) enables and initializes the Axis
MOD_EN, Done, Error, of Motion by automatically commanding the Axis of Motion to load the
C_Pos, C_Speed, configuration/profile table each time the CPU changes to RUN mode.
C_Dir Use this subroutine only once in your project per motion axis, and en-
sure that your program calls this subroutine every scan. Use SM0.0
(Always On) as the input for the EN parameter.
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 7 Parameters for the AXISx_CTRL subroutine
Inputs/Outputs Data type Operands

MOD_EN BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
Done, C_Dir BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Error BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
C_Pos, C_Speed DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
The MOD_EN parameter must be on to enable the other motion subroutines to send
commands to the Axis of Motion. If the MOD_EN parameter turns off, then the Axis of Motion
aborts any command that is in progress and performs a decelerated stop.
The output parameters of the AXISx_CTRL subroutine provide the current status of the Axis
of Motion.
The Done parameter turns on when the Axis of Motion completes any subroutine.
The Error parameter (Page 545) contains the result of this subroutine.
The C_Pos parameter is the current position of the Axis of Motion. Based upon the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering
units (REAL).
The C_Speed parameter provides the current speed of the Axis of Motion. If you configured
the measurement system for the Axis of Motion for pulses, C_Speed is a DINT value
containing the number of pulses/second. If you configured the measurement system for
engineering units, C_Speed is a REAL value containing the selected engineering
units/second (REAL).
The C_Dir parameter indicates the current direction of the motor:
Signal state of 0 = positive
Signal state of 1 = negative
Note
The Axis of Motion reads the configuration/profile table only at power-up or when
commanded to load the configuration.
If you use the Motion wizard to modify the configuration, then the AXISx_CTRL
subroutine automatically commands the Axis of Motion to load the configuration/profile
table every time the CPU changes to RUN mode.
If you use the Motion control panel to modify the configuration, clicking the Update
Configuration button commands the Axis of Motion to load the new
configuration/profile table.
If you use another method to modify the configuration, then you must also issue an
AXISx_CFG command to the Axis of Motion to load the configuration/profile table.
Otherwise, the Axis of Motion continues to use the old configuration/profile table.
S7-200 SMART
12.6.3 AXISx_MAN subroutine
Table 12- 8 AXISx_MAN

CALL AXISx_MAN, RUN, The AXISx_MAN subroutine (Manual Mode) puts the Axis of Motion
JOG_P, JOG_N, Speed, into manual mode. This allows the motor to be run at different speeds
Dir, Error, C_Pos, or to be jogged in a positive or negative direction.
C_Speed, C_Dir You can enable only one of the RUN, JOG_P, or JOG_N inputs at a
time.
Table 12- 9 Parameters for the AXISx_MAN subroutine

RUN, JOG_P, BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
JOG_N
Speed DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Dir, C_Dir BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Enable the RUN (Run/Stop) parameter to command the Axis of Motion to accelerate to the
specified speed (Speed parameter) and direction (Dir parameter). You can change the value
of the Speed parameter while the motor is running, but the Dir parameter must remain
constant. Disabling the RUN parameter commands the Axis of Motion to decelerate until the
motor comes to a stop.
Enable the JOG_P (Jog Positive Rotation) or the JOG_N (Jog Negative Rotation) parameter
to command the Axis of Motion to jog in either a positive or negative direction. If the JOG_P
or JOG_N parameter remains enabled for less than 0.5 seconds, the Axis of Motion issues
pulses to travel the distance specified in JOG_INCREMENT. If the JOG_P or JOG_N
parameter remains enabled for 0.5 seconds or longer, the Axis of Motion begins to
accelerate to the specified JOG_SPEED.
S7-200 SMART
The Speed parameter determines the speed when RUN is enabled. If you configured the
measuring system of the Axis of Motion for pulses, the speed is a DINT value for
pulses/second. If you configured the measuring system of the Axis of Motion for engineering
units, the speed is a REAL value for units/second. You can change this parameter while the
motor is running.
Note
The Axis of Motion may not react to small changes in the Speed parameter, especially if the
configured acceleration or deceleration time is short and the difference between the
configured maximum speed and start/stop speed is large.
The Dir parameter determines the direction to move when RUN is enabled. You cannot
change this value when the RUN parameter is enabled.
The C_Pos parameter contains the current position of the Axis of Motion. Based upon the
units of measurement selected, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number
of engineering units (REAL).
The C_Speed parameter contains the current speed of the Axis of Motion. Based upon the
units of measurement selected, the value is either the number of pulses/second (DINT) or
the engineering units/second (REAL).
The C_Dir parameter indicates the current direction of the motor:
Signal state of 0 = positive
Signal state of 1 = negative
12.6.4 AXISx_GOTO subroutine
Table 12- 10 AXISx_GOTO

CALL AXISx_GOTO, The AXISx_GOTO subroutine commands the Axis of Motion to go to a
START, Pos, Speed, desired location.
Mode, Abort, Done,
Error, C_Pos,
C_Speed
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 11 Parameters for the AXISx_GOTO subroutine

START BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L, Power Flow
Pos, Speed DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Mode BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Constant
Abort, Done BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Turn on the EN bit to enable the subroutine. Ensure that the EN bit stays on until the DONE
bit signals that the execution of the subroutine has completed.
Turn on the START parameter to send a GOTO command to the Axis of Motion. For each
scan when the START parameter is on and the Axis of Motion is not currently busy, the
subroutine sends a GOTO command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one GOTO
command is sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Pos parameter contains a value that signifies either the location to move (for an
absolute move) or the distance to move (for a relative move). Based upon the units of
measurement selected, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the engineering
units (REAL).
The Speed parameter determines the maximum speed for this movement. Based upon the
units of measurement, the value is either a number of pulses/second (DINT) or the
engineering units/second (REAL).
The Mode parameter selects the type of move:
0: Absolute position
1: Relative position
2: Single-speed, continuous positive rotation
3: Single-speed, continuous negative rotation
The Done parameter turns on when the Axis of Motion completes this subroutine.
Turn on the Abort parameter to command the Axis of Motion to stop execution of this
command and decelerate until the motor comes to a stop.
The C_Pos parameter contains current position of the Axis of Motion. Based upon the units
of measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of engineering
units (REAL).
S7-200 SMART
12.6.5 AXISx_RUN subroutine
Table 12- 12 AXISx_RUN

CALL AXISx_RUN, The AXISx_RUN subroutine (Run Profile) commands the Axis of Motion
START, Profile, to execute the motion operation in a specific profile stored in the con-
Abort, Done, Error, figuration/profile table.
C_Profile, C_Step,
C_Pos, C_Speed
Table 12- 13 Parameters for the AXISx_RUN subroutine

Profile BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
Error, C_Profile, C_Step BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Turn on the EN bit to enable the subroutine. Ensure that the EN bit stays on until the Done
Turn on the START parameter to send a RUN command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a RUN command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one command
is sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The Profile parameter contains the number or the symbolic name for the motion profile. The
"Profile" input must be between 0 - 31. If not, the subroutine will return an error.
Turn on the Abort parameter to command the Axis of Motion to stop the current profile and
decelerate until the motor comes to a stop.
The C_Profile parameter contains the profile currently being executed by the Axis of Motion.
The C_Step parameter contains the step of the profile currently being executed.
units of measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of
engineering units (REAL).
S7-200 SMART
12.6.6 AXISx_RSEEK subroutine
Table 12- 14 AXISx_RSEEK

CALL AXISx_RSEEK, The AXISx_RSEEK subroutine (Seek Reference Point Position) initi-
START, Done, Error ates a reference point seek operation, using the search method in the
configuration/profile table. When the Axis of Motion locates the refer-
ence point and motion has stopped, the Axis of Motion loads the
RP_OFFSET parameter value into the current position.
Table 12- 15 Parameters for the AXISx_RSEEK subroutine

Done BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
The default value for RP_OFFSET is 0. You can use the Motion wizard, the Motion Control
Panel, or the AXISx_LDOFF (Load Offset) subroutine to change the RP_OFFSET value.
Turn on the START parameter to send a RSEEK command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a RSEEK command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one
S7-200 SMART
12.6.7 AXISx_LDOFF subroutine
Table 12- 16 AXISx_LDOFF

CALL AXISx_LDOFF, The AXISx_LDOFF subroutine (Load Reference Point Offset) estab-
START, Done, Error lishes a new zero position that is at a different location from the refer-
ence point position.
Before executing this subroutine, you must first determine the position
of the reference point. You must also move the machine to the starting
position. When the subroutine sends the LDOFF command, the Axis of
Motion computes the offset between the starting position (the current
position) and the reference point position. The Axis of Motion then
stores the computed offset to the RP_OFFSET parameter and sets the
current position to 0. This establishes the starting position as the zero
position.
In the event that the motor loses track of its position (such as on loss of
power or if the motor is repositioned manually), you can use the AX-
ISx_RSEEK subroutine to re-establish the zero position automatically.
Table 12- 17 Parameters for the AXISx_LDOFF subroutine

Turn on the START parameter to send a LDOFF command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a LDOFF command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one
S7-200 SMART
12.6.8 AXISx_LDPOS subroutine
Table 12- 18 AXISx_LDPOS

CALL AXISx_LDPOS, The AXISx_LDPOS subroutine (Load Position) changes the current
START, New_Pos, position value in the Axis of Motion to a new value. You can also use
Done, Error, C_Pos this subroutine to establish a new zero position for any absolute move
command.
Table 12- 19 Parameters for the AXISx_LDPOS subroutine

New_Pos, C_Pos DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Turn on the START parameter to send a LDPOS command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a LDPOS command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one
The New_Pos parameter provides the new value to replace the current position value that
the Axis of Motion reports and uses for absolute moves. Based upon the units of
measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the engineering units
(REAL).
units of measurement, the value is either a number of pulses (DINT) or the number of
engineering units (REAL).
S7-200 SMART
12.6.9 AXISx_SRATE subroutine
Table 12- 20 AXISx_SRATE

CALL AXISx_SRATE, The AXISx_SRATE subroutine (Set Rate) commands the Axis of Mo-
START, ACCEL_Time, tion to change the acceleration, deceleration, and jerk times.
DECEL_Time,
JERK_Time, Done, Er-
ror
Table 12- 21 Parameters for the AXISx_SRATE subroutine

START BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
ACCEL_Time, DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD,
DECEL_Time, JERK_Time Constant
Turn on the START parameter to copy the new time values to the configuration/profile table
and sends a SRATE command to the Axis of Motion. For each scan when the START
parameter is on and the Axis of Motion is not currently busy, the subroutine sends an
SRATE command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one command is sent, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The ACCEL_Time, DECEL_Time, and JERK_Time parameters determine the new
acceleration time, deceleration time, and jerk time in milliseconds (ms).
S7-200 SMART
12.6.10 AXISx_DIS subroutine
Table 12- 22 AXISx_DIS

CALL AXISx_DIS, The AXISx_DIS subroutine turns the DIS output of the Axis of Motion
DIS_ON, Error on or off. This allows you to use the DIS output for disabling or enabling
a motor controller. If you use the DIS output on the Axis of Motion, then
this subroutine can be called every scan or only when you need to
change the value of the DIS output.
Table 12- 23 Parameters for the AXISx_DIS subroutine

DIS_ON BOOL IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
When the EN bit turns on to enable the subroutine, the DIS_ON parameter controls the DIS
output of the Axis of Motion.
Note
If you have not defined a "DIS" output in the Motion wizard, the AXISx_DIS subroutine will
return an error.
S7-200 SMART
12.6.11 AXISx_CFG subroutine
Table 12- 24 AXISx_CFG

CALL AXISx_CFG, The AXISx_CFG subroutine (Reload Configuration) commands the Axis
START, Done, Error of Motion to read the configuration block from the location specified by
the configuration/profile table pointer. The Axis of Motion then com-
pares the new configuration with the existing configuration and per-
forms any required setup changes or recalculations.
Table 12- 25 Parameters for the AXISx_CFG subroutine

Turn on the START parameter to send a CFG command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a CFG command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one command
is sent, use an edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
S7-200 SMART
12.6.12 AXISx_CACHE subroutine
Table 12- 26 AXISx_CACHE

CALL AXISx_CACHE, The AXISx_CACHE subroutine (Cache Profile) commands a caching of
START, Profile, a motion profile before the profile is executed. This allows you to pre-
Done, Error cache needed commands before execution. Pre-caching reduces the
amount of time and provides consistency between executing a motion
instruction and starting the move.
Table 12- 27 Parameters for the AXISx_CACHE subroutine

Profile BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
Error, C_Profile, C_Step BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Turn on the START parameter to send a CACHE command to the Axis of Motion. For each
subroutine sends a CACHE command to the Axis of Motion. To ensure that only one
The Profile parameter contains the number or the symbolic name for the motion profile. The
"Profile" input must be between 0 - 31. If not, the subroutine will return an error.
S7-200 SMART
12.6.13 AXISx_RDPOS subroutine
Table 12- 28 AXISx_RDPOS

CALL AXISx_RDPOS, The AXISx_RDPOS subroutine returns the current motion axis position.
Error, I_Pos
Table 12- 29 Parameters for the AXISx_RDPOS subroutine

I_Pos DINT, REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Turn on the EN bit to enable the subroutine.

The I_Pos parameter contains the current motion axis position.
Note
Execution of this command returns the actual current position of the axis. Position status
values provided in other motion subroutines, such as AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_GOTO, and so
forth, are updated periodically. Therefore, the position values reported by those commands
and the position value reported by this command may differ somewhat as a result and is
normal.
S7-200 SMART
12.6.14 AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine
Table 12- 30 AXISx_ABSPOS

CALL AXISx_ABSPOS, The AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine reads the absolute position from cer-
START, RDY, INP, tain Siemens servo drives, such as the V90. You read the absolute
Res, Drive, Port, position value in order to update the current position value in the Axis of
Done, Error, D_Pos Motion. This capability is supported when using a SINAMICS V90 servo
drive combined with a SIMOTICS-1FL6 servo motor that has an abso-
lute encoder installed.
Table 12- 31 Parameters for the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine

RDY, INP BOOL I, Q, V, M, SM, S, T, C, L
Res DINT ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
Drive BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
Port BYTE IB, QB, VB, MB, SMB, SB, LB, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD, Con-
stant
D_Pos REAL ID, QD, VD, MD, SMD, SD, LD, AC, *VD, *AC, *LD
Turn on the EN bit to enable the subroutine. Ensure that the EN bit stays on until the DONE
Turn on the START parameter to obtain the current absolute position from the specified
drive. To ensure that only one operation to read the current position is performed, use an
edge detection element to pulse the START parameter on.
The RDY parameter indicates the readiness state of the servo drive, which is typically
provided by a digital output signal from the drive. This subroutine will read the absolute
position from the drive only if this parameter is on.
The INP parameter indicates the standstill state of the motor, which is typically provided by a
digital output signal from the drive. This subroutine will read the absolute position from the
drive only if this parameter is on.
S7-200 SMART
The Res parameter must be set to the resolution of the absolute encoder connected to your
servo motor. For example, the single turn resolution of a SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor with
absolute encoder is 20 bits or 1048576.
Set the Drive parameter to match the RS485 address of the servo drive to be accessed by
this subroutine. Valid addresses of individual drives are 0 to 31.
Set the Port parameter to designate the CPU port to be used to communicate with the servo
drive:
0: Onboard RS485 port (Port 0)
1: RS485/RS232 signal board (if present, Port 1)
The Done parameter turns on when the subroutines work is complete.
The D_Pos parameter contains the current absolute position returned by the servo drive.
Note
To use this subroutine, you must configure the measurement system setting for this Axis of
Motion to Engineering Units.
Note
Additional subroutines
The Motion wizard also creates the subroutines ABSPOS_SBR and ABSPOS_INT when you
enable read position in the wizard configuration to read an absolute position from a drive.
S7-200 SMART
12.7 Using the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine to read the absolute position from a SINAMICS servo drive
12.7 Using the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine to read the absolute position

from a SINAMICS servo drive
The following sections provide information about how to use the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine
in your project to read the absolute position from a SINAMICS V90 servo drive.
12.7.1 AXISx_ABSPOS and AXISx_LDPOS subroutines usage examples

The absolute position is valid only after successful completion of the AXISx_ABSPOS
subroutine (Done parameter = ON and Error parameter = "no error") when executed with the
START parameter on. Since the Error and D_Pos parameters revert to default values when
the subroutine is executed with the START input off, you must include instructions in your
program to capture the valid absolute position value after completion of the subroutine.
Table 12- 32 Example: Using the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine to read the absolute position from a SINAMICS V90 servo
drive

Network 1: Read the servo position LD SM0.0
from the drive. = L60.0
LD M0.0
EU
= L63.7
LD I0.0
= L63.6
LD I0.1
= L63.5
LD L60.0
CALL
AXIS0_ABSPOS,
L63.7, L63.6, L63.5,
1048576,1, 0,
V600.0,
VB601, VD602
S7-200 SMART
Network 2: When the operation is LD V600.0

done, capture the error LPS
code and also capture
AB= VB601, 0
the servo position, if no
error. MOVD VD602,
VD800
= M0.1
LPP
MOVB VB601, VB804
Network 3: Update the current LD SM0.0

position in this Axis of = L60.0
Motion with the cap-
LD M0.1
tured servo position
value. EU
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL AXIS0_LDPOS,
L63.7, VD800,
V610.0, VB611,
VD612
12.7.2 Interconnections
Digital I/O
Refer to the section "Connection examples with PLCs" in the SINAMICS V90 /
SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Operating Instructions document to find wiring diagrams for connection of
the suggested digital control signals between an S7-200 SMART CPU and a V90 servo
drive.
Communications
The AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine obtains the position data from the drive using serial
communications on the RS485 link between the two devices. Therefore, connect a cable
between the RS485 port on the S7-200 SMART CPU (or optionally the S7-200 SMART
CM01 signal board) and the RS485 port on the V90 servo drive.
Refer to the appropriate sections of the S7-200 SMART System Manual and the
SINAMICS V90 / SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Operating Instructions documents for descriptions of
the RS485 ports on the S7-200 SMART CPU and V90 servo drive.
S7-200 SMART
12.7.3 Commissioning
12.7.3.1 Control mode

"PTI" mode is the drive control mode setting that allows movement speed and distance to be
controlled from an external pulse train. The default control mode in the V90 servo drive is
basic "PTI" mode, but you can check the mode setting by reading the value of parameter
"p29003" and verifying that the value = "0". It is possible to use compound control modes
(PTI/S and PTI/T) with the pulse train output from the S7-200 SMART CPU. These are
advanced features and are not within the scope of this document. For assistance with these
features, refer to the SINAMICS V90 / SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Operating Instructions document.
12.7.3.2 Setpoint pulse input channel

For correct operation with the digital outputs of the S7-200 SMART CPU, you must select the
"24 V DC single end pulse train input" setting for the setpoint pulse input channel parameter
(parameter "p29014" = 1) in the V90 servo drive.
12.7.3.3 Setpoint pulse train input format

Ensure that the CPUs Axis of Motion output phasing and polarity settings (established in the
"Directional Control" dialog of the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART Motion wizard) are consistent
with the V90 servo drives setpoint pulse train input format setting (parameter "p29010").
12.7.3.4 Common engineering units basis

When using a motion axis on the S7-200 SMART CPU to control the movement speed and
distance of a servo motor, you must establish a common definition of the engineering units
between the Axis of Motion (CPU) and the drive.
The following diagram shows the elements of a motion system:
S7-200 SMART
To establish a common engineering unit definition between the CPU and the servo drive, you
must consider the following motion system variables when commissioning your system:
Electronic gearing
In the V90 servo drive, the "a" and "b" values determine the drives electronic gear ratio, a
feature that allows a frequency conversion on the pulse train issued from the CPU. Since the
maximum pulse frequency issued from an Axis of Motion in the S7-200 SMART CPU is 100
kHz, while the encoder resolution of SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motors installed with absolute
encoders is 2^20 pulses per revolution, use of the drives electronic gear feature is likely, in
many applications, to achieve higher motor speeds. For example, to achieve a 10x increase
in the setpoint pulse frequency within the servo drive compared to the frequency of the CPU
pulse train supplied to the drive, then you must set the electronic gear ratio to "10:1".
In the V90 servo drive, setting parameter "p29012[0]" establishes the numerator of the
electronic gearing ratio ("a"), while setting parameter "p29013" establishes the denominator
of the ratio ("b"). Also, when using electronic gearing, set the parameter "p29011" value to
"0". The valid range for the electronic gear ratio (a / b) in the V90 servo drive is between
"0.02" and "200".
Refer to the "Electronic Gear Ratio" section of the SINAMICS V90 / SIMOTICS S-1FL6
Operating Instructions document for more information.
Mechanical factors
The "m" and "n" values establish the mechanical relationship between a load revolution and
a motor revolution, applicable when a gearing mechanism is used. When the V90 servo drive
is in "PTI" control mode, its internal mechanical gearing ratio parameters are fixed at "1:1",
but the physical "m" and "n" values are important in establishing the correct engineering unit
conversion factors for the Axis of Motion, as shown below.
The "c value establishes the relationship between load movement in the specified
engineering unit, and load revolutions. "20 cm of load movement per load revolution" and
"360 degrees of load movement per load revolution" are examples of this conversion factor.
Encoder resolution
The "r" value is the resolution of the absolute encoder in your servo motor. As stated above,
the encoder resolution of SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motors installed with absolute encoders
is 2^20 pulses per revolution or "1048576". When the V90 servo drive is paired with a motor
containing an absolute encoder, the drive automatically detects the encoder type and obtains
its resolution. However, in your program, you must specify this resolution value in the
AXISx_ABSPOS subroutines "Res" input parameter and also in one of the engineering unit
conversion factor calculations shown below.
S7-200 SMART
Measurement system settings in the Motion wizard

When using the STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART Motion wizard to configure the measurement
system for a CPU Axis of Motion, you must assign the three conversion settings:
First setting: Relates CPU pulses to motor revolutions
Second setting: Establishes the base engineering unit name
Third setting: Relates motor revolutions to load movement
Setting 1: "Number of pulses required for one motor revolution"

This setting defines the relationship between CPU pulses and motor revolutions. The
relevant equation that yields the correct value for this setting follows:
(1) Number of pulses required for one motor revolution = r * (b / a)
where, "r" = encoder resolution, expressed as encoder pulses per motor revolution,
"a" and "b" = electronic gearing (E-gear) ratio parameters ("a" = value of V90 parameter
"p29012[0]" and "b" = value of V90 parameter "p29013")
For example, if the desired E-gear ratio is "128:1" and the motors absolute encoder
resolution is 2^20 or "1048576", then:
"Number of pulses required for one motor revolution" = 1048576 * (1 / 128) = 8192
Setting 2: "Base unit of measurement"

This setting establishes the base engineering unit name for speed and distance settings
throughout the Motion wizard. To avoid confusion, the selection should match the
engineering unit relevant at the load. For example, if load movement and speed is to be
expressed in "cm" and "cm / second", then the "cm" selection should be chosen for this
setting.
S7-200 SMART
Setting 3: "One motor revolution produces how many "xxx" of motion?"

This setting defines the relationship between motor revolutions and load movement in the
defined engineering unit (for example, cm and degrees). The relevant equation that yields
the correct value for this setting is as follows:
(2) One motor revolution produces how many "xxx" of motion = c * (m / n)
where, "c" = load movement (in the defined engineering unit) per load revolution,
"m/n" = external gearing ratio expressed as load revolutions per motor revolution
For example, if the mechanical gear ratio is "1:2" and the load movement per load revolution
is 10 cm, then:
"One motor revolution produces how many cm of motion" = 10 * (1 / 2) = 5
12.7.4 Important facts to know

Do not call the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine from within an interrupt routine or from a
subroutine called within an interrupt routine.
If you have configured multiple Axes of Motion in your CPU project, ensure that the
AXISx_CTRL subroutines for all axes are executed prior to executing the first
AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine for any axis. The AXISx_CTRL subroutine contains code to
initialize the V memory area used commonly by all instances of the AXISx_ABSPOS
subroutine in your program to manage the communications with the servo drive.
If you configure your motion axis measurement system to the "relative pulses" setting
instead of the "engineering units" setting, you can still use the AXISx_ABSPOS
subroutine to return position information from the V90 servo drive. Note, however, that
the position value returned in the "D_pos" parameter of the subroutine will then be of type
DINT and is the actual position value reported by the servo drive (there are no
engineering unit conversions performed on the value).
S7-200 SMART
12.8 Axis of Motion example programs
12.8.1 Axis of Motion simple relative move (cut-to-length application) example

The example program shows a simple relative move that uses the AXISx_CTRL and
AXISx_GOTO subroutines to perform a cut-to-length operation. This program does not
require an RP seek mode or a motion profile, and the length can be measured in either
pulses or engineering units. Enter the length (VD500) and target speed (VD504). When I0.0
(Start) turns on, the machine starts. When I0.1 (Stop) turns on, the machine finishes the
current operation and stops. When I0.2 (E_Stop) turns on, the machine aborts any motion
and immediately stops.
Table 12- 33 Example: Axis of Motion simple relative move (cut-to-length application)

Network 1: Control instruction LD SM0.0
= L60.0
LDN I0.2
= L63.7
LD L60.0
CALL AXIS0_CTRL,
L63.7, M1.0,
VB900, VD902,
VD906, V910.0
Network 2: Start puts machine into LD I0.0

automatic mode. AN I0.2
EU
S Q0.2, 1
S M0.1, 1
Network 3: E_Stop: Stops immediately LD I0.2

and turns off automatic R Q0.2, 1
mode.
S7-200 SMART

Network 4: 1. Move to a certain point: LD Q0.2
2. Enter the length to cut. = L60.0
LD M0.1
3. Enter the target speed
EU
into Speed.
= L63.7
4. Set the mode to 1 (Rela-
LD L60.0
tive mode).
CALL AXIS0_GOTO,
L63.7, VD500,
VD504, 1, I0.2,
Q0.4, VB920,
VD922, VD926
Network 5: When in position, turn on LD Q0.2

the cutter for 2 seconds to A Q0.4
finish the cut. TON T33, +200
AN T33
= Q0.3
Network 6: When the cut is finished, LD Q0.2

then restart unless the Stop A T33
is active. LPS
AN I0.1
= M0.1
LPP
A I0.1
R Q0.2, 1
S7-200 SMART
12.8.2 Axis of Motion AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_RUN, AXISx_SEEK, and AXISx_MAN

example
This program provides an example of the AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_RUN, AXISx_RSEEK, and
AXISx_MAN subroutines. You must configure the RP seek mode and a motion profile.
Table 12- 34 Example: Axis of Motion AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_RUN, AXISx_SEEK, and AXISx_MAN subroutines application

Network 1 Enable the axis by turning LD Always_On
CPU_Input1 off. = L60.0
LDN CPU_Input1
Symbol and Address: 1 = L63.7
LD L60.0
Always_On = SM0.0 CALL AXIS0_CTRL,
AXIS0_CTRL = SBR1 L63.7, M1.0,
CPU_Input1 = I0.1 VB900, VD902,
VD906, V910.0
Network 2 Move the axis to a known LD CPU_Input8

position using the Jog AN M0.0
command. You can now = L60.0
move the axis manually. LD CPU_Input9
= L63.7
Symbol and Address: 1 LD CPU_Input10
= L63.6
AXIS0_MAN = SBR2
LD CPU_Input12
CPU_Input10 = I1.2 = L63.5
CPU_Input12 = I1.4 LD L60.0
CPU_Input13 = I1.5 CALL AXIS0_MAN,
L63.7, L63.6,
CPU_Input8 = I1.0
L63.5, 100000.0,
CPU_Input9 = I1.1 CPU_Input13,
VB920, VD902,
VD906, V910.0
Network 3 Reset the process. Set the LD CPU_Input1
initial step to "0". O First_Scan_On
R M0.0, 1
Symbol and Address: 1 MOVB 0,
State_Machine_
CPU_Input1 = I0.1 Step
CPU_Output3 = Q0.3 R CPU_Output3, 3
First_Scan_On = SM0.1 R Homing_Done, 2
Homing_Done = M1.1
State_Machine_Step =
VB1500
S7-200 SMART

Network 4 Start the process. When LD CPU_Input0
CPU_Input0 is toggled from EU
off to on, the S M0.0, 2
State_Machine_Step is set MOVB 1,
to "1". State_Machine_
Step
Symbol and Address: 1
CPU_Input0 = I0.0
VB1500
Network 5 This network turns LD M0.0

CPU_Input1 on. = CPU_Input1

CPU_Input1 = I0.1
Network 6 When the homing is com- LD Homing_Done

plete, move to the next AB= Homing_Error
step. S CPU_Output3
MOVB 2,
Symbol and Address: 1 State_Machine_
Step
CPU_Output3 = Q0.3
Homing_Done = M1.1
Homing_Error = VB930
VB1500
Network 7 When the state machine is LD Always_On

in Step 1, the system auto- = L60.0
matically homes the axis. If LDB
there is a Homing error, the State_Machine_
Homing_Error output dis- Step, 1
plays the error code. EU
= L63.7
Symbol and Address: 1 LD L60.0
Always_On = SM0.0 CALL
AXIS0_RSEEK,
AXIS0_RSEEK = SBR5
L63.7,
Homing_Done = M1.1 Homing_Done,
Homing_Error = VB930 Homing_Error
VB1500
S7-200 SMART

Network 8 When the State Machine LD Always_On
enters Step 2, it executes a = L60.0
move of the selected profile. LDB=
State_Machine_
Symbol and Address: 1 Step, 2
EU
Always_On = SM0.0
= L63.7
AXIS0_RUN = SBR4 LD L60.0
Axis_Run_Error = CALL AXIS0_RUN,
VB940 L63.7,
CPU_Input1 = I0.1 Profile_Number,
CPU_Input1,
Current_Position =
Move_Complete,
VD914
Axis_Run_Error,
Current_Profile = VB941 Current_Profile,
Current_Speed = VD948 Current_Step,
Current_Step = VB942 Cur-
rent_Position,
Move_Complete = M1.2
Current_Speed
Profile_Number =
VB228
VB1500
Network 9 When the State Machine is LDB=

in Step 2 and completes the State_Machine_
move, you evaluate the Step, 2
error status. If there is no A Move_Complete
error, the State Machine LPS
transitions to Step 3. If there AB=
is an error, the State Ma-
Axis_Run_Error,
chine transitions to Step 4
0
for error handling.
S CPU_Output4, 1
R T33, 1
Symbol and Address: 1 MOVB 3,
Axis_Run_Error = State_Machine_
VB940 Step
CPU_Output4 = Q0.4 LPP
AB<>
Move_Complete = M1.2
Axis_Run_Error,
State_Machine_Step = 0
VB1500 MOVB 4,
State_Machine_
Step
S7-200 SMART

Network 10 Wait for Step 3. LDB=
State_Machine_
Step, 3
TON T33, 200
VB1500
Network 11 If the State Machine moves LDB=

to Step 3, wait for 2 s. Then, State_Machine_
evaluate the status of the Step, 3
switches, and restart the A T33
move or stop. LPS
R CPU_Output3, 1
Symbol and Address: 1 R CPU_Output4, 1
AN CPU_Input2
CPU_Input2 = I0.2
MOVB 2,
CPU_Output3 = Q0.3 State_Machine_
CPU_Output4 = Q0.4 Step
State_Machine_Step = LPP
VB1500 A CPU_Input2
MOVB 4,
State_Machine_
Step
R M0.0, 4
Network 12 If the State Machine moves LDB=
to Step 4, clear the outputs. State_Machine_
Step, 4
Symbol and Address: 1 R CPU_Output3, 2
CPU_Output3 = Q0.3
VB1500
Network 13 If the State Machine is in LDB=

Step 4, flash output 5 to State_Machine_
indicate an error. Step, 4
A Clock_1s
Symbol and Address: 1 = CPU_Output5
Clock_1s = SM0.5
(Clock pulse that is ON
for 0.5 s and OFF for 0.5
s for a duty cycle time of
1 s.)
CPU_Output5 = Q0.5
VB1500
S7-200 SMART
12.9 Monitoring the Axis of Motion

Network 14 If the State Machine is in LDB=
Step 4, you must State_Machine_
acknowledge the error by Step, 4
toggling Input I0.2. This A CPU_Input2
action resets the state to MOVB 0,
Step 0. State_Machine_
Step
Symbol and Address: 1 R M0.0, 9
CPU_Input2 = I0.2
VB1500
1 The program addresses shown are example addresses. Your program addresses could vary.

To aid you in the development of your motion control solution, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
provides the Motion control panel.
Opening the Motion control panel

To open the Motion control panel, use one of the following methods:
Click the "Motion Control Panel" button from the Tools area of the Tools menu ribbon
strip.
Open the Tools folder in the project tree, select the "Motion Control Panel" node and
press Enter; or double-click the "Motion Control Panel" node.
S7-200 SMART
At this point, a comparison between the CPU and STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART is executed to
ensure that the configurations are the same. (See the figure below.)
The Axis of Motion Operation (Page 537), Configuration (Page 542), and Profile
Configuration (Page 542) settings make it easy for you to monitor and control the operation
of the Axis of Motion during the startup and test phases of your development process.
Use the Motion control panel to verify that the Axis of Motion is wired correctly, to adjust the
configuration data, and to test each movement profile.
If additional changes need to be made in the Axis of Motion, refer to the Motion wizard
(Page 493).
For error code listings, refer to the Axis of Motion error codes (Page 544) and the Motion
instruction error codes (Page 545).
S7-200 SMART
12.9.1 Displaying and controlling the operation of the Axis of Motion

In the Operation node, you can interact with the operations of the Axis of Motion. The control
panel displays the current speed, the current position, and the current direction of the Axis of
Motion. You can also see the status of the input and output LEDs (excluding the Pulse
LEDs).
The control panel allows you to interact with the Axis of Motion by changing the speed and
direction, by stopping and starting the motion, and by jogging the tool (if the CPU is
stopped).
Note
You cannot execute a motion command while the CPU is running. The CPU must be in
STOP mode in order to change the speed and direction, stop and start the motion, and use
the jog tool.
Note
Exiting the Motion control panel or a loss of communications while a motion command is
active causes the axis to stop its motion after a 5 second timeout.
S7-200 SMART
Motion commands
You can also generate the following motion commands:
Table 12- 35 Motion control panel commands
Command Description
Execute continuous speed move: This command allows you
to use the manual controls for positioning the tool. Enter
"Target Speed" and "Direction", and click "Start" to execute
continuous move. Motion will continue until "Stop" is clicked
(or error condition).
Seek to a reference point: This command finds the refer-

ence point by using the configured search mode. Click "Ex-
ecute", and the axis will command a "Seek to Reference
Point", using the search algorithm specified in the axis con-
figuration. Click "Abort" to stop a seek process before the
reference point has been found.
S7-200 SMART
Command Description
Load reference point offset: After you use the manual con-
trols to jog the tool to the new position, you then load the
"Reference Point Offset". Use the manual controls to place
the tool at the new position. Click "Execute" to save this
position as the "RP_OFFSET". The current position will be
set to zero.
Reload current position: This command updates the current

position value and establishes a new zero position. Enter
the position to set and click "Execute" to update the current
position. This will also establish a new zero position.
Activate the DIS output: This command turns the DIS output
of the Axis of Motion on. Click "Execute" to activate the DIS
output.
S7-200 SMART
Command Description
De-activate the DIS output: This command turns the DIS
output of the Axis of Motion off. Click "Execute" to
de-activate the DIS output.
Load axis configuration: This command loads a new config-

uration by commanding the Axis of Motion to read the con-
figuration block from the V memory of the CPU. Click
"Execute" to have the axis read its configuration from V
memory.
Move to an absolute position: This command allows you to

move to a specified position at a target speed. Before using
this command, you must have already established the zero
position. Assign a "Target Speed" and the "Absolute Posi-
tion" to move to. This option requires that the zero position
be defined.
S7-200 SMART
Command Description
Move by a relative amount: This command allows you to
move a specified distance from the current position at a
target speed. You can enter a positive or negative distance.
Assign a "Target Speed" and a "Target Position" to move to.
Reset the axis command interface: This command clears

the axis command interface for the Axis of Motion and sets
the "Done" bit. Use this command if the Axis of Motion ap-
pears to not be responding to commands.
Execute profile: This command allows you to select a profile

to be executed. The control panel displays the status of the
profile which is being executed by the Axis of Motion. Select
the profile that is to be executed, then click "Execute", and
the axis will command the profile.
Note: This command is only available if a profile has been
defined in the Motion wizard.
S7-200 SMART
12.9.2 Displaying and modifying the configuration of the Axis of Motion

In the Configuration node, you can view and modify the configuration settings for the Axis of
Motion that is stored in the data block of the CPU.
After you modify the configuration settings, you simply click the write button to send the data
values to the CPU. These data values are not saved in your STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
project. You must manually make changes to your project that reflects the final values of
these fields.
12.9.3 Displaying the profile configuration for the Axis of Motion

In the Profile Configuration node, you can view the configuration of each profile for the Axis
of Motion.
S7-200 SMART
Click each profile to view its mode of operation and data values.
Some data values of the profile can be modified in this dialog. After you modify the
configuration settings, you simply click the write button to send the data values to the CPU.
These data values are not saved in your STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART project. You must
manually make changes to your project that reflects the final values of these fields.
S7-200 SMART
12.9.4 Error codes for the Axis of Motion (WORD at SMW620, SMW670, or SMW720)
Table 12- 36 Axis of Motion error codes

0 No error
1 Reserved
2 Configuration block not present
3 Configuration block pointer error
4 Size of configuration block exceeds available V memory
5 Illegal configuration block format
6 Too many profiles specified
7 Illegal STP_RSP specification
8 Illegal LIM- specification
9 Illegal LIM+ specification
10 Illegal FILTER_TIME specification
11 Illegal MEAS_SYS specification
12 Illegal RP_CFG specification
13 Illegal PLS/REV value
14 Illegal UNITS/REV value
15 Illegal RP_ZP_CNT value
16 Illegal JOG_INCREMENT value
17 Illegal MAX_SPEED value
18 Illegal SS_SPD value
19 Illegal RP_FAST value
20 Illegal RP_SLOW value
21 Illegal JOG_SPEED value
22 Illegal ACCEL_TIME value
23 Illegal DECEL_TIME value
24 Illegal JERK_TIME value
25 Illegal BKLSH_COMP value
26 AXIS not available
27 Invalid LMT+ location
28 Invalid LMT- location
29 Invalid STP location
30 Invalid RPS location
31 Invalid ZP location
32 Illegal output phase
33 No RPS input defined (If Homing is defined, then RPS must be defined also.)
34 Invalid TRIG location
35 Reserved
S7-200 SMART

36 No ZP input defined (If Homing mode 3 or 4 is defined, then ZP must be defined
also.)
37 Phase A (P0) output conflict
38 Phase B (P1) output conflict
39 DIS output conflict
40 Reserved
41 Invalid SDB0 record size
42 Illegal SDB0 format
43 to 127 Reserved
To verify that the Axis of Motion is wired correctly, to adjust the configuration data, and to
test each movement profile, use the Motion control panel.
If additional changes need to be made in the Axis of Motion, go to the Motion wizard.
12.9.5 Error codes for the Motion instruction (seven LS bits of SMB634, SMB684, or
SMB734)
In the SM table for each axis there is a byte reserved to display the result of the motion
instruction (Offset 34). This byte indicates when an instruction is complete and if there was
an error in the instruction.
Table 12- 37 Motion instruction error codes

0 No error
1 Aborted by user
2 Configuration error
(This error occurs if there is an error in the SDB0 configuration.)
3 Illegal command
4 Aborted due to no valid configuration
(This error occurs if there is an error in the configuration table.)
5 Reserved
6 Aborted due to no defined reference point
7 Aborted due to STP input active
8 Aborted due to LMT- input active
9 Aborted due to LMT+ input active
10 Aborted due to problem executing motion
11 No profile block configured for specified profile
12 Illegal operation mode
13 Operation mode not supported for this command
14 Illegal number of steps in profile block
15 Illegal direction change
S7-200 SMART

16 Illegal distance
17 RPS/TRIG trigger occurred before target speed reached
18 Insufficient RPS active region width
19 Speed out-of-range
20 Insufficient distance to perform desired speed change
21 Illegal position
22 Zero position unknown
23 No DIS output is defined
24 Reserved
25 Aborted due to CPU going to stop
26 Aborted due to expiration of Motion control panel heartbeat
27 to 127 Reserved
128 Axis of Motion cannot process this instruction: either the Axis of Motion is busy with
another instruction, or there was no Start pulse on this instruction.
129 Reserved
130 Axis of Motion is not enabled
131 Reserved
132 Reserved
133 Illegal profile specified. The AXISx_RUN and AXISx_CACHE instructions profile
number range must be between 0 - 31.
134 Illegal mod specified in AXISx_GOTO instruction
To verify that the Axis of Motion is wired correctly, to adjust the configuration data, and to
test each movement profile, use the Motion control panel.
If additional changes need to be made in the Axis of Motion, go to the Motion wizard.
S7-200 SMART
12.10 Advanced topics
12.10.1 Understanding the configuration/profile table for the Axis of Motion
Overview
The Motion wizard has been developed to make motion applications easy by automatically
generating the configuration and profile information based upon the answers you give about
your motion control system. Configuration/profile table information is provided for advanced
users who want to create their own motion control routines.
The configuration/profile table is located in the V memory area of the S7-200 SMART CPU.
As shown in the table below, the configuration settings are stored in the following types of
information:
Configuration block: Contains information used to setup the Axis of Motion in preparation
for executing position commands
Interactive block: Supports direct setup of position parameters by the user program
Profile block: Describes a pre-defined move operation to be performed by the Axis of
Motion. You can configure up to 32 profile blocks.
Note
The profile block of the configuration/profile table can contain up to 32 motion profiles. To
create more than 32 move profiles, you can exchange configuration/profile tables by
changing the value stored in the configuration/profile table pointer.
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 38 Configuration/Profile table: Configuration block
Configuration/Profile table
Byte off- Name Function description Type
set
Configuration block
0 MOD_ID Axis of Motion identification field --
5 CB_LEN Length of the configuration block in bytes (1 byte) --
6 IB_LEN Length of the interactive block in bytes (1 byte) --
7 PF_LEN Length of a single profile in bytes (1 byte) --
8 STP_LEN Length of a single step in bytes (1 byte) --
9 STEPS Number of steps allowed per profile (1 byte) --
10 PROFILES Number of profiles from 0 to 32 (1 byte) --
11 -- Reserved: Set to 0 --
14 STOP_RSP Specifies the drive's response to the STP input --
(1 byte):
0: No action. Ignore input condition.
1: Decelerate to a stop and indicate STP input
active.
2: Terminate pulses and indicate STP input.
3 to 255: Reserved (error if specified)
15 LMT-_RSP Specifies the drive's response to the negative limit --
input (1 byte):
1: Decelerate to a stop and indicate limit reached.
2: Terminate pulses and indicate limit reached.
16 LMT+_RSP Specifies the drive's response to the positive limit --
input (1 byte):
1: Decelerate to a stop and indicate limit reached.
2: Terminate pulses and indicate limit reached.
18 MEAS_SYS Specifies the measurement system used to describe --
moves (1 byte):
0: Pulses (speed measured in pulses/sec and
position values measured in pulses; values are
double integer)
1: Engineering units (speed measured in units/sec
and position values measured in units; values are
single precision real)
S7-200 SMART
set
Configuration block
20 PLS/REV Specifies the number of pulses per revolution of the DInt
motor, (only applicable when MEAS_SYS is set to 1) -
(4 bytes)
24 UNITS/REV Specifies the engineering units per revolution of the Real
motor, (only applicable when MEAS_SYS is set to 1) -
(4 bytes)
28 UNITS Reserved for STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART to store a --
custom units string (4 bytes)
32 RP_CFG Specifies the reference point search configuration --
(1 byte):
RP_SEEK_DIR: This bit specifies the starting direction

for a reference point search (0 - positive direction, 1 -
negative direction).
RP_APPR_DIR: This bit specifies the approach direc-
tion for terminating the reference point search (0 -
positive direction, 1 - negative direction).
MODE Specifies the reference point search meth-
od
'0000' Reference point search disabled.
'0001' The reference point is where the RPS
input goes active.
'0010' The reference point is centered within the
active region of the RPS input.
'0011' The reference point is outside the active
region of the RPS input.
'0100' The reference point is within the active
region of the RPS input.
'0101' to Reserved (error if selected)
'1111'
34 RP_Z_CNT Number of pulses of the ZP input used to define the DInt
reference point (4 bytes)
38 RP_FAST Fast speed for the RP seek operation: MAX_SPD or DInt/Real
less (4 bytes)
S7-200 SMART
set
Configuration block
42 RP_SLOW Slow speed for the RP seek operation: Maximum DInt/Real
speed from which the motor can instantly go to a stop
or less (4 bytes)
46 SS_SPEED Start/Stop Speed. (4 bytes): DInt/Real
The starting speed is the maximum speed to which
the motor can instantly go from a stop and the maxi-
mum speed from which the motor can instantly go to a
stop. Operation below this speed is allowed, but the
acceleration and deceleration times do not apply.
50 MAX_SPEED Maximum operating speed of the motor (4 bytes) DInt/Real
54 JOG_SPEED Jog speed (4 bytes): MAX_SPEED or less (4 bytes) DInt/Real
58 JOG_INCREMENT Jog increment value: The distance (or number of DInt/Real
pulses) to move in response to a single jog pulse
(4 bytes).
62 ACCEL_TIME Time required to accelerate from minimum to maxi- DInt
mum speed in msec (4 bytes)
66 DECEL_TIME Time required to decelerate from maximum to mini- DInt
mum speed in msec (4 bytes)
70 BKLSH_COMP Backlash compensation: The distance used to com- DInt/Real
pensate for the system backlash on a direction
change (4 bytes).
74 JERK_TIME Time during which jerk compensation is applied to the DInt
beginning and ending portions of an accelera-
tion/deceleration curve (S-curve). Specifying a value
of 0 disables jerk compensation. The jerk time is given
in milliseconds (Range: 0 ms to 32000 ms. (4 bytes)
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 39 Configuration/Profile table: Interactive block
Byte offset Name Function description Type
Interactive block
78 MOVE_CMD Selects the mode of operation (1 byte): --
4: Manual speed control, positive rotation
5: Manual speed control, negative rotation
6: Single-speed, continuous positive rotation with
triggered stop (Activation of RPS triggers the stop;
TARGET_POS contains distance to travel after
signal)
7: Single-speed, continuous negative rotation with
triggered stop (Activation of RPS triggers the stop;
TARGET_POS contains distance to travel after
signal)
80 TGT_POS Target position to go to in this move (4 bytes) DInt/Real
84 TGT_SPEED Target speed for this move (4 bytes) DInt/Real
88 RP_OFFSET Absolute position of the reference point (4 bytes) DInt/Real
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 40 Configuration/Profile table: Profile block 0
Profile block 0
92(+0) STEPS Number of steps in this move sequence (1 byte) --
93(+1) MODE Selects the mode of operation for this profile block (1 --
byte):
4: Reserved (error if specified)
5: Reserved (error if specified)
6: Single-speed, continuous positive rotation with
triggered stop (RPS input signals stop)
7: Single-speed, continuous negative rotation with
triggered stop (RPS input signals stop)
8: Two-speed, continuous positive rotation RPS
selects speed)
9: Two-speed, continuous negative rotation (RPS
selects speed)
10: Two-speed, continuous positive rotation with
triggered stop (RPS selects speed, TRIG input
signals stop)
11: Two-speed, continuous negative rotation with
triggered stop (RPS selects speed, TRIG input
signals stop)
94(+2) Step 0: POS Position to go to in move step 0 (4 bytes) DInt/Real
98(+6) Step 0: SPEED Target speed for move step 0 (4 bytes) DInt/Real
... Step ...: POS Position to go to in move step ... (4 bytes) DInt/Real
... Step ...: SPEED Target speed for move step ... (4 bytes) DInt/Real
S7-200 SMART
Note
You can have between 1 and 16 steps in the Configuration/Profile table, Profile block 0.
Table 12- 41 Configuration/Profile table: Profile block 1
Profile block 1
X1 STEPS Number of steps in this move sequence (1 byte) --
Note: There can be up to 16 steps.
(X + 1) MODE Selects the mode of operation for this profile block (1 --
byte)
(X + 2) Step 0: POS Position to go to in move step 0 (4 bytes) DInt/Real
(X + 4) Step 0: SPEED The target speed for move step 0 (4 bytes) DInt/Real
... ... ... ...
1 The offset of Profile block 1 and subsequent blocks is variable and dependent upon the number of
steps configured in the largest profile. The offset is determined by the following formula:
Offset of Profile block x = CB_LEN + IB_LEN + (x * PF_LEN)
Table 12- 42 Profile detail for Mode 0 (Absolute position)
Byte offset Step Name Field size Value

from start of number
profile
+0 STEPS byte n = Number of steps configured in this
profile
+1 MODE byte 0 = Absolute position
+2 0 POS dint/fp Destination position in step 0
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed for step 0

(4 * n) + 2 n POS dint/fp Destination position in step n
($ * N) + 6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed for step n
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 43 Profile detail for Mode 1 (Relative position)

profile
+0 STEPS byte n = Number of steps configured in this
profile
+1 MODE byte 0 = Relative position
+2 0 POS dint/fp Distance to travel in step 0
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed for step 0

(4 * n) + 2 n POS dint/fp Distance to travel in step n
($ * N) + 6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed for step n
Table 12- 44 Profile detail for Mode 2 (Single-speed, continuous positive rotation) and Mode 3 (Single-
speed, continuous negative rotation)

profile
+0 STEPS byte 1
+1 MODE byte 2= Single-speed, continuous positive
rotation or
3 = Single-speed, continuous negative
rotation
+2 0 POS dint/fp n.a. (must be set to 0)
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed
Table 12- 45 Profile detail for Mode 6 (Single-speed, continuous positive rotation with triggered stop)
and Mode 7 (Single-speed, continuous negative rotation with triggered stop)

profile
+0 STEPS byte 1
+1 MODE byte 6 = Single-speed, continuous positive
rotation with triggered stop or
7 = Single-speed, continuous negative
rotation with triggered stop
+2 0 POS dint/fp Distance to travel after activation of RPS
signal (value must be positive)
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 46 Profile detail for Mode 8 (Two-speed, continuous positive rotation) and Mode 9 (Two-
speed, continuous negative rotation)

profile
+0 STEPS byte 2
+1 MODE byte 8 = Two-speed, continuous positive rota-
tion or
9 = Two-speed, continuous negative rota-
tion
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed if RPS signal is inactive
+14 SPEED dint/fp Target speed if RPS signal is active
Table 12- 47 Profile detail for Mode 10 (Two-speed, continuous positive rotation with triggered stop)
and Mode 11 (Two-speed, continuous negative rotation with triggered stop)

profile
+0 STEPS byte 2
+1 MODE byte 10 = Two-speed, continuous positive
rotation with triggered stop or
11 = Two-speed, continuous negative
rotation with triggered stop
+2 0 POS dint/fp Distance to travel after activation of TRIG
signal (value must be positive)
+6 SPEED dint/fp Target speed if RPS signal is inactive
+14 SPEED dint/fp Target speed if RPS signal is active
S7-200 SMART
12.10.2 Special memory (SM) locations for the Axis of Motion

The CPU allocates 50 bytes of special memory (SM) to each Axis of Motion. (See the
following table.) When the Axis of Motion detects an error condition or a change in status of
the data, the Axis of Motion updates these SM locations. The first Axis of Motion updates
SMB600 through SMB649 as required to report the error condition, the second Axis of
Motion updates SMB650 through SMB699, and so on.
Table 12- 48 Special memory bytes SMB600 to SMB749
SM bytes for Axes of Motion:

Axis of Motion 0 Axis of Motion 1 Axis of Motion 2
SMB600 to SMB649 SMB650 to SMB699 SMB700 to SMB749
The following table shows the structure of the SM data area allocated for an Axis of Motion.
The definition uses Axis 0 as an example.
S7-200 SMART
Table 12- 49 Special memory area definition for the Axis of Motion 0
SM address Description
SMB600 to SMB615 Axis name (16 ASCII characters). SMB600 is the first character: "Axis 0"
SMB616 to SMB619 Reserved
SMW620 Axis 0: Error code (See "Axis of Motion error codes" (Page 544) list.)
SMB622 Axis 0: Input/output status: Reflects the status of the inputs and outputs
DIS (Disable outputs):

0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
TRIG (Stop input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
STP (Stop input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
LMT- (Negative travel limit input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
LMT+ (Positive travel limit input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
RPS (Reference point switch input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
ZP (Zero pulse input):
0 = No current flow
1 = Current flow
S7-200 SMART
SMB623 Axis 0 Instantaneous status: Reflects the status of the configuration and
rotation direction status
OR (Target speed out of range):

0 = In range
1 = Out of range
R (Direction of rotation):
0 = Positive rotation
1 = Negative rotation
CFG (Module configured):
0 = Not configured
1 = Configured
SMB624 Axis 0: CUR_PF is a byte that indicates the profile currently being executed.
SMB625 Axis 0: CUR_STP is a byte that indicates the step currently being executed
in the profile.
SMD626 Axis 0: CUR_POS is a double-word value that indicates the current position
of the Axis of Motion.
SMD630 Axis 0: CUR_SPD is a double-word value that indicates the current speed of
the Axis of Motion.
SMB634 Axis 0: Result of the instruction. Error conditions above 127 are generated
by the instruction subroutines created by the Motion wizard.
D (Done bit):
0= Operation in progress
1= Operation complete (set by the Axis of Motion during initialization)
ERROR: (See "Motion instruction error codes" (Page 545) list.)
SMB635 to SMB645 Reserved
SMD646 Axis 0: Pointer to the V memory location of the configuration/profile table. A
pointer value to an area other than V memory is not valid. The Axis of Mo-
tion monitors this location until it receives a non-zero pointer value.
S7-200 SMART
12.11 Understanding the RP Seek modes of the Axis of Motion

The following figures provide diagrams of the different options for each RP Seek mode:
RP Seek: Mode 1 shows two of the options for RP Seek mode 1. This mode locates the
RP where the RPS input goes active on the approach from the work zone side.
RP in the center within the active region of the RPS input.
RP a specified number of zero pulses (ZP) outside the active region of the RPS input.
RP a specified number of zero pulses (ZP) within the active region of the RPS input.
For each mode, there are four combinations of RP Seek direction and RP Approach
direction. (Only two of the combinations are shown.) These combinations determine the
pattern for the RP Seek operation. For each of the combinations, there are also four different
starting points:
The work zones for each diagram have been located so that moving from the reference point
to the work zone requires movement in the same direction as the RP Approach Direction. By
selecting the location of the work zone in this way, all the backlash of the mechanical gearing
system is removed for the first move to the work zone after a reference point seek.
Note
The RPS input must be enabled to use the RP Seek functionality. The ZP input must also be
enabled if RP Seek modes 3 or 4 are to be used, unless you configure the number of ZP
pulses to be received after entering the RPS active region to a value of "0".
S7-200 SMART
RP seek mode 1
Default configuration: RP seek direction: negative and RP approach direction: positive
Default configuration: RP seek direction: positive and RP approach direction: positive
: Positive motion
: Negative motion
S7-200 SMART
RP seek mode 2
: Positive motion
: Negative motion
S7-200 SMART
RP seek mode 3
: Positive motion
: Negative motion
S7-200 SMART
RP seek mode 4
: Positive motion
: Negative motion
S7-200 SMART
12.11.1 Selecting the work zone location to eliminate backlash

The following figure shows the work zone in relationship to the reference point (RP), the RPS
Active zone, and the limit switches (LMT+ and LMT-) for an approach direction that
eliminates the backlash. The second part of the illustration places the work zone so that the
backlash is not eliminated. The following figure shows RP seek mode 3. A similar placement
of the work zone is possible, although not recommended, for each of the search sequences
for each of the other RP seek modes.
Selecting the work zone location to eliminate backlash

Backlash is eliminated: RP seek direction: negative and RP approach direction: negative
Backlash is not eliminated: RP seek direction: negative and RP approach direction: negative
: Positive motion
Negative motion
S7-200 SMART
Technical specifications A
A.1 General specifications
A.1.1 General technical specifications
Standards compliance
The S7-200 SMART automation system complies with the following standards and test
specifications. The test criteria for the S7-200 SMART automation system are based on
these standards and test specifications.
CE approval
The S7-200 SMART Automation System satisfies requirements and safety related objectives
according to the EC directives listed below, and conforms to the harmonized European
standards (EN) for the programmable controllers listed in the Official Journals of the
European Community.
EC Directive 2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive) "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use
within Certain Voltage Limits"
EN 61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers - Equipment requirements and tests
EC Directive 2004/108/EC (EMC Directive) "Electromagnetic Compatibility"
Emission standard
EN 61000-6-4:2007 / AI:2011: Industrial Environment
Immunity standard
EN 61000-6-2:2005: Industrial Environment
The CE Declaration of Conformity is held on file available to competent authorities at:
Siemens AG
Sector Industry
DF FA AS DH AMB
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Germany
S7-200 SMART
Technical specifications
Industrial environments
The S7-200 SMART automation system is designed for use in industrial environments.
Table A- 1 Industrial environments
Application field Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

Industrial EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN 61000-6-2:2005
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device to operate as
intended in an electromagnetic environment and to operate without emitting levels of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) that may disturb other electrical devices in the vicinity.
Table A- 2 Immunity per EN 61000-6-2
Electromagnetic compatibility - Immunity per EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge to all surfaces
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV contact discharge to exposed conductive surfaces
EN 61000-4-3 80 to 1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM at 1 kHz
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnet- 1.4 to 2.0 GHz, 3 V/m, 80% AM a 1 kHz
ic field immunity test 2.0 to 2.7 GHz, 1 V/m, 80% AM at 1 kHz
EN 61000-4-4 2 kV, 5 kHz with coupling network to AC and DC system power
Fast transient bursts 2 kV, 5 kHz with coupling clamp to I/O
EN 6100-4-5 AC systems - 2 kV common mode, 1kV differential mode
Surge immunity DC systems - 2 kV common mode, 1kV differential mode
For DC systems (I/O signals, DC power systems) external protection is re-
quired.
EN 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 10 V RMS, 80% AM at 1kHz
Immunity to conducted disturbances
EN 61000-4-11 AC systems
Voltage dips 0% for 1 cycle, 40% for 12 cycles and 70% for 30 cycles at 60 Hz
Table A- 3 Conducted and radiated emissions per EN 61000-6-4
Electromagnetic compatibility - Conducted and radiated emissions per EN 61000-6-4

Conducted Emissions 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz <79dB (V) quasi-peak; <66 dB (V) average
EN 55011, Class A, Group 1 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz <73dB (V) quasi-peak; <60 dB (V) average
Radiated Emissions 30 MHz to 230 MHz <40dB (V/m) quasi-peak; measured at 10m
EN 55011, Class A, Group 1 230 MHz to 1 GHz <47dB (V/m) quasi-peak; measured at 10m
S7-200 SMART
Environmental conditions
Table A- 4 Transport and storage
Environmental conditions - Transport and storage

EN 60068-2-2, Test Bb, Dry heat and -40 C to +70 C
EN 60068-2-1, Test Ab, Cold
EN 60068-2-30, Test Db, Damp heat 25 C to 55 C, 95% humidity
EN 60068-2-14, Test Na, temperature shock -40 C to +70 C, dwell time 3 hours, 2 cycles
EN 60068-2-32, Free fall 0.3 m, 5 times, product packaging
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660h Pa (corresponding to an altitude of -1000 to 3500m)
Table A- 5 Operating conditions
Environmental conditions - Operating

Ambient temperature range 0 C to 55 C horizontal mounting
(Inlet Air 25 mm below unit) 0 C to 45 C vertical mounting
95% non-condensing humidity
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa (corresponding to an altitude of -1000 to 2000m)
Concentration of contaminants S02: < 0.5 ppm; H2S: < 0.1 ppm; RH < 60% non-condensing
EN 60068-2-14, Test Nb, temperature change 5 C to 55 C, 3 C/minute
EN 60068-2-27 Mechanical shock 15 G, 11 ms pulse, 6 shocks in each of 3 axis
EN 60068-2-6 Sinusoidal vibration DIN rail mount: 3.5 mm from 5-8.4 Hz, 1G from 8.4 - 150 Hz
Table A- 6 High potential isolation test
High potential isolation test

24 V DC/ 5 V DC nominal circuits 707 V DC (type test of optical isolation boundaries)
230 V AC circuits to ground and 24 V DC / 5 V DC 2300 V AC or 3250 V DC
circuits
Ethernet port to 24 V DC / 5 V DC circuits and 1500 V AC (type test only)
ground1
1 Ethernet port isolation is designed to limit hazard during short term network faults to hazardous voltages. It does not
conform to safety requirements for routine AC line voltage isolation.
Insulation
The insulation is designed in accordance with the requirements of EN 61131-2.
Note
For modules with 24 V DC supply voltage, the electrical isolation is designed for max. 60 V
AC / 75 V DC and basic insulation is designed according to EN 61131-2.
S7-200 SMART
Contamination level/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131-2

Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category: II
Protection class in accordance with IEC 61131-2

Protection Class II according to EN 61131-2 (Protective conductor not required)
Degree of protection IP20

IP20 Mechanical Protection, EN 60529
Protects against finger contact with high voltage as tested by standard probe. External
protection required for dust, dirt, water and foreign objects of < 12.5mm in diameter.
Rated voltages
Table A- 7 Rated voltages
Rated voltage Tolerance

24 V DC 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC
120/240 V AC 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 47 to 63 Hz
Note
When a mechanical contact turns on output power to the S7-200 SMART CPU, or any digital
expansion module, it sends a "1" signal to the digital outputs for approximately 150
microseconds. This could cause unexpected machine or process operation which could
result in death or serious injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. You must plan for
this, especially if you are using devices which respond to short duration pulses.
S7-200 SMART
Relay electrical service life

The typical performance data supplied by relay vendors is shown below. Actual performance
may vary depending upon your specific application. An external protection circuit that is
adapted to the load will enhance the service life of the contacts.
Service life (x 103 operations)

250 V AC resistive load
30 V DC resistive load
250 V AC inductive load (p.f=0.4)
30 V DC inductive load (L/R=7ms)
Rated Operating Current (A)
S7-200 SMART
A.2 S7-200 SMART CPUs
A.2.1 CPU ST20 and CPU SR20
A.2.1.1 General specifications and features
General specifications and features of the CPU ST20 and CPU SR20
Table A- 8 General specifications
Technical data CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay

Article number 6ES7 288-1ST20-0AA0 6ES7 288-1SR20-0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 90 x 100 x 81 90 x 100 x 81
Weight 320 grams 367.3 grams
Power dissipation 20 W 14 W
Current available (EM bus) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC)
Current available (24 V DC) 300 mA max. (sensor power) 300 mA max. (sensor power)
Digital input current consumption 4 mA/input used 4 mA/input used
(24 V DC)
Table A- 9 CPU features
Technical data Description

CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC, CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay
User memory1 Program 12 Kbytes
User data (V) 8 Kbytes
Retentive 10 Kbytes max.1
On-board digital I/O 12 inputs/8 outputs
Process image 256 bits of inputs (I) / 256 bits of outputs (Q)
Analog image 56 words of inputs (AI) / 56 words of outputs (AQ)
Bit memory (M) 256 bits
Temporary (local) memory (L) 64 bytes in the main program and 64 bytes in each subroutine and interrupt routine
Sequential control relays (S) 256 bits
Expansion modules expansion 6
Signal board expansion 1 max.
High-speed counters 4 total
4 at 200 K Hz for single phase
2 at 100 K Hz for A/B phase
Pulse outputs 2 2 at 100 KHz2
Pulse catch inputs 12
S7-200 SMART

CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC, CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay
Cyclic interrupts 2 at 1 ms resolution
Edge interrupts 4 rising and 4 falling (6 and 6 with optional signal board)
Memory card microSDHC Card (optional)
Real time clock accuracy +/- 120 seconds/month
Real time clock retention time 7 days typ./6 days min. at 25C (maintenance-free Super Capacitor)
ues on retentive times) to be retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.
Table A- 10 Performance
Type of instruction Execution speed

Boolean 150 ns instruction
Move Word 1.2 s/instruction
Real math 3.6 s/instruction
Table A- 11 User program elements supported
Element Description
POUs Type/ quan- Main program: 1
tity Subroutines: 128 (0 to 127)
Interrupt routines: 128 (0 to 127)
Nesting From main program: 8 subroutine levels
depth From interrupt routine: 4 subroutine levels
Accumulators Quantity 4
Timers Type/ quan- Non-retentive (TON, TOF): 192
tity Retentive (TONR): 64
Counters Quantity 256
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 12 Communication

Number of ports Ethernet: 1
Serial ports: 1 (RS485)
Add-on serial ports: 1 (with optional RS232/485 signal board)
HMI device 4 per port : RS485, SB CM01(RS232/485 signal board)
8 per port: Ethernet
Programming device (PG) Ethernet: 1
Connections Ethernet: 1 for programming device, 8 for HMIs, 8 for CPUs, 8 active GET/PUT, 8 pas-
sive GET/PUT
RS485: 4 for HMIs per port
CPUs (peer-to-peer) Ethernet: 8
Data rates Ethernet: 10/100 Mb/s
RS485 system protocols: 9600, 19200, and 187500 b/s
RS485 freeport: 1200 to 115200 b/s
Isolation (external signal to PLC Ethernet: Transformer isolated, 1500 V AC
logic) RS485: none
Cable type Ethernet: CAT5e shielded
RS485: PROFIBUS network cable
Table A- 13 Power supply

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 85 to 264 V AC
Line frequency -- 47 to 63 Hz
Input current CPU only at 160 mA at 24 V DC (without driving 300 210 mA at 120 V AC (with 300 mA power
max. load mA sensor power) sensor output)
430 mA at 24 V DC (with driving 300 mA 90 mA at 120 V AC (without 300 mA power
sensor power) sensor output)
120 mA at 240 V AC (with 300 mA power
sensor output)
60 mA at 240 V AC (without 300 mA power
sensor output)
CPU with all 720 mA at 24 V DC 290 mA at 120 V AC
expansion 170 mA at 240 V AC
accessories
at max. load
Inrush current (max.) 11.7 A at 28.8 V DC 9.3 A at 264 V AC
Isolation (input power to logic) -- 1500 V AC
Ground leakage, AC line to func- -- 0.5 mA max.
tional earth
Hold up time (loss of power) 20 ms at 24 V DC 30 ms at 120 V AC
200 ms at 240 V AC
Internal fuse, not user replacea- 3 A, 250 V slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow
ble
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 14 Sensor power

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Output current rating (max.) 300 mA (short circuit protected) 300 mA (short circuit protected)
Maximum ripple noise (<10 < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak
MHz)
Isolation (CPU logic to sensor Not isolated Not isolated
power)
A.2.1.2 Digital inputs and outputs
Table A- 15 Digital inputs

Number of inputs 12 12
Type SinkSource (IEC Type 1 sink, except I0.0 Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 sink)
to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC, max. 30 V DC, max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) I0.0 to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7: 4 V DC at 8 mA 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Other inputs: 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) I0.0 to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7: 1 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA
Other inputs: 5 V DC at 1 mA
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
Isolation groups 1 1
Filter times Individually selectable on each channel Individually selectable on each channel
(points I0.0 to I1.3): (points I0.0 to I1.3):
s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8 s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
HSC clock input rates (max.) 4 HSC at 200 KHz for single phase 4 HSC at 200 KHz for single phase
(Logic 1 Level = 15 to 26 V DC) 2 HSC at 100 KHz for A/B phase 2 HSC at 100 KHz for A/B phase
Number of inputs on simultane- 12 12
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters I0.0 to I0.3: All inputs:
Shielded (only): Shielded: 500 m normal inputs,
500 m normal (low-speed) inputs 50 m HSC inputs
50 m HSC (high-speed) inputs Unshielded: 300 m normal inputs
I0.6 to I0.7:
Shielded (only): 500 m normal inputs
All other inputs:
Shielded: 500 m normal inputs
Unshielded: 300 m normal inputs
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 16 Digital outputs

Number of outputs 8 8
Type Solid state - MOSFET (sourcing) Relay, dry contact
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC min. --
Logic 0 signal with 10 K load 0.1 V DC max. --
Rated current per point (max.) 0.5 A 2.0 A
Rated current per common 6A 10.0 A
(max.)
Lamp load 5W 30 W DC/200 W AC
ON state resistance 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when new
Leakage current per point 10 A max. --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts closed
Overload protection No No
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute (coil to contact)
None (coil to logic)
Isolation resistance -- 100 M min. when new
Isolation between open contacts -- 750 V AC for 1 minute
Inductive clamp voltage L+ minus 48 V DC, 1 W dissipation Not recommended
Switching delay (Qa.0 to Qa.3) 1.0 s max., off to on 10 ms max.
3.0 s max., on to off
Switching delay (Qa.4 to Qa.7) 50 s max., off to on 10 ms max.
200 s max., on to off
Lifetime mechanical (no load) -- 10,000,000 open/close cycles
Lifetime contacts at rated load -- 100,000 open/close cycles
Output state in STOP mode Last value or substitute value (default Last value or substitute value (default value
value 0) 0)
Number of outputs on simulta- 8 8
neously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m
Unshielded: 300 m Unshielded: 300 m
S7-200 SMART
A.2.1.3 CPU ST20 and CPU SR20 wiring diagrams
Table A- 17 Wiring diagram for the CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC (6ES7 288-1ST20-0AA0)
CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC (6ES7 288-1ST20-0AA0)

24 V DC Sensor Power
Out
Table A- 18 Connector pin locations for CPU ST20 DC/DC/DC (6ES7 288-1ST20-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12

1 1M DI a.7 2L+
2 DI a.0 DI b.0 2M
3 DI a.1 DI b.1 DQ a.0
6 DI a.4 L+ / 24 V DC DQ a.3
7 DI a.5 M / 24 V DC DQ a.4
8 DI a.6 Functional Earth DQ a.5
9 -- -- DQ a.6
10 -- -- DQ a.7
11 -- -- L+ / 24 V DC
12 -- -- M/ 24 V DC
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 19 Wiring diagram for the CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1SR20-0AA0)
CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1SR20-0AA0)
24 V DC sensor power
output
Table A- 20 Connector pin locations for CPU SR20 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1SR20-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12

1 1M DI a.7 1L
6 DI a.4 L1 / 120 - 240 V AC 2L
7 DI a.5 N / 120 - 240 V AC DQ a.4
8 DI a.6 Functional Earth DQ a.5
9 -- -- DQ a.6
10 -- -- DQ a.7
11 -- -- L+ / 24 V DC Out
12 -- -- M / 24 V DC Out
S7-200 SMART
A.2.2 CPU ST30 and CPU SR30
General specifications and features of the CPU ST30 and CPU SR30

Article number 6ES7 288-1ST30-0AA0 6ES7 288-1SR30-0AA0
Weight 375 g 435 g
Power dissipation 12 W 14 W
Current available (EM bus) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC)
Current available (24 V DC) 300 mA max. (sensor power) 300 mA max. (sensor power)
Digital input current consumption 4 mA/ input used 4 mA/ input used
(24 V DC)

CPU ST30 DC/DC/DC CPU SR30 AC/DC/Relay
User memory1 Program 18 Kbytes 18 Kbytes
User data (V) 12 Kbytes 12 Kbytes
On-board digital I/O 18 inputs/12 outputs 18 inputs/12 outputs
Process image 256 bits of inputs (I) / 256 bits of outputs 256 bits of inputs (I) / 256 bits of outputs
(Q) (Q)
Analog image 56 words of inputs (AI) / 56 words of 56 words of inputs (AI) / 56 words of out-
outputs (AQ) puts (AQ)
Bit memory (M) 256 bits 256 bits
Temporary (local) memory (L) 64 bytes in the main program and 64 64 bytes in the main program and 64 bytes
bytes in each subroutine and interrupt in each subroutine and interrupt routine
routine
Sequential control relays (S) 256 bits 256 bits
Expansion modules expansion 6 6
Signal board expansion 1 max. 1 max.
High-speed counters 4 total 4 total
4 at 200 KHz for single phase 4 at 200 KHz for single phase
2 at 100 KHz for A/B phase 2 at 100 KHz for A/B phase
Pulse outputs 2 3 at 100 KHz --
Pulse catch inputs 12 12
Cyclic interrupts 2 at 1 ms resolution 2 at 1 ms resolution
S7-200 SMART

CPU ST30 DC/DC/DC CPU SR30 AC/DC/Relay
Edge interrupts 4 rising and 4 falling (6 and 6 with op- 4 rising and 4 falling (6 and 6 with optional
tional signal board) signal board)
Memory card microSDHC Card (optional) microSDHC Card (optional)
Real time clock accuracy +/- 120 seconds/month +/- 120 seconds/month
Real time clock retention time 7 days typ./6 days min. at 25C (mainte- 7 days typ./6 days min. at 25C (mainte-
nance-free Super Capacitor) nance-free Super Capacitor)
ues on retentive times) to be retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.

Element Description
S7-200 SMART

sive GET/PUT
logic) RS485: none

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 85 to 264 V AC
Line frequency -- 47 to 63 Hz
Input current CPU only at 64 mA at 24 V DC (without driving 300 92 mA at 120 V AC (with power sensor)
max. load mA sensor power) 40 mA at 120 V AC (without power sensor)
365 mA at 24 V DC (with driving 300 mA 52 mA at 240 V AC (with power sensor)
sensor power)
27 mA at 240 V AC (without power sensor)
CPU with all 624 mA at 24 V DC 136 mA at 120 V AC
accessories
at max. load
Inrush current (max.) 6A at 28.8 V DC 8.9 A at 264 V AC
Isolation (input power to logic) -- 1500 V AC
Ground leakage, AC line to func- -- 0.5 mA max.
tional earth
Hold up time (loss of power) 20 ms at 24 V DC 30 ms at 120 V AC
200 ms at 240 V AC
Internal fuse, not user replacea- 3 A, 250 V, slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow
ble
S7-200 SMART

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Output current rating (max.) 300 mA (short circuit protected) 300 mA (short circuit protected)
Maximum ripple noise (<10 < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak
MHz)
Isolation (CPU logic to sensor Not isolated Not isolated
power)

Type Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 sink, except Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 sink)
I0.0 to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 ma, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC, max 30 V DC, max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec. 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) I0.0 to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7: 4 V DC at 8 mA 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Other inputs: 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) I0.0 to I0.3, I0.6 to I0.7: 1 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA
Other inputs: 5 V DC at 1 mA
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
Filter times Individually selectable on each channel Individually selectable on each channel
(points I0.0 to I1.5): (points I0.0 to I1.5):
s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8 s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
Individually selectable on each channel Individually selectable on each channel
(points I1.6 and greater): (points I1.6 and greater):
ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8
HSC clock input rates (max.) 4 HSC at 200 KHz for single phase 4 HSC at 200 KHz for single phase
(Logic 1 Level = 15 to 26 V DC) 2 HSC at 100 KHz for A/B phase 2 HSC at 100 KHz for A/B phase
Number of inputs on simultane- 18 18
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters I0.0 to I0.3: All inputs:
Shielded (only): Shielded: 500 m normal inputs,
500 m normal (low-speed) inputs 50 m HSC inputs
50 m HSC (high-speed) inputs Unshielded: 300 m normal inputs
I0.6 to I0.7:
Shielded (only): 500 m normal inputs
S7-200 SMART

All other inputs:
Shielded: 500 m normal inputs
Unshielded: 300 m normal inputs1
1 When I0.0 to I0.3 are used at high-speed counter inputs, all other inputs must use shielded cable.

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC min. --
Logic 0 signal with 10 K load 0.1 V DC max. --
Rated current per common 6A 10.0 A
(max.)
Lamp load 5W 30 W DC/200 W AC
ON state resistance 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when new
Leakage current per point 10 A max. --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts closed
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute (coil to contact)
Inductive clamp voltage L+ minus 48 V DC, 1 W dissipation Not recommended
Switching delay (Qa.0 to Qa.3) 1.0 s max., off to on 10 ms max.
Switching delay (Qa.4 to Qb.7) 50 s max., off to on, 10 ms max.
Output state in STOP mode Last value or substitute value (default Last value or substitute value (default value
value 0) 0)
neously
S7-200 SMART
A.2.2.3 CPU ST30 and CPU SR30 wiring diagrams
CPU ST30 DC/DC/DC (6ES7 288-1ST30-0AA0)

24 V DC
Sensor
Power Out
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI a.7 2L+ DQ a.6
2 DI a.0 DI b.0 2M DQ a.7
3 DI a.1 DI b.1 DQ a.0 3L+
4 DI a.2 DI b.2 DQ a.1 3M
5 DI a.3 DI b.3 DQ a.2 DQb.0
6 DI a.4 DIb.4 DQa.3 DQb.1
7 DI a.5 DIb.5 DQ a.4 DQb.2
8 DI a.6 DIb.6 DQ a.5 DQb.3
9 -- DIb.7 -- L+ / 24 V DC
10 -- DIc.0 -- M / 24 V DC
11 -- DIc.1 -- --
12 -- L+24 V DC -- --
13 -- M / 24 V DC -- --
14 -- Functional Earth -- --
S7-200 SMART
CPU SR30 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1SR30-0AA0)

24 V DC
Sensor
Power Out
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI a.7 1L DQ a.6
2 DI a.0 DI b.0 DQ a.0 DQ a.7
3 DI a.1 DI b.1 DQ a.1 3L
4 DI a.2 DI b.2 DQ a.2 DQ b.0
6 DI a.4 DIb.4 2L DQ b.2
7 DI a.5 DIb.5 DQ a.4 DQ b.3
8 DI a.6 DIb.6 DQ a.5 --
9 -- DIb.7 -- L+ / 24 V DC Out
10 -- DIc.0 -- M / 24 V DC Out
11 -- DIc.1 -- --
12 -- L1 / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
13 -- N / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
S7-200 SMART
A.2.3 CPU ST40, CPU SR40, and CPU CR40
General specifications and features of the CPU ST40, CPU SR40, and CPU CR40
Technical data CPU ST40 CPU SR40 CPU CR40

DC/DC/DC AC/DC/Relay AC/DC/Relay
Article number 6ES7 288-1ST40-0AA0 6ES7 288-1SR40-0AA0 6ES7 288-1CR40-0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 125 x 100 x 81 125 x 100 x 81 125 x 100 x 81
Weight 410.3 grams 441.3 grams 440 grams
Power dissipation 18 W 23 W 18 W
Current available (EM bus) 1440 mA max. (5 V DC) 1440 mA max. (5 V DC) --
Current available (24 V DC) 300 mA max. (sensor pow- 300 mA max. (sensor pow- 300 mA max. (sensor pow-
er) er) er)
Digital input current consumption 4 mA/input used 4 mA/input used 4 mA/input used
(24 V DC)

CPU ST40 DC/DC/DC, CPU CR40 AC/DC/Relay
CPU SR40 AC/DC/Relay
User data 16 Kbytes 8 Kbytes
(V)
(Q) (Q)
Analog image 56 words of inputs (AI) / 56 words of --
outputs (AQ)
Temporary (local) memory (L) 64 bytes in the main program and 64 bytes in the main program and 64 bytes
64 bytes in each subroutine and interrupt in each subroutine and interrupt routine
routine
Expansion modules expansion 6 max. --
Signal board expansion 1 max. --
4 at 200 KHz single phase 4 at 100 KHz single phase
2 at 100 KHz A/B phase 2 at 50 KHz A/B phase
S7-200 SMART

CPU ST40 DC/DC/DC, CPU CR40 AC/DC/Relay
Edge interrupts 4 rising and 4 falling (6 4 rising and 4 falling
and 6 with optional signal board)
Memory card microSDHC Card (optional) microSDHC Card (optional)
Real time clock accuracy 120 seconds/month --
Real time clock retention time 7 days typ./6 days min. at 25C --
ues) on retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.

Element Description
S7-200 SMART

Add-on serial ports: 1 (with optional RS232/485 signal board) on SR40/ST40 only
HMI device1 4 per port
sive GET/PUT
Isolation (external signal to PLC Ethernet: Transformer isolated, 1500 V DC
logic) RS485: none

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 85 to 264 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
Line frequency -- 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Input current (max. CPU only 190 mA at 24 V DC (with- 130 mA at 120 V AC (with- 130 mA at 120 V AC (with-
load) out driving 300 mA sensor out driving 300 mA sensor out driving 300 mA sensor
power) power) power)
470 mA at 24 V DC (with 250 mA at 120 V (with 250 mA at 120 V (with
driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor
80 mA at 240 V AC (with- 80 mA at 240 V AC (with-
out driving 300 mA sensor out driving 300 mA sensor
power) power)
150 mA at 240 V AC (with 150 mA at 240 V AC (with
driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor
power) power)
CPU with all 680 mA at 24 V DC 300 mA at 120 V AC --
accessories
Inrush current (max.) 11.7 A at 28.8 V DC 16.3 A at 264 V AC 7.3 A at 264 V AC
Isolation (input power to logic) -- 1500 V AC 1500 V AC
Ground leakage, AC line to func- -- 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
tional earth
S7-200 SMART

Hold up time (loss of power) 20 ms at 24 V DC 30 ms at 120 V AC 50 ms at 120 V AC
200 ms at 240 V AC 400 ms at 240 V AC
Internal fuse, not user replacea- 3 A, 250 V, slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow
ble

Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Output current rating (max.) 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA
Maximum ripple noise (<10 < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak
MHz)
Isolation (CPU logic to sensor Not isolated Not isolated Not isolated
power)

Number of inputs 24 24 24
Type Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 Sink/Source (IEC Type 1
sink, except I0.0 to I0.3) sink) sink)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC, max. 30 V DC, max. 30 V DC, max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec. 35 V DC for 0.5 sec. 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) I0.0 to I0.3: 4 V DC at 8 mA I0.0 to I0.3: 4 V DC at 8 mA 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Other inputs: 15 V DC at 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) I0.0 to I0.3: 1 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA
Other inputs: 5 V DC at 1
mA
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
Isolation group 1 1 1
Filter times Individually selectable on Individually selectable on Individually selectable on
each channel (points I0.0 to each channel (points I0.0 to each channel (points I0.0 to
I1.5): I1.5): I1.5):
s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2,
6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8
ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2,
6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8
S7-200 SMART

Individually selectable on Individually selectable on Individually selectable on
each channel (points I1.6 each channel (points I1.6 each channel (points I1.6
and greater): and greater): and greater):
ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8
HSC clock input rates (max.) 4 HSC at 200 k Hz for 4 HSC at 200k Hz for single 4 HSC at 100k for Hz for
(Logic 1 Level = 15 to 26 V DC) single phase phase single phase
2 HSC at 100 K Hz for A/B 2 HSC at 100 K Hz for A/B 2 HSC at 50 K Hz for A/B
phase phase phase
Number of inputs on simultane- 24 24 24
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters I0.0 to I0.3: All inputs: All inputs:
Shielded (only): Shielded: Shielded:
500 m normal (low- 500 m normal inputs 500 m normal inputs
speed) inputs, 50 m HSC inputs 50 m HSC inputs
50 m HSC (high-speed) Unshielded: Unshielded:
inputs
300 m normal inputs 300 m normal inputs
All other inputs:
Shielded:
500 m normal inputs
Unshielded:
300 m normal inputs

Number of outputs 16 16 16
Type Solid state - MOSFET Relay, dry contact Relay, dry contact
(sourcing)
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V
AC AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC min. -- --
Logic 0 signal with 10 K load 0.1 V DC max. -- --
Rated current per point (max.) 0.5 A 2A 2A
Rated current per common 6A 10 A 10 A
(max.)
Lamp load 5W 30 W DC / 200 W AC 30 W DC / 200 W AC
ON state resistance 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when new 0.2 max. when new
Leakage current per point 10 A max. -- --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts closed 7 A with contacts closed
Overload protection No No No
S7-200 SMART

Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute (coil
(coil to contact) to contact)
None (coil to logic) None (coil to logic)
Isolation resistance -- 100 M min. when new 100 M min. when new
Isolation between open contact -- 750 V AC for 1 minute 750 V AC for 1 minute
Isolation groups 2 4 4
Inductive clamp voltage L+ minus 48 V DC, 1 W -- --
dissipation
Switching delay (Qa.0 to Qa.3) 1.0 s max., off to on 10 ms max. 10 ms max.
Switching delay (Qa.4 to Qb.7) 50 s max., off to on 10 ms max. 10 ms max.
Lifetime mechanical (no load) -- 10,000,000 open/close 10,000,000 open/close cy-
cycles cles
Lifetime contacts at rated load -- 100,000 open/close cycles 100,000 open/close cycles
Output state in STOP mode Last value or substitute Last value or substitute Last value or substitute
value (default value 0) value (default value 0) value (default value 0)
Number of outputs on simulta- 16 16 16
neously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m
Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m
S7-200 SMART
A.2.3.3 CPU ST40, SR40 and CR40 wiring diagrams
24 V DC
Sensor Pow-
er Out
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI a.7 2L+ 3M
2 DI a.0 DI b.0 2M DQ b.0
9 -- DI b.7 DQ a.6 DQ b.7
10 -- DI c.0 DQ a.7 L+ / 24 V DC Out
11 -- DI c.1 3L+ M / 24 V DC Out
12 -- DI c.2 -- --
13 -- DI c.3 -- --
14 -- DI c.4 -- --
15 -- DI c.5 -- --
16 -- DI c.6 -- --
17 -- DI c.7 -- --
18 -- L+ / 24 V DC -- --
19 -- M / 24 V DC -- --
S7-200 SMART
24 V DC
Sensor Pow-
er Out
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI a.7 1L DQ b.0
6 DI a.4 DI b.4 2L DQ b.4
9 -- DI b.7 DQ a.6 DQ b.7
10 -- DI c.0 DQ a.7 L+ / 24 V DC Out
11 -- DI c.1 3L M / 24 V DC Out
12 -- DI c.2 -- --
13 -- DI c.3 -- --
14 -- DI c.4 -- --
15 -- DI c.5 -- --
16 -- DI c.6 -- --
17 -- DI c.7 -- --
18 -- L1 / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
S7-200 SMART
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

19 -- N / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
Table A- 47 Wiring diagram for the CPU CR40 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1CR40-0AA0)
24 V DC
Sensor Pow-
er Out
Table A- 48 Connector pin locations for CPU CR40 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1CR40-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI a.7 1L DQ b.0
6 DI a.4 DI b.4 2L DQ b.4
9 -- DI b.7 DQ a.6 DQ b.7
10 -- DI c.0 DQ a.7 L+ / 24 V DC Out
11 -- DI c.1 3L M / 24 V DC Out
12 -- DI c.2 -- --
13 -- DI c.3 -- --
14 -- DI c.4 -- --
15 -- DI c.5 -- --
S7-200 SMART
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

16 -- DI c.6 -- --
17 -- DI c.7 -- --
18 -- L1 / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
19 -- N / 120 - 240 V AC -- --
A.2.4 CPU ST60, CPU SR60, and CPU CR60
Technical data CPU ST60 DC/DC/DC CPU SR60 AC/DC/Relay CPU CR60 AC/DC/Relay
Article number 6ES7 288-1ST60-0AA0 6ES7 288-1SR60-0AA0 6ES7 288-1CR60-0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 175 x 100 x 81 175 x 100 x 81 175 x 100 x 81
Weight 528.2 grams 611.5 grams 620 grams
Power dissipation 20 W 25 W 20 W
Current available (EM bus) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC) 1400 mA max. (5 V DC) --
Current available (24 V DC) 300 mA max. (sensor pow- 300 mA max. (sensor pow- 300 mA max. (sensor pow-
er) er) er)
Digital input current consumption 4 mA/input used 4 mA/input used 4 mA/input used
(24 V DC)

CPU ST60, CPU SR60 CPU CR60 AC/DC/Relay
User data (V) 20 Kbytes 8 Kbytes
(Q) (Q)
Analog image 56 words of inputs (AI) / 56 words of --
outputs (AQ)
Temporary (local) memory (L) 64 bytes in the main program and 64 64 bytes in the main program and 64 bytes
bytes in each subroutine and interrupt in each subroutine and interrupt routine
routine
Expansion modules expansion 6 max. --
S7-200 SMART

CPU ST60, CPU SR60 CPU CR60 AC/DC/Relay
Signal board expansion 1 max. --
4 at 200 KHz single phase 4 at 100 KHz single phase
2 at 100 KHz A/B phase 2 at 50 KHz A/B phase
Edge interrupts 4 rising and 4 falling (6 and 6 with option- 4 rising and 4 falling
al signal board)
Memory card microSDHC card (optional) microSDHC card (optional)
Real time clock accuracy 120 seconds/month --
Real time clock retention time 7 days typ./6 days min. at 25C --
1 You can configure areas of V memory, M memory, C memory (current values) and portions of T memory (current values
on retentive timers) to be retentive, up to the specified maximum amount.

Element Description
S7-200 SMART

sive GET/PUT
logic) RS485: none
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 85 to 264 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
Line frequency -- 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Input current (max. CPU only 220 mA at 24 V DC (with- 160 mA at 120 V AC (with- 160 mA at 120 V AC (with-
load) out driving 300 mA sensor out driving 300 mA sensor out driving 300 mA sensor
500 mA at 24 V DC (with 280 mA at 120 V AC (with 280 mA at 120 V AC (with
driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor
90 mA at 240 V AC (with- 90 mA at 240 V AC (without
out driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor
power) power)
160 mA at 240 V AC (with 160 mA at 240 V AC (with
driving 300 mA sensor driving 300 mA sensor
power) power)
CPU with all 710 mA at 24 V DC 370 mA at 120 V AC --
accessories
Inrush current (max.) 11.5 A at 28.8 V DC 16.3 A at 264 V DC 7.3 A at 264 V AC
Isolation (input power to logic) None 1500 V AC 1500 V AC
Ground leakage, AC line to func- None None None
tional earth
S7-200 SMART
Hold up time (loss of power) 20 ms at 24 V DC 30 ms at 120 V AC 50 ms at 120 V AC
200 ms at 240 V AC 400 ms at 240 V AC
Internal fuse, not user replacea- 3 A, 250 V, slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow 3 A, 250 V, slow blow
ble
Technical data CPU ST60 DC/DC/DC CPU SR60 AC/DC/Relay CPU CR 60 AC/DC/Relay
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Output current rating (max.) 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA
Maximum ripple noise (<10 < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak < 1 V peak to peak
MHz)
Isolation (CPU logic to sensor Not isolated Not isolated Not isolated
power)
Number of inputs 36 36 36
Type Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 Sink/Source (IEC Type 1
sink, except I0.0 to I0.3) sink) sink)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC, max. 30 V DC, max. 30 V DC, max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec. 35 V DC for 0.5 sec. 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) I0.0 to I0.3: 4 V DC at 8 mA I0.0 to I0.3: 4 V DC at 8 mA 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Other inputs: 15 V DC at 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) I0.0 to I0.3: 1 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA 5 V DC at 1 mA
Other inputs: 5 V DC at 1
mA
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute 500 V AC for 1 minute
Filter times Individually selectable on Individually selectable on Individually selectable on
each channel (points I0.0 to each channel (points I0.0 to each channel (points I0.0 to
I1.5): I1.5): I1.5):
s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2,
6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8
ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2,
6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8 6.4, 12.8
Individually selectable on Individually selectable on Individually selectable on
each channel (points I1.6 each channel (points I1.6 each channel (points I1.6
and greater): and greater): and greater):
ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8 ms: 0, 6.4, 12.8
S7-200 SMART
HSC clock input rates (max.) 4 HSC at 200 K Hz for 4 HSC at 200 K Hz for 4 HSC at 100 K Hz for sin-
(Logic 1 Level = 15 to 26 V DC) single phase single phase gle phase
2 HSC at 100 K Hz for A/B 2 HSC at 100 K Hz for A/B 2 HSC at 50 K HZ for A/B
phase phase phase
Number of inputs on simultane- 36 36 36
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters I0.0 to I0.3: All inputs: All inputs:
Shielded (only): Shielded: Shielded:
500 m normal (low- 500 m normal inputs 500 m normal inputs
speed) inputs 50 m HSC inputs 50 m HSC inputs
50 m HSC (high-speed) Unshielded: Unshielded:
inputs
300 m normal inputs 300 m normal inputs
All other inputs:
Shielded:
500 m normal inputs
Unshielded:
300 m normal inputs
Number of outputs 24 24 24
Type Solid state - MOSFET Relay, dry contact Relay, dry contact
(sourcing)
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V
AC AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC min. -- --
Logic 0 signal with 10 K load 0.1 V DC max. -- --
Rated current per point (max.) 0.5 A 2A 2A
Rated current per common 6A 10 A 10 A
(max.)
Lamp load 5W 30 W DC / 200 W AC 30 W DC / 200 W AC
ON state resistance 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when new 0.2 max. when new
Leakage current per point 10 A max. -- --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts closed 7 A with contacts closed
Overload protection No No No
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute (coil
(coil to contact) None (coil to contact) None (coil to
to logic) logic)
Isolation resistance -- 100 M min. when new 100 M min. when new
Isolation between open contacts -- 750 V AC for 1 minute 750 V AC for 1 minute
S7-200 SMART
Inductive clamp voltage L+ minus 48 V DC, 1 W -- -
dissipation
Switching delay (Qa.0 to Qa.3) 1.0 s max., off to on 10 ms max. 10 ms max.
Switching delay (Qa.4 to Qc.7) 50 s max., off to on 10 ms max. 10 ms max.
Lifetime mechanical (no load) -- 10,000,000 open/close 10,000,000 open/close cy-
cycles cles
Lifetime contacts at rated load -- 100,000 open/close cycles 100,000 open/close cycles
Output behavior in STOP Last value or substitute Last value or substitute Last value or substitute
value (default value 0) value (default value 0) value (default value 0)
Number of outputs on simulta- 24 24 24
neously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m
Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m
S7-200 SMART
A.2.4.3 CPU ST60, SR60 and CR60 wiring diagrams
24 V
DC
Sensor
Power
Output
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI c.3 2L+ 4L+
2 DI a.0 DI c.4 2M 4M
3 DI a.1 DI c.5 DQ a.0 DQ c.0
6 DI a.4 DI d.0 DQ a.3 DQ c.3
10 DI b.0 DI d.4 DQ a.7 DQ c.7
11 DI b.1 DI d.5 3L+ L+ / 24 V DC Out
12 DI b.2 DI d.6 3M M / 24 V DC Out
13 DI b.3 DI d.7 DQ b.0 --
14 DI b.4 DI e.0 DQ b.1 --
15 DI b.5 DI e.1 DQ b.2 --
16 DI b.6 DI e.2 DQ b.3 --
17 DI b.7 DI e.3 DQ b.4 --
18 DI c.0 L+ / 24 V DC DQ b.5 --
S7-200 SMART
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

19 DI c.1 M / 24 V DC DQ b.6 --
20 DI c.2 Functional Earth DQ b.7 --
24 V
DC
Sensor
Power
Output
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI c.3 1L 5L
6 DI a.4 DI d.0 2L 6L
11 DI b.1 DI d.5 3L L+ / 24 V DC Out
12 DI b.2 DI d.6 DQ b.0 M / 24 V DC Out
13 DI b.3 DI d.7 DQ b.1 --
14 DI b.4 DI e.0 DQ b.2 --
S7-200 SMART
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

15 DI b.5 DI e.1 DQ b.3 --
16 DI b.6 DI e.2 4L --
17 DI b.7 DI e.3 DQ b.4 --
18 DI c.0 L1 / 120 - 240 V AC DQ b.5 --
19 DI c.1 N / 120 - 240 V AC DQ b.6 --
Table A- 62 Wiring diagram for the CPU CR60 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1CR60-0AA0)
24 V DC
Sensor
Power
Output
Table A- 63 Connector pin locations for CPU CR60 AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1CR60-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 1M DI c.3 1L 5L
2 DI a.0 DI c.4 DQ1.0 DQc.0
6 DI a.4 DI d.0 2L 6L
11 DI b.1 DI d.5 3L L+ / 24 V DC Out
12 DI b.2 DI d.6 DQb.0 M / 24 V DC Out
S7-200 SMART
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

13 DI b.3 DI d.7 DQ b.1 --
14 DI b.4 DI e.0 DQ b.2 --
15 DI b.5 DI e.1 DQ b.3 --
16 DI b.6 DI e.2 4L --
17 DI b.7 DI e.3 DQ b.4 --
18 DI c.0 L1 / 24 V DC DQ b.5 --
19 DI c.1 N / 24 V DC DQ b.6 --
A.2.5 Wiring diagrams for sink and source input, and relay output
Table A- 64 Wiring diagrams for sink input, source input, and relay output
S7-200 SMART
A.3 Digital inputs and outputs expansion modules (EMs)
A.3.1 EM DE08 digital input specifications
Model EM Digital 8 x Inputs (EM DE08)

Article number 6ES7 288-2DE08-0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 100 x 81
Weight 141.4 grams
Power dissipation 1.5 W
Current consumption (SM Bus) 105 mA
Current consumption (24 V DC) 4 mA / input used
Model EM Digital 8 x Inputs (EM DE08)

Number of inputs 8
Type Sink/Source (IEC Type 1 sink)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC, max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) 5 V DC at 1 mA
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute
Isolation groups 2
Filter times 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, and 12.8 ms (selectable in groups of 4)
Number of inputs on simultane- 8
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: 500 m normal inputs
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 67 Wiring diagram for the EM DE08 Digital 8 x Input (6ES7 288-2DE08-0AA0)
Table A- 68 Connector pin locations for EM DE08 Digital 8 x Input (6ES7 288-2DE08-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11

1 Functional Earth No connection
2 No connection No connection
3 1M 2M
4 DI a.0 DI a.4
5 DI a.1 DI a.5
6 DI a.2 DI a.6
7 DI a.3 DI a.7
A.3.2 EM DT08 and EM DR08 digital output specifications
Model EM Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT08) EM Digital Output 8 x Relay (EM DR08)
Article number 6ES7 288-2DT08-0AA0 6ES7 288-2DR08-0AA0
Power dissipation 1.5 W 4.5 W
Current consumption (SM Bus) 120 mA 120 mA
Current consumption (24 V DC) -- 11 mA / Relay coil used
S7-200 SMART
Model EM Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT08) EM Digital Output 8 x Relay (EM DR08)
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V 5 to 30 V DC or 5 to 250 V AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V -
Logic 0 signal with 10K load 0.1 V -
Rated current per common 3A 8A
(max.)
Lamp load 5 W DC 30 W DC / 200 W AC
ON state contact resistance 0.6 0.2 max. when new
Leakage current per point 10 A --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms 7 A with contacts closed
Isolation (field side to logic) Optical, 500 V AC for 1 minute 1500 V AC for 1 minute (coil to contact)
Inductive clamp voltage Minus 48 V DC --
Switching delay Switch on less than 50 s and switch off 10 ms max.
less than 200 S
Output behavior in STOP Last value or substitute value (default Last value or substitute value (default value
value 0) 0)
neously
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 71 Wiring diagrams for the EM DT08 Digital 8 x Outputs (6ES7 288-2DT08-0AA0) and EM
DR08 Digital 8 x Outputs x Relay (6ES7 288-2DR08-0AA0)
EM DT08 Digital 8 x Outputs EM DR08 Digital 8 x Outputs x Relay

(6ES7 288-2DT08-0AA0) (6ES7 288-2DR08-0AA0)
Table A- 72 Connector pin locations for EM DT08 Digital 8 x Outputs (6ES7 288-2DT08-0AA0
Pin X10 X11

1 1L+ / 24 V DC No connection
2 1M / 24 V DC 2L+ / 24 V DC
3 Functional Earth 2M / 24 V DC
4 DQ a.0 DQ a.4
5 DQ a.1 DQ a.5
6 DQ a.2 DQ a.6
7 DQ a.3 DQ a.7
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 73 Connector pin locations for EM DR08 Digital 8 x Outputs x Relay (6ES7 288-2DR08-
0AA0)
Pin X10 X11

1 L+ / 24 V DC Functional Earth
2 M / 24 V DC No connection
3 1L 2L
4 DQ a.0 DQ a.4
5 DQ a.1 DQ a.5
6 DQ a.2 DQ a.6
7 DQ a.3 DQ a.7
A.3.3 EM DT16, EM DR16, EM DT32, and EM DR32 digital input/output

specifications
Model EM Digital EM Digital EM Digital EM Digital

8 x Inputs/ 8 x Inputs/ 16 x Inputs/ 16 x Inputs /
Digital 8 x Outputs 8 x Relay Outputs Digital 16 x Outputs 16 x Relay Outputs
(EM DT16) (EM DR16) (EM DT32) (EM DR32)
Article number 6ES7 288-2DT16- 6ES7 288-2DR16- 6ES7 288-2DT32- 6ES7 288-2DR32-
0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 100 x 81 45 x 100 x 81 70 x 100 x 81 70 x 100 x 81
Weight 179.7g grams 201.9 grams 257.3 grams 295.4 grams
Power dissipation 2.5 W 5.5 W 4.5 W 10 W
Current consumption (SM Bus) 145 mA 145 mA 185 mA 180 mA
Current consumption (24 V DC) 4 mA / Input used 4 mA / Input used 4 mA / Input used 4 mA / Input used
11 mA / Relay coil 11 mA / Relay coil
used used
S7-200 SMART

8 x Inputs/ 8 x Inputs/ 16 x Inputs/ Digital 16 x Inputs /
Digital 8 x Outputs 8 x Relay Outputs 16 x Outputs 16 x Relay Outputs
Number of inputs 8 8 16 16
Type Sink/Source (IEC SinkSource (IEC Sink/Source (IEC Sink/Source (IEC
Type 1 sink) Type 1 sink) Type 1 sink) Type 1 sink)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, 24 V DC at 4 mA, 24 V DC at 4 mA, 24 V DC at 4 mA,
nominal nominal nominal nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC max. 30 V DC max. 30 V DC max. 30 V DC max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 35 V DC for 0.5 35 V DC for 0.5 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
sec. sec. sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) 15 V DC 15 V DC 15 V DC 15 V DC
Logic 0 signal (max.) 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 500 V AC for 1 500 V AC for 1 500 V AC for 1 mi-
minute minute minute nute
Isolation groups 2 2 2 2
Filter times 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2,
3.2, 6.4, and 12.8 3.2, 6.4, and 12.8 3.2, 6.4, and 12.8 6.4, and 12.8 ms,
ms, selectable in ms, selectable in ms, selectable in selectable in groups
groups of 4 groups of 4 groups of 4 of 4
Number of inputs on simultane- 8 8 16 16
ously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: Shielded: Shielded: Shielded:
500 m normal in- 500 m normal in- 500 m normal in- 500 m normal inputs
puts puts puts Unshielded:
Unshielded: Unshielded: Unshielded: 300 m normal inputs
300 m normal in- 300 m normal in- 300 m normal in-
puts puts puts

8 x Inputs/ 8 x Inputs/ 16 x Inputs/ Digital 16 x Inputs/
Number of outputs 8 8 16 16
Type Solid state- Relay, dry contact Solid state- Relay, dry contact
MOSFET (sourcing) MOSFET (sourcing)
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 5 to 30 V DC or
5 to 250 V AC 5 to 250 V AC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC, min. -- 20 V DC, min. --
Logic 0 signal with 10 K load 0.1 V DC, max. -- 0.1 V DC, max. --
Rated current per point (max.) 0.75 A 2A 0.75 A 2A
Rated current per common 3A 8A 6A 8A
(max.)
S7-200 SMART

8 x Inputs/ 8 x Inputs/ 16 x Inputs/ Digital 16 x Inputs/
Lamp load 5W 30 W DC/200 W AC 5 W 30 W DC/200 W AC
ON state contact resistance 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when 0.6 max. 0.2 max. when
new new
Leakage current per point 10 A max. -- 10 A max. --
Surge current 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts 8 A for 100 ms max. 7 A with contacts
closed closed
Overload protection No No No No
Isolation (field side to logic) 500 V AC for 1 1500 V AC for 1 500 V AC for 1 1500 V AC for 1
minute minute (coil to con- minute minute (coil to con-
tact) tact)
None (coil to logic) None (coil to logic)
Isolation resistance -- 100 M min. when -- 100 M min. when
new new
Isolation between open contacts -- 750 V AC for 1 -- 750 V AC for 1 mi-
minute nute
Isolation groups 2 2 3 4
Inductive clamp voltage Minus 48 V -- Minus 48 V --
Switching delay 50 s max., off to 10 ms max. 50 s max., off to 10 ms max.
on on
200 s max., on to 200 s max., on to
off off
Lifetime mechanical (no load) -- 10,000,000 -- 10,000,000
open/close cycles open/close cycles
Lifetime contacts at rated load -- 100,000 open/close -- 100,000 open/close
cycles cycles
Output behavior in STOP Last value or substi- Last value or substi- Last value or substi- Last value or substi-
tute value (default tute value (default tute value (default tute value (default
value 0) value 0) value 0) value 0)
Number of outputs on simulta- 8 8 16 16
neously
Cable length (max.), in meters Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m Shielded: 500 m
Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m Unshielded: 150 m
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 77 Wiring diagrams for the EM DT16 Digital 8 x Inputs/Digital 8 x Outputs

(6ES7 288-2DT16-0AA0) and EM DR16 and EM DR16 Digital 8 x Inputs/ 8 x Relay Out-
puts (6ES7 288-2DR16-0AA0)
EM DT16 Digital 8 x Inputs/Digital 8 x Outputs EM DR16 Digital 8 x Inputs/ 8 x Relay Outputs

(6ES7 288-2DT16-0AA0) (6ES7 288-2DR16-0AA0)
Table A- 78 Connector pin locations for EM DT16 Digital 8 x Inputs/Digital 8 x Outputs (6ES7 288-
2DT16-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 No connection Functional Earth No connection No connection
2 No connection No connection 3L+ / 24 V DC 4L+ / 24 V DC
3 1M 2M 3M / 24 V DC 4M / 24 V DC
4 DI a.0 DI a.4 DQ a.0 DQ a.4
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 79 Connector pin locations for EM DR16 Digital 8 x Inputs/ 8 x Relay Outputs (6ES7 288-
2DR16-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 L+ / 24 V DC Functional Earth No connection No connection
2 M / 24 V DC No connection No connection No connection
3 1M 2M 1L 2L
Table A- 80 Wiring diagrams for the EM DT32 Digital 16 x Inputs / Digital 16 x Outputs (6ES7 288-
2DT32-0AA0 and EM DR32 EM DR32 Digital 16 x Inputs / 16 x Relay
(6ES7 288-2DR32-0AA0)
EM DT32 Digital 16 x Inputs / Digital 16 x Outputs EM DR32 Digital 16 x Inputs / 16 x Relay (6ES7
(6ES7 288-2DT32-0AA0) 288-2DR32-0AA0)
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 81 Connector pin locations for EM DT32 Digital 16 x Inputs / Digital 16 x Outputs (6ES7
288-2DT32-0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 4L+ / 24 V DC1 Functional Earth 3L+ / 24 V DC DQ b.01
2 4M / 24 V DC1 No connection 3M / 24 V DC DQ b.11
3 1M 2M DQ a.0 DQ b.21
5 DI a.1 DI b.1 DQ a.2 No connection
6 DI a.2 DI b.2 DQ a.3 5L+ / 24 V DC
7 DI a.3 DI b.3 DQ a.4 5M / 24 V DC
11 DI a.7 DI b.7 No connection DQ b.7
1 In same isolation group.
Table A- 82 Connector pin locations for EM DR32 Digital 16 x Inputs / 16 x Relay (6ES7 288-2DR32-
0AA0)
Pin X10 X11 X12 X13

1 L+ / 24 V DC Functional Earth 1L 3L
2 M / 24 V DC No connection DQ a.0 DQ b.0
3 1M 2M DQ a.1 DQ b.1
6 DI a.2 DI b.2 No connection No connection
7 DI a.3 DI b.3 2L 4L
S7-200 SMART
A.4 Analog inputs and outputs expansion modules (EMs)
A.4.1 EM AE04 and EM AE08 analog input specifications
Model EM Analog 4 x inputs (EM AE04) EM Analog 8 x inputs (EM AE08)

Article number 6ES7 288-3AE04-0AA0 6ES7 288-3AE08-0AA0
Weight 147 grams 186 grams
Power dissipation 1.5 W (no load) 2.0 W (no load)
Current consumption (24 V DC) 40 mA (no load) 70 mA (no load)
Table A- 84 Analog inputs

Type Voltage or current (differential), se- Voltage or current (differential), selectable
lectable in groups of 2 in groups of 2
Range 10 V, 5 V, 2.5 V, or 0 to 20 mA 10 V, 5 V, 2.5 V, or 0 to 20 mA
Full scale range (data word) -27,648 to 27,648 -27,648 to 27,648
Overshoot/undershoot range Voltage: 27,649 to 32,511 / -27,649 to - Voltage: 27,649 to 32,511 / -27,649 to -
(data word) 32,512 32,512
Current: 27,649 to 32,511 / -4864 to 0 Current: 27,649 to 32,511 / -4864 to 0 (Re-
fer to Analog input representation for volt-
age and Analog input representation for
current (Page 624).)
Overflow/underflow (data word) Voltage: 32,512 to 32,767 / -32,513 to - Voltage: 32,512 to 32,767 / -32,513 to -
32,768 32,768
Current: 32,512 to 32,767 / -4,865 to - Current: 32,512 to 32,767 / -4,865 to -
32,768 32,768 (Refer to Analog input representa-
tion for voltage and Analog input represen-
tation for current (Page 624).)
Resolution Voltage mode: 12 bits + sign bit Voltage mode: 12 bits + sign bit
Current mode: 12 bits Current mode: 12 bits
Maximum withstand volt- 35 V / 40 mA 35 V / 40 mA
age/current
Smoothing None, weak, medium or strong None, weak, medium or strong (Refer to
Analog input response times for step re-
sponse time.) (Page 623)
Noise rejection 400, 60, 50, or 10 Hz 400, 60, 50, or 10 Hz
Input impedance 9 M (voltage) / 250 (current) 9 M (voltage) / 250 (current)
Isolation (field side to logic) None None
S7-200 SMART

Accuracy (25C / 0 to 55C) Voltage mode: 0.1% / 0.2% of full Voltage mode: 0.1% / 0.2% of full scale
scale Current mode: 0.2% / 0.3% of full scale
Current mode: 0.2% / 0.3% of full
scale
Measuring principle Actual value conversion Actual value conversion
Common mode rejection 40 dB, DC to 60 Hz 40 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Operational signal range Signal plus common mode voltage must Signal plus common mode voltage must be
be less than +12 V and greater than -12 less than +12 V and greater than -12 V
V
Cable length (max.), in meters 100 m twisted and shielded 100 m twisted and shielded
Table A- 85 Diagnostics

Overflow/underflow Yes Yes
24 V DC low voltage Yes Yes
EM AE04 and EM AE08 wiring current transducers

Wiring current transducers are available as 2-wire transducers and 4-wire transducers as
shown below.
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 86 Wiring diagram EM AE04 Analog 4 x Inputs (6ES7 288-3AE04-0AA0) and EM AE08 An-
alog 8 x Inputs (6ES7 288-3AE08-0AA0
EM AE04 Analog 4 x Inputs EM AE08 Analog 8 x Inputs

(6ES7 288-3AE04-0AA0) (6ES7 288-3AE08-0AA0)
Note: Connectors must be gold. See Appendix F, Spare parts and other hardware, for article number.
Table A- 87 Connector pin locations for EM AE04 Analog 4 x Inputs (6ES7 288-3AE04-0AA0)
Pin X10 (gold) X11 (gold)

1 L+ / 24 V DC No connection
4 AI 0+ AI 2+
5 AI 0- AI 2-
6 AI 1+ AI 3+
7 AI 1- AI 3-
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 88 Connector pin locations for EM AE08 Analog 8 x Inputs (6ES7 288-3AE08-0AA0)
Pin X10 (gold) X11 (gold) X12 (gold) X13 (gold)

1 L+ / 24 V DC No connection No connection No connection
3 Functional Earth No connection No connection No connection
4 AI 0+ AI 2+ AI 4+ AI 6+
5 AI 0- AI 2- AI 4- AI 6-
6 AI 1+ AI 3+ AI 5+ AI 7+
7 AI 1- AI 3- AI 5- AI 7-
A.4.2 EM AQ02 and EM AQ04 analog output module specifications
Technical data EM Analog 2 x outputs (EM AQ02) EM Analog 4 x outputs (EM AQ04)
Article number 6ES7 288-3AQ02-0AA0 6ES7 288-3AQ04-0AA0
Weight 147.1 grams 170.5 grams
Power dissipation 1.5 W (no load) 2.1 W (no load)
Current consumption (24 V DC) 50 mA (no load) 75 mA (no load
Table A- 90 Analog outputs
Type Voltage or current Voltage or current
Range 10 V or 0 to 20 mA 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Resolution Voltage mode: 11 bits + sign bit Voltage mode: 11 bits + sign bit
Full scale range (data word) Voltage: -27,648 to 27,648 Voltage: -27,648 to 27,648
Current: 0 to 27,648 Current: 0 to 27,648
(Refer to the output ranges for voltage and
current (Page 625).)
Accuracy (25C / 0 to 55C) 0.5% / 1.0% of full scale 0.5% / 1.0% of full scale
Settling time (95% of new value) Voltage: 300 s (R), 750 (R), 750 s (1 Voltage: 300 s (R), 750 (R), 750 s (1
F) F)
Current: 600 s (1 mH), 2 ms (10 mH) Current: 600 s (1 mH), 2 ms (10 mH)
Load impedance Voltage: 1000 Voltage: 1000
Current: 500 Current: 600
value 0) 0)
S7-200 SMART
Short to ground (voltage mode Yes Yes
only)
Wire break (current mode only) Yes Yes
Table A- 92 Wiring diagram for the EM AQ02 Analog 2 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ02-0AA0) and EM
AQ04 Analog 4 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ04-0AA0)
EM AQ02 Analog 2 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ02- EM AQ04 Analog 4 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ04-
0AA0) 0AA0)
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 93 Connector pin locations for EM AQ02 Analog 2 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ02-0AA0)

4 No connection AQ 0M
5 No connection AQ 0
6 No connection AQ 1M
7 No connection AQ 1
Table A- 94 Connector pin locations for EM AQ04 Analog 4 x Outputs (6ES7 288-3AQ04-0AA0)

4 No connection No connection AQ 0M AQ 2M
5 No connection No connection AQ 0 AQ 2
6 No connection No connection AQ 1M AQ 3M
7 No connection No connection AQ 1 AQ 3
A.4.3 EM AM03 and EM AM06 analog input/output module specifications
Technical data EM 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Out- EM 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs
puts (AM03) (AM06)
Article number 6ES7 288-3AM03-0AA0 6ES7 288-3AM06-0AA0
Power dissipation 1.1 W (no load 2.0 W (no load)
Current consumption (24 V DC) 30 mA no load) 60 mA (no load)
S7-200 SMART
Model EM 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Out- EM 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs

puts (AM03) (AM06)
Type Voltage or current (differential): Se- Voltage or current (differential): Selectable
lectable in groups of 2 in groups of 2
Range 10 V, 5 V, 2.5 V, or 0 to 20 mA 10 V, 5 V, 2.5 V, or 0 to 20 mA
Full scale range (data word) -27,648 to 27,648 -27,648 to 27,648
Overshoot/undershoot range Voltage: 27,649 to 32,511 / -27,649 to - Voltage: 27,649 to 32,511 / -27,649 to -
(data word) 32,512 Current: 27,649 to 32,511 / - 32,512
4,864 to 0 Current: 27,649 to 32,511 / -4,864 to 0
Overflow/underflow (data word) Voltage: 32,512 to 32,767 / -32,513 to - Voltage: 32,512 to 32,767 / -32,513 to -
32,768 Current: 32,512 to 32,767 / - 32,768
4,865 to -32,768 Current: 32,512 to 32,767 / -4,865 to -
32,768
Resolution Voltage mode: 12 bits + sign Voltage mode: 12 bits + sign
Maximum withstand volt- 35 V / 40 mA 35 V / 40 mA
age/current
Smoothing None, weak, medium, or strong None, weak, medium, or strong
Noise rejection 400, 60, 50, or 10 Hz 400, 60, 50, or 10 Hz
Input impedance 9 M 9 M
Accuracy (25C / 0 to 55C) Voltage mode: 0.1% /0.2% of full scale Voltage mode: 0.1% /0.2% of full scale
Current mode: 0.2% /0.3% of full scale Current mode: 0.2% /0.3% of full scale
Analog to digital conversion time 625 s (400 Hz rejection) 625 s (400 Hz rejection)
Common mode rejection 40 dB, DC to 60 Hz 40 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Operational signal range Signal plus common mode voltage must Signal plus common mode voltage must be
be less than +12 V and greater than less than +12 V and greater than -12 V
-12 V
S7-200 SMART
Technical data EM 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Out- EM 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs
puts (AM03) (AM06)
Type Voltage or current Voltage or current
Range 10 V or 0 to 20 mA 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Resolution Voltage mode: 11 bits + sign Voltage mode: 11 bits + sign
Full scale range (data word) Voltage: -27,648 to 27,648 Voltage: -27,648 to 27,648
Current: 0 to 27,648 Current: 0 to 27,648
Accuracy (25C / 0 to 55C) 0.5% / 1.0% of full scale 0.5% / 1.0% of full scale
Settling time (95% of new value) Voltage: 300 s (R), 750 s (1 F) Voltage: 300 s (R), 750 s (1 F)
Current: 600 s (1 mH), 2 ms (10 mH) Current: 600 s (1 mH), 2 ms (10 mH)
Load impedance Voltage: 1000 Voltage: 1000
Current: 500 Current: 500
value 0) 0)
Model EM 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Out- EM 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs

puts (AM03) (AM06)
Short to ground (voltage mode Yes Yes
only)
Wire break (current mode only) Yes Yes
S7-200 SMART
EM AM03 wiring current transducers

shown below.
Table A- 99 Wiring diagrams for the EM AM03 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Outputs (6ES7 288-
3AM03-0AA and the AM06 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs (6ES7 288-3AM06-
0AA0)
EM AM03 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Outputs EM AM06 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs
(6ES7 288-3AM03-0AA0) (6ES7 288-3AM06-0AA0)
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 100 Connector pin locations for AM03 2 x Analog Inputs / 1 x Analog Outputs (6ES7 288-
3AM03-0AA0)
Pin X10 (gold) X11 (gold) X12 (gold)

1 L+ / 24 V DC No connection No connection
2 M / 24 V DC No connection No connection
3 Functional Earth No connection No connection
4 No connection AI 0+ No connection
5 No connection AI 0- No connection
6 No connection AI 1+ AQ 0M
7 No connection AI 1- AQ 0
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 101 Connector pin locations for AM06 4 x Analog Inputs / 2 x Analog Outputs (6ES7 288-3AM06-0AA0)
Pin X10 (gold) X11 (gold) X12 (gold)

1 L+ / 24 V DC No connection No connection
2 M / 24 V DC No connection No connection
3 Functional Earth No connection No connection
4 AI 0+ AI 2+ AQ 0M
5 AI 0- AI 2- AQ 0
6 AI 1+ A1 3+ AQ 1M
7 AI 1- A1 3- AQ 1
A.4.4 Step response of the analog inputs
Table A- 102 Step response (ms), 0 to full-scale measured at 95%
Smoothing selection (sample averaging) Noise reduction/rejection frequency (Integration time selection)
400 Hz (2.5 ms) 60 Hz (16.6 ms) 50 Hz (20 ms) 10 Hz (100 ms)
None (1 cycle): No averaging 4 ms 18 ms 22 ms 100 ms
Weak (4 cycles): 4 samples 9 ms 52 ms 63 ms 320 ms
Medium (16 cycles): 16 samples 32 ms 203 ms 241 ms 1200 ms
Strong (32 cycles): 32 samples 61 ms 400 ms 483 ms 2410 ms
Sample time
4 AI x 13 bits 0.625 ms 4.17 ms 5 ms 25 ms
8 AI x 13 bits 1.25 ms 4.17 ms 5 ms 25 ms
A.4.5 Sample time and update times for the analog inputs
Table A- 103 Sample time and update time
Rejection frequency (Integra- Sample time Module update time for all channels
tion time) 4-channel SM 8-channel SM
400 Hz (2.5 ms) 4-channel SM: 0.625 ms 0.625 ms 1.250 ms
8-channel SM: 1.250 ms
60 Hz (16.6 ms) 4.170 ms 4.17 ms 4.17 ms
50 Hz (20 ms) 5.000 ms 5 ms 5 ms
10 Hz (100 ms) 25.000 ms 25 ms 25 ms
S7-200 SMART
A.4.6 Measurement ranges of the analog inputs for voltage and current (SB and EM)
Table A- 104 Analog input representation for voltage (SB and EM)
System Voltage Measuring Range

Decimal Hexadecimal 10 V 5 V 2.5 V 1.25 V
32767 7FFF1 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.481 V Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.470 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1.250 V Rated range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.938 V
1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 90.4 V 45.2 V
0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -1.875 V -0.938 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -2.5 V -1.250 V
-27649 93FF Undershoot range
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V -2.940 V -1.470 V
-32513 80FF Underflow
-32768 8000 -11.851 V -5.926 V -2.963 V -1.481 V
1 7FFF can be returned for one of the following reasons: overflow (as noted in this table), before valid values are availa-
ble(for example immediately upon a power up), or if a wire break is detected.
Table A- 105 Analog input representation for current (SB and EM)
System Current measuring range

Decimal Hexadecimal 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 22.96 mA Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-4865 ECFF Underflow
-32768 8000
S7-200 SMART
A.4.7 Measurement ranges of the analog outputs for voltage and current (SB and EM)
Table A- 106 Analog output representation for voltage (SB and EM)
System Voltage Output Range

Decimal Hexadecimal 10 V
32767 7FFF See note 1 Overflow
32512 7F00 See note 1
32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V Rated range
20736 5100 7.5 V
1 1 361.7 V
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF -361.7 V
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V
-27648 9400 -10 V
-27649 93FF Undershoot range
-32512 8100 -11.76 V
-32513 80FF See note 1 Underflow
-32768 8000 See note 1
1 In an overflow or underflow condition, analog outputs will take on the substitute value of the STOP mode.
Table A- 107 Analog output representation for current (SB and EM)
System Current output range

Decimal Hexadecimal 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA
32767 7FFF See note 1 See note 1 Overflow
32512 7F00 See note 1 See note 1
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Rated range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4mA
-1 FFFF 4 mA to 578.7 nA Undershoot range
-6912 E500 0 mA
-6913 E4FF Not possible. Output value limited to 0 mA.
-32512 8100
-32513 80FF See note 1 See note 1 Underflow
-32768 8000 See note 1 See note 1
1 In an overflow or underflow condition, analog outputs will take on the substitute value of the STOP mode.
S7-200 SMART
A.5 Thermocouple and RTD expansion modules (EMs)
A.5.1 Thermocouple expansion modules (EMs)
A.5.1.1 EM AT04 thermocouple specifications
Model EM AT04 AI 4 x 16 bit TC

Article number 6ES7 288-3AT04-0AA0
Weight 125 grams
Current consumption (SM Bus) 80 mA
Current consumption (24 V DC) 1 40 mA
1 20.4 to 28.8 V DC (Class 2, Limited Power, or sensor power from PLC)

Number of inputs 4
Range See Thermocouple selection table.
Nominal range (data word)
Overrange/underrange (data
word)
Overflow/underflow (data word)
Resolution Temperature 0.1 C / 0.1 F
Voltage 15 bits plus sign
Maximum withstand voltage 35
Noise rejection 85 dB for selected filter setting
(10 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz)
Common mode rejection > 120 dB at 120 V AC
Impedance 10 M
Isolation Field to logic 500 V AC
Field to 24 V 500 V AC
DC
24 V DC to 500 V AC
logic
Channel to channel isolation --
Accuracy See Thermocouple selection table.
Repeatability 0.05% FS
Measuring principle Integrating
S7-200 SMART

Module update time See Filter selection table.
Cold junction error 1.5C
Cable length (meters) 100 m to sensor max.
Wire resistance 100 max.

Overflow/underflow 1 Yes
Wire break (current mode only) 2 Yes
24 V DC low voltage 1 Yes
1 The overflow, underflow and low voltage diagnostic alarm information will be reported in the analog data values even if
the alarms are disabled in the module configuration.
2 When wire break alarm is disabled and an open wire condition exists in the sensor wiring, the module may report ran-
dom values.
The EM AT04 Thermocouple (TC) analog expansion module measures the value of voltage
connected to the module inputs. The temperature measurement type can be either
"Thermocouple" or "Voltage".
"Thermocouple": The value will be reported in degrees multiplied by ten (for example, 25.3
degrees will be reported as decimal 253).
"Voltage": The nominal range full scale value will be decimal 27648.
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 111 Wiring diagram for the EM AT04 Thermocouple 4 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AT04-0AA0)
EM AT04 4 x 16 bit
(6ES7 288-3AT04-0AA0)
Note: Connectors must be gold. See Appendix F, Spare Parts and other hardware for article number.
TC 2, 3, 4, and 5 not shown connected for clarity.
Table A- 112 Connector pin locations for EM AT04 4 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AT04-0AA0)

3 GND No connection
4 AI 0+ /TC AI 2+ /TC
5 AI 0- /TC AI 2- /TC
6 AI 1+ /TC AI 3+ /TC
7 AI 1- /TC AI 3- /TC
Note
Unused analog inputs should be shorted.
The thermocouple unused channels can be deactivated. No error will occur if an unused
channel is deactivated.
S7-200 SMART
Thermocouples are formed whenever two dissimilar metals are electrically bonded to each
other. A voltage is generated that is proportional to the junction temperature. This voltage is
small; one microvolt could represent many degrees. Measuring the voltage from a
thermocouple, compensating for extra junctions, and then linearizing the result forms the
basis of temperature measurement using thermocouples.
When you connect a thermocouple to the EM AT04 Thermocouple module, the two
dissimilar metal wires are attached to the module at the module signal connector. The place
where the two dissimilar wires are attached to each other forms the sensor thermocouple.
Two more thermocouples are formed where the two dissimilar wires are attached to the
signal connector. The connector temperature causes a voltage that adds to the voltage from
the sensor thermocouple. If this voltage is not corrected, then the temperature reported will
deviate from the sensor temperature.
Cold junction compensation is used to compensate for the connector thermocouple.
Thermocouple tables are based on a reference junction temperature, usually zero degrees
Celsius. The cold junction compensation compensates the connector to zero degrees
Celsius. The cold junction compensation restores the voltage added by the connector
thermocouples. The temperature of the module is measured internally, and then converted to
a value to be added to the sensor conversion. The corrected sensor conversion is then
linearized using the thermocouple tables.
For optimum operation of the cold junction compensation, the thermocouple module must be
located in a thermally stable environment. Slow variation (less than 0.1 C/minute) in
ambient module temperature is correctly compensated within the module specifications. Air
movement across the module will also cause cold junction compensation errors.
If better cold junction error compensation is needed, an external iso-thermal terminal block
may be used. The thermocouple module provides for use of a 0 C referenced or 50 C
referenced terminal block.
S7-200 SMART
The ranges and accuracy for the different thermocouple types supported by the EM AT04
Thermocouple expansion module are shown in the table below.
Table A- 113 EM AT04 Thermocouple selection table
Type Under-range Nominal range Nominal range Over-range Normal range 3, 4 Normal range 1, 2
minimum1 low limit high limit maximum2 accuracy @ 25C accuracy -20C
to 55C
J -210.0C -150.0C 1200.0C 1450.0C 0.3C 0.6C
K -270.0C -200.0C 1372.0C 1622.0C 0.4C 1.0C
T -270.0C -200.0C 400.0C 540.0C 0.5C 1.0C
E -270.0C -200.0C 1000.0C 1200.0C 0.3C 0.6C
R&S -50.0C 100.0C 1768.0C 2019.0C 1.0C 2.5C
B 0.0C 200.0C 800.0C -- 2.0C 2.5C
-- 800.0C 1820.0C 1820C 1.0C 2.3C
N -270.0C -200.0C 1300.0C 1550.0C 1.0C 1.6C
C 0.0C 100.0C 2315.0C 2500.0C 0.7C 2.7C
TXK/XK(L) -200.0C -150.0C 800.0C 1050C 0.6C 1.2C
Voltage -32512 -27648 27648 32511 0.05% 0.1%
-80mV 80mV
1 Thermocouple values below the under-range minimum value are reported as -32768.
2 Thermocouple values above the over-range maximum value are reported as 32767.
3 Internal cold junction error is 1.5C for all ranges. This adds to the error in this table. The module requires at least 30
minutes of warm-up time to meet this specification.
4 In the presence of radiated radio frequency of 970 MHz to 990 MHz, the accuracy of the EM AT04 AI 4 x 16 bit TC may
be degraded.
Note
Thermocouple channel
Each channel on the Thermocouple expansion module can be configured with a different
thermocouple type (selectable in the software during configuration of the module).
Table A- 114 Noise reduction and update times for the EM AT04 Thermocouple
Rejection frequency selection Integration time 4 Channel module update time (seconds)
400 Hz (2.5 ms) 10 ms 1 0.143
60 Hz (16.6 ms) 16.67 ms 0.223
50 Hz (20 ms) 20 ms 0.263
10 Hz (100 ms) 100 ms 1.225
1 To maintain module resolution and accuracy when 400 Hz rejection is selected, the integration time is 10 ms. This
selection also rejects 100 Hz and 200 Hz noise.
S7-200 SMART
It is recommended for measuring thermocouples that a 100 ms integration time be used. The
use of smaller integration times will increase the repeatability error of the temperature
readings.
Note
After power is applied, the module performs internal calibration for the analog-to-digital
converter. During this time the module reports a value of 32767 on each channel until valid
data is available on that channel. Your user program may need to allow for this initialization
time. Because the configuration of the module can vary the length of the initialization time,
you should verify the behavior of the module in your configuration. If required, you can
include logic in your user program to accommodate the initialization time of the module.
Representation of analog values for Thermocouple Type J

A representation of the analog values of thermocouples type J is shown in the table below.
Table A- 115 Representation of analog values of thermocouples type J
Type J in C Units Type J in F Units

Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Range
> 1450.0 32767 7FFF > 2642.0 32767 7FFF Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 Overrange
: : : : : :
1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.2 21922 55A2
1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 Rated range
: : : : : :
-150.0 -1500 FA24 -238.0 -2380 F6B4
-150.1 -1501 FA23 -238.2 -2382 F6B2 Underrange
: : : : : :
-210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C
< -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 Underflow1
1 Faulty wiring (for example, polarity reversal, or open inputs) or sensor error in the negative
range (for example, wrong type of thermocouple) may cause the thermocouple module to
signal underflow.
S7-200 SMART
A.5.2 RTD expansion modules (EMs)
EM RTD specifications
Technical data EM RTD 2 x 16 bit (EM AR02) EM RTD 4 x 16 bit (EM AR04)
Article number 6ES7 288-3AR02-0AA0 6ES7 288-3AR04-0AA0
Weight 148.7 grams 150 grams
Power dissipation 1.5 W 1.5 W
Current consumption (24 V DC) 1 40 mA 40 mA
Type Module referenced RTD and Module referenced RTD and
Range See RTD Sensor selection table See RTD Sensor selection table
Nominal range (data word)
Overshoot/undershoot range
(data word)
Overflow/underflow (data word)
Resolution Temperature 0.1 C / 0.1 F 0.1 C / 0.1 F
Resistance 15 bits + sign bit 15 bits + sign bit
Maximum withstand voltage 35 V 35 V
Noise rejection 85 dB at 10 Hz / 50 Hz /60 Hz / 400 Hz 85 dB at 10 Hz / 50 Hz /60 Hz / 400 Hz
Common mode rejection >120 dB >120 dB
Impedance 10 M 10 M
Isolation Field side to 500 V AC 500 V AC
logic
Field to 24 V DC 500 V AC 500 V AC
24 V DC to logic 500 V AC 500 V AC
Channel to channel isolation 0 0
Accuracy See RTD Sensor selection table See RTD Sensor selection table
Repeatability 0.05% FS 0.05% FS
Maximum sensor dissipation 0.5 m W 0.5 m W
Measuring principle Sigma-delta Sigma-delta
Module update time See Noise reduction selection table See Noise reduction selection table
S7-200 SMART
Cable length (max.), in meters 100 m to sensor max. 100 m to sensor max.
Wire re- except 10 20 20
sistance RTD
(max.) 10 RTD 2.7 2.7
Overflow/underflow 1,2 Yes Yes
Wire break 3 Yes Yes
24 V DC low voltage 1 Yes Yes
1 The overflow, underflow and low voltage diagnostic alarm information will be reported in the analog data values even if
the alarms are disabled in the module configuration.
2 For resistance ranges underflow detection is never enabled.
3 When wire break alarm is disabled and an open wire condition exists in the sensor wiring, the module may report ran-
dom values.
The EM RTD analog expansion module measures the value of resistance connected to the
module inputs. The measurement type can be selected as either "Resistor" or "Thermal
resistor".
"Resistor": The nominal range full scale value will be decimal 27648.
"Thermal resistor": The value will be reported in degrees multiplied by ten (for example,
25.3 degrees will be reported as decimal 253).
The EM RTD module supports measurements with 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire connections to
the sensor resistor.
Table A- 119 Ranges and accuracy for the different sensors supported by the RTD expansion module
Temperature coef- RTD type Under range Nominal Nominal Over range Normal Normal
ficient minimum1 range low limit range high maximum2 range accu- range accu-
limit racy racy -20C
@ 25C to 60C
Pt 0.003850 Pt 10 -243.0C -200.0C 850.0C 1000.0C 1.0C 2.0C
ITS90 Pt 50 -243.0C -200.0C 850.0C 1000.0C 0.5C 1.0C
DIN EN 60751 Pt 100
Pt 200
Pt 500
Pt 1000
Pt 0.003902 Pt 100 -243.0C -200.0C 850.0C 1000.0C 0.5C 1.0C
Pt 0.003916 Pt 200 -243.0C -200.0C 850.0C 1000.0C 0.5C 1.0C
Pt 0.003920
Pt 500
Pt 1000
Pt 0.003910 Pt 10 -273.2C -240.0C 1100.0C 1295C 1.0C 2.0C
Pt 50 -273.2C -240.0C 1100.0C 1295C 0.8C 1.6C
S7-200 SMART
Temperature coef- RTD type Under range Nominal Nominal Over range Normal Normal
ficient minimum1 range low limit range high maximum2 range accu- range accu-
limit racy racy -20C
@ 25C to 60C
Pt 100
Pt 500
Ni 0.006720 Ni 100 -105.0C -60.0C 250.0C 295.0C 0.5C 1.0C
Ni 0.006180 Ni 120
Ni 200
Ni 500
Ni 1000
LG-Ni 0.005000 LG-Ni 1000 -105.0C -60.0C 250.0C 295.0C 0.5C 1.0C
Ni 0.006170 Ni 100 -105.0C -60.0C 180.0C 212.4C 0.5C 1.0C
Cu 0.004270 Cu 10 -240.0C -200.0C 260.0C 312.0C 1.0C 2.0C
Cu 0.004260 Cu 10 -60.0C -50.0C 200.0C 240.0C 1.0C 2.0C
Cu 50 -60.0C -50.0C 200.0C 240.0C 0.6C 1.2C
Cu 100
Cu 0.004280 Cu 10 -240.0C -200.0C 200.0C 240.0C 1.0C 2.0C
Cu 50 -240.0C -200.0C 200.0C 240.0C 0.7C 1.4C
Cu 100
1 RTD values below the under-range minimum value report -32768.
2 RTD values above the over-range maximum value report +32767.
Table A- 120 Resistance
Range Under range Nominal range Nominal range Over range Normal range Normal range
minimum low limit high limit maximum1 accuracy accuracy
@ 25C -20C to 60C
150 n/a 0 (0 ) 27648 (150 ) 176.383 0.05% 0.1%
300 n/a 0 (0 ) 27648 (300 ) 352.767 0.05% 0.1%
600 n/a 0 (0 ) 27648 (600 ) 705.534 0.05% 0.1%
1 Resistance values above the over-range minimum value are reported as +32767.
Note
The module reports 32767 on any activated channel with no sensor connected. If open wire
detection is also enabled, the module flashes the appropriate red LEDs.
When 500 and 1000 RTD ranges are used with other lower value resistors, the error
may increase to two times the specified error.
Best accuracy will be achieved for the 10 RTD ranges if 4 wire connections are used.
The resistance of the connection wires in 2 wire mode will cause an error in the sensor
reading and therefore accuracy is not guaranteed.
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 121 Noise reduction and update times for the RTD module
Rejection frequency selection Integration time Update time (seconds)

400 Hz (2.5 ms) 10 ms 1 4-/2-wire: 0.142
3-wire: 0.285
60 Hz (16.6 ms) 16.67 ms 4-/2-wire: 0.222
3-wire: 0.445
50 Hz (20 ms) 20 ms 4-/2-wire: 0.262
3-wire: .505
10 Hz (100 ms) 100 ms 4-/2-wire: 1.222
3-wire: 2.445
1 To maintain module resolution and accuracy when the 400 Hz filter is selected, the integration time is 10 ms. This selec-
tion also rejects 100 Hz and 200 Hz noise.
Note
After power is applied, the module performs internal calibration for the analog-to-digital
converter. During this time the module reports a value of 32767 on each channel until valid
data is available on that channel. Your user program may need to allow for this initialization
time. Because the configuration of the module can vary the length of the initialization time,
you should verify the behavior or the module in your configuration. If required, you can
include logic in your user program to accommodate the initialization time of the module.
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 122 Wiring diagrams for the EM AR02 RTD 2 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AR02-0AA0) and EM
AR04 RTD 4 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AR04-0AA0)
EM AR02 RTD 2 x 16 bit EM AR04 RTD 4 x 16 bit

(6ES7 288-3AR02-0AA0) (6ES7 288-3AR04-0AA0)
Loop-back unused RTD inputs

2-wire RTD 3-wire RTD 4-wire RTD
Note: Connectors must be gold. See Appendix F, Spare parts and other hardware for article number.
Table A- 123 Connector pin locations for EM AR02 RTD 2 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AR02-0AA0)

4 AI 0 M+/RTD AI 1 M+/RTD
5 AI 0 M-/RTD AI 1 M-/RTD
6 AI 0 I+/RTD AI 1 I+/RTD
7 AI 0 I-/RTD AI 1 I-/RTD
S7-200 SMART
A.6 Digital signal boards
Table A- 124 Connector pin locations for EM AR04 RTD 4 x 16 bit (6ES7 288-3AR04-0AA0)

4 AI 0 M+/RTD AI 1 M+/RTD AI 2 M+/RTD AI 3 M+/RTD
5 AI 0 M-/RTD AI 1 M-/RTD AI 2 M-/RTD AI 3 M-/RTD
6 AI 0 I+/RTD AI 1 I+/RTD AI 2 I+.RTD AI 3 I+/RTD
7 AI 0 I-/RTD AI 1 I-/RTD AI 2 I-/RTD AI 3 I/-/RTD
A.6.1 SB DT04 digital input/output specifications
Technical data SB Digital 2 x Inputs / 2 x Digital Outputs (DT04)

Article number 6ES7 288-5DT04-0AA0
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 35 x 52.2 x 16
Weight 18.1 grams
Current consumption (5 V DC) 50 mA
Current consumption (24 V DC) 4 mA / Input used

Number of inputs 2
Type Sink (IEC Type 1 sink)
Rated voltage 24 V DC at 4 mA, nominal
Continuous permissible voltage 30 V DC max.
Surge voltage 35 V DC for 0.5 sec.
Logic 1 signal (min.) 15 V DC at 2.5 mA
Logic 0 signal (max.) 5 V DC at 1 mA
Isolation groups 1
S7-200 SMART

Filter times Individually selectable on each channel:
s: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
ms: 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8
Number of inputs on simultane- 2
ously

Number of outputs 2
Output type Solid state - MOSFET (sourcing)
Voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Logic 1 signal at max. current 20 V DC min.
Logic 0 signal at max. current 0.1 V DC max.
Rated current per point (max.) 0.5 A
Rated current per common 1A
(max.)
Lamp load 5W
On state contact resistance 0.6 max.
Leakage current per point 10 A max.
Surge current 5 A for 100 ms max.
Overload protection No
Isolation groups 1
Inductive clamp voltage L+ minus 48 V, 1 W dissipation
Switching delay 2 s max. off to on
10 s max. on to off
Output behavior in STOP Last value or substitute value (default value 0)
Number of outputs on simulta- 2
neously
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 128 Wiring diagram for the SB DT04 2 Digital Input/2 Digital Output (6ES7 288-5DT04-0AA0)
SB DT04 2 Digital Input/2 Digital Output (6ES7 288-5DT04-0AA0)
Table A- 129 Connector pin locations for SB DT04 2 Digital Input/2 Digital Output (6ES7 288-5DT04-
0AA0)
Pin X19
1 DQ f.0
2 DQ f.1
3 DI f.0
4 DI f.1
5 L+ / 24 V DC
6 M / 24 V DC
S7-200 SMART
A.7 Analog signal boards
A.7.1 SB AE01 analog input specifications
Technical data SB Analog 1 x Input (SB AE01)

Article number 6ES7 288-3AE01-0AA0
Weight 20 grams
Current consumption (5 V DC) 50 mA (5 V and 3.3 combined)
Current consumption (24 V DC) None
Technical data SB Analog 1 x input (SB AE01)

Number of inputs 1
Type Voltage or current (differential)
Range 10 V, 5 V, 2.5 V, or 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 11 bits + sign bit (voltage mode)
11 bits (current mode)
Full scale range (data word) -27,648 to 27,648
Accuracy (25 C / 0 to 50 C) Voltage mode: 0.3 % / 0.6 % of full scale
Current mode: 0.3 % / 0.6 % of full scale
Overshoot/undershoot range Voltage: 27,649 to 32,511 / -27,649 to -32,512
(data word) Current: 27,649 to 32,511 / -4864 to 0 (Refer to Analog input representation for voltage
and Analog input representation for current (Page 624).)
Overflow/underflow (data word) Voltage: 32,512 to 32,767 / -32,513 to -32,768
Current: 32,512 to 32,767 / -4,865 to -32,768 (Refer to Analog input representation for
voltage and Analog input representation for current (Page 624).)
Maximum withstand voltage / 35 V / 40 mA
current
Smoothing None, weak, medium, or strong (Refer to Analog input response times for step re-
sponse time (Page 623).)
Noise rejection 400, 60, 50, or 10 Hz
Measuring principle common 40 dB, DC to 60 Hz rejection
mode rejection
Operational signal range (signal Signal plus common mode voltage must be less than +35 V and greater than -35 V
plus common mode voltage)
Input impedance
Differential mode 220 K (voltage) / 250 (current)
Common mode 55 K (voltage) / 55 (current)
S7-200 SMART
Technical data SB Analog 1 x input (SB AE01)

Isolation (field side to logic) None
Cable length (meters) 100 m twisted and shielded
Model SB Analog 1 x input (SB AE01)

Overflow/underflow Yes
24 VDC low voltage None
SB AE01 wiring current transducers

shown below.
Table A- 133 Wiring diagram for the SB AE01 Analog 1 x Input (6ES7 288-5AE01-0AA0)
SB AE01 - SB Analog Input 1 x Input (6ES7 288-5AE01-0AA0)
Connect "R" and "0+" for current applications.

Note: Connectors must be gold. See Appendix F,
Spare parts and other hardware for article num-
ber.
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 134 Connector pin locations for SB AE01 Analog Input 1 x Input (6ES7 288-5AE01-0AA0)
Pin X19
1 No connection
2 No connection
3 AI R
4 AI 0+
5 AI 0+
6 AI 0-
A.7.2 SB AQ01 analog output specifications
Technical data SB Analog 1 x Output (SB AQ01)

Article number 6ES7 288-5AQ01-0AA0
Weight 17.4 grams
Current consumption (24 V DC) 40 mA (no load)

Number of outputs 1
Type Voltage or current
Range 10 V, 0 to 20 mA
Resolution Voltage: 11 bits + sign
Current: 11 bits
Full scale range (data word) -27,648 to 27,648 (-10 V to 10 V)
Refer to the output ranges for 0 to 27,648 (0 to 20 mA)
voltage and current.
Accuracy (25C / 0 to 55C) 0.5% / 1%
Settling time (95% of new value) Voltage: 300 s (R), 750 s (1 F)
Current: 600 s (1mH), 2 ms (10 mH)
Load impedance Voltage: 1000 ohms
Current: 600 ohms
Output behavior in STOP Last value, substitute value (default value 0)
Isolation (field side to logic) None
Cable length (max.), in meters 10 m twisted and shielded
S7-200 SMART

Overflow/underflow Yes
Short to ground (voltage mode Yes
only)
Wire break (current mode only) Yes
Table A- 138 Wiring diagram for the SB AQ01 Analog 1 x Output (6ES7 288-5AQ01-0AA0)
SB AQ01 Analog 1 x Output (6ES7 288-5AQ01-0AA0)
Table A- 139 Connector pin locations for SB AQ01 Analog 1 x Output (6ES7 288-5AQ01-0AA0)
Pin X19
1 No connection
2 No connection
3 No connection
4 Functional Earth
5 AQ 0
6 AQ 0M
S7-200 SMART
A.8 RS485/RS232 signal boards
A.8.1 SB RS485/RS232 specifications
Technical data SB RS485/RS232

Article number 6ES7 288-5CM01-0AA0
Weight 18.2 grams
Current consumption (24 V DC) N/A
Table A- 141 RS485 Transmitter and receiver

Common mode voltage range -7 V to +12 V, 1 second, 3 VRMS continuous
Transmitter differential output 2 V min. at RL = 100
voltage 1.5 V min. at RL = 54
Termination and bias 4.7 K to +5 V on TXD
4.7 K to GND on RXD
Receiver input impedance 12 K min.
Receiver threshold/sensitivity +/- 0.2 V min. 60 mV typical hysteresis
Isolation None
RS 485 signal to chassis ground
RS485 signal to CPU logic
common
Cable length, shielded With isolated repeater: 1000 m up to 187.5 kbaud
Without isolated repeater: 50 m
S7-200 SMART
Table A- 142 RS232 Transmitter and receiver

Transmitter output voltage +/-5 V min. at RL = 3K
Transmit output voltage +/- 15 V DC max.
Receiver input impedance 3 K min.
Receiver threshold/sensitivity 0.8 V min. low, 2.4 max. high
0.5 V typical hysteresis
Receiver input voltage +/- 30 V DC max.
Isolation None
RS232 signal to chassis ground
RS232 signal to CPU logic
common
Cable length, shielded 10 m max.
Table A- 143 Wiring diagram for the SB CM01 RS485/RS232 (6ES7 288-5CM01-0AA0)
SB CM01 RS485/RS232 (6ES7 288-5CM01-0AA0)
Table A- 144 Connector pin locations for SB CM01 RS485/RS232 (6ES7 288-5CM01-0AA0)
Pin X20
1 Functional Earth
2 Tx/B
3 RTS
4 M
5 Rx/A
6 5 V Out (Bias Voltage)
S7-200 SMART
A.9 Battery board signal boards (SBs)
A.9.1 SB BA01 Battery board
SB BA01 Battery board

The S7-200 SMART SB BA01 battery board is designed for long-term backup of the Real-
time clock. It is pluggable in the signal board slot of the S7-200 SMART CPU (firmware V2.0
and later versions). You must add the SB BA01 to the device configuration and download the
hardware configuration to the CPU for the SB BA01 to gain access to the additional battery
health reporting options.
The battery (type CR1025) is not included with the SB BA01 and must be purchased by the
user.
Note
The SB BA01 is mechanically designed to fit the CPUs with the firmware V2.0 and later
versions.
Technical data SB BA01 Battery Board

Article number 6ES7 288-5BA01-0AA0
Weight 20 grams
Current consumption (24 V DC) None
Battery (not included) SB BA01 Battery Board

Hold up time Approximately 1 year
Battery type CR1025
Refer to Installing or replacing a battery in the SB BA01
battery board (Page 46)
Nominal voltage 3V
Nominal capacity 30 mAH
S7-200 SMART
Diagnostics SB BA01 Battery Board

Critical battery level < 2.5 V
Battery diagnostic Low voltage indicator:
Low battery voltage causes the LED on the BA01 panel
to illuminate with the red light continuously ON.
Diagnostic alarm and/or digital output status of battery
low condition available
Battery status Battery status bit provided
0 = Battery OK
1 = Battery low
Battery status update Battery status is updated at power up and then once per day
while CPU is in RUN mode.
Table A- 146 Wiring diagram for the SB BA01 Battery board (6ES7 288-5BA01-0AA0)
SB BA01 Battery board (6ES7 288-5BA01-0AA0)
S7-200 SMART
A.10 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module
Technical data EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP

Article number 6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0
Weight 176.2 g
Power dissipation 1.5 W (no load)
V DC requirements
+5 V DC (SM Bus) 150 mA (no load)
+24 V DC See below
Table A- 148 EM features
Technical data EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module

Number of ports (limited pow- 1
er)
Electrical interface RS485
PROFIBUS DP / MPI baud 9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, and 500 kbaud; 1, 1.5, 3.6, and 12 Mbaud
rates (set automatically)
Protocols PROFIBUS DP slave and MPI slave
Cable length
Up to 93.7 kbaud 1200 m
187.5 kbaud 1000 m
500 kbaud 400 m
1 to 1.5 Mbaud 200 m
3 to 12 Mbaud 100 m
Network capabilities
Station address settings 0 to 99 (set by rotary switches)
Maximum stations per seg- 32
ment
Maximum stations per net- 126, up to 99 EM DP01 stations
work
MPI connections 6 total, 2 reserved (1 for PG and 1 for OP)
S7-200 SMART
Technical data EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP

24 V DC input power requirements
(Class 2, Limited Power, or sensor power from PLC)
Maximum current:
Module only with port active 30 mA
Add 90 mA of 5 V port load 60 mA
Add 120 mA of 24 V port load 180 mA
Ripple noise (< 10 MHz) < 1 V peak to peak (maximum)
Isolation (field to logic) 1 500 V AC for 1 minute
5 V DC power on communications port
Maximum current per port 900 mA @ nominal 5 V
Current limit 2.7 A @ 5 V
Isolation (5 V DC to logic) 500 V AC for 1 minute
24 V DC power on communications port
Maximum current per port 120 mA @ nominal 24 V
Current limit 0.7 to 2.4 A
Isolation Not isolated, same circuit as input 24 V DC
1 No power is supplied to module logic by the 24 V DC supply. 24 V DC supplies power for the communications port.
A.10.1 S7-200 SMART CPUs that support the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module
The S7-200 SMART EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module is an intelligent expansion module
designed to work with the S7-200 SMART CPUs shown in the following table.
Table A- 150 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module compatibility with S7-200 SMART CPUs
CPU Description
ST20 CPU ST20 (DC/DC/DC)
SR20 CPU SR20 (AC/DC/Relay)
S7-200 SMART
A.10.2 Connector pin assignments for EM DP01

The RS485 communication serial port on the EM DP01 is RS485-compatible on a nine-pin
subminiature D female connector, in accordance with the PROFIBUS standard as defined in
the European Standard EN 50170. The following table shows the connector that provides
physical connection for the communication port and describes the communication port pin
assignments.
Table A- 151 Pin assignments for the S7-200 SMART EM DP01
Pin Number Connector PROFIBUS

1 Shield
2 24 V Return
3 RS485 Signal B
4 Request-to-Send
5 5 V Return
6 +5 V (isolated)
7 +24 V
8 RS485 Signal A
9 NC
S7-200 SMART
A.10.3 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module wiring diagram
Table A- 152 Wiring diagram for the EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module (6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module (6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0)
Table A- 153 Connector pin locations for EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module (6ES7 288-7DP01-0AA0)
Pin X80
1 L+ / 24 V DC
2 M / 24 V DC
3 Functional Earth
S7-200 SMART
S7-200 SMART
Calculating a power budget B
B.1 Power budget
Your CPU has an internal power supply that provides power for the CPU, the expansion
modules, signal boards, and other 24 V DC user power requirements. Use the following
information as a guide for determining how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for
your configuration.
requirements of the expansion modules and signal boards. Refer to the Calculating a power
budget to determine how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for your
configuration.
The CPU provides the 5 V DC logic power needed for any expansion in your system. Pay
careful attention to your system configuration to ensure that the CPU can supply the 5 V DC
power required by your selected expansion modules. If your configuration requires more
power than the CPU can supply, you must remove a module.
Note
If the CPU power budget is exceeded, you may not be able to connect the maximum number
of modules allowed for your CPU.
The CPU also provides a 24 V DC sensor supply that can supply 24 V DC for input points,
for relay coil power on the expansion modules, or for other requirements. If your power
requirements exceed the budget of the sensor supply, then you must add an external 24 V
DC power supply to your system. You must manually connect the 24 V DC supply to the
input points or relay coils.
If you require an external 24 V DC power supply, ensure that the power supply is not
connected in parallel with the sensor supply of the CPU. For improved electrical noise
protection, it is recommended that the commons (M) of the different power supplies be
connected.
WARNING
Connecting power supplies safely
Connecting an external 24 V DC power supply in parallel with the 24 V DC sensor supply of
the CPU can result in a conflict between the two supplies as each seeks to establish its
own preferred output voltage level.
The result of this conflict can be shortened lifetime or immediate failure of one or both
power supplies, with consequent unpredictable operation of the PLC system. Unpredictable
operation could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
The DC sensor supply of the CPU and any external power supply should provide power to
different points. A single connection of the commons is allowed.
S7-200 SMART
Calculating a power budget
B.1 Power budget
Some of the 24 V DC power input ports in the S7-200 SMART system are interconnected,
with a common logic circuit connecting multiple M terminals. For example, the following
circuits are interconnected when designated as "not isolated" in the data sheets: the 24 V
DC power supply of the CPU, the power input for the relay coil of an EM, or the power supply
for a non-isolated analog input. All non-isolated M terminals must connect to the same
external reference potential.
WARNING
Connecting non-isolated M terminals to different reference potentials will cause unintended
current flows that may cause damage or unpredictable operation in the PLC and any
connected equipment.
Failure to comply with these guidelines could cause damage or unpredictable operation
which could result in death or severe personal injury and/or property damage.
Always ensure that all non-isolated M terminals in an S7-200 SMART system are
connected to the same reference potential.
Refer to the technical specifications for your particular CPU (Page 570) to determine the
24 V DC sensor supply power budget, the 5 V DC logic budget supplied by your CPU and
the 5 V DC power requirements of the expansion modules and signal boards.
S7-200 SMART
B.2 Calculating a sample power requirement
B.2 Calculating a sample power requirement
Calculating a sample power requirement

The following table shows a sample calculation of the power requirements for a CPU that
includes the following:
3 each EM Digital Output 8 x Relay (EM DR08)
1 each EM Digital 8 x Inputs (EM DE08)
This installation has a total of 32 inputs and 40 outputs.
Note
The CPU has already allocated the power required to drive the CPUs internal relay coils.
You do not need to include the internal relay coil power requirements in a power budget
calculation.
The CPU in this example provides sufficient 5 V DC current, but does not provide enough
24 V DC current from the sensor supply for all of the inputs and expansion relay coils. The
I/O requires 392 mA and the CPU provides 300 mA. This installation requires an additional
source of at least 92 mA of 24 V DC power to operate all the included 24 V DC inputs and
outputs.
Table B- 1 Calculation of the power budget for a sample configuration
CPU power budget 5 V DC 24 V DC

CPU SR40 AC/DC/Relay 1400 mA 300 mA
minus
System requirements 5 V DC 24 V DC
CPU SR40, 24 inputs 24 * 4 mA = 96 mA
Slot 0: EM DR08 120 mA 8 * 11 mA = 88 mA
Slot 1: EM DR08 120 mA 8 * 11 mA = 88 mA
Slot 2: EM DR08 120 mA 8 * 11 mA = 88 mA
Slot 3: EM DE08 105 mA 8 * 4 mA = 32 mA
Total requirements 465 mA 392 mA

equals
Current balance 5 V DC 24 V DC
Current balance total 275 mA (92 mA)
S7-200 SMART
B.3 Calculating your power requirement
B.3 Calculating your power requirement
Calculating your power requirement

Use the table below to determine how much power (or current) the CPU can provide for your
configuration. Refer to the technical specifications (Page 565) for the power budgets of your
CPU model and the power requirements of your digital modules, analog modules or signal
boards.
Table B- 2 Power budget
Power budget 5 V DC 24 V DC
minus
System requirements 5 V DC 24 V DC
Total requirements
equals
Current balance 5 V DC 24 V DC
Current balance total
S7-200 SMART
Error codes C
C.1 PLC non-fatal error codes
PLC compiler and run-time errors are non-fatal errors. Non-fatal errors can degrade some
aspect of the performance of your PLC, but do not render the PLC incapable of executing
the user program or updating the I/O.
Run-time programming errors are non-fatal error conditions created by you or your
program while the program is being executed. An example of this is an indirect-address
pointer, which was valid when the program compiled, modified by program execution to
point to an out-of-range address. Access the PLC Information from the PLC menu ribbon
strip to determine what type of error has occurred.
You can correct run-time programming errors only by modifying the user program. The
run-time programming errors are cleared at the next transition from STOP to RUN mode.
PLC compiler errors (or program-compile errors) prevent you from downloading the
program to the PLC. STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART detects compile errors when you
compile or download (Page 35) the program, and shows errors in the output window. If
there is a compile error, the PLC retains the current program that is resident in the PLC.
I/O errors are also non-fatal errors. When problems occur with the I/O of the CPU, signal
board, and expansion modules, the PLC records the error information in special memory
(SM) bits that your program can monitor and evaluate.
Non-fatal error codes
Hexadecimal error Non-fatal PLC program compiler errors

code
0080 The program is too large for the CPU; please reduce the program size
0081 Logic stack underflow; split the network into multiple networks
0082 Illegal instruction; check instruction mnemonics
0083 Illegal instruction before end of main program; remove incorrect instruction
0085 Illegal combination of FOR/NEXT; add FOR instruction or delete NEXT in-
struction
0086 Illegal combination of FOR/NEXT; add NEXT instruction or delete FOR in-
struction
0087 Missing label or POU; add the appropriate label
0088 Illegal instruction before end of subroutine; add RET to the end of the subrou-
tine or remove incorrect instruction
0089 Illegal instruction before end of interrupt routine; add RETI to the end of the
interrupt routine or remove incorrect instruction
008B Illegal jump in or out of a SCR segment
008C Duplicate label or POU name
008D Exceeded maximum label or POU number; ensure that the number of labels
allowed has not been exceeded
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
Hexadecimal error Non-fatal PLC program compiler errors

code
0090 Illegal operand
0091 Memory range error; check the operand ranges
0092 Illegal count operand; verify the maximum count size
0093 FOR/NEXT nesting level exceeded
0095 Missing LSCR instruction
0096 Missing SCRE instruction or illegal instruction before SCRE
0099 Too many password-protected POUs
009B Illegal index for a string operation
009D Illegal parameter detected in system block
009F Illegal program organization
Hexadecimal error Transition to RUN mode prevented (run inhibit conditions)

code
0070 Run inhibit due to memory card inserted
0071 Run inhibit due to missing configured device
0072 Run inhibit due to mismatched device configuration (note: this error also
includes device parameterization errors)
0073 Run inhibit due to attempted firmware update
0074 Run inhibit due to serious HW error on expansion module or signal board
Hexadecimal error Non-fatal run-time programming problem

code
0000 No non-fatal errors present
0001 HSC instruction enabled before executing HDEF instruction
0002 Input interrupt point already assigned to an HSC
0003 HSC input point already assigned to an input interrupt or other HSC
0004 Instruction not allowed in an interrupt routine
0005 Simultaneous HSC/PLS/motion instructions
0006 Indirect addressing error
0007 Time of day instructions data error
0008 Maximum user subroutine nesting level exceeded
0009 Simultaneous XMT/RCV instructions on Port 0
000A Execution of an HDEF instruction of a previously configured HSC
000B Simultaneous execution of XMT/RCV instructions on Port 1
000D Attempt to redefine pulse output while it is active
000E Number of PTO profile segment was set to 0
000F Illegal numeric value encountered in compare contact instruction
0013 Illegal PID loop table
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
Hexadecimal error Non-fatal run-time programming problem

code
0014 Data log error:
There are too many DATx_WRITE subroutine executions in one program
scan. Only 10 to 15 data log writes per second can be sustained. When
there are too many DATx-WRITE executions per second, then the allot-
ted memory will be full and for a short period of time no new data log rec-
ords are stored.
Executing a data log write subroutine without first configuring a data log
with the data log wizard
0016 HSC or interrupt input point already assigned to motion
0017 PTO/PWM output point already assigned to motion
0019 Signal Board not present or not configured
001A Scan watchdog timeout.
001B Attempt to change time base on enabled PWM
001C Serious hardware error on expansion module or signal board
0090 Illegal operand
0091 Operand range error; check the operand ranges
0092 Illegal count operand; verify the maximum count size
0098 Illegal program edit in RUN mode
009A Attempt to switch into freeport mode inside a user interrupt routine
009B Illegal index for a string operation (user requested index=0)
See also
Special memory (SM) and system symbol names (Page 665)
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
C.2 PLC non-fatal error SM flags
C.2 PLC non-fatal error SM flags
Overview
Non-fatal errors are those that may degrade some aspect of PLC performance, but do not
render the PLC incapable of executing the user program and updating I/O. To help you in
debugging your program, information associated with error conditions is stored in Special
Memory (SM) locations (Page 665), which can be accessed by the user program. For
example, if you do not want to continue in RUN mode with certain non-fatal error conditions,
you can have the user program force a transition to STOP mode when the undesirable
condition occurs.
The following table lists and describes the Special Memory non-fatal error information.
SM bit Non-fatal error description SM byte Non-fatal error description

SM0.2 Retentive Data Lost SMB9 Module 0 I/O Error Byte
SM0.7 RTC_Lost SMB11 Module 1 I/O Error Byte
SM1.3 Divide by Zero Error SMB13 Module 2 I/O Error Byte
SM3.0 Parity Error SMB15 Module 3 I/O Error Byte
SM4.0 Comm. Interrupt Queue Overflow SMB17 Module 4 I/O Error Byte
SM4.1 Input Interrupt Queue Overflow SMB19 Module 5 I/O Error Byte
SM4.2 Timed Interrupt Queue Overflow SMB29 Signal Board I/O Error Byte
SM4.3 Run-Time Programming Problem
SM5.0 I/O Error (any I/O error bit set)
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
C.3 PLC fatal error codes
Overview
Fatal errors cause the PLC to stop the execution of your program. Depending on the severity
of the error, a fatal error can render the PLC incapable of performing any or all functions.
The objective for handling fatal errors is to bring the PLC to a safe state from which the PLC
can respond to interrogations about the existing error conditions.
The PLC performs the following tasks when a fatal error is detected.
Changes to STOP mode
Turns on both the System Fault LED and the STOP LED
Turns off the outputs
The PLC remains in this condition until the fatal error is corrected. The table shown below
provides a list with descriptions for the fatal error codes that can be read from the PLC.
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART displays the error codes generated by the PLC, along with a
brief description, in the PLC Information dialog. To access PLC information, click the PLC
button from the Information area of the PLC menu ribbon strip.
Once you have corrected the conditions that caused the fatal error, power-cycle the PLC or
perform a warm restart from STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART. To perform a warm start, click the
Warm Start button in the Modify area of the PLC menu ribbon strip.
Restarting the PLC clears the fatal error condition and causes power-up diagnostic testing. If
another fatal error condition occurs, the PLC sets the System Fault LED again; otherwise,
the PLC begins normal operation.
There are several possible error conditions that can render the PLC incapable of
communication, in which case you cannot view the PLC error code. This type of error
indicates a hardware failure requiring the PLC module to be repaired; it cannot be fixed by
changes to the program or by clearing the PLC memory.
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
Fatal error codes
Hexadecimal Description
error code
0000 No fatal errors present
0001 System firmware checksum error
0002 Compiled user program checksum error
0004 Permanent memory failed
0005 Permanent memory error on user program
0006 Permanent memory error on system block
0007 Permanent memory error on force data
0009 Permanent memory error on user data, DB1
000A Memory card failed
000B Memory card error on user program
000C Memory card error on system block
000D Memory card error on force data
000F Memory card error on user data, DB1
0010 Internal firmware error
0015 User program has compile error on power-up
0016 User data has compile error on power-up
0017 System block has compile error on power-up
0018 CPU HW identification data not available or corrupted
0019 HW watchdog timeout error
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
C.4 Timestamp mismatch

This warning message indicates that the timestamps for the project do not match the
timestamps for the program in the PLC. This may indicate that the programs are different, in
which case it would be dangerous to continue the current operation. However, the programs
might be functionally identical and still have different timestamps.
What actions modify the program timestamps?

Each program contains two distinct timestamps; the "Created" timestamp and the "Last
Modified" timestamp. The created timestamp is set when the project is created by the New
Project option. The Created timestamp is not affected by any user edits or program
compilation.
The Last Modified timestamp is used to indicate when the user last modified the program.
There are many conditions that cause the Last Modified timestamp to be set:
1. An edit of instructions or operands in the program block editor.
2. Adding, deleting, or modifying a variable or global symbol.
3. Adding or deleting a POU.
4. Compiling the program block.
5. Downloading the program block (this automatically compiles the program block and
therefore sets the last modified timestamp).
Note that although all of these actions will cause the last modified timestamp to be set, this
does not necessarily mean that the programs are different. For this reason, STEP 7-
Micro/WIN SMART provides the "Compare" option, to allow you to determine whether the
programs are really different
How do I tell if the programs are really different?

You can choose to compare the program block in the PLC with the project's program block
by clicking the "Compare" button. The results of this comparison allow you to determine
whether to continue the status operation.
How do I synchronize timestamps?

Downloading a new project to the PLC synchronizes the timestamps, which allows you to run
status.
S7-200 SMART
Error codes
S7-200 SMART
Special memory (SM) and system symbol names D
D.1 SM (Special Memory) overview
SMB0 to SMB29, SMB480 to SMB515, and SMB1000 to SMB1699 (S7-200 SMART read-only
special memory)
The CPU Operating System writes new changes to the system data
stored in Special Memory.
SMB0 to SMB29, SMB480 to SMB515, and SMB1000 to SMB1699 are

Read system status read-only from your program. If a program attempts a write to a read-
from the CPU only SM address, STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART will compile the program
without error. The CPU program compiler, however, will reject the pro-
gram and display "Operand range error, Download failed".
Your program can read data stored in special memory addresses, eval-
uate the current system status, and use conditional logic to decide how
to respond. In run mode, the continuous scanning of your program logic
provides continuous monitoring of system data.
SMB0 (Page 667) System status bits
SMB1 (Page 668) Instruction execution status bits
SMB2 (Page 669) Freeport receive character
SMB3 (Page 669) Freeport parity error
SMB4 (Page 670) Interrupt queue overflow, run-time program error, interrupts enabled,
freeport transmitter idle, and value forced
SMB5 (Page 670) I/O error status bits
SMB6-SMB7 (Page 671) CPU ID, error status, and digital I/O points
SMB8-SMB19 (Page 672) I/O module ID and errors
SMW22-SMW26 (Page 673) Scan times
SMB28-SMB29 (Page 673) Signal board ID and errors
SMB480-SMB515 (Page 685) Data log status (read only)
SMB1000-SMB1049 (Page 688) CPU hardware/firmware ID
SMB1050-SMB1099 (Page 688) SB (signal board) hardware/firmware ID
SMB1100-SMB1399 (Page 689) EM (expansion module) hardware/firmware ID
SMB1400-SMB1699 (Page 691) EM (expansion module) module-specific data
S7-200 SMART
Special memory (SM) and system symbol names
D.1 SM (Special Memory) overview
SMB30 to SMB194 and SMB566 to SMB749 (S7-200 SMART read/write special memory)
As required, the S7-200 CPU Operating System reads configura-

tion/control data from special memory and writes new changes to the
system data stored in Special Memory.
Read system status Your program can read and write all SM addresses in this range, but the
from CPU normal usage of SM data varies according to the function of each ad-
Write (send) control dress.
commands to the
CPU
SM addresses provide a means to access system status data, configure
system options, and control system functions. In run mode, continuous
scanning of your program provides for continuous access to special
system features.
SMB30 (port 0) and SMB130 (port 1) (Page 674) Port configuration for the integrated
RS485 port (Port 0) and the CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485 port (Port 1)
SMB34-SMB35 (Page 674) Time intervals for timed interrupts
SMB36-45 (HSC0), SMB46-55 (HSC1), SMB56-65 (HSC2), SMB136-145 (HSC3)
(Page 675) High-speed counter configuration and operation
SMB66-SMB85 (Page 678) PLS0 and PLS1 high-speed outputs
SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194 (Page 681) Receive message control
SMW98 (Page 683) I/O expansion bus communication errors
SMW100-SMW114 (Page 684) System alarms
SMB130 (Page 674) Port configuration for the CM01 Signal Board (SB) RS232/RS485
port (Port 1) (See SMB30)
SMB136-SMB145 (Page 685) HSC3 High-speed counter (See SMB36)
SMB166-SMB169 (Page 678) PTO0 profile definition table
SMB186-SMB194 (Page 681) Receive message control (See SMB86-SMB94)
SMB566-SMB575 (Page 678) PLS2 high-speed output
SMB600-SMB649 (Page 686) Axis 0 open loop motion control
S7-200 SMART
D.2 SMB0: System status
WARNING
equipment.
table.
D.2 SMB0: System status

Special Memory Byte 0 (SM0.0 - SM0.7) provides eight bits that are updated by the S7-200
SMART CPU at the end of each scan cycle. Your program can read the status of these bits
and make decisions based on a bit's value.
Table D- 1 SMB0 system status bits
S7-200 SMART SM address Description

symbol name
Always_On SM0.0 This bit is always ON. (set to 1)
First_Scan_On SM0.1 This bit is set ON, for the first scan cycle, and is set OFF thereafter. One use for this
bit is to call an initialization subroutine.
Retentive_Lost SM0.2 This bit is turned ON for one scan cycle after:
Reset to factory communication command
Reset to factory memory card evaluation
Evaluation of program transfer card in which a new system block was loaded from
the card.
Problem with retentive record on NAND flash
This bit can be used as either an error memory bit or as a mechanism to invoke a
special start-up sequence.
RUN_Power_Up SM0.3 This bit is turned ON for one scan cycle when RUN mode is entered from a power-up
or warm restart condition. This bit can be used to provide machine warm-up time
before starting an operation.
Clock_60s SM0.4 This bit provides a clock pulse that is OFF for 30 seconds and ON for 30 seconds, for
a cycle time of 1-minute. It provides an easy-to-use delay or a 1-minute clock pulse.
Clock_1s SM0.5 This bit provides a clock pulse that is OFF for 0.5 seconds and then ON for 0.5 sec-
onds for a cycle time of 1 second. It provides an easy-to-use delay or a 1-second
clock pulse.
S7-200 SMART
D.3 SMB1: Instruction execution status

symbol name
Clock_Scan SM0.6 This bit is a scan cycle clock that is ON for one scan and then OFF for the next scan,
alternating ON and OFF on subsequent scans. This bit can be used as a scan coun-
ter input.
RTC_Lost SM0.7 This bit is turned ON for one scan cycle, if the time on the real time clock device was
reset or lost at power-up (resulting in system time lost). This bit can be used as either
an error memory bit, or to invoke a special start-up sequence.
D.3 SMB1: Instruction execution status

Special memory byte 1 (SM1.0 - SM1.7) provides execution status for various instructions,
such as table and math operations. These bits are set and reset by instructions at execution
time. Your program can read the bit values and then make decisions based on the values.
Table D- 2 SMB1 instruction execution status bits

symbol name
Result_0 SM1.0 This bit is set ON by the execution of certain instructions when the result of the
operation is zero.
Overflow_Illegal SM1.1 This bit is set ON by the execution of certain instructions either when an overflow
results or when an illegal number value is detected.
Neg_Result SM1.2 This bit is set ON when a negative result is produced by a math operation.
Divide_By_0 SM1.3 This error bit is set ON when division by zero is attempted.
Table_Overflow SM1.4 This bit is set ON by Add to Table (ATT) instruction execution when the referenced
data table is full.
Table_Empty SM1.5 This bit is set ON when either LIFO or FIFO instructions attempt to read from an
empty table.
Not_BCD SM1.6 This bit is set ON for an illegal value (non-BCD) in a BCD to binary conversion.
Not_Hex SM1.7 This bit is set ON for an illegal value (non-hex ASCII digit) during ASCII to Hex
(ATH) conversion.
S7-200 SMART
D.4 SMB2: Freeport receive character
D.4 SMB2: Freeport receive character

Special memory byte 2 is the Freeport receive character buffer. Each character that is
received while in Freeport mode is placed in this location for easy access by your program.
Table D- 3 SMB2 Freeport received character

symbol name
Receive_Char SMB2 This byte contains each character received from Port 0 or Port 1 during Freeport com-
munication.
Note
SMB2 and SMB3 are shared between port 0 and port 1
When the reception of a character on port 0 results in the execution of the interrupt routine
attached to that event (interrupt event 8), SMB2 contains the character received on port 0,
and SMB3 contains the parity status of that character.
When the reception of a character on port 1 results in the execution of the interrupt routine
attached to that event (interrupt event 25), SMB2 contains the character received on port 1,
and SMB3 contains the error status of that character.
D.5 SMB3: Freeport character error

SMB3 is used for Freeport mode and contains an error bit that is set when a parity, framing,
break, or overrun error is detected on a received character. SM3.0 is set ON when a parity,
framing, break, or overrun error is detected. Use this bit to discard the message.
Table D- 4 SMB3 Freeport character error

symbol name
Parity_Err SM3.0 This bit indicates a parity, framing, break, or overrun error received from Port 0 or
Port 1. (0=no error; 1=error)
S7-200 SMART
D.6 SMB4: Interrupt queue overflow, run-time program error, interrupts enabled, freeport transmitter idle, and
value forced
D.6 SMB4: Interrupt queue overflow, run-time program error, interrupts

enabled, freeport transmitter idle, and value forced
Special memory byte 4 (SM4.0 - SM4.7) contains the interrupt queue overflow bits and a bit
(SM 4.4) that shows whether interrupts are enabled or disabled. These bits indicate either
that interrupts are occurring at a rate greater than can be processed or that interrupts were
disabled with the global interrupt disable instruction.
Other bits indicate:
A run-time program error
Freeport transmitter status
If any PLC memory value is currently forced.
Table D- 5 SMB4 system status

symbol name
Comm_Int_Ovr ** SM4.0 1 = Communication interrupt queue has overflowed.
Input_Int_Ovr ** SM4.1 1 = Input interrupt queue has overflowed.
Timed_Int_Ovr ** SM4.2 1 = Timed interrupt queue has overflowed.
RUN_Err SM4.3 1 = Run-time programming non-fatal error is detected.
Int_Enable SM4.4 1 = Interrupts are enabled.
Xmit0_Idle SM4.5 1 = Port 0 transmitter is idle (0=transmission in progress).
Xmit1_Idle SM4.6 1 = Port 1 transmitter is idle (0=transmission in progress).
Force_On SM4.7 1 = Any memory location is forced.
** Use status bits 4.0, 4.1, and 4.2 only inside an interrupt routine. These status bits are reset when the queue is emptied,
and control is returned to the main program.
D.7 SMB5: I/O error status

Special Memory Byte 5 (SM5.0 - SM5.7) contains status bits which indicate error conditions
that were detected in the I/O system. These bits provide an overview of the I/O errors
detected.
Table D- 6 SMB5 I/O error status

symbol name
IO_Err SM5.0 This bit is set ON if any I/O errors are present.
S7-200 SMART
D.8 SMB6-SMB7: CPU ID, error status, and digital I/O points
D.8 SMB6-SMB7: CPU ID, error status, and digital I/O points
Special memory bytes 6 and 7 provide CPU information.
See also SMW100-SMW114 System alarm codes (Page 684)
S7-200 SMART
D.9 SMB8-SMB19: I/O module ID and errors
D.9 SMB8-SMB19: I/O module ID and errors

SMB8 through SMB19 are organized in byte pairs for expansion modules 0 to 5.
The even-numbered byte of each pair is the module-identification register. These bytes
identify the module type, the I/O type, and the number of inputs and outputs.
The odd-numbered byte of each pair is the module error register. These bytes provide an
indication of any errors detected in the I/O for that module.
S7-200 SMART
D.10 SMW22-SMW26: Scan times
D.10 SMW22-SMW26: Scan times

SMW22, SMW24, and SMW26 contain information on the scan time. You can read the last
scan time, minimum scan time, and maximum scan time (millisecond values).
Table D- 7 SMW22-SMW26 PLC scan times

symbol name
Last_Scan SMW22 Scan time of the last scan.
Minimum_Scan SMW24 Minimum scan time recorded since entering the RUN mode or since resetting these
values from the PLC Information dialog.
Maximum_Scan SMW26 Maximum scan time recorded since entering the RUN mode or since resetting
these values from the PLC Information dialog.
D.11 SMB28-SMB29: Signal board ID and errors

SMB28-SMB29 byte addresses store the signal board type and error status.
S7-200 SMART
D.12 SMB30: (port 0) and SMB130: (port 1)
D.12 SMB30: (port 0) and SMB130: (port 1)

SMB30 configures port 0 (onboard RS485 port).
SMB130 configures port 1 (optional CM01 signal board).
You can read and write to SMB30 and SMB130. These bytes configure the respective
communication port for Freeport operation and provide selection of either Freeport or system
protocol support.
D.13 SMB34-SMB35: Time intervals for timed interrupts

Special memory bytes 34 and 35 control the time interval of timed interrupts 0 and 1. You
can assign time intervals (in 1-ms increments) from 1 ms to 255 ms. The time-interval value
is captured by the CPU at the time that the corresponding timed interrupt event is attached to
an interrupt routine. To change the time interval, you must reattach the timed interrupt event
to the same interrupt routine or to a different interrupt routine. You can terminate a timed
interrupt event by detaching the event.
Table D- 8 SMB34-SMB35 timed interrupt intervals

symbol name
Time_0_Intrvl SMB34 Timed interrupt 0: Time interval value (in 1 ms increments from 1 ms to 255 ms).
Time_1_Intrvl SMB35 Timed interrupt 1: Time interval value (in 1 ms increments from 1 ms to 255 ms).
S7-200 SMART
D.14 SMB36-45 (HSC0), SMB46-55 (HSC1), SMB56-65 (HSC2), SMB136-145 (HSC3): high-speed counters
D.14 SMB36-45 (HSC0), SMB46-55 (HSC1), SMB56-65 (HSC2),

SMB136-145 (HSC3): high-speed counters
These addresses provide high-speed counter configuration and operation, for HSC0, HSC1,
HSC2, and HSC3.
Table D- 9 High-speed counter 0 configuration and operation

symbol name
HSC0_Status SMB36 HSC0 counter status
Note: Counter status bits are valid only while an interrupt routine triggered
by a high-speed counter event is being executed.
SM36.0SM36.4 Reserved
HSC0_Status_5 SM36.5 HSC0 current counting direction status bit: 1 = counting up
HSC0_Status_6 SM36.6 HSC0 current value equals preset value status bit: 1 = equal
HSC0_Status_7 SM36.7 HSC0 current value is greater than preset value status bit: 1 = greater than
HSC0_Ctrl SMB37 HSC0 counter control
HSC0_Reset_Level SM37.0 Active level control bit for Reset: 0 = Reset is active high, 1 = Reset is active
low
SM37.1 Reserved
HSC0_Rate SM37.2 HSC0 count rate selection for AB quadrature phase counters: 0 = 4x count-
ing rate; 1= 1x counting rate
HSC0_Dir SM37.3 HSC0 direction control bit: 1 = count up
HSC0_Dir_Update SM37.4 HSC0 update direction: 1 = update direction
HSC0_PV_Update SM37.5 HSC0 update preset value: 1 = write new preset value to HSC0 preset
HSC0_CV_Update SM37.6 HSC0 update current value: 1 = write new current value to HSC0 current
HSC0_Enable SM37.7 HSC0 enable bit: 1 = enable
HSC0_CV SMD38 HSC0 new current value
SMD38 is used to set HSC0 current value to any value you choose. To
update the current value, write SMD38 with the desired new current value,
write SM37.6 to 1, and execute the HSC instruction. The new current value
is then written to HSC0's current count register.
HSC0_PV SMD42 HSC0 new preset value
SMD42 is used to set HSC0 preset value to any value you choose. To up-
date the current value, write SMD42 with the desired new current value,
write SM37.5 to 1, and execute the HSC instruction. The new preset value
is then written to HSC0's preset register.
S7-200 SMART

symbol name
by a high-speed counter event is being executed
HSC1_Ctrl SMB47 HSC1 control
SM47.0-SM47.2 Reserved
HSC1_Dir SM47.3 HSC1 direction control bit: 1 = count up 0 = count down
HSC1_Enable SM47.7 HSC1 enable bit: 1 = enable HSC 0 = disable HSC
HSC1_PV SMD52 HSC1 new present value

symbol name
Note: Counter Status bits are valid only while an interrupt routine triggered
HSC2_Ctrl SMB57 HSC2 control
HSC2_Reset_Level SM57.0 HSC2 active level control bit for Reset: 0 = Reset is active high; 1 = Reset is
active low
SM57.1 Reserved
HSC2_Rate SM57.2 HSC2 counting rate selection for AB quadrature phase counters: 0 = 4x
counting rate; 1 = 1x counting rate
S7-200 SMART

symbol name
HSC2_Dir SM57.3 HSC2 direction control bit: 1 = count up

symbol name
HSC3_Ctrl SMB137 HSC3 counter control
HSC3Dir SM137.3 HSC3 direction control bit: 1 = count up
S7-200 SMART
D.15 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179, and SMB566-SMB579: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1,
PWM1, PTO2, and PWM2 high-speed outputs

symbol name
SMD142 is used to set HSC3 preset value to any value you choose. To
D.15 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179, and

SMB566-SMB579: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1, PWM1, PTO2, and PWM2
high-speed outputs
The S7-200 SMART CPU uses SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, and SMB176-SMB179
to monitor and control the pulse train outputs (PTO0 and PTO1) and pulse width modulation
outputs (PWM0 and PWM1), for the PLS (Pulse) instruction.
SMB566-SMB579 are used to monitor and control pulse train output PTO2 and pulse width
modulation output PWM2.
Table D- 13 High-speed output 0 configuration and control
S7-200 SMART SM address Function

symbol name
PTO0_Status SMB66 PTO0 Status
PLS0_Abort_AE SM66.4 PTO0 profile was aborted due to an add error: 0=no abort; 1=aborted
PLS0_Disable_UC SM66.5 PTO0 user manually disabled a PTO profile while it was running: 0=not
disabled; 1=manually disabled
PLS0_Ovr SM66.6 PTO0 pipeline overflow/underflow, loading pipeline while full or transfer-
ring an empty pipeline: 0=No overflow; 1=Pipeline overflow/underflow
PLS0_Idle SM66.7 PTO0 idle: 0=PTO in progress; 1=PTO is idle
PLS0_Ctrl SMB67 Monitor and control PTO0 (Pulse Train Output) and PWM0 (Pulse Width
Modulation) for Q0.0
PLS0_Cycle_Update SM67.0 PTO0/PWM0 update the cycle time or frequency value: 0=no update; 1=
write new cycle time/frequency
PWM0_PW_Update SM67.1 PWM0 update the pulse width value: 0=no update; 1= write new pulse
width
PTO0_PC_Update SM67.2 PTO0 update the pulse count value: 0=no update; 1= write new pulse
count
PWM0_TimeBase SM67.3 PWM0 time base: 0=1 s/tick, 1=1 ms/tick
SM67.4 Reserved
S7-200 SMART
D.15 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179, and SMB566-SMB579: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1, PWM1, PTO2,

symbol name
PTO0_Operation SM67.5 PTO0 select single/multiple segment operation: 0=single; 1=multiple
PLS0_Select SM67.6 PTO0/PWM0 mode select: 0=PWM; 1=PTO
PLS0_Enable SM67.7 PTO0/PWM0 enable: 0=disable; 1=enable
PLS0_Cycle SMW68 Word data type: PWM0 cycle time value (2 to 65,535 units of time base);
PTO0 frequency value (1 to 65,535 Hz)
PWM0_PW SMW70 Word data type: PWM0 pulse width value (0 to 65,535 units of time base)
PTO0_PC SMD72 Double Word data type: PTO0 pulse count value (1 to 2^31 - 1)
PTO0_Seg_Num SMB166 Byte data type: The currently executing segment number for PTO0's
profile
PTO0_Profile_Offset SMW168 Word data type: Starting location of PTO0's profile table (byte offset from
V0)

symbol name
width
count
PWM1_TimeBase SM77.3 PWM1 time base: 0=1 s/tick, 1=1 ms/tick
SM77.4 Reserved
profile
V0)
S7-200 SMART
D.15 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179, and SMB566-SMB579: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1,
PWM1, PTO2, and PWM2 high-speed outputs

symbol name
width
count
PLS2_TimeBase SM567.3 PWM2 time base: 0=1 s/tick, 1=1 ms/tick
SM567.4 Reserved
profile
V0)
S7-200 SMART
D.16 SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194: Receive message control

SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194 are used to control and read status of the RCV
(Receive message) instruction.
S7-200 SMART
The bits of the message control byte are used to define the criteria by which the message is
identified. The start of message and end of message criteria are defined. To determine the
start of a message, either of two sets of logically ANDed start of message criteria must be
true and must occur in sequence (in sequence means idle line followed by start character or
break followed by start character). To determine the end of a message, the enabled end of
message criteria is logically ORed. The equations for start and stop criteria are given below:
Start of Message = (il AND sc) OR (bk AND sc)
End of Message = ec OR tmr OR maximum character count reached
S7-200 SMART
D.17 SMW98: I/O expansion bus communication errors
D.17 SMW98: I/O expansion bus communication errors

SMW98 gives you information about errors on the expansion I/O bus.
Table D- 16 SMW98 I/O expansion bus communication error counter

symbol name (Read/Write)
EM_Parity_Err SMW98 This word is incremented each time a parity error is detected on
the expansion I/O bus. It is cleared upon power up and by the
user writing a zero.
S7-200 SMART
D.18 SMW100-SMW114 System alarms
D.18 SMW100-SMW114 System alarms

Special memory words SMW100-SMW114 provide alarm and diagnostic error codes for
CPU, SB (signal board), and EM (expansion modules).
S7-200 SMART
D.19 SMB130: Freeport control for port 1 (See SMB30)
D.19 SMB130: Freeport control for port 1 (See SMB30)

Refer to "SMB30: (port 0) and SMB130: (port 1)" (Page 674) for details.
D.20 SMB136-SMB145: HSC3 high-speed counter

Refer to "SMB36-45 (HSC0), SMB46-55 (HSC1), SMB56-65 (HSC2), SMB136-145 (HSC3):
high-speed counters" (Page 675) for details.
D.21 SMB186-SMB194: Receive message control (See SMB86-SMB94)

Refer to "SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194" (Page 681) for details.
D.22 SMB480-SMB515: Data log status

SMB480 through SMB515 are read-only special memory addresses that are used to monitor
the status of Data log operations.

symbol name
DL0_InitResult SMB480 Initialization result code for Data Log 0: The data log analysis is per-
formed after power-up and after System block download.
00H: data log OK
01H: initialization in progress
02H: data log file not found
03H: data log initialization error
04H to FEH: reserved
FFH: data log not configured
DL1_InitResult SMB481 Initialization result code for Data Log 1 (See SMB 480 for result codes)
DL0_Maximum SMW500 Data log 0: Configured maximum allowed number of records
DL0_Current SMW502 Data log 0: Actual maximum allowed number of records
S7-200 SMART
D.23 SMB600-SMB749: Axis (0, 1, and 2) open loop motion control
D.23 SMB600-SMB749: Axis (0, 1, and 2) open loop motion control
Axis configuration and control SM addresses

This axis special memory data is normally read and written by wizard generated program
code.
Axis data SM address Axis function

Axis 0 Axis 1 Axis 2
SMB600- SMB650- SMB600- Axis name (16 ASCII characters). The first character is the lowest numbered byte in
SMB615 SMB665 SMB615 the sequence.
SMB616- SMB616- SMB616- Reserved
SMB619 SMB619 SMB619
SMW620 SMW670 SMW720 Error code - See Axis of Motion error codes (Page 544)

SMB624 SMB674 SMB724 CUR_PF is a byte that indicates the profile currently being executed.
SMB625 SMB675 SMB725 CUR_STP is a byte that indicates the step currently being executed in the profile.
SMD626 SMD676 SMD726 CUR_POS is a double-word value that indicates the current position of the axis.
SMD630 SMD680 SMD730 CUR_SPD is a double-word value that indicates the current speed of the axis.
S7-200 SMART
D.24 SMB650-SMB699: Axis 1 open loop motion control (See SMB600-SMB740)

SMB635- SMB685- SMB735- Reserved
SMB645 SMB695 SMB745
SMD646 SMD646 SMD746 V memory pointer to the configuration/profile table for the axis. A pointer value to an
area other than V memory will not be accepted.
D.24 SMB650-SMB699: Axis 1 open loop motion control (See SMB600-

SMB740)
Refer to "SMB600-SMB749: Axis (0, 1, and 2) open loop motion control (Page 686)" for
details.
D.25 SMB700-SMB749: Axis 2 open loop motion control (See SMB600-

SMB740)
Refer to "SMB600-SMB749: Axis (0, 1, and 2) open loop motion control (Page 686)" for
details.
S7-200 SMART
D.26 SMB1000-SMB1049: CPU hardware/firmware ID
D.26 SMB1000-SMB1049: CPU hardware/firmware ID

This CPU information is written to special memory after a power-up or warm restart
transition. The SMB1000-SMB1049 section of special memory is read-only.
SMW1000 CPU vendor ID: (always 0x002A)
SMB1002 to SMB1021 CPU order ID (MLFB): ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMB1022 to SMB1037 CPU serial number: ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMW1038 CPU hardware version: Represents the hardware E-stand; range = 0x0001 to 0xFFFD
(0x0000, 0xFFFE, and 0xFFFF are reserved values)
SMD1040 CPU firmware version: Byte 0 is ASCII V; byte 1=functional version; byte 2=minor change
version; byte 3=bug fix version (range of bytes 1-3 = 0x00 to 0xFF)
SMW1044 CPU firmware version counter (range 0x0000 to 0x00FF)
SMW1046 Reserved: Always 0x0000
SMW1048 CPU device type: Always 0x0001
D.27 SMB1050-SMB1099: SB (signal board) hardware/firmware ID

This signal board information is written to special memory after a power-up or warm restart
SMW1050 Signal board vendor ID: Set to 0x002A if a Siemens SB is present and 0x0000 if no SB is pre-
sent
SMB1052 to SMB1071 Signal board order ID (MLFB): ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMB1072 to SMB1087 Signal board serial number: ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMW1088 Signal board hardware version: Represents the hardware E-stand; range=0x0001 to 0xFFFD,
SMD1090 Signal board firmware version; Byte 0 is ASCII V; byte 1=functional version; byte 2=minor
change version; byte 3=bug fix version (range of bytes 1-3 = 0x00 to 0xFF)
SMW1094 Signal board firmware version counter (range 0x0000 to 0x00FF)
SMW1096 Reserved, always 0x0000
SMW1098 Signal board device type: I/O=0x0003, communications=0x0004, all other values reserved
S7-200 SMART
D.28 SMB1100-SMB1399: EM (expansion module) hardware/firmware ID

Expansion module information is written to special memory after a power-up or warm restart
SM addresses for slot 0 Description

SMW1100 EM bus Slot 0 vendor ID: Set to 0x002A if a Siemens EM is present and 0x0000 if no EM is
present
SMB1102 to SMB1121 EM bus Slot 0 order ID (MLFB): ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMB1122 to SMB1137 EM bus slot 0 serial number: ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMW1138 EM bus slot 0 hardware version: represents the hardware E-stand; range = 0x0001 to 0xFFFD
SMD1140 EM bus slot 0 firmware version: Byte 0 is ASCII V, byte 1=functional version, byte 2= minor
change version, byte 3=bug fix version (range of bytes 1-3 = 0x00 to 0xFF)
SMW1144 EM bus slot 0 firmware version counter (range 0x0000 to 0x00FF)
SMW1148 EM bus slot 0 device type: I/O=0x0003, communications=0x0004, all other values reserved

SMW1150 EM bus slot 1 vendor ID: Set to 0x002A if a Siemens EM is present and 0x0000 if no EM is
present
SMB1152 to SMB1171 EM bus slot 1 order ID (MLFB): ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMB1172 to SMB1187 EM bus slot 1: serial number: ASCII characters, left-justified in field, padded with spaces
SMW1188 EM bus slot 1 hardware version: Represents the hardware E-stand; range=0x0001 to 0xFFFD
SMD1190 EM bus slot 1 firmware version: Byte 0 is ASCII V; byte 1=functional version, byte 2=minor

present
SMW1238 EM bus slot 2 hardware version: Represents the hardware E-stand; range = 0x0001 to
0xFFFD (0x0000, 0xFFFE, and 0xFFFF are reserved values)
change version, byte 3 = bug fix version (range of bytes 1-3=0x00 to 0xFF)
S7-200 SMART

present

present

present
S7-200 SMART
D.29 SMB1400-SMB1699: EM (expansion module) module-specific data

The CPU reserves an additional 50 bytes for each expansion module for read-only module-
specific data:
SM addresses Description
SMB1400 to SMB1449 EM bus Slot 0: Module specific information
S7-200 SMART
S7-200 SMART
References E
E.1 Often-used special memory bits
The complete list of pre-defined special memory program symbols is available to your
project, in the System Symbol table.
Table E- 1 Often-used special memory bits
SM address System symbol name Description

SM0.0 Always_On Always ON
SM0.1 First_Scan_On ON for the first scan cycle only
SM0.2 Retentive_Lost ON for one scan cycle if retentive data is lost
SM0.3 RUN_Power_Up ON for 1 scan cycle when RUN mode is entered from a power-up condition
SM0.4 Clock_60s Clock pulse that is ON for 30 s, OFF for 30 s, for a cycle time of 1 min.
SM0.5 Clock_1s Clock pulse that is ON for 0.5 s, OFF for 0.5 s, for a cycle time of 1 s.
SM0.6 Clock_Scan Scan cycle clock which is ON for one scan cycle and OFF for the next scan cycle
SM0.7 RTC_Lost This bit is turned ON for one scan cycle, if the time on the real time clock device
was reset or lost at power-up (resulting in system time lost). This bit can be used
as either an error memory bit, or to invoke a special start-up sequence.
SM1.0 Result_0 Set to 1 by the execution of certain instructions when the result of the operation
=0
SM1.1 Overflow_Illegal Set to 1 by the execution of certain instructions on overflow or illegal numeric
value
SM1.2 Neg_Result Set to 1 when a math operation produces a negative result
SM1.3 Divide_By_0 Set to 1 when an attempt is made to divide by zero
SM1.4 Table_Overflow Set to 1 when the Add to Table instruction attempts to overfill the table
SM1.5 Table_Empty Set to 1 when a LIFO or FIFO instruction attempts to read from an empty table
SM1.6 Not_BCD Set to 1 when an attempt is made to convert a non-BCD value to a binary value
SM1.7 Not_Hex Set to 1 when an ASCII value cannot be converted to a valid hexadecimal value
S7-200 SMART
References
E.2 Interrupt events in priority order
E.2 Interrupt events in priority order
Table E- 2 Priority order for interrupt events

Communications 8 Port 0 Receive character
Highest Priority 9 Port 0 Transmit complete
25 Port 1 Receive character
26 Port 1 Transmit complete
Discrete 19 PTO0 complete interrupt
Medium Priority 20 PTO1 complete interrupt
34 PTO2 complete interrupt
0 I0.0 Rising edge
2 I0.1 Rising edge
4 I0.2 Rising edge
6 I0.3 Rising edge
1 I0.0 Falling edge
3 I0.1 Falling edge
5 I0.2 Falling edge
7 I0.3 Falling edge
Timed 10 Timed interrupt 0 SMB34
Lowest Priority 11 Timed interrupt 1 SMB35
S7-200 SMART
References
E.3 High-speed counter summary
E.3 High-speed counter summary
Table E- 3 S7-200 SMART HSC input assignments and capabilities
Clock A Dir / Clock B Reset Single phase max. Dual phase / AB quadrature phase max.
clock/input rate clock/input rate
HSC0 I0.0 I0.1 I0.4 200 kHz (S model CPUs)1 100 kHz (S model CPUs)
100 kHz (C model CPUs) 2 (Maximum 1x count rate = 100 kHz)
(Maximum 4x count rate = 400 kHz)
HSC2 I0.2 I0.3 I0.5 200 kHz (S model CPUs) 100 kHz (S model CPUs)
100 kHz (C model CPUs) (Maximum 1x count rate = 100 kHz)
1 S model CPUs: SR20/ST20, SR30/ST30, SR40/ST40, SR60/ST60
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
E.4 Instructions
Instructions
The STL instruction names and descriptions are shown in the tables below. See the chapter
on program instructions (Page 149) for the LAD and FBD instructions.
Boolean instructions
STL Description
LD bit Load
LDI bit Load Immediate
LDN bit Load Not
LDNI bit Load Not Immediate
A bit AND
AI bit AND Immediate
AN bit AND Not
ANI bit AND Not Immediate
O bit OR
OI bit OR Immediate
ON bit OR Not
ONI bit OR Not Immediate
LDBx IN1, IN2 Load result of Byte Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>I) IN2
ABx IN1, IN2 AND result of Byte Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
OBx IN1, IN2 OR result of Byte Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
LDWx IN1, IN2 Load result of Word Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
AWx IN1, IN2 AND result of Word Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>)I N2
OWxIN1, IN2 OR result of Word Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
LDDx IN1, IN2 Load result of DWord Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
ADx IN1, IN2 AND result of DWord Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>)IN2
ODx IN1, IN2 OR result of DWord Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
LDRx IN1, IN2 Load result of Real Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
ARx IN1, IN2 AND result of Real Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
Boolean instructions
STL Description
ORx IN1, IN2 OR result of Real Compare
IN1 (x:<, <=,=, >=, >, <>) IN2
NOT Stack Negation
EU Detection of Rising Edge
ED Detection of Falling Edge
= bit Assign Value
=I bit Assign Value Immediate
S bit, N Set bit Range
R bit, N Reset bit Range
SI bit, N Set bit Range Immediate
RI bit, N Reset bit Range Immediate
Not available in STL SR (Set dominate bistable)
RS (Reset dominate bistable)
LDSx IN1, IN2 Load result of String Compare
IN1 (x: =, <>) IN2
ASx IN1, IN2 AND result of String Compare
IN1 (x: =, <>) IN2
OSx IN1, IN2 OR result of String Compare
IN1 (x: =, <>) IN2
ALD AND Load
OLD OR Load
LPS Logic Push (stack control)
LRD Logic Read (stack control)
LPP Logic Pop (stack control)
LDS n Load Stack (stack control), n= 0 to 8
AENO AND ENO
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
Math, increment, and decrement instructions

STL Description
+I IN1, OUT Add Integer, Double Integer or Real
+D IN1, OUT IN1+OUT=OUT
+R IN1, OUT
-I IN1, OUT Subtract Integer, Double Integer, or Real
-D IN1, OUT OUT-IN1=OUT
-R IN1, OUT
MUL IN1, OUT Multiply Integer (16*16->32)
*I IN1, OUT Multiply Integer, Double Integer, or Real
*D IN1, OUT IN1 * OUT = OUT
*R IN1, IN2
DIV IN1, OUT Divide Integer (16/16->32)
/I IN1, OUT Divide Integer, Double Integer, or Real
/D,IN1, OUT OUT / IN1 = OUT
/R IN1, OUT
SQRT IN, OUT Square Root
LN IN, OUT Natural Logarithm
EXP IN, OUT Natural Exponential
SIN IN, OUT Sine
COS IN, OUT Cosine
TAN IN, OUT Tangent
INCB OUT Increment Byte, Word or DWord
INCW OUT
INCD OUT
DECB OUT Decrement Byte, Word, or DWord
DECW OUT
DECD OUT
PID TBL, LOOP PID Loop
Timer and counter instructions

STL Description
TON Txxx, PT On-Delay Timer
TOF Txxx, PT Off-Delay Timer
TONR Txxx, PT Retentive On-Delay Timer
BITIM OUT Beginning Interval Timer
CITIM IN, OUT Calculate Interval Timer
CTU Cxxx, PV Count Up
CTD Cxxx, PV Count Down
CTUD Cxxx, PV Count Up/Down
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
High-speed instructions
STL Description
HDEF HSC, MODE Define High-Speed Counter mode
HSC n Activate High-Speed Counter
PLS n Pulse Output:
Real time clock instructions

STL Description
TODR T Read Time of Day clock
TODW T Write Time of Day clock
TODRX T Read Real Time Clock Extended
TODWX T Set Real Time Clock Extended
Program control instructions

STL Description
END Conditional End of Program
STOP Transition to STOP Mode
WDR WatchDog Reset (500 ms)
JMP N Jump to defined Label
LBL N Define a Label
CALL N [N1,...] Call a Subroutine [N1, ... up to 16 optional parameters]
CRET Conditional Return from SBR
FOR INDX,INIT,FINAL For/Next Loop
NEXT
LSCR N Load, Transition, Conditional End, and End Sequence Control Relay segment
SCRT N
CSCRE
SCRE
GERR ECODE Get Error code
Move, Shift, and Rotate instructions

STL Description
MOVB IN, OUT Move Byte, Word, DWord, Real
MOVW IN, OUT
MOVD IN, OUT
MOVR IN, OUT
BIR IN, OUT Move Byte Immediate Read
BIW IN, OUT Move Byte Immediate Write
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
Move, Shift, and Rotate instructions

STL Description
BMB IN, OUT, N Block Move Byte, Word, DWord
BMW IN, OUT, N
BMD IN, OUT, N
SWAP IN Swap Bytes
SHRB DATA, S_BIT, N Shift Register Bit
SRB OUT, N Shift Right Byte, Word, DWord
SRW OUT, N
SRD OUT, N
SLB OUT, N Shift Left Byte, Word, DWord
SLW OUT, N
SLD OUT, N
RRB OUT, N Rotate Right Byte, Word, DWord
RRW OUT, N
RRD OUT, N
RLB OUT, N Rotate Left Byte, Word, DWord
RLW OUT, N
RLD OUT, N
Logical instructions
STL Description
ANDB IN1, OUT Logical AND of Byte, Word, and DWord
ANDW IN1, OUT
ANDD IN1, OUT
ORB IN1, OUT Logical OR of Byte, Word, and DWord
ORW IN1, OUT
ORD IN1, OUT
XORB IN1, OUT Logical XOR of Byte, Word, and DWord
XORW IN1, OUT
XORD IN1, OUT
INVB OUT Invert Byte, Word and DWord
INVW OUT (1's complement)
INVD OUT
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
String instructions
STL Description
SLEN IN, OUT String Length
SCAT N, OUT Concatenate String
SCPY IN, OUT Copy String
SSCPY IN, INDX, N, OUT Copy Substring from String
CFND IN1, IN2, OUT Find First Character within String
SFND IN1, IN2, OUT Find String within String
Table, Find, and Conversion instructions

STL Description
ATT DATA, TBL Add data to table
LIFO TBL, DATA Get data from table
FIFO TBL, DATA
FND= TBL, PTN, INDX Find data value in table that matches comparison
FND<> TBL, PTN, INDX
FND< TBL, PTN, INDX
FND> TBL, PTN, INDX
FILL IN, OUT, N Fill memory space with pattern
BCDI OUT Convert BCD to Integer
IBCD OUT Convert Integer to BCD
BTI IN, OUT Convert Byte to Integer
ITB IN, OUT Convert Integer to Byte
ITD IN, OUT Convert Integer to Double Integer
DTI IN, OUT Convert Double Integer to Integer
DTR IN, OUT Convert DWord to Real
TRUNC IN, OUT Convert Real to Double Integer
ROUND IN, OUT Convert Real to Double Integer
ATH IN, OUT, LEN Convert ASCII to Hex
HTA IN, OUT, LEN Convert Hex to ASCII
ITA IN, OUT, FMT Convert Integer to ASCII
DTA IN, OUT, FM Convert Double Integer to ASCII
RTA IN, OUT, FM Convert Real to ASCII
DECO IN, OUT Decode
ENCO IN, OUT Encode
SEG IN, OUT Generate 7-segment pattern
ITS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Integer to String
DTS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Double Integer to String
RTS IN, FMT, OUT Convert Real to String
STI STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Integer
STD STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Double Integer
STR STR, INDX, OUT Convert Substring to Real
S7-200 SMART
References
E.4 Instructions
Interrupt instructions
STL Description
CRETI Conditional Return from Interrupt
ENI Enable Interrupts
DISI Disable Interrupts
ATCH INT, EVNT Attach Interrupt routine to event
DTCH EVNT Detach event
CEVENT EVNT Clear all interrupt events of type EVNT
Communications instructions
STL LAD/FBD
GET Reads remote station data
PUT Writes data to a remote station
XMT TBL, PORT Freeport transmission
RCV TBL, PORT Freeport receive message
GIP ADDR, MASK, GATE Get CPU address, subnet mask, and gateway
SIP ADDR, MASK, GATE Set CPU address, subnet mask, and gateway
GPA ADDR, PORT Get Port Address

SPA ADDR, PORT Set Port Address
S7-200 SMART
References
E.5 Memory ranges and features
Description CPU SR20, CPU SR30, CPU SR40, CPU CR40, CPU SR60,
CPU ST20 CPU ST30 CPU ST40 CPU CR60 CPU ST60
User program size 12 Kbytes 18 Kbytes 24 Kbytes 12 Kbytes 30 Kbytes
User data size 8 Kbytes 12 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 8 Kbytes 20 Kbytes
Process image input register I0.0 to I31.7 I0.0 to I31.7 I0.0 to I31.7 I0.0 to I31.7 I0.0 to I31.7
Process image output register Q0.0 to Q31.7 Q0.0 to Q31.7 Q0.0 to Q31.7 Q0.0 to Q31.7 Q0.0 to Q31.7
Analog inputs (read only) AIW0 to AIW110 AIQ0 to AIW110 AIW0 to -- AIW0 to
AIW110 AIW110
Analog outputs (write only) AQW0 to AQW0 to AQW0 to --- AQW0 to
AQW110 AQW110 AQW110 AQW110
Variable memory (V) VB0 to VB8191 VB0 to VB12287 VB0 to VB0 to VB8191 VB0 to
VB16383 VB20479
Local memory (L)1 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63 LB0 to LB63
Bit memory (M) M0.0 to M31.7 M0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7 M0.0 to M31.7
Special Memory Total SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to
(SM) SM2047.7 SM2047.7 SM2047.7 SM2047.7 SM2047.7
Read SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to SM0.0 to
only SM29.7 SM29.7 SM29.7 SM29.7 SM29.7
SMB480.0 to SMB480.0 to SMB480.0 to SMB480.0 to SMB480.0 to
SM515.7 SM515.7 SM515.7 SM515.7 SM515.7
SM1000.0 to SM1000.0 to SM1000.0 to SM1000.0 to SM1000.0 to
SM1699.7 SM1699.7 SM1699.7 SM1699.7 SM1699.7
Timers 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to T255) 256 (T0 to 256 (T0 to 256 (T0 to
T255) T255) T255)
Retentive on-delay 1 ms T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64 T0, T64
10 ms T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and T1 to T4, and
T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68 T65 to T68
On/Off delay 1 ms T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96 T32, T96
Counters 256 (C0 to 256 (C0 to 256 (C0 to 256 (C0 to 256 (C0 to
C255) C255) C255) C255) C255)
High-speed counters HC0 to HC3 HC0 to HC3 HC0 to HC3 HC0 to HC3 HC0 to HC3
Sequential control relays (S) S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7 S0.0 to S31.7
Accumulator registers AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3 AC0 to AC3
Jumps/Labels 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
Call/Subroutine 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127
Interrupt routines 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127
Positive/negative transitions 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
S7-200 SMART
References
Description CPU SR20, CPU SR30, CPU SR40, CPU CR40, CPU SR60,
CPU ST20 CPU ST30 CPU ST40 CPU CR60 CPU ST60
PID loops 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7
Ports Ethernet pro- Ethernet pro- Ethernet pro- Ethernet pro- Ethernet pro-
gramming port, gramming port, gramming port, gramming port, gramming port,
Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated
RS485 port RS485 port (Port RS485 port RS485 port RS485 port
(Port 0), 0), (Port 0), (Port 0) (Port 0),
CM01 Signal CM01 Signal CM01 Signal CM01 Signal
Board (SB) Board (SB) Board (SB) Board (SB)
RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485
port (Port 1) port (Port 1) port (Port 1) port (Port 1)
1 LB60 to LB63 are reserved by STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART when programming in LAD or FBD.
S7-200 SMART
Ordering information F
F.1 CPU modules
CPU models Article number

CPU SR20, AC/DC/Relay 6ES7 288-1SR20-0AA0
CPU ST20, DC/DC/DC 6ES7 288-1ST20-0AA0
CPU CR40, AC/DC/Relay 6ES7 288-1CR40-0AA0
CPU CR60, AC/DC/Relay 6ES7 288-1CR60-0AA0
F.2 Expansion modules (EMs) and signal boards (SBs)
Expansion modules and signal boards Article number

EM Digital 8 x Inputs (EM DE08) 6ES7 288-2DE08-0AA0
EM Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT08) 6ES7 288-2DT08-0AA0
EM Digital 8 x Outputs Relay (EM DR08) 6ES7 288-2DR08-0AA0
EM Digital 8 x Inputs / Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT16) 6ES7 288-2DT16-0AA0
EM Digital 8 x Inputs/ Relay 8 x Outputs (EM DR16) 6ES7 288-2DR16-0AA0
EM Digital 16 x Inputs / Digital 16 x Outputs (EM DT32) 6ES7 288-2DT32-0AA0
EM Digital 16 x Inputs / Relay 16 x Outputs (EM DR32) 6ES7 288-2DR32-0AA0
EM Analog 4 x Inputs (EM AE04) 6ES7 288-3AE04-0AA0
EM Analog 2 x Outputs (EM AQ02) 6ES7 288-3AQ02-0AA0
EM Analog 4 x Outputs (EM AQ04) 6ES7 288-3AQ04-0AA0
EM Analog 8 x Inputs (EM AE08) 6ES7 288-3AE08-0AA0
EM Analog 2 x Inputs / Analog 1 x Outputs (EM AM03) 6ES7 288-3AM03-0AA0
EM Analog 4 x Inputs / Analog 2 x Outputs (EM AM06) 6ES7 288-3AM06-0AA0
EM RTD 2 x 16 bit (EM AR02) 6ES7 288-3AR02-0AA0
EM RTD 4 x 16 bit (EM AR04) 6ES7 288-3AR04-0AA0
EM TC 4 x 16 bit (EM AT04) 6ES7 288-3AT04-0AA0
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP SMART (EM DP01) 6ES7 288-7PD01-0AA0
S7-200 SMART
Ordering information
F.3 Programming software
Expansion modules and signal boards Article number

SB Digital 2 x Inputs / Digital 2 x Outputs (SB DT04) 6ES7 288-5DT04-0AA0
SB Analog 1 x Output (SB AQ01) 6ES7 288-5AQ01-0AA0
SB Analog 1 x Input (SB AE01) 6ES7 288-5AE01-0AA0
SB RS485/RS232 (SB CM01) 6ES7 288-5CM01-0AA0
SB Battery (SB BA01) 6ES7 288-5BA01-0AA0
F.3 Programming software
Programming software Article number

STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART Individual License (CD-ROM) 6ES7 288-8SW01-0AA0
Drives V90 (PC tools) software Can be downloaded from
the Siemens Services and
Support website
F.4 Communication
Communications cards Article number

CP 5411: Short AT ISA 6GK 1 541-1AA00
CP 5512: PCMCIA Type II 6GK 1 551-2AA00
CP 5611: PCI card (version 3.0 or greater) 6GK 1 561-1AA00
F.5 Spare parts and other hardware
Cables, network connectors, repeaters, and end retainers Article number

MPI Cable 6ES7901-0BF00-0AA0
PROFIBUS Network Cable 6XV1 830-0AH10
Network Bus Connector with Programming Port Connector, Vertical Cable Outlet 6ES7972-0BB11-0XA0
Network Bus Connector (no programming port connector), Vertical Cable Outlet 6ES7972-0BA11-0XA0
RS485 Bus Connector with 35 Cable Outlet (no programming port connector) 6ES7972-0BA40-0XA0
RS485 Bus Connector with 35 Cable Outlet (with programming port connector) 6ES7972-0BB40-0XA0
RS485 IP 20 Repeater, Isolated 6ES7972-0AA00-0XA0
TD/CPU Connecting Cable 6ES7901-3EB10-0XA0
End Retainer Thermoplast, 10 MM 8WA 1808
End Retainer, Steel 8WA 1805
S7-200 SMART
F.5 Spare parts and other hardware
Table F- 1 Terminal block spare kits
If you have Use this terminal block spare kit (4/pk)

S7-200 SMART module (article number) Terminal block article number Terminal block description
CPU SR20, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7288-1SR20-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AH30-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AH40-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated, keyed
6ES7292-1AM30-0XA0 12 pin, tin-plated
CPU ST20, DC/DC/DC (6ES7288-1ST20-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AH30-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated
CPU SR30, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7288-1SR30-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AH30-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AH40-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated, keyed
6ES7292-1AP30-0XA0 14 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AK30-0XA0 10 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AP30-0XA0 14 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AK30-0XA0 10 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
6ES7 292-1AL30-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated
CPU SR40, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7288-1SR40-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AV40-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated, keyed
CPU CR40, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7288-1CR40-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AH30-0XA0 8 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AL30-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AL40-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated, keyed
CPU ST60, DC/DC/DC (6ES7288-1ST60-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
CPU SR60, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7288-1SR60-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
CPU CR60, AC/DC/Relay (6ES7 288-1CR60-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AV30-0XA0 20 pin, tin-plated
6ES7292-1AM30-0XA 12 pin, tin-plated 0
EM Digital 8 x Inputs (EM DE08) (6ES7288-2DE08- 6ES7292-1AG30-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated
0AA0)
EM Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT08) (6ES7288-2DT08- 6ES7292-1AG30-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated
0AA0)
EM Digital 8 x Outputs Relay (EM DR08) (6ES7288- 6ES7292-1AG30-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated
2DR08-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AG40-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated, keyed-right
EM Digital 8 x Inputs / Digital 8 x Outputs (EM DT16) 6ES7292-1AG30-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated
(6ES7288-2DT16-0AA0)
S7-200 SMART
F.6 Human Machine Interface devices
If you have Use this terminal block spare kit (4/pk)

S7-200 SMART module (article number) Terminal block article number Terminal block description
EM Digital 8 x Inputs/ Relay 8 x Outputs (EM DR16) 6ES7292-1AG30-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated
(6ES7288-2DR16-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AG40-0XA0 7 pin, tin-plated, keyed-right
EM Digital 16 x Inputs / Digital 16 x Outputs (EM DT32) 6ES7292-1AL30-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated
(6ES7288-2DT32-0AA0)
EM Digital 16 x Inputs / Relay 16 x Outputs (EM DR32) 6ES7292-1AL30-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated
(6ES7288-2DR32-0AA0) 6ES7292-1AL40-0XA0 11 pin, tin-plated, keyed
EM Analog 4 x Inputs (EM AE04) (6ES7288-3AE04- 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
0AA0)
EM Analog 8 x Inputs (EM AE08) (6ES7288-3AE08- 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
0AA0)
EM Analog 2 x Outputs (EM AQ02) (6ES7288-3AQ02- 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
0AA0)
EM Analog 4 x Outputs (EM AQ04) (6ES7288-3AQ04- 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
0AA0)
EM Analog 2 x Inputs / Analog 1 x Outputs (EM AM03) 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
(6ES7288-3AM03-0AA0)
EM Analog 4 x Inputs / Analog 2 x Outputs (EM AM06) 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
(6ES7288-3AM06-0AA0)
EM RTD 2 x 16 bit (EM AR02) (6ES7288-3AR02-0AA0) 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
EM RTD 4 x 16 bit (EM AR04) (6ES7288-3AR04-0AA0) 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
EM TC 4 x 16 bit (EM AT04) (6ES7288-3AT04-0AA0) 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
EM Profibus DP SMART (EM DP01) (6ES7288-7DP01- 6ES7292-1BG30-0XA0 7 pin, gold-plated
0AA0)
F.6 Human Machine Interface devices
Human Machine Interface device Article number

SMART LINE HMIs
SMART LINE 700 IE 6AV6648-0BC11-3AX0
SMART LINE 1000 IE 6AV6648-0BE11-3AX0
Micro HMIs
TD 400C TEXT DISPLAY, 4 LINES1 6AV6640-0AA00-0AX1
TD400C Blank faceplate material, A4 size (10 sheets/package) 6AV6671-0AP00-0AX0
1:Includes one blank faceplate overlay for customization. For additional blank faceplate
overlays, order the blank faceplate material for your TD device
S7-200 SMART
Index
* >
*D (STL-Multiply double integer), 259 >=B, 192
*I (STL-Multiply integer), 259 >=R, 192
*R (STL-Multiply real), 259 >=W, 192
>B, 192
>R, 192
. >W, 192
.mwp files, 90
.smart files, 90
A
A (STL-AND), 149
/ AB< (STL-AND compare byte less than), 192
AB<= (STL-AND compare byte less than or equal), 192
/D (STL-Divide double integer), 259
AB<> (STL-AND compare byte not equal), 192
/I (STL-Divide integer), 259
AB= (STL-AND compare byte equal), 192
/R (STL-Divide real), 259
AB> (STL-AND compare byte greater than), 192
AB>= (STL-AND compare byte greater than or
equal), 192
+
AC inductive loads, 52
+D (STL-Add double integer), 259 Access rights
+I (STL-Add integer), 259 CPU security, 124
+R (STL-Add real), 259 password privilege levels, 124
Active/Passive communication partners, 358
AD< (STL-AND compare double word less than), 192
< AD<= (STL-AND compare double word less than or
equal), 192
<=B, 192
AD<> (STL-AND compare double word not equal), 192
<=R, 192
AD= (STL-AND compare double word equal), 192
<=W, 192
AD> (STL-AND compare double word greater
<>B, 192
than), 192
<>R, 192
AD>= (STL-AND compare double word greater than or
<>S, 196
equal), 192
<>W, 192
ADD_DI, 259
<B, 192
ADD_I, 259
<R, 192
ADD_R, 259
<W, 192
Addressing
accumulators, 64
analog inputs, 67
=
analog outputs, 67
= (STL-output), 158 counter memory, 63
==B, 192 creating pointers and using indirect address, 70
==R, 192 example of pointer offset to access data, 74
==S, 196 example of pointer to access data in a table, 73
==W, 192 flag memory, 62
=I (STL-output immediate), 158 high-speed counters, 64
S7-200 SMART
Index
local and expansion I/O, 69 ATCH, 282

local memory, 66 ATH, 202
memory areas, 61 ATT, 326
process image output register, 61 Auto-tuning PID, 467
sequence control relay (SCR) memory, 68 AW< (STL-AND compare word less than), 192
special memory (SM) bits, 65 AW<= (STL-AND compare word less than or
symbol table, 100 equal), 192
timer memory, 62 AW<> (STL-AND compare word not equal), 192
variable memory, 62 AW= (STL-AND compare word equal), 192
AENO (STL stack-AND ENO bit) AW> (STL-AND compare word greater than), 192
instruction, 154 AW>= (STL-AND compare word greater than or
logic stack overview, 153 equal), 192
AI (STL-AND immediate), 151 Axis 0 motion control (SMB600-SMB649), 686
Air flow, 38 Axis of Motion
Alarms ACCEL_TIME, 486
analog input configuration, 131 AXISx_ABSPOS, 521
from system (SMW100-SMW114), 684 AXISx_CACHE, 519
ALD (STL stack-AND Load), 154 AXISx_CFG, 518
AN (STL-AND NOT), 149 AXISx_CTRL, 507
Analog I/O AXISx_DIS, 517
input representation (current), 624 AXISx_GOTO, 510
input representation (voltage), 624 AXISx_LDOFF, 514
output representation (current), 625 AXISx_LDPOS, 515
output representation (voltage), 625 AXISx_MAN, 509
step response times (SM), 623 AXISx_RDPOS, 520
Analog inputs AXISx_RSEEK, 513
analog type configuration, 129 AXISx_RUN, 512
rejection, 129 AXISx_SRATE, 516
smoothing, 129 configuring, 493
system block configuration, 129 configuring reference point and seek
Analog outputs parameters, 502
analog type configuration, 132 configuring the Backlash compensation, 501
states at RUN/ STOP transition, 132 configuring the input pin locations, 494
ANDB (STL-AND byte), 294 defining the motion profile, 504
ANDD (STL-AND dword), 294 displaying and controlling the operation of axes, 537
ANDW (STL-AND word), 294 displaying and modifying the configuration of
ANI (STL-AND NOT immediate), 151 axes, 542
AR< (STL-AND compare real less than), 192 displaying the profile configuration for the axes, 542
AR<= (STL-AND compare real less than or equal), 192 eliminating backlash, 564
AR<> (STL-AND compare real not equal), 192 entering acceleration time, 500
AR= (STL-AND compare real equal), 192 entering jerk time, 501
AR> (STL-AND compare real greater than), 192 entering jog parameters, 500
AR>= (STL-AND compare real greater than or entering maximum start and stop speed, 499
equal), 192 error codes, 544
Article numbers, 705, 705, 706, 708 mapping the I/O, 495
AS<> (STL-AND string compare not equal), 196 Motion control panel, 536
AS= (STL-AND string compare equal), 196 phasing, 497
ASCII array conversion instructions, 202 polarity, 498
Assigning programming, 492
global symbols, 100 RP Seek modes, 559
local variables, 107 SM locations, 556
variables (local), 104
S7-200 SMART
Index
subroutine guidelines, 507 C

subroutines, 506
CAL_ITIME, 344
CALL, 346
Card (memory), 82
B
CE approval, 565
B_I, 198 CFND (STL-Find character), 323
BA01 battery signal board, 144 Character error received from Freeport (SMB3), 669
Baud rate Charts
communications, 117 building, 460
setting, 396 creating, 460
switch selections:RS232/PPI Multi-Master opening, 460
cable, 409 CHR_FIND, 323
BCD_I, 198 CITIM (STL-Calculate interval time), 344
BCDI (STL-BCD to integer), 198 Clearance for airflow and cooling, 38
BGN_ITIME, 344 Cleared memory card, 147
Biasing and terminating Clearing PLC memory, 145
CM01 signal board, 405 Clock instructions
network cable, 403 READ_RTC, 165
Biasing PID loop, 268 READ_RTCX, 167
BIR (STL-byte immediate read), 299 SET_RTC, 165
Bit logic instructions SET_RTCX, 167
AENO (STL-AND ENO), 153 CLR_EVNT, 282
contacts, 149 CM01 signal board
contacts (Immediate), 151 biasing and terminating, 405
edge detectors, 157 connector pin assignments, 403
input examples, 162 Coils
NOP (No operation), 161 output, 158
NOT, 156 output (immediate), 158
output coils, 158 reset bits, 159
output examples, 163 reset bits immediate, 159
set and reset bits, 159 set bits, 159
set and reset dominant bistable, 160 set bits immediate, 159
STL logic stack instructions for inputs, 153 Cold junction compensation
STL logic stack operations, 154 thermocouple, 142
BITIM (STL-Begin interval timer), 344 Thermocouple, 629
BIW (STL-byte immediate write), 299 Communication drivers, 356
BLKMOV_B, 297 Communication ports, 355
BLKMOV_D, 297 connector pin assignments, 402
BLKMOV_W, 297 Freeport mode, 406
BMB (STL-block move byte), 297 system block configuration, 117
BMD (STL-block move double word), 297 Communications
BMW (STL- block move word), 297 article numbers for modules, 706
Bookmarks in programs, 453 choices, 395
BTI (STL-Byte to integer), 198 dialog, 363
Buffer consistency Ethernet, RS485, and RS232, 22, 353
PROFIBUS, 376 hardware connection, 27
Building status charts, 460 IP address, 363
Building your communication network, 400 locating MAC address on CPU, 370
Byte consistency network, 26
PROFIBUS, 376 number of connections (Ethernet), 354
number of connections (RS232), 354
number of connections (RS485), 354
S7-200 SMART
Index
point-to-point interface (PPI) protocol, 395 Counter instructions

restricting writes, 124 high-speed counters, 220
RS485 configuration, 395 high-speed counters (initialization examples), 238
STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART settings, 27 high-speed counters (programming examples), 226
Communications instructions standard counters, 217
receive, 178 CPU
transmit, 178 accessing data, 60
Communications protocol clearing memory, 145
PROFIBUS, 372 configuring communication to HMI, 371
Compare instructions connecting power, 26
compare character strings, 196 CR40 specifications, 584
compare number value, 192 CR40 wiring diagram, 590
Compatibility CR60, 593
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module, 649 CR60 wiring diagram, 599
Compiling programs dimensions, 18, 41
downloading, 75 DIN rail, 44
PLC non-fatal program errors, 657 Ethernet communication, 358
Configuration Ethernet port, 363
CPU, system block, 115 expansion modules supported, 20
dynamic IP information, 363 fatal errors, 661
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 375 features, 18
Ethernet, 363 installation, 42
IP address, 363 installation on a panel, 43
MAC address, 370 IP address, 363
profile table (Axis of Motion), 547 LEDs, 18
static IP information, 366 MAC address, 370
Configuration drawings, 85 memory card, 82
Connections non-fatal error memory locations, 660
number of connections (Ethernet), 354 number of communication connections, 354
number of connections (RS232), 354 number of PPI connections, 396
number of connections (RS485), 354 process image register, 57
types of communication, 22, 353 setting the type, 33
Connector, 48 SR20 specifications, 570
Contact information, 3 SR20 wiring diagram, 576
Contacts SR30 specifications, 577
negative edge detector, 157 SR40 specifications, 584
normally closed, 149 SR40 wiring diagram, 590
normally closed (immediate), 151 SR60 specifications, 593
normally open, 149 SR60 wiring diagram, 599
normally open (immediate), 151 ST20 wiring diagram, 576
NOT, 156 ST30 specifications, 577
positive edge detector, 157 ST30 wiring diagram, 582
Contamination level, 568 ST40 specifications, 584
Convert instructions ST40 wiring diagram, 590
ASCII array conversions, 202 ST60 specifications, 593
ASCII sub-string to number value, 212 ST60 wiring diagram, 599
encode and decode, 215 system block, 115
number value to string, 208 types of communication, 22, 353
standard conversion, 198 wiring guidelines, 51
Cooling, 38 CPU
COS (cosine), 264 SR30 wiring diagram, 582
CPU hardware/firmware ID (SMB1000-SMB1049), 688
S7-200 SMART
Index
CPU ID register (SMB6-SMB7), 671 DIV_I, 259

CPU ST20 DIV_R, 259
specifications, 570 Downloading
CRET (STL-Conditional return from subroutine), 346 programs, 75
Cross reference, 454 sample program, 35
CTD (count down), 217 DP device
CTU (count up), 217 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 374
CTUD (count up/down), 217 Drive communication
Customer support, 3 calculating time requirement, 415
Drives, 490, 521, 706
DTA, 202
D DTCH, 282
DTI (STL-Double integer to integer), 198
-D (STL-Subtract double integer), 259
DTR (STL-Double integer to real), 198
Data
DTS (STL-Double integer to string), 208
receiving, 181
Dynamic IP information, 363
retention, 122
Data block (DB), 88
Data consistency
E
PROFIBUS, 376
Data log ED (STL-Edge Down), 157
status (SMB480-SMB515), 685 Edge detectors, 157
DC inductive loads, 52 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 566
Debugging and monitoring Element usage, 454
forcing values, 462 EM (expansion module) hardware/firmware ID
program editor status, 456 (SMB1100-SMB1299), 689
DEC_B, 266 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module
DEC_DW, 266 additional configuration features, 387
DEC_W, 266 configuration options, 377
DECB (STL-Decrement byte), 266 data exchange mode, 384
DECD (STL-Decrement double word), 266 DP protocol, 373
DECO, 215 GSD device database file, 388
DECW (STL-Decrement word), 266 on PROFIBUS network, 374
Default gateway IP address, 362 status LEDs, 650
Defining wiring diagram, 651
local variables, 107 ENCO, 215
Device configuration of CPU and modules, 115 END, 312
DI_I, 198 ENI, 282
DI_R, 198 Environmental
DI_S, 208 industrial environments, 566
Differential term, PID algorithm, 276 operating conditions, 567
Digital input filter time, 119 transport and storage conditions, 567
Digital input filters, 120 Errors
Digital inputs, 119 Axis of Motion, 544
Digital outputs, 121 character error received from Freeport
Dimensions communication (SMB3), 669
CPU, 18 compile and run-time errors (PLC program), 657
mounting, 41 data retention, 122
DIN rail, 42, 44 fatal (PLC), 661
DISI, 282 fatal error effect on run-time execution, 111
Displaying status, 456 GET_TABLE and PUT_TABLE instructions, 172
DIV, 262 I/O error status, 670
DIV_DI, 259
S7-200 SMART
Index
I/O module ID and error registers (SMB8- tables, 333

SMB19), 672 Using the AXISx_ABSPOS subroutine to read the
memory locations (PLC non-fatal errors), 660 absolute position from a SINAMICS V90 servo
Modbus master execution, 442 drive, 523
Modbus slave execution, 448 Executing
Motion instruction, 545 program, 58
non-fatal error effect on run-time execution, 110 single or multiple scans, 464
PID auto-tune, 475 EXP (natural exponential), 264
PLC error handling, 109 Expansion and local I/O addressing, 69
PWMx_RUN subroutine, 484 Expansion bus - communication errors (SMW98), 683
signal board ID and error registers (SMB28- Expansion module (EM)
SMB29), 673 EM AE04 specifications, 613
timestamp mismatch (PC/PLC program EM AE04 wiring diagram, 615
difference), 663 EM AM06 specifications, 619
Ethernet EM AM06 wiring diagram, 622
configuring communication between CPU and HMI EM AQ02 specifications, 616
device, 371 EM AQ02, wiring diagram, 618
GET, 170 EM AR02 (RTD) specifications, 632
IP address, 362 EM AR02 (RTD) wiring diagram, 636
MAC address, 370 EM AT04 specifications, 626
networks, 357 EM DE08 specifications, 603
number of communication connections, 354 EM DE08 wiring diagram, 604
TCP/IP protocol, 357 EM DR08 specifications, 605
types of communication, 22, 353 EM DR08 wiring diagram, 606
Ethernet network EM DR16 specifications, 607
configuring the IP address for a CPU, 363 EM DR16 wiring diagram, 610
searching for CPU, 369 EM DR32 specifications, 607
EU STL-Edge Up), 157 EM DR32 wiring diagram, 611
Events, interrupts, 284 EM DT08 specifications, 605
Examples EM DT08 wiring diagram, 606
Axis of Motion AXISx_CTRL, AXISx_RUN, EM DT16 specifications, 607
AXISx_SEEK, and AXISx_MAN subroutines EM DT16 wiring diagram, 610
application, 531 EM DT32 specifications, 607
Axis of Motion simple relative move (cut-to-length EM DT32 wiring diagram, 611
application), 529 installing and removing, 46
bit logic input, 162 wiring diagram, 626
bit logic output, 163 Expansion module (SB)
configuring the PROFIBUS DP EM DP01 I/O, 379 SB AE01 specifications, 640
conversion instructions, 200 Expansion module EM)
count up/down counter instruction, 219 EM Q04, wiring diagram, 618
GET and PUT instructions, 176 expansion modules
installing the PROFIBUS DP EM DP01 GSD EM DE08, 603
file, 378 Expansion modules, 20, 670
Modbus Slave protocol, programming, 447 dimensions, 41
PROFIBUS DP communications to a CPU, 392 module error status (SMB5), 670
Shift register bit (SHRB) instruction, 319 module ID and error registers (SMB8-SMB19), 672
subroutine for sampling the value of an analog Expansion modules (EM)
input, 89 analog input representation (current), 624
Table Find (TBL_FIND) instruction, 332 analog input representation (voltage), 624
analog output representation (current), 625
analog output representation (voltage), 625
S7-200 SMART
Index
F Grounding, 50
GSD file
Factory defaults memory card, 147
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module, 388
Fatal error effect on run-time execution, 111
Guidelines
Fatal errors (PLC), 661
grounding and circuit, 49
FBD editor, 96
installation on a panel, 43
Features
installation procedures, 42
CPU, 18
expansion modules supported, 20
FIFO, 328
H
File menu
Download, 75 Hardware troubleshooting, 465
Upload, 77 HDEF (high-speed counter definition), 220
FILL (STL-table fill), 330 Heat, high voltage, and electrical noise, 37
FILL_N, 330 High-speed counter registers, 675
Filter time, 119 High-speed counters, 226
Filters, digital input configuration, 120 High-vibration environment, 44
First scan flag (SMB0), 667 HMI
First scan, executing, 464 configuring Ethernet communication, 371
Flag memory, 62 devices, 405
Floating point values, 278 general guidelines for networks, 405
FND=, <>, <, > (STL-table find), 331 multi-master and multi-slave PPI networks, 399
FOR, 300 single-master PPI networks, 399
Force supported devices, 21, 355
writing and forcing outputs in STOP mode, 463 Hotline, 3
Forced value indicator (SMB4), 670 HSC (high-speed counter), 148, 220
Forgotten password, 124, 146 HSC0, HSC1, and HSC2 high-speed counter registers
Freeport mode (SMB36-65, SMB136-145), 675
character interrupt control, 188 HTA, 202
enabling, 179
example, 408
Freeport character error (SMB3), 669 I
Freeport configuration (SMB30-port 0 and SMB130-
-I (STL-Subtract integer), 259
port 1), 674
I/O
Freeport receive character (SMB2), 669
analog input representation (current), 624
Freeport transmitter idle (SMB4), 670
analog input representation (voltage), 624
interrupts, 287
analog output representation (current), 625
SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194 receive
analog output representation (voltage), 625
message control, 681
step response times (SM), 623
Freeze outputs
I/O addressing, 69
analog output configuration, 132
I/O error status
digital output configuration, 121
PLC non-fatal error codes, 657
PLC non-fatal error SM flags, 660
SMB5, 670
G
I/O expansion bus - communication errors
General technical specifications, 565 (SMW98), 683
GERR (STL-Get non-fatal error code), 313 I/O Module ID and error registers (SMB8-SMB19), 672
GET, 170 I_B, 198
GET_ADDR, 190 I_BCD, 198
GET_ERROR, 313 I_DI, 198
GIP_ADDR, 191 I_S, 208
Global symbols, 100 IBCD (STL-Integer to BCD), 198
S7-200 SMART
Index
Illegal syntax loop control (PID), 268

symbol table, 100 PUT, 170
Immediate I/O read/writes, 57 quick reference guide, 696
Immediate instructions SET_ADDR, 190
LAD, FBD, and STL, 151 SIP_ADDR, 191
INC_B, 266 Insulation, 567
INC_DW, 266 Integral term, PID algorithm, 276
INC_W, 266 Interrupt routines, 58
INCB (STL-Increment byte), 266 elements of a user program, 88
INCD (STL-Increment double word), 266 Interrupts
INCW (STL-Increment word), 266 attach/detach, enable/disable, conditional return,
Indirect addressing and clear event instructions, 282
creating pointers and using indirect address, 70 event support by CPU model, 284
example of pointer offset to access data, 74 example programs, 288
example of pointer to access data in a table, 73 global interrupt enable state (SMB4), 670
symbol table, 102 interrupt queue overflow (SMB4), 670
Inductive loads, 52 overview, 284
Input filter time, 119 priority and queuing, 288
Input process image register, 57 programming guidelines, 285
Inputs time interval values for timed interrupts (SMB34-
edge detectors, 157 SMB35), 674
example bit logic, 162 types of interrupt events, 287
NOT contact, 156 INV_B, 293
physical and in program, 55 INV_DW, 293
pulse catch bits (system block), 120 INV_W, 293
reading, 57 INVB (STL-invert byte), 293
standard contacts, 149, 151 INVD (STL-invert double word), 293
STL logic stack, 153 INVW (STL-invert word), 293
Installation IP address, 362
clearance for airflow and cooling, 38 assigning, 359, 368
dimensions, 41 configuring, 363
DIN rail, 44 MAC address, 370
expansion module (EM), 46 IP router, 363
grounding, 50 Isolation, 50
grounding and circuit, 49 ITA, 202
guidelines, 37 ITB (STL-Integer to byte), 198
high-vibration environment, 44 ITD (STL-Integer to double integer), 198
inductive loads, 52 ITS (STL-Integer to string), 208
isolation, 50
lamp loads, 51
overview, 37, 42 J
panel, 43
JMP, 301
separate the devices from heat, high voltage, and
electrical noise, 37
signal board (SB), 47
L
terminal block connector, 48
Instruction execution status bits (SMB1), 668 L memory, 104
Instruction libraries, 411 LAD editor, 95
Instructions Lamp loads, 51
GET, 170 LBL, 301
GET_ADDR, 190 LD (STL stack-Load NOT immediate), 153
GIP_ADDR, 191 LD (STL stack-Load), 153
S7-200 SMART
Index
LD (STL-Load), 149 Logic stack

LDB< (STL-Load compare byte less than), 192 STL inputs, 153
LDB<= (STL-Load compare byte less than or STL stack operations, 154
equal), 192 Logic, control, 55
LDB<> (STL-Load compare byte not equal), 192 Logical operation instructions
LDB= (STL-Load compare byte equal), 192 AND, OR, XOR (byte, word, and dword), 294
LDB> (STL-Load compare byte greater than), 192 invert, 293
LDB>= (STL-Load compare byte greater than or Loop control (PID)
equal), 192 adjusting bias, 279
LDD< (STL-Load compare double word less than), 192 converting inputs, 278
LDD<= (STL-Load compare double word less than or converting outputs, 279
equal), 192 error conditions, 281
LDD<> (STL-Load compare double word not forward/reverse, 279
equal), 192 loop definition table, 468
LDD= (STL-Load compare double word equal), 192 modes, 280
LDD> (STL-Load compare double word greater Loop table, 281
than), 192 Lost password, 146
LDD>= (STL-Load compare double word greater than LPP (STL stack-Logic Pop), 154
or equal), 192 LPS (STL stack-Logic Push), 154
LDI (STL stack-Load immediate), 153 LRD (STL stack-Logic Read), 154
LDI (STL-Load NOT immediate), 151 LSCR (STL-Load SCR), 303
LDN (STL stack-Load NOT), 153
LDN (STL-Load NOT), 149
LDNI (STL-Load NOT immediate), 151 M
LDR< (STL-Load compare real less than), 192
MAC address, 370
LDR<= (STL-Load compare real less than or
Main program, 87
equal), 192
Math instructions
LDR<> (STL-Load compare real not equal), 192
add, subtract, multiply and divide, 259
LDR= (STL-Load compare real equal), 192
divide integer with remainder, 262
LDR> (STL-Load compare real greater than), 192
increment and decrement, 266
LDR>= (STL-Load compare real greater than or
multiply integers to double integer and divide
equal), 192
integer with remainder, 262
LDS (STL stack-Load), 154
numeric functions, 264
LDS<> (STL-Load string compare not equal), 196
MBS_MSG (send message from Modbus master), 438
LDS= (STL-Load string compare equal), 196
MBUS_CTRL (initialize Modbus master
LDW< (STL-Load compare word less than), 192
communication), 437
LDW<= (STL-Load compare word less than or
MBUS_INIT (initialize slave communication), 445
equal), 192
MBUS_SLAVE (slave response to master
LDW<> (STL-Load compare word not equal), 192
message), 446
LDW= (STL-Load compare word equal), 192
Memory, 660
LDW> (STL-Load compare word greater than), 192
addresses for non-fatal error indicators, 660
LDW>= (STL-Load compare word greater than or
clearing PLC, 145
equal), 192
retentive range configuration, 122
Library
Memory card
creating, 411
program transfer card, 82
USS protocol library, 413
reset to factory defaults, 147
LIFO, 328
type, 78
LN (natural logarithm), 264
using, 79
Local and expansion I/O addressing, 69
Modbus general
Local variables, 104
addressing, 434
Local/Partner connection, 358
advanced user information, 450
S7-200 SMART
Index
initialization and execution time for Modbus entering jog parameters, 500
protocol, 433 entering maximum start and stop speed, 499
library features, 431 mapping the I/O, 495
requirements for using Modbus instructions, 432 Motion features, 490
Modbus master phasing, 497
example program, 448 polarity, 498
execution error codes, 442 Motion control panel, 535
MBUS_CTRL (initialize master communication), 437 displaying and controlling the operation of axes, 537
MBUS_MSG (send message from master), 438 displaying and modifying the configuration of
using Modbus master instructions, 436 axes, 542
Modbus slave displaying the profile configuration for the axes, 542
execution error codes, 448 Motion inputs and outputs
MBUS_INIT (initialize slave communication), 445 CPU, 490
MBUS_SLAVE (slave response to master Motion instruction, error codes, 545
message), 446 Motion profile
using the Modbus slave instructions, 443 configuring, 487
Modules creating steps, 489
CPU CR40, 584 defining, 487
CPU CR60, 593 mode of operation, 488
CPU SR20, 570 Motion wizard
CPU SR30, 577 configuration/profile table, 547
CPU SR40, 584 maximum and start/stop speeds, 485
CPU SR60, 593 open loop motion control, 481
CPU ST20, 570 SM locations, 556
CPU ST40, 584 Mounting
CPU ST60, 593 DIN rail, 44
dimensions, 41 overview, 42
EM AE04, 613 panel, 43
EM AM06, 619 MOV_B, 296
EM AQ02, 616 MOV_BIR, 299
EM AR02 (RTD), 632 MOV_BIW, 299
EM DE08, 603 MOV_DW, 296
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 648 MOV_R, 296
EM DR08, 605 MOV_W, 296
EM DR16, 607 MOVB (STL-move byte), 296
EM DR32, 607 MOVD (STL-move double word), 296
EM DT08, 605 Move instructions
EM DT16, 607 block move (byte, word, dword), 297
EM DT32, 607 move (byte, word, dword, real), 296
SB AE01, 640 move byte immediate (read and write), 299
SB AQ01, 642, 643 SWAP (exchange byte data in a word), 298
SB CM01, 644 MOVR (STL-move real), 296
SB DT04, 637, 639 MOVW (STL-move word), 296
ST30, 577 MUL, 262
Motion control, (See Motion wizard) MUL_DI, 259
configuring reference point and seek MUL_I, 259
parameters, 502 MUL_R, 259
configuring the Backlash compensation, 501 Multiple scans, 464
configuring the input pin locations, 494
defining the motion profile, 504
entering acceleration time, 500
entering jerk time, 501
S7-200 SMART
Index
N ON (STL-OR NOT), 149

ONI (STL-OR NOT immediate), 151
Network communications, 26
Open loop control, 481
Networks (communication)
Opening earlier STEP 7-Micro/WIN projects, 90
addresses, 397
Operating mode
biasing and terminating the network cable, 403
changing to RUN, 36, 84
biasing cable, 404
changing to STOP, 36, 84
calculating network distances, 401
startup options, 128
general guidelines for building, 400
Operator stations, 85
network configurations, 395
Options
safety concerns, 400
STL status, 459
sample RS485 network configurations, 399
OR< (STL-OR compare real less than), 192
selecting the network cable, 402
OR<= (STL-OR compare real less than or equal), 192
single-master PPI, 399
OR<> (STL-OR compare real not equal), 192
types of communication, 22, 353
OR= (STL-OR compare real equal), 192
NEXT, 300
OR> (STL-OR compare real greater than), 192
Non-fatal error effect on run-time execution, 110
OR>= (STL-OR compare real greater than or
Non-fatal PLC errors
equal), 192
compile and run-time, 657
ORB (STL-OR byte), 294
Special Memory locations, 660
ORD (STL-OR dword), 294
Non-volatile memory, 78
Ordering information, 705
NOP, 161
ORW (STL-OR word), 294
Normally closed contact
OS<> (STL-OR string compare not equal), 196
immediate, 151
OS= (STL-OR string compare equal), 196
standard, 149
Output image register, 56
Normally open contact
Outputs
immediate, 151
coils, 158
standard, 149
example bit logic, 163
NOT (STL), 156
physical and in program, 55
Number value to string conversion instructions, 208
set and reset bits, 159
set and reset dominant bistable, 160
writing, 57
O
Overvoltage, 568
O (STL-OR), 149 OW< (STL-OR compare word less than), 192
OB< (STL-OR compare byte less than), 192 OW<= (STL-OR compare word less than or equal), 192
OB<= (STL-OR compare byte less than or equal), 192 OW<> (STL-OR compare word not equal), 192
OB<> (STL-OR compare byte not equal), 192 OW= (STL-OR compare word equal), 192
OB= (STL-OR compare byte equal), 192 OW> (STL-OR compare word greater than), 192
OB> (STL-OR compare byte greater than), 192 OW>= (STL-OR compare word greater than or
OB>= (STL-OR compare byte greater than or equal), 192
equal), 192
OB1, 87
OD< (STL-OR compare double word less than), 192 P
OD<= (STL-OR compare double word less than or
Password
equal), 192
lost or forgotten, 146
OD<> (STL-OR compare double word not equal), 192
privilege levels, 124
OD= (STL-OR compare double word equal), 192
Password protection, 124
OD> (STL-OR compare double word greater than), 192
PC/PPI cable, 402
OD>= (STL-OR compare double word greater than or
PID auto-tune
equal), 192
auto-deviation, 472
OI (STL-OR immediate), 151
auto-hysteresis, 472
OLD (STL stack-OR Load), 154
exception conditions, 475
S7-200 SMART
Index
prerequisites, 472 Profile table values

PV out-of-range, 476 PTO generators, 255
sequence, 473 Program block, 87
PID loop control Program control instructions
loop definition table, 468 END, STOP, and WDR, 312
PID Tune control panel, 476 FOR-NEXT loop, 300
PID loop instruction GET_ERROR, 313
alarm checking, 281 JMP-LBL, 301
loop control types, 277 SCR (Sequence control relay), 303
understanding, 274 Program editor
PID Tune control panel, 476 bookmarks, 453
Pin assignments for network connector, 402 debugging and monitoring, 456
Pipelining STL status options, 459
PTO pulses, 249 types, 94
PLC using, 30
clearing memory, 145 Program instructions
compile and run-time errors, 657 bit
fatal errors, 661 logic, 149, 151, 153, 154, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160,
information (hardware/firmware, error status, 161, 162, 163
run/stop event log), 109 clock, 165, 167
installation, 42 compare, 192, 196
installation on a panel, 43 convert, 198, 202, 208, 212, 215
memory card, 82 counters, 217, 220, 226, 238
non-fatal error memory locations, 660 interrupts, 282
system block, 115 logical operations, 293, 294
PLC menu math, 259, 262, 264, 266
Download, 75 move, 296, 297, 298, 299
Upload, 77 program control, 300, 301, 303, 312, 313
PLS shift and rotate, 315, 317
instruction, 247 string, 322, 323
Special Memory to monitor and control PTO and subroutine, 346, 347
PWM outputs, 678 table, 326, 328, 330
Pointer table find, 331
creating pointers and using indirect address, 70 timer, 335, 344
example of pointer offset to access data, 74 Program status
example of pointer to access data in a table, 73 building a status chart, 460
Power interruption (PLC), 122 displaying in program editor, 456
Power requirements executing a limited number of scans, 464
calculating, 656 Programs
CPU, 39, 653 elements, 87
sample, 655 executing limited scans, 464
Power supply, 39, 653 interrupt routines, 88
PPI communication memory card, 82
changing to Freeport mode, 180 status charts, 460
multi-master and multi-slave PPI networks, 399 subroutines, 87
port configuration in system block, 117 Projects
single-master networks, 399 opening previous STEP 7-Micro/WIN projects, 90
Previous STEP 7-Micro/WIN projects, 90 Proportional term, PID algorithm, 276
PROFIBUS Protection class, 568
DP device, 372 Protocols
S7-200 SMART EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP, 373
module, 373
S7-200 SMART
Index
PTO0, PWM0, PTO1, PWM1, PTO2, and PWM2 high- Restoring data after power-on, 84
speed outputs (SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, RET, 346
SMB176-SMB179, and SMB566-SMB579), 678 Retentive memory, 78
Pulse catch bits, digital input configuration in system Retentive ranges, system block configuration, 122
block, 120 RETI, 282
Pulse train output (PTO) RI (STL-Reset immediate), 159
cycle time, 249 ROUND, 198
instruction, 148 RS (LAD/FBD Reset dominant bistable), 160
pulse output instruction (PLS), 247 RS232, 410
Pulse width modulation (PWM) Freeport mode, 409
cycle time, 251 number of communication connections, 354
instruction, 148 types of communication, 22, 353
output, 482, 482 RS485
pulse output instruction (PLS), 247 communication overview, 395
pulse outputs, 484 communication ports configuration, 117
PUT, 170 number of communication connections, 354
PWM wizard sample network configurations, 399
PWMx_RUN subroutine, 484 setting baud rate and port network address, 397
PWMx_RUN, 484 types of communication, 22, 353
RTA, 202
RTD analog inputs
Q coefficient, 134
rejection, 134
Queue interrupt overflow (SMB4), 670
resistor, 134
quick access toolbar, 23
RTD type, 134
scale, 134
smoothing, 134
R
system block configuration, 134
R (STL-Reset), 159 RTS (STL-Real to string), 208
-R (STL-Subtract real), 259 RUN mode, 36, 84
R_S, 208 RUN to STOP transition
Rated voltages, 568 analog output states, 132
RCV (receive message control SMB86-SMB94 and digital output states, 121
SMB186-SMB194), 681 Run-time and PLC compile errors, 657
READ_RTC, 165
READ_RTCX, 167
Real number values, 68 S
Receive instruction
S (STL-Set), 159
break detection, 185
S_DI, 212
end character detection, 186
S_I, 212
end conditions, 183
S_R, 212
idle line detection, 183
S7-200 SMART
intercharacter timer, 186
as PROFIBUS slave device, 374
maximum character count, 188
Safety circuits, 85
message timer, 187
Sample control program, 29
parity errors, 188
Sample network configurations, RS485 devices, 399
start character detection, 184
Saving project, 34
user termination, 188
SB (signal board) hardware/firmware ID (SMB1050-
Relay electrical service life, 569
SMB1099), 688
Repeaters, 401
Scan cycle
Reset-to-factory-defaults memory card, 147
executing a single scan, 464
Restore-to-factory-defaults memory card, 78
S7-200 SMART
Index
executing multiple scans, 464 SLW (STL-Shift left word), 315

scan times (SMW22-SMW26), 673 SM (Special memory) assignments and functions, 665
SCR, 303 SM locations (Axis of Motion), 556
SCRE, 303 SM memory, PTO/PWM operation, 252
SCRT, 303 SMB0 system status bits, 667
Security, 124 SMB1 instruction execution status bits, 668
SEG, 198 SMB1000-SMB1049 CPU hardware/firmware ID, 688
Selecting the network cable, 402 SMB1050-SMB1099 SB (signal board)
Service and support, 3 hardware/firmware ID, 688
Set and reset dominant bistable instructions, 160 SMB1100-SMB1299 EM (expansion module)
Set and reset immediate instructions, 159 hardware/firmware ID, 689
SET_ADDR, 190 SMB130 port 1 configuration, 674
SET_RTC, 165 SMB136-145 (HSC3) high-speed counter 3, 675
SET_RTCX, 167 SMB186-SMB194 receive message control, 681
Setting the CPU type, 33 SMB2 Freeport receive character, 669
SFND (STL-Find string), 323 SMB28-SMB29 signal board ID and error
Shift and rotate instructions registers, 673
bit (SHRB), 317 SMB3 Freeport character error, 669
byte, word, dword, 315 SMB30 (port 0) and SMB130 (port 1)
SHL_B, 315 configuration, 674
SHL_DW, 315 SMB34-SMB35 time interval values for timed
SHL_W, 315 interrupts, 674
SHR_B, 315 SMB36-45 (HSC0) high-speed counter 0, 675
SHR_DW, 315 SMB4 interrupt queue overflow, run-time program
SHR_W, 315 error, interrupts enabled, Freeport transmitter idle,
SHRB, 317 value forced, 670
SI (STL-set immediate), 159 SMB46-55 (HSC1) high-speed counter 1, 675
Siemens technical support, 3 SMB480-SMB515 Data log status, 685
Signal board (SB SMB5 I/O error status bits, 670
SB BA01 specifications, 646 SMB56-65 (HSC2) high-speed counter 2, 675
Signal board (SB) SMB566-SMB579: PTO2 and PWM2 high-speed
installing and removing, 47 outputs,
SB AQ01 specifications, 642 SMB600-SMB649 Axis 0 motion control, 686
SB AQ01 wiring diagram, 643 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, and SMB176-
SB BA01 wiring diagram, 646 SMB179: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1, and PWM1 high-speed
SB CM01 specifications, 644 outputs,
SB CM01 wiring diagram, 645 SMB66-SMB85, SMB166-SMB169, SMB176-SMB179,
SB DT04 specifications, 637 and SMB566-SMB579: PTO0, PWM0, PTO1, PWM1,
SB DT04 wiring diagram, 639 PTO2, and PWM2 high-speed outputs,
Signal board ID and error registers (SMB28- SMB6-SMB7 CPU ID register, 671
SMB29), 673 SMB86-SMB94 and SMB186-SMB194 receive
Signal boards (SB) message control, 681
analog output representation (current), 625 SMB8-SMB19 I/O module ID and error registers, 672
analog output representation (voltage), 625 SMW100-SMW114 System alarms, 684
input representation (current), 624 SMW22-SMW26 scan times, 673
input representation (voltage), 624 SMW98 I/O expansion bus - communication
Signal modules (SM) errors, 683
step response times, 623 Software debugging, 453
SIN (sine), 264 Special memory assignments and functions, 665
SIP_ADDR, 191 Special memory bytes
SLB (STL-Shift left byte), 315 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 385
SLD (STL-Shift left dword), 315
S7-200 SMART
Index
Specifications, (SB BA01) Starting

analog input representation (current), 624 startup options, 128
analog input representation (voltage), 624 STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART, 27
analog output representation (current), 625 Static IP information, 363
analog output representation (voltage), 625 Status
CE approval, 565 building a status chart, 460
contamination level, 568 displaying in program editor, 456
CPU CR40, 584 executing a limited number of scans, 464
CPU CR60, 593 Status error (timestamp mismatch), 663
CPU SR20, 570 Status LEDs
CPU SR30, 577 EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 386
CPU SR40, 584 STD (STL-Sub-string to double integer), 212
CPU SR60, 593 STEP 7-Micro/WIN (earlier versions), 90
CPU ST20, 570 STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART
CPU ST30, 577 connecting with the CPU, 28, 364
CPU ST40, 584 equipment requirements, 23
CPU ST60, 593 Ethernet port configuration, 363
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 566 RUN and STOP mode, 36, 84
EM AE04, 613 Steppers in motion control, 485
EM AM06, 619 STI (STL-Sub-string to integer), 212
EM AQ02, 616 STL
EM AR02 (RTD), 632 logic stack operations, 154
EM AT04, 626 status options, 459
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP, 648 STL editor, 96
EM DR08, 605 STOP (instruction), 312
EM DR16, 607 STOP mode, 36, 84
EM DR32, 607 analog output states, 132
EM DT08, 605 digital output states, 121
EM DT16, 607 writing and forcing outputs, 463
EM DT32, 607 STR (STL-Sub-string to real ), 212
environmental conditions, 567 STR_FIND, 323
general technical specifications, 565 String instructions
industrial environments, 566 copy substring, 322
insulation, 567 Find string / character, 323
overvoltage, 568 Strings
protection, 568 format, 68
rated voltages, 568 representation, 69
relay electrical service life, 569 SUB_DI, 259
SB AE01, 640 SUB_I, 259
SB AQ01, 642, 643 SUB_R, 259
SB CM01, 644 Subroutine instructions
SB DT04, 637, 639 Call parameter and return examples, 347
step response times (SM), 623 CALL, RET, 346
SQRT (square root), 264 Subroutines
SR (LAD/FBD Set dominant bistable), 160 Axis of Motion, 506
SRB (STL-Shift right byte), 315 element of user program, 87
SRD (STL-Shift right dword), 315 guidelines, 507
SRW (STL-Shift right word), 315 PWMx_RUN, 484
SSCPY (STL-Copy substring), 322 Support, 3
SSTR_CPY, 322 Suppression circuits, 52
SWAP, 298
Symbol table, 100
S7-200 SMART
Index
Symbols (symbolic addressing) programming tips and examples, 337

defining global symbols, 100 TON, TONR, TOF, 335
indirect addressing, 102 Timestamp mismatch (PC/PLC program
Synchronous updates (PWM instruction), 251 difference), 663
System alarms (SMW100-SMW114), 684 TODR (STL-Read time-of-day clock), 165
System block, 88 TODRX (STL-Read time-of-day clock extended), 167
BA01 battery signal board, 144 TODW (STL-Write time-of-day clock), 165
CPU configuration, 115 TODWX (STL-Write time-of-day clock extended), 167
digital input filters, 120 TOF (Off-delay timer), 335
IP address of CPU, 366 TON (On-delay timer), 335
password and security, 124 TONR (On-delay timer retentive), 335
RS485/RS232 CM01 communications signal Tools (options)
board, 143 execution status coloring, 456
RTD analog input module, 134 STL status, 459
startup options, 128 Tools menu
TC analog input module, 139 Motion control panel, 535
System status bits (SMB0), 667 PID Tune control panel, 476
Transmission rate, 401
Transmit instruction
T example, 189
transmitting data, 180
Table instructions
Troubleshooting S7-200 SMART hardware, 465
ATT, 326
TRUNC, 198
FIFO/LIFO, 328
FILL_N, 330
TBL_FIND, 331
U
TAN (tangent), 264
TBL_FIND, 331 Uploading programs, 77
TC analog input module, 139 User-defined libraries, 411
TC analog inputs USS protocol
rejection, 139 requirements for use, 414
scale, 139 USS protocol instructions
smoothing, 139 example program, 429
system block configuration, 139 using, 416
TC type, 139 USS_CTRL, 419
Technical specifications, 565 USS_INIT, 417
Technical support, 3 USS_RPM_x, 422
Terminal block connector, 48 USS_WPM_x, 425
Thermal zone, 38 USS protocol library, 413
Thermocouple calculating time for communications, 413
basic operation, 142, 629 execution errors, 428
cold junction compensation, 142, 629 protocol overview, 413
EM AT04 Thermocouple filter selection table, 630 requirements, 413
EM AT04 Thermocouple selection table, 630 using the library, 413
Timed interrupt configuration (SMB34-SMB35), 674 using the USS protocol instructions, 416
Time-of-day
clock instructions, 165
extended clock instructions, 167 V
protection for reads and writes, 124
V90 drives, 490, 521, 706
Timer instructions
Variable table, 104
BITIM, CITIM, 344
Vibration, 44
interrupts, 287
S7-200 SMART
Index
W WOR_W, 294
Word access, 61
WAND_B, 294
Word consistency
WAND_DW, 294
PROFIBUS, 376
WAND_W, 294
Writing values
WDR (watchdog timer reset), 312
outputs, 57
Wiring diagram
writing and forcing outputs in STOP mode, 463
EM AT04, 626
WXOR_B, 294
Wiring diagrams
WXOR_DW, 294
CPU CR40, 590
WXOR_W, 294
CPU CR60, 599
CPU SR20, 576
CPU SR30, 582
X
CPU SR40, 590
CPU SR60, 599 XORB (STL-XOR byte), 294
CPU ST20, 576 XORD (STL-XOR dword), 294
CPU ST30, 582 XORW (STL-XOR word), 294
CPU ST40, 590
CPU ST60, 599
EM AE04, 615
EM AM06, 622
EM AQ02, 618
EM AQ04, 618
EM AR02 (RTD), 636
EM DE08, 604
EM DP01 PROFIBUS DP module, 651
EM DR08, 606
EM DR16, 610
EM DR32, 611
EM DT08, 606
EM DT16, 610
EM DT32, 611
SB AQ01, 643
SB CM01, 645
Wiring diagrams
SB BA01, 646
Wiring guidelines
clearance for airflow and cooling, 38
DIN rail, 44
grounding, 50
grounding and circuit, 49
inductive loads, 52
installation, 37
isolation, 50
lamp loads, 51
separate the devices from heat, high voltage, and
electrical noise, 37
terminal block connector, 48
Wizards
high-speed counter (HSC), 226
Text Display, 21
WOR_B, 294
WOR_DW, 294
S7-200 SMART
Index
S7-200 SMART

S7-200 SMART System Manual V2.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S7-200 SMART System Manual V2.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S7-200 SMART System Manual V2.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S7-200 SMART ___________________

Siemens AG A5E03822230-AC Copyright Siemens AG 2015.

Purpose of the manual

Required basic knowledge

Scope of the manual

Certification, CE label and other standards

Service and support

4 PLC concepts .......................................................................................................................................... 55

6 PLC device configuration ....................................................................................................................... 115

7.5.3 Number value to ASCII string conversion ............................................................................ 208

7.14.2 Shift register bit .....................................................................................................................317

8.6 RS485 .................................................................................................................................. 395

9.3.3.4 Modbus slave execution error codes ....................................................................................448

12.6.7 AXISx_LDOFF subroutine.................................................................................................... 514

A.2.3.3 CPU ST40, SR40 and CR40 wiring diagrams ......................................................................590

D Special memory (SM) and system symbol names ................................................................................. 665

E References ............................................................................................................................................ 693

1.1 S7-200 SMART CPU

LEDs for the I/O

Table 1- 1 S7-200 SMART CPUs

Table 1- 2 Compact non-expandable CPUs

Features CPU CR40 CPU CR60

Expansion modules None None

Table 1- 3 Standard expandable CPUs

1.2 S7-200 SMART expansion modules

Table 1- 4 Expansion modules and signal boards

Type Input only Output only Combination In/Out Other

Table 1- 5 Communication expansion modules

Module Type Description

1.3 HMI devices for S7-200 SMART

Table 1- 6 HMI devices

1.4 Communications options

1.5 Programming software

STEP7-Micro/WIN SMART provides a

Installing STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART

1.6 New features

2.1 Connecting to the CPU

Connecting power to the CPU

2.1.1 Configuring the CPU for communication

A CPU can communicate with a

2.1.1.2 Establishing the hardware communication connection

2.1.1.3 Setting up communication with the CPU

For "Found CPUs" (CPUs located on your local

For "Added CPUs" (CPUs on the local or remote

After you have established communication with

If STEP 7-Micro/WIN SMART does not find your

2.2 Creating the sample program

LAD/FBD STL Description

Network 2 Comparison becomes true at a rate that is visible

Notice the project tree and the pro-

2.2.1 Network 1: Starting the timer

Network 1: Starting the timer

When M0.0 is off (0), this contact turns

To enter the contact for M0.0:

To enter the timer instruction for T33:

2.2.2 Network 2: Turning the output on

Network 2: Turning the output on

When the timer value for T33 is great-

To enter the Compare instruction:

To enter the instruction for turning on output M10.0: